B0193ac U

B0193AC
REV U
I/A Series®
System Equipment Installation
October 4, 2002
Fan Assembly (vented enclosures)
2xMMS
Mounting
Structure
50 Series Model
51D Processor
50 Series Model
51E Processor
Filter DIN Rail

Assembly
(vented
enclosures)
10BaseT
A-, B-, and
(Twisted-Pair)
D-Size Modules
50 Series Model 51B/51B1/51C
DNBT
Processors (2 shown)
Foxboro, FOXNET, FOXWATCH, I/A Series, INTERSPEC, SINGLE STATION MICRO, SPEC 200,
SPECTRUM, TankExpert, and UFM are trademarks of Invensys Systems, Inc.
Invensys is a trademark of Invensys plc.
3Com and EtherLink are registered trademarks of 3Com Corporation.
Adaptec is a trademark of Adaptec Inc.
Allen-Bradley, Data Highway, Data HighwayPlus and PLC are trademarks of Allen-Bradley Company.
Burndy is a trademark of Burndy Corp.
DeskJet, HP, InkJet and PCL are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.
DigiBoard is a trademark of Digi International Inc.
Dual Pro Lightning and Quad Pro Lightning are trademarks of ColorGraphics Systems, Inc.
FOUNDATION is a trademark of the Fieldbus Foundation.
HART is a trademarks of Hart Communications Foundation.
Modbus and Modicon are trademarks of AEG Schneider Automation, Inc.
Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation.
PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems, Inc.
PowerMate is a trademark of NEC Technologies, Inc.
Profibus-DP are trademarks of PROFIBUS Users Organization (PNO).
Solaris and SPARC are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
All other brand names may be trademarks of their respective companies.
Copyright 1990-2002 Invensys Systems, Inc.

All rights reserved
Contents
Figures................................................................................................................................... xv
Tables................................................................................................................................. xxxi
Preface.............................................................................................................................. xxxiii
Hazardous Location Precautions (CSA Requirements) ........................................................ xxxiii
Revision Information .......................................................................................................... xxxiv
Referenced Documents ........................................................................................................ xxxv
1. Preinstallation ................................................................................................................... 1
Unloading ................................................................................................................................. 1
Unpacking Procedure ................................................................................................................ 1
Unpacking Hard Disk Drive ................................................................................................ 2
System Power Checks ................................................................................................................ 2
2. Equipment Mounting Procedures ..................................................................................... 3

Industrial Enclosures 16 and 32 ................................................................................................ 3
Industrial Enclosures 16 and 32, Cable Entry Information ................................................... 5
Industrial Enclosure 32, Optional Bridge Structure Assembly Procedure .............................. 6
Industrial Enclosure 16 or 32, Mounting Procedure ............................................................. 8
Field Enclosure 8, Mounting ................................................................................................... 11
Field Enclosure 8, Cable Entry Information ....................................................................... 12
Field Enclosure 8, Floor Mounting Procedure .................................................................... 12
Field Enclosure 8, Wall Mounting Procedure ..................................................................... 14
Field Enclosure 4, Mounting ................................................................................................... 16
Field Enclosure 4, Pipe Mounting ...................................................................................... 17
Field Enclosure 4, Wall Mounting ..................................................................................... 18
Metal Enclosure IEMFA/IEMFR and Termination Enclosure, Mounting .............................. 20
IEMFA Mounting Structure Areas ..................................................................................... 20
IEMFR Mounting Structure Areas ..................................................................................... 20
Metal Termination Enclosures ........................................................................................... 21
Metal Field Enclosure 8, Mounting ......................................................................................... 25
Metal Field Enclosure 8, Floor Mounting Procedure .......................................................... 25
Metal Field Enclosure 8, Wall Mounting Procedure ........................................................... 27
Over-Temperature Sensor Wiring ........................................................................................... 29
NEMA 4/4X Hardened Enclosures ......................................................................................... 31
Planning the Site ................................................................................................................ 31
Testing the Workstation and Monitor ................................................................................ 32
iii
B0193AC – Rev U Contents
Obtaining Tools and Parts ................................................................................................. 32

Tools ............................................................................................................................. 32
Hardware ....................................................................................................................... 33
Installation ......................................................................................................................... 33
Uncrating the Materials ...................................................................................................... 33
Leveling the Enclosure ........................................................................................................ 33
Connecting a Vortex Air Cooler ......................................................................................... 34
Connecting an Air Conditioning System ............................................................................ 34
Disassembling the Power Cable Port
(only on systems with an 8-position signal port) ............................................................ 35
Providing Power to the Air Conditioner ........................................................................ 35
Reassembling the Power Cable Port
(only on systems with an 8-position signal port) ............................................................ 36
Connecting the Power Cable to a Junction Box ............................................................. 37
Assembling the Signal Cable Port ....................................................................................... 37
Determining the Cables to Exit the Enclosure ............................................................... 37
Assembling the Signal Cable Port Assembly ................................................................... 38
Connecting the NEMA 4/4X Enclosure to a Power Source ................................................ 44
Disassembling the Power Cable Port ............................................................................. 44
Connecting the Power Cable to the 4-Position Power Strip ........................................... 45
Reassembling the Power Cable Port ............................................................................... 45
Connecting the Power Cable to a Junction Box ............................................................. 46
Installing the Processor and Modules into the NEMA 4/4X Enclosure ............................... 46
Connecting All of the Processor’s Cables ............................................................................ 48
Installing the Monitor into the NEMA 4/4X Hardened Enclosure ..................................... 49
Adjusting the Monitor ........................................................................................................ 50
Attaching the External Operator Input Device ................................................................... 50
Grounding Internal Equipment .......................................................................................... 51
Operation (NEMA 4/4X Hardened Enclosure) .................................................................. 51
Operating a Door .......................................................................................................... 51
Operating a Pointing Device ......................................................................................... 52
Operating a Keyboard ................................................................................................... 52
Disconnecting the 70 Series Processor’s Keyboard .............................................................. 53
Maintenance (NEMA 4/4X Hardened Enclosure) .............................................................. 53
Checking the Air Cooling System .................................................................................. 53
Maintaining a Vortex Cooler ......................................................................................... 53
Maintaining an Air Conditioner .................................................................................... 53
Mounting Structures ............................................................................................................... 54
1x8, 2x8 Mounting Structures ............................................................................................ 54
2x8 Mounting Structure ................................................................................................ 54
1x8, 2x8 Fieldbus Module (FBM) Mounting Structure ...................................................... 55
2x8 FBM Mounting Structure ....................................................................................... 55
1x12 Fieldbus Module (FBM) Mounting Structure ............................................................ 55
50 Series Modular Mounting Structures ............................................................................. 56
Printers – Placement and Mounting ........................................................................................ 59
VT100 Compatible Terminal, Placement and Mounting ........................................................ 59
Workstation Displays, Placement and Mounting .................................................................... 59
iv
Contents B0193AC – Rev U
Workstation Input Devices, Placement and Mounting ............................................................ 60

AP50/51, WP50/51, and AW50/51 Processors and Associated Data Storage Devices ............. 60
Dual Workstation Displays ................................................................................................ 61
Panel Display Station and A/M Station Mounting .................................................................. 62
Close Coupled Panel Display Station and A/M Station Installation ................................... 63
Separately Mounted Panel Display Station Installation ....................................................... 64
3. Power and Earth (Ground) Connections ......................................................................... 65

Main Power Connections ........................................................................................................ 65
Industrial Enclosure 16, Power Connections ...................................................................... 66
Industrial Enclosure 32, Power Connections ...................................................................... 69
Industrial Enclosure 32 (Structural Foam) Primary/Secondary Power
Distribution Options to MMS Structures ...................................................................... 72
Field Enclosure 8, Power Connections ............................................................................... 73
Floor-Mounted Field Enclosure 8, Power Connections ................................................. 74
Wall-Mounted Field Enclosure 8, Power Connections .................................................. 76
Field Enclosure 4, Power Connections ............................................................................... 77
I/A Series Metal Industrial Enclosures, Power Connection ................................................. 81
1x8 and 1x8 FBM Mounting Structure, Power Connections .............................................. 82
1x12 FBM Mounting Structure, Power Connections ......................................................... 86
B03/B04/B05 Enclosure Power Connections ..................................................................... 86
Peripheral Devices, Power Connections .............................................................................. 86
Panel Display Station, Power Connections ......................................................................... 87
Equipment Earth (Ground) Connections ................................................................................ 88
Field Enclosure 4, Earth Connections ................................................................................ 88
I/A Series Metal Enclosures, Earth Connections ................................................................. 89
Other Enclosures, Earth Connections ................................................................................. 89
50 Series ac Power Transfer Switch ......................................................................................... 91
External Memory Battery Backup and Status Tap ................................................................... 91
External Memory Battery Backup ....................................................................................... 91
External Status Tap ............................................................................................................ 91
Typical Enclosure Power Distribution ................................................................................ 92
External Memory Battery Backup and Status Tap Assembly Descriptions .......................... 93
External Memory Battery Backup and Status Tap Installation ............................................ 95
External Battery Backup and Status Tap Installation for 1x8 and
2x8 Mounting Structures ............................................................................................... 96
External Battery Backup and Status Tap Installation for 1x8 FBM
and 2x8 FBM Mounting Structures ............................................................................... 97
External Status Tap Connections ....................................................................................... 97
Status Connections to External Monitoring or Alarm Device ........................................ 97
Status Connections to a Fieldbus Module ...................................................................... 98
4. System Module/Processor Installation........................................................................... 101

50 Series, 70 Series, and Server 70 Module/Processor Installation ......................................... 108
Server 70 Processor Installation ........................................................................................ 108
50 Series and 70 Series Modules/Processors in a Modular Industrial Workstation ............ 109
v
50 Series and 70 Series Modules/Processors in a Modular Industrial Console ................... 109

50 Series and 70 Series Modules/Processors in a NEMA 4/4X Hardened Enclosure ......... 110
50 Series and 70 Series Modules/Processors in a MMS or 2xMMS .................................. 110
Installing the MMS into the Enclosure ........................................................................ 111
Installing the 2xMMS into the Enclosure .................................................................... 111
Installing the PDU Mounting Bracket (2xMMS in Metal Enclosure Only) ................. 114
MMS Module Configurations ..................................................................................... 115
2xMMS Module/Processor Configurations ................................................................. 116
Setting Up the Stop Clip Assemblies (If Necessary) ..................................................... 120
Depopulating the MMS or 2xMMS (for Modules Only) ............................................ 121
Installing the Processors in the 2xMMS ....................................................................... 124
Installing the 50 Series Modules and Mounting Hardware .......................................... 132
Installing Front and Rear Stop Assemblies (D-Size Modules Only) ............................. 138
Completing Installation for E-Size Processor ............................................................... 140
X- and Z-Module, General Installation Information ............................................................. 140
Rear-Mounted Fault-Tolerant Module Connector Installation ......................................... 141
Front-Mounted Fault-Tolerant Module Connector Installation ....................................... 142
Fieldbus Jumper Installation ............................................................................................. 144
X- and Z-Module Installation ........................................................................................... 144
Module Identifier (Letterbug) Installation ............................................................................. 145
Y-Adapter Installation ........................................................................................................... 148
Fieldbus Module Installation ................................................................................................. 149
Main and Expansion FBM Installation Considerations .................................................... 150
Fieldbus Isolator Module Installation .................................................................................... 151
5. Data Storage Device Installation and Cabling ............................................................... 155

50 Series Data Storage Devices, General Information ............................................................ 157
AP50/51-, and AW50/51-Based Data Storage Device Address Settings ............................ 157
AP50/AW50-, and AP51/WP51-Based Data Storage Device Installation and Cabling ..... 159
WP50/51-Based Data Storage Device Address Settings .................................................... 166
WP50/51-Based Data Storage Device Installation and Cabling ........................................ 167
AP20-Based Data Storage Devices, General Information ...................................................... 169
Accessing Jumpers in AP20-Based Data Storage Devices .................................................. 170
Accessing Jumpers in Modular (P-Adapter) Type Data Storage Devices ...................... 170
Accessing Switches and Termination Resistor Packs in Modular
150 MB Streaming Tape Drive ................................................................................... 171
Accessing Switches and Terminating Resistor Packs in Nonmodular
150 MB Streaming Tape Drive ................................................................................... 172
AP20-Based Data Storage Device Jumper Settings ........................................................... 173
Floppy Disk Address Selection, General Information .................................................. 173
Floppy Disk High/Low Density Selection, General Information ................................. 174
TEAC Model FD-55GFR-141-U/701-U Floppy Disk Jumper Settings ...................... 174
TEAC FD-235-HF 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive ......................................................... 176
TEAC Floppy Controller Jumper Settings ................................................................... 176
Installing AP20-Based Modular Data Storage Devices ...................................................... 178
120 MB Hard Disk Drive ........................................................................................... 180
vi
Cabling for AP20-Based Modular Type Data Storage Devices ......................................... 182
Terminating the AP20-Based SCSI Bus ....................................................................... 187
General Rules for AP20-Based Data Storage Device Installation ....................................... 188
6. Fieldbus and Nodebus Cabling...................................................................................... 191

Fieldbus Extension ................................................................................................................ 191
Local Fieldbus Extension, Cable Connections .................................................................. 192
Fieldbus Extension – An Alternate Cabling Method .................................................... 197
Remote Fieldbus Extension, Cable Connections .............................................................. 200
Fieldbus Configuration and Local Extension (1x8, 1x12, 2x8 FBM) ................................ 205
1x8 FBM ..................................................................................................................... 205
1x12 FBM Configuration ............................................................................................ 207
2x8 FBM ..................................................................................................................... 208
Nodebus Extension ............................................................................................................... 209
Local Nodebus Extension within an Enclosure ................................................................. 212
Local Nodebus Extension Between Enclosures ................................................................. 213
Nodebus Terminators Installation ............................................................................... 216
Nodebus Connectors Adapter Box (AK438AA) ................................................................ 217
Remote Nodebus Extension ............................................................................................. 218
7. Termination Cable Assembly (TCA) Installation .......................................................... 223

TCA Labels ........................................................................................................................... 224
2-Tiered Discrete Wire Block Connector ......................................................................... 224
3-Tiered Discrete Wire Block Connector ......................................................................... 225
Field Enclosure 4, TCA Installation ...................................................................................... 227
Other Enclosures and Structures, TCA Installation ............................................................... 229
Installation of Discrete Wire TCA .................................................................................... 230
Field Connections to Discrete Wire Block ........................................................................ 232
Installation of Plug Connector TCA ................................................................................. 233
Field Connections to Plug Connector Block ..................................................................... 236
8. Field Connections ......................................................................................................... 239

Classes of Field Wiring .......................................................................................................... 239
Field Wire Grouping Within the Enclosures .................................................................... 240
FBMs with Nonincendive Field Circuits .......................................................................... 242
Earthing (Grounding) of I/O Signal Shields .......................................................................... 242
FBM01 Field Connections .................................................................................................... 242
FBM07/FBM12 Field Connections ...................................................................................... 263
vii

FBM17A-D Field Connections ............................................................................................. 279
FBM20/21 Field Connections .............................................................................................. 289
Using the Cable Balun Module with Intelligent Transmitters ............................................... 331
Installing the Cable Balun Module ................................................................................... 332
Redundant FBM Operational Considerations ....................................................................... 333
Fail-Safe Parameter Configuration .................................................................................... 334
Operational Status Checks ............................................................................................... 334
FBM04, FBM06, FBM39, and FBM44 (Redundant Output),
and FBM05 and FBM46 (Redundant I/O) Maintenance Procedure ........................... 334
Manual Control of Redundant FBM Outputs .................................................................. 336
Redundant FBM Removal and Replacement .................................................................... 336
FBM Replacement using the Output Bypass Station ............................................................. 336
9. Peripheral Device Installation........................................................................................ 339

Peripheral Cable Routing within Enclosures ......................................................................... 343
Industrial Enclosures 16 and 32, Peripheral Cable Routing .............................................. 343
Floor-Mounted Field Enclosure 8, Peripheral Cable Routing ........................................... 344
Wall-Mounted Field Enclosure 8, Peripheral Cable Routing ............................................ 345
1x8 Mounting Structure, Peripheral Cable Routing ......................................................... 346
I/A Series Metal Enclosures, Peripheral Cable Routing ..................................................... 347
Server 70-Based Peripheral Device Installation Procedures for Current Processors ................ 347
AW/WP70, Style A- and AW70, Style B-Based
Peripheral Device Installation Procedures for Current 70 Series Processors ........................... 348
Setting the PC’s Voltage Selector Switch .......................................................................... 350
viii
Interface Card Installation Overview ................................................................................ 351

AW70, Style A Hardware Parameters .......................................................................... 352
WP70, Style A Hardware Parameters ........................................................................... 353
AW70, Style B Hardware Parameters .......................................................................... 353
Card Installation in GX-Based 70 Series Processors ..................................................... 355
Setting Up the CMOS BIOS in a 70 Series Processor .................................................. 359
Installing a PC-FB Card and Connecting to a Fieldbus .................................................... 359
Setting Jumpers on the PC-FB Card ............................................................................ 359
Connecting Fieldbus Modules to the PC-FB Card ...................................................... 360
Installing a DigiBoard ...................................................................................................... 361
Systems Without a DigiBoard ..................................................................................... 362
DigiBoard Jumper and Port Switch Settings ................................................................ 362
Connecting the DigiBoard to a Modbus for AW70s .................................................... 364
Configuring Sound ........................................................................................................... 366
Installing an Ethernet Card .............................................................................................. 366
Ethernet Card Jumpers ................................................................................................ 366
Ethernet Card Installation ........................................................................................... 366
Connecting WP70 to AW70 in a Stand-Alone System ................................................ 368
Installing an Allen-Bradley KTX Communication Interface Card .................................... 369
Setting A-B KTX ISA Communication Interface Card Jumpers .................................. 370
Connecting the AW70, Style A and AW70, Style B Processor to the
Allen-Bradley Data Highway ....................................................................................... 371
Video Function ................................................................................................................ 372
Single Display Configuration (On-board Video Function) .......................................... 372
Multi-Head Display Configuration ............................................................................. 372
Predator LT4 Video Card Monitor Connection .......................................................... 379
Printers – Connections to AW/WP70, Style A and AW70, Style B .................................. 380
Setting Up the Printer ................................................................................................. 380
GCIO Interface Module Cabling for 70 Series Processors ................................................ 382
Dual GCIO Interface Module Cabling ............................................................................. 382
AP50/51-, WP50/51-, or AW50/51-Based Peripheral Device Installation Procedures ........... 383
SBus Card Slot Usage ....................................................................................................... 388
AP50/WP50/AW50 SBus Card Slot Usage ................................................................. 388
AP51A/WP51A/AW51A SBus Card Slot Usage .......................................................... 388
AP51B/WP51B/AW51B SBus Card Slot Usage .......................................................... 389
AP51B1/WP51B1/AW51B1 SBus Card Slot Usage .................................................... 390
AW51C SBus Card Slot Usage .................................................................................... 390
PCI Card and Video Card Slot Usage .............................................................................. 391
AP51D, WP51D, and AW51D PCI Card Slot Usage ................................................. 392
AP51E, WP51E and AW51E PCI Card Slot Usage ..................................................... 393
Printers – AP50/51, WP50/51, or AW50/51 Application ................................................ 394
VT100 Compatible Terminal – AP50/51 or AW50/51 Application ................................. 403
Display and Alphanumeric Keyboard Connections .......................................................... 406
Dual Workstation Display Cabling .................................................................................. 415
Wiring for Second Video Card (AW51D/WP51D Processors) (P0971WF and P0972JR) .... 418
GCIO Interface Module Cabling for 50 Series Processors ................................................ 419
Dual GCIO Interface Module Cabling ............................................................................. 422
Touchscreen Cabling, WP50/51, AW50/51, WP70, or AW70 Application ..................... 423
ix
Mouse, Trackball, or Pointing Device, WP50/51 or AW50/51 Application ..................... 424

Annunciator and Annunciator/Numeric Keyboard: WP30,
WP50/51, or AW50/51 Application ................................................................................ 424
Keyboard Letterbug Address Setting ............................................................................ 425
Keyboard Horn Volume Setting .................................................................................. 427
Keyboard Auxiliary Horn Connection ......................................................................... 427
Keyboard Label Preparation ......................................................................................... 427
Keyboard Cable Connections ...................................................................................... 428
AP20-Based Peripheral Device Installation Procedures .......................................................... 429
B/W Dot-Matrix Printer 80, CMP10/AP20 Application ................................................. 429
Color Dot-Matrix Printer Installation .............................................................................. 430
Color PostScript Printer, CMP10 Application ................................................................. 431
Color PCL3 Printer, CMP10 Application ........................................................................ 432
VT100 Compatible Terminal, CMP10 Application ......................................................... 433
Graphic Controller Input Output (GCIO) Interface for WP30 ....................................... 435
21-Inch Workstation Display Cabling to WP30 .............................................................. 436
Mouse, Trackball, or Pointing Device, WP30 Application ............................................... 440
Alphanumeric Keyboard Installation (to 21-Inch Display GCIO) .................................... 440
Annunciator and Annunciator/Numeric Keyboard, WP30 Application ............................ 441
Keyboard Cable ........................................................................................................... 441
WP30 Multiscreen Common Link Configuration ........................................................... 442
Peripheral Device Operating Parameter Settings ................................................................... 444
Color Dot-Matrix Printer 132 Operating Parameters ....................................................... 444
B/W Dot-Matrix Printer 80 Operating Parameters .......................................................... 445
Color PostScript/PCL5 Printer (P0918FG/FH) Operating Parameters ............................ 446
Color PostScript Printer (P0971GD) Operating Parameters ............................................ 446
VT100 Compatible Terminal Operating Parameters ........................................................ 447
Modem Operating Parameters .......................................................................................... 449
10. System Communication Devices Cabling .................................................................... 451

INTERSPEC Integrator 30 and Translator ........................................................................... 452
INTERSPEC Integrator Translator Flunk Jumper ........................................................... 452
INTERSPEC Interface Cabling Connections ................................................................... 453
INTERSPEC Integrator 30 Translator Controls and Indicators ....................................... 455
Cabling for the I/A Series Integrator 30 for Modicon Programmable Controllers .................. 456
Connecting the Cabling for Integrator 30 for Modicon Programmable Controllers ......... 460
Cabling for the Modbus and Modbus Plus Devices ............................................................... 462
Cabling for the I/A Series Integrator 30 for
Allen-Bradley Programmable Logic Controllers ..................................................................... 462
Connecting the Cabling for Integrator 30 for Allen-Bradley PLCs ................................... 465
P0970VB Configuration Selector Switch Settings and Cable Conversion Tables .................. 467
Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 467
P0970VB Configuration Selector Switch Settings ............................................................ 468
Communication Processor or Gateway Cabling ............................................................... 468
Replacement Cabling ................................................................................................... 471
P0970VB Configuration Selector Switch Pinout ......................................................... 471
x
P0970VB Configuration Selector Assembly Kit ................................................................ 472

Installing the P0970VB Configuration Selector Switch .................................................... 472
Integrator 30 for Modicon Programmable Controllers – Cable Replacement ................... 474
Integrator 30 for Allen-Bradley PLCs – Cable Replacement ............................................. 474
Instrument Gateway Cable Replacement .......................................................................... 474
INI 15 Gateway Cable Replacement ................................................................................ 475
Device Integrator 30 Cabling ................................................................................................ 475
SPECTRUM Slave Gateway Cabling .................................................................................... 477
SPECTRUM Master Gateway Cabling ................................................................................. 479
Information Network Interface Cabling ................................................................................ 481
Dual Nodebus Interface Cabling ........................................................................................... 486
Converter Installation for DNBI (Model 51, Style E Processors Only) ............................. 487
Local Dual Nodebus Interface Cabling ............................................................................. 490
50 Series Local DNBI Cabling .................................................................................... 490
70 Series Local DNBI Cabling .................................................................................... 494
Medium-Distance Dual Nodebus Interface Cabling ......................................................... 495
50 Series Medium Distance DNBI Cabling ................................................................. 495
70 Series Medium-Distance DNBI Cabling ................................................................ 500
Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface Cabling ............................................................................ 501
Local Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface Cabling .............................................................. 501
50 Series Local DNBT Cabling ................................................................................... 501
70 Series Local DNBT Cabling ................................................................................... 503
Server 70 Local DNBT Cabling .................................................................................. 504
Medium-Distance Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface Cabling .......................................... 505
50 Series Medium-Distance DNBT Cabling ............................................................... 505
70 Series Medium-Distance DNBT Cabling ............................................................... 508
Server 70 Medium-Distance DNBT Cabling .............................................................. 509
Dual Nodebus Extender Cabling .......................................................................................... 511
Converter Installation for DNBX (Model 51, Style E Processors Only) ........................... 511
50 Series DNBX Cabling ................................................................................................. 513
70 Series DNBX Cabling ................................................................................................. 522
Server 70 DNBX Cabling ................................................................................................. 526
Second Ethernet Port (for 50 Series Products) ....................................................................... 528
X Terminal Cabling .............................................................................................................. 533
AW51B, WP51B, or AW51C Processor Connections ...................................................... 533
AW51B1 or WP51B1 Processor Connections .................................................................. 535
AW51D or WP51D Processor Connections ..................................................................... 537
AW51E or WP51E Processor Connections ...................................................................... 538
ATM 155 Mbps Fiber or Twisted-Pair Communications ..................................................... 539
Token Ring Interface ............................................................................................................ 542
Carrierband LAN Interface Cabling ...................................................................................... 544
AW51B/AW51C Direct Connection to Fieldbus .................................................................. 550
50 Series AW51 Direct Connection to RS-232-C Process I/O Devices ................................. 551
xi
Panel Display and Auto/Manual Station Interface Cabling ................................................... 553

Panel Display and A/M Station Fieldbus Cabling ............................................................. 557
Panel Display Station Cabling .......................................................................................... 557
Auto/Manual Station Cabling .......................................................................................... 558
Auto/Manual Station Grounding ..................................................................................... 560
Instrument Gateway Cabling ................................................................................................ 561
Hydrostatic Tank Gauge Interface Cabling ........................................................................... 562
Tank Processor 10 Fieldbus Cable Connections ............................................................... 564
Hydrostatic Interface Unit Fieldbus Cable Connections ................................................... 564
Mass Flowmeter Interface Cabling ........................................................................................ 565
Modicon Gateway 15 Cabling .............................................................................................. 567
Allen-Bradley Data Highway Gateway 15 Cabling ................................................................ 569
Device Integrator Cabling ..................................................................................................... 572
Allen-Bradley Station Cabling ............................................................................................... 574
DNBI to Allen-Bradley Station Cabling .......................................................................... 574
DNBX to Allen-Bradley Station Cabling ......................................................................... 575
11. Initial Power-Up Procedures ....................................................................................... 579

Pre-Power Switchon Checks .................................................................................................. 579
System Power Switchon ........................................................................................................ 580
Battery Connection in Memory Backup Power Module IPM06(A or D) .............................. 581
Over-Temperature Sensor Wiring ......................................................................................... 584
System Operational Checks ................................................................................................... 584
Server 70 and 70 Series System ......................................................................................... 584
50 Series System Operational Checks ............................................................................... 584
Series 20 and 30 System Operational Checks ................................................................... 585
Appendix A. Installation Checklist .................................................................................... 587
Appendix B. SCSI Bus Configuration Guide..................................................................... 589
Appendix C. Installation Instructions for Noncurrent 70 Series or Server 70 Workstations 591

70 Series Processors ............................................................................................................... 591
Server 70 Processor ............................................................................................................... 593
Determining the Type of Processor You Have ....................................................................... 593
Determining Non GX-Based 70 Series Processor Type .................................................... 595
Determining GX-Based 70 Series Processor Type ............................................................. 597
Determining Server 70 Processor Type ............................................................................. 598
Interface Card Overview ....................................................................................................... 599
Setting the CMOS BIOS in an 70 Series Processor .......................................................... 599
AW/WP70, Style A Overview (Pentium 166) ....................................................................... 600
AW70, Style A Hardware Parameters (P166) ................................................................... 601
xii
WP70, Style A Hardware Parameters (P166) .................................................................... 602

Card Installation in AW/WP70, Style A Workstations (P166) ......................................... 603
AW/WP70, Style A Overview (Professional PII 233) ............................................................ 605
AW70, Style A Hardware Parameters (Professional PII 233) ............................................ 606
WP70, Style A Hardware Parameters (Professional PII 233) ............................................ 607
Card Installation in AW/WP70, Style A Workstations (Professional PII 233) .................. 608
AW/WP70, Style A Overview (Enterprise 233) ..................................................................... 610
AW70, Style A Hardware Parameters (Enterprise 233) ..................................................... 612
WP70, Style A Hardware Parameters (Enterprise 233) ..................................................... 614
Card Installation in AW/WP70, Style A Workstations (Enterprise 233) .......................... 615
AW/WP70, Style A Overview (GXa 233) ............................................................................. 617
AW70, Style A Hardware Parameters (GXa 233) ............................................................. 617
WP70, Style A Hardware Parameters (GXa 233) .............................................................. 618
Card Installation in AW/WP70, Style A Workstations (GXa 233) ................................... 619
AW70, Style B Overview (PentiumPro 200) ......................................................................... 620
AW70, Style B Hardware Parameters (PentiumPro 200) .................................................. 620
Card Installation in AW70, Style B Workstations (PentiumPro 200) ............................... 621
AW70, Style B Overview (Professional PII 266) ................................................................... 622
AW70, Style B Hardware Parameters (Professional PII 266) ............................................ 622
Card Installation in AW70, Style B Workstations (Professional PII 266) ......................... 624
AW70, Style B Overview (Enterprise 300) ............................................................................ 625
AW70, Style B Hardware Parameters (Enterprise 300) ..................................................... 625
Card Installation in AW/WP70, Style A Workstations (Enterprise 300) .......................... 626
AW70, Style B Overview (GXa 300) ..................................................................................... 627
AW70, Style B Hardware Parameters (GXa 300) ............................................................. 628
Card Installation in AW70, Style B Workstations (GXa 300) ........................................... 629
Printer Connections in AW/WP70, Style A and AW70,
Style B Workstations (All Types) .......................................................................................... 629
Setting Up the Printer ...................................................................................................... 630
PC-FB Card Installation for AW70, Style A and AW70, Style B ........................................... 631
Setting Jumpers on the PC-FB Card ................................................................................ 632
Installing an Allen-Bradley KTX Communication Interface ISA Card .................................. 633
Setting A-B KTX Communication Interface ISA Card Jumpers ....................................... 635
Index .................................................................................................................................. 637
xiii
xiv
Figures
2-1. Industrial Enclosure 16, Mounting Structure Area ........................................................ 4
2-2. Industrial Enclosure 32, Mounting Structure Areas ....................................................... 4
2-3. Industrial Enclosure 16 or 32 Vented Type, Conduit Entry Points ............................... 5
2-4. Industrial Enclosure 16 or 32 Sealed Type, Conduit Entry Points ................................. 6
2-5. Optional Bridge Structure, Mounting Details ............................................................... 7
2-6. Optional Bridge Structure, Cover Panel Mounting ....................................................... 7
2-7. Industrial Enclosure 16 or 32, Vented Type, Conduit Enclosure Plate Assembly .......... 9
2-8. Industrial Enclosure 16 or 32, Sealed Type, Conduit Enclosure Plate Assembly ............ 9
2-9. Industrial Enclosure 16 or 32, Sealed Type, Top Conduit Enclosure Plate Assembly .. 10
2-10. Industrial Enclosure 16 or 32, Mounting Details ........................................................ 11
2-11. Field Enclosure 8 ........................................................................................................ 11
2-12. Field Enclosure 8, Conduit Entry Points ..................................................................... 12
2-13. Floor-Mounted FE8, Top and Bottom Conduit Enclosure Plate Assemblies ............... 13
2-14. Field Enclosure 8, Floor Mounting Details ................................................................. 14
2-15. Wall-Mounted Field Enclosure 8, Conduit Enclosure Plate Assembly ......................... 15
2-16. Field Enclosure 8, Wall-Mounting Details .................................................................. 16
2-17. Field Enclosure 4 ........................................................................................................ 17
2-18. Field Enclosure 4, Pipe Mounting Details ................................................................... 18
2-19. Field Enclosure 4, Conduit Enclosure Plate Assembly ................................................. 18
2-20. Field Enclosure 4, Wall Mounting Details .................................................................. 19
2-21. IEMFA Mounting Structure Areas .............................................................................. 20
2-22. IEMFR Mounting Structure Areas .............................................................................. 21
2-23. IEMFA/IEMFR and IETERM Enclosures .................................................................. 22
2-24. Location of Base and Plates ......................................................................................... 23
2-25. IEMFA/IEMFR and Termination Enclosure, Mounting Holes .................................. 23
2-26. Metal Field Enclosure 8 .............................................................................................. 25
2-27. Metal Enclosure 8, Bottom Panel Removal ................................................................. 26
2-28. Metal Enclosure 8, Bottom Panel Cable Entrance Area ............................................... 26
2-29. Metal Enclosure 8, Mounting Holes ........................................................................... 27
2-30. Metal Enclosure 8, Top Panel Cable Entrance Area .................................................... 28
2-31. Mounting of Metal Field Enclosure 8 to Wall ............................................................. 29
2-32. Over-Temperature Sensor Location – IE16, IE32, and Metal Enclosures .................... 30
2-33. NEMA 4/4X Hardened Enclosure .............................................................................. 31
2-34. Vortex Cooling System ............................................................................................... 34
2-35. Cross Section of an MDM (NEMA 4/4X Hardened Enclosure) ................................. 36
2-36. Signal Cable Port Template (NEMA 4/4X Hardened Enclosure) ................................ 39
2-37. Cables Passing Through the Signal Cable Port (NEMA 4/4X Hardened Enclosure) ... 40
2-38. Adapting an MDM to Fit a Cable (NEMA 4/4X Hardened Enclosure) ...................... 40
2-39. Lubricating an MDM Assembly (NEMA 4/4X Hardened Enclosure) ......................... 41
2-40. Mounting an MDM into the Signal Cable Port Frame
(NEMA 4/4X Hardened Enclosure) ............................................................................ 42
2-41. Tightening the Compression Unit (NEMA 4/4X Hardened Enclosure) ...................... 43
2-42. Example of a Completed Signal Cable Port (NEMA 4/4X Hardened Enclosure) ........ 43
2-43. Placing 50 Series Hardware on the NEMA 4/4X Hardened Enclosure’s Bottom Shelf 46
xv
B0193AC – Rev U Figures
2-44. Placing 50 Series Model 51, Style E Processor or 70 Series Processor

on the NEMA 4/4X Hardened Enclosure’s Bottom Shelf ........................................... 47
2-45. Positioning the Threaded Rods ................................................................................... 47
2-46. 1x8 FBM Mounting Structure .................................................................................... 54
2-47. 1x12 FBM Mounting Structure and Fieldbus Module Enclosure 60 ........................... 56
2-48. 50 Series Single-Height Modular Mounting Structure (MMS) ................................... 57
2-49. 50 Series Dual-Height Modular Mounting Structure (2xMMS) ................................. 58
2-50. Stacking 50 Series Devices ........................................................................................... 60
2-51. Dual Workstation Display Configuration ................................................................... 62
2-52. Close Coupled Panel Display and A/M Station, Housing Installation ......................... 63
2-53. Auto/Manual Stations, Housing Installation ............................................................... 64
3-1. Industrial Enclosure 16, Junction Box Location .......................................................... 67
3-2. Industrial Enclosure 16, Main Power Distribution ...................................................... 67
3-3. Industrial Enclosure 16, ac Main Power Connections ................................................. 68
3-4. Industrial Enclosure 16, dc Main Power Connections ................................................. 68
3-5. Industrial Enclosure 32, Junction Box Location .......................................................... 69
3-6. Industrial Enclosure 32, Main Power Distribution ...................................................... 70
3-7. Industrial Enclosure 32, ac Main Power Connections (Non-Redundant Power) ......... 70
3-8. Industrial Enclosure 32, ac Main Power Connections (Redundant Power) .................. 71
3-9. Industrial Enclosure 32, dc Main Power Connections (Redundant Power) ................. 71
3-10. IE32 MMS Power Wiring in IE32 Structural Foam Enclosure ................................... 72
3-11. Field Enclosure 8, Junction Box Location ................................................................... 73
3-12. Field Enclosure 8, Main Power Distribution ............................................................... 74
3-13. Field Enclosure 8, ac Main Power Connections .......................................................... 75
3-14. Field Enclosure 8, dc Main Power Connections .......................................................... 75
3-15. FE8, Extended Temperature Range Power Connections ............................................. 76
3-16. Field Enclosure 8 (Wall-Mounted) Power Cable Routing ........................................... 77
3-17. Field Enclosure 4, Junction Box Location ................................................................... 78
3-18. Field Enclosure 4, Main Power Distribution (Main and Separate ac Main Power) ...... 78
3-19. Field Enclosure 4, Main Power Distribution (Primary and Secondary Main Power) ... 79
3-20. Field Enclosure 4, Main Power Cable Routing ............................................................ 79
3-21. Field Enclosure 4, ac Main Power Connections .......................................................... 80
3-22. Field Enclosure 4, dc Main Power Connections .......................................................... 80
3-23. IEMFA and IEMFR and Metal FE8, Power Connections ........................................... 81
3-24. 1x8 and 1x8 FBM Mounting Structure, Junction Box Location .................................. 82
3-25. 1x8 and 1x8 FBM Mounting Structures, Main Power Distribution ............................ 83
3-26. 1x8 and 1x8 FBM Mounting Structures, ac Main Power Connections
(Non-Redundant Power) ............................................................................................ 83
3-27. 1x8 and 1x8 FBM Mounting Structures, ac Main Power Connections
(Redundant Power) ..................................................................................................... 84
3-28. 1x8 and 1x8 FBM Mounting Structures, 24 V dc Main Power Connections
(Non-Redundant Power) ............................................................................................ 84
3-29. 1x8 and 1x8 FBM Mounting Structures, 24 V dc Main Power Connections
(Redundant Power) .................................................................................................... 85
3-30. 1x8 and 1x8 FBM Mounting Structures, 125 V dc Main Power Connections ............ 85
3-31. Panel Display Station, Power Connections .................................................................. 87
3-32. Field Enclosure 4, Earth Connection Points ................................................................ 88
3-33. I/A Series Metal Enclosures, Earth Connection Point .................................................. 89
xvi
Figures B0193AC – Rev U
3-34. Field Enclosure 8, Industrial Enclosure 16 or 32, Earth Connection Point ................. 90
3-35. 1x8 Mounting Structure, Earth Connection Point ...................................................... 90
3-36. 20, 30, and 40 Series Modules, Typical Enclosure Power Distribution ....................... 93
3-37. External Memory Battery Backup and Status Tap Assembly
(For 1x8 and 2x8 Mounting Structures) ...................................................................... 94
3-38. External Status Tap Assembly (For 1x8 and 2x8 Mounting Structures) ....................... 94
3-39. External Memory Battery Backup and Status Tap Assembly
(For 1x8 FBM and 2x8 FBM Mounting Structure) ..................................................... 95
3-40. External Status Tap Assembly (For 1x8 FBM and 2x8 FBM Mounting Structures) .... 95
3-41. Locations of Points “A” and “B” Referenced in Other Figures ..................................... 96
3-42. Status Tap Connections to External Monitoring or Alarm Device .............................. 98
3-43. Status Tap Connections to Fieldbus Module (FBM) ................................................... 99
4-1. 50 Series Modules: A-Size and B-Size ........................................................................ 104
4-2. 50 Series Modules and Processors: C-Size and D-Size ............................................... 104
4-3. 50 Series Modules and Processors: E-Size, and F-Size ................................................ 105
4-4. X-Modules ................................................................................................................ 105
4-5. Z-Module ................................................................................................................. 106
4-6. Fieldbus Module ....................................................................................................... 106
4-7. Fieldbus Isolator Module .......................................................................................... 107
4-8. Attaching Power Outlet Assembly to 2xMMS for Metal Enclosures .......................... 112
4-9. Mounting the 2xMMS into the Metal Enclosure ...................................................... 113
4-10. Mounting the 2xMMS into a Plastic Enclosure ......................................................... 114
4-11. Installing the PDU Mounting Panel ......................................................................... 115
4-12. 2xMMS with 50 Series Modules and Processors ........................................................ 116
4-13. Maximum Number of Modules and Processors in 2xMMS in Metal Enclosures ....... 118
4-14. Maximum Number of Modules and Processors in 2xMMS in IE16/32 Enclosures ... 119
4-15. Installing Stop Clips on Stop Clip Assembly ............................................................. 121
4-16. Removing the A- or B-Size Module ........................................................................... 122
4-17. Removing Existing Spacer from Mounting Structure ................................................ 123
4-18. Spacer Assembly with Stop Clip Assembly ................................................................ 123
4-19. E-Size (Model 51, Style E) Processor Spacer Blocks for 2xMMS Installation ............. 125
4-20. Securing Spacer Blocks to 2xMMS in Metal Enclosure ............................................. 126
4-21. Securing Spacer to 2xMMS in Plastic Enclosure ....................................................... 126
4-22. F-Size Processor Spacer Blocks for 2xMMS Installation ............................................ 128
4-23. Securing a Spacer Block to 2xMMS in Metal Enclosure (for One F-Size Processor) .. 129
4-24. Securing a Spacer Block to 2xMMS in Metal Enclosure (for Two F-Size Processors) 129
4-25. Securing Spacer Blocks to 2xMMS in Metal Enclosure (for Three F-Size Processors) 130
4-26. Securing Spacer to 2xMMS in Plastic Enclosure (for One F-Size Processor) .............. 130
4-27. Securing Spacers to 2xMMS in Plastic Enclosure (for Two F-Size Processors) ........... 131
4-28. C-Size Processor and Retaining Plate Installation ...................................................... 132
4-29. Installing Divider into 2xMMS ................................................................................. 133
4-30. Connecting the Telescoping Rails ............................................................................. 134
4-31. Installing the Telescoping Rails in a 2xMMS ............................................................ 135
4-32. Initial Positioning of Spacer Assembly ....................................................................... 136
4-33. Securing Spacer to Lower Rails .................................................................................. 136
4-34. Attaching Spacer Assembly to Telescoping Rails ....................................................... 137
4-35. Mounting of 50 Series Module in Enclosure ............................................................. 138
4-36. 2xMMS, Showing Installation of Front Stop Assembly and Rear Stop Assembly ...... 139
xvii
4-37. Front Stop Assembly (Similar to Rear Stop Assembly) for D-Size Modules ............... 139
4-38. Rear-Mounted Fault-Tolerant Module Connector Installation ................................. 142
4-39. Front-Mounted Fault-Tolerant Module Connector Installation ................................ 143
4-40. Fieldbus Jumper Positioning ..................................................................................... 144
4-41. Module Identifier Assembly ...................................................................................... 147
4-42. Inserting Module Identifier into a Module ................................................................ 147
4-43. Y-Adapter .................................................................................................................. 149
4-44. 1x8 FBM Mounting Structure Connections .............................................................. 152
4-45. 1x12 FBM Mounting Structure Connections ............................................................ 152
4-46. 2x8 FBM Mounting Structure .................................................................................. 153
5-1. Setting SCSI Address on 50 Series Data Storage Device ............................................ 159
5-2. Examples of SCSI Cabling Configurations using D-Size Modules ............................. 160
5-3. Typical AP50, AW50 Data Storage Device Cabling (Nonmirrored Disk) ................. 161
5-4. Typical AP51A, AW51A Data Storage Device Cabling (Nonmirrored Disk) ............ 162
5-5. Typical AP50, AW50 Data Storage Device Cabling (Mirrored Disk) ........................ 162
5-6. Typical AP51A, AW51A Data Storage Device Cabling (Mirrored Disk) ................... 163
5-7. Typical AP51B/AW51B, AP51B1/AW51B1, or AW51C Data Storage Device
Cabling (Nonmirrored Disk) .................................................................................... 163
5-8. Typical AP51B/AW51B or AW51C Data Storage Device Cabling (Mirrored Disk) . 164
5-9. Typical AP51B1/AW51B1 Data Storage Device Cabling (Mirrored Disk) ................ 164
5-10. Typical AP51D/AW51D Data Storage Device Cabling ............................................ 165
5-11. Typical AP51E/AW51E Data Storage Device Cabling (Nonmirrored Disk) ............. 165
5-12. Typical AP51E/AW51E Data Storage Device Cabling (Mirrored Disk) .................... 166
5-13. Typical WP50-Based Data Storage Device Cabling ................................................... 167
5-14. Typical WP51A, WP51B, or WP51B1 Data Storage Device Cabling ....................... 168
5-15. Typical WP51D Data Storage Device Cabling .......................................................... 168
5-16. Typical WP51E Data Storage Device Cabling .......................................................... 169
5-17. Modular Type Data Storage Device, Bezel Removal .................................................. 171
5-18. 150 MB Streaming Tape Drive, Rear View ............................................................... 172
5-19. 150 MB Streaming Tape Drive, Configuration Jumper Block Settings ..................... 172
5-20. Floppy Disks Used with AP20, Typical Addressing Scheme ...................................... 174
5-21. TEAC Model FD-55GFR - 141-U/701-U Floppy Disk Drive Jumpers - AP20
(High Density) .......................................................................................................... 175
5-22. TEAC Model FD-55GFR - 141-U/701-U Floppy Disk Drive Jumpers -
AP20 (Low Density) ................................................................................................. 175
5-23. TEAC FD-235-HF 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Jumper Settings ............................. 176
5-24. TEAC Model 13332137-00F Floppy Disk Controller Jumpers ................................ 177
5-25. TEAC Model FD-235HS-1111 Floppy Disk Controller Jumpers ............................. 177
5-26. Peripheral Cable Connections, Dual 5.25-Inch Floppy Disk Drives .......................... 179
5-27. Peripheral Cable Connection Dual (3.5-Inch and 5.25-Inch) Floppy Disk Drives .... 179
5-28. 120 MB Hard Disk Drive ......................................................................................... 180
5-29. Peripheral Cable Connections, Modular 120 MB Hard Disk Drive .......................... 182
5-30. Peripheral Cable Connections, Modular Streaming Tape Drive ................................ 183
5-31. Peripheral Cable Connections, Application Processor 20 .......................................... 183
5-32. AP20 Installed at End of Chain, Example ................................................................. 184
5-33. AP20 with 120 MB Hard Drive ................................................................................ 185
5-34. AP20 Installed Inside Chain Ends, Example ............................................................. 186
5-35. P0900DB Terminator Module (Revision B) ............................................................. 188
xviii
5-36. Data Storage Device Overview, AP20 ....................................................................... 189

6-1. Local Fieldbus Extension, Typical Configuration ...................................................... 192
6-2. Remote Fieldbus, Non-Fault-Tolerant Control Processor
and Non-Redundant Fieldbus, Typical Configuration .............................................. 193
6-3. Remote Fieldbus, Non-Fault-Tolerant Control Processor
and Redundant Fieldbus, Typical Configuration ....................................................... 193
6-4. Remote Fieldbus, Fault-Tolerant Control Processor and
Redundant Fieldbus, Typical Configuration ............................................................. 194
6-5. Remote Non-Redundant Fieldbus with Mixed FBM and
Fieldbus Cluster I/O Cards Configuration ................................................................ 194
6-6. Remote Fieldbus, Fault-Tolerant Control Processors and
Fieldbus Cluster I/O Cards Configuration ................................................................ 195
6-7. Local Fieldbus Extension Cabling 2x4 or 2x8 Mounting Structure ........................... 195
6-8. Local Fieldbus Extension Cabling 1x8 Mounting Structure ...................................... 196
6-9. Local Fieldbus Extension Cabling 1x8 Mounting Structure to
2x4 and 2x8 Mounting Structures ............................................................................. 196
6-10. Local Fieldbus Extension Cabling, 2x4 or 2x8 Mounting Structure
to 1x8 Mounting Structure ....................................................................................... 197
6-11. Alternate FBM Cabling Method to One Other 1x8 Mounting Structure .................. 198
6-12. Alternate FBM Cabling Method to Multiple 1x8 Mounting Structures .................... 199
6-13. Remote Fieldbus Cabling, Non-Fault-Tolerant Control Processor
with Non-Redundant Fieldbus .................................................................................. 201
with Redundant Fieldbus (Control Processor End) ................................................... 201
with Redundant Fieldbus .......................................................................................... 202
6-16. Remote Fieldbus Cabling, Fault-Tolerant Control Processor
with Redundant Fieldbus (Control Processor End) ................................................... 202
6-17. Remote Fieldbus Cabling, Fault-Tolerant Control Processor
with Redundant Fieldbus .......................................................................................... 203
6-18. Notes – Remote Fieldbus Cabling ............................................................................. 203
6-19. TCA Termination Block Assembly Mounting ........................................................... 204
6-20. TCA Termination Block Removal ............................................................................ 204
6-21. Example of Extending Fieldbus in Two Directions from Control Processor .............. 205
6-22. 1x12 FBM Mounting Structure Connections ............................................................ 208
6-23. 2x8 FBM Mounting Structure .................................................................................. 208
6-24. Local Nodebus Extension within an Enclosure (Between the Previous Cell Bus
Configuration and the New Remote Cell Bus Configuration) ................................... 210
6-25. Local Nodebus Extension Between Enclosures, Typical Configuration ..................... 211
6-26. Remote Nodebus Extension Between Enclosures, Typical Configuration .................. 211
6-27. Local Nodebus within Enclosure, Cabling 2x4 or 2x8 Mounting Structures ............. 212
6-28. Local Nodebus Cabling within Enclosure, 1x8 Mounting Structure .......................... 213
6-29. Mounting Bracket Kit ............................................................................................... 215
6-30. Local Nodebus Extension Cabling Between Enclosure,
1- and 2-Cell Enclosures ........................................................................................... 216
6-31. Nodebus Terminator Ground Connections
for a 1x8 Mounting Structure – Example .................................................................. 216
6-32. Nodebus (Cell Bus) Adapter Box (AK438AA) ........................................................... 217
xix
6-33. Making Nodebus Connections and Mounting the Adapter Box (AK438AA)
to a 1x8 Mounting Structure ..................................................................................... 218
6-34. Remote Nodebus Extension, Cable Connections ...................................................... 219
6-35. Nodebus Termination Assembly, DIN Rail Version ................................................. 220
6-36. Nodebus Termination Assembly, Plug Connector Mounting Plate Version .............. 220
7-1. Termination Cable Assemblies (TCAs) ..................................................................... 224
7-2. Typical 2-Tiered Discrete Wire Block Label Definition ............................................ 225
7-3. Typical 2-Tiered Discrete Wire Block Connector ..................................................... 225
7-4. Typical 3-Tiered Discrete Wire Block Label Definition ............................................ 226
7-5. Typical 3-Tiered Discrete Wire Block Connector ..................................................... 226
7-6. Installation of TCA into FE4 .................................................................................... 228
7-7. Insertion of Module Identifier into Fieldbus Module Termination Connector .......... 228
7-8. Field Enclosure 4 ...................................................................................................... 229
7-9. Installation of Discrete Wire TCA (Typical) ............................................................. 231
7-10. Example of User-Inscribed Label ............................................................................... 232
7-11. Discrete Wire Connection, Block Wiring .................................................................. 233
7-12. Installation of Plug Connector in IE16/32 or FE8 Enclosure .................................... 234
7-13. Installation of Plug Connector in IEMFA/IEMFR Enclosure .................................... 235
7-14. Installation of Plug Connector Block in Metal FE8 Enclosure .................................. 235
7-15. Plug Connector Field Wiring Scheme, Typical Configuration .................................. 238
8-1. Field Enclosure 4 Field Wire Grouping ..................................................................... 241
8-2. FBM01 Functional Connection Diagram ................................................................ 243
8-3. Use of In-Line Resistors Assembly with FBM01, FBM04, or FBM05 ....................... 244
8-4. FBM01 Plug Connection Block Field Connections .................................................. 245
8-5. FBM01 TCA Labels .................................................................................................. 245
8-6. FBM01 0 to 20 mA Input Circuit ............................................................................. 246
8-7. FBM02 Functional Connection Diagram
(Connections for Discrete Wire or Direct Connection Block) ................................... 246
8-8. FBM02 Functional Connection Diagram (Connections for Plug Connector Block) . 247
8-10. FBM02 TCA Labels .................................................................................................. 248
8-11. FBM02 Thermocouple/mV Input Circuit ................................................................ 248
8-12. FBM02 2- or 4-Wire RTD Input/Out Circuit .......................................................... 249
8-13. FBM02 3-Wire RTD Input/Output Circuit ............................................................. 249
8-14. FBM03A, FBM03B Functional Connection Diagram ............................................. 250
8-15. FBM03A 3-Wire RTD, Plug Connection Block Field Connections .......................... 250
8-16. FBM03B 2- or 4-Wire RTD, Plug Connection Block Field Connections ................. 251
8-17. FBM03, 3-Wire RTD, TCA Labels .......................................................................... 251
8-18. FBM03, 2- or 4-Wire RTD, TCA Labels .................................................................. 252
8-19. FBM03, 3-Wire RTD Input/Output Circuit ............................................................ 252
8-20. FBM03, 2- or 4-Wire RTD Input/Out Circuit ......................................................... 253
8-21. FBM04 and FBM05 Input Connections .................................................................. 254
8-22. FBM04 Output Connections .................................................................................... 254
8-23. FBM04 Connections for Redundant Transmitters and Single I/P Using Combined
Output Channel ....................................................................................................... 255
8-25. FBM04, Non-Redundant, TCA Labels ..................................................................... 256
8-26. FBM04, Redundant AO, TCA Labels ....................................................................... 256
xx
8-27. 0 to 20 mA Input Circuit (FBM04) .......................................................................... 257

8-28. 0 to 20 mA Output Circuit (FBM04) ....................................................................... 257
8-29. FBM05 Connections for Single Transmitter and Single I/P ...................................... 258
8-31. FBM05 TCA Labels .................................................................................................. 259
8-32. 0 to 20 mA Input Circuit (FBM05) .......................................................................... 259
8-34. FBM06 Externally Powered and Internally Powered Transmitters to
Input Channels, and Output Channels to I/P ........................................................... 260
8-35. FBM06 Connections for Redundant Transmitters and Single I/P Using Combined
Output Channel ....................................................................................................... 261
8-37. FBM06 (Non-Redundant) TCA Labels .................................................................... 262
8-38. FBM06 (Redundant) TCA Labels ............................................................................. 262
8-39. FBM06 Pulse Input Circuit ...................................................................................... 262
8-40. FBM07/12 Functional Connection Diagram ............................................................ 263
8-41. Contact Input Circuit Rules, FBMs 7B/9C/9D/12B/14C/14D/17C/17D ............... 264
8-42. FBM07A/12A (Voltage Monitoring) Plug Connection Block Field Connections ...... 264
8-43. FBM07B/12B (Contact Sensing) Plug Connection Block Field Connections ........... 265
8-44. FBM07A/12A TCA Labels ....................................................................................... 265
8-45. FBM07B/12B TCA Labels ........................................................................................ 266
8-46. FBM07/12 dc Voltage or Contact Sense Input Circuit ............................................. 266
8-47. FBM08/13 Functional Connection Diagram ........................................................... 267
8-48. FBM08/13 Plug Connection Block Field Connections ............................................. 267
8-49. FBM08/13 TCA Labels ............................................................................................ 268
8-50. FBM08/13, 120/240 V ac Digital Input Circuit ....................................................... 268
8-51. FBMs 09A/09B/14A/14B Functional Connection Diagrams ................................... 269
8-52. FBMs 09C/09D/14C/14D, Functional Connection Diagrams ................................. 270
8-53. FBM09A/14A (Voltage Monitoring/0.5 A) Plug Connection Block
Field Connections ..................................................................................................... 270
8-54. FBM09B/14B (Voltage Monitoring/10 mA) Plug Connection Block
8-55. FBM09C/14C (Contact Sensing/0.5 A) Plug Connection Block Field Connections . 271
8-56. FBM09D/14D (Contact Sensing/10 mA) Plug Connection Block
8-57. FBM09A/09B/14A/14B TCA Labels ........................................................................ 272
8-58. FBM09C/09D/14C/14D TCA Labels ...................................................................... 273
8-60. FBM09/14 dc Digital Output Switching Circuit ...................................................... 274
8-63. FBM10/15 TCA Labels ............................................................................................ 275
8-65. FBM10/15, 120/240 V ac Digital Output Circuit .................................................... 276
8-68. FBM11/16 TCA Labels ............................................................................................ 278
8-70. FBM11/16, 120/240 V ac Digital Output Circuit .................................................... 278
xxi
8-71. FBM17A-D Functional Connection Diagram .......................................................... 280

8-72. FBM17A (P0700DZ, Voltage Monitoring/0.5 A)
Plug Connection Block Field Connections ................................................................ 281
8-73. FBM17A (DM700DZ, Voltage Monitoring/0.5 A)
8-74. FBM17B (P0700KS, Voltage Monitoring/10 mA)
8-75. FBM17B (DM700KS, Voltage Monitoring/10 mA)
8-76. FBM17C (Contact Sensing/0.5 A) Plug Connection Block Field Connections ......... 283
8-77. FBM17D (Contact Sensing/10 mA) Plug Connection Block Field Connections ...... 283
8-78. FBM17 Discrete Wire TCA Labels ........................................................................... 284
8-79. FBM17A Direct Connection TCA Labels ................................................................. 285
8-80. FBM17B Direct Connection TCA Labels ................................................................. 285
8-81. FBM17C/D Direct Connection TCA Labels ............................................................ 286
8-82. FBM17 dc Voltage or Contact Sense Input Circuit ................................................... 286
8-83. FBM17 dc Digital Output Switching Circuit ............................................................ 287
8-84. FBM17 0 to 10 V dc Analog Output Circuit ............................................................ 287
8-85. FBM17 0 to 10 V dc Analog Input Circuit ............................................................... 287
8-86. FBM18 Functional Connection Diagram ................................................................ 288
8-88. FBM18 IT TCA Labels ............................................................................................. 289
8-89. FBM18 Intelligent Transmitter Interface Circuit ...................................................... 289
8-90. FBM20/21 Functional Connection Diagram ............................................................ 290
8-92. FBM20/21 TCA Labels ............................................................................................ 291
8-93. FBM20/21 120/240 V ac Digital Input Circuit ........................................................ 291
8-94. FBM22 Functional Connection Diagram (Meter Indicates Output Drive Signal) .... 292
8-95. FBM22 Functional Connection Diagram (Meter Indicates Input Feedback Signal) .. 292
8-97. FBM22 TCA Labels .................................................................................................. 293
8-98. FBM22 0 to 20 mA Input Circuit ............................................................................. 294
8-99. FBM22 0 to 20 mA Output Circuit .......................................................................... 294
8-100. FBM24/25 Functional Connection Diagrams .......................................................... 295
8-101. Contact Input Circuit Rules, FBM 24B/24C/25B/25C/26B/26C/27B/27C ............ 296
8-104. FBM24C/25C (Contact Sensing with External Power)
8-105. FBM24A/25A TCA Labels ....................................................................................... 298
8-106. FBM24B/25B TCA Labels ........................................................................................ 299
8-107. FBM24C/25C TCA Labels ....................................................................................... 299
8-108. FBM24/25 dc Digital Voltage Input Circuit ............................................................. 300
8-109. FBM24/25 Contact Sense Input Circuit ................................................................... 300
8-110. FBM26/27 Functional Connection Diagrams .......................................................... 301
xxii
8-113. FBM26C/27C (Contact Sensing with External Power)

8-114. FBM26A/27A TCA Labels ....................................................................................... 303
8-115. FBM26B/27B TCA Labels ........................................................................................ 304
8-116. FBM26C/27C TCA Labels ....................................................................................... 304
8-117. FBM26/27 dc Digital Voltage Input Circuit ............................................................. 305
8-118. FBM26/27 Contact Sense Input Circuit ................................................................... 305
8-120. FBM33A/FBM33B Functional Connection Diagrams ............................................. 306
8-121. FBM33A 3-Wire RTD, Plug Connection Block Field Connections .......................... 306
8-122. FBM33B 2- or 4-Wire RTD, Plug Connection Block Field Connections ................. 307
8-123. FBM03/FBM33, 3-Wire RTD, TCA Labels ............................................................. 307
8-124. FBM03/FBM33, 2- or 4-Wire RTD, TCA Labels .................................................... 308
8-125. FBM33, 3-Wire RTD Input/Output Circuit ............................................................ 308
8-126. FBM33, 2- or 4-Wire RTD Input/Out Circuit ......................................................... 309
8-127. FBM36 Functional Connection Diagram
(Connections for Discrete Wire or Direct Connection Block) ................................... 309
8-128. FBM36 Functional Connection Diagram (Connections for Plug Connector Block) . 310
8-130. FBM02/FBM36 TCA Labels .................................................................................... 311
8-131. FBM36 Thermocouple/Millivolt Input Circuit ......................................................... 311
8-132. FBM36 2- or 4-Wire RTD Input/Out Circuit .......................................................... 312
8-133. FBM36 3-Wire RTD Input/Output Circuit ............................................................. 312
8-134. FBM37 Output Connections .................................................................................... 313
8-136. FBM37 Termination Assembly ................................................................................. 313
8-137. FBM39 Functional Connection Diagram ................................................................. 314
8-139. FBM39 (Redundant AO) TCA Labels ...................................................................... 315
8-143. FBM41A/42A Plug Connection Block Field Connections ........................................ 317
8-144. FBM41C/42C Plug Connection Block Field Connections ........................................ 318
8-145. FBM41/42 Discrete Wire TCA Labels ...................................................................... 318
8-146. FBM41/42 Direct Connect TCA Labels ................................................................... 319
8-149. FBM43 Functional Connection Diagram ................................................................. 320
8-150. FBM43/44/46 Connections, Multiple Loops Connected to a Common
External Power Supply .............................................................................................. 321
8-152. FBM01/43 TCA Labels ............................................................................................ 322
8-155. FBM44 Functional Connection Diagram, Input Connections .................................. 324
8-156. FBM44 Functional Diagram, Output Connections .................................................. 324
8-157. FBM44 Functional Connections for Redundant Transmitters and Single I/P Using
Combined Output Channel ...................................................................................... 325
xxiii

8-159. FBM44 (Redundant AO) TCA Labels ...................................................................... 326
8-160. FBM04/44 (Non-Redundant AO) TCA Labels ........................................................ 326
8-163. FBM46 Functional Connection Diagram, Input Connections .................................. 328
8-164. FBM46 Functional Diagram, Output Connections .................................................. 329
8-165. FBM46 Redundant I/O Cable Connections (TCA P0950DF) ................................. 329
8-167. FBM46 IT/AO TCA Labels ...................................................................................... 330
8-170. Cable Balun Module with Intelligent Transmitters Powered by a
Common Power Supply ............................................................................................ 332
8-171. Installing the Cable Balun Module ............................................................................ 333
8-172. Cable Assembly P0912MP ........................................................................................ 335
8-173. Connection of Output Bypass Stations to FBM ........................................................ 337
9-1. Industrial Enclosure 16 and 32, Peripheral Cable Routing ........................................ 344
9-2. Wall Mounted Field Enclosure 8, Peripheral Cable Routing ..................................... 346
9-3. Stand-Alone 1x8 Mounting Structure Peripheral Cable Routing ............................... 347
9-4. Front Panel Layout for GX-Based 70 Series Processors .............................................. 349
9-5. 70 Series GX-Based Processor Rear Panel Layout ...................................................... 350
9-6. Card Slot Positions in the GX-Based 70 Series Processor’s Expansion-Card Cage ..... 357
9-7. Removing the Processor’s Cover and Expansion-Card Cage ...................................... 358
9-8. PC-FB Card Jumper Settings .................................................................................... 360
9-9. Connecting an AW70, Style A and AW70, Style B to a Local or Remote Fieldbus .... 361
9-10. Setting the DigiBoard Jumper Settings ...................................................................... 364
9-11. Connecting the DigiBoard in an AW70, Style A or AW70, Style B Processor
to a Modbus .............................................................................................................. 365
9-12. Modbus Port Pinouts (Controller to 9-Pin and 9-Pin Panel Connections) ................ 365
9-13. 3Com 3C509 and 3Com 3C900 Card Connectors ................................................... 367
9-14. WP70 Connected to AW70 via 3Com 3C900B PCI Ethernet Cards ........................ 369
9-15. Jumper Settings – Allen-Bradley 1784-KTX Communication Interface ISA Card ..... 371
9-16. AW70, Style A and AW70, Style B Processor Connection to Data Highway + via
Allen-Bradley Card .................................................................................................... 372
9-17. Setting Switch 8 on the Quad Pro Lightning V2 Video Card .................................... 374
9-18. Possible Configurations for Multi-Head Displays ...................................................... 375
9-19. Dual Pro Lightning V2 Video Card .......................................................................... 376
9-20. Quad Pro Lightning V2 Video Card ......................................................................... 376
9-21. Evolution 2 (Dual-Head) Video Card ....................................................................... 377
9-22. Evolution 4 (Quad-Head) Video Card ...................................................................... 378
9-23. Predator LT2 (Dual-Head) Video Card .................................................................... 379
9-24. Predator LT4 (Quad-Head) Video Card ................................................................... 379
9-25. Printer Cable Connections to AW70/WP70 Style A Processor .................................. 381
9-26. GCIO Cabling to AW70 or WP70 ........................................................................... 382
9-27. GCIO Devices for AW70/WP70 .............................................................................. 383
9-28. AP51A, AW51A, or WP51A Processor Rear Panel .................................................... 384
9-29. AP51B, AW51B, or WP51B Processor Rear Panel .................................................... 385
xxiv
9-30. AW51C Processor Rear Panel ................................................................................... 385

9-31. AP51B1, AW51B1, or WP51B1 Rear Panel ............................................................. 386
9-32. X Terminal Rear Panel .............................................................................................. 386
9-33. AP51D, AW51D, or WP51D Processor Rear Panel .................................................. 387
9-34. AP51E, AW51E or WP51E Processor Rear Panel ..................................................... 387
9-35. Printer Cabling to AP50, AW50 ............................................................................... 395
9-36. Printer Cabling to Stand-Alone AW51A ................................................................... 396
9-37. Printer Cabling to DNBI System-Connected AP51A, WP51A, or AW51A .............. 397
9-38. Printer Cabling to DNBX System-Connected AP51A, WP51A, or AW51A ............. 398
9-39. Printer Cabling to AP51B, WP51B, or AW51B ........................................................ 399
9-40. Printer Cabling to AP51B1, WP51B1, or AW51B1 .................................................. 400
9-41. Printer Cabling to AW51C ....................................................................................... 401
9-42. Printer Cabling to AP51D, WP51D, or AW51D ...................................................... 402
9-43. Printer Cabling to AP51E, WP51E and AW51E ...................................................... 403
9-44. VT100 Compatible Terminal Cabling to AP50, AW50 ............................................ 404
9-45. VT100 Compatible Terminal Cabling to Stand-Alone AW51A or DNBX
System-Connected AP51A/AW51A .......................................................................... 404
9-46. VT100 Compatible Terminal Cabling to DNBI System-Connected
AP51A/AW51A ........................................................................................................ 404
9-47. VT100 Compatible Terminal Cabling to AP51B/AW51B ........................................ 404
9-48. VT100 Compatible Terminal Cabling to AW51C, AP51B1, or AW51B1,
Stand-Alone or System-Connected ............................................................................ 405
9-49. VT100 Compatible Terminal Cabling to AW51D, or AP51D,
9-50. VT100 Compatible Terminal Cabling to AW51E or AP51E
9-51. Short, Direct Connection of 21-Inch Tabletop Display and Alphanumeric
Keyboard to WP51A/AW51A ................................................................................... 407
9-52. Connection of 17-Inch Tabletop Display and Alphanumeric
Keyboard to WP51B/AW51B ................................................................................... 407
9-53. Connection of 17-Inch Tabletop Display and Alphanumeric
Keyboard to WP51B1/AW51B1 ............................................................................... 408
Keyboard to WP51B/AW51B ................................................................................... 408
Keyboard to WP51B1/AW51B1 ............................................................................... 408
Keyboard to AW51C ................................................................................................ 409
Keyboard to X Terminal ........................................................................................... 409
9-58. Short, Direct Connection of 17-Inch, 20.1-Inch and
21-Inch Tabletop Displays and Alphanumeric Keyboard to WP51D/AW51D ......... 410
9-59. Short, Direct Connection of 20.1-Inch and 21-Inch Tabletop Displays and
Alphanumeric Keyboard to WP51E and AW51E ...................................................... 410
9-60. Remote Connection of 21-Inch Tabletop Display and Alphanumeric Keyboard to
WP50/AW50, WP51A/AW51A ............................................................................... 411
WP51B/AW51B and AW51C .................................................................................. 412
xxv
9-62. Remote Connection of 21-Inch Tabletop Display and Alphanumeric Keyboard

to WP51B1, and AW51B1 ....................................................................................... 413
to X Terminal ........................................................................................................... 413
to WP51D or AW51D ............................................................................................. 414
WP51E and AW51E ................................................................................................. 414
9-66. Connection of Optional Second Display to WP51A/B/B1/C and AW51A/B/B1/C . 416
9-67. Connection of Optional Second Display to WP51D/AW51D .................................. 417
9-68. Connection of Optional Second Display to WP51E/AW51E ................................... 418
9-69. Wiring for Second Video Card (AW51D and WP51D Processors) ........................... 419
9-70. GCIO Cabling to WP50/AW50 ............................................................................... 420
9-71. GCIO Cabling to Stand-Alone AW51A or DNBX System-Connected
AW51A or WP51A ................................................................................................... 420
9-72. GCIO Cabling to DNBI System-Connected WP51A/AW51A ................................. 420
9-73. GCIO Cabling to WP51B or AW51B ...................................................................... 421
9-74. GCIO Cabling to AW51C, WP51B1, or AW51B1 .................................................. 421
9-75. GCIO Cabling to AW51D or WP51D ..................................................................... 421
9-76. GCIO Cabling to AW51E or WP51E ...................................................................... 422
9-77. Typical Dual GCIO Workstation Cabling ................................................................ 423
9-78. Touchscreen Cabling, WP50/51, AW50/51, WP70, or AW70 Applications ............ 424
9-79. Mouse, Trackball, or Pointing Device Cabling, WP50/51 or
AW50/51 Keyboard Application ............................................................................... 424
9-80. Annunciator or Annunciator/Numeric Keyboard, Rear View .................................... 425
9-81. Letterbug and Horn Volume Select Switch Codes ..................................................... 426
9-82. Annunciator or Annunciator/Numeric Keyboard with Amplifier and Speaker .......... 427
9-83. Annunciator or Annunciator/Numeric Keyboard Label ............................................. 428
9-84. Annunciator and Annunciator/Numeric Keyboard Cabling, WP50/51, AW50/51 ... 428
9-85. B/W Dot-Matrix Printer 80 Cabling to CMP10 ....................................................... 430
9-86. Color Dot-Matrix Printer Cabling to CMP10 .......................................................... 431
9-87. Color PostScript Printer (P0912QJ) Cabling to CMP10 .......................................... 432
9-88. Color PostScript Printer (P0918FH) Cabling to CMP10 .......................................... 432
9-89. Color PCL3 Printer Cabling to CMP10 ................................................................... 433
9-90. VT100 Compatible Terminal Cabling to CMP10 .................................................... 434
9-91. Graphic Controller Input/Output Interface (GCIO) for WP30 (Rear View) ............ 435
9-92. 21-Inch Workstation Display/WP30 Cabling Overview ........................................... 436
9-93. 21-Inch Workstation Display Cabling to WP30 ....................................................... 438
9-94. 21-Inch Workstation Display Cabling to WP30 (Connection to Video Isolator) ...... 439
9-95. Mounting of Video Isolator on DIN Rail .................................................................. 439
9-96. Workstation Processor 30 Switch Settings ................................................................. 440
9-97. Alphanumeric Keyboard Cabling .............................................................................. 441
9-98. Connecting a Single Annunciator Keyboard to a GCIO (WP30) .............................. 441
9-99. Connecting Multiple Annunciator Keyboards to a GCIO (WP30) ........................... 442
9-100. Multiscreen Common Link Configuration Using Remote WP30 ............................. 443
9-101. B/W Dot-Matrix Printer 80, Operating Parameter Switch Settings ........................... 446
9-102. Color PostScript Printer (P0971GD), Operating Parameter Switch Settings ............. 447
10-1. INTERSPEC Integrator 30 Translator – Front Cover Removal ................................ 452
10-2. INTERSPEC Integrator 30 Translator Flunk Jumper Settings .................................. 453
xxvi
10-3. INTERSPEC Integrator 30 With Single Integrator and Translator ........................... 454
10-4. INTERSPEC Integrator 30 With Dual Translators .................................................. 455
10-5. INTERSPEC Integrator 30 Translator Controls and Indicators ................................ 455
10-6. Integrator 30 for Modicon Programmable Controllers –
(Non-Fault-Tolerant) Cabling .................................................................................. 457
10-7. Integrator 30 for Modicon Programmable Controllers – (Fault-Tolerant) Cabling ... 458
10-8. Integrator 30 for Modicon Programmable Controllers – Non-Redundant
Programmable Controller Modbus and Direct Cabling Configuration ...................... 459
Redundant Programmable Controller Modbus Cabling Configuration ..................... 459
Redundant Programmable Controller Direct Cabling Configuration ........................ 460
10-11. Integrator 30 for Modicon Programmable Controllers – (Non-Fault-Tolerant)
Cabling and Positions ............................................................................................... 461
10-12. Integrator 30 for Modicon Programmable Controllers – (Fault-Tolerant)
10-13. Integrator 30 for Allen-Bradley PLCs – (Non-Fault-Tolerant)
Non-Redundant Cabling .......................................................................................... 463
with Redundant Cabling ........................................................................................... 464
10-15. Integrator 30 for Allen-Bradley PLCs – (Fault-Tolerant)
with Non-Redundant Cabling .................................................................................. 464
10-16. Integrator 30 for Allen-Bradley PLCs – (Fault-Tolerant) with Redundant Cabling ... 465
10-18. Integrator 30 for Allen-Bradley PLCs – (Fault-Tolerant) Cabling and Positions ........ 467
10-19. P0970VB Cable Configuration Overview ................................................................. 467
10-20. P0970VB Configuration Selector Switch ................................................................. 468
10-21. Gateway 30 Y Connector (P0970VB Configuration Selector Switch) ....................... 471
10-22. P0970VB Configuration Selector Assembly Kit ........................................................ 472
10-23. Installing the P0970VB Switch (Top View) and D Cable ......................................... 473
10-24. Installing the P0500JX Cable(s) ................................................................................ 473
10-25. Integrator 30 for Modicon Programmable Controllers Replacement Cables .............. 474
10-26. Integrator 30 for Allen-Bradley PLCs Replacement Cables ........................................ 474
10-27. Device Integrator 30 (Non-Fault-Tolerant) Cabling ................................................. 475
10-28. Device Integrator 30 (Fault-Tolerant) Cabling .......................................................... 476
10-29. SPECTRUM Slave Gateway Cabling ........................................................................ 479
10-30. SPECTRUM Master Gateway Cable Connections .................................................... 480
10-31. SPECTRUM Interface Processor Cabling ................................................................. 481
10-32. Information Network Interface (INI) Cabling Configuration ................................... 482
10-33. Redundant INI Gateways, Non-Fault-Tolerant Configuration ................................. 484
10-34. Redundant INI Gateways, Fault-Tolerant Configuration .......................................... 484
10-35. Information Network Interface Cabling – P0911AT Adapter
Location and Assembly .............................................................................................. 485
10-36. Information Network Interface Cabling – P0911AT Adapter Jumper Settings .......... 485
10-37. Attaching the MII-to-AUI Converter to the MII Connector On
the Model 51, Style E Processor’s Motherboard ........................................................ 488
10-38. Connecting the MII-to-AUI Converter, SQE Eliminator, and AUI Network Cable . 489
xxvii
10-39. Securing the Cable Tie Around the AUI Network Cable,
SQE Eliminator, and MII-to-AUI Converter ............................................................ 490
10-40. Local Dual Nodebus Interface Cabling for AP50/WP50/AW50 ............................... 491
10-41. Local Dual Nodebus Interface Cabling
for AP51A/WP51A/AW51A or AP51B/WP51B/AW51B ......................................... 492
10-42. Local Dual Nodebus Interface Cabling
for AP51B1/AW51B1/WP51B1 or AW51C ............................................................. 493
10-43. Local Dual Nodebus Interface Cabling for AP51E/AW51E or WP51E .................... 494
10-44. Local Dual Nodebus Interface Cabling, AW70, or WP70 ......................................... 495
10-45. Medium-Distance Dual Nodebus Interface Cabling, AP50/WP50/AW50 or
AP51A/WP51A/AW51A .......................................................................................... 497
10-46. Medium-Distance Dual Nodebus Interface Cabling,
AP51B/WP51B/AW51B or AW51C ........................................................................ 498
AP51B1, AW51B1, or WP51B1 ............................................................................... 499
AP51E, AW51E or WP51E ...................................................................................... 499
10-49. Medium-Distance Dual Nodebus Interface Cabling, AW70, or WP70 ..................... 500
10-50. Local Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface Cabling, AP51D, AW51D, or WP51D ...... 502
10-51. Local Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface Cabling, AP51E, AW51E, WP51E ............. 503
10-52. Local Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface Cabling, AW70, or WP70 .......................... 504
10-53. Local Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface Cabling, Server 70 ...................................... 505
10-54. Medium-Distance Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface Cabling to
AP51D, AW51D, or WP51D ................................................................................... 507
10-55. Medium-Distance Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface Cabling,
AP51E, AW51E or WP51E ...................................................................................... 507
10-56. Medium-Distance Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface Cabling, AW70, or WP70 ...... 508
10-57. Medium-Distance Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface Cabling, Server 70 .................. 510
10-58. Attaching the AUI Network Cable to the MII-to-AUI Converter ............................. 512
10-59. Securing the AUI Network Cable to the MII-to-AUI Converter ............................... 513
10-60. Dual Nodebus Extender Cabling, AP50/WP50/AW50 ............................................. 515
10-61. Dual Nodebus Extender Cabling, AP51A/WP51A/AW51A ..................................... 516
10-62. Dual Nodebus Extender Cabling, AP51B/WP51B/AW51B or AW51C ................... 517
10-63. Dual Nodebus Extender Cabling, AP51B1, AW51B1, or WP51B1 .......................... 518
10-64. Dual Nodebus Extender Cabling with Ethernet Transceiver P0971YF Rev A,
AP51D, AW51D, or WP51D ................................................................................... 519
10-65. Dual Nodebus Extender Cabling with Ethernet Transceiver P0971YF Rev B,
AP51D, AW51D, or WP51D .................................................................................. 520
10-66. Dual Nodebus Extender Cabling, AP51E, AW51E or WP51E ................................. 521
10-67. RS-423 Cable Connections for 50 Series Workstation .............................................. 521
10-68. RS-423 Wiring Data for 50 Series Workstation ........................................................ 522
10-69. 3Com 3C509 Ethernet Card Connectors .................................................................. 523
10-70. Dual Nodebus Extender Cabling, AW70, or WP70 (Typical) ................................... 524
10-71. RS-423 Cable Connections for 70 Series Processor ................................................... 524
10-72. RS-423 Wiring Data for 70 Series Processor ............................................................. 525
10-73. 3Com 3C900B Ethernet Card Connectors ............................................................... 526
10-74. Dual Nodebus Extender Cabling, Server 70 (Typical) ............................................... 527
10-75. RS-423 Cable Connections for Server 70 .................................................................. 527
10-76. Optional Ethernet Port Cable Connections (SBus Card) ........................................... 531
xxviii
10-77. Typical Combined AUI/ThinNet Cabling ................................................................ 532

10-78. Fast SCSI/Buffered Ethernet SBus Card Back Panel .................................................. 532
10-79. Fast SCSI Plus Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet SBus Card Back Panel ............. 532
10-80. Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface plus Ultra-Wide SCSI PCI
Card Back Panel ........................................................................................................ 532
10-81. Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface PCI Card with
MII Connector Back Panel ....................................................................................... 533
10-82. X Terminal Cabling, AW51B, WP51B, AW51C, Using Fast SCSI/Buffered
Ethernet SBus Card ................................................................................................... 534
10-83. X Terminal Cabling, AW51B, WP51B, AW51C, Using Ethernet SBus Card ........... 535
10-84. X Terminal Cabling, AW51B1, WP51B1, Using Fast SCSI/Buffered
Ethernet SBus Card ................................................................................................... 536
10-85. X Terminal Cabling, AW51B1, WP51B1, Using Ethernet SBus Card ...................... 537
10-86. X Terminal Cabling, AW51D, WP51D (Twisted-Pair Connection) ......................... 538
10-87. X Terminal Cabling, AW51E or WP51E
Using Ethernet PCI Card (Twisted-Pair Connection) ............................................... 539
10-88. ATM 155 Mbps Fiber Cable SBus and PCI Adapter Card ........................................ 540
10-89. ATM 155 Mbps Twisted-Pair Cable SBus and PCI Adapter Card ............................ 541
10-90. Token Ring Interface Card (SBus) ............................................................................ 542
10-91. Token Ring Interface Card (PCI) .............................................................................. 543
10-92. Non-Fault-Tolerant CLI Cabling Configuration – Single LAN ................................ 544
10-93. Non-Fault-Tolerant CLI Cabling Configuration – Dual LAN .................................. 545
10-94. Fault-Tolerant CLI Cabling Configuration ............................................................... 545
10-95. Non-Fault-Tolerant Carrierband LAN Interface Cabling – Single LAN
(Using DIN Rail) ...................................................................................................... 547
10-96. Non-Fault-Tolerant Carrierband LAN Interface Cabling – Single LAN
(Using Mounting Plate) ............................................................................................ 548
10-97. Non-Fault-Tolerant Carrierband LAN Interface Cabling – Dual LANs (DIN Rail) .. 548
10-98. Non-Fault-Tolerant Carrierband LAN Interface Cabling – Dual LANs
(Using Mounting Plate) ............................................................................................ 549
10-99. Fault-Tolerant Carrierband LAN IF Cabling – Dual LANs (Using DIN Rail) .......... 549
10-100.Fault-Tolerant Carrierband LAN IF Cabling – Dual LANs (Using Mounting Plate) 550
10-101.Direct Connection of AW51B or AW51C to Fieldbus ............................................. 551
10-102.Direct Connection of AW51B/AW51C/AW51D/AW51E to
RS-232-C Process I/O Devices .................................................................................. 552
10-103.Panel Display and A/M Station Cabling, NFT Processor, NRD Fieldbus ................. 554
10-104.Panel Display and A/M Station Cabling, NFT Processor,
NRD Fieldbus (Continued) ...................................................................................... 554
10-105.Panel Display and A/M Station Cabling, NFT Processor, RD Fieldbus .................... 555
10-106.Panel Display and A/M Station Cabling, NFT Processor, RD Fieldbus (Continued) 555
10-107.Panel Display and A/M Station Cabling, FT Processor, RD Fieldbus ....................... 556
10-108.Panel Display and A/M Station Cabling, FT Processor, RD Fieldbus (Continued) ... 556
10-109.Interenclosure Cabling For Panel Display Stations .................................................... 557
10-110.Panel Display Station Cable Connections ................................................................. 558
10-111.A/M Station Cabling Using Plug/Discrete Wire Termination ................................... 559
10-112.A/M Station Cables/Length ...................................................................................... 559
10-113.A/M Station Cabling Using Plug Connector Termination ........................................ 560
10-114.Instrument Gateway Cabling .................................................................................... 562
xxix
10-115.HTG IF Cabling with Non-Redundant Fieldbus ...................................................... 563

10-116.HTG IF Cabling with Redundant Fieldbus .............................................................. 563
10-117.HIU Fieldbus Cabling Connections .......................................................................... 564
10-118.HIU Fieldbus Termination Box Wiring – Non-Redundant Fieldbus Configuration . 564
10-119.HIU Fieldbus Termination Box Wiring – Redundant Fieldbus Configuration ......... 565
10-120.Mass Flowmeter Interface Cabling with Non-Redundant Fieldbus ........................... 566
10-121.Mass Flowmeter Interface Cabling with Redundant Fieldbus ................................... 566
10-122.Modicon Gateway 15 Cabling (Modbus and Direct Configurations) ........................ 567
10-123.Modicon Gateway 15 Cabling (Typical Redundant Configuration) .......................... 568
10-124.Modicon Gateway Cabling Connections .................................................................. 569
10-125.AB Gateway 15 Cabling (Non-Redundant) Functional Diagram .............................. 570
10-126.AB Gateway 15 Cabling (Redundant) Functional Diagram ...................................... 570
10-127.AB Gateway 15 Non-Redundant Cabling Configuration .......................................... 571
10-128.AB Gateway 15 Redundant Cabling Configuration .................................................. 572
10-129.Device Integrator Cabling ......................................................................................... 574
10-130.Allen-Bradley Station to DNBI Cabling ................................................................... 575
10-131.Allen-Bradley Station to DNBX Cabling .................................................................. 577
11-1. Retaining Screws, Memory Backup Power Module [IPM06(A or D)] ....................... 583
11-2. Access Door Removal, Memory Backup Power Module [IPM06(A or D)] ................ 583
11-3. Battery Lead Connections, Memory Backup Power Module [IPM06(A or D)] ......... 584
C-1. 70 Series Processors ................................................................................................... 594
C-2. Server 70 Processor ................................................................................................... 594
C-3. Selecting Windows NT Diagnostics .......................................................................... 595
C-4. Determining Your Non GX-Based 70 Series Workstation’s Processor ....................... 596
C-5. Identifying the Parts of a P-Code Label ..................................................................... 597
C-6. Front Panel Layout for AW/WP70, Style A Workstations
(P166, Professional PII 233, PentiumPro 266, and Professional PII 266) ................. 600
C-7. AW/WP70, Style A Rear Panel Layout (P166) .......................................................... 601
C-8. Card Slot Positions in the AW/WP70, Style A (P166) .............................................. 605
C-9. AW/WP70, Style A (Professional PII 233) and AW70, Style B
(PentiumPro 200 and Professional PII 266) Rear Panel Layout ................................. 606
C-10. Card Slot Positions in the AW/WP70, Style A and B Workstation
(PentiumPro 200, Professional PII 233, and Professional PII 266) ............................ 610
C-11. Front Panel Layout for AW/WP70, Style A and AW70, Style B Processors ............... 611
C-12. AW/WP70, Style A (Enterprise 233) and AW70, Style B (Enterprise 300)
Rear Panel Layout ..................................................................................................... 612
C-13. Card Slot Positions in the AW/WP70, Style A and B Workstations
(Enterprise 233 and Enterprise 300) ......................................................................... 616
C-14. Printer Cable Connections to AW70/WP70, Style A (P166) .................................... 630
C-15. Printer Cable Connections to AW70/WP70, Style A (Professional PII 233)
and AW70 Style B (PentiumPro 266 and Professional PII 266) ................................ 631
C-16. PC-FB Card Jumper Settings .................................................................................... 633
C-17. Jumper Settings – 1784-KTX Communication Interface Card .................................. 635
xxx
Tables
4-1. MMS Module Population ......................................................................................... 115
4-2. Types of Front-Mounted Fault-Tolerant Module Connectors ................................... 142
4-3. Main and Expansion FBM Installation Considerations ............................................. 150
5-1. Data Storage Devices ................................................................................................. 155
5-2. SCSI Addresses for Model 50/51, Style A, B, and C AP50/51 or AW50/51-based
Data Storage Devices ................................................................................................ 158
5-3. SCSI Addresses for AP51D or AW51D-based Data Storage Devices ......................... 158
5-4. SCSI Addresses for AP51E or AW51E-based Data Storage Devices .......................... 158
5-5. SCSI Addresses for All Data Storage Devices Mounted without Housings ................ 159
5-6. SCSI Addresses for All WP50/51-based Data Storage Devices .................................. 166
5-7. SCSI Addresses for All AP20-Based Data Storage Devices ......................................... 170
5-8. 120 MB Disk Drive Indicators .................................................................................. 180
5-9. AP20 SCSI and Non-SCSI Cabling .......................................................................... 188
6-1. Summary of 1x8 FBM Mounting Structure Configurations ...................................... 206
6-2. Nodebus Extension Cable Parts ................................................................................ 221
7-1. Connector Assembly for AMP Plug ........................................................................... 236
7-2. Connector Assembly for Burndy Plug ....................................................................... 236
7-3. Sockets for AMP Plug ............................................................................................... 236
7-4. Sockets for Burndy Plug ............................................................................................ 236
7-5. Die Set and Stop Bushing for Burndy Plug ............................................................... 237
7-6. AMP Crimper for AMP Plug .................................................................................... 237
8-1. Required Fail-Safe Parameter Settings for Redundant FBM ECBs ............................ 334
8-2. Redundant FBM04/05/06/44/46 Failure Conditions ............................................... 336
9-1. AW70 & WP70, Style A-, & AW70, Style B-Based Peripheral Devices
(Latest Version) ......................................................................................................... 339
9-2. AP50/51-, WP50/51-, and AW50/51-Based Peripheral Devices ............................... 341
9-3. 50 Series and 70 Series Workstation Monitor Part Numbers ..................................... 342
9-4. 70 Series Processor Interface Cards ............................................................................ 351
9-5. AW70A Interface Card Parameters ........................................................................... 352
9-6. WP70 Interface Card Parameters .............................................................................. 353
9-7. AW70B Interface Card Parameters ........................................................................... 354
9-8. AW70, Style A [GX1 Pentium III (P99*T)] Card Slot Locations .............................. 355
9-9. WP70, Style A [GX1 Pentium III (P98*R)] Card Slot Locations .............................. 356
9-10. AW70, Style B [GX1 Pentium III (P97*L)] Card Slot Locations .............................. 356
9-11. DigiBoard DS1-DS5 Switch Settings ........................................................................ 363
9-12. GCIO Connectors and Switches ............................................................................... 435
9-13. Maximum Number of Devices per WP30 Display .................................................... 442
9-14. Okidata Color Dot-Matrix Printer 132, Interface Module Switch Set-up ................. 444
9-15. B/W Dot-Matrix Printer 80, Serial Interface Module Switch Settings ....................... 445
9-16. B/W Dot-Matrix Printer 80, Control Board Switch Settings ..................................... 446
10-1. INTERSPEC Documents ......................................................................................... 454
10-2. INTERSPEC Integrator 30 Translator Controls and Indicators ................................ 456
10-3. RS-232 Printers or Terminals Communication Cables .............................................. 469
10-4. Allen Bradley Communication Cables ....................................................................... 469
xxxi
B0193AC – Rev U Tables
10-5. Modicon Communications Cables ............................................................................ 469

10-6. Instrument Gateway Communication Cables ............................................................ 470
10-7. INI 15 Communication Cables ................................................................................. 470
10-8. Device Integrator P0970VB Switch Settings and RS-232-C Pinout .......................... 476
10-9. INI Cabling RS-232-C Pinout .................................................................................. 486
10-10. Ethernet Cable Components ..................................................................................... 515
10-11. RS-423 Wiring Data for Server 70 ............................................................................ 528
10-12. Pin Assignments for P0800AZ Cable Connector ....................................................... 573
B-1. Equivalent SCSI Cable Lengths ................................................................................. 589
C-1. Determining Your Non GX-Based 70 Series Workstation’s Processor ....................... 596
C-2. Identifying Type of GX-Based Processor ................................................................... 597
C-3. AW70, Style A (P166) Interface Card Parameters ..................................................... 601
C-4. WP70, Style A (P166) Interface Card Parameters ..................................................... 602
C-5. AW70, Style A (P166) Card Slot Locations ............................................................... 603
C-6. WP70, Style A (P166) Card Slot Locations ............................................................... 603
C-7. AW70, Style A (Professional PII 233) Interface Card Parameters .............................. 606
C-8. WP70, Style A (Professional PII 233) Interface Card Parameters .............................. 607
C-9. AW70, Style A (Professional II 233) Card Slot Locations .......................................... 608
C-10. WP70, Style A (Professional II 233) Card Slot Locations .......................................... 609
C-11. AW70, Style A (Enterprise 233) Interface Card Parameters ....................................... 612
C-12. WP70, Style A (Enterprise 233) Interface Card Parameters ....................................... 614
C-13. AW70, Style A (Enterprise 233) Card Slot Locations ................................................ 615
C-14. WP70, Style A (Enterprise 233) Card Slot Locations ................................................ 615
C-15. AW70, Style A (GXa 233) Interface Card Parameters ............................................... 617
C-16. WP70, Style A (GXa 233) Interface Card Parameters ............................................... 618
C-17. AW70, Style A (GXa 233) Card Slot Locations ......................................................... 619
C-18. WP70, Style A (GXa 233) Card Slot Locations ......................................................... 619
C-19. AW70, Style B (PentiumPro 200) Interface Card Parameters .................................... 620
C-20. AW70, Style B (PentiumPro 200) Card Slot Locations ............................................. 621
C-21. AW70, Style B (Professional PII 266) Interface Card Parameters .............................. 623
C-22. AW70, Style B (Professional II 266) Card Slot Locations .......................................... 624
C-23. AW70, Style B (Enterprise 300) Interface Card Parameters ....................................... 625
C-24. AW70, Style B (Enterprise 300) Card Slot Locations ................................................ 627
C-25. AW70, Style B (GXa 300) Interface Card Parameters ............................................... 628
C-26. AW70, Style B (GXa 300) Card Slot Locations ......................................................... 629
xxxii
Preface
Hazardous Location Precautions (CSA Requirements)

The precautions described herein must be observed when servicing the I/A Series equipment that
are certified for use in Class I, Division 2 locations. (The applicable components are identified
elsewhere within this document.)
NOTE
“Class I, Division 2” refers to Class I, Groups A, B, C, and D, Division 2; Class II,
Group G, Division 2 and Class III, Divisions 1 and 2: Hazardous locations (per
Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, 1990).
Three servicing categories require compliance with the precautions that follow, these are:
♦ Equipment repair
♦ Component replacement
♦ Power supply disconnection
Where repair of the equipment is possible:
! WARNING
Explosion hazard - Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I,
Division 2.
! WARNING
AVERTISSEMENT: Risque d'explosion - la substitution de composants peut
rendre ce matériel inacceptable pour les emplacements de Classe I, Division 2.
Where replacement of a component could ignite the explosive atmosphere:
! WARNING
Explosion hazard - do not replace the component(s) unless power has been switched
off or the area is known to be nonhazardous.
! WARNING
AVERTISSEMENT: Risque d'explosion - couper le courant ou s'assurer que
l'emplacement est designé non dangereux avant de remplacer les composants.
xxxiii
B0193AC – Rev U Preface
Where disconnecting the power supply could ignite the explosive atmosphere:
! WARNING
Explosion hazard - do not disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off
or the area is known to be nonhazardous.
! WARNING
AVERTISSEMENT: Risque d'explosion - avant de déconnecter l'équipement,
couper le courant ou s'assurer que l'emplacement est désigné non dangereux.
Pb
ATTENTION:
The product you have purchased contains a rechargeable battery.
The battery is recyclable. At the end of its useful life, under various state and local laws, it may
be illegal to dispose of this battery into the municipal waste stream. Check with your local
solid waste officials for details in your area for recycling options or proper disposal methods.
Revision Information
For Release 6.5, the following changes were made:
Preface, Chapters 2, 4, 6, 7, and 8
♦ Added references to Modbus™ Communication Interface Module (FBM224) User’s
Guide (B0400FK).
xxxiv
Preface B0193AC – Rev U
NOTE
The Application Workstation 51, Style E processor is available in multiple manufac-
turing styles, such as Style A, B and C. A label located on the bottom of your pro-
cessor identifies the manufacturing style and revision level.
For example:
I/A Series AW51E Processor Model
Style/Rev.: BC Manufacturing Style

Revision Level
In most respects, the manufacturing styles are functionally the same. However, sig-
nificant style differences, such as the need for a specific splitter cable, are noted
wherever necessary in this document.
Referenced Documents
The following documents provide additional and related information. Most are available on the
I/A Series Electronic Documentation CD-ROM (K0173TQ). The latest revisions may also be avail-
able through the Customer Satisfaction Center’s web page which is located within
(http://ips.csc.invensys.com).
♦ 1x12 Fieldbus Module Mounting Structure Installation and Wiring (B0400PK)
♦ Application Processor 20 Z-Module Installation and Maintenance (B0193SG)
♦ Color Printer Installation for V4.3.x, V6.1.x, and V6.2.x (B0400SF)
♦ Command Center Installation Manual (B0193RZ)
♦ Control Processor 60 and Control Processor 60S Installation and Maintenance
(B0400FB)
♦ DIN Rail Mounted FBM Subsystem User’s Guide (B0400FA)
♦ Dual-Height Modular Mounting Structure (2xMMS) Mounting Hardware Installation
(B0400PA)
♦ European Union CE-Mark Compliance Manual (B0193UU)
♦ Fieldbus Cluster I/O User’s Guide (B0193RB)
♦ FOUNDATION™ Fieldbus H1 Interface Module (FBM220/221) User Guide (B0400FD)
♦ Hardware and Software Specific Instructions for 70 Series Processors (Enterprise
Pentium™ II) (B0400PU)
♦ Hardware and Software Specific Instructions for 70 Series Processors (GX1 Pentium II)
AW70A (P99*P), WP70 (P98*M), and AW70B (P97*H) (B0400SA)
♦ Hardware and Software Specific Instructions For 70 Series Processors (GX1 Pentium III)
AW70A (P99*Q), WP70 (P98*N) and AW70B (P97*J) (B0400RC)
AW70A (P99*R), WP70 (P98*P), and AW70B (P97*K) (B0400SK)
xxxv
B0193AC – Rev U Preface
AW70A (P99*S), WP70 (P98*Q), and AW70B (P97*L) (B0400RH)
♦ Hardware and Software Specific Instructions for 70 Series Processors (GX1 Pentium III)
AW70A (P99*T), WP70 (P98*R), and AW70B (P97*L) (B0400RL)
AW70A (P99*U), WP70 (P98*S), and AW70B (P97*M) (B0400RR)
♦ Hardware and Software Specific Instructions for 70 Series Processors (GXA Pentium II)
AW70A (P99*N), WP70 (P98*L), and AW70B (P97*G) (B0400PV)
♦ Hardware and Software Specific Instructions for Server 70 Processors (PE2400) AW70C
and WP70C (P95*A) (B0400SP)
♦ Hardware Descriptions (B0193AE)
♦ Hardware Kit Installation Procedures for 50 Series Model 51, Style D Processors
(B0400PT)
♦ Hardware Kit Installation Procedures for 50 Series Model 51, Style E Processors
(B0400PJ)
♦ HART™ Communication Interface Module (FBM214/215/216/218) User’s Guide
(B0400FF)
♦ Installation Instructions for Multi-Head Video Cards (B0193SW)
♦ Integrated Control Software Concepts (B0193AW)
♦ Integrators for Modbus and Modbus Plus Devices (B0193RL)
♦ Modbus Communication Interface Module (FBM224) User’s Guide (B0400FK)
♦ Model 51 X Terminal System Administration Guide (2.X) (B0193UB)
♦ Modular Industrial Console Installation (B0193UV)
♦ Modular Industrial Workstation Installation (B0193CE)
♦ Network Cable Systems Installation and Maintenance (B0193UW)
♦ Network Cable Systems Planning (B0193UX)
♦ Profibus-DP™ Communication Interface Module (FBM223) User’s Guide (B0400FE)
♦ SBus Card Kit Installation Procedures for 50 Series Processors (B0193SC)
♦ Site Planning (B0193AB)
♦ SPEC 200™ Control Integrator User’s Guide (B0193RD)
♦ SPECTRUM™ Migration Integrator User’s Guide (B0193RC)
♦ System Operations Guide (B0193CR)
♦ System Configurator (B0193JH)
♦ Software Installation (Windows NT® Operating System) (B0400JG)
♦ TankExpert™ Hydrostatic Gauging and Inventory Management System Installation
(MI 020-064).
xxxvi
1. Preinstallation
This chapter describes the basic unpacking and system power check procedures for I/A Series
system equipment.
This document contains procedures for installing, interconnecting, and applying power to the
I/A Series system equipment.
NOTE
For installation information on enclosures used with DIN rail mounted FBM
equipment (B03, B04, and B05), refer to DIN Rail Mounted FBM Subsystem User’s
Guide (B0400FA), FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1 Interface Module (FBM220/221) User
Guide (B0400FD), Profibus-DP Communication Interface Module (FBM223) User’s
Guide (B0400FE), and HART Communication Interface Module
(FBM214/215/216/218) User’s Guide (B0400FF).
Unloading
The system units are designed to withstand vibration and shock normally encountered during
shipping and installation; however, extreme shocks and vibration should be avoided. The system
units may be moved from the transportation vehicle to their intended locations by forklift or
manual jack truck. If practical, all major movements of the units should be completed before the
units are unpacked.
Unpacking Procedure
The following unpacking procedure applies, in general, to all system units:
1. Inspect the exterior of the shipping carton for obvious damage. (Any noticeable dam-
age should be indicated in the shipper’s bill of lading.)
2. Verify that the equipment received is that described in the bill of lading.
3. Remove shipping straps, shipping shroud, and other packing materials, such as poly-
ethylene bags and styrofoam cushioning materials.
NOTE
If you anticipate that the unit will be stored or shipped from the present site, save all
packing materials for reuse.
4. If the unit is attached to a skid, remove all shipping hardware and hold-down bolts
used to fasten the unit to the skid. Separate the skid from the unit.
5. Ensure that the appropriate interconnecting cables are present, by comparing the
cable part numbers and quantities with those listed in the bill of lading.
1
B0193AC – Rev U 1. Preinstallation
! WARNING
Take heed of the following warnings:
1. Careless handling of the system units during installation can result in damage to
the equipment or in personal injury. For units containing a cathode-ray display tube
(CRT), avoid striking the face of the tube.
2. Exercise caution against electrical shock when you connect ac power to a system
unit.
Unpacking Hard Disk Drive
! CAUTION
Observe the following precautions when working with hard disk drives.
1. Protect the drive from harsh shocks at any time.

2. Handle the drive by the frame only to avoid static discharge damage to the drive elec-
trical components.
3. When installing disk drives, do not block or impede the cooling air flow through the
drive.
4. For any installation, the drives should not be tilted front to back, in any position, hor-
izontal or vertical, by more than plus-or-minus 5°.
5. Properly connect power and signal cables to the drive before you apply power to the
drive.
6. To be sure the actuator is completely locked, do not move the drive for 15 seconds
after dc power is removed.
System Power Checks

Perform the following checks before you install the equipment:
NOTE
Site Planning (B0193AB) identifies site requirements for system power connections.
1. Check that all the required ac or dc power distribution network lines are installed.
2. Check that the appropriate number of ac power outlets are installed and spaced
appropriately.
3. Switch on main system power.
4. Using a multimeter, check that the appropriate operating voltage exists at each ac out-
let or connection point.
5. Switch off main system power.
2
2. Equipment Mounting Procedures
This chapter describes mounting procedures for the I/A Series enclosures and associated
peripheral equipment.
! WARNING
To prevent electrical shock hazard and signal interference, high voltage main power
cables (those carrying 30 V rms or greater, or 60 V dc or greater) must be kept sepa-
rate from low voltage signal cables (those carrying less than 30 V rms, or less than
60 V dc). Separate conduit, cable runs, and so forth, must be used, as well as sepa-
rate cable entry into the enclosure. The minimum allowable separation between
high and low voltage cables is 50 mm (2 in) at all points in the cable run.
NOTE
For installation information relating to the DIN rail subsystem enclosures (B03,
B04, and B05), refer to DIN Rail FBM Subsystem User’s Guide (B0400FA),
FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1 Interface Module (FBM220/221) User Guide (B0400FD),
Profibus-DP Communication Interface Module (FBM223) User’s Guide (B0400FE),
HART Communication Interface Module (FBM214/215/216/218) User’s Guide
(B0400FF) and Modbus Communication Interface Module (FBM224) User’s Guide
(B0400FK).
Industrial Enclosures 16 and 32

Figure 2-1 shows a single dual-height modular mounting structure (2xMMS) area for containing
processors and modules in an Industrial Enclosure 16. Similarly, Figure 2-2 shows the two dual-
height mounting structure areas in an Industrial Enclosure 32.
3
B0193AC – Rev U 2. Equipment Mounting Procedures
50 Series 2xMMS,
2x8 MS, or
2x8 FBM MS
Figure 2-1. Industrial Enclosure 16, Mounting Structure Area
(Top)
50 Series 2xMMS,
2x8 MS, or
2x8 FBM MS
(Bottom)
50 Series 2xMMS,
2x8 MS, or
2x8 FBM MS
Figure 2-2. Industrial Enclosure 32, Mounting Structure Areas
Refer to “50 Series Modular Mounting Structures” on page 56 for more information on the mod-
ular mounting structures.
Both enclosures are designed for floor mounting, and both accept processor modules, Fieldbus
Modules, and data storage devices. Wires, cables, and conduits can enter either the bottom or the
top of the enclosure, but not both. Side doors provide access to the wiring areas. Additionally, the
doors can be mounted to open from left-to-right or right-to-left.
Industrial Enclosures 16 and 32 are available in two configurations, vented and sealed. The
vented configuration has openings at the top and bottom to provide ventilation, and has a metal
plate, with gasket, at the bottom for electrical protection purposes. A sealed enclosure has metal
plates, with gaskets, at the top and bottom to provide a watertight seal. Mounting structures for
4
2. Equipment Mounting Procedures B0193AC – Rev U
the 50 Series require vented enclosures. The IE 16 is available as a sealed enclosure for 50 Series
configurations.
An optional bridge assembly is available with the Industrial Enclosure 32. The bridge assembly
allows joining of multiple Industrial Enclosures 32 to form a single, bridged unit.
Industrial Enclosures 16 and 32, Cable Entry Information

Consider the following items before you perform the Industrial Enclosure 16 or 32 mounting
procedure:
♦ Separate the high and low voltage cables. See the Warning statement on page 3.
♦ Consider the type of enclosure (vented or sealed), and whether to use top or bottom
conduit entry (or cable entry). Figure 2-3 and Figure 2-4 show conduit entry points
for a vented Industrial Enclosure 16 or 32, and for a sealed Industrial Enclosure 16 or
32, respectively. Details on preparing the enclosure for top or bottom conduit entry
are presented in the procedure, “Industrial Enclosure 16 or 32, Mounting Procedure”
on page 8.
Conduit Entry (on either or both sides)

Conduit Conduit
Slotted Enclosure Plate Enclosure Plate
(Vented) Top
Vent Cap
(Front View)
Gasket
Gasket
Bottom
Conduit
Conduit Entry
Enclosure
Vented IE 16 or 32, Vented IE 16 or 32, Enclosure Plate
Plate
Bottom Cable Entry Top Cable Entry
Figure 2-3. Industrial Enclosure 16 or 32 Vented Type, Conduit Entry Points
5
Conduit Entry
Top Conduit
Slotted
Enclosure Plate
(Vented) Top
(Front View)
Gasket
Gasket
Bottom
Conduit
Conduit Entry
Enclosure
Sealed IE 16 or 32, Sealed IE 16 or 32, Enclosure Plate
Plate
Bottom Cable Entry Top Cable Entry
Figure 2-4. Industrial Enclosure 16 or 32 Sealed Type, Conduit Entry Points
Industrial Enclosure 32, Optional Bridge Structure Assembly

Procedure
Multiple Industrial Enclosure 32s can be joined together using bridge structures to form a single
unit. Refer to Figure 2-5 and Figure 2-6, and perform the following steps:
1. Attach the bridge structure to one of the Industrial Enclosure 32s using the 12 screws
and washers provided.
2. Attach the second Industrial Enclosure 32 to the bridge structure using the 12 screws
and washers provided.
3. If a third Industrial Enclosure 32 is to be added, repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the third
unit.
4. Attach the front and rear panels to the bridge structure by performing the following
steps:
a. Check that the panel is in the upright position (see Up Arrow). On panels without
an Up Arrow, the orientation can be verified by examining the rubber gasket on
the inside of the panel. The gasket seam (where the ends of the two gaskets meet)
is at the panel bottom.
b. Locate the horizontal ridge at the top inside of the panel.
c. Locate the horizontal ridge near the top opening of the bridge structure.
d. Position the panel so that the top horizontal ridge on the panel seats directly on
top of (and rests on) the top horizontal ridge on the bridge structure.
6
e. Using the hex driver tool (Foxboro part number X0179AZ), turn each of the
panel fasteners clockwise to firmly attach the panel to the bridge structure.
6 mm (0.250) Bolt
and Flat Washer
(24 Places)
Bridge
Structure
Bridge Structure
Cover Panel
Industrial Industrial
Enclosure 32 Enclosure 32
Figure 2-5. Optional Bridge Structure, Mounting Details
Top Horizontal Ridge

Top
Horizontal
Ridge
Bridge Structure
Cover Panel
(Inside View)
Bridge Structure
Panel
Gasket
Figure 2-6. Optional Bridge Structure, Cover Panel Mounting
7
Industrial Enclosure 16 or 32, Mounting Procedure

1. Check that mounting holes have been drilled in floor. If they have not, proceed as fol-
lows. (If below-floor cabling is to be employed, refer to Site Planning (B0193AB) for
information on the recommended size and placement of the floor cutout.)
a. Place enclosure in desired location.
b. Mark hole locations.
c. Move the enclosure away from the markings.
d. Drill holes in floor.
2. If the enclosure is the vented type and conduit entry is to be from the bottom:
a. Drill or punch the bottom conduit enclosure plate, and provide appropriate con-
duit fittings.
b. Place the conduit enclosure plate on the floor, in the precise location that the
enclosure is to be mounted.
c. Go to Step 6.
3. If the enclosure is the vented type, and conduit entry is to be from the top:
a. Remove the vent cap and top conduit enclosure plate(s) as shown in Figure 2-7.
b. Drill or punch the conduit enclosure plate(s).
c. Replace the vent cap and conduit enclosure plate(s).
d. Place the enclosure plate on the floor, in the precise location that the enclosure is
to be mounted.
e. Go to Step 6.
4. If the enclosure is the sealed type and conduit entry is to be from the bottom:
duit fittings for a watertight seal as shown in Figure 2-8.
b. Place the conduit enclosure plate on the floor, in the precise location that the
enclosure will be mounted.
c. Go to Step 6.
5. If the enclosure is the sealed type and conduit entry is to be from the top:
a. Remove the top conduit enclosure plate as shown in Figure 2-9.
b. Drill or punch the conduit enclosure plate, and provide appropriate conduit fit-
tings for a watertight seal.
c. Replace the conduit enclosure plate.
d. Go to Step 6.
8
Conduit
(if used)
Vent Cap
12-32 Screw with

Lockwasher (1 of 4)
Top Conduit
Enclosure
(Front)
Lip inserts under Plate (1 of 2)
vent cap.
Threaded studs attach to

enclosure top using washers,
lockwashers, and hex nuts.
Figure 2-7. Industrial Enclosure 16 or 32, Vented Type, Conduit Enclosure Plate Assembly
Bottom Conduit
Enclosure Plate
Watertight Fitting
(user-supplied)
Conduit
(user-supplied)
Figure 2-8. Industrial Enclosure 16 or 32, Sealed Type, Conduit Enclosure Plate Assembly
9
Conduit
(user-supplied)
Watertight Fitting
(user-supplied)
Top Conduit
Enclosure
Plate
Enclosure
Top Molding
Gasket
Washer, Lockwasher,
and Hex Nut (1 of 14) (Front)
Figure 2-9. Industrial Enclosure 16 or 32, Sealed Type, Top Conduit Enclosure Plate Assembly
6. Position the enclosure, with mounting gasket and enclosure plate, so that the holes in
the enclosure base, gasket, and enclosure plate are aligned with the mounting holes in
the floor as shown in Figure 2-10.
7. Install two 12 mm (0.5 in) bolts, with flat washers and lockwashers, in diagonally
opposite mounting holes. (Do not tighten.)
8. Install two more bolts, with flat washers and lockwashers, in the other two diagonally
9. Install the two remaining bolts, with flat washers and lockwashers, in the center
mounting holes.
! CAUTION
Excessive tightening of enclosure mounting bolts can cause damage to the
equipment.
10. Tighten all six bolts evenly and equally, working from center to outside bolts, being
careful not to overtighten. Maximum torque: 16 to 20 N • m (12 to 15 lb • ft).
10
Enclosure Base * Or conduit enclosure plate.

12 mm (0.5 in) (Front View) ** The specific type of anchoring
Mounting Bolt hardware used depends on
(1 of 6) floor construction, and is the
responsibility of the user.
Flat Washer
and Lock-Washer
Gasket Enclosure Plate*
Floor
Anchoring Hardware**
Figure 2-10. Industrial Enclosure 16 or 32, Mounting Details
Field Enclosure 8, Mounting

Field Enclosure 8 contains a single 2x4 mounting structure, which accepts processor modules,
Fieldbus Modules, and data storage devices. The enclosure is available in two configurations,
floor-mounted or wall-mounted, as shown in Figure 2-11. Both configurations are sealed (water-
tight) units. Wires, cables, and conduits can enter through the bottom or the top of the enclosure
(or wall mounting unit) but not both.
Wall
Mounting
Unit
Floor-Mounted Unit Wall-Mounted Unit
Figure 2-11. Field Enclosure 8
11
Field Enclosure 8, Cable Entry Information

Consider the following items before you begin the Field Enclosure 8 mounting procedure:
♦ Separate the high and low voltage cables. See the Warning statement on page 3.
♦ Choose the enclosure configuration (floor- or wall-mounted), and decide whether top
or bottom conduit entry will be used. Figure 2-12 shows conduit entry points for
both enclosure configurations.
Conduit Entry Top Conduit Conduit Entry

Enclosure Plate
Conduit
Enclosure
(Front View)
Plate
Gasket
Gasket
Bottom Bottom
Conduit Conduit
Enclosure Enclosure
Plate Plate
Conduit (Front View)
Entry
Floor-Mounted Unit Floor-Mounted Unit Wall-Mounted Unit
Bottom Cable Entry Top Cable Entry Top or Bottom Cable Entry
Figure 2-12. Field Enclosure 8, Conduit Entry Points
Field Enclosure 8, Floor Mounting Procedure

Install the floor-mounted version of Field Enclosure 8 as follows:
1. Check that mounting holes have been drilled in floor. If they have not been drilled,
proceed as follows. (If below floor cabling is to be employed, refer to Site Planning
(B0193AB) for information on the recommended size and placement of the floor
cutout.)
a. Place enclosure in desired location.
c. Move the enclosure away from the markings.
d. Drill holes in floor.
2. If conduit entry is to be from the bottom:
duit fittings for a watertight seal (see Figure 2-13).
12
b. Place the conduit enclosure plate on the floor, in the precise location where the
enclosure is to be mounted.
c. Go to Step 4.
Bottom Conduit
Enclosure Plate
Watertight Fitting
(user-supplied)
Conduit
(user-supplied)
Conduit
(user-supplied)
Watertight Fitting
(user-supplied)
Top Conduit
Enclosure
Plate
Enclosure
Top Molding
Gasket
Washer, Lockwasher,
and Hex Nut (1 of 14) (Front)
Figure 2-13. Floor-Mounted FE8, Top and Bottom Conduit Enclosure Plate Assemblies
3. If conduit entry will be from the top:

a. Remove the top conduit enclosure plate as shown in Figure 2-13.
4. Position enclosure (with gasket and bottom conduit enclosure plate) so that mounting
holes in enclosure base, gasket, and plate are aligned with holes in floor as shown in
Figure 2-14.
5. Install two 12 mm (0.5 in) bolts, with flat washers and lockwashers, in diagonally
6. Install two more bolts, with flat washers and lockwashers, in two other diagonally
13
7. Install two remaining bolts, flat washers, and lockwashers.

8. Tighten all six bolts evenly and equally, working from center to outside bolts, being
! CAUTION
equipment.
12 mm (0.5 in) Enclosure Base

(Front View) * The specific type of anchoring
Mounting Bolt hardware used depends on
(1 of 6) floor construction, and is the
Flat Washer
and Lock-Washer
Gasket Conduit Enclosure Plate
Floor
Anchoring Hardware*
Figure 2-14. Field Enclosure 8, Floor Mounting Details
Field Enclosure 8, Wall Mounting Procedure

The wall-mounted version of Field Enclosure 8 (FE8) includes a wall mounting unit, which is
attached to the main body of the enclosure prior to shipment. Install the enclosure as follows:
1. Check that mounting holes have been drilled in the wall to accept the enclosure. If
they have not, proceed as follows:
a. Place enclosure in desired location against wall.
b. Move enclosure away from markings.
c. Drill holes in wall.
2. If conduit entry is to be from the bottom:
a. Remove the bottom conduit enclosure plate as shown in Figure 2-15.
d. Go to Step 4.
3. If conduit entry is to be from the top:
a. Remove the top conduit enclosure plate.
14
Screws are fastened using hex driver

tool, Foxboro Part No. X0179AZ.
Watertight Fitting Conduit

(user-supplied) (user-supplied)
Conduit Watertight Fitting

(user-supplied) (user-supplied)
Bottom Conduit Enclosure Plate Top Conduit Enclosure Plate

Figure 2-15. Wall-Mounted Field Enclosure 8, Conduit Enclosure Plate Assembly
4. Referring to Figure 2-16, position the enclosure (with its preattached wall mounting
unit) so that the mounting holes are aligned with the holes in the wall. Then install
two 12 mm (0.5 in) bolts, with flat washers and lockwashers, in the top two mounting
holes. (Do not tighten.)
NOTE
Because the enclosure mounting holes are slotted, an alternate mounting method
may be used.
a. Install four vertically aligned bolts (right or left) in the wall mounting holes, with
flat washers and lockwashers in place.
b. Slide enclosure onto bolts.
c. Install one or more of the remaining bolts (with flat washers and lockwashers) for
temporary stability.
5. Install remaining bolts (with flat washers and lockwashers) in mounting holes. (Do
not tighten.)
! CAUTION
equipment.
6. Tighten all eight bolts evenly and equally, working from center to outside bolts, being
15
12 mm (0.5 in)
Mounting Bolt
Wall (1 of 8)
Flat Washer
Anchoring and Lockwasher
Hardware*
* The specific type of anchoring

hardware used depends on (Top View)
wall construction, and is the
Wall Mounting Unit (Front)
Figure 2-16. Field Enclosure 8, Wall-Mounting Details
Some FE8 enclosures are equipped with side door handles (see Figure 2-11). To open the door,
insert the 4 mm (0.156 in) hex driver tool (part number X0179AZ) into the lock mechanism and
give a one-half turn counterclockwise. Then move the handle to the fully lowered position and
swing the door open.
To close the door, place the handle in the fully lowered position, press the door firmly closed, and
raise the handle to the vertical position. The door may be locked using the hex driver tool.
NOTE
Detents on the hex lock mechanism indicate whether the door is locked or
unlocked. When the dots are aligned, the door is locked.
Field Enclosure 4, Mounting

Field Enclosure 4, shown in Figure 2-17, accepts Fieldbus Modules and Fieldbus Isolators. Field
wires and power cables enter the enclosure through a metal plate in its bottom section. The enclo-
sure can be pipe-mounted or wall-mounted, as described below.
NOTE
Before proceeding with the Field Enclosure 4 mounting procedures, refer to the
WARNING on page 3 regarding separation of high- and low-voltage cables.
16
Pipe-Mounted Version Wall-Mounted Version

Field Enclosure 4, Pipe Mounting

For pipe mounting, a nominal pipe size of 50 mm (2 in) inside diameter and 60 mm (2.375 in)
outside diameter is recommended.
One side of Field Enclosure 4 contains two clamps for securing the enclosure to the pipe. To
mount the enclosure on a pipe, refer to Figure 2-18 and perform the following steps:
1. Remove the two bolts, flat washers, and lockwashers securing each clamp to the enclo-
sure and temporarily set the clamps, bolts, and washers aside.
2. Place the enclosure against the mounting pipe so that the pipe is located in the center
channel. Note that the pipe may be positioned on either side of the enclosure,
depending on site requirements.
3. With the enclosure at the desired height, secure the clamps to the enclosure with the
bolts and washers provided. Tighten bolts, being careful not to overtighten. Maxi-
mum torque: 136 to 18 N•m (10 to 13 lb•ft).
4. Remove the conduit enclosure plate as shown in Figure 2-19.
5. Drill or punch the conduit enclosure plate, as required for entry of field wire
conduit(s).
6. Replace the conduit enclosure plate.
17
50 mm (2 in)
Inside Diameter
of Pipe*
10 mm (0.375 in)
Mounting Bolt
(1 of 4)
Flat Washer * Pipe may be located

and Lockwasher on either side of
enclosure.
Clamp
(1 of 2)
(Front View)
Figure 2-18. Field Enclosure 4, Pipe Mounting Details
25 mm (1 in) Hole
Predrilled for Input Watertight Fittings
Power Cable Conduit (user-supplied)
Drill or punch hole for

signal wire conduit.
Conduit Enclosure
Plate (Bottom View)
Phillips-head screws
(12) attach plate to
bottom of enclosure.
Conduit (user-supplied)
Figure 2-19. Field Enclosure 4, Conduit Enclosure Plate Assembly
Field Enclosure 4, Wall Mounting

Two wall mounting brackets are included with enclosures intended for wall mounting. The brack-
ets may be attached to either the left or right side of the enclosure, depending on site require-
ments. To mount the enclosure on a wall, refer to Figure 2-20 and perform the following steps:
NOTE
If the wall mounting brackets are already attached to the enclosure, skip Steps 1 and
2 of this procedure.
18
Anchoring 10 mm (0.375 in)

Hardware ** Mounting Bolt
(1 of 4)
Flat Washer
and Lockwasher
(Front View)
* Mounting brackets may be used

on either side of enclosure.
**The specific type of anchoring
hardware used depends on wall
construction and is the
Mounting Brackets * (2)
(supplied with unit)
Wall
Figure 2-20. Field Enclosure 4, Wall Mounting Details
1. Remove the bolts, flat washers, and lockwashers securing the pipe clamps to the enclo-
sure and set them aside for reuse.
2. Using the bolts and washers removed in Step 1, attach the two wall mounting brackets
to the enclosure. Note that the lower bracket must be inverted (the holes for wall
mounting must be facing down).
3. Check that the mounting holes have been drilled in the wall to accept wall mounting
brackets. If they have not, proceed as follows:
a. Place enclosure in desired location against wall.
c. Move enclosure away from markings.
d. Drill holes in wall.
4. Position the enclosure, with wall mounting brackets attached, so the holes in the
mounting bracket are aligned with the holes in the wall.
5. Install two 10 mm (0.375 in) bolts, with flat washers and lockwashers, in the two top
mounting holes.
6. Install two 10 mm (0.375 in) bolts, with flat washers and lockwashers, in the two bot-
tom mounting holes.
7. Tighten all four bolts moderately, being careful not to overtighten. Maximum torque:
136 to 18 N • m (10 to 13 lb • ft).
8. Remove the conduit enclosure plate (see Figure 2-19).
9. Drill or punch the conduit enclosure plate, as required, for entry of field wire
conduit(s).
10. Replace the conduit enclosure plate.
19
Metal Enclosure IEMFA/IEMFR and Termination

Enclosure, Mounting
IEMFA Mounting Structure Areas
The IEMFA (Industrial Enclosure Metal Front Access), shown in Figure 2-21, has three mount-
ing structure areas. Each area supports one single-height mounting structure. Note that two areas
are required for mounting a 50 Series 2xMMS structure as shown in the left enclosure, or alter-
nately, areas 1 and 2 can have two structures as shown with the right enclosure.
IEMFA IEMFA IEMFA
1x8 MS
50 Series MMS or
1x8 FBM MS
50 Series 2xMMS
1x8 MS 1x8 MS
or or or or
1x8 FBM MS 1x8 FBM MS
Areas 1 and 2 Areas 1 and 2 Areas 1 and 2
1x8 MS 1x8 MS 1x8 MS

or or or
1x8 FBM MS 1x8 FBM MS 1x8 FBM MS
Area 3 Area 3 Area 3
Figure 2-21. IEMFA Mounting Structure Areas
IEMFR Mounting Structure Areas

The IEMFR (Industrial Metal Front and Rear Access), shown in Figure 2-22, is an enclosure with
four mounting structure areas. Each area supports one mounting structure.
20
IEMFR IEMFR
50 Series MMS
or
1x8 MS
or
1x8 FBM MS
50 Series 2xMMS Area 1
1x8 MS
or
1x8 FBM MS
or
Areas 1 and 2 Area 2
50 Series MMS
or
1x8 MS
or
1x8 FBM MS
Area 3
50 Series 2xMMS
1x8 MS
or
1x8 FBM MS
Area 4
Areas 3 and 4
Figure 2-22. IEMFR Mounting Structure Areas
Metal Termination Enclosures

Externally, Metal Termination Enclosures (IETERMs) are similar in appearance and structure to
the IEMFA (ME24) and IEMFR (ME32) enclosures. It contains a full-size internal vertical panel
for mounting of additional field termination or other electronics. The Metal Termination Enclo-
sure is available with front or front-and-rear access, and each door can be vented, fully vented, or
sealed (Figure 2-23).
21
Vented Metal Fully Vented Metal Sealed Metal

IEMFA/IEMFR IEMFA/IEMFR IEMFA/IEMFR
Industrial Enclosures Industrial Enclosures Industrial Enclosures
and and and
Termination Enclosure Termination Enclosure Termination Enclosure
Figure 2-23. IEMFA/IEMFR and IETERM Enclosures
The fully vented metal enclosure is a converted vented metal enclosure with new doors, which
allows significantly more air to flow inside. Heat intensive processors, such as the Model 51, Style
E processor, require mounting in a fully vented enclosure. This enclosure can be installed in areas
where the air does not require filtration before it is exposed to the equipment inside the metal
enclosure, such as office areas. A full vented left-hinged door for this enclosure is available in kit
part number P0971VE. A fully vented right-hinged door for this enclosure is available in kit part
number P0971VK.
As they are structurally similar, the following mounting procedures apply to the IEMFA (ME24)
and IEMFR (ME32) and the metal termination enclosure (IETERM). All configurations of the
metal enclosures allow top, bottom, or both top-and-bottom cable entry.
Before implementing the IEMFA (ME24) and IEMFR (ME32) or termination enclosure
(IETERM) mounting procedure, you must consider the following items:
♦ Separate the high and low voltage cables. See the Warning statement at the beginning
of this chapter on page 3.
♦ Consider the type of enclosure (vented or sealed), and whether top or bottom cable
entry is to be employed. Bottom cable entry can be from below the enclosure (from
beneath a raised floor or from a cable trough), or from floor level via the openings pro-
vided by removing the front and rear access panels in the enclosure base. With sealed
enclosures, top cable entry is via a conduit through the enclosure top panel. With
vented enclosures, top cable entry is through an access panel located on the top panel
directly over the cable area – to the right of the exhaust fan area.
♦ 50 Series mounting structures require vented enclosures.
22
To mount the IEMFA (ME24) and IEMFR (ME32), IETERM enclosure, refer to Figure 2-24
and Figure 2-25 and proceed as follows:
1. If the enclosure is to be bolted to the floor:
a. Place the enclosure in the desired location.
b. Remove the front and rear access panels from the base as shown in Figure 2-24.
c. Locate the mounting holes at the base (at its corners).
d. Mark the hole locations on the floor.
e. Move the enclosure away from the markings.
f. Drill holes in floor.
g. Move the enclosure over the holes and fasten to floor using suitable hardware.
(The hardware used depends on the type of floor and is left to your discretion.)
Industrial Enclosure
or Termination Enclosure
Base
Access
Plate
(Front)
Figure 2-24. Location of Base and Plates
14 mm (0.55 in)
Mounting Holes
(All Corners)
Base
(Top View)
Front
Figure 2-25. IEMFA/IEMFR and Termination Enclosure, Mounting Holes
23
2. If the enclosure is the vented type IEMFA (ME24) and cable entry is to be from the
bottom:
a. Remove the cable access plate from the inside base of the enclosure. (This also
requires disconnecting the ground wire attached to the plate.)
b. Drill or punch the required holes in the cable access plate.
c. Attach grommets or conduit fittings as required for the specific installation.
d. Replace the cable access plate and reconnect the ground wire.
3. If the enclosure is the vented type IEMFR (ME32) and cable entry is to be from the
bottom, provide an opening in the (inside) base of the enclosure by moving or remov-
ing the slide-over/removable metal plates at the (inside) base of the enclosure. The
plates are held in place by allenhead fasteners.
4. If the enclosure is the vented type and cable entry is to be from the top:
a. Remove the cable access plate from the top of the enclosure. The plate is located
to the right of the exhaust fan. (Removal of the cable access plate also requires
removal of a ground wire attached to the plate.)
NOTE
The IETERMs have no cable access plate. Remove the top panel from the termina-
tion enclosure (by removing the 4 eye bolts and the ground wire) to make ready for
drilling or punching of holes.
b. Drill or punch the required holes in the cable access plate (or in the top panel in
the case of the termination enclosure).
c. Attach grommets or conduit fittings as required for the specific installation.
d. Replace the cable access plate (or top panel in the case of the termination enclo-
sure) and reconnect the ground wire.
5. If the enclosure is the sealed type and cable entry is to be from the bottom:
a. Remove the cable access plate from the inside base of the enclosure. (This also
requires disconnecting the ground wire attached to the plate.)
b. Drill or punch the required holes in the cable access plate and provide
appropriate fittings for a watertight seal.
c. Replace the cable access plate and reconnect the ground wire.
6. If the enclosure is the sealed type and cable entry is to be from the top:
a. Remove the enclosure top panel by unscrewing the four eye bolts holding it in
place. (This also requires disconnecting the ground wire attached to the panel.)
b. Drill or punch holes in the enclosure top panel in positions (at your discretion)
required for cable routing into the enclosure.
c. Provide appropriate conduit fittings for a watertight seal.
d. Replace the enclosure top panel and reconnect the ground wire.
24
Metal Field Enclosure 8, Mounting

The metal Field Enclosure 8 contains a single 1x8 mounting structure which accepts both proces-
sor and Fieldbus Modules. The enclosure is available in two configurations, floor-mounted or
wall-mounted as shown in Figure 2-26. Both configurations are sealed (watertight) units. Cable
entry can be through the top, bottom, or both top and bottom.
You must consider the following items before you begin the Metal Field Enclosure 8 mounting
procedure:
♦ Separation of the high and low voltage cables. See the Warning statement at the begin-
ning of this chapter on page 3.
♦ The enclosure configuration (floor- or wall-mounted), and whether top or bottom
conduit entry is to be employed.
Wall-Mounting
Brackets*
Floor-Mounted Version Wall-Mounted Version
* Wall-Mounting brackets may be

installed on either side of enclosure.
Figure 2-26. Metal Field Enclosure 8
Metal Field Enclosure 8, Floor Mounting Procedure

NOTE
Bottom cable entry can be implemented from below the enclosure (from beneath a
raised floor or from a cable trough), or from floor level via the openings provided by
removing the front and rear access panels in the enclosure base.
1. If cable access is to be from the bottom of the unit, access holes must be drilled or
punched in the bottom panel before actual floor mounting can take place.
a. Place the enclosure on its side (right or left side).
b. Referring to Figure 2-27, remove the bottom panel by removing the four allen-
head bolts (metric size M12) holding the panel and base in place, and by discon-
necting the ground wire attached to the bottom panel.
25
Allenhead Bottom
Bolt (1 of 4) Panel
Base
Metal FE8
Enclosure
Bottom View
Figure 2-27. Metal Enclosure 8, Bottom Panel Removal
c. Drill or punch the required conduit holes in the panel, in the area shown in
Figure 2-28. (Precise positioning of the conduit hole(s) is at your discretion.)
d. Provide appropriate conduit fittings for a watertight seal.
e. Replace bottom panel and base, reconnect the ground wire, and set enclosure in
an upright position.
f. Place the enclosure in the desired location.
mm 89
in 3.5 312
12.25
228
50 9.0
2.0 Ground
Stud
82.5
3.25
143
5.63
Bottom Panel Front Cable Entrance

(Top View) Area
Figure 2-28. Metal Enclosure 8, Bottom Panel Cable Entrance Area
2. If the enclosure is to be bolted to the floor:

a. Remove the front and rear access panels from the base.
b. Referring to Figure 2-29, locate the mounting holes at the base.
26
c. Mark the hole locations on the floor.

d. Move the enclosure away from the markings.
e. Drill holes in floor.
f. Move the enclosure over the holes and fasten it to the floor using suitable hard-
ware. (The hardware used depends on the type of floor and is left to your
discretion.)
3. For top cable entry:
a. Remove the enclosure top panel by unscrewing the four large screws holding it in
place and by disconnecting the ground wire attached to the panel.
b. Drill or punch holes in the enclosure top panel within the area outlined in
Figure 2-30. (This area centers the cable entry directly over a specially designed
wireway located inside the enclosure.)
d. Replace the enclosure top panel and reconnect the ground wire.
14 mm (0.55 in)
Mounting Holes
(All Corners)
Base
(Top View)
Front
Figure 2-29. Metal Enclosure 8, Mounting Holes
Metal Field Enclosure 8, Wall Mounting Procedure

Figure 2-30 and Figure 2-31 show the top panel cable entrance area, and how to mount the enclo-
sure to the wall, respectively. Refer to these figures and perform the following steps:
1. If cable access is to be from the bottom (or both bottom and top) of the unit, access
holes must be drilled or punched in the bottom panel (or both bottom and top pan-
els), and the bottom wall mounting bracket must be installed before actual wall
mounting can take place:
a. Place the enclosure on its side (right or left side).
b. Remove the bottom panel by removing the four large screws holding it in place
and disconnecting the ground wire.
c. Drill or punch the required conduit holes in the panel, within the area shown in
Figure 2-28. (Precise positioning of the conduit holes is at your discretion.)
d. Provide appropriate conduit fittings for a watertight seal.
27
e. Replace the bottom panel and reconnect the ground wire. At the same time,
install the bottom wall mounting bracket, packaged with the enclosure, using the
M12 allenhead bolts provided with the mounting brackets.
f. Place the enclosure in an upright position.
2. If cable access is to be from the top (or both top and bottom) of the unit, access holes
must be drilled or punched in the top panel, and the top wall mounting bracket must
be installed before actual wall mounting can be effected:
a. Remove the top panel by removing the four large screws holding it in place and by
disconnecting the ground wire.
b. Drill or punch holes in the enclosure top panel as shown in Figure 2-30. (This
area centers the cable entry directly over a specially designed wireway located
inside the enclosure.)
d. Replace the top panel and reconnect the ground wire. At the same time, install the
top wall mounting bracket, packaged with the enclosure, using the M12 allenhead
bolts provided with the mounting brackets.
mm
in 89
3.5
Cable
50 Entrance Area
2.0
82.5
3.25
178
Top Panel 7.0
(Top View) Front
Figure 2-30. Metal Enclosure 8, Top Panel Cable Entrance Area
28
10 mm (0.394 in) Bolt (1 of 6)

Wall-Mounting with Washer and Lockwasher
Brackets*
Bolt**
Anchoring
Hardware***
Bolt**
Wall-Mounting Attaching Unit to Wall
Bracket Installation
* Brackets may be installed on either side of enclosure.
** Each bracket is held in place with two M12 allenhead bolts supplied with
the mounting brackets.
***Anchoring hardware depends on wall construction.
Figure 2-31. Mounting of Metal Field Enclosure 8 to Wall
3. If the mounting holes have not been drilled in the wall:

a. Using the mounting dimensions in Site Planning (B0193AB), create a template
using a piece of thin, rigid material such as fiberboard.
b. Test the template by placing it against the enclosure and check for hole
alignment.
4. If the template proves to be sufficiently accurate, place the template against the wall in
the desired location and mark locations of the six mounting holes.
a. Move the template away from the wall and drill the six mounting holes.
b. Secure the enclosure to the wall.
Over-Temperature Sensor Wiring

The following I/A Series enclosures with 120 or 240 V ac power include an over-temperature
sensor:
♦ IE16 and IE32
♦ Metal ME24/ME32/ME60
♦ Metal FE8
♦ Metal Termination Enclosures.
The over-temperature sensor is not used in enclosures with 24 or 125 V dc or 100 V ac power.
29
Figure 2-32 shows the location of the over-temperature sensor within the enclosure. In the IE16
or IE32, attach the sensor with one screw to the second oval hole down from the top along the
inside of the enclosure, just to the right of the topmost cell in the enclosure when facing the rear
of the enclosure. In the metal enclosure, attach the sensor with two screws above the front door
opening in the location shown in Figure 2-32.
The over-temperature sensor contains a pair of normally open contacts, rated at 2 A at 120 V ac,
which close when the temperature inside the enclosure exceeds normal operating levels.
Recommended wire size for over-temperature sensor wiring is 18 AWG (1 mm2). The recom-
mended procedure for attaching the wires to the sensor is using fast-on (solderless) terminals.
Alternatively, carefully solder the wires to the sensor without dropping solder into the equipment,
or damaging any insulation. Connections from the sensor may be made to an I/A Series Fieldbus
Module (for monitoring and alarming within the system) or to an external alarm device.
(Rear View)
Over-Temperature
IE16 Enclosure Sensor
Metal Enclosure (ME)
Over-Temperature Over-Temperature
Sensor Sensor
(Rear View)
IE32 Enclosure
Figure 2-32. Over-Temperature Sensor Location – IE16, IE32, and Metal Enclosures
Refer to 1x12 Fieldbus Module Configurable Mounting Structure Kit Installation and Wiring
Instructions (B0400PK) for over-temperature sensor location in the ME60.
30
NEMA 4/4X Hardened Enclosures

The hardened enclosure (see Figure 2-33) provides an environmentally secure and rugged housing
for an I/A Series workstation. Each enclosure is shipped with installation instructions. The follow-
ing information will help you plan your site for a hardened enclosure.
Each hardened enclosure includes one of these air cooling systems, which is integrated onto the
enclosure:
♦ A vortex cooler
♦ An air conditioner.
Cabling to the enclosure is through one of two methods:
♦ Waterproof cabling ports
♦ Conduit mounts.
You assemble the waterproof cabling ports with easy-to-assemble kits (included with the hardened
enclosure), enabling passage of all cables through the hardened enclosure, while guaranteeing the
a NEMA 4/4X rating.
Prepare for the installation by planning the site in which the enclosure will be located and obtain-
ing tools and necessary parts.
Figure 2-33. NEMA 4/4X Hardened Enclosure
Planning the Site

Before installing the workstation in the hardened enclosure and placing the assembly in your site,
perform the following actions.
♦ Select an area in which to assemble the hardened enclosure; approximately 4 square
meters (approximately 36 square feet) are required.
31
♦ Determine where the enclosure will be located. Allow sufficient space around the
enclosure for access (to open the enclosure’s doors, so you can inspect the air condi-
tioning hardware), for cabling, and for heat dissipation. Although 20 cm (7.8 in)
between the enclosure and a wall is sufficient, it is recommended that there be a clear-
ance of approximately 70 cm (28 in) at each of the enclosure’s four sides to allow
room to open enclosure doors. Provide additional space so you can move around an
enclosure when its doors are open.
♦ Furnish electrical power to the enclosure. For an enclosure configured with an air con-
ditioner, use two separate 15 A (120 V ac) circuits: one for the air conditioner, and
one for the electronic equipment.
♦ For vortex-cooled enclosures, furnish instrument air. Refer to “NEMA 4/4X
Hardened Enclosures” in Site Planning (B0193AB) for details.
♦ For units with conduit wiring entry, prepare the conduits leading to the enclosure.
You will also have to cut appropriately sized apertures through the enclosure and
mount the watertight conduits to the enclosure.
♦ Optionally, configure an over-temperature monitoring system to set off an alarm
should the enclosure’s internal temperature exceed 35°C (95°F). A thermostatically
controlled switch is provided inside the enclosure for this purpose.
Testing the Workstation and Monitor

Before installing the workstation into the enclosure, that is, before mounting the 50 Series,
70 Series, or Server 70 workstation and monitor inside the enclosure, ensure to your satisfaction
that the workstation operates properly.
Two 6-foot IEC power cords, which mate with the internal 4-position power strip, are supplied
with the enclosure. Use them to power the computer and monitor.
Obtaining Tools and Parts

Prepare for the installation by obtaining the required tools and hardware.
Tools
To install the workstation into the enclosure and to connect cooling system resources, you will
need:
♦ Adjustable crescent wrench for leveling the enclosure’s feet
♦ Adjustable crescent wrench or 1/2-inch socket wrench for the signal cable port
♦ A leveling device to level the enclosure
♦ Hole cutting tool sufficient to cut through 2 mm (.080 in) thick 304 stainless steel
(for an enclosure employing conduit apertures)
♦ Hex key wrench (3/16 inches across flats) to tighten the power cable port.
32
Hardware
The following hardware is necessary:
♦ The proper electrical cable (.70 in maximum diameter) to connect power between the
enclosure’s 4-position power strip and an electrical junction box.
♦ For enclosures configured with an air conditioner, obtain the proper cable (.70 in
maximum diameter) to connect power between the air conditioner and an electrical
junction box.
♦ For enclosures configured with a vortex cooler, obtain a pipe fitting to connect to the
enclosure’s air input line. Refer to “NEMA 4/4X Hardened Enclosures” in Site Plan-
ning (B0193AB) for sizing information.
♦ For an enclosure employing conduit apertures, obtain conduit, flanges, gasket(s), baf-
fles, and duct seal. These are not supplied with the enclosure.
Installation
Installing the hardened enclosure involves these tasks:
1. Uncrating the materials
2. Leveling the enclosure
3. Connecting the air cooling system (vortex or air conditioner)
4. Assembling the signal port (or passing cables through water-proof conduit)
5. Connecting power to the enclosure
6. Installing the computer equipment into the enclosure
7. Cabling the enclosure
8. Installing and adjusting the monitor
9. Attaching the operator input device(s)
10. Grounding internal equipment.
Perform only the steps that apply to your enclosure’s configuration (air cooling system and cabling
entry method).
NOTE
Perform the steps in the order shown.
Uncrating the Materials

Identify all parts and inspect parts for damage.
Leveling the Enclosure

The enclosure has four adjustable feet, each of which is connected to the enclosure’s chassis by a
threaded rod. You can adjust the distance between the enclosure’s chassis and a foot by rotating a
foot. Use a level to determine when the enclosure is level. Adjust each foot until you are satisfied
with the enclosure’s levelness.
33
Connecting a Vortex Air Cooler

Perform this procedure only if your enclosure includes a vortex air cooler.
1. Connect the vortex cooler’s incoming air line (before the filter) to instrument air.
Refer to Figure 2-34 and to “NEMA 4/4X Hardened Enclosures” in Site Planning
(B0193AB) for air supply specifications.
Vortex Cooler
Solenoid Valve
Instrument
Air Input
Filter
Ducting
Tube
(cool air
output)
Thermostat
Figure 2-34. Vortex Cooling System
NOTE
Ensure that the vortex cooler’s ducting tube, which delivers the cooled air to the
enclosure’s interior, is not blocked. Do not remove the cap from the end of the duct-
ing tube.
2. If not already connected, plug the vortex cooler’s power cord into the 4-position
power strip inside the enclosure.
Connecting an Air Conditioning System

Perform this procedure only if your enclosure includes an air conditioning system.
! CAUTION
The air conditioner requires a dedicated power source. Do not connect the air con-
ditioner to the enclosure’s internal 4-position power strip.
34
An electrician should connect a power cable of the proper size between the enclosure’s air condi-
tioner and an electrical junction box. Make the connection on the air conditioner’s terminal
block. The junction box must include an on/off switch and should be connected to a 15 A circuit,
separate from that of the enclosure’s 4-position power strip, that can handle a 40 A start current.
Refer to “NEMA 4/4X Hardened Enclosures” in Site Planning (B0193AB) for 230 V ac
specifications.
! CAUTION
Systems with an 8-position signal port: Do not pass the air conditioning system’s
power cable through the 8-position rectangular signal port. This may introduce
noise onto the signal cables.
Systems employing waterproof conduit mount: Minimize noise on the signal cables
by running the 4-position power strip cable and air conditioner power cable
through one conduit and running the signal cables through a different conduit.
The following procedure connects the enclosure’s air conditioner to a dedicated power source.
The steps include:
1. Partially disassembling the power cable port (only on an enclosure with a signal port).
2. Providing power to the air conditioner.
3. Reassembling the power cable port (only on an enclosure with a signal port).
4. Connecting the power cable to a switched junction box.

(only on systems with an 8-position signal port)
The power cable port is a round assembly through which the air conditioner’s power cable must
pass. The assembly permits the cable to exit the enclosure while assuring a NEMA 4X seal.
1. Identify the round power cable port to be used for the air conditioner’s power cable.
When facing the enclosure’s left side, the air conditioner’s power cable port is located
at the bottom-left corner of the enclosure. Enclosures that employ an air conditioner
have two round power cable ports. As viewed from the enclosure’s left side, the port
on the right is for the air conditioner’s power cable, and the port on the left is for the
enclosure’s power cable.
2. From the outside of the enclosure, use a hex key wrench (3/16 inches across flats)
to loosen the assembly’s four compression screws until you can pull out the bushing
seal assembly. The bushing seal assembly includes the four compression screws.
Providing Power to the Air Conditioner

You must connect the air conditioner to a power source. You do this by bringing a power cable
into the enclosure and connecting it to the air conditioner. The enclosure has a terminal block for
this purpose.
1. Pass the air conditioner’s power cable through the power cable port.
NOTE
The cable diameter must be .165 inches minimum, .70 inches maximum.
35
2. Locate the air conditioner’s terminal block assembly, which has a cover.
3. Remove the cover from the terminal block.
4. Connect the power cable to the air conditioner’ terminal block.
5. Dress the cable as needed, and secure it.
6. Replace the cover onto the terminal block.

(only on systems with an 8-position signal port)
Adapt the multidiameter core module (MDM) to the cable.
The front surface of the MDM is round and splits into two halves made up of peelable layers of
alternating colored shims. There is also a solid center plug. As you modify one half, similarly
modify the other half. The two halves must be identical in size.
0-1 mm
Figure 2-35. Cross Section of an MDM (NEMA 4/4X Hardened Enclosure)
1. Discard the MDM’s solid center plug.

2. Test whether the cable fits snugly between the two halves of the MDM such that the
gap between the two blocks must be less than 1 mm (.04 in). Refer to Figure 2-35.
If the gap is within 0 and 1 mm, skip to Step 5.
3. Starting from the center of the MDM, peel away one layer of rubber (shim) from each
half of the MDM and check whether the input power cable fits snugly between the
two halves.
4. If the cable is still too large to fit snugly between the two halves, peel away another
layer and test the fit. Peel away as many layers as needed until the gap between the two
blocks is less than 1 mm (.04 in).
NOTE
Small air gaps are removed by compressing the cable port assembly (later in this
procedure).
36
5. Lubricate the MDM assembly.

The container of accessories inside the enclosure provides a tube of lubricant for this
purpose.
6. Place both halves of the MDM around the input power cable.
7. Slide the MDM into the power cable port.
The two halves of the MDM assembly should fit together snugly with the power cable
running through the center.
8. Tighten the four compression screws by alternately tightening two screws and then
the other two screws (similar to the way you tighten automotive tire lugs).
This method distributes pressure evenly across the power cable port assembly.
Connecting the Power Cable to a Junction Box

Connect the power cable to a junction box. The junction box must include a switch for control-
ling the air conditioner and should be connected to a 15 A 120 V circuit that can handle a 40 A
start current (refer to the chapter “NEMA 4/4X Hardened Enclosures” in Site Planning
(B0193AB) for 230 V ac specifications). This circuit should be different from the circuit that pro-
vides power to the workstation. Observe proper polarity when installing the power cable.
Assembling the Signal Cable Port

This part of the installation involves collecting the signal cables inside the enclosure and routing
them through the waterproof 8-position signal port to the enclosure’s exterior.
Determining the Cables to Exit the Enclosure

Collect and identify each of the signal cables (Ethernet, speakers, thermostatically controlled
switch, and so on) that will exit the enclosure.
Thermostat Cable
Optionally, you can monitor the enclosure for cooling system malfunction by connecting the
enclosure’s built-in thermostatically controlled switch to an alarm device (such as a digital input of
an FBM17) and allowing the I/A Series software to monitor the cooling system.
NOTE
Do not confuse the enclosure’s thermostat with the vortex thermostat that comes
with a vortex-configured enclosure. Refer to “Vortex Cooling System” on page 34.
Alternatively, you might connect the thermostatically controlled switch to an audible alarm, such
as a bell. Run the thermostat cable through the signal cable port as described later in this docu-
ment. The thermostat is a normally open (NO) contact.
Speaker Cable
Some I/A Series workstations include an optional sound card and speakers. You can replace the
speaker cable with a cable of the proper length and diameter to accommodate placement of speak-
ers outside of the enclosure.
37
NOTE
Speakers may be inaudible if placed inside the enclosure. Obtain waterproof speak-
ers if you are going to place speakers outside of the enclosure.
Cabling Entry
Your enclosure uses one of these cabling ports:
♦ Rectangular, waterproof, 8-position signal cable assembly
♦ Conduit mount.
! CAUTION
Do not pass power cables through a signal cable port or signal conduit.
Depending on your method of cabling, perform one of the following two procedures.
Assembling the Signal Cable Port Assembly

The signal cable port is a rectangular-shaped assembly through which signal cables pass from the
inside of the enclosure to its outside.
If you need to pass more than eight cables through the signal cable port, you will require an addi-
tional signal port assembly (P0913NR).
NOTE
You are responsible for cutting the aperture for an additional signal port.
To assemble a signal port assembly:

1. Disassemble the compression unit and the multidiameter core modules (MDMs)
from the signal cable port by performing the following steps.
a. From the inside of the enclosure, loosen the compression unit with a crescent
wrench or 1/2-inch socket wrench until you can extract the compression unit
from the signal cable port.
b. Remove the eight MDM modules and set them aside.
The MDM modules (P/N CS20) provided with the 8-position signal port
accommodate round cables with a minimum diameter of 0.165 inches (.5 inch maxi-
mum). If you need to pass flat cables through the signal cable port, obtain flat-cable
MDM modules (P/N CS10) by contacting:
NMP Corporation
P.O. Box 35493
Tulsa, OK 74153-0493
U.S.A.
Phone (918) 252-0481
Fax (918) 254-2544
A CS10 has a width of 20 mm and a height of 40 mm, and takes the space of two
standard (20 mm square) MDMs.
38
2. Plan which cable will run through each of the signal cable port frame’s eight
positions.
TIP
Photocopy “Signal Cable Port Template (NEMA 4/4X Hardened Enclosure)” on
page 39 and mark each position with the name of the cable running through it or
mark the words “not used” for positions to be filled with a plug.
CS40 CS40
.023mm
.023mm
Comp Unit
Figure 2-36. Signal Cable Port Template (NEMA 4/4X Hardened Enclosure)
NOTE
Unused positions are for future use.
3. Pass all the cables through the frame.

4. Starting at one end of the signal cable port frame (and using the photocopied tem-
plate), fill each position as follows:
NOTE
Fill all empty positions with a multidiameter module (MDM) plus its core. This is
necessary to prevent water from entering the enclosure through unused positions.
39
Figure 2-37. Cables Passing Through the Signal Cable Port (NEMA 4/4X Hardened Enclosure)
a. Adapt an MDM to each cable.

Each module comes complete with two halves, including peelable layers (shims)
and a solid center plug.
NOTE
The front surface of an MDM is 20 mm square and splits into two halves. As you
peel layers of rubber from one half, similarly modify the other half. The two halves
must be identical in size.
0-1 mm
Figure 2-38. Adapting an MDM to Fit a Cable (NEMA 4/4X Hardened Enclosure)
Discard the MDM’s solid center plug.

Test whether the cable fits snugly between the two halves of the MDM such that
the gap between the two blocks must be less than 1 mm (.04 in). Refer to
Figure 2-38.
If the gap is within 0 and 1 mm, skip to Step b.
40
Starting from the center of the MDM, peel away one layer of rubber (alternating
color shims) from each half of the MDM and check whether the cable fits snugly
between the two halves.
NOTE
The final gap between the two halves of the MDM should be less than 1 mm
(.04 in). Refer to Figure 2-38.
If the gap cable is greater than 1 mm (.04 in), peel away another layer and test the
fit. Continue peeling layers until you obtain a gap of less than 1 mm (.04 in).
NOTE
Small air gaps are removed by compressing the signal cable assembly (later in this
procedure).
b. Lubricate the MDM assembly.

A container of accessories inside the enclosure includes a tube of lubricant for this
purpose.
Figure 2-39. Lubricating an MDM Assembly (NEMA 4/4X Hardened Enclosure)
c. Place one half of an MDM assembly into the frame. Orient the MDM as shown
in Figure 2-40.
! CAUTION
The split between the two halves of the MDM must be vertical.
41
Figure 2-40. Mounting an MDM into the Signal Cable Port Frame
(NEMA 4/4X Hardened Enclosure)
d. Place the second half of the MDM beside the cable.

The two halves of the MDM assembly should fit together snugly with the cable
e. Continue in this manner for each of the cables and plugged MDMs.
f. Install the compression unit. Refer to Figure 2-41.
You can mount the compression unit in any location within the signal port frame
so long as it is oriented to expand and compress the MDMs.
g. From the inside of the enclosure, tighten the compression unit with a crescent
wrench or 1/2-inch socket wrench until no light shines through any of the MDM
modules.
NOTE
Stop turning when you have reached a torque setting of 8 to 10 lbs • ft (96 to
120 lbs • in).
42
Compression Unit
Figure 2-41. Tightening the Compression Unit (NEMA 4/4X Hardened Enclosure)
Viewed from outside the enclosure, the completed signal cable port should resemble Figure 2-42.
Regardless of the number of cables, their sizes, and their positions, your cable port must have a
tight seal.
Figure 2-42. Example of a Completed Signal Cable Port (NEMA 4/4X Hardened Enclosure)
Conduit Mount Assembly

Installing the conduits and fittings is your responsibility.
! CAUTION
To prevent power line noise, pass power cables through one conduit and pass signal
cables through another conduit.
43
To mount conduit to the enclosure:

1. Cut appropriately sized apertures through the enclosure.
It is suggested that you position the conduit apertures near the top of the enclosure to
minimize the loss of cool air.
2. Mount the conduits.
Provide the necessary gasket(s) to maintain a NEMA 4/4X rating.
Use a baffle inside each conduit to prevent the enclosure’s cool air from escaping
through the conduit.
The use of duct seal to ensure a tight seal is recommended.
3. Pass the signal cables through one conduit.
4. Pass power cables through the other conduit.
Connecting the NEMA 4/4X Enclosure to a Power Source

An electrician should connect a power cable of the proper size between the enclosure’s internal 4-
position power strip and an electrical junction box. Since the enclosure has no power switch, the
junction box must include an on/off switch, which should be connected to a 15 A circuit that is
separate from the air conditioner’s power supply.
NOTE
It is assumed that the computer equipment will run continuously.
Perform the following procedure to connect the enclosure to a power source. The steps include:
♦ Partially disassembling the round power cable port assembly
♦ Connecting the power cable to the enclosure’s internal power strip
♦ Reassembling the power cable port
♦ Connecting the power cable to a junction box.

The power cable port is a round assembly through which the enclosure’s power cable must pass. It
permits the cable to exit the enclosure while assuring a NEMA 4X seal.
The power cable port assembly is located on the left side of the enclosure toward the front of the
enclosure.
From the outside of the enclosure, use a hex key wrench to loosen the four compression screws
until you can pull out the bushing seal assembly. The bushing seal assembly includes the four
compression screws.
The assembly includes an MDM module, which separates into two halves.
44
Connecting the Power Cable to the 4-Position Power Strip

To connect power to the enclosure:
1. Pass the power cable through the power cable port.
NOTE
The cable diameter must be .165 inches minimum, .70 inches maximum.
2. Connect the power cable to the IEC-320 power strip by connecting the proper wires
(line, neutral, and ground) to the three bused terminals inside the power strip.

Adapt the MDM module to the cable.
Each module has two halves and an adaptable multidiameter core (MDM), including peelable
layers (shims) and a solid center plug.
NOTE
The front surface of the MDM splits into two halves. As you modify one half, simi-
larly modify the other half. The two halves must be identical in size.
1. Discard the MDM’s solid center plug.

2. Test whether the cable fits snugly between the two halves of the MDM such that the
gap between the two blocks must be less than 1 mm (.04 in). Refer to Figure 2-35.
If the gap is within 0 and 1 mm, skip to Step 5.
3. Starting from the center of the MDM, peel away one layer of rubber (shim) from each
half of the MDM and check whether the cable fits snugly between the two halves.
4. If the cable is still too large to fit snugly between the two halves, peel away another
layer and test the fit. Peel away as many layers are you need until the gap is less than
1 mm (.04 in) as illustrated in “Adapting an MDM to Fit a Cable (NEMA 4/4X
Hardened Enclosure)” on page 40.
NOTE
Small air gaps will be removed by compressing the power cable port assembly (later
in this procedure).
5. Lubricate the MDM assembly. Refer to “Lubricating an MDM Assembly (NEMA

4/4X Hardened Enclosure)” on page 41.
A container of accessories inside the enclosure includes a tube of lubricant for this
purpose.
6. Place both halves of the MDM around the power cable.
7. Slide the MDM into the power cable port.
The two halves of the MDM assembly should fit together snugly with the power cable
45
8. Tighten the four compression screws by alternately tightening two screws and then
the other two screws (similar to the way you tighten automotive tire lugs).
This method distributes pressure evenly across the power cable port assembly.
Connecting the Power Cable to a Junction Box

Connect the power cable to a junction box. The junction box must include an on/off switch and
should be connected to a 15 A circuit. Observe proper polarity when installing the power cable.
Installing the Processor and Modules into the NEMA 4/4X

Enclosure
1. Place the processor and peripheral equipment onto the enclosure’s bottom shelf.
Figure 2-43 shows typical workstation equipment for an enclosure configured for a
typical 50 Series system with A-, B-, C-, D- and F-size processors/modules. Refer to
Chapter 4 “System Module/Processor Installation” on page 116 for a description of
these processors/modules.
Figure 2-44 shows a 70 Series processor or 50 Series E-size processor, which is housed
in a minitower case.
NOTE
Server 70 processors are not installed in NEMA 4/4X enclosures.
Wing Nut
Adjustable Wing Nut

Mounting Bar
Threaded Rod
Processor Processor
Processor Enclosure
Wall
Bottom Shelf
Figure 2-43. Placing 50 Series Hardware on the NEMA 4/4X Hardened Enclosure’s Bottom Shelf
46
Wing Nut
Adjustable
Mounting Bar Wing Nut
Threaded Rod
Workstation Enclosure
Wall
Bottom Shelf
Figure 2-44. Placing 50 Series Model 51, Style E Processor or 70 Series Processor
on the NEMA 4/4X Hardened Enclosure’s Bottom Shelf
2. Inside the side bars shown in Figure 2-45 are two metal mounts which slide back and
forth. Slide them where you want the threaded rods to be positioned over the worksta-
tion (directly over the front and rear of the workstation).
Bottom Shelf
Slide a metal Slide a metal

mount here. mount here.
Threaded Threaded
Rod Workstation Rod
Slide a metal Slide a metal

mount here. mount here.
Threaded Threaded
Rod Side Bar Side Bar Rod
Hardened Enclosure Interior (Top View)

Figure 2-45. Positioning the Threaded Rods
3. Place the threaded rods into the metal mounts on either side of the workstation, and
secure them with the included screws and washers, as demonstrated in Figure 2-45.
4. Screw one wing nut down each threaded rod (wing-side down) at approximately the
same level as the top of the workstation.
47
5. Position the two adjustable mounting bars over the top of the equipment, as shown in
Figure 2-44, and rest them on the wing nuts.
6. Fasten the workstation firmly to the shelf by lowering the height of the mounting bars
until they are flush with the workstation. You do this by first tightening the wing nut
at the top of each threaded rod, and then tightening the wing nut located below the
mounting bar so that the mounting bar is locked between the two wing nuts.
Connecting All of the Processor’s Cables

For 70 Series equipment, refer to the Hardware and Software Specific Instructions for 70 Series
Processors document included with your processor. Additionally, you can refer to “AW/WP70,
Style A- and AW70, Style B-Based Peripheral Device Installation Procedures for Current 70 Series
Processors” on page 348, and Site Planning (B0193AB) and System Maintenance (B0193AD) for
additional information.
For 50 Series equipment, refer to “50 Series Data Storage Devices, General Information” on
page 157 and “AP50/51-, WP50/51-, or AW50/51-Based Peripheral Device Installation Proce-
dures” on page 383 for more information.
NOTE
Each signal cable must have a minimum diameter of .165 inches (.5 inch
maximum) to attain a proper NEMA 4X seal through the signal cable port.
1. Discard the two NEMA 15 line cords that come with the workstation and monitor.
Replace the discarded line cords with the two 6-foot IEC line cords, which are packed
in the enclosure’s accessory kit.
If you need to power additional devices, you can obtain additional 6-foot IEC
line cords (P0170PE) from Invensys Systems, Inc.
2. Plug the workstation’s power cord into the 4-position power strip.
NOTE
The cables required for your computer depend on your workstation’s configuration.
You may not require all of the cables listed in the following steps.
3. Connect one or two Ethernet cables to the computer, if they are needed.
4. Connect the speakers’ cable to the computer’s sound card port, if it is needed.
5. There are two captive cables inside the enclosure. One cable, labeled “Keyboard”, con-
nects to a connector on the wall of the enclosure marked with a symbol of a keyboard.
The other cable, labeled “Mouse”, connects to a connector on the wall of the enclo-
sure marked with a symbol of a mouse.
48
From inside the enclosure:

For this Configuration Do this
70 Series processor Plug the internal pointing device cable (labeled “Mouse”) into
with a pointing device the mouse port on the rear of the computer.
70 Series processor Plug the internal keyboard cable (labeled “Keyboard”) into the
with a keyboard/pointing keyboard port on the rear of the computer.
device Plug the internal pointing device cable (labeled “Mouse”) into
the mouse port on the rear of the computer.
50 Series equipment Plug the internal keyboard cable (labeled “Keyboard”) into the
with a pointing device adapter cable (P0913MZ, provided with pointing device).
Plug the other end of the adapter cable into the 50 Series
computer’s keyboard receptacle.
50 Series equipment Plug the internal keyboard cable (labeled “Keyboard”) into the
with a keyboard/pointing adapter cable (P0913MZ, provided with the keyboard/pointing
device device).
Plug the other end of the adapter cable into the 50 Series
computer’s keyboard receptacle.
Installing the Monitor into the NEMA 4/4X Hardened Enclosure

1. Place the 20/21-inch monitor on the enclosure’s top shelf.
2. Adjust the viewing position of the monitor so that the monitor is touching the front
of the enclosure.
With the enclosure’s monitor door closed, ensure that you can view the monitor to
your satisfaction. If necessary, move the monitor right/left and front/back until you
have found the best position.
3. Obtain the supplied hold-down hardware (three clamp assemblies) and instructions
(located in the accessories kit inside the enclosure).
One clamp fastens the monitor’s base (pedestal) at the rear of the monitor, another
clamp fastens the monitor’s base on the left side of the monitor, and the remaining
clamp fastens the monitor’s base at the right side of the monitor.
4. For each of the three clamp assemblies, perform the following steps from the rear of
the enclosure:
a. Position a rectangular clamp over the base of the monitor so that you can pass the
provided bolt through the hole in the clamp and then through a slot in the shelf.
! CAUTION
Select a position on the terminal’s base that is horizontal (not sloped) and offers a
secure hold.
b. From the bottom of the shelf, slip a washer and a locking washer onto the bolt.
c. Fasten the provided wing nut onto the bolt and tighten.
5. Using the provided IEC power cord, plug one end into the monitor and the other end
into the 4-position power strip.
49
6. Connect the monitor’s video cable between the monitor and the computer.
Adjusting the Monitor

NOTE
To boot a 70 Series processor, the computer must have a keyboard attached.
Turn on the computer and monitor. If necessary, adjust the monitor’s image for brightness, con-
trast, and position.
Check the view through the enclosure’s window. If necessary, reposition the monitor as described
above.
Attaching the External Operator Input Device

Attach the operator input device (pointing device or keyboard/pointing device) to the enclosure’s
external shelf.
1. Place the pointing device or keyboard/pointing device on the enclosure’s external
shelf.
2. Route the cable(s) through the hole(s) in the shelf.
Two connectors are located below the shelf. The keyboard/pointing device’s connector
(labeled with the symbol of a keyboard) is on the left. The pointing device’s connector
(labeled with the symbol of a mouse) is on the right.
3. Depending on your system’s configuration, from the outside of the enclosure:
For this Configuration Do this
70 Series processor Plug the pointing device’s cable into the connector
with a pointing device marked with a mouse. Refer also to “Disconnecting
(single cable) the 70 Series Processor’s Keyboard” on page 53.
70 Series processor Plug the pointing device’s cable into the connector
with a keyboard/pointing marked with the mouse.
device (two cables) Plug the keyboard’s cable into the connector marked
with a keyboard. Refer also to “Disconnecting the
70 Series Processor’s Keyboard” on page 53.
50 Series equipment Plug the pointing device’s cable into the connector
with a pointing device marked with the keyboard (not the mouse).
(single cable) Cap the mouse socket.
50 Series equipment Plug the keyboard/pointing device’s cable into the
with a keyboard/pointing connector marked with a keyboard.
device (single cable) Cap the mouse socket.
NOTE
To prevent water from entering an unused connector socket, cover the unused con-
nector with the captive cap attached to the connector.
50
! CAUTION
For 70 Series processors, do not unplug the pointing device during computer opera-
tion. Unplugging the pointing device while the system is running causes the loss of
cursor control. Should the cursor freeze, plug in the pointing device and reboot the
system.
Grounding Internal Equipment

Each enclosure includes a grounding lug located near the 4-position power strip on the floor of
the enclosure. The grounding lug facilitates the grounding of TCAs or any other item requiring
access to the green wire ground.
Operation (NEMA 4/4X Hardened Enclosure)

The following sections describe how to use the enclosure and process equipment during normal
operation.
NOTE
A vortex-configured enclosure emits a high frequency sound when the vortex cooler
is running. This sound is louder when the enclosure is open, that is, when a door is
open.
Operating a Door
The following instructions describe how to unlock and open a door, or close and lock a door.
To unlock and open a door

1. Insert the key into the keyhole.
! WARNING
The interior of a vortex-configured enclosure is pressurized. Be prepared for the
door to slightly lunge forward as soon as the door is unlocked. To minimize the
door’s movement, press one hand against the door and turn the key with your other
hand.
2. While pushing the door toward the enclosure, turn the key counterclockwise until the
door unlocks.
3. Swing the door open.
To close and lock a door

1. Swing the door closed.
2. Insert the key into the keyhole.
3. While pushing the door toward the enclosure, turn the key clockwise.
The door locks into position.
51
Operating a Pointing Device
! CAUTION
Do not unplug the 70 Series pointing device. When the system is running, unplug-
ging the pointing device causes loss of cursor movement. Should the cursor freeze,
plug in the pointing device and reboot the system.
The pointer’s center button is pressure sensitive. The harder you press, the faster the pointer
moves across the screen. It takes some practice until you are able to move the pointer without
overshooting.
To move the pointer

♦ Press (rock) the center button toward the desired direction.
To make selections
♦ Use the left and right buttons to make selections, similar to using a mouse
or trackball. The top button is not used.
Operating a Keyboard
During operation, you can plug into or unplug the keyboard.
! CAUTION
Be careful not to short the keyboard’s connector pins.
Refer to “Disconnecting the 70 Series Processor’s Keyboard” on page 53.

For systems configured with only a pointing device (that is, without a keyboard), you can use the
standard computer keyboard (that is, a PS/2 style keyboard that is not hardened) for booting or
data entry.
To use the PS/2 style keyboard on a 70 Series system

1. Connect the standard PS/2 style keyboard’s connector to the P0913MX adapter cable
packed with the pointing device.
2. Locate the socket on the front of the enclosure marked with the symbol of a keyboard
located under the external shelf.
3. Unplug the captive cap that protects the socket when it is not in use.
4. Carefully plug the other end of the P0193MX adapter cable into the keyboard socket.
When you are done using the keyboard, unplug the keyboard and cap the socket to prevent water
from entering the socket.
To use a keyboard on a 50 Series system

1. Unplug the pointing device from the keyboard socket under the external shelf.
2. Connect the standard keyboard’s connector to the P0913MY adapter cable.
3. Plug the other end of the adapter cable (P0913MY) into the keyboard socket from
which you just removed the pointing device.
52
When you are done using the keyboard, unplug the keyboard and plug in the pointing device into
the connector to continue normal use.
Disconnecting the 70 Series Processor’s Keyboard

During operation, you can plug into or unplug the workstation’s keyboard. Be careful not to short
the keyboard’s connector pins.
70 Series processors require a keyboard to boot the system. You must remove the keyboard after
the processor has completed its boot sequence.
NOTE
A 70 Series processor configured with a pointing device (that is, without a key-
board/pointing device) may have a keyboard installed inside the enclosure.
Leaving the keyboard connected to the 70 Series processors inside the enclosure
allows the computer to boot while preventing operator access to the keyboard from
the outside.
Maintenance (NEMA 4/4X Hardened Enclosure)

The following sections describe the maintenance procedures for this enclosure.
Checking the Air Cooling System

If your enclosure’s air cooling system fails, the enclosure’s internal temperature rises, degrading the
workstation’s life. Occasional checks of the air cooling system are strongly recommended.
NOTE
You can ensure proper cooling by connecting the enclosure’s built-in thermostati-
cally controlled switch to an alarm device (such as a digital input channel of an
FBM17) and allowing the I/A Series software to monitor the cooling system. Alter-
natively, you can connect the thermostat’s normally open (NO) contact to an alarm
device of your choice.
The vortex cooler emits a high frequency sound and expels warm air up through the top of the
vortex unit.
Maintaining a Vortex Cooler

The vortex cooler has no moving parts and requires no maintenance.
The input line air filter needs replacement at periodic intervals. Refer to the manufacturer’s docu-
mentation supplied with the enclosure.
Maintaining an Air Conditioner

The air conditioner’s fans have a 50,000- to 60,000-hour lifetime, and the compressor unit is
rated with a 100,000-hour lifetime. No routine maintenance is necessary.
The air conditioning system is very quiet. You can check that it is working by opening the enclo-
sure’s back door and placing your hand near the air conditioner’s cold-air egress. You should feel a
cold flow of air into the enclosure.
53
Mounting Structures
Mounting structures are 19-inch wide frames for housing modules within an enclosure. The fol-
lowing paragraphs describe the types and installation of mounting structures and the types of
modules that each structure supports.
1x8, 2x8 Mounting Structures

The 1x8 mounting structure (see Figure 2-46) mounts in an IEMFA (ME24) or IEMFR (ME32)
metal enclosure, or mounts in a user-supplied 483 mm (19-inch) wide equipment frame. The 1x8
structure accepts processor X- and Z-Modules, Fieldbus Modules, and for AP20 configurations
only, data storage devices. (A 1x8 mounting structure requires a Y-adapter “Y-Adapter Installa-
tion” on page 148 in order to accept a Fieldbus Module.)
I O I O
Figure 2-46. 1x8 FBM Mounting Structure
Before you install a 1x8 mounting structure, ensure that mounting rails (DIN 46277 type) have
been installed for mounting the field termination connectors and the battery backup and status
tap assembly, if included. (Installation of these items is described later in this document.)
NOTE
Before proceeding with the 1x8 mounting structure mounting procedures, refer to
the Warning statement regarding separation of high- and low-voltage cables at the
beginning of this chapter on page 3.
Mount the 1x8 mounting structure according to your specific mounting requirements, as deter-
mined from the site planning specifications.
2x8 Mounting Structure

2x8 mounting structures are similar to two 1x8 structures, and are built into Industrial Enclosure
16 and 32 enclosures as configured at the time of order.
54
1x8, 2x8 Fieldbus Module (FBM) Mounting Structure

The 1x8 FBM mounting structure (see Figure 2-46) mounts in either an IEMFA (ME24) or
IEMFR (ME32) metal enclosure, or in a user-supplied rack. The structure is designed for mount-
ing in a standard 483 mm (19-in) EIA enclosure.
The 1x8 FBM mounting structure accepts only Fieldbus Modules. FBMs in either the four left- or
right-hand slots may be assigned to the upper or lower Fieldbus (refer to “Fieldbus Configuration
and Local Extension (1x8, 1x12, 2x8 FBM)” on page 205 for configuration and Fieldbus exten-
sion information.)
The left section of the mounting structure can contain up to four power modules, each providing
power to four FBMs. The upper power modules supply primary power and the lower ones supply
backup power. Circuit breakers are mounted above each pair of power modules.
A printed circuit board at the top of the FBM mounting structure and receptacles on the rear
crossmember provide power and process I/O bus connections to the modules. This design elimi-
nates the need for Y-adapters required to mount Fieldbus Modules as in conventional 1×8 mount-
ing structures in which power is supplied by a mounting structure bus.
2x8 FBM Mounting Structure

2x8 FBM mounting structures are similar to two 1x8 FBM structures, and are built into Indus-
trial Enclosure 16 and 32 as configured at the time of order. (Refer to “Fieldbus Configuration
and Local Extension (1x8, 1x12, 2x8 FBM)” on page 205 for configuration and Fieldbus exten-
sion information.)
1x12 Fieldbus Module (FBM) Mounting Structure

The 1x12 FBM mounting structure (see Figure 2-47) is a rack mounted assembly designed to
hold up to 12 Fieldbus Modules, or 11 Fieldbus Modules and 2 Fieldbus Isolators. It has 12
molded connector blocks for the Modules and Isolators, which are numbered 1 to 12 (left to
right) on the front of the structure. This structure accepts only Fieldbus Modules and does not
require Y-adapters (unlike the “1x8, 2x8 Mounting Structures” on page 54). FBMs in any of the
12 slots can be assigned to the upper or lower Fieldbus (refer to “Fieldbus and Nodebus Cabling”
on page 191). All 12 slots can be assigned to a single fieldbus. It is supplied with all necessary
hardware to support it in the following packages:
♦ 1x12 FBM Configurable Mounting Structure Kit (includes up to five 1x12 FBM
mounting structures)
♦ Fieldbus Module Metal Enclosure 60 (includes five 1x12 FBM mounting structures
and a specially designed metal enclosure).
The 1x12 FBM Configurable Mounting Structure Kit is a flexibly designed package which allows
you to install up to five 1x12 FBM mounting structures, depending on the number of FBMs you
want to support. The complete hardware for powering, grounding, communications, and moni-
toring the structures and their FBMs is included in this kit, tailored to your specific configuration.
You supply the metal enclosure which meets the necessary requirements outlined in 1x12 Fieldbus
Module Mounting Structure Installation and Wiring Instructions (B0400PK).
55
The Fieldbus Module Metal Enclosure 60 (ME60) package includes a 800 x 800 x 2000 mm
(31.5 x 31.5 x 86.6 in) vented metal enclosure, five 1x12 FBM mounting structures and all
equipment required to provide power and communications for up to 60 FBMs. This configura-
tion provides the maximum number of FBMs with the smallest footprint and lowest cost in a sin-
gle enclosure. The ME60 has front and rear doors for access to mount FBMs, TCAs, and their
associated wiring.
Also available are two complete packages which incorporate the 1x12 FBM mounting structure,
and can mount 12 FBMs directly without requiring Y-adapters. This structure does not support
the installation of any other type of module.
Rear Door
Front Door
1x12 FBM Mounting Structure
Fieldbus Module Metal Enclosure 60

Figure 2-47. 1x12 FBM Mounting Structure and Fieldbus Module Enclosure 60
50 Series Modular Mounting Structures

50 Series Modular Mounting Structures are available both as a single-height frame (referred to as
an MMS) or a double-height frame (referred to as a 2xMMS). Both types of structures are 483
mm (19 in) wide. The MMS (Figure 2-48) is designed to house 50 Series A-, B-, and D-size mod-
ules (see “50 Series, 70 Series, and Server 70 Module/Processor Installation” on page 108). It
mounts in IEMFA/ IEMFR (ME24/ME32) metal enclosures or in a user-supplied rack.
The 2xMMS (Figure 2-49) is designed to house 50 Series A-, B-, C-, D-, E-, and F-size mod-
ules/processors (see “50 Series, 70 Series, and Server 70 Module/Processor Installation” on
page 108). There are two versions of the 2xMMS: one for use in metal enclosures (Foxboro part
number P0971EA) and one for use in plastic (Industrial) enclosures (Foxboro part number
P0971EB). The 2xMMS structure can be configured to mount up to two rows of 50 Series mod-
ules either all or part of the way across its width.
56
Additional mounting hardware provides an optional moveable partition which divides the
2xMMS into two sections, provided in the following kits:
♦ Kit P0971YC - for 2xMMS for metal enclosures (P0971EA)
♦ Kit P0971YD - for 2xMMS for plastic enclosures (P0971EB).
A-, B-, and D-size modules are installed on the left side of this partition, and C-size, E-size, and F-
size processors are installed on the right. Up to two E-sized processor can be installed in the
2xMMS for the metal enclosures, and one E-sized processor can be installed in the 2xMMS for
the Industrial Enclosure 32. Refer to “2xMMS Module/Processor Configurations” on page 116
for a complete list of module and processor configurations which can be placed in the 2xMMS
structures.
The 2xMMS structure is preinstalled at the time of your order.
You must install the partition (if required) to provide the appropriate partitioning for the
modules.
Power
Figure 2-48. 50 Series Single-Height Modular Mounting Structure (MMS)
57
Adjustable Partition,
Kit Part Numbers:
P0971YC (for P0971EB (plastic))
P0971YD (for P0971EA (metal))
2xMMS
P0971EA
2xMMS
P0971EB
A-Size Module/ F-Size Processor

50/51 Style A 51 Style D Processor
Processor
B-Size Module/
Data Storage
Device
D-Size Module/ E-Size Processor/

Data Storage Device 51 Style E Processor
C-Size Processor/
50 Series Modules (Typical)
51 Style B/B1/C Processor
50 Series Processors (Typical)
Figure 2-49. 50 Series Dual-Height Modular Mounting Structure (2xMMS)
58
Printers – Placement and Mounting

I/A Series printers include the following:
♦ B/W dot-matrix printer 80
♦ Color dot-matrix printer 132
♦ Color PostScript™ printer
♦ Color PCL3 printer.
The printers are mounted either on a desk or table, as desired. For printer cabling instructions,
refer to “Printers – Connections to AW/WP70, Style A and AW70, Style B” on page 380 and
“Printers – AP50/51, WP50/51, or AW50/51 Application” on page 394.
VT100 Compatible Terminal, Placement and

Mounting
The VT100 compatible terminal is a desk-mounted device consisting of a display, a keyboard,
and an interconnecting cable. Proceed as follows:
1. Move the terminal to the general area where it will be used.
2. Unpack the terminal according to “Unpacking Procedure” on page 1.
3. Set the terminal power switch to the OFF position.
4. Connect the cable between the terminal and the keyboard.
For VT100 compatible terminal cabling instructions, refer to “VT100 Compatible Terminal –
AP50/51 or AW50/51 Application” on page 403.
Workstation Displays, Placement and Mounting

The I/A Series workstation displays consist of the following:
♦ WP30-based 20-inch workstation display
♦ AW70, WP70, AP50/51, WP50/51, AW50/51-based 21-inch workstation display
♦ AP51B1, WP51B1, AW51B1, AP51D, WP51D, and AW51D-based 17-inch work-
station display.
Refer to Table 9-2 for part numbers for these displays.
The above displays are designed for desktop mounting. [Workstation-mounted versions of the
21-inch displays are also available, for mounting in the Modular Industrial Workstation enclo-
sures. Refer to Modular Industrial Workstation Installation (B0193CE).] The displays may include
an optional, preinstalled touchscreen. (Configurations with the optional touchscreen also require
a GCIO Interface module.)
To install an I/A Series workstation display, proceed as follows:
1. Unpack the display according to the “Unpacking Procedure” on page 1.
2. Place the display in the desired location.
3. Set the display power switch to the OFF position.
59
4. If a GCIO interface module is included with the workstation display, mount the
workstation display on top of the GCIO interface module. This is done by sliding the
base of the workstation display under the holding clamps on the GCIO
interface module.
Workstation Input Devices, Placement and Mounting

The workstation input devices consist of the following 30, 50, and 70 Series-based peripherals:
♦ Modular keyboard
♦ Alphanumeric keyboard
♦ Annunciator keyboard
♦ Annunciator/numeric keyboard
♦ Mouse
♦ Trackball
♦ Industrial pointing device for WP30, 50 Series, and 70 Series processors.
These devices are generally placed on a flat work surface within easy reach of the operator. For
cabling instructions for the workstation input devices, refer to “System Module/Processor Installa-
tion” on page 101.
AP50/51, WP50/51, and AW50/51 Processors and

Associated Data Storage Devices
The AP50/51, WP50/51, and AW50/51 processors, and associated data storage devices (424 MB
hard disk, 535 MB hard disk, 1.3 GB hard disk, 2.1 GB hard disk, 4.2 GB hard disk, 9.1 GB
hard disk, 150 MB streaming tape, 5 GB 4 mm tape drive, 12.0 GB 4 mm tape drive, and the
644 MB CD-ROM) can be mounted in a stacked configuration, as shown in Figure 2-50. (In
some installations, this mounting method is an alternative to mounting these devices in an
I/A Series enclosure.)
NOTE
It is recommended that not more than six devices be stacked on top of each other
Figure 2-50. Stacking 50 Series Devices
60
To install these storage devices, refer to “50 Series, 70 Series, and Server 70 Module/Processor
Installation” on page 108.
Dual Workstation Displays

The dual workstation display adds a second display to a WP51 or AW51 (Figure 2-51). The dis-
play can be either tabletop or workstation mounted and can optionally include a touchscreen.
Part numbers for these displays are available on Table 9-3 on page 342.
NOTE
You can connect up to four displays to the 70 Series processor. Refer to “Multi-
Head Display Configuration” on page 372.
The dual workstation display consists of the following:

♦ Alphanumeric keyboard
♦ Mouse or trackball
♦ Primary and secondary 17 inch/20 inch/21 inch workstation displays
♦ Optionally up to two Graphic Controller Input/Output (GCIO) interfaces between
the WP51 or AW51 and the annunciator and touchscreen peripherals. A GCIO is
required for annunciator, annunciator numeric keyboards, and the optional touch-
screen. (One GCIO accommodates up to two annunciator or annunciator/numeric
keyboards.)
♦ Optionally, up to four annunciator keyboards.
To install a dual workstation display, proceed as follows:
1. Unpack the displays, any GCIO(s), and keyboards according to the “Unpacking Pro-
cedure” on page 1.
2. Place the display and associated devices in their desired locations.
3. Set the WP51 or AW51 power switch to the OFF position.
4. If there is a GCIO, mount the display on top of it. This is done by sliding the base of
the display under the holding clamps of the GCIO interface module.
For cabling instructions, refer to the description “Dual Workstation Display Cabling” on
page 415.
Refer to Chapter 9 “Peripheral Device Installation” for part numbers for the equipment shown in
Figure 2-51.
61
20-Inch/21-Inch Display 20-Inch/21-Inch Display

(with or without Touchscreen) (with or without Touchscreen)
GCIO Interface Module GCIO Interface Module

(rear view) (rear view)
Annunciator Keyboard Annunciator Keyboard
Annunciator/Numeric Keyboard Annunciator/Numeric Keyboard
Secondary Workstation Display
or Industrial
Trackball Pointing Device
Processor or
(WP51D/AW51D shown as representative)
Alphanumeric Keyboard Mouse
Figure 2-51. Dual Workstation Display Configuration
Panel Display Station and A/M Station Mounting

The Panel Display Station and Auto/Manual Station mount in housings, which are in turn
mounted in an instrument panel. The two devices can be mounted in either of two
configurations:
♦ close coupled, in which both devices are mounted in a single housing assembly
♦ separately mounted, in which each device is mounted in its own separate housing.
62
NOTE
For panel cutout dimensions, refer to Site Planning (B0193AB).
Close Coupled Panel Display Station and A/M Station

Installation
To install the Panel Display Station and Auto/Manual Station in the close coupled
configuration, refer to Figure 2-52 and perform the following steps:
1. Insert the housing assembly into the panel cut-out.
2. Attach the upper and lower mounting brackets to the housing assembly by inserting
the tabs on brackets into the slots in the housing assembly. (Note that the upper
bracket can be mounted only on top of the housing assembly, and the lower bracket
can be mounted only on the bottom. This is because the mounting flanges on the
brackets are located in different positions.)
3. Tighten the threaded shaft on each mounting bracket against the panel.
4. Slide the Panel Display Station and Auto Manual Station into the housing assembly.
(A latch at the bottom front of each device engages the housing assembly when the
device is fully inserted.)
For cabling instructions for the Panel Display Station and A/M Station, see “Panel Display and
Auto/Manual Station Interface Cabling” on page 553.
Upper Mounting Threaded Shaft

Bracket
Slot
Tab
Flange
Close Coupled
Housing Assembly
(single unit)
Lower Mounting
Bracket
Panel
Figure 2-52. Close Coupled Panel Display and A/M Station, Housing Installation
63
Separately Mounted Panel Display Station Installation

To install the Panel Display Station in the separately mounted configuration, refer to
Figure 2-53 and perform the following steps:
1. Insert the housing into the panel cut-out.
2. Attach the upper and lower mounting brackets to the housing by inserting the tabs on
brackets into the slots in the housing. (Note that the upper bracket can be mounted
only on top of the housing, and the lower bracket can be mounted only on the bot-
tom. This is because the mounting flanges on the brackets are located in different
positions.)
3. Tighten the threaded shaft on each mounting bracket against the panel.
4. Slide the Panel Display Station into the housing. (A latch at the bottom front of the
Panel Display Station engages the housing when fully inserted.)
For cabling instructions for the separately mounted Panel Display Station, refer to “Panel
Display and Auto/Manual Station Interface Cabling” on page 553.
Upper Mounting
Slot Bracket Threaded Shaft
Housing
Panel
Lower Mounting
Bracket
Tab Flange
Figure 2-53. Auto/Manual Stations, Housing Installation
64
3. Power and Earth (Ground)
Connections
This chapter describes how to set up power and earth (grounding) connections for I/A Series
system equipment.
! WARNING
To prevent electrical shock hazard, connection of this equipment to your main
power source(s) must be made using wiring methods that conform to local electrical
code requirements.
The system main power and earth distribution networks are described in Site Planning
(B0193AB). The following subsections present procedures which describe the power and earth
connections to the individual I/A Series units. These procedures assume that the power and earth
networks described in the above document are in place before you install the equipment.
NOTE
The term “secondary power” used in the following text is also commonly referred to
as “backup power.”
! WARNING
To prevent electrical shock hazard and signal interference, high voltage main power
cables (those carrying 30 V rms or greater, or 60 V dc or greater) must be kept sepa-
rate from low voltage signal cables (those carrying less than 30 V rms, or less than
60 V dc). Separate conduit, cable runs, and so forth, must be used, as well as sepa-
rate cable entry into the enclosure. The minimum allowable separation between
high and low voltage cables is 50 mm (2 in), at all points in the cable run.
Main Power Connections

Main power consists of primary and secondary power. Note the following voltage and main power
distribution requirements for each enclosure before you connect main power:
♦ Voltage – The I/A Series enclosures accept either of the following types of main
power:
♦ ac – 100, 120, 220, or 240 V
♦ dc – 24 or 125 V — Exceptions: The AP50/51, WP50/51, AW50/51
processors do not accept dc power.
65
B0193AC – Rev U 3. Power and Earth (Ground) Connections
Mounting structures for the 50 Series use only primary ac power. An optional ac
transfer switch may be used with these structures if required. This switch feeds either a
primary or a secondary ac power source to power 50 Series equipment as long as one
of the input feeds is available. 1x8, 1x8 FBM, 2x8, and 2x8 FBM mounting structures
can use both primary and secondary power.
To determine the voltage used by an enclosure, refer to the equipment data label on
the enclosure.
♦ Main Power Distribution – An enclosure can accept redundant (for example, non-
stop) or non-redundant (for example, backup or battery backup) power. To determine
the power used by the individual enclosures in your system, review the power distribu-
tion information developed during the site planning phase.
! WARNING
To avoid personal injury or equipment damage, ensure that main system power is
turned off before proceeding with the primary power connections.
NOTE
For simplicity, the power distribution and connection diagrams in this section show
main and backup power as being both ac or both dc. In practice, however, dc power
may be used to back up ac, or ac power can be used to back up dc.
Industrial Enclosure 16, Power Connections

To connect the power lines refer to Figure 3-1 and Figure 3-2, and proceed as follows:
2. Open the right side door of the enclosure to access the junction boxes. (Two junction
boxes are located in the field termination area.)
3. Place the junction box power switches in the OFF position.
4. Remove the bottom cover from each junction box by inserting the hex driver tool
(X0197AZ) into the access hole, applying pressure, and lifting the cover from its
place.
5. Route the power lines to the junction boxes.
6. Connect the power lines as shown in Figure 3-3 (for ac power), or Figure 3-4 (for dc
power).
7. Replace the junction box covers. Power is supplied to the internal 2x8 or 2x8 FBM
mounting structures via the power out connectors.
66
3. Power and Earth (Ground) Connections B0193AC – Rev U
Junction Box
Junction Box Power Out

Connectors
Power Switch/
Bottom Circuit Breaker
Junction Box Cover
NOTE: Alternatively, the junction boxes may be Access

located on the left side of the enclosure. Hole
Figure 3-1. Industrial Enclosure 16, Junction Box Location
Non-Redundant Redundant Power

Power Connection Connection
NOTE: Cooling fans have JB JB

been omitted for
clarity. I I I I I I I I
T T
MS MS
JB - Junction Box I I I I I I I I
JB JB
MS - Mounting Structure
I - Industrial Power
Module T T
T - Termination Block
Main Secondary Primary

(ac or dc) Main Main
(ac or dc)
Figure 3-2. Industrial Enclosure 16, Main Power Distribution
67
Non-Redundant Power Redundant Power
Upper Upper
N N L L Junction N N L L Junction
Box Box
(cover (cover
Earth Line removed) Earth Line removed)
Neutral Neutral
NOTE: If the enclosure is

designed for top cable
entry, the junction boxes
will be inverted.
N N L L Lower N N L L Lower
Junction Junction
Box Box
Earth Line (cover Earth Line (cover
Neutral removed) Neutral removed)
ac Main ac Main ac Main

(Primary) (Secondary)
Figure 3-3. Industrial Enclosure 16, ac Main Power Connections
Upper Upper
Junction Junction
Box Box
(cover Earth +V dc (cover
Earth +V dc
removed) -V dc removed)
-V dc

designed for top cable entry,
the junction boxes will be
inverted.
Lower Lower
Junction Junction
Box Box
Earth +V dc (cover Earth +V dc (cover
-V dc removed) -V dc removed)
dc Main dc Main dc Main

(Primary) (Secondary)
Figure 3-4. Industrial Enclosure 16, dc Main Power Connections
68
Industrial Enclosure 32, Power Connections

To connect the power lines, refer to Figure 3-5 and Figure 3-6, and perform the following steps:
2. Open the both side doors on the enclosure to access the junction boxes. [Four junc-
tion boxes (two on each side) are located in the field termination areas.]
NOTE
To access the “inside” junction boxes in a bridged Industrial Enclosure 32, remove
the bridge cover panel, as described in Chapter 2 “Equipment Mounting
Procedures”.
3. Place the junction box power switches in the OFF position.

4. Remove the bottom cover from each junction box by inserting the hex driver tool
place.
5. Route the power lines to the junction boxes.
6. Connect the power lines as shown in Figure 3-7 and Figure 3-8, “Industrial Enclosure
32, ac Main Power Connections”; and Figure 3-9, “Industrial Enclosure 32, dc Main
Power Connections.”
7. Replace the junction box covers. Power is supplied to the internal 2x8 or 2x8 FBM
mounting structures via the power out connectors.
Junction Box
Junction Junction
Box Box
Power Out
Connectors
Power Switch/
Circuit Breaker
Bottom
Cover
Junction Junction
Box Box Access
Hole
Figure 3-5. Industrial Enclosure 32, Junction Box Location
69
Non-Redundant Redundant
Power Connection Power Connection
JB - Junction Box JB JB JB JB
MS - Mounting Structure I I I I I I I I
I - Industrial Power T T T T
Module
MS MS
NOTE: Cooling fans have
been omitted for
clarity. I I I I I I I I
JB JB JB JB
I I I I I I I I
T T T T
Single Main Divided
into Two Feeders at
the user’s Distribution MS MS
Panel.
I I I I I I I I
*(ac or dc) Main* Secondary Main* Primary Main*
Figure 3-6. Industrial Enclosure 32, Main Power Distribution
Upper-Right Junction
N N L L N N L L Box (cover removed)
Upper-Left
Junction Box
(cover NOTE: If the enclosure is
Earth Line removed) Earth Line designed for top cable
Neutral Neutral entry, the junction boxes
will be inverted.
Lower-Right Junction
Lower-Left Box (cover removed)
N N L L Junction Box N N L L
(cover
removed)
Earth Line Earth Line * Both ac main feeders
Neutral Neutral are from a single ac
main branch, divided at
the user’s power
ac Main Feeder* ac Main Feeder* distribution panel.
Figure 3-7. Industrial Enclosure 32, ac Main Power Connections (Non-Redundant Power)
70
N N L L Upper-Left Junction N N L L Upper-Right Junction

Box (cover Box (cover removed)
removed)
Earth Line Earth Line
Neutral Neutral
N N L L Lower-Left Junction N N L L Lower-Right Junction

removed)
Earth Line Earth Line
Neutral Neutral
designed for top cable
ac Main ac Main
will be inverted.
(Secondary) (Primary)
Figure 3-8. Industrial Enclosure 32, ac Main Power Connections (Redundant Power)
Upper-Left Junction Upper-Right Junction

removed)
Earth +V dc Earth +V dc
-V dc -V dc
Lower-Left Junction Lower-Right Junction

Box Box (covers removed)
(covers removed)
Earth +V dc Earth +V dc NOTE: If the enclosure is

-V dc -V dc designed for top cable
will be inverted.
dc Main dc Main
(Secondary or Backup) (Primary)
Figure 3-9. Industrial Enclosure 32, dc Main Power Connections (Redundant Power)
71
Industrial Enclosure 32 (Structural Foam) Primary/Secondary Power

Distribution Options to MMS Structures
Figure 3-10 illustrates the power distribution options for supplying power to MMS structures in
IE32 Structural Foam enclosures not equipped with an ac power transfer switch.
Structural Foam IE32 Enclosures with Two MMS and One 2x8 Mounting Structure
MMS Secondary MMS
MMS MMS
2x8 2x8
Secondary Primary Secondary Primary
Option 1: Jumpered primary Option 2: Jumpered primary

and secondary power power
MMS MMS Primary

MMS MMS
2x8 2x8
Secondary Primary Secondary Primary
Option 3: Jumpered Option 4: Discrete primary and

primary and no MMS no MMS to secondary power
to secondary power
NOTES:
MMS
1. Dashed lines indicate Secondary Primary
conduit with no jumper wires.
MMS
You must remove wires.
2. Options 3 and 4 configured

by Foxboro as shipped. Secondary 2x8 Primary
Options 1, 2, and 5 are
optional user configurations
performed by the user
Option 5: Discrete mains
according to local and
national electrical codes.
Figure 3-10. IE32 MMS Power Wiring in IE32 Structural Foam Enclosure
72
Note that Invensys Systems, Inc. configures the distribution as shown in either Option 1 or
Option 2. The difference between these options is that Option 2 uses two discrete secondary ac
inputs; one to supply the one of the MMS structures; the other to supply the 2x8 mounting struc-
ture. The secondary is not jumpered between these structures (conduit is a dashed line) in Option
2. The other options, if needed, are variations of discrete primary and/or secondary mains distri-
bution, and must be wired by the user.
Field Enclosure 8, Power Connections

Field Enclosure 8 is available in two styles, floor-mounted and wall-mounted. Figure 3-11 and
Figure 3-12 provide general information about Field Enclosure 8 power connections for either
version.
The following sections provide procedures for connecting power to both versions of Field
Enclosure 8.
NOTE
In the Division 21 certified version of the Field Enclosure 8, the power switch/cir-
cuit breaker (see Figure 3-11) is replaced with an in-line fuse. For this version, you
must provide separate power switch(es), external to the enclosure, in an appropriate
(nonhazardous) location.
Junction Box
Location of Optional Extended
Temperature Range Junction
Box (if included)
Power Out
Connectors
Power Switch/
Circuit Breaker*
Bottom
Cover
Access Hole
* Not Included in Division 2 Certified Version

(see text)
Figure 3-11. Field Enclosure 8, Junction Box Location
1.
“Division 2” as used herein refers to Class I, Groups A, B, C, and D, Division 2; Class II, Group G,
Division 2; and Class III, Divisions 1 and 2: Hazardous locations (per Canadian Electrical Code,
Part 1, 1990).
73
Non-Redundant Redundant
Power Connection Power Connection
JB - Junction Box JB** JB JB** JB
MS - Mounting Structure
I - Industrial Power I I I I
Module T T
MS MS
* Not used.
I I JB* I I JB
** Included only when
extended temperature
range option is T
Heaters** Heaters**
included.
Separate Separate
NOTE: ac Main
ac Main Secondary Primary
Cooling fans have Main
been omitted for Main Main
(ac or dc)
clarity. (ac or dc) (ac or dc)
Figure 3-12. Field Enclosure 8, Main Power Distribution
Floor-Mounted Field Enclosure 8, Power Connections

One or two junction boxes are located in the field termination area on the left side of the unit.
(The second junction box is included only if the enclosure is configured for redundant power.) If
the enclosure includes the extended temperature range option, an additional junction box (for the
extended temperature range heater) will be located in the upper-right area of the enclosure.
To connect the power lines, proceed as follows:
2. Open the side door(s) of the enclosure to access the junction box(es).
3. Remove the bottom cover from the junction box(es) by inserting the hex driver tool
place.
4. Place the junction box power switch(es) in the OFF position.
5. Route the power lines to the junction box(es).
6. Connect the power lines as shown in Figure 3-13 (for ac power), or Figure 3-14 (for
dc power).
7. If the enclosure includes the extended temperature range option, connect the power
lines to the extended temperature range junction box as shown in Figure 3-15.
8. Replace the junction box cover(s).
74
Redundant Power
N N L L Upper
Junction
Non-Redundant Power Box
Earth Line (cover
Neutral removed)
N N L L Junction
Box (cover
removed)
Earth Line
Neutral
N N L L Lower
Junction
ac Main Box
Earth Line (cover
Neutral removed)
ac Main
the junction box(es) are ac Main (Secondary) (Primary)
inverted.
Figure 3-13. Field Enclosure 8, ac Main Power Connections
Redundant Power
Upper
N N L L Junction
Box
Non-Redundant Power (cover
Earth +V dc removed)
-V dc
N N L L Junction
Box (cover
removed)
Earth +V dc
-V dc
Lower
N N L L
Junction
dc Main Box
Earth +V dc (cover
removed)
-V dc
dc Main
the junction box(es) are dc Main (Secondary)
(Primary)
inverted.
Figure 3-14. Field Enclosure 8, dc Main Power Connections
75
N N L L Extended
Temperature Range
Junction Box
Earth Line (cover
Neutral removed)
ac Main
(Separate from Primary Main)
Figure 3-15. FE8, Extended Temperature Range Power Connections
Wall-Mounted Field Enclosure 8, Power Connections

One or two junction boxes are located in the field termination area opposite from the wall mount-
ing unit. (The second junction box is included only if the enclosure is configured for redundant
power.) If the enclosure includes the extended temperature range option, an additional junction
box (for the extended temperature range heater) is located in the field termination area adjacent to
the wall mounting unit.
2. Open the side door of the enclosure to access the junction box(es).
4. Referring to Figure 3-16, remove the wall mounting unit access plate by removing the
12 plate retaining screws.
5. Connect the conduit, and route the main power cable(s) as shown in Figure 3-16.
6. Remove the bottom cover from the junction box(es) by inserting the hex driver tool
place.
7. Connect the power lines as shown in Figure 3-13 (for ac power), or Figure 3-14 (for
dc power).
8. If the enclosure includes the extended temperature range option, connect the power
lines to the extended temperature range junction box as shown in Figure 3-15.
9. Replace the junction box cover(s).
76
Enclosure
(Front View)
Wall
Mounting
Unit Extended Temperature
Range Junction
Box (optional)
NOTE:
Alternatively, cable entry
can be through the top of
the wall mounting unit.
Junction
Boxes
Access
Plate
Main
Power
Cable(s) Conduit
(see note)
Figure 3-16. Field Enclosure 8 (Wall-Mounted) Power Cable Routing
Field Enclosure 4, Power Connections

Field Enclosure 4 contains two junction boxes. (The second junction box is used only if the enclo-
sure is configured for redundant power, or if the extended temperature range option is included.)
For the following procedure, refer to Figure 3-17 through Figure 3-20 to locate the junction box
location, and identify the main power distribution and main power cable routing, respectively.
NOTE
In the Division 22 certified version of the Field Enclosure 4, an in-line fuse replaces
the power switch/circuit breaker (see Figure 3-17). For this version, you must pro-
vide separate power switch(es), external to the enclosure, in an appropriate (nonhaz-
ardous) location.
2.
“Division 2” as used herein refers to Class I, Groups A, B, C, and D, Division 2; Class II, Groups F,
and G, Division II; and Class III, Divisions 1 and 2: Hazardous locations (per National Electric
Code, 1987)
77
Upper Junction
Box
Power Switch/ Lower Junction

Circuit Breaker* Box**
Junction
Box
* Not included in Division 2
certified version (see text).
Main Power Power Out
Termination Block Connectors ** Included only if redundant
power is used.
Figure 3-17. Field Enclosure 4, Junction Box Location
Non-Redundant Power Connection
**
JB - Junction Box
I I I
Module T JB
Main
(ac or dc)*
* 24 V dc only with non-redundant power.
** Available with back-up power only.
Figure 3-18. Field Enclosure 4, Main Power Distribution (Main and Separate ac Main Power)
78
Redundant Power Connection
JB - Junction Box I I
Module T JB
T JB
Heater Heater
& Fan* & Fan*
Primary Secondary
Main Main
(ac or dc)** (ac or dc)**
* Included only when extended temperature

range option is included.
** ac mains must be used when extended
temperature range option is included.
Figure 3-19. Field Enclosure 4, Main Power Distribution (Primary and Secondary Main Power)
Field Openings for

Enclosure 4 Cable Entry
Rear View
(cover removed)
Main Power
Cables
Conduit (user-supplied) 25 mm (1 in) Hole Provided

for Conduit Entry
Figure 3-20. Field Enclosure 4, Main Power Cable Routing

1. Switch off the main system power.
2. Remove the enclosure front cover (eight captive screws) to access the junction box(es).
4. Remove the junction box cover (two panhead screws).
79
5. Remove the enclosure rear cover (eight captive screws) to access the conduit plate and
wire entry area.
6. Attach a 25 mm (1 in) conduit to the conduit plate using the 25 mm hole provided.
7. Route the power lines as shown in Figure 3-20.
8. Connect the power lines as shown in either Figure 3-21 (for ac power), or Figure 3-22
(for dc power).
9. Replace the junction box cover.
Redundant Power
Earth
Neutral
Non-Redundant Power Upper
ac Main N Junction
(Primary) N Box
Line L
Earth
L
Neutral
ac Main N Junction
N Box Earth
Line L Neutral
L
ac Main N Lower
(Secondary) N Junction
L Box
Line
L
Figure 3-21. Field Enclosure 4, ac Main Power Connections
Redundant Power
Earth
-V dc
Upper
Non-Redundant Power dc Main - Junction
(Primary) - Box
Earth +V dc +
+
-V dc
dc Main - Junction
- Box Earth
+V dc + -V dc
+
dc Main Lower
-
(Secondary) - Junction
Box
+V dc +
+
Figure 3-22. Field Enclosure 4, dc Main Power Connections
80
I/A Series Metal Industrial Enclosures, Power Connection

The I/A Series Metal Industrial Enclosures include the IEMFA (ME24) and IEMFR (ME32) and
the metal FE8. In the IEMFA (ME24) and IEMFR (ME32) Enclosure, the junction box is
located at the lower left, accessible from the front of the enclosure. In the metal FE8 enclosure,
the junction box is accessible from the rear of the enclosure, located in the right-center when fac-
ing the rear of the enclosure. Basically, the same type of junction box is used for both types of
enclosures; thus, the power connection procedures as presented here pertain to both the IEMFA
(ME24) and IEMFR (ME32) and the metal FE8.
2. Remove the cover from the junction box by removing the four screws holding it in
place.
3. Route the power lines to the box and connect them as shown in Figure 3-23.
NOTE
When using primary power only, add the connections between the Line, Neutral,
and Earth (ground) leads from the primary input side to the secondary power ter-
minal block as shown in Figure 3-23 in order to power all fans in the enclosure. The
temperature within the enclosure could become excessive if these connections are
not made for a primary power only configuration.
Junction Box
Computer Ground Computer Ground

(see note 1) (see note 1)
L N L N
Earth Neutral
(Ground)
Line
NOTE 2:
When using primary power only,
add connections between the
NOTE 1: Primary Secondary Line, Neutral, and Earth (ground)
Earth wire(s) may be Power Power leads from the primary input side
connected to earth (see note 2) to the secondary power terminal
stud(s), if required by block in order to power all fans in
local codes. the enclosure.
Figure 3-23. IEMFA and IEMFR and Metal FE8, Power Connections
81
1x8 and 1x8 FBM Mounting Structure, Power Connections

The 1x8 and 1x8 FBM mounting structures include a dual junction box (see Figure 3-24), to
accommodate single or redundant primary power. Connections for single or redundant
factory main power must be made inside the junction box.
To connect the power lines, refer to Figure 3-25 and perform the following steps:
2. Place the mounting structure power switch(es) in the OFF position.
3. Remove the junction box cover by first removing the six cover retaining screws (see
Figure 3-24).
4. Using fast-on (spade) female connectors, connect the power lines as shown in
Figure 3-26 and Figure 3-27 (for ac power), Figure 3-28 and Figure 3-29 (for 24 V dc
power), or Figure 3-30 (for 125 V dc power).
Cover Retaining
Screw (1 of 6) Junction
Box
Power Switches/
Circuit Breakers
(Two if Redundant)
Figure 3-24. 1x8 and 1x8 FBM Mounting Structure, Junction Box Location
82

Connection Connection
Module Module
Slots Slots
JB JB JB
I I I I
I I I I
Main
(ac or dc) Primary Backup
Main Main
I - Industrial Power Module (ac or dc)
JB - Junction Box
Figure 3-25. 1x8 and 1x8 FBM Mounting Structures, Main Power Distribution
Earth Stud Non-Redundant Power

Neutral
Junction Box,
Top View Line
(cover removed)
See
Detail
“A”
Detail “A”
Ring Fast-On (Spade)

Terminal Female Connectors
Earth Line Neutral
ac Main
Figure 3-26. 1x8 and 1x8 FBM Mounting Structures, ac Main Power Connections
(Non-Redundant Power)
83
Earth Studs Redundant Power

Neutral
Junction Box, Line
Top View
(cover removed)
See
See
Detail
Detail
“A”
“A”
Detail “A”
Fast-On (Spade)
Female Connectors
Line Neutral Earth Line Neutral and Ring Terminals
Earth
ac Main (Secondary) ac Main (Primary)
Figure 3-27. 1x8 and 1x8 FBM Mounting Structures, ac Main Power Connections
(Redundant Power)
Terminal E3 Non-Redundant Power

Earth Stud (unmarked)
(+)
Junction Box,
Top View (+)
(cover removed)
See
Detail
“A”
Detail “A”
Ring Terminal Fast-On (Spade)

Female Connectors
Earth (-)
(+)
dc Main
Figure 3-28. 1x8 and 1x8 FBM Mounting Structures, 24 V dc Main Power Connections
(Non-Redundant Power)
84
Terminal E3
(unmarked) Redundant Power
(+)
Junction Box,
Top View (+)
Earth Stud (cover removed)
Earth Stud
See See
Detail Detail
“A” “A”
Detail “A”
Fast-On (Spade)
Female Connectors
and Ring Terminals
(-) Earth Earth (-)
(+) (+)
24 v dc Main (Secondary) 24 v dc Main (Primary)
(Redundant Power)
Junction Box, Top View

(cover removed)
E5 E6 Ground Lug (Green Wire)
E1 E2 A1 Fuse
Note:
For redundant configuration,
jumper A1 on this half of the
junction box to A1 on the
opposite half, and make the
other connections as shown
here (+ to E6, and - to E2).
Fast-On (Spade) Ring Terminal

Female Connectors
+ - Earth
125 V dc Main
85
1x12 FBM Mounting Structure, Power Connections

The 1x12 FBM mounting structures receive optionally redundant power through specially
designed power distribution units (PDUs) and power supplies. The junction boxes receive power
from the factory floor. The power supplies support multiple 1x12 FBM mounting structures.
Refer to 1x12 Configurable Fieldbus Module Mounting Structure Wiring and Installation
Instructions (B0400PK) for complete power connection instructions.
B03/B04/B05 Enclosure Power Connections

NOTE
For installation information relating to the DIN rail subsystem enclosures (B03,
B04, and B05), refer to DIN Rail FBM Subsystem User’s Guide (B0400FA).
Peripheral Devices, Power Connections

The peripheral devices that use primary ac power are:
♦ Dot-matrix printer 80
♦ Color dot-matrix printer 132
♦ Color PostScript printer
♦ VT100 compatible printer
♦ 17-inch workstation displays
♦ 21-inch workstation displays
♦ GCIO interface module.
NOTE
The 50 Series processors and data storage devices, which also use ac power, are not
considered peripheral devices, but are termed 50 Series modules. The connection of
ac power to these devices is described in Chapter 4 “System Module/Processor
Installation”.
! WARNING
Before making the ac power line connections for a peripheral device, ensure that the
voltage available at the ac receptacle matches that indicated on the device data label.
Each peripheral device includes a power cord. Plug the cord for the device into the
appropriate ac source outlet.
The cord sets for the following devices are shipped detached from the units:
♦ 21-inch workstation display (WP70, AW70, WP50/51, and AW50/51-Based)
♦ GCIO interface module.
Attach the cord set to the ac input connector at the rear of the device, then plug into the appropri-
ate ac source outlet.
86
! WARNING
If you substitute an alternate type of plug (or other connection) for the one supplied
with the power cord, shock hazard protection requires that you follow proper polar-
ity and safety earthing (grounding) method.
Panel Display Station, Power Connections
! WARNING
Before making the ac power line connections for a Panel Display Station, ensure
that the voltage available matches that indicated on the device data label.
To connect power wires to the Panel Display Station, proceed as follows:

1. Refer to Figure 3-31 and remove the protective cover from the power terminals at the
rear of the Panel Display Station.
2. Connect the ac power wires to the terminal as shown in the figure.
3. Secure the cable to the rear of the controller with a cable strap as shown in
Figure 3-31.
4. Reinstall the protective cover over the power terminals.
! WARNING
Protective cover must be installed over power terminals to avoid a potential shock
hazard.
Protective
Cover
N(L2)
Power
Cable
L1 Earth
Cable Strap (Ground)
(supplied by
user)
Panel Display Station
(Rear View)
Figure 3-31. Panel Display Station, Power Connections
87
Equipment Earth (Ground) Connections

NOTE
The earth connections described in this section are required only in high noise
environments.
All system units must be connected to system earth, as described in Site Planning. The peripheral
devices are earthed through the earth wire in their power cords. The I/A Series enclosures are
earthed using one of three configurations:
♦ A power distribution panel dedicated to the I/A Series equipment
♦ An existing power distribution panel (shared with non I/A Series equipment)
♦ An existing power distribution panel (shared with non I/A Series equipment) in a high
noise environment.
The following sections describe how to make earth connections within the I/A Series enclosures,
as required in the third configuration listed above (using an existing power distribution panel in a
high noise environment).
Field Enclosure 4, Earth Connections

To make the earth connections to these enclosures:
1. Locate the enclosure earth bus. It is at the lower-rear section in Field Enclosure 4 (see
Figure 3-32).
2. Strip and tin the cable, and connect the cable to a spare terminal on the enclosure
earth bus.
Enclosure
Earth Bus
Field Enclosure 4
(Rear View)
NOTE: Earth Cable

The earth connection 8 AWG (10 mm2)
shown here is required in
a high-noise environment To System Earth
only (see text).
Figure 3-32. Field Enclosure 4, Earth Connection Points
88
I/A Series Metal Enclosures, Earth Connections

The I/A Series metal enclosures include the IEMFA (ME24) and IEMFR (ME32), the metal
Field Enclosure 8 (metal FE8), and the termination enclosure.
NOTE
Earthing (grounding) of the IEMFA (ME24) and IEMFR (ME32) and metal FE8
enclosures through a separate chassis earth connection is not necessary, as safety and
noise-suppression earthing is provided by the green or green-yellow wire earth cable.
A separate (system earth) connection to these enclosures is recommended only when
the enclosure is installed in a high noise environment (noisy green wire earth).
To make earth connections to the I/A Series metal enclosures, locate one of the tapped holes
(M8 size) along the bottom interior of the enclosure (see Figure 3-33). Use a ring type solderless
crimp connector appropriate for the size of wire used, and use a star-type lockwasher between the
connector and the enclosure chassis.
IEMFA/IEMFR
FE 8, or Termination
Enclosure
M-8 Bolt and Star-Type

Lockwasher Supplied
by the user
NOTE:
Lockwasher must con-
tact painted surface of
enclosure.
To Earth System
Figure 3-33. I/A Series Metal Enclosures, Earth Connection Point
Other Enclosures, Earth Connections

Enclosures other than Field Enclosure 4 include the following:
♦ Industrial Enclosures 16 and 32
♦ Field Enclosure 8
♦ 1x8, 2x8 and FBM mounting structure.
89
To make the earth connections to these enclosures and structures, locate a point on the enclosure
or structure earth bus as near as practical to the junction box that receives the green wire (power
safety) earth cable. Use a screw located on the bus bar. Examples of signal earth wire connection
points are shown in Figure 3-34 and Figure 3-35. To make the connections, use ring-type solder-
less (crimp) connectors appropriate for the size of wire used.
NOTE:
The earth connection
Right-Side shown here is required in
Panel Moved a high noise environment
Forward (see text).
Enclosure
Earth Bus
Connection Point
Earth Cable
(Typical)
8 AWG (10 mm2)
To System Earth
Figure 3-34. Field Enclosure 8, Industrial Enclosure 16 or 32, Earth Connection Point
Mounting
Structure
(Rear View)
Enclosure
Earth Bus
NOTE:
The earth connection
shown here is required in
a high noise environment Earth Cable
(see text). 8 AWG (10 mm2)
To System Earth
Figure 3-35. 1x8 Mounting Structure, Earth Connection Point
90
50 Series ac Power Transfer Switch

The 50 Series ac power transfer switch supports continuous operation of 50 Series devices by pro-
viding access to a reliable ac power source. One ac 50 Series transfer switch can supply power to
all the configurable devices in a 50 Series enclosure or MIW bay. The maximum transfer time
during a line failure or low voltage condition is 30 ms. The switch can be mounted in an MMS
structure, or vertically on a DIN rail in an enclosure.
Installation instructions are furnished with the ac transfer switch kit P0912YG/YH, or
P0970WU/WV/WW.
External Memory Battery Backup and Status Tap

The External Memory Battery Backup and Status Tap option may be used with the following
enclosures and mounting structures:
♦ I/A Series Metal Enclosures
♦ Field Enclosures 4 and 83
♦ 1x8 Mounting Structure
♦ 1x8 FBM Mounting Structure
♦ 2x8 Mounting Structure
♦ 2x8 FBM Mounting Structure.
External Memory Battery Backup

External memory battery backup provides a means of supplying external, user-supplied battery
backup power, nominally 18 V ± 10%, to the 20, 30, and 40 Series modules (X-Modules,
Z-Modules, and Fieldbus Modules) in the above enclosures. With external batteries connected,
backup power is available for the associated system modules in the event the main input power
fails.
External Status Tap

The external status tap allows reporting of Industrial Power Module (IPM) failure status to two
destinations: to a user-supplied monitoring or alarm device or, via an I/A Series FBM, to the
I/A Series system management software.
IPM failure status is routed via separate lines in the intermediate power (IP) bus. Each IPM
provides a pair of normally open grounded common contacts which, when closed, indicate a fail-
ure. Ratings of each contact are as follows:
Switching Voltage 30 V dc
Current Carrying Capacity 0.1 A dc
Power Rating 3W
3.
Since these enclosures do not have a mounting structure, two status tap cables are required.
91
For IPMs 02 through 06, the contact closure indicates a failed module (output voltage out of tol-
erance). For the fan power modules (IPMs 07 through 09), the contact closure indicates an open
connection to the fan, voltage out of tolerance, or low fan rotational speed.
The external status tap allows status wiring in either of two configurations:
♦ To a user-supplied monitoring or alarm device for external monitoring or alarming of
the IPM status.
♦ To the input of a Fieldbus Module (FBM). This produces a process alarm message via
the I/A Series system software to alert the operator of an IPM failure.
Typical Enclosure Power Distribution

Figure 3-36 shows, for reference purposes, power distribution for a typical enclosure. The junc-
tion box receives factory power, which is fed to the industrial power modules (IPMs), which in
turn supply clean, unregulated power (intermediate power) for the system modules. The mount-
ing structure bus distributes the intermediate power to each mounting structure slot. (The inter-
mediate power bus also carries IPM failure status information.)
Memory battery backup power is supplied from batteries within selected industrial power mod-
ules (IPMs), and optionally (using the external memory battery backup and status tap assemblies)
from external, user-supplied batteries. Memory battery backup power is distributed over the same
intermediate power buses and mounting structure buses as the primary power.
NOTE
The following notes apply:
1. Field Enclosure 4 does not use a mounting structure or a mounting structure bus.
Power distribution is similar, however; with intermediate power being produced by
power modules, and distributed to each Fieldbus Module via a built-in bus.
2. Invensys Systems, Inc. assembles the power cabling (that is, input power bus
cabling and intermediate power bus cabling) for the enclosure before shipment.
3. I/A Series enclosures are shipped with the appropriate industrial power modules
(IPMs) installed. For future reference, however, note that only power modules of a
similar type (such as, all IPM02s) may be attached to the same input power bus. The
only exceptions are (1) the fan power modules, which are attached to the same input
power bus as the other power modules, and (2) backup power modules IPM06 (A and
D) and IPM03, which are sometimes used side-by-side in a power backup scheme.
92
Input Power Bus

Input Power Bus Cable
Industrial
Power Junction Box
Modules
(IPMs)
Intermediate
Intermediate Power Bus Cable
Power Bus
Pri.* Factory Main Input Power

Mounting Structure
To Modules
Mounting Structure Bus Backup*
External Memory Battery Backup

and Status Tap Connectors
(optional)
From Alternate Power Distribution
System (similar to above) *Intermediate Power
Figure 3-36. 20, 30, and 40 Series Modules, Typical Enclosure Power Distribution
External Memory Battery Backup and Status Tap Assembly

Descriptions
Four types of external memory battery backup and status tap assemblies are available:
♦ P0911RX, External Memory Battery Backup and Status Tap Assembly for use with
1x8 and 2x8 mounting structures (Figure 3-37). This assembly is intended for use
with enclosures employing non-redundant (that is, backup or battery backup) main
power.
♦ P0911RW, External Status Tap (only) Assembly for use with 1x8 and 2x8 mounting
structures (Figure 3-38). This assembly is intended for use in nonstop (redundant)
power configurations.
NOTE
Either of the above cable assemblies is installed in line with the intermediate power
bus cable to provide external entry of memory battery backup power and/or “tap-
ping” into the status lines in the intermediate power bus. Both cable assemblies have
integral fusing for overcurrent protection.
♦ P0711CU, External Memory Battery Backup and Status Tap Assembly for use with
1x8 FBM and 2x8 FBM mounting structures (Figure 3-39). This assembly is
intended for use with enclosures employing non-redundant (for example, backup or
battery backup) main power.
93
♦ P0904EV, External Status Tap (only) Assembly for use with 1x8 FBM and 2x8 FBM
mounting structures (Figure 3-40). This assembly is intended for use in nonstop
(redundant) power configurations.
To Mounting Structure To IP Bus Connector

Bus (“A” in Figure 3-41) (“B” in Figure 3-41)
B
A
BATTERY
BACKUP
Battery Backup
+ - G
Connector
STATUS
Status Tap
Foxboro Part
C
Connector
Number
A
P0911RX
DIN Rail
Figure 3-37. External Memory Battery Backup and Status Tap Assembly
(For 1x8 and 2x8 Mounting Structures)
To Mounting Structure To IP Bus Connector

Bus (“A” in Figure 3-41) (“B” in Figure 3-41)
B
A
DIN Rail
Foxboro Part Status Tap

STATUS
C
Number Connector
A
P0911RW
Figure 3-38. External Status Tap Assembly (For 1x8 and 2x8 Mounting Structures)
94
To FBM Mounting Structure

Status Connector
DIN Rail
Earth (Ground) Leads --

Battery Backup
BATTERY
Connect to Screw(s) on
BACKUP
+ - G
Connector DIN Rail
Foxboro Part Status Tap
STATUS
C
Number Connector
A
P0711CU
Figure 3-39. External Memory Battery Backup and Status Tap Assembly
(For 1x8 FBM and 2x8 FBM Mounting Structure)
To FBM Mounting Structure

Status Connector
DIN Rail
Status Tap Earth (Ground) Lead --

Foxboro Part
C
Connector Connect to Screw on

STATUS
Number DIN Rail

A
P0904EV
Figure 3-40. External Status Tap Assembly (For 1x8 FBM and 2x8 FBM Mounting Structures)
External Memory Battery Backup and Status Tap Installation

Instructions for installing the battery backup and status tap differ depending on the type of
mounting structure used.
95
External Battery Backup and Status Tap Installation for 1x8 and
2x8 Mounting Structures
NOTE
1. The following procedure does not apply to the 1x8 FBM and 2x8 FBM mount-
ing structures.
2. For systems configured with only primary power, connect the cable assembly to
the primary connector of the mounting structure.
3. Field Enclosure 4 does not include mounting structure buses, but the connec-
tions are similar to those described here.
To install the external memory battery backup and status tap assembly for the 1x8 or 2x8 mount-
ing structure, proceed as follows:
1. Mount the battery backup and status tap connectors on the DIN rail of the enclosure
in question.
2. Make the connections as indicated in Figure 3-37 and Figure 3-41, or Figure 3-38
and Figure 3-41. Note that the mounting structure bus shown in Figure 3-41 is for a
2x8 mounting structure. It is important to note that the connections for the 1x8
mounting structure are inverted – with the backup connection on the top and pri-
mary connection on the bottom.
3. Make the external battery connections (if applicable) as shown in Figure 3-37. Con-
nect the battery leads to the “-” and “+” 18 V terminals. The G (GND) terminal is
provided for use per local wiring practice, if required.
4. Make the external status tap connections as described under “External Status Tap
Connections” on page 97.
Intermediate
Power Bus
Primary
“A”
Mounting
Structure Backup
Bus
“B”
“A” and “B” Points Referenced in Figure 3-37 and Figure 3-38
Figure 3-41. Locations of Points “A” and “B” Referenced in Other Figures
96
External Battery Backup and Status Tap Installation for 1x8 FBM
and 2x8 FBM Mounting Structures
To install the external memory battery backup and status tap assembly for the 1x8 FBM or
2x8 FBM mounting structure, proceed as follows:
1. Referring to Figure 3-39 or Figure 3-40 (whichever pertains), mount the battery
backup and status tap connector(s) on the DIN rail of the enclosure in question. Con-
nect the earth (ground) lead from the status tap connector(s) to a screw on the DIN
rail.
2. Referring to Figure 3-39 or Figure 3-40 (whichever pertains), connect the FBM status
connector to the status socket located on the rear of the 1x8 FBM or 2x8 FBM
mounting structure.
3. Make the external battery connections (if applicable) as shown in Figure 3-39. Con-
nect the battery leads to the “-” and “+” 18 V terminals. The G (GND) terminal is
provided for use per local wiring practice, if required.
4. Make the external status tap connections as described under “External Status Tap
Connections” (below).
External Status Tap Connections

NOTE
If you check the operation of the IPM status contacts with an ohm meter, place the
positive ohm meter lead on the A terminal of the status tap assembly, and the nega-
tive lead on the C (COMM) terminal. (Reversing these connections causes an error
indication.) This polarity is necessary because the contact inputs have blocking
diodes in series with them, making the measurement polarity-sensitive.
Status Connections to External Monitoring or Alarm Device

To make IPM status tap connections to an external (user-supplied) monitoring or alarm device,
refer to Figure 3-42 and make the connections as shown. Use of 22 AWG wire is recommended
for the connections. Figure 3-37 through Figure 3-40 show the status tap assembly connection
points.
97
IPM Status Tap

Assembly Connect to
A
positive (+) input
1/8 A of monitoring or
alarm device
Contact is Comm
normally open, (C) Connect to
and closes when negative (–) input
module is in of monitoring or
alarm condition alarm device
Figure 3-42. Status Tap Connections to External Monitoring or Alarm Device
Status Connections to a Fieldbus Module

The contact supply (“CS”) and “+” inputs of the following FBMs may be used for this purpose:
FBM07B1 FBM14D1 FBM26B2, 26C2
FBM09C1 FBM17C1 FBM27B2, 27C2
FBM09D1 FBM17D1 FBM41C
FBM12B1 FBM24B2, 24C2 FBM42C
FBM14C1 FBM25B2, 25C2
1.
If a status tap input is used for a particular channel, the adjacent channel in the pair
must be left unused, or used with an isolated (ungrounded) contact.
2.
If a status tap input is used for a particular channel, all other channels must be left
unused, or used with isolated (ungrounded) contacts.
To make IPM status tap connections to a Fieldbus Module, refer to Figure 3-43 and make the
connections as shown. Use of 22 AWG wire is recommended for the connections. Figure 3-37
through Figure 3-40 show the status tap assembly connection points.
NOTE
The following notes apply to the status tap assembly:
1. Contact input connections to an FBM require observation of specific rules
regarding isolated/nonisolated characteristics of the inputs.
2. If you check the operation of the IPM status contacts with an ohm meter, place
the positive ohm meter lead on the A terminal of the status tap assembly, and the
negative lead on the Comm terminal. (Reversing these connections will cause an
erroneous indication.) This is necessary because the contact inputs have blocking
diodes in series with them, making the measurement polarity-sensitive.
98
IPM Status Tap

Assembly
A
Connect to contact
supply (CS) input on
1/8 A FBM termination
cable assembly (TCA)*.
Contact is Comm
normally open, (C)
and closes when Connect to plus (+)
module is in input on FBM
alarm condition. termination cable
assembly (TCA)*.
*When making status tap connections to FBM207b, connect A to i+ and C to iS.

Note, however, that after software release 6.2.1, the power is monitored by
the DIN Rail FBMs (FBM201, 202, etc.) and, therefore, no status tap connection
is necessary.
Figure 3-43. Status Tap Connections to Fieldbus Module (FBM)
99
100
4. System Module/Processor
Installation
This chapter describes how to install the I/A Series system processors and modules into the
various I/A Series mounting structures.
NOTE
For installation information on modules used with DIN rail mounted FBM equip-
ment (FBM201, FBM202, and so forth.), refer to DIN Rail Mounted FBM Sub-
system User’s Guide (B0400FA), FOUNDATION fieldbus H1 Interface Module
(FBM220/221) User Guide (B0400FD), Profibus-DP Communication Interface Module
(FBM223) User’s Guide (B0400FE), HART Communication Interface Module
(FBM214/215/216/218) User’s Guide (B0400FF) and Modbus Communication Inter-
face Module (FBM224) User’s Guide (B0400FK).
For installation information on the Control Processor 60 refer to Control Processor
60 and Control Processor 60S Installation and Maintenance (B0400FB).
The system can have the following types of modules and processors:
♦ Server 70 processors
♦ 70 Series processors
♦ 50 Series processors and modules (Figure 4-1, Figure 4-2, and Figure 4-3). These
modules are designated A-size, B-size, C-size, D-size, E-size, and F-sizes to
distinguish between their physical dimensions:
♦ A-size modules – 4.6 in (117 mm) wide, 10.5 in (267 mm) high, 13.75 in
(350 mm) depth including clearance for cables:
Application Processor 50/51A
Workstation Processor 50/51A
Application Workstation 50/51A.
♦ B-size modules – 2.9 in (74 mm) wide, 10.5 in (267 mm) high, 13.75 in
424 MB Hard Disk Drive (for AP50, AW50)
535 MB Hard Disk Drive (for AP51, AW51)
1.3 GB Hard Disk Drive (for AP50, AW50).
♦ C-size processors – 3.1 in (78 mm) wide, 19.4 in (493 mm) high, 16.3 in
Application Processor 51B
Application Processor 51B1
Workstation Processor 51B
Workstation Processor 51B1
101
B0193AC – Rev U 4. System Module/Processor Installation
Application Workstation 51B

Application Workstation 51B1
Application Workstation 51C
X Terminal.
♦ D-size modules – 7.5 in (190 mm) wide, 2.8 in (70 mm) high, 12.2 in (310 mm)
depth including clearance for cables:
664 MB CD-ROM Drive (for AP50/51, WP50/51, AW50/51)
2.5 GB QIC Streaming Tape Drive (for AP51, WP51, AW50, AW51)
2.1 GB Hard Disk Drive (for AP50, AP51, AW51)
4.2 GB Hard Disk Drive (for AP51, WP51, AW51)
5 GB 4 mm Tape Drive (for AP51, WP51, AW51)
12 GB 4 mm Tape Drive (for AP51, WP51, AW51).
♦ E-size processors – 7.5 in (190 mm) wide, 17.7 in (450 mm) high, 19.6 in
(498 mm) in depth:
Application Processor Model 51E
Workstation Processor Model 51E
Application Workstation Model 51E.
♦ F-size processors – 17.1 in (436 mm) wide, 4.4 in (112 mm) high, 16.9 in
(430 mm) in depth:
Application Processor Model 51D
Workstation Processor Model 51D
Application Workstation Model 51D.
♦ X-Modules (Figure 4-4):
♦ Control Processor 10
♦ SPECTRUM Slave Gateway
♦ Streaming Tape Drive
♦ Dual Floppy Disk Drive
♦ SPECTRUM Interface Processor1
♦ Modicon™ Gateway1
♦ Allen-Bradley™ Gateway1
♦ Instrument Gateway1
♦ Information Network Interface1
♦ Device Gateway1
♦ Tank Processor 102.
1.
Actually a Communications Processor 15 with appropriate module identifier for gateway/interface
function.
102
4. System Module/Processor Installation B0193AC – Rev U
♦ Z-Modules (Figure 4-5):

♦ Application Processor 20
♦ Communications Processor 10
♦ Control Processor 30B3
♦ Control Processor 40B4
♦ Carrierband LAN Interface
♦ Workstation Processor 30
♦ Dual Nodebus Interface
♦ Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface
♦ Dual Nodebus Interface Extender (coaxial)
♦ 120 MB Hard Disk Drive
♦ Panel Display Processor4
♦ Integrator 30 for Modicon5
♦ Integrator 30 for Allen-Bradley Data Highway™5
♦ Device Integrator 305
♦ Nodebus Extender (fiber optic)
♦ Nodebus Interface
♦ Nodebus Extender (coaxial type).
♦ Fieldbus (Y-) Modules (Figure 4-6)
♦ Fieldbus Isolator Modules (Figure 4-7).
2.
Actually a Control Processor 10 with appropriate module identifier for tank control function.
3.
The Control Processor 30B is functionally identical to the Control Processor 30; the Control
Processor 40B is functionally identical to the Control Processor 40.
4.
Actually a Control Processor 30 or CP40 with appropriate module identifier for display panel
control function.
5.
Actually a Communications Processor 30 with appropriate module identifier for integrator function.
103
A-Size Module (Typical) B-Size Module (Typical)

(Model 50/51 Style A Processor) (B-size data storage device)
Figure 4-1. 50 Series Modules: A-Size and B-Size
D-Size Module (Typical)

(D-size data storage devices)
C-Size Processor (Typical)

(Model 51, Style B/B1/C Processors)
Figure 4-2. 50 Series Modules and Processors: C-Size and D-Size
104
E-Size Processor (Typical) F-Size Processor (Typical)

(Model 51, Style E Processor) (Model 51, Style D Processor)
NOTE: The AW51E (Style/Rev.:CA) processor’s front is slightly different than the front pictured above.
Figure 4-3. 50 Series Modules and Processors: E-Size, and F-Size
Short Captive Mounting Peripheral Connector

Screws Plugs (Recessed)
Double-Width
Peripheral Module
Connector
Engagement
Actuators Single-Width
Module
Mounting
Structure Bus
Connector
Long Captive
Mounting Screws
Figure 4-4. X-Modules
105
Peripheral Connector
Plug (Recessed)
Captive
Mounting Screw
Peripheral
Connector
Engagement
Actuators Mounting
Structure Bus
Connector
Mounting Captive Mounting

Screw Hole Screws (Inside)
Figure 4-5. Z-Module
Captive Mounting
Screw (1 of 2)
Mounting
Screw
Holes
NOTE: Other versions of the

FBM may differ in
appearance, but the
installation procedure
FBM (Type) is similar.
Number
Figure 4-6. Fieldbus Module
106
Connector Retaining Screws

Alignment (Screw on Other Side Not Shown)
Shaft
I/A Series
Right Side View
Socket
Screw Alignment
Holes Shaft
Front View
Alignment Alignment
Shaft Shafts
Alignment
Near Each
Shaft
Other
(Front View) (Front View)

Single isolator mounted Single isolator mounted
(Front View)
in upper half of a in lower half of a
structure/adapter. structure/adapter. Two isolators mounted in a
full-size slot.
Module Orientation
Figure 4-7. Fieldbus Isolator Module
The following modules are labeled “Communication Processor 15, P/N6 P0911AC” or “Com-
munication Processor 30, P/N P0960HA” on their data labels:
♦ Modicon Gateway or Integrator 30 for Modicon PCs
♦ Allen-Bradley Data Highway Gateway (ABDH) or Integrator 30 for ABDH
♦ Instrument Gateway
♦ Information Network Interface
♦ Device Gateway or Device Integrator 30
♦ SPECTRUM Interface Processor.
The Tank Processor 10 is labeled “Control Processor 10, P/N P0400VR.”
The Panel Display Processor is labeled “Control Processor 30, P0960AW.”
Each of these modules assumes its intended function when the appropriate module identifier (let-
terbug set) is inserted. (The module identifier allows the system software to identify the module
according to its specific function.)
6.
P/N is short for part number.
107
The system modules are shipped separate from the enclosures in which they are to be installed.
When installing the modules, ensure that they are inserted in their assigned slots in the enclosures.
Also, ensure that the connecting pins on a module are aligned before inserting the module into
the slot.
A 4 mm (0.156 in) hex driver tool (Foxboro part number X0179AZ) is required for tightening or
loosening mounting screws on the modules. This tool is also used to install the Y-adapters.
Information on the placement of the system modules in the enclosures is contained in the infor-
mation developed during the site planning phase.
50 Series, 70 Series, and Server 70 Module/Processor

Installation
This section describes how to install a 50 Series module or processor, or a 70 Series processor, in
one of the following locations:
♦ In a Modular Industrial Workstation [may require a modular mounting structure
(MMS)]
♦ In a Modular Industrial Console [may require a modular mounting structure (MMS)]
♦ In a NEMA 4/4X enclosure (see page 31)
♦ In a metal or plastic enclosure [requires modular mounting structure (MMS or
2xMMS)]
♦ An MMS (see page 57) and a 2xMMS for metal enclosures (P0971EA - see
page 58) can be installed in a metal enclosure (for example, IEMFA/IEMFR -see
page 20)
♦ a 2xMMS for plastic enclosures (P0971EB - see page 58) can be installed in any
plastic Industrial Enclosure (for example, IE16/IE32 - see page 3).
Due to its size, the Server 70 cannot be located in the mounting structures.
Separate procedures for installing these modules and processors in each of their applicable loca-
tions are provided below.
NOTE
The 50 Series modules and processors accept only ac power.
Server 70 Processor Installation

The Server 70 processor can be mounted:
♦ as part of a Modular Industrial Console (MIC)
♦ on the 14” wide straight spacer worksurface
♦ in the 14” wide straight spacer section for minitowers, or
♦ on the desk/printer table, provided their is adequate space for the Server 70’s base and
cabling.
Also, it can be placed on flat surfaces in commercially-available enclosures that have provisions for
adequate ventilation and cooling to ensure the ambient temperature inside the enclosure does not
exceed 95°F.
108
NOTE
Enclosures must accommodate a depth of at least 27 in (685 mm) to allow space for
cables at the back of the unit. Because of the large depth, the Server 70 processors
cannot be mounted inside the standard Foxboro enclosures, such as the Industrial
Enclosure 32, Metal Enclosure 32, and Modular Industrial Workstations.
50 Series and 70 Series Modules/Processors in a Modular

Industrial Workstation
To install a 50 Series A-size, B-size, or D-size module, in a Modular Industrial Workstation
(MIW), first install a modular mounting structure (MMS) into the MIW, as described in Modular
Industrial Workstation (B0193CE). Then install the module into the MMS as described below in
“50 Series and 70 Series Modules/Processors in a MMS or 2xMMS” on page 110.
To install a 50 Series C-size processor (Model 51, Style B/B1/C processor) in a Modular
Industrial Workstation (MIW), refer to Modular Industrial Workstation (B0193CE).
The 50 Series F-size (Model 51, Style D) processors can be installed in the MIW in three
configurations, each requiring a separate kit:
♦ One F-size (Model 51, Style D) processor and either one 1x8 mounting structure, or
MMS (requires kit P0971YV)
♦ One F-size (Model 51, Style D) processor and one 20/21-inch workstation display
(requires kit P0971YW)
♦ Two F-size (Model 51, Style D) processors and up to four D-size modules (requires kit
P0971YX).
Refer to Model 51, Style D and E Processor Instructions for MIC, MIW, IEMFA/IEMFR (ME24/32),
and IE32 Installation (B0400PL) for kit installation instructions for kits P0971YV, P0971YW,
and P0971YX.
The 50 Series E-size (Model 51, Style E) processors, or 70 Series processors require kit number
P0971YD before they can be installed in a MIW. To install a 50 Series E-size processor, or
70 Series processor in a Modular Industrial Workstation, refer to Model 51, Style D and E Processor
Instructions for MIC, MIW, IEMFA/IEMFR (ME24/32), and IE32 Installation (B0400PL) for kit
installation instructions.
50 Series and 70 Series Modules/Processors in a Modular

Industrial Console
To install a 50 Series A-size, B-size, or D-size module in a Modular Industrial Console (MIC),
first install a modular mounting structure (MMS) into the MIC, as described in Modular Indus-
trial Console Installation (B0193UV). Then install the module into the MMS as described below
in “50 Series and 70 Series Modules/Processors in a MMS or 2xMMS” on page 110.
To install a 50 Series C-size processor (Model 51, Style B/B1/C processor) in a Modular
Industrial Workstation (MIW), refer to Modular Industrial Console Installation (B0193UV).
The 50 Series E-size (Model 51, Style E), F-size (Model 51, Style D) processors, and 70 Series
processors require kit number P0971YC before they can be installed in a MIC. Refer to Model 51,
Style D and E Processor Instructions for MIC, MIW, IEMFA/IEMFR (ME24/32), and IE32 Installa-
tion (B0400PL) for kit installation instructions.
109
50 Series and 70 Series Modules/Processors in a NEMA 4/4X

Hardened Enclosure
To install a 50 Series module or processor, or a 70 Series processor, in a NEMA 4/4X hardened
enclosure, refer to “Installing the Processor and Modules into the NEMA 4/4X Enclosure” on
page 46 for complete instructions.
50 Series and 70 Series Modules/Processors in a MMS or 2xMMS

Modular mounting structures (MMS) and dual-height modular mounting structures (2xMMS)
are metal frames that support the 50 Series modules and processors, and 70 Series processors, in
the plastic and metal I/A Series enclosures.
These structures are described in detail in “50 Series Modular Mounting Structures” on page 56.
First, determine which mounting structure to use with your modules or processors:
♦ 50 Series A-size, B-size, or D-size modules can be mounted in a MMS installed in a
metal enclosure (for example, IEMFA/IEMFR, described on page 20), Modular
Industrial Workstation (MIW), or Modular Industrial Console (MIC).
♦ 50 Series modules or processors, or 70 Series processors, can be mounted in a 2xMMS
for metal enclosure (P0971EA) installed in a metal enclosure (IEMFA/IEMFR,
described on page 20), with parts from kit P0971YC.
! CAUTION
The 50 Series E-size processor requires kit P0971VE for proper installation in a
metal enclosure with a front door hinged on the left side, or kit P0971VK for
proper installation in a metal enclosure with a front door hinged on the right side.
♦ 50 Series modules or processors, or 70 Series processors can be mounted in a 2xMMS

for plastic enclosures (P0971EB), in a plastic enclosure (IE16/IE32, described on
page 3), with parts from kit P0971YD.
! CAUTION
The 50 Series E-size and F-size processors and 70 Series processor can only be
installed in the IE32 enclosure, not the IE16 enclosure. The E-size processors
require kit P0971VF to complete installation in this plastic enclosure.
To install the processors and/or modules:

1. If the MMS or 2xMMS is not already installed in its respective enclosure, you must
mount it, as described in “Installing the MMS into the Enclosure” on page 111,
and/or “Installing the 2xMMS into the Enclosure” on page 111.
2. For 2xMMS for metal enclosures (P0971EA) only: install the PDU mounting bracket
on the front rails with the 2xMMS, as described in “Installing the PDU Mounting
Bracket (2xMMS in Metal Enclosure Only)” on page 114.
3. Determine the exact configuration of modules and processors in your mounting struc-
ture, as described in “MMS Module Configurations” on page 115, and “2xMMS
Module/Processor Configurations” on page 116.
110
4. Set up the SCSI addresses on the B-size and D-size modules, as described in
“AP50/51-, and AW50/51-Based Data Storage Device Address Settings” on page 157.
5. Set up the stop clip assemblies for the modules you are installing in the mounting
structure, as described in “Setting Up the Stop Clip Assemblies (If Necessary)” on
page 120.
6. If you are installing modules in an existing mounting structure, remove the existing
adjacent modules (if necessary), as described in “Depopulating the MMS or 2xMMS
(for Modules Only)” on page 121.
7. If you have a 2xMMS, install the 50 Series and 70 Series processors in the 2xMMS
with the spacers included in kit P0971YC and P0971YD, as described in “Installing
the Processors in the 2xMMS” on page 124.
8. Install the 50 Series A-size, B-size, and D-size modules in the mounting structure, as
described in “Installing the 50 Series Modules and Mounting Hardware” on page 132
and “Installing Front and Rear Stop Assemblies (D-Size Modules Only)” on page 138.
9. If you are installing an E-size processor into:
♦ a metal enclosure with a front door hinged on the left side, install kit P0971VE.
♦ a metal enclosure with a front door hinged on the right side, install kit P0971VK.
♦ a plastic IE32 enclosure, install kit P0971VF.
Installation instructions for these kits are located in Model 51, Style D and E Processor
Instructions for MIC, MIW, IEMFA/IEMFR (ME24/32), and IE32 Installation
(B0400PL).
Once these steps are complete, you have finished installing the 50 Series modules or processors, or
70 Series processors, into the mounting structure.
Installing the MMS into the Enclosure

The MMS is shipped already installed in its appropriate enclosure, so you do not need to install it.
However, if you need to mount the MMS into:
♦ an MIW, refer to Modular Industrial Workstation Installation (B0193CE) for installa-
tion instructions.
♦ an MIC, refer to Modular Industrial Console Installation (B0193UV) for installation
instructions.
Proceed to “MMS Module Configurations” on page 115 to determine the exact configuration of
modules and processors in your mounting structure.
Installing the 2xMMS into the Enclosure

If your 2xMMS does not already reside in its appropriate enclosure, you must install it in its
enclosure. Since there are two forms of the 2xMMS (for metal enclosures and for plastic enclo-
sures), two sets of instructions are provided below.
If the 2xMMS is already installed, skip to “MMS Module Configurations” on page 115, or
“2xMMS Module/Processor Configurations” on page 116, depending on your specific needs.
111
2xMMS for Metal Enclosures (P0971EA) Installation

The following procedure pertains to an 2xMMS in a metal enclosure, such as IEFMA, IEFMR, or
user-supplied 483 mm (19 in) rack enclosures. Refer to Figure 4-8 and Figure 4-9 below.
1. If the 2xMMS must contain 50 Series E-size processors, or 70 Series processors, attach
two power outlet assemblies (P0970NP) to the outside of each 2xMMS, as shown in
Figure 4-8, if they are not already installed there. If these assemblies are attached to
the inside of the 2xMMS, you must remove them and reinstall them on the outer
edges.
For any other module or processor, attach two power outlet assemblies (P0970NP) to
the inside of each 2xMMS, as shown in Figure 4-8, if they are not already installed
there.
2. Insert the 2xMMS into the enclosure, aligning the mounting holes of the 2xMMS
with the holes in the rail of the enclosure, as shown in Figure 4-9. Attach the 2xMMS
to the holes in the rail using nut clips and associated screws for the given enclosure.
3. Connect the 2xMMS power cords (part of the power cable assemblies installed in
Step 1, if installed) to the power source junction box in the enclosure.
Install Power Outlet

Assemblies here,
outside or inside
2xMMS*.
Screws
Inside or
Outside
2xMMS*
Power Outlet Assembly:

2 power outlets - one
mounted on each inside ear
2xMMS - P0971EA
*Outside 2xMMS if used with 50 Series E-size or 70 Series processors, or otherwise inside 2xMMS
Figure 4-8. Attaching Power Outlet Assembly to 2xMMS for Metal Enclosures
112
Metal Enclosure
(Front View)
Secure the 2xMMS to its allotted space

in the metal enclosure with nut clips and
associated screws.
2xMMS
P0971EA
Figure 4-9. Mounting the 2xMMS into the Metal Enclosure
You have completed installing the 2xMMS into the metal enclosure. Proceed to “Installing the
PDU Mounting Bracket (2xMMS in Metal Enclosure Only)” on page 114 to install the PDU
mounting bracket in your mounting structure.
2xMMS for Plastic Enclosures (P0971EB) Installation

The following procedure pertains to 2xMMSes in plastic enclosures, such as Industrial Enclosures
(IE16 or IE32). Refer to Figure 4-10.
Insert the 2xMMS into the plastic enclosure, aligning the mounting holes of the 2xMMS with the
holes on the side walls of the enclosure. Attach the 2xMMS to the holes in the walls using nuts
and associated screws for the given plastic enclosure.
113
IE16 Enclosure Secure the 2xMMS to its allotted space

(Front View) in the plastic enclosure with nut clips and
associated screws.
2xMMS
P0971EB
Figure 4-10. Mounting the 2xMMS into a Plastic Enclosure
You have completed installing the 2xMMS into the IE16/32 enclosure. Proceed to “2xMMS
Module/Processor Configurations” on page 116 to determine the exact configuration of
modules and processors in your mounting structure.
Installing the PDU Mounting Bracket (2xMMS in Metal Enclosure Only)

If you have a 2xMMS in a metal enclosure, you must install the PDU mounting bracket
(P0971YK) on the 19-inch rails either above or below the 2xMMS. This mounting bracket is
included in kit P0971YC.
If this bracket is already installed, skip to “2xMMS Module/Processor Configurations” on
page 116.
Attach the bracket:
♦ above the 2xMMS, if it is installed alone without any additional mounting structures
in the metal enclosure, or
♦ below the 2xMMS, if a single height modular mounting structure (MMS) is installed
below the 2xMMS.
Secure the edges of the bracket to the 19-inch rails with the four screws (X0127DD), four lock-
washers (X0143SC), and flat washers (X0143AT), in that order, as shown in Figure 4-11. These
screws and washers are included in kit P0971YC.
114
2xMMS
Attach bracket to rails with (P0971EA) Install bracket here if no other
screws, lockwashers, and mounting structures are in the
flat washers. metal enclosure.
PDU Mounting
Bracket (P0971YK) Install bracket here if an MMS
is installed beneath the 2xMMS in
the metal enclosure.
Flat Washer
Lockwasher MMS 19-Inch Rails

Screw in Metal Enclosure
Figure 4-11. Installing the PDU Mounting Panel
Proceed to “2xMMS Module/Processor Configurations” on page 116 to determine the exact con-
figuration of modules and processors in your mounting structure.
MMS Module Configurations

You must now determine the exact configuration of modules in your modular mounting structure
(MMS). Refer to the information developed during the site planning phase to determine the
approximate position designated for each module and/or processor.
An MMS can accept certain combinations of A-, B-, and D-size modules. Once loaded, the MMS
can be installed in an enclosure, Modular Industrial Workstation (MIW) or Modular Industrial
Console (MIC).
The MMS does not require any additional mounting hardware.
Determine the type and quantity of modules which you will be installing in the MMS. Refer to
Table 4-1 to determine the possible combinations of different size modules allowable within an
MMS. Each row represents a separate allowable configuration in the MMS.
Table 4-1. MMS Module Population
A-Size B- or D-Size
Modules Modules
3 0
2 1
2 2
1 3
1 4
0 5
115
For all your B-size and D-size modules, set up the SCSI addresses as described in “AP50/51-, and
AW50/51-Based Data Storage Device Address Settings” on page 157. Once you have completed
this procedure, proceed to “Setting Up the Stop Clip Assemblies (If Necessary)” on page 120.
2xMMS Module/Processor Configurations

You must now determine the exact configuration of modules and processors in your dual-height
modular mounting structure (2xMMS). Refer to the information developed during the site plan-
ning phase to determine the approximate position designated for each module and/or processor.
A 2xMMS can accept a combination of A-, B-, and D-size modules, and C-size, E-size and F-size
processors (Model 51, Style B, C, D, and E processors), as shown in Figure 4-12 below.
There are two types of 2xMMSes:
♦ one for IE16/32 enclosures (P0971EB) which is 315 mm (12.4 in) wide, and
♦ one for metal enclosures (P0971EA), which is 430 mm (16.8 in) wide.
You require mounting hardware supplied in the following kits to install the modules and
processors in a new 2xMMS:
♦ Kit P0971YC - for 2xMMS for metal enclosures (P0971EA)
♦ Kit P0971YD - for 2xMMS for plastic enclosures (P0971EB).
If these kits have already been installed in your 2xMMS, you do not need to reinstall them.
F-Size Processor
Divider - P0971XG 51 Style D Processor
B-Size Module/
Data Storage
Device
A-Size Module/
50/51 Style A
Processor
E-Size Processor/
2xMMS 51 Style E Processor
(P0971EB Shown) D-Size Module/ C-Size Processor/
Data Storage 51 Style B/B1/C Processor
Telescoping Device
Rails
50 Series Processors/Modules (Typical)
Figure 4-12. 2xMMS with 50 Series Modules and Processors
When populating the 2xMMS with different size modules, A-, B-, and D-size modules should be
located to the left of the vertical divider (if used), and C-, E- and F-size processors (Model 51,
Style B, C, D, and E processors) and 70 Series processors to the right of it.
116
To determine the possible combinations of different size modules and processors allowable within
a 2xMMS, refer to Figure 4-14 for the 2xMMS (P0971EA) for IE16/32 enclosures, and
Figure 4-13 for the 2xMMS (P0971EB) for metal enclosures. Each row represents a separate
allowable configuration in the 2xMMS.
Figure 4-13 indicates the maximum number of each type of module or processor that can be
installed together in a 2xMMS for metal enclosures (P0971EA).
Figure 4-14 indicates the maximum number of each type of module or processor that can be
installed together in a 2xMMS for IE16/32 enclosures (P0971EB).
117
Left section Right section Configurations That Occupy Entire 2xMMS

for A-size, B-size for C-size, E-size, F-size Left section only Right section only
and D-size and 70 Series*
processors A- or D-size B- or D-size C-size
modules
2 and 8 5
2 and 7
2 and 6 C-size E-size
3 and 5 3 and 1
4 and 4 C-size F-size
4 and 3 4 and 1
5 and 2 2 and 2
5 and 1 1 and 3
6 and 0
E-size
B- or D-size 2
9 or 10 E-size F-size
2xMMS 1 and 2
* 70 Series processors are similar in
P0971EA shape to E-size processors. C-size E-size F-size
Configurations That Occupy Each Side of 2xMMS 1 and 1 and 1
Left section Right section Left section Right section
A- or B- or A- or B- or
D-size D-size C-size D-size D-size C-size F-size
0 and 8 and 1 0 and 6 and 1 and 1
4 and 1 and 1 0 and 4 2 and 1
4 and 0 and 1 and
2 0 and 3 and 2 and 1
0 and 6 and
0 and 3 and 3
1 and 2 and 3 A- or B- or
1 and 1 and 3 D-size D-size E-size
2 and 0 and 3 0 and 6 and 1
2 and 3 and 1
A- or B- or 2 and 2 and 1
D-size D-size C-size E-size 3 and 1 and 1
0 and 4 and 1 and 1 4 and 0 and 1
0 and 3 and 1 and 1
1 and 2 and 1 and 1 A- or B- or
1 and 1 and 1 and 1 D-size D-size F-size
1 and 1 and 2
B- or D-size E-size F-size 2 and 0 and 2
Figure 4-13. Maximum Number of Modules and Processors in 2xMMS in Metal Enclosures
118
Left section
for A-size, B-size Right section
and D-size modules for C-size, E-size, F-size
Configurations That Occupy Entire 2xMMS
and 70 Series* processors
Left section only Right section only
A- or D-size B- or D-size C-size
1 and 6 4
2 and 5
2 and 4
3 and 3 C-size E-size
4 and 2 1 and 1
4 and 1
4 and 0
C-size F-size
1 and 2
B- or D-size 2 and 1
7 or 8
* 70 Series processors are similar in E-size F-size

shape to E-size processors. 1 and 1
2xMMS
P0971EB Configurations That Occupy Each Side of 2xMMS
Left section Right section
A- or D-size B- or D-size C-size
0 and 6 and 1
0 and 5 and 1
1 and 4 and 1
1 and 3 and 1
2 and 2 and 1
2 and 1 and 1
2 and 0 and 1
0 and 4 and 2
0 and 3 and 2
1 and 2 and 2
1 and 1 and 2
2 and 0 and 2
0 and 2 and 3
0 and 1 and 3
B- or D-size E-size
and
1 or 2 1
A- or D-size B- or D-size C-size F-size

0 and 4 and 0 and 1
0 and 3 and 0 and 1
1 and 2 and 0 and 1
1 and 1 and 0 and 1
0 and 2 and 1 and 1
0 and 1 and 1 and 1
0 and 2 and 0 and 2
0 and 1 and 0 and 2
Figure 4-14. Maximum Number of Modules and Processors in 2xMMS in IE16/32 Enclosures
119
For any B-size and D-size modules you may have, set up their SCSI addresses as described in
“AP50/51-, and AW50/51-Based Data Storage Device Address Settings” on page 157. Once you
have completed this procedure, you must set up the stop clip assemblies, if necessary, for the A-
size, B-size, and D-size modules.
Setting Up the Stop Clip Assemblies (If Necessary)

The stop clip assembly (P0971KZ), shipped with each A-size, B-size, and D-size module, includes
two stop clips and one stop plate. The clips are used to align the fronts of the modules in a com-
mon plane. These clips must be placed in the assembly.
If you are not installing any A-size, B-size, or D-size modules, skip to “Depopulating the MMS or
2xMMS (for Modules Only)” on page 121.
Determine which type of module will be placed on either side of the stop clip assembly. If you are
unsure, refer to “MMS Module Configurations” on page 115 and “2xMMS Module/Processor
Configurations” on page 116.
Install the stop clips in the stop clip assembly (P0971KZ) in the correct spaces for the A-size,
B-size, or D-size modules used with this assembly, as shown in Figure 4-15.
NOTE
The two stop clip locations on the stop clip assembly are necessary because the
length of the A- and B-size modules, when side-mounted in an MMS or 2xMMS, is
shorter than the length of the side-mounted D-size modules. Refer to the beginning
of this chapter for dimensions of these modules.
120
Top view of stop clip assembly (P0971KZ) with different possible locations for stop clips.
(Darkened slots indicate clip locations.)
Stop clips positioned for Stop clips positioned for one Stop clips positioned for one
two D-size modules D-size module on left, one A- or B-size module on left,
side by side. A- or B-size module on right. one D-size module on right.
Stop Clips
Stop Clip Assembly
Side view of stop clip assembly showing two different stop clip locations (both positions
need not be filled on one stop plate).
Figure 4-15. Installing Stop Clips on Stop Clip Assembly
If you are installing new modules into an existing mounting structure, proceed to “Depopulating
the MMS or 2xMMS (for Modules Only)” on page 121.
Otherwise, skip to “Installing the Processors in the 2xMMS” on page 124.
Depopulating the MMS or 2xMMS (for Modules Only)

If you are installing a new A-size, B-size, or D-size module in an existing mounting structure, the
module adjacent to the new module must be temporarily removed in order to install the new stop
clip assembly which you set up above.
If you are not installing any A-size, B-size, or D-size modules in your mounting structure, skip
this section.
Observe the following CAUTIONS.
! CAUTION
Refer to the following cautions before proceeding
1. Before removing power from an enclosure, ensure that such action will not
adversely affect control of the process.
2. In order to prevent damage to the IPM3 power module (if present), remove
enclosure power in the sequence described in this procedure.
121
Shut down the power to the modules in the mounting structure and remove the module
adjacent to the new module’s slot as follows.
Enclosure
A-Size
Module
Existing Stop
Clip Assembly
Spacer
Plastic Retaining
Assembly
Latch MMS or 2xMMS
Figure 4-16. Removing the A- or B-Size Module
1. Perform the necessary preliminary operations required before removing power from
the enclosure. (Refer to Systems Operations Guide (B0193CR) for general information
relating to this topic.)
2. Remove power from the enclosure as follows:
a. Switch off backup power (if applicable) at the enclosure junction box.
b. Switch off primary power at the enclosure junction box.
c. Observing the following CAUTION statement, switch off the main primary and
main backup power to the enclosure.
! CAUTION
Switching off main primary and main backup power, in most cases, affects other
enclosures along with the one being modified. In these cases, perform Step 2 for
each enclosure affected before switching off main power.
3. Disconnect all I/O cables.

4. Locate the module adjacent to the location where the new module will be placed.
Depress the plastic retaining latch which secures this module to the spacer assembly.
5. Slide this module out of the mounting structure.
6. Remove the spacer assembly as described below.
a. Referring to Figure 4-17, remove the spacer hardware (screw, locking tab, and
nut). Retain this hardware for reinstallation.
122
Screw MMS or 2xMMS
Spacer Spacer Stop Clip

Assembly Assembly
Rear Rail
Locking Spacer Assembly

Tab
Nut Front Rail
Figure 4-17. Removing Existing Spacer from Mounting Structure
b. Remove the spacer and stop clip assembly from the mounting structure rails.
c. Lift and remove the existing stop clip assembly from the spacer.
7. Repeat this procedure to remove any additional modules, if necessary.
8. Install the stop clip assembly you modified in “Setting Up the Stop Clip Assemblies
(If Necessary)” on page 120 on its respective spacer assembly, as shown in Figure 4-15.
Repeat for every spacer assembly affected by this installation.
Stop clip set in position to accept one D-size module

Stop clip set in position to accept one A- or B-size module
Stop Clip Assembly - P0971KZ
(used for A-, B-, and D-size modules only)
Slide stop clip Hook legs of stop clip

flange over into spacer
divider. holes as shown.
Divider
Spacer Assembly*
P0971XP
Fastener Holes
* Older spacer assemblies without fastener holes have the part number P0971EX.
Figure 4-18. Spacer Assembly with Stop Clip Assembly
You have completed depopulating the MMS or 2xMMS for the new module(s), and setting up
the spacer assemblies.
If you are installing processors into a 2xMMS, proceed to the following section. Otherwise, skip
to “Installing the 50 Series Modules and Mounting Hardware” on page 132.
123
Installing the Processors in the 2xMMS

Instructions to install the 50 Series C-size, E-size, F-size, and 70 Series processors into the
2xMMS are provided below. You should install the 70 Series processor and/or E-size processor
first, then the F-size processor, then the C-size processor, if applicable.
If you are not installing any processors in a 2xMMS, skip to “Installing the 50 Series Modules and
Mounting Hardware” on page 132.
NOTE
The 2xMMS must be stripped empty of any pre-existing modules, processors, and
mounting hardware, if you have not done so already, before the processors can be
installed. The installation of additional processors in the 2xMMS forces the divider
in the center of the 2xMMS to be moved, changing the 2xMMS’ internal configura-
tion. See “Depopulating the MMS or 2xMMS (for Modules Only)” on page 121.
70 Series Processors
70 Series processors are workstations with mini-tower forms, and do not require any additional
hardware for 2xMMS installation. Place the 70 Series processor against the right side of the
2xMMS. Ensure that the processor is not upside down, that its base does not hang more than 4 in
(100 mm) over the front edge of the 2xMMS, and that its faceplate faces toward the front.
In the 2xMMS for metal enclosures, you can install a second 70 Series processor to the left of the
first one.
70 Series processors cannot be used in the 2xMMS if they are set in a wide plastic base (such as
the Enterprise Pentium II 70 Series processor, see page 610 and page 625). Remove this base
before installing the processor in a 2xMMS.
You have completed the installation procedure for the 70 Series processors. Plug the ac power cord
of the processor into the outlet strip nearest the processor when finished with all
associated installation procedures for the 2xMMS.
Proceed to install additional processors, or skip to “Installing the 50 Series Modules and Mount-
ing Hardware” on page 132.
E-Size (Model 51, Style E) Processors

If you are installing the E-size (Model 51, Style E) processor in a IEMFA/IEMFR (ME24/32)
metal enclosure, or a plastic Industrial Enclosure 32 (IE32), you must replace the front door of
the enclosure after you have finished the procedures described in this chapter.
You require:
♦ Kit P0971VE if the front door of the IEMFA/IEMFR (ME24/32) is left-hinged, or
♦ Kit P0971VK if the front door on the IEMFA/IEMFR (ME24/32) is right-hinged, or
♦ Kit P0971VF for the IE32.
and IE32 Installation (B0400PL) for door replacement procedures after you have completed
installing equipment in your respective 2xMMS.
124
To install the E-size processor in a 2xMMS for metal enclosures, you require the following spacer
blocks, included with kits P0971YC and P0971YD (shown in Figure 4-19):
♦ Left spacer (P0971XJ), with two panhead screws (X0124GN)
♦ Right spacer (P0971WY), with one panhead screw (X0124GN).
To install the E-size processor in a 2xMMS for plastic enclosures, you require a single spacer block
(P0971WR), with two panhead screws (X0124GN), included with kits P0971YC and P0971YD
(shown in Figure 4-19):
mm
in
Top View Side View

112 16
4.4 0.62
80
41 3.14
41
1.62 21 1.62
0.81
Left Spacer for 2xMMS in Metal Enclosures - P0971XJ

112 16
4.4 0.62
51
41 1.99 41
1.62 21 1.62
0.81
Right Spacer for 2xMMS in Metal Enclosures - P0971WY
112 16
4.4 0.62
37
41 1.46 41
1.62 21 1.62
0.81
Spacer for 2xMMS in Plastic Enclosures - P0971WR

Figure 4-19. E-Size (Model 51, Style E) Processor Spacer Blocks for 2xMMS Installation
Up to two E-size processors can fit in a 2xMMS for metal enclosures, and one E-size processor can
fit in a 2xMMS for plastic enclosures. To install E-size processor(s) into either 2xMMS, proceed
as follows:
1. Install the applicable spacer blocks and spacer screw, for your specific 2xMMS.
For the 2xMMS for metal enclosures:
♦ Place the left (P0971XJ) and right (P0971WY) spacer blocks on the front rail on
the base of the 2xMMS, as shown in Figure 4-20.
125
Top View of 2xMMS mm Front View of 2xMMS

Rear in
Screw Holes
2xMMS 2xMMS
Left Wall Right Wall
22
0.86
E-Size Processors
Front Rail
Left Spacer Right Spacer Front
Block Block Rail
P0971XJ P0971WY
E-Size Processors Right Spacer Block
Left Spacer Block
Figure 4-20. Securing Spacer Blocks to 2xMMS in Metal Enclosure
♦ Align the spacer blocks with their respective screw holes in the front rail.
♦ Secure the spacer blocks to the front rail with the panhead screws.
For the 2xMMS for plastic enclosures:
♦ Place the spacer (P0971WR) on the front rail on the base of the 2xMMS, as
shown in Figure 4-21.
Front View
Top View of 2xMMS of 2xMMS
Rear
Screw Holes
2xMMS 2xMMS
Spacer
P0971WR E-Size
Front Rail Processor
Spacer
E-Size Processor Front Rail
Figure 4-21. Securing Spacer to 2xMMS in Plastic Enclosure
♦ Align the spacer with its screw holes in the front rail.
♦ Secure the spacer to the front rail with the panhead screws.
126
2. Place the E-size processor in the 2xMMS, closer to the right side of the structure, as
indicated in Figure 4-20 and Figure 4-21. Ensure that the processor is not upside
down, that its base does not hang more than 4 in (100 mm) over the front edge of the
2xMMS, and that its faceplate faces toward the front.
If a second E-size processor is to be installed in the 2xMMS (for metal enclosures
only), ensure that you are able to access the rear of these two processors in the enclo-
sure or 19-inch rack (for example, from a rear door). The processors cannot be con-
nected without rear access in the enclosure. Install the second E-size processor to the
left, touching the side of the first processor (see Figure 4-20).
The E-size processors are sufficiently bottom heavy, so that they can stay upright in
the 2xMMS without further support.
Proceed to install additional processors, or skip to “Installing the 50 Series Modules and Mount-
ing Hardware” on page 132.
After you have completed installing equipment in your respective 2xMMS, install the new enclo-
sure door as described in Model 51, Style D and E Processor Instructions for MIC, MIW,
IEMFA/IEMFR (ME24/32), and IE32 Installation (B0400PL).
F-Size (Model 51, Style D) Processors

To install F-size (Model 51, Style D) processors in a metal enclosure, you require:
♦ One single spacer block (P0971XH), with two panhead screws
♦ One double spacer block (P0971WQ), with two panhead screws.
To install F-size processors in a plastic enclosure, you require:
♦ Two single spacer blocks (P0971XH), with two panhead screws
♦ Two double spacer blocks (P0971WQ), with two panhead screws.
These spacers are included in kits P0971YC and P0971YD in their proper quantities. Figure 4-19
provides an illustration of these spacer blocks.
127
mm Top View Side View

in
61
2.4
61
52 2.4
2.06
41 16
1.62 0.62
15 21
0.6 0.81
Single Spacer Block for 2xMMS - P0971XH
Top View
170
6.71
80 37
3.14 1.46
40
1.58
23
0.81
Side View
51
2.0
6.4 16
0.25 0.62
Double Spacer Block for 2xMMS - P0971WQ

Figure 4-22. F-Size Processor Spacer Blocks for 2xMMS Installation
Up to three F-size processors can fit in a 2xMMS in a metal enclosure (P0971EA), and up to two
F-size processors can fit in a 2xMMS in an plastic enclosure (P0971EB). To install these proces-
sor(s) into either 2xMMS, proceed as follows:
1. Install the applicable spacer blocks and spacer screw, on the front and rear rails in your
specific 2xMMS.
For kit P0971YC, for the 2xMMS for metal enclosures:
If you are installing one F-size processor, place one single spacer block (P0971XH)
on the front rail on the base of the 2xMMS, as indicated in Figure 4-23.
128

in
Rear
Rear Rail
112
2xMMS 2xMMS
4.4
Screw Holes
F-Size Processor
Front Rail
Front
Single Spacer Block Rail
F-Size Processor P0971XH
Single Spacer Block
Note: If you have an E-Size processor in the 2xMMS already, adjust the installation of the single spacer
blocks accordingly.
Figure 4-23. Securing a Spacer Block to 2xMMS in Metal Enclosure (for One F-Size Processor)
If you are installing two F-size processors, place one double spacer block
(P0971WQ) on the front rail on the base of the 2xMMS, as indicated in
Figure 4-24.

in
Rear
Rear Rail
2xMMS 2xMMS 173

Left Wall Right Wall 6.8
F-Size
Screw Holes Processors
Front Rail
Double Spacer Block Front
F-Size Rail
Processors P0971WQ
Double Spacer Block
Note: If you have an E-Size processor in the 2xMMS already, adjust the installation of the double
spacer blocks accordingly.
Figure 4-24. Securing a Spacer Block to 2xMMS in Metal Enclosure (for Two F-Size Processors)
If you are installing three F-size processors, place one single spacer block
(P0971XH) and one double spacer block (P0971WQ) each on the front rail on
the base of the 2xMMS, as indicated in Figure 4-25.
129

in
Rear
Rear Rail
F-Size 61
2xMMS 2xMMS
Processors 2.42
F-Size
Screw Holes Processors
Front Rail
Single Spacer Double Spacer Block Front
Block - P0971XH P0971WQ Rail
Single Spacer Block Double Spacer Block
Figure 4-25. Securing Spacer Blocks to 2xMMS in Metal Enclosure (for Three F-Size Processors)
For kit P0971YD, for the 2xMMS for plastic enclosures:

If you are installing one F-size processor, place one single spacer block (P0971XH)
on the front rail, and one double spacer block on the rear rail at the base of the
2xMMS, as indicated in Figure 4-26.
Top View of 2xMMS Front View

Rear of 2xMMS
Single Spacer Block

Rear Rail
2xMMS 2xMMS
Model 51,
Screw Holes Style D
Processor
Front Rail
Single
F-Size Processor Single Spacer Block Spacer
P0971XH Block
Front Rail
NOTE: If you have an E-Size processor in the 2xMMS already, adjust the installation of the single spacer
blocks accordingly.
Figure 4-26. Securing Spacer to 2xMMS in Plastic Enclosure (for One F-Size Processor)
If you are installing two F-size processors, place one double spacer block
(P0971WQ) on the front rail, and one double spacer block on the rear rail at the
base of the 2xMMS, as shown in Figure 4-27.
130
Top View of 2xMMS Front View

Rear of 2xMMS
Double Spacer Block

Rear Rail
2xMMS 2xMMS
Screw Holes Model 51, Style

Double Spacer Block D Processors
Front Rail P0971WQ
Double
Spacer
F-Size Processors Block
Front Rail
NOTE: If you have an E-Size processor in the 2xMMS already, adjust the installation of the double spacer
blocks accordingly.
Figure 4-27. Securing Spacers to 2xMMS in Plastic Enclosure (for Two F-Size Processors)
2. Align the spacer block(s) with their respective screw holes on the front and rear rails.
3. Secure the spacer block(s) to the front and rear rails with the panhead screws included
with the F-size processor.
4. Place the F-size processor(s) in the 2xMMS, with the base facing the right side of the
structure, as indicated in Figure 4-23 through Figure 4-27. Ensure that the
processor’s faceplate faces toward the front.
If multiple F-size processors are to be installed in the 2xMMS (for metal enclosures
only), ensure that you can access the rear of these processors in the enclosure or rack
(for example, from a rear door). The processors cannot be connected to their associ-
ated cables without rear access in the enclosure or rack.
You have completed installing the F-size (Model 51, Style D) processors. Proceed to install addi-
tional processors, or skip to “Installing the 50 Series Modules and Mounting Hardware” on
page 132.
C-Size (Model 51, Style B, B1, or C) Processors

Proceed as follows to install each C-size (Model 51, Style B, B1, or C) processor into either ver-
sion of the 2xMMS.
1. Orient the C-size processor so that its feet are against the right side of the 2xMMS or
close to the C-size, or E-size processor to its right, whichever is applicable. Ensure the
CD-ROM/floppy drive is facing toward the front (see Figure 4-28). (This places the
cable connectors at the top.)
2. Install the retaining plate (P0971ED) directly above the C-size processor, as shown in
Figure 4-28.
NOTE
This retaining plate (P0971ED) is supplied with the C-size processor.
131
Screw and Lockwasher
Retaining Plate
P0971ED
Side of 2xMMS
C-Size Processor
Mounted in a 2xMMS
CD-ROM/Floppy Drive
must face toward front.
Figure 4-28. C-Size Processor and Retaining Plate Installation
3. Repeat this procedure for every other C-size processor you install in the 2xMMS.
You have completed the installation procedure for the C-size processors.
Plug the ac power cord of the processor into the outlet strip nearest the processor when
finished with all associated installation procedures for the 2xMMS.
Proceed to install mounting hardware and modules (if necessary) into the mounting structure.
Installing the 50 Series Modules and Mounting Hardware

You must now replace any spacer assemblies affected by this installation, and install all the
required modules in the mounting structure. Instructions for replacing these assemblies differ
slightly, depending on whether they are being replaced on the MMS or 2xMMS base rails, or on
the 2xMMS telescoping rails (see Figure 4-12 on page 116).
NOTE
For convenience, this section uses the term “rails” to refer to either the base rails or
telescoping rails, except where the term “2xMMS telescoping rails” is called out.
Proceed as follows:
1. Set up the divider and telescoping rails in the 2xMMS as follows. If you are setting up
an MMS, or an existing 2xMMS with regular rails, skip to Step 2.
a. Using the screws (X0173FQ) and lockwashers (X0143SB) supplied in kits
P0971YC and P0971YD, secure the divider (P0971XG) to the upper and lower
2xMMS rails as far over to the right as possible. If you have mounted processors in
the 2xMMS, leave a little under 1 in (25 mm) of space between the divider and
the processors.
132
Upper 2xMMS
Rails
Divider
P0971XG
Telescoping Rails
Processors
Left Section of 2xMMS
2xMMS
Lower 2xMMS Rails (P0971EA shown)
Figure 4-29. Installing Divider into 2xMMS
b. Depending on the space remaining on the left section of the 2xMMS, determine
which of the following telescoping rails (included in kits P0971YC and
P0971YD) fit best in this space:
♦ 76 mm (3 in) telescoping rails, inner (P0971XA) and outer (P0971XD)
♦ 127 mm (5 in) telescoping rails, inner (P0971XB) and outer (P0971XE)
♦ 254 mm (10 in) telescoping rails, inner (P0971XC) and outer (P0971XF) -
[these rails are not applicable to the 2xMMS for plastic enclosures
(P0971EB)]
c. For the two sets of telescoping rails required, slide the inner rail into the outer rail,
as shown in Figure 4-30.
d. For each combined rail set, hold each rail set in the left section of the 2xMMS and
adjust it to fit exactly the space between the divider and the left wall of the
2xMMS. Pull the combined rails apart to widen them, and push the rails together
to shorten them.
e. Insert a screw (X0173UH) into the center holes in the outer telescoping rail, as
shown in Figure 4-30, and tighten it to secure the telescoping rails in place.
133
P0971XA - 76 mm (3 in)
P0971XB - 127 mm (5 in)
P0971XC - 254 mm (10 in)
30
1.18
45.5
1.79 Secure the two rails
by inserting and
Outer Telescoping Rail
tightening a
screw here.
Inner
Screw
Telescoping
X0173UH
Rail
30
1.18
45.5
P0971XD - 76 mm (3 in) 1.79
P0971XE - 127 mm (5 in)
P0971XF - 254 mm (10 in)
Figure 4-30. Connecting the Telescoping Rails
f. Attach the two telescoping rail sets to the screws holes in the left 2xMMS wall and
the divider with the screws included in kits P0971YC and P0971YD (see
Figure 4-31). The outer telescoping rail should face toward the front of the
2xMMS.
134
2xMMS 2xMMS
Attach the P0971EB P0971EA
Attach the
telescoping rails telescoping rails
to the screw holes to the screw holes
on the 2xMMS, on the 2xMMS,
as indicated. as indicated.
Outer Outer
Telescoping Rail Telescoping Rail
Figure 4-31. Installing the Telescoping Rails in a 2xMMS
2. If you removed or must install any spacer assemblies, proceed as follows. Otherwise,
skip this step.
a. Determine how many spacer assemblies (P0971XP) you must install in the MMS,
or the left section of the 2xMMS. Skip this substep if you are replacing spacer
assemblies that you removed in “Depopulating the MMS or 2xMMS (for Mod-
ules Only)” on page 121.
You require:
♦ one spacer for the first two A-size, B-size, and D-size modules you must install
on the lower MMS or 2xMMS rails,
♦ one spacer for the first two A-size, B-size, and D-size modules you must install
on the upper rails (2xMMS only), and
♦ one spacer for every additional A-size, B-size, and D-size module you must
install in the 2xMMS.
b. Referring to Figure 4-32, hook the rear of the spacer assembly onto the rear rails
on the mounting structure, and then lower it so that it rests on the front rails.
135
(Mounting Hardware
Removed)
MMS or 2xMMS
Spacer Assembly
NOTE:
Tilt spacer assembly
back 45° to engage
rear rail.
Rear Rail
Front Rail
Figure 4-32. Initial Positioning of Spacer Assembly
c. If your spacer assembly is being installed on rails which are not telescoping rails,
perform this step. Referring to Figure 4-33, replace the spacer assembly hardware
(screw, locking tab, and nut) if applicable. Do not tighten. Otherwise, skip this
step.
NOTE: No spacer is installed in left-hand side.
Screw
MMS or 2xMMS
Spacer Stop Clip

Assembly
Rear Rail
Locking Spacer Assembly

Tab
Front Rail
Nut
Figure 4-33. Securing Spacer to Lower Rails
3. For each module you removed in “Depopulating the MMS or 2xMMS (for Modules
Only)” on page 121 (if you performed this procedure), temporarily place the module
into its assigned position in the mounting structure. The module should be oriented
such that its base feet are facing toward the right side of the mounting structure.
136
4. Slide the spacer assembly over against the module, and scribe (or mark with pencil)
the position of the spacer on the front rails.
5. Remove the module, and move the spacer assembly to the position marked above.
6. For spacer assemblies on the 2xMMS telescoping rails, line up the holes indicated in
Figure 4-34 with the corresponding holes in the rails, and attach the spacers to the
rails with the tuflok fasteners (X0173YL) included with kit P0971YC or kit
P0971YD.
For spacer assemblies on other rails, skip this step.
Divider Tuflok
Spacer
Fasteners
P0971XP
X0173YL
Outer
Telescoping
Rail
Inner
Telescoping
Rails
Outer
Telescoping
Rail
Figure 4-34. Attaching Spacer Assembly to Telescoping Rails
7. Tighten the screw indicated in Figure 4-32 on page 136 to secure the spacer assembly.
8. Push each module gently rearward in its mounting structure slot until the plastic latch
at the front of the spacer assembly pops up and secures the module in place, as shown
in Figure 4-35. Normally, modules are loaded starting at the right-hand position.
137
Enclosure
D-Size Module
(Typical)
Plastic Retaining Spacer Assembly

Latch
MMS or 2xMMS in Place
Figure 4-35. Mounting of 50 Series Module in Enclosure
You have completed installation for the A-size, and B-size modules.
If you have any D-size modules in the mounting structure, proceed to the following section.
Plug the ac power cord of each module into the outlet strip nearest each module when
finished with all associated installation procedures.
Installing Front and Rear Stop Assemblies (D-Size Modules Only)

When installing a D-size module in an MMS or 2xMMS, it is also necessary to install a front stop
assembly (P0971KU) for each D-size module. You must also install a rear stop assembly
(P0971PZ) if the D-size module is in the left-most position within a 2xMMS. These assemblies
are shown in Figure 4-36 below.
Front Stop Assembly Installation

1. Place the front stop assembly on the rail directly above the D-size module. Refer to
Figure 4-36.
If the assembly is on the 2xMMS front telescoping rail, it must straddle both the inner
and outer telescoping rails to properly hold itself securely. If the front stop assembly
rests only on the extended portion of the telescoping rail (that is, on only one rail and
not both) snap a telescoping rail spacer block (P0971XR) onto this portion of the rail
to make up the difference for the assembly. This block is included with kits P0971YC
and P0971YD.
Front stop assemblies on any other MMS or 2xMMS rails do not require any special
procedures.
138
Stop for
Upper D-Size
Module
Upper Front
Screw C
2xMMS Cross Rail
Stop for
Screw A Lower D-Size
Module
Screw B
Screw C Rear Stop Assembly

P0971PZ
Mount on rear telescoping
rails of 2xMMS. Only for
use in 2xMMS where D-size
Front Stop Assembly, module is mounted in left-
P0971KU most position.
Telescoping Rail
D-Size Module
2xMMS
A-Size Module (P0971EB shown)
Figure 4-36. 2xMMS, Showing Installation of Front Stop Assembly and Rear Stop Assembly
2. Turn the set screw A in Figure 4-37 to take up any front-to-back play between the
stop and the rail.
3. Next, attach the front stop assembly on the cross rail and secure it by tightening screw
B shown in Figure 4-37.
4. Adjust front bracket to hold the D-size modules securely and tighten screw C shown
in Figure 4-37.
Screw A
Screw B
Screw C
Figure 4-37. Front Stop Assembly (Similar to Rear Stop Assembly) for D-Size Modules
5. Repeat this procedure for every other D-size module you have installed in the mount-
ing structure.
Continue to the next section.
Rear Stop Assembly Installation

It is necessary to install a rear stop assembly for a D-size module installed in the left-most position
within a 2xMMS, because there is no spacer assembly or stop clip assembly to restrain the rear of
the module when it is in the left-most position in the mounting structure. Refer to Figure 4-36
for the location and positioning of the rear stop assembly (P0971PZ).
139
Installation of a rear stop assembly in a MMS is unnecessary.

1. Position the rear stop assembly on the rear rails of the 2xMMS, in line with the D-size
module.
If used on the 2xMMS telescoping rails, the rear stop assembly must straddle both the
inner and outer telescoping rails to properly hold itself securely. If the rear stop assem-
bly rests only on the extended portion of the telescoping rail (that is, on only one rail
and not both) snap a telescoping rail spacer block (P0971XR) onto this portion of the
rail to extend the width of the rail for the assembly. This block is included with kits
P0971YC and P0971YD.
NOTE
The rear bracket on the rear stop assembly contains two stops, one upper and one
lower, which move in unison.
2. Adjust the rear bracket on the rear stop assembly so that it comes in contact with both
top and bottom D-size modules, if necessary, and secure the bracket by tightening
screw C, shown in Figure 4-36.
3. Secure the stop assembly to the rail by tightening screw A, shown in Figure 4-37.
You have completed installation for the D-size module in the mounting structures.
Plug the ac power cord of the module into the outlet strip nearest the module when finished with
all associated installation procedures.
Completing Installation for E-Size Processor

If you are installing the E-size (Model 51, Style E) processor in a IEMFA/IEMFR (ME24/32)
metal enclosure, or a plastic Industrial Enclosure 32 (IE32), you must replace the front door of
the enclosure.
You require:
♦ Kit P0971VE if the front door of the IEMFA/IEMFR (ME24/32) is left-hinged, or
♦ Kit P0971VK if the front door on the IEMFA/IEMFR (ME24/32) is right-hinged, or
♦ Kit P0971VF for the IE32.
and IE32 Installation (B0400PL) for additional information on these kits. Once you have replaced
these doors, installation for the E-size processors is complete.
Plug the ac power cord of the processor into the outlet strip nearest the processor when finished
with all associated installation procedures.
X- and Z-Module, General Installation Information

Although the X- and Z-Modules (shown in Figure 4-4 and Figure 4-5, respectively) differ in
appearance, the installation procedures for both are the same (with the exception of the fault-
tolerant module connector installation, as described in the following subsections).
Either module type (X or Z) is available in two configurations, non-fault-tolerant and fault-
tolerant. The non-fault-tolerant module consists of one single-width or double-width module;
the fault-tolerant module consists of two single-width or double-width modules. Communication
140
between the two modules in the fault-tolerant configuration takes place via fault-tolerant module
connectors, of which there are two types:
♦ Rear-Mounted Fault-Tolerant Module Connector - This connector is used with all
fault-tolerant X-Modules, and some fault-tolerant Z-Modules. When required, the
connector is attached to the mounting structure (at the rear of the fault-tolerant mod-
ule) prior to installation of the module.
♦ Front-Mounted Fault-Tolerant Module Connector - Used only with the fault-tolerant
version of the Control Processor 30/30B, Control Processor 40/40B and Gateway 30
(see Note), this connector must be attached to the front of the module pair after the
modules are installed.
NOTE
The following notes apply to the fault-tolerant modules:
1. For some fault-tolerant processor modules, namely the Control Processor 30,
Control Processor 40 and Gateway 30, both the rear-mounted and front-mounted
fault-tolerant module connectors are used.
2. Mixing of fault-tolerant control processor types is not allowed (for example, use
of a Control Processor 30 with a Control Processor 30B).
Rear-Mounted Fault-Tolerant Module Connector Installation

The rear-mounted fault-tolerant module connector is used with the fault-tolerant versions of the
following processor modules:
♦ Gateway 30.
The rear-mounted fault-tolerant module connector is not used with the fault-tolerant versions of
the Control Processor 30B and Control Processor 40B.
Inserted into the mounting structure bus on an “as needed” basis, the rear-mounted fault-
tolerant module connector is available in two styles: a short connector (part number P0400CV) is
used to interconnect two single-width fault-tolerant modules, and a long connector (part number
P0500XL) is used to interconnect two double-width fault-tolerant modules.
141
Clip Pin
Mounting Receptacles
Structure
Bus
Clip Pins
Rear-Mounted
Fault-Tolerant
Module Connector
(Single)
Figure 4-38. Rear-Mounted Fault-Tolerant Module Connector Installation
To install the rear-mounted fault-tolerant module connector, refer to Figure 4-38 and proceed as
follows:
1. Refer to the information developed during the site planning phase and determine
which mounting structure slots are to receive fault-tolerant modules.
2. Insert appropriately sized rear-mounted fault-tolerant module connectors into the
mounting structure in the slot locations that are to receive fault-tolerant modules.
Ensure that the clip pins on the fault-tolerant module connectors insert into the clip
pin receptacles on the mounting structure bus. See Figure 4-38.
Front-Mounted Fault-Tolerant Module Connector Installation

The front-mounted fault-tolerant module connector is used with the fault-tolerant version of the
processor modules listed in Table 4-2.
Table 4-2. Types of Front-Mounted Fault-Tolerant Module Connectors
Part Number
of Front-Mounted Fault-
Module Type Tolerant Module Connector
Control Processor 30 P0960AH
Control Processor 30B P0961BS
Control Processor 40 P0960AH
Control Processor 40B P0961BS
Gateway 30 P0960AH
To install the front-mounted fault-tolerant module connector, refer to Figure 4-39 and proceed as
follows.
142
NOTE
This procedure assumes that (1) the fault-tolerant modules are installed in the
enclosure, as described in “X- and Z-Module Installation” on page 144, and
(2) the rear-mounted fault-tolerant module connector is installed (if required) as
described under “Rear-Mounted Fault-Tolerant Module Connector Installation” on
page 141.
1. For each of the modules in the fault-tolerant pair, lower the fault-tolerant module
connector cover by grasping the cover near the top and pulling toward you.
2. Insert the front-mounted fault-tolerant module connector (see part numbers listed
above) into the two exposed receptacles at the front of the modules.
3. Raise each of the fault-tolerant module connector covers, and press firmly in place.
! CAUTION
A tab is provided on the fault-tolerant module connector for safe removal of the
connector. To remove the connector, lower the fault-tolerant (FT) module connec-
tor covers, grasp the tab on the fault-tolerant module connector, and move it out-
ward (toward you). Do not remove the connector by grasping its sides, as this will
damage the connector pins.
Z- Module Tab on FT Module

Fault-Tolerant Connector (See CAUTION
Module Connector Statement in Text)
Receptacle
Fault-Tolerant
Module Connector Fault-Tolerant
Cover (Lowered Module Connector Fault-Tolerant Module
Position) Cover (Raised Connector* in Place
Position) (Also attaches to
adjacent module,
not shown)
*FT Module Connector P0960AH used with Control Processor 30, Control Processor 40, and
Gateway 30.
FT Module Connector P0961BS used with Control Processor 30B and Control Processor 40B.
Figure 4-39. Front-Mounted Fault-Tolerant Module Connector Installation
143
Fieldbus Jumper Installation

The Control Processor 10 or the Control Processor 30/40 can be used in either of two configura-
tions: a local Fieldbus configuration, where connection to the Fieldbus is made through the
mounting structure bus; or a remote Fieldbus configuration, where connection to the Fieldbus is
made through the plug connectors at the top of the Control Processor.
If the local Fieldbus configuration is to be used with the Control Processor, insert a Fieldbus
jumper, part number P0800ES, at the position corresponding to the “A” connector on the Con-
trol Processor, as shown in Figure 4-40. (Two jumpers are required for the fault-tolerant Control
Processor, each inserted at position “A”.) The jumpers are either shipped in place, or are packaged
with other small parts in the enclosure.
Fieldbus jumpers are not used with the remote Fieldbus configuration.
Fieldbus Jumpers
P0800ES
A B C D A B CDA B C D
NOTE:
Module appearance may
differ slightly from that
Non-Fault-Tolerant Fault-Tolerant shown.
Control Processor Control Processor
Figure 4-40. Fieldbus Jumper Positioning
X- and Z-Module Installation

To install an X- or Z-Module, refer to Figure 4-4 or Figure 4-5 (as appropriate) and proceed as
follows:
1. Referring to the information developed during the site planning phase, determine
which enclosure slots are to receive X- or Z-Modules.
144
NOTE
X- or Z-Modules that are to be installed in the upper half of a mounting structure
must be oriented as shown in Figure 4-4 and Figure 4-5 (in the non-inverted posi-
tion). Modules that are to be mounted in the lower half of a mounting structure
must be oriented in the inverted position. Fieldbus Y-Modules must be right side
up when installed in the 1x8, 1x8 FBM, 2x8, or 2x8 FBM mounting structures.
2. Insert the module in its assigned slot and push firmly in place until it engages the rear
section of the mounting structure.
If the module is a fault-tolerant type, it may require installation of a rear-mounted
fault-tolerant module connector (if not already installed). Refer to “Rear-Mounted
Fault-Tolerant Module Connector Installation” on page 141 for detailed information.
3. Observing the following CAUTION statement, and using the hex driver tool, tighten
the long captive mounting screw(s) at the front of the module. (Double-width proces-
sor modules have two additional captive mounting screws for each slot position.) This
fastens the module to the mounting structure bus.
! CAUTION
When installing modules or any other hardware that screws into inserts imbedded
in plastic, use the hex driver tool provided (X0179AZ), or the appropriate screw-
driver. If you must use another type of tool, make sure that it does not generate
more than 12 in • lbs of torque, or you might strip the threaded insert out of the
plastic.
NOTE
The short captive mounting screw(s) must be tightened before any peripheral con-
nections can be made to the processor module. The long captive mounting screw(s)
must be tightened before the short mounting screw(s).
4. To engage the peripheral connector plug, insert the hex driver tool into the peripheral
connector engagement actuator slot and turn clockwise one-half turn. (This is per-
formed after the peripheral connector jacks are in place.)
5. If the module is a fault-tolerant Control Processor 30/30B, Control Processor 40/40B,
or a Gateway 30, install the front-mounted fault-tolerant module connector at this
time, as described under “Front-Mounted Fault-Tolerant Module Connector Installa-
6. Install the module identifier (letterbug) as described in the following subsection.
Module Identifier (Letterbug) Installation

A module identifier, composed of six letterbugs, is used to provide physical, user-assigned labels
on X-, Z-, and Fieldbus Modules. Each letterbug is a small plastic device with a single character
embossed on the front surface. The rear surface of the letterbug contains two to eight pins that are
electrically connected. These pins are arranged in configurations corresponding to particular char-
acters or symbols. The required sets of letterbugs are shipped packaged inside the enclosures.
145
NOTE
For more information on the differences between the AP20 X- and Z- Modules,
including letterbug setup and SCSI bus termination, refer to Application Processor
20 Z-Module Installation and Maintenance (B0193SG).
The module identifiers are electrically readable either right side up or inverted. This placement
allows the letterbugs to be visually upright in a processor module that is inverted. The six letter-
bugs that form one module identifier plug into a 48-pin connector on the processor module.
NOTE
The following notes apply to the letterbugs:
1. The SPECTRUM Slave Gateway (SSG) module IDs must be set using the
following configuration:
FOXNET Address I/A Series Identifier
03xxxx 000SSG
The SSG is a double X-Module. The FOXNET address goes on the left side, and
the I/A Series identifier goes on the right, as shown above.
2. Any letterbugs containing the letter “U” may only be inserted into the modules
in the upright position.
3. The letterbug associated with a 50 Series, 70 Series, or Server 70 processor is
mounted in the DNBI, DNBT, or DNBX through which it communicates with the
Nodebus. A labeling kit, supplied with the processor, provides for affixing the same
letterbug sequence to the front or side of the processor.
! CAUTION
The use of an all-numeric letterbug for a 50 Series, 70 Series, or Server 70 processor
(actually the associated DNBI/DNBT/DNBX) is not allowed. 50 Series, 70 Series,
or Server 70 processor letterbugs must contain an alpha character (A through Z).
Failure to follow this rule causes unpredictable network and application behavior.
Assembly of the letterbugs to form a module identifier, and insertion of the module identifier into
a module are shown in Figure 4-41 and Figure 4-42.
To assemble and install the module identifiers, proceed as follows:
1. Referring to the information developed during the site planning phase, gather the six
letterbugs that form the module identifier and assemble by inserting the dovetailed
end of one letterbug into the corresponding end of the next letterbug until all six let-
terbugs have been assembled in the proper order. (See Figure 4-41.)
146
Letterbugs keyed together

to form module identifier.
The six letterbugs, so
keyed, plug into the
processor module.
Figure 4-41. Module Identifier Assembly
Non-Inverted
Processor
Module
Module
Identifier
(Letterbug Set)
Inverted
Processor Letterbug
Module Extractor
Tool
Figure 4-42. Inserting Module Identifier into a Module
2. Insert the assembled module identifier into the receptacle on the front of the module,
being careful that the pins are properly aligned with the holes in the receptacle. (See
Figure 4-42.)
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for all installed X-Modules, Z-Modules, and Fieldbus Modules.
NOTE
To remove the module identifier (letterbug set) use the letterbug extractor tool,
Foxboro part number P0902HK, shown in Figure 4-42.
147
Y-Adapter Installation
Refer to Figure 4-43. The Y-adapter (part number P0400DL) is a mounting device which, when
installed in a 1x8 or 2x8 mounting structure, allows mounting of Fieldbus Modules (Y Modules)
and Fieldbus Isolator modules. It occupies two mounting structure slots, and is intended for use
in all enclosures except Field Enclosure 4 and the FBM mounting structures. (The aforemen-
tioned enclosures accept Fieldbus Modules and Fieldbus Isolator modules directly.) The Y-adapter
can hold two Fieldbus Modules, or one Fieldbus Module and one or two Fieldbus Isolator
modules.
NOTE
While the design of the Y-adapter allows for Fieldbus Modules to be installed in
either a right side up or inverted orientation, the design does not allow for both ori-
entations simultaneously within a given Y-adapter.
The Y-adapter contains a moveable 6-pin connector, which is attached to a mechanical indicator
arm, visible through a slot at the front of the Y-adapter. As described in the following procedure,
positioning of the 6-pin connector depends on whether the upper or lower Fieldbus configuration
is used.
NOTE
If a Y-adapter is to house a main and expansion FBM pair, then the main FBM
must be associated with an odd slot, and the expansion FBM with an even slot in
the mounting structure. Additionally, the main and the expansion FBMs must be
paired in the same Y-adapter. This consideration can affect the slot positions where
the adapter is installed. (Refer to “Main and Expansion FBM Installation Consider-
ations” on page 150 for further related installation information.)
NOTE
The 6-pin connector must be positioned before the Y-adapter is inserted into the
enclosure.
To install the Y-adapter, proceed as follows. (Refer to Figure 4-43.)

1. Refer to the information developed during the site planning phase to determine (1) if
your installation requires Y-adapters and (2) the location of the Y-adapters. Also deter-
mine if the upper or lower Fieldbus configuration is used.
2. If the upper Fieldbus configuration is used, move the 6-pin connector at the rear of
the Y-adapter to position the front indicator according to the following rules. (Refer to
the information developed during the site planning phase to determine the position of
the associated control processor.)
a. If the associated Control Processor is mounted in the bottom row of a 2x4 or 2x8
mounting structure, select the Down Arrow.
b. If the associated Control Processor is mounted in the upper row of a 2x4 or 2x8
mounting structure, select the Up Arrow.
148
c. If the associated Control Processor is mounted in a 1x8 mounting structure, select

the Up Arrow.
3. If the lower Fieldbus configuration is used, set the 6-pin connectors on all Y-adapters
associated with the Fieldbus in question to the same position: all to Up arrow position
or all to Down Arrow position. (If only one Y-adapter is used with a lower Fieldbus,
the setting is arbitrary.)
NOTE
If two lower Fieldbuses (Fieldbuses associated with two separate control processors)
connect to a particular enclosure, set the 6-pin connectors as follows: set all
Y-adapters in that enclosure that are associated with one Fieldbus to the Up Arrow
position, and all Y-adapters associated with the other Fieldbus to the Down Arrow
position.
4. Slide the Y-adapter into the appropriate mounting structure slots.

5. With the Y-adapter firmly seated, and using the hex driver tool, tighten the three cap-
tive screws on the front of the Y-adapter.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 for each Y-adapter to be installed.
Captive
Mounting
Screw
Moveable
6-Pin
Connector
(In Rear)
Mechanical
Indicator
Captive Mounting
Screws (2 Places)
Figure 4-43. Y-Adapter
Fieldbus Module Installation

Two captive mounting screws, located at the sides of the Fieldbus Module (FBM), secure the
FBM to the mounting structure in Field Enclosure 4, or 1x8, 1x12, or 2x8 FBM mounting struc-
tures, or to the Y-adapter (in other enclosures).
To install the FBMs, refer to Figure 4-6 and proceed as follows:
1. Refer to the information developed during the site planning phase to determine the
installation locations of the FBMs.
149
2. Orient the FBM such that the FBM (type) number, located at the front of the FBM,
is right side up (non-inverted).
3. Observing the following CAUTION statement, insert the FBM into its assigned slot
and press firmly in place.
! CAUTION
To avoid bending the connecting pins on the FBM, ensure that the pins are aligned
with the receptacle when you insert the module into its slot.
4. Insert the hex driver tool through the mounting screw holes at the front of the FBM
and tighten the two captive mounting screws.
! CAUTION
When installing modules or any other hardware that screws into inserts imbedded
in plastic, use the hex driver tool provided (X0179AZ), or the appropriate screw-
driver. If you must use another type of tool, make sure that it does not generate
more than 12 in • lbs of torque, or you can begin stripping the threaded insert out
of the plastic.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 for all Fieldbus Modules.
NOTE
Redundant versions of certain Fieldbus types (namely, FBM04, 05, 06, 39, 44, and
46) are installed in a manner similar to the non-redundant FBMs. However, certain
issues associated with redundancy must be considered before the modules can
become operational, such as fail-safe parameter configuration, operational status
checks, and so forth. Refer to “Redundant FBM Operational Considerations” on
page 333 for details.
Main and Expansion FBM Installation Considerations

Expandable main FBMs can be configured with their associated expansion FBMs as pairs.
Table 4-3 lists the installation considerations for these FBM pairs.
Table 4-3. Main and Expansion FBM Installation Considerations
Mounting Structure Installation Considerations

1x8, 2x4, 2x8 Y-adapters are required for installation of FBMs
in these mounting structures. These mounting
structures accommodate paired main and
expansion FBMs in adjacent odd (main FBM)
and even (expansion FBM) numbered slots.
The main and expansion FBMs must be paired
in the same Y-adapter.
150
Table 4-3. Main and Expansion FBM Installation Considerations (Continued)
Mounting Structure Installation Considerations

1x8 FBM (Only) Mounting Structure Accommodates paired main and expansion
FBMs in adjacent odd (main FBM) and even
(expansion FBM) numbered slots.
1x12 FBM Only Mounting Structure Accommodates paired main and expansion
FBMs in any adjacent odd (main FBM) and
even (expansion FBM) numbered slots.
NOTE
Expansion FBMs cannot be paired with Fieldbus Isolator Modules.
Fieldbus Isolator Module Installation

Fieldbus Isolator modules can be mounted in a Field Enclosure 4, in 1x8 FBM, 1x12 FBM or
2x8 FBM mounting structures, or the upper- or lower-half of a Y-adapter7 for mounting in other
structures such as a 1x8 or 2x8 mounting structure. In each case the Fieldbus Isolator modules are
oriented as shown in Figure 4-7.
Two captive hex screws, located half-way down the module, are accessed, one through a hole in
the upper-right corner and one at the lower-left corner of the front of the module to secure the
Fieldbus Isolator module to the adapter and mounting-structure bus in FBM mounting structures
and in Field Enclosure 4. In other enclosures, a Y-adapter (see “Y-Adapter Installation” on
page 148) must be installed in the mounting structure for receiving the Fieldbus Isolator module.
NOTE
The following notes apply to the Fieldbus Isolator modules installation:
1. When mounted in the upper half of a 2x4 or 2x8 mounting structure, or in a
Field Enclosure 4, the upper isolator corresponds to Fieldbus A, and the lower to
Fieldbus B. When mounted in the lower half of a 2x4 or 2x8 mounting structure,
the upper isolator corresponds to Fieldbus B and the lower to Fieldbus A.
2. When mounted in a Field Enclosure 4 the isolator(s) must be located in the
right-most slot.
3. When mounted in a 1x8 FBM mounting structure, Fieldbus isolators FBI A and
FBI B can be installed in slot 1 and/or slot 5 to extend the Fieldbus (see
Figure 4-44). Refer also to the description “Fieldbus Configuration and Local
Extension (1x8, 1x12, 2x8 FBM)” on page 205 for configuration and FBI
relationships.
4. When mounted in a 1x12 FBM mounting structure, Fieldbus Isolators can only
be installed in the first slot (the left-most slot). This slot accepts up to two Fieldbus
Isolator modules (Bus A and Bus B) to allow for remote communications (see
Figure 4-45). Refer also to the description “Fieldbus Configuration and Local
7.
Y-adapters are used in Industrial Enclosures 16 and 32, IEMFA/IEMFR, FE8, and Field Enclosure 8
for 1x8 and 2x8 mounting structures. The Y-adapter is not needed with 1x8 FBM, 2x8 FBM, and
1x12 FBM mounting structures.
151
Extension (1x8, 1x12, 2x8 FBM)” on page 205 for configuration and FBI
relationships.
5. When mounted in a 2x8 FBM mounting structure, Fieldbus Isolator modules
can be installed in slots 1, 5, 9, and 13 (see Figure 4-46). Refer also to the descrip-
tion “Fieldbus Configuration and Local Extension (1x8, 1x12, 2x8 FBM)” on
page 205 for configuration and FBI relationships.
6. In all mounting structures, the isolator corresponding to Fieldbus B is optional; it
is used only in the redundant Fieldbus configuration. Row and column power distri-
bution prevents loss of power to both isolator slots if one power module fails when
backup power modules are not installed.
Slot 1 Slot 5
Figure 4-44. 1x8 FBM Mounting Structure Connections
Fieldbus A Connector 1*
Fieldbus A Connector 2*
Slot 1** Front
* Refer to B0400PK for complete instructions for Fieldbus cabling with the 1x12 FBM mounting structures.
** Fieldbus Isolators may only be installed in this slot.
152
Slot 1 Slot 5
Slot 9 Slot 13
To install Fieldbus Isolator, proceed as follows. (Refer to Figure 4-7.)

1. Refer to the information developed during the site planning phase to determine the
installation locations of the Fieldbus Isolator.
2. Orient the Fieldbus Isolator module as shown in Figure 4-7.
3. Observing the following CAUTION statement, insert the Fieldbus Isolator into its
assigned slot in the enclosure mounting structure and press firmly in place.
! CAUTION
To avoid bending the connecting pins on the Fieldbus Isolator, ensure that the pins
are aligned with the receptacle when inserting the module into its slot.
4. Using the hex driver tool, tighten the two screws located halfway along the length of
the module. Access the screws through the holes on the front of the module. Repeat
Steps 1 through 4 for all Fieldbus Isolators.
153
154
5. Data Storage Device Installation
and Cabling
This chapter describes how to access and set the jumpers and switches for the various types of
data storage devices (modules), and how to install and connect cables to these devices.
The data storage devices fall into two basic categories:
♦ 50 Series data storage devices – operate in conjunction with the Application
Processor 50/51 (AP50/51), Workstation Processor 50/51 (WP50/51), and
Application Workstation 50/51 (AW50/51).
♦ AP20-based data storage devices – operate in conjunction with the Application Pro-
cessor 20.
Table 5-1 identifies the available I/A Series data storage devices. Note that part numbers for some
of these devices reflect preinstalled 50 Series software. The installation for these devices is similar
to those devices without software.
Table 5-1. Data Storage Devices
Description Used With Part Number1

424 MB Hard Disk, Enclosure Mounted AP50/AW50 P0970JW
535 MB Hard Disk, Enclosure Mounted AP51/AW51 P0971BK
1.3 GB Hard Disk, Enclosure Mounted AP50/AW50 P0970JZ
2.1 GB Hard Disk, Enclosure Mounted AP51/AW51 P0971DS/DM
4.2 GB Hard Disk, Enclosure Mounted2 (50/68 pin cable)
AP51/WP51/AW51 P0971UL
AP51/WP51/AW51 P0971UM
AP51/WP51/AW51 P0971UN
AP51/WP51/AW51 P0971UP
18.2 GB Hard Disk, Enclosure Mounted2 (no cable) AP51/WP51/AW51 P0971ZE
AP51/WP51/AW51 P0971ZF
AP51/WP51/AW51 P0971ZG
644 MB CD-ROM, Enclosure Mounted (50/68 pin cable) AP50/WP50/AW50 P0971DV
AP51/WP51/AW51
644 MB CD-ROM, Enclosure Mounted (68/68 pin cable) AP50/WP50/AW50 P0971DQ
AP51/WP51/AW51
644 MB CD-ROM, Workstation Mounted AP50/WP50/AW50 P0971KP
AP51/WP51/AW51
2.5 GB Quarter-Inch Cartridge (QIC) Tape, AP50/WP50/AW50 P0971DT/DN
Enclosure Mounted AP51/WP51/AW51
2.5 GB QIC Tape, Workstation Mounted AP50/WP50/AW50 P0971KM
AP51/WP51/AW51
155
B0193AC – Rev U 5. Data Storage Device Installation and Cabling
Table 5-1. Data Storage Devices (Continued)
Description Used With Part Number1

5 GB Tape, 8 mm, Enclosure Mounted AP50/AW50 P0971BR
AP51/AW51
5 GB Tape, 8 mm, Workstation Mounted AP50/AW50 P0971BQ
AP51/AW51
5 GB Tape, 4 mm, Enclosure Mounted AP51/WP51/AW51 P0971DU/DP
5 GB Tape, 4 mm, Workstation Mounted AP51/WP51/AW51 P0971KN
12 GB Tape, 4 mm, Enclosure Mounted (50/68 pin cable) AP51/WP51/AW51 P0971UY
12 GB Tape, 4 mm, Enclosure Mounted (68/68 pin cable) AP51/WP51/AW51 P0971UZ
150 MB Streaming Tape, Enclosure Mounted AP50/WP50/AW50 P0970KT
AP51/WP51/AW51
150 MB Streaming Tape, Workstation Mounted AP50/WP50/AW50 P0970KV
AP51/WP51/AW51
Single Floppy Disk Drive, Workstation Mounted (AP20) AP20 P0911HT/
P0913EY
Dual Diskette Drive, Enclosure Mounted AP20 P0911CW/
(Two 5.25-inch drives) P0913PS
Dual Diskette Drive, Enclosure Mounted AP20 P0911ZZ/
(One 3.5-inch drive, one 5.25-inch drive) P0913ED
120 MB Hard Disk Drive AP20 P0911ML
120 MB Hard Disk Drive with Version 3.2 Software AP20 P0911YY
120 MB Hard Disk Drive MIW Spacer P0911YK
120 MB Hard Disk Drive with Version 3.2 Software AP20 – MIW Spacer P0911YZ
150 MB Streaming Tape, Enclosure Mounted AP20 P0911SM
150 MB Streaming Tape AP20 – MIW Spacer P0911WE
1.
Where two part numbers are shown (such as, P0971xx/xx), the first indicates inclusion of a 50/68
pin SCSI cable and the second indicates inclusion of a 68/68 pin SCSI cable.
2.
The 4.2, 9.1, and 18.2 GB hard drives are supported by the Model 51, Style D and E processors with
versions 4.2.x or later of I/A Series software; they are supported by all 50 Series processors with
versions 6.0 or later of I/A Series software.
! CAUTION
The following precautions must be observed when working with hard disk drives:
1. Avoid harsh shocks to the drive at any time.

2. Handle the drive by the frame only, to avoid static discharge damage to the drive elec-
trical components.
3. Do not block or impede the cooling air flow through the drive.
4. For any installation, the drives should not be tilted front-to-back, in any position,
horizontal or vertical, by more than plus-or-minus 5°.
156
5. Data Storage Device Installation and Cabling B0193AC – Rev U
5. Connect power and signal cables to the drive properly, before applying power to the
drive.
6. To ensure the actuator is completely locked, do not move the drive for 15 seconds
after you remove dc power.
50 Series Data Storage Devices, General Information

50 Series data storage devices are those that are used in conjunction with the Application
Processor 50/51, the Workstation Processor 50/51, and the Application Workstation 50/51. (See
Table 5-1.)
The 50 Series data storage devices can be configured in the following ways:
♦ With housing, for mounting in a 50 Series modular mounting structure1 (or user-
supplied 19-inch rack)
♦ Without housing, for mounting in the spacer section of a Modular Industrial
Workstation.
NOTE
Refer to the following notes before configuring data storage devices:
1. When adding (or originally connecting) devices to the SCSI bus for all 50 Series
processors, consideration must be given to the apparent cabling length of all devices
(including processors) on the bus. The Model 51, Style D2 and E processors have an
external high speed ultra-wide SCSI-3 bus with a total SCSI length of three meters,
while the other processors have an external SCSI-2 bus with a total SCSI length of
six meters. This impacts both the maximum number of B-size and D-size modules
used, and the cabling distances between the processors and the B-size and D-size
module(s). For details, refer to Appendix B “SCSI Bus Configuration Guide”.
2. When a new data storage device (tape drive, disk drive, or CD-ROM drive) is
added to an operational AP51, WP51, or AW51 station, the station must be reboo-
ted with the boot -r command. Refer to System Operations Guide (B0193CR) for
information on rebooting.
3. It is recommended that only Maxell or Sony brand 3 1/2 inch diskettes be used
in the 50 Series data storage devices.
AP50/51-, and AW50/51-Based Data Storage Device Address

Settings
SCSI device addresses for the AP50/51-, and AW50/51-based data storage devices with housings
(mountable on tabletop, in the I/A Series enclosures, or in a 19-inch rack) are set by means of a
selector switch at the rear of each device (Figure 5-1). To operate this switch press the tab on
either side of the selector window to increase or decrease the value. Table 5-2 provides the recom-
mended settings for all AP50/51 or AW50/51-based data storage devices, except those for the
1.
The modular mounting structure can be installed in an I/A Series enclosure, Modular Industrial
Workstation, or Modular Industrial Console. See “Installing the MMS into the Enclosure” on
page 111.
2.
The Model 51, Style D processor requires a SCSI PCI card to support an external SCSI-3 bus.
157
Model 51, Style D and E processors. Table 5-3 provides the recommended settings for the
AP51D, or AW51D-based data storage devices.Table 5-4 provides the recommended settings for
the AP51E or AW51E-based data storage devices.
Table 5-2. SCSI Addresses for Model 50/51, Style A, B, and C AP50/51 or AW50/51-based
Data Storage Devices
Device SCSI Address

Hard Disk Drive serving as System Disk 3
Second Hard Disk Drive 1
Third Hard Disk Drive 2
Fourth Hard Disk Drive 0
150 MB or 2.5 GB Streaming Tape Drive 4
5 GB Tape Drive 5
644 MB CD-ROM 6
Table 5-3. SCSI Addresses for AP51D or AW51D-based Data Storage Devices
Device SCSI Address

Hard Disk Drive serving as System Disk1 (Internal or External) 0
Second Hard Disk Drive (External) 1
None 2
None 3
2.5 GB QIC Tape Drive (External) 4
12 GB Tape Drive (External) 5
644 MB CD-ROM (Internal or External) 6
1.
The Model 51, Style D processor requires a SCSI PCI card to support external system
hard drives. This processor does not support disk mirroring.
Table 5-4. SCSI Addresses for AP51E or AW51E-based Data Storage Devices
Device SCSI Address

Hard Disk Drive serving as System Disk1 (Internal, in lower hard drive SCSI 0
slot, or External)
Second Hard Disk Drive (Internal, in upper hard drive SCSI slot, or External) 1
Third Hard Drive (External) 2
Fourth Hard Drive (External) 3
2.5 GB QIC Tape Drive (External) 4
12 GB Tape Drive (Internal or External) 5
644 MB CD-ROM (Internal or External) 6
1.
System hard drives must be external if disk mirroring is to be used. In such a configuration, the
third and fourth hard drives cannot be used.
158
A mirrored hard disk drive, if implemented, must have the same SCSI address as its counterpart.
NOTE
The Model 51, Style D processor does not support disk mirroring.
The versions of the data storage devices that are packaged without housings (those that are used in
the Modular Industrial Workstation spacer section) have jumpers that are preset at the factory for
the addresses shown in Table 5-5.
Table 5-5. SCSI Addresses for All Data Storage Devices Mounted without Housings
Device SCSI Address

5 GB Tape Drive 5
644 MB CD-ROM 6
Press Tabs to Data Storage Device,

Increase/Decrease Typical D-Size
Address Setting (Rear View)
Data Storage Device,
Typical B-Size
(Rear View)
Figure 5-1. Setting SCSI Address on 50 Series Data Storage Device
AP50/AW50-, and AP51/WP51-Based Data Storage Device

Installation and Cabling
Installation of the AP50/51- and AW50/51-based data storage devices into the I/A Series enclo-
sures (or user-supplied 19-inch rack) is described under “50 Series, 70 Series, and Server 70 Mod-
ule/Processor Installation” on page 108.
Cabling of the AP50/51- and AW50/51-based data storage devices (those connecting to the
AP50/51 and AW50/51 processors) is simply a matter of connecting one device to another in
daisy-chain fashion.
159
NOTE
1. When D-size modules (peripherals) are used in the SCSI cabling configuration,
consideration must be given to cable connector pin configurations (50 vs. 68 pins).
As shown in Figure 5-2, several types of cables are provided to match the different
(50/68-pin) connectors on the data storage devices.
2. The maximum SCSI cable lengths differ on the Model 51, Style D and E
processors from the other 50 Series processors. Refer to Appendix B “SCSI Bus
Configuration Guide” for additional information.
50 Series Model A- or B-Size D-Size D-Size

50/51 Style A, B, Peripheral Peripheral Peripheral
or C Processor
50 Pin 50 Pin 50 Pin 68 Pin 68 Pin 68 Pin 68 Pin
Auto-termination
P0970QS* P0971RH/MK* P0971ML*/MY
50 Series Model
D-Size D-Size
51 Style D or E
Peripheral Peripheral
Processor
68 Pin 68 Pin 68 Pin 68 Pin 68 Pin
Auto-termination
P0971ML*/MY P0971ML*/MY
50 Series Model D-Size A- or B-Size

50/51 Style A, B, D-Size
Peripheral Peripheral Peripheral
or C Processor
50 Pin 68 Pin 68 Pin 68 Pin 68 Pin 50 Pin 50 Pin
T
P0971RH/MK* P0971ML*/MY P0971RH/MK*
*The cables are included with the data storage devices. Foxboro cable part numbers shown are
for cable replacement purposes only.
Figure 5-2. Examples of SCSI Cabling Configurations using D-Size Modules
! CAUTION
A-and B-size modules must be last, and at the end of a SCSI-peripheral chain when
used with a processor with 68-pin, SCSI-3 connectors, such as the Model 51, Style
D or E processor. See Figure 5-2.
The following figures show data storage device cabling configurations for the various AP50/51-
based and AW50/51-based system configurations:
♦ Typical AP50, AW50 Data Storage Device Cabling (Nonmirrored Disk) (Figure 5-3)
♦ Typical AP51A, AW51A Data Storage Device Cabling (Nonmirrored Disk)
(Figure 5-4)
♦ Typical AP50, AW50 Data Storage Device Cabling (Mirrored Disk) (Figure 5-5)
♦ Typical AP51A, AW51A Data Storage Device Cabling (Mirrored Disk) (Figure 5-6)
160
♦ Typical AP51B/AW51B, AP51B1/AW51B1, or AW51C Data Storage Device Cabling

(Nonmirrored Disk) (Figure 5-7)
♦ Typical AP51B/AW51B or AW51C Data Storage Device Cabling (Mirrored Disk)
(Figure 5-8)
♦ Typical AP51B1/AW51B1 Data Storage Device Cabling (Mirrored Disk) (Figure 5-9)
♦ Typical AP51D/AW51D Data Storage Device Cabling (Figure 5-10)
NOTE
The Model 51, Style D processor does not currently support disk mirroring.
♦ Typical AP51E/AW51E Data Storage Device Cabling (Nonmirrored Disk)

(Figure 5-11)
♦ Typical AP51E/AW51E Data Storage Device Cabling (Mirrored Disk) (Figure 5-12).
NOTE
For B-size data storage devices, a terminator (one packaged with each device) must
be placed at the last connector position in the SCSI chain. D-size devices are self-
terminating.
424 MB or 1.3 GB
Hard Disk
644 MB CD-ROM AP50 or AW50
Terminator
(Required on Last
Device in SCSI Chain)
150 MB Streaming Tape 5 GB Tape

Figure 5-3. Typical AP50, AW50 Data Storage Device Cabling (Nonmirrored Disk)
161
See Note 1
644 MB 535 MB* or 2.1 GB

CD-ROM AP51A or AW51A
Hard Disk
NOTES:
1. See Figure 5-2 for cable types and part numbers and
information on terminating the SCSI bus.
2. B-size modules can be used in combination with, or in
place of, the D-size modules shown.
*The 535 MB hard disk is available as a B-size

5 GB Tape Drive module only.
Figure 5-4. Typical AP51A, AW51A Data Storage Device Cabling (Nonmirrored Disk)
To other
data storage
devices, if To other hard
applicable. disk drives, if
(Terminator applicable.
required on See (Terminator
last device in Note required on
SCSI chain.) last device in
SCSI chain.)
424 MB or 1.3 GB Hard Disk AP50 or AW50 424 MB or 1.3 GB Hard Disk
NOTE:
The SBus card used for interfacing to the mirrored hard disk drive must be located in a particular
SBus slot.
Refer to “SBus Card Slot Usage” in this document for specific information.
Figure 5-5. Typical AP50, AW50 Data Storage Device Cabling (Mirrored Disk)
162
See Note 2
To other To other
data storage See hard disk
devices, if Note 1 drives, if
applicable. applicable.
535 MB* or 2.1 GB AP51A or 535 MB* or 2.1 GB

Hard Disk AW51A Hard Disk
NOTES:
1. The SBus card used for interfacing to the mirrored hard disk drive must be located in a particular
SBus slot. Refer to “SBus Card Slot Usage” in this document for specific information.
2. See Figure 5-2 for cable types and part numbers and information on terminating the SCSI bus.
*The 535 MB hard disk is available as a B-size module only.

Figure 5-6. Typical AP51A, AW51A Data Storage Device Cabling (Mirrored Disk)
or or
See Note 1
644 MB 535 MB*, or 2.1 GB

CD-ROM Hard Disk
NOTES:
1. See Figure 5-2 for cable types and
part numbers and information on
terminating the SCSI bus.
5 GB 2. B-size modules can be used in
Tape Drive combination with, or in place of, the
D-size modules shown. AP51B/ AW51C AP51B1/
*The 535 MB hard disk is available as a B-size module only. AW51B AW51B1
Figure 5-7. Typical AP51B/AW51B, AP51B1/AW51B1, or AW51C Data Storage Device

Cabling (Nonmirrored Disk)
163
or or
See See
To other Note 2 Note 2
data storage
devices, if
applicable.
535 MB*, or
535 MB* or 2.1 GB To other
2.1 GB
Hard Disk hard disk
Hard Disk
drives, if
See Note 1 applicable.
See Note 1
AP51B/AW51B AW51C
NOTES:
1. The SBus card used for interfacing to the mirrored hard disk drive must be located in a particular
SBus slot. Refer to “SBus Card Slot Usage” in this document for specific information.
2. See Figure 5-2 for cable types and part numbers and information on terminating the SCSI bus.
3. B-size modules can be used in combination with, or in place of, the D-size modules shown.
*The 535 MB hard disk is available as a B-size module only.
Figure 5-8. Typical AP51B/AW51B or AW51C Data Storage Device Cabling (Mirrored Disk)
See See
To other Note 1 Note 1
data storage
devices, if
applicable. 2.1 GB Hard
Disk
2.1 GB To other
Hard Disk hard disk
drives, if
SBus Card: Fast SCSI/ applicable.
Buffered Ethernet
Interface Card or Fast SCSI
Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps
Ethernet Interface Card
AP51B1/AW51B1
NOTES:
1. See Figure 5-2 for cable types and part numbers, and information on terminating the SCSI bus.
2. B-size modules can be used in combination with, or in place of, the D-size modules shown.
Figure 5-9. Typical AP51B1/AW51B1 Data Storage Device Cabling (Mirrored Disk)
164
See Note
5 GB or 12 GB 4.2 GB, 9.1 GB

Tape Drive or 18.2 GB
Hard Disk

Ethernet Interface plus
Ultra-Wide SCSI PCI Card
NOTE: See Figure 5-2 for cable types and part numbers.
AP51D/AW51D
Figure 5-10. Typical AP51D/AW51D Data Storage Device Cabling
A B
See Note TP
<...>
MII
<...>
5 GB or 12 GB 4.2 GB, 9.1GB

Tape Drive or 18.2 GB External
Hard Disk Ultra-Wide
SCSI PCI166 1
NOTE: Output
PCI 2
PCI 3
See Figure 5-2 for cable types and PCI 4
part numbers and information on

terminating the SCSI bus.
AP51E/AW51E
Figure 5-11. Typical AP51E/AW51E Data Storage Device Cabling (Nonmirrored Disk)
165
See See
To other Note A B
Note
data storage TP
<...>
device, if
applicable. MII
<...> To other
hard disk
drive, if
4.2 GB, 9.1 GB, 4.2 GB, 9.1 GB,
applicable.
or 18.2 GB or 18.2 GB
Hard Disk External Hard Disk
Ultra-Wide
SCSI PCI166 1 Twisted-Pair
Output
PCI 2
10/100 Mbps Ethernet
PCI 3
Interface Plus Ultra-Wide
PCI 4
SCSI PCI Card
AP51E/AW51E
NOTE: See Figure 5-2 for cable types and part numbers, and information on terminating the SCSI bus.
Figure 5-12. Typical AP51E/AW51E Data Storage Device Cabling (Mirrored Disk)
WP50/51-Based Data Storage Device Address Settings

SCSI device addresses for the WP50/51-based data storage devices with housings (mountable on
tabletop, in I/A Series enclosures, or in a 19-inch rack) are set by means of a selector switch at the
rear of each of these devices (Figure 5-1). To operate this switch, press the tab on either side of the
selector window to increase or decrease the value. Table 5-6 provides all recommended settings for
50 Series data storage devices (for all processors).
Table 5-6. SCSI Addresses for All WP50/51-based Data Storage Devices
Device SCSI Address

5 GB or 12 GB Tape Drive 5
644 MB CD-ROM 6
NOTE
The Model 51, Style D3 and E processors have a high speed ultra-wide SCSI-3 bus
with a total SCSI length of three meters, while the other 50 Series processors have a
SCSI-2 bus with a total SCSI length of six meters. This impacts both the maximum
number of data storage devices used, and the cabling distances between the proces-
sors and the data storage device(s). Refer to Appendix B “SCSI Bus Configuration
Guide” for additional information.
3.
The Model 51, Style D processor requires a SCSI PCI card to support an external SCSI-3 bus.
166
For versions of the data storage devices that are packaged without housings (those that are used in
the Modular Industrial Workstation spacer section) these addresses are preset (using jumpers) at
the factory prior to shipment. Refer to Modular Industrial Workstation (B0193CE) for further
information.
WP50/51-Based Data Storage Device Installation and Cabling

Installation of the WP50/51-based data storage devices into an I/A Series enclosure (or user-
supplied 19-inch rack) is described in “50 Series, 70 Series, and Server 70 Module/Processor
Cabling of the WP50/51-based data storage devices (those devices connecting to the WP50/51
processor) is simply a matter of connecting one device to another in daisy-chain fashion.
♦ Figure 5-13 shows typical WP50-based data storage device cabling.
♦ Figure 5-14 shows typical WP51A-, WP51B-, or WP51B1-based data storage device
cabling.
♦ Figure 5-15 shows typical WP51D-based data storage device cabling.
♦ Figure 5-16 shows typical WP51E-based data storage device cabling.
The interconnecting cables are identical to each other and are packaged with the individual data
storage devices.
NOTE
The maximum SCSI cable lengths differ on the WP51D and WP51E processors
from the other 50 Series processors. Refer to Appendix B “SCSI Bus Configuration
Guide” for additional information.
Terminator
(Required on
last device in
SCSI chain)
644 MB CD-ROM 150 MB Streaming Tape WP50
Figure 5-13. Typical WP50-Based Data Storage Device Cabling
167
or or
See
Note 1
644 MB CD-ROM 2.5 GB or 5.0 GB

Tape Drive WP51A
NOTES:
1. See Figure 5-2 for cable types and part numbers and information
on terminating the SCSI bus.
2. B-size modules can be used in combination with, or in place of,
the D-size modules shown.
WP51B WP51B1
Figure 5-14. Typical WP51A, WP51B, or WP51B1 Data Storage Device Cabling
See Note
5 GB or 12 GB 644 MB
Tape Drive CD-ROM

Ethernet Interface plus
Ultra-Wide SCSI PCI Card
NOTE: See Figure 5-2 for cable types and part numbers.
WP51D
Figure 5-15. Typical WP51D Data Storage Device Cabling
168
See
Note A B
TP
<...>
MII
<...>
644 MB CD-ROM 5.0 GB or 12.0 GB

Tape Drive External
Ultra-Wide
SCSI PCI166 1
PCI 2
NOTE: See Figure 5-2 for cable types Output PCI 3
and part numbers and information PCI 4
on terminating the SCSI bus.

WP51E
Figure 5-16. Typical WP51E Data Storage Device Cabling
AP20-Based Data Storage Devices, General

Information
AP20-based data storage devices are those that are used with Application Processor 20. They
include the following (see Table 5-1):
♦ Single diskette drive
♦ Dual diskette drive
♦ 120 MB hard disk drive
♦ 150 MB streaming tape drive.
NOTE
For an overview of typical data storage device configurations and general rules per-
taining to data storage device installation, refer to “General Rules for AP20-Based
Data Storage Device Installation” on page 188.
The AP20 data storage devices are packaged in the following ways:
♦ A modular type housing (P-adapter) for mounting in any standard I/A Series mount-
ing structure
♦ With supporting brackets, for mounting in the spacer section of a Modular Industrial
Workstation
♦ Z-Module for 120 MB disk drive.
The AP20 supports only SCSI data storage devices. In general, SCSI devices are those that con-
tain, or operate with their own SCSI-based controllers. Non-SCSI devices are those which use a
separate controller.
The SCSI interface serves up to seven SCSI data storage devices. Each data storage device on the
SCSI bus must have a unique address in the range 1 to 7.
169
Recommended SCSI address assignments for the AP20-based data storage devices are provided in
Table 5-7.
Table 5-7. SCSI Addresses for All AP20-Based Data Storage Devices
Device SCSI Address

Floppy disk controller used with an AP20 1
Streaming tape drive 2
Hard disk drive used with AP20 (AP20 boot disk) 3
Reserved for additional (user application) hard disk drive 4
Reserved for hard disk drive used in support of historian extended sampling 5
Note that the addresses set on the floppy disk drives are not SCSI addresses. Rather, they are local
addresses used by the floppy disk controller built into the floppy disk controller connected to an
AP20. (The floppy disk controller connected to an AP20 has its own SCSI address, as indicated
above.)
Floppy disk drive jumpers are preset to default values such that dual-floppy modules will work
correctly as the first two drives on an AP20 system.
Refer to the list of general rules on installation and cabling of the AP20-based data storage devices
beginning on page 188. Installation personnel should be familiar with these rules before installing
the devices, and should, upon completion of the installation, verify that the results are in compli-
ance with the rules.
Accessing Jumpers in AP20-Based Data Storage Devices

Three procedures are presented for accessing jumpers in AP20-based data storage devices: one for
accessing jumpers in modular type data storage devices (except the streaming tape drive), one for
accessing jumpers in the modular type streaming tape drive, and one for accessing jumpers in the
nonmodular type streaming tape drive. (Procedures for accessing jumpers in the nonmodular
floppy disk or hard disk drives are not required, because these devices are not enclosed, and there-
fore, offer ready access to the jumpers.)
Accessing Jumpers in Modular (P-Adapter) Type Data Storage Devices

Setting the address and other jumpers in modular type data storage devices requires that the mod-
ule be accessed internally.
NOTE
This procedure applies to all modular type data storage devices except the streaming
tape drive. Instructions for accessing the address switches in the modular type
streaming tape drive are presented in the description “Accessing Switches and Ter-
mination Resistor Packs in Modular 150 MB Streaming Tape Drive” on page 171.
170
To access the jumpers in a modular type data storage device refer to Figure 5-17 and proceed as
follows:
1. Holding the module in one hand, grasp lower section of the bezel between your
thumb and fingers of your other hand, and press inward lightly to separate bezel from
module.
2. Remove the bezel from the module.
3. Using the hex driver tool, turn both actuator screws about one-half turn clockwise to
raise the peripheral connector plugs.
4. With the module resting on table or other flat surface, disconnect the power, signal,
and ground cables and carefully pull out on the data storage device until the jumpers
are accessible.
To put the module together, reverse the procedure described in Steps 1 through 4.
(A) Bezel Attached (B) Bezel Attached
Actuator
Screws
Drive
Bezel
Bezel
Press in on sides to
loosen and remove bezel.
Figure 5-17. Modular Type Data Storage Device, Bezel Removal
Accessing Switches and Termination Resistor Packs in Modular

150 MB Streaming Tape Drive
To access the configuration switches and termination resistor packs in the modular 150 MB
streaming tape drive, refer to Figure 5-17 and proceed as follows:
1. Perform the procedure “Accessing Jumpers in Modular (P-Adapter) Type Data Storage
Devices” on page 170.
2. Referring to Figure 5-18 and Figure 5-19, locate the configuration switch jumpers
and make sure that the jumpers are installed as shown. (SCSI address 2 is configured,
and is the default setting.)
171
3. If this is the last device in the SCSI bus install three terminating resistor packs
(220 ohms to +5 V dc, and 330 ohms to ground) as shown in Figure 5-19. Do not
install these terminator packs if this device is not at one end of the SCSI bus.
4. To reassemble module, reverse Steps 1 through 6.
Terminating
Pin 1 Resistor Packs
Configuration SCSI Interface
Block Jumpers Connection
Figure 5-18. 150 MB Streaming Tape Drive, Rear View
SCSI
Address ID2 ID1 ID0
1 Open Open Jumper

2 Open Jumper Open
3 Open Jumper Jumper
4 Jumper Open Open
Serial Port CF2 ID2 5 Jumper Open Jumper

6 Jumper Jumper Open
Diagnostic CF1 ID1
7 Jumper Jumper Jumper
Parity Enable CF0 ID0
Indicates Factory Set Jumper

Disconnect SCSI ID
Size (16K)
Figure 5-19. 150 MB Streaming Tape Drive, Configuration Jumper Block Settings
Accessing Switches and Terminating Resistor Packs in Nonmodular

150 MB Streaming Tape Drive
NOTE
This procedure is not required for the streaming tape drive used in the Pedestal
Enclosure 8. In this configuration, the controller is packaged separately from the
drive, and its switches are readily accessible.
172
To access the switches in the nonmodular type streaming tape drive (as used in the Modular
Industrial Workstation) the drive can be removed from the MIW and the switches set using the
previous procedure as follows:
1. Remove the panel cover.
2. Carefully pull out on the device until the cables at the rear of the device are accessible.
Disconnect the power, signal, and ground cables, and remove the drive.
3. Referring to Figure 5-18 and Figure 5-19, locate the configuration switch jumpers
and make sure that the jumpers are installed as shown. (Figure 5-19 shows SCSI
Address 2 configured.)
4. If this is the last device in the SCSI bus, install three terminating resistor packs
(220 ohms to +5 V dc, and 330 ohms to ground) as shown in Figure 5-19. Do not
install these terminator packs if this device is not at one end of the SCSI bus.
5. Reconnect power, signal, and ground cables and reinstall the drive in the MIW or
spacer section.
Refer to Modular Industrial Workstation Installation (B0193CE) for more information on the
MIW.
AP20-Based Data Storage Device Jumper Settings

The addresses of the AP20-based data storage devices are determined by jumper or DIP switch
settings on a PWB attached to or mounted with the data storage device. The address jumpers and
switches (as well as other jumpers or switches) are set initially at the factory for a specific default
value. Final addresses are set, if necessary, at the time of installation. Terminating resistor packs
must be removed from all but the last data storage device in the SCSI or non-SCSI chain. The fol-
lowing exceptions should be noted:
♦ The TEAC Model FD-55GFR-141 and Model FD-55GFR-701-U floppy disk drives,
which contain nonremovable terminating resistor packs, are an exception.
♦ If an AP20 does not occupy the end position on the bus, terminating resistor packs
must exist in devices at both ends of the bus.
For convenience, removal of the termination packs should coincide with the address change,
where applicable.
Floppy Disk Address Selection, General Information

NOTE
There are the following floppy disk drive models: TEAC, Inc. FD-235-HF,
FD-55GFR-141, and FD-55GFR-170-U. A label at the rear of the drive specifies
the model number.
Jumper settings are required in the floppy disk drives to select the drive address, and also to select
the high/low-density operating mode. The following subsections provide general information
regarding address selection and high/low-density selection.
In the AP20 (SCSI-based) configuration, the controller is either packaged internally in the dual
floppy module (P0911CW/P0911ZZ) or, in the case of workstation mounting, is mounted sepa-
rately from the drive(s). The controller, which supports up to two floppy disk drives, includes
jumpers for selecting the SCSI device address.
173
Figure 5-20 shows a typical addressing scheme for the drives used in an AP20 application.
Controller Floppy 1* Floppy 2*

(SCSI (See Table) (See Table)
AP-20 Addr. 1)
* Floppy drives 1 and 2 may be Terminating

packaged with the controller Resistor
in the dual floppy module Floppy 1 Floppy 2 Pack
(P0911CW).
Jumper (Typical) DS0/D0 DS1/D1
Software Logical Dev. /dev/fh0 /dev/fh1

(Typical)
Figure 5-20. Floppy Disks Used with AP20, Typical Addressing Scheme
Floppy Disk High/Low Density Selection, General Information

The floppy disk drives used with the AP20 are high density drives. When high density diskettes
are used with these drives, the diskettes can be both read and written. However, when low density
diskettes are used, the diskettes can be read but are unreliable for writing. This means that, for the
AP20, the high/low density jumpers on the PWB for the associated floppy diskette drive must be
changed from high density to low density when low density diskettes are used.
! CAUTION
Foxboro application software requires the floppy drive at address DS0/D0 to be
high-density. Do not change the drive at this address to low density.
The following subsections provide procedures for setting the appropriate addresses and high/low
density requirements in the floppy disk drives.
TEAC Model FD-55GFR-141-U/701-U Floppy Disk Jumper Settings

To set jumpers on the TEAC, Inc. Model FD-55GFR-141-U or Model FD-55GFR-701-U
floppy disk drive mechanism:
1. Access the jumpers as described in “Accessing Jumpers in AP20-Based Data Storage
2. Refer to the appropriate illustration, Figure 5-21 or Figure 5-22, and set the jumpers
according to the AP20 connection, high/low density selection, and floppy drive
address.
NOTE
The floppy drive addresses indicated in the figures are local addresses used by the
floppy disk controller to access individual floppy disk drives. These addresses are
not to be confused with the SCSI addresses (1-7) applied to the floppy disk control-
ler and other SCSI devices.
174
Jumper Strap “Hard” Address*

D0 0 Default Setting, 1st Drive
D1 1 Default Setting, 2nd Drive
*See Note in Text
Set RY when using

SMS Model
OMTI7 Controller;
HS Set DC when using
HL TEAC Model
I IU
FG ML 13332137-00F
RY Controller
LI
G S DC
UUUDDDD Nonremovable
0 1 2 0 1 2 3 Terminating
Resistor Pack
(Rear of Drive)
Figure 5-21. TEAC Model FD-55GFR - 141-U/701-U Floppy Disk Drive Jumpers - AP20
(High Density)
NOTE: Select D1.

Do not configure Jumper Strap “Hard” Address* D0 is for High Density
address D0 as a low D0 0 Application Only.
density drive. Foxboro D1 1
application software *See Note in Text
requires this address to
be high-density.
Set RY when
using SMS Model
OMTI7 Controller;
HS Set DC when
HL using TEAC Model
I IU
FG ML 13332137-00F
RY Controller
L I
G S DC
UU UD DD D Nonremovable
0120123 Terminating
(Rear of Drive) Resistor Pack
Figure 5-22. TEAC Model FD-55GFR - 141-U/701-U Floppy Disk Drive Jumpers -
AP20 (Low Density)
175
TEAC FD-235-HF 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive

To set jumpers on the TEAC, Inc. Model FD-235-HF floppy disk drive:
1. Access the jumpers as described on “Accessing Jumpers in AP20-Based Data Storage
2. Refer to Figure 5-23 and ensure that the DS0 pins have a jumper connecting them,
and that there is no jumper connecting the DS1 pins.
To Power DS1
DS0 (No Jumper)
(Install Jumper)
Figure 5-23. TEAC FD-235-HF 3.5-Inch Floppy Disk Drive Jumper Settings
TEAC Floppy Controller Jumper Settings

To set the jumpers on the TEAC Model 13332137-00F or TEAC Model FD-235HS-1111
Floppy Controller:
1. Access the jumpers as described in“Accessing Jumpers in AP20-Based Data Storage
2. Refer to Figure 5-24 or Figure 5-25 and verify that the jumpers are set according to
the default values shown. Standard software supports only one floppy controller (with
up to two diskette drives) per AP20.
3. If the floppy controller is not the last data storage device in the chain, remove the ter-
minating resistor packs by lifting them straight up from the PWB. (The terminating
resistor packs must remain in place if this is the last device in the chain.)
176
ID2 ID1 ID0 ADD

Shorted Shorted Open 1 Default Setting
Shorted Open Shorted 2
Shorted Open Open 3 For 5.25-inch Drive Other Shorted
Open Shorted Shorted 4 Jumpers Are: G, Par
Open Shorted Open 5 For 3.5-inch Drive Other Shorted
Open Open Shorted 6 Jumpers Are: F, G, Par
Open Open Open 7
Pin 1
Terminating
Resistor
Packs Disk
Connector
Pin 1
SCSI Connector
ID0
ID1 Pin 1 (Upper Pin)
G F Lev Par Mon
ID2
Figure 5-24. TEAC Model 13332137-00F Floppy Disk Controller Jumpers
NOTE: Install terminating Terminating Resistor Packs*

resistors only if they were (Note Position of Black Dot)
installed on removed drive
assembly*.
Pin 1
Density
Jumpers
PAR PAR
HDS HDS
EJC EJC
G2 G2
H2 H2
G1 G1
H1 H1 Pin 1
J1 J1
G G of SCSI
H H Controller
J J
Connector
For For
Single or Dual Single 3.5-inch
5.25-inch Drive or Pin 1 Address Jumpers
Combination (ID1 and ID2)
3.5-inch and *Terminating resistor packs are installed
as Installed at Factory
5.25-inch only if this device is located at either end
Drive of the SCSI bus.
Figure 5-25. TEAC Model FD-235HS-1111 Floppy Disk Controller Jumpers
177
Installing AP20-Based Modular Data Storage Devices

NOTE
The following notes apply to the AP20-based data storage devices:
1. It is recommended that you be familiar with “General Rules for AP20-Based
Data Storage Device Installation” on page 188 before you perform these procedures.
2. Refer to the information developed during the site planning phase for informa-
tion on mounting structure slot allocations for the various data storage devices.
Modular type data storage devices occupy one, two, or four mounting structure slots. Refer to “X-
and Z-Module Installation” on page 144 for information on how to install a 1-slot module. The
120 MB hard disk drive module is described separately following this procedure. Perform the fol-
lowing steps to install a either a 2- or 4-slot wide data storage device:
1. Insert the data storage device module in its assigned slot(s) in the mounting structure
and push the module firmly in place until it engages the rear section of the mounting
structure.
2. Using the hex driver tool, tighten two long captive screws at the bottom and front of
the module. This fastens the module to the mounting structure bus.
3. Tighten the two short captive screws at the top and front of the module. This fastens
the module to the lip of the mounting structure.
NOTE
The short screws must be fastened before any cable connections can be made, and
they cannot be fully engaged until the long screws have been fastened.
4. If the module occupies two slots, install a power connector, Foxboro part number
P0800FZ, in position E. If the drive occupies four slots, insert power connector
P0800FZ in positions E and F (Figure 5-26 and Figure 5-27, for example). This con-
nector completes the power connection(s) to the drive. It is either shipped in place, or
is packed with other small parts in the enclosure.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 for each data storage device being installed in this
configuration.
178
See Note
Cable Power Connectors See
NOTE: To Application Processor or P0500--* P0800FZ
Data Storage Device. Note
Positions ABCD Positions EFGH
(Slot 1) (Slot 4)
Position Peripheral Connection

A-B To Application Processor
or Data Storage Device
C Not Used
D Not Used
E-F Power Connector
G-H To Application Processor
Dual Floppy
* P0911HE= 6 in Disk Drive
P0500JX = 2 ft P0911CW
P0500UX = 4 ft
P0500UY = 8 ft
Figure 5-26. Peripheral Cable Connections, Dual 5.25-Inch Floppy Disk Drives
See Note
Cable Power Connectors See
NOTE: To Application Processor or P0500--* Note
P0800FZ
Data Storage Device.
(Slot 1) (Slot 4)

C Not Used
D Not Used
E-F Power Connector
* P0911HE = 6 in This cable

should not be used with the Dual Floppy
120 MB hard drive. Disk Drive
P0500JX = 2 ft P0911ZZ
P0500UX = 4 ft
P0500UY = 8 ft
Figure 5-27. Peripheral Cable Connection Dual (3.5-Inch and 5.25-Inch) Floppy Disk Drives
179
120 MB Hard Disk Drive

The 120 MB hard disk drive, shown in Figure 5-28, is a single-width Z-Module SCSI device for
use in AP20 configurations. The disk drive can be used either for system or applications purposes.
The following paragraphs describe the module installation, indicators, how to set the SCSI device
address, and how to terminate the device (if appropriate).
This module contains an air filter that requires occasional cleaning. For further information, refer
to the section on “Preventive Maintenance” in System Maintenance (B0193AD).
NOTE
To minimize noise on the interface between the 120 MB hard drive and the Appli-
cation Processor 20, install the drive as close as possible to the AP20. It is recom-
mended that the hard drive be installed as shown in this procedure. Refer to
Figure 5-33 or Figure 5-36.
SCSI Port Positions

ABCD
Fan
Module Identifier
(Letterbug Select)
Disk Activity LED 5U

5U
Power LED
Figure 5-28. 120 MB Hard Disk Drive
Installing the 120 MB Disk Drive Module

Install the disk drive module as any Z-Module. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “System Mod-
ule/Processor Installation”. Refer also to the following description regarding terminating the SCSI
bus.
This module can be installed in any slot in the enclosure. If it is the last device on the SCSI bus, it
must be terminated internally, as described later in this section.
120 MB Disk Drive Module Indicators

There are two LED indicators (Figure 5-28). These LEDs are described in Table 5-8.
Table 5-8. 120 MB Disk Drive Indicators
Indicator Description
Disk Activity On whenever a disk access (read/write operation) occurs.
Power On indicates the disk has power applied.
180
Establishing and Setting the Disk Drive SCSI Device Address

The 120 MB disk drive module is a SCSI device requiring that you assign it an address (from 3 to
7) when you install the module. Address 3 is reserved for the system disk. If this disk drive is not
to be used as the system disk, but rather for the historian or other application use, select an
unused address, either 4 or 5.
The module identifier (letterbug set) for this disk drive requires a number from 3 to 7 depending
on the intended use for the disk as just described, and also either the letter T (for terminated), or
U (for unterminated). For example, the letterbug set 3U indicates that SCSI address 3 is the sys-
tem disk and is unterminated; a module identifier of 5T indicates that this disk drive is SCSI
address 5 and that this device is at the end of the bus and terminates the SCSI bus internally.
The SCSI device address for this hard disk depends on the letterbug set inserted as a module iden-
tifier. For information on assembling/inserting the letterbugs correctly, refer to “Module Identifier
(Letterbug) Installation” on page 145. This 2-character number and letter combination must be
inserted in the right-most 2 letterbug positions, with the T or U being in the right-most position
(Figure 5-28 for an example). Note that the module can be installed inverted with the letterbugs
installed right side up in the right-most positions, as viewed facing the module.
If you do not install any letterbugs, this device defaults to letterbug 7U, SCSI id7, unterminated,
and the green LED flashes.
Terminating the 120 MB Disk Drive

If you install a 120 MB hard disk drive as the last SCSI device in the chain, you can terminate the
drive in one of three ways:
♦ Use the letterbug T in the module identifier to activate the internal terminator.
♦ Connect an external SCSI standard terminator with cable assembly with cables P1
and P2 connected to module ports C and D, or A and B (depending on which end is
to be terminated), respectively.
♦ Connect a P0900DB (Revision B) terminator block to module ports C and D or A
and B (depending on which end is to be terminated).
Refer to “Terminating the AP20-Based SCSI Bus” on page 187.
181
From Other
To Next SCSI Device or
SCSI Device
Possible Terminator as
P0900DB Terminator (Revision B).
Described in Text
Refer to Figure 5-35.
P2
ABCD P1
SCSI Ports
ABCD
The letterbug
configures the drive 5T
with the Internal
terminator.
Figure 5-29. Peripheral Cable Connections, Modular 120 MB Hard Disk Drive
Cabling for AP20-Based Modular Type Data Storage Devices

Each mounting structure slot has four positions for accommodating up to four peripheral (cable)
connectors. For convenience, these positions are identified in the relevant figures by the letters A
through D for one mounting structure slot, and A through H for two or four slots. (Slots 2 and 3
of 4-slot modules have no connections). The following figures illustrate the cable connections to
the various types of data storage devices and associated application processors:
♦ Peripheral Cable Connections, Dual Floppy Disk Drive (Figure 5-27)
♦ Peripheral Cable Connections, Modular 120 MB Hard Disk Drive (Figure 5-29)
♦ Peripheral Cable Connections, Modular Streaming Tape Drive (Figure 5-30)
♦ Peripheral Cable Connections, Application Processor 20 (Figure 5-31).
182
See Note See Note
NOTE: To Application Processor or Cable Power Connectors

Data Storage Device. P0500--* P0800FZ

(Slot 1) (Slot 4)
C Not Used
D Not Used
E-F Power Connector
*P0500JX = 2 ft
P0500UX = 4 ft
P0500UY = 8 ft
Figure 5-30. Peripheral Cable Connections, Modular Streaming Tape Drive
To Data
Storage Cable Terminator
Device(s) P0500--* P0900DB
A B C D Not Used

A-B To Data Storage Device(s).
Terminated When C and D
C-D Not Connected to a Data
Storage Device. Otherwise
Two P0500xx* Cables Con-
nect C and D to Data Stor-
age Device.
*P0500JX = 2 ft
P0500UX = 4 ft
P0500UY = 8 ft Application
Processor 20
P0400VT
Figure 5-31. Peripheral Cable Connections, Application Processor 20
183
A typical data storage device installation may consist of up to a maximum of seven devices served
by a single Application Processor. In addition, the installation may be configured in various ways.
For example, in some configurations Application Processor 20 may occupy an end position while
in others it may occupy an inside position. Also, various combinations of drives may be used. The
following figures show two examples of configurations using the Application Processor 20 (see
Figure 5-32, Figure 5-34, and Figure 5-34).
To install cables between data storage devices and the associated Application Processor, connectors
and terminators, refer to these figures, the previous cabling connections figures, and perform the
following steps.
NOTE
This procedure assumes that cableways on left or right side structural panel, as
appropriate, are accessible for routing of cables between adjacent mounting struc-
tures. Cables connecting different modules in the same mounting structure can be
coiled to take up excessive slack and need not be routed via cableways. The proce-
dure also assumes that the associated application processor has been installed.
Cable P0500xx* Cable

Power P0500--*
Another Device,
Connectors or if device is the
Terminator P0800FZ
last device in
chain -
terminate
drive internally.
A B C D A B C D A B C D not used not used E F G H
Application 80 MB Hard
Processor 20 Disk Drive
P0400VT
Dual Floppy Disk Drive and/or Streaming Tape Drive
*P0500JX = 2 ft; P0500UX = 4 ft; P0500UY = 8 ft
NOTE: These devices can be installed in separate mounting structures or enclosures.
CAUTION: Do not exceed 12 foot SCSI cable length requirement.
Figure 5-32. AP20 Installed at End of Chain, Example
184
Cable P0500xx*
To Other
Hard Drives Cable
Power P0500--*
If Applicable
Connectors Another Device,
P0800FZ or if device is the
last device in
chain -
terminate
A B G H A B C D A B C D not used not used E F G H drive Internally.
120 MB Hard Application

Disk Drive Processor 20
P0400VT
Dual Floppy Disk Drive and/or Streaming Tape Drive

Figure 5-33. AP20 with 120 MB Hard Drive
185
To Other Power
Devices Connectors
(Optional) P0800FZ Cable P0500--*
Cable P0500xx*
A B C D not used not used E F G H A B C D
Application Processor 20
Dual Floppy Disk Drive Cable

P0500xx*
Power
Connectors
P0800FZ
A B C D not used not used E F G H A B C D
80 MB Hard Disk
Drive
Streaming Tape Drive
Figure 5-34. AP20 Installed Inside Chain Ends, Example
1. Referring to the information developed during the site planning phase, prepare a
rough sketch of the configuration being installed. This sketch (optional) facilitates the
installation of cables.
2. Install cables between the Application Processor and associated data storage devices,
using the sketch prepared in Step 1 to determine connecting points (positions in
mounting structure slots). Route cables along cableways as necessary and dress for
neatness and security.
3. Refer to the sketch and perform applicable procedure(s) (a through b) as follows:
a. If the AP20 occupies an end position in the configuration, insert a terminator,
Foxboro part number P0900DB, in positions C and D of the slot it occupies. (See
Figure 5-32.) The terminator must not be used on the AP if the AP20 is not at the
end of the SCSI bus.
186
b. If multiple data storage devices are being installed, verify that the terminator resis-
tor packs have been removed from all except the last device on the SCSI bus. To
access and remove the terminator resistor packs, refer to the applicable procedure
for setting jumpers for a given device described earlier in this section, and remove
the terminator resistor pack(s) as necessary. The locations of these terminators are
shown in the associated figures.
c. In the case of the dual floppy module, verify that the terminator resistor packs
have been removed on the last floppy (first or second) on the floppy bus. Excep-
tions are the TEAC Model FD-55GFR-141 and Model FD-55GFR-701-U
floppy disk drives, which contain nonremovable terminating resistor packs.
4. Using hex driver tool, turn one of two peripheral connector actuator screws on front
of data storage device module about 1/2 turn clockwise. This will cause peripheral
connector plug recessed in the module to mate with peripheral connector jack in the
mounting structure slot. Repeat for other actuator screw.
Terminating the AP20-Based SCSI Bus

To transfer data correctly, the SCSI bus must be terminated at both ends. The intermediate
devices on the SCSI bus must not be terminated. If the bus is not terminated properly, signal
reflections can result in data transfer errors.
The X-Module floppy, and streaming tape drive storage devices are all terminated internally using
terminator resistor packages, but only if a device is the last device on the bus.
When the AP20 requires termination (when it is located at one end of the bus), a P0900DB ter-
minator is connected to the positions to be terminated (typically positions C and D).
P0900DB Terminator Module

When the AP is at one end of the SCSI bus, and one of the peripheral devices is at the other end
of the bus. For AP20s, a type P0900DB termination module (Revision A) can be inserted in the
AP Module C and D (right side) positions. The Revision A terminator module is a SCSI-pinout
connector block.
NOTE
The P0900DB Revision A termination module fits the AP20 only. Use the Revision B
P0900DB termination module on any other SCSI bus device.
Figure 5-35 shows the Revision B P0900DB terminator module. This module consists of a SCSI-
II terminator module and P1/P2 adapter cables. The Revision B terminator module can be
inserted on an AP20 either in positions A and B or C and D, and on the other end of the SCSI
bus on P-adapter storage devices.
When the Revision B adapter cable is used with a P-adapter device such as a floppy disk drive,
streaming tape drive, 80 MB hard disk drive, or 120 MB hard disk drive, the connectors P1 and
P2 must be reversed (side-to-side) before mounting them in the positions (see bottom half of
Figure 5-35).
187
! CAUTION
Improper termination of the SCSI bus may cause improper functioning of the
Application Processor.
P1 SCSI-II
P2 Terminator
AP20 Configuration
P2
P1
X Module (P-Adapter) Configuration
Figure 5-35. P0900DB Terminator Module (Revision B)
General Rules for AP20-Based Data Storage Device Installation

Figure 5-36 shows a typical configuration for AP20 applications. This figure and the general rules
presented below serve as a quick reference for personnel installing the data storage devices.
The general rules are as follows:
1. All 2-slot drives must have a power connector, Foxboro part number P0800FZ,
installed in position E of the appropriate mounting structure slot. All 4-slot drives
must have this power connector installed in positions E and F.
2. The SCSI bus consists of two cables, a data cable and a control signal cable. To assist
in the proper installation of these cables between Application Processors and data stor-
age devices in a mounting structure, observe the following rules:
♦ For data storage devices, data appears at positions A and G, and the control signals
at positions B and H.
♦ For Application Processors, the data appears at positions B and D, and the control
signals at positions A and C.
3. Table 5-9 lists the SCSI and non-SCSI cabling used with AP20 data storage devices.
Table 5-9. AP20 SCSI and Non-SCSI Cabling
P0911HE 15.2 cm (0.5 ft)

P0500JX 0.6 m (2 ft)
P0500UX 1.2 m (4 ft)
P0500UY 2.4 m (8 ft)
The maximum allowable cabling length between all interconnected SCSI devices is
3.6 m (12 ft). This length includes device interconnecting cables only, and does not
include the lengths of flex cables used within the devices.
188
4. Each SCSI device must have a unique address; therefore, if multiple hard disk drives
are to be used, the default jumpers for the non-boot drive must be changed to an
unused address.
To Other
SCSI Bus (3,4) SCSI
To Other Hard Devices
Drives (If (If
Applicable) (2) (2) Applicable)
(2)
ABCD ABCDEFGH ABCDEFGH

ABCDEFGH
Dual Floppy
Hard AP 20 Drive Module Streaming
Disk (8,9) Tape
Drive Controller Drive
[Addr.=3*] [Addr.=1*] [Addr.=2*]
(5)
(7) T Non-SCSI Floppy Floppy
Bus (4) Drive 1 Drive 2
[Addr.=0**] [Addr.=1**]
T (6)
NOTE: Numbers in Parenthesis Reference * SCSI Address
General Rules in Text. **Non SCSI Address
Figure 5-36. Data Storage Device Overview, AP20
5. The terminator resistor pack(s) must be removed on all but the last floppy disk drive
on the non SCSI bus. There are, however, two exceptions to this rule:
♦ TEAC Models FD-55GFR-141 and FD55GFR-170-U Floppy Disk Drives con-
tain permanently installed terminators, which must never be removed, regardless
of system configuration.
♦ If you install the TEAC Model FD-55GFR-141 or Model FD-55GFR-170-U
drive along with an older model (55-GVF-17-U or 55GFR-541-U), in the same
P-adapter, both drives must be terminated, regardless of their positions in the
chain.
6. On a SCSI bus, the terminator resistor packs must be removed from all except the last
device on the bus. If an AP20 is configured in a position other than the end position
(four SCSI cables connecting to the AP20), both ends of the SCSI bus must be
terminated.
7. AP20 may be used at either end of the configuration chain or anywhere in between. If
it is located at either end, a terminator module, Foxboro part number P0900DB
(Revision B) must be installed in positions C and D of appropriate mounting struc-
ture slots. The terminator module is not used when the AP20 is not in an end
position.
8. The configuration shown for the AP20 is the non-fault-tolerant configuration. In the
fault-tolerant AP20 configuration (two separate SCSI buses), if mirrored disk drives
are used, they must have the same SCSI address on their respective buses. Also, only
one of the fault-tolerant pair of buses is allowed to have removable media (for exam-
ple, floppy disk or tape drive).
189
9. All associated data storage devices must be connected (modules inserted into enclosure
and peripheral connector plugs raised) before booting up the Application Processor.
! CAUTION
Do not add or remove devices to/from the SCSI bus while the Application Processor
is on-line. This could generate a spurious interrupt and potentially halt the Applica-
tion Processor.
190
6. Fieldbus and Nodebus Cabling
This chapter explains how to install the cabling connections between I/A Series processors and
modules for an I/A Series Fieldbus or Nodebus.
NOTE
For installation information relating to the Module Fieldbus as used in the DIN rail
subsystem, refer to DIN Rail FBM Subsystem User’s Guide (B0400FA), FOUNDATION
fieldbus H1 Interface Module (FBM220/221) User Guide (B0400FD), Profibus-DP
Communication Interface Module (FBM223) User’s Guide (B0400FE), HART Commu-
nication Interface Module (FBM214/215/216/218) User’s Guide (B0400FF) and
Modbus Communication Interface Module (FBM224) User’s Guide (B0400FK).
Fieldbus and Nodebus cabling may involve extending the Fieldbus or Nodebus out of an
I/A Series mounting structure in a local (short distance) or remote (long distance) configuration.
Fieldbus Extension
The Fieldbus can be extended in the following ways:
♦ Local Fieldbus Extension – This extension involves connecting extension cables
between mounting structure buses within an enclosure to provide a Fieldbus length of
10 m (30 ft) maximum. Figure 6-1 illustrates a typical local Fieldbus extension
configuration.
♦ Remote Fieldbus Extension – This extension, used between enclosures, involves the
use of termination cable assemblies (TCAs) and Fieldbus Isolators to provide cable
connections between primary and extended Fieldbus segments, for a maximum Field-
bus length of 1800 m (6000 ft). Three different remote Fieldbus cabling
configurations are possible, depending on whether the Control Processor is fault-
tolerant (FT) or non-fault-tolerant (NFT), and whether the Fieldbus is redundant
(RD) or non-redundant (NRD). These cabling configurations are shown in
Figure 6-2, Figure 6-3 and Figure 6-4.
The remote Fieldbus extension is also used for Fieldbus communication with Fieldbus
Cluster I/O subsystem, SPEC 200 Control Integrator system, and SPECTRUM Con-
trol Integrator system. Figure 6-5 is an example of a remote Fieldbus configuration
consisting of both FBMs in an I/A Series enclosure, and Fieldbus cards in a Fieldbus
Cluster I/O subsystem. Figure 6-6 on page 195 is an example of I/A Series fault-
tolerant Control Processors with redundant Fieldbuses to a Fieldbus Cluster I/O sub-
system. For further information, refer to the appropriate document – Fieldbus Cluster
I/O User’s Guide (B0193RB), SPEC 200 Control Integrator User’s Guide (B0193RD),
or SPECTRUM Migration Integrator User’s Guide (B0193RC).
♦ Direct connection of an AW51B or AW51C processor to the Fieldbus. Refer to
“AW51B/AW51C Direct Connection to Fieldbus” on page 550.
191
B0193AC – Rev U 6. Fieldbus and Nodebus Cabling
♦ Fiber Optic Fieldbus Extension – Refer to Network Cable Systems Planning

(B0193UX) and Network Cable Systems Installation and Maintenance (B0193UW) for
information relating to planning and extending the Fieldbus, including power distri-
bution and modems.
Local Fieldbus Extension, Cable Connections

To extend a Fieldbus locally, proceed as follows:
1. Make the cable connections shown in Figure 6-7, Figure 6-8, Figure 6-9, or
Figure 6-10, as appropriate for your structure configuration. Note that the Fieldbus
extension cable connectors are keyed, to maintain upper/lower Fieldbus identity.
2. Insert a local Fieldbus enable jumper, Foxboro part number P0800ES, at the position
corresponding to the A connector (position) on the Control Processor. (Two jumpers
are required for the fault-tolerant Control Processor, each inserted at position A.) The
jumpers are either shipped in place, or are packaged with other small parts in the
enclosure.
NOTE
Terminators are factory installed for an unused upper or unused lower Fieldbus. For
local extensions do not use terminators in each open connector on the bus, or signal
degradation can occur. It is only necessary to use one terminator with a locally
extended bus.
Control Fieldbus Fieldbus

Processor Module* Module* Y-Adapters
Fieldbuses (Upper and Lower) Fieldbus Fieldbus

Module* Module*
Fieldbus Fieldbus
Fieldbus Fieldbus Fieldbus Module* Module*
Module* Module* Module*
Extended Fieldbus
Lower Fieldbus Upper Fieldbus

Extension Cable Extension Cable
Fieldbus Fieldbus
(Redundant) (Redundant)
Module* Module*
*Using this configuration, up to 24 Fieldbus Fieldbus Fieldbus

Modules (excluding expansion modules) Module Module
attach directly to the Fieldbus.
Figure 6-1. Local Fieldbus Extension, Typical Configuration
192
6. Fieldbus and Nodebus Cabling B0193AC – Rev U
Control Processor Fieldbus Isolator

Term. Cable Assembly Term. Cable Assemblies
Terminating
Terminating TCA TCA TCA Resistor
Resistor
Control Fieldbus Fieldbus

Processor Isolator Isolator
Fieldbus Fieldbus
Module* Module*
Fieldbus Fieldbus
Module* Module*
*Up to 64 Fieldbus Modules (excluding
expansion modules) connect to the remote
Fieldbus through Fieldbus Isolators. Up to
24 Fieldbus Modules (excluding expansion
modules) can connect to each Fieldbus Fieldbus Fieldbus
Isolator. Module* Module*
Figure 6-2. Remote Fieldbus, Non-Fault-Tolerant Control Processor

and Non-Redundant Fieldbus, Typical Configuration
Control Processor Termination Fieldbus Isolator

Cable Assemblies Terminating
Term. Cable Assemblies
Resistors
Fieldbus A
TCA TCA TCA
Fieldbus B
Terminating TCA TCA TCA
Resistors
Fieldbus Fieldbus Fieldbus Fieldbus
Isolator Isolator Isolator Isolator
Fieldbus Fieldbus
A B
Module* Module*
Control
Processor Fieldbus Fieldbus
Module* Module*
*Up to 64 Fieldbus Modules (excluding expansion
modules) connect to the remote Fieldbus through
Fieldbus Isolators. Up to 24 Fieldbus Modules
(excluding expansion modules) can connect to Fieldbus Fieldbus
each Fieldbus Isolator. Module* Module*
Figure 6-3. Remote Fieldbus, Non-Fault-Tolerant Control Processor

and Redundant Fieldbus, Typical Configuration
193
Control Processor Term. Fieldbus Isolator

Cable Assemblies Term. Cable Assemblies Terminating
Resistors
Fieldbus A
TCA TCA TCA
Fieldbus B
Terminating TCA TCA TCA
Resistors
Fieldbus Fieldbus Fieldbus Fieldbus
Isolator Isolator Isolator Isolator
Fieldbus Fieldbus
A B A B
Module* Module*
Control Control
Processor Processor
Fieldbus Fieldbus
Module* Module*
*Up to 64 Fieldbus Modules (excluding expansion
modules) connect to the remote Fieldbus through
Fieldbus Isolators. Up to 24 Fieldbus Modules
(excluding expansion modules) can connect to Fieldbus Fieldbus
each Fieldbus Isolator. Module* Module*
Figure 6-4. Remote Fieldbus, Fault-Tolerant Control Processor and

Redundant Fieldbus, Typical Configuration
Control Processor Term. Fieldbus Isolator

Cable Assembly Term. Cable Assemblies
Terminating TCA TCA TCA Terminating

Resistor Resistor
Control Fieldbus FBP10

Processor Isolator Card
Fieldbus Fieldbus
Module* Card*
Fieldbus Fieldbus
Module* Card*
Fieldbus Fieldbus
Module* Card*
*For maximum allowable number of mixed Fieldbus
Modules and Fieldbus Cards on the Fieldbus, refer Fieldbus Cluster I/O
to sizing guidelines.
Figure 6-5. Remote Non-Redundant Fieldbus with Mixed FBM and
Fieldbus Cluster I/O Cards Configuration
194
Control Processor Term.

Fieldbus Isolator
Cable Assemblies
Term. Cable Assemblies Terminating
Resistors
Fieldbus A
TCA TCA TCA
Fieldbus B
TCA TCA TCA
Terminating
Resistors
FBP10 FBP10
Card Card
Fieldbus Fieldbus
A B A B Card Card
Control Control
Processor Processor Fieldbus Fieldbus
Card Card
Fieldbus Fieldbus
Card Card
Fieldbus Cluster I/O
Figure 6-6. Remote Fieldbus, Fault-Tolerant Control Processors and

Fieldbus Cluster I/O Cards Configuration
Primary Mounting
Structure Bus,
2x4 or 2x8
(End View)
*
Extended Mounting Structure Bus,
2x4 or 2x8 (End View)
*Fieldbus Terminator - P0901XT
Inserted at Factory. Refer also to *
the above note in text.
Upper Fieldbus Extension

Cable P0800DY or P0800DG
Lower Fieldbus Extension

Cable P0800DZ or P0800DV *
Figure 6-7. Local Fieldbus Extension Cabling 2x4 or 2x8 Mounting Structure
195
Upper Fieldbus Extension * Fieldbus Terminator (P0901XT)

Cable P0800DY or P0800DG inserted at factory.
**Required only when the primary
* (1x8) mounting structure receives
Fieldbus connections from a 2x4 or
2x8 mounting structure.
* Primary Mounting
Structure Bus, 1x8
(End View)
Extended Mounting
Structure Bus, 1x8
(End View)
*
Lower Fieldbus
Extension Cable**
P0800DZ or P0800DV
Figure 6-8. Local Fieldbus Extension Cabling 1x8 Mounting Structure
* Fieldbus Terminator (P0901XT)

inserted at factory.
* **Required only when the primary
(1x8) mounting structure receives
Fieldbus connections from a 2x4 or
2x8 mounting structure.
* Primary Mounting
Structure Bus, Extended Mounting
1x8 Structure Bus,
(End View) 2x4 or 2x8
(End View)
*
Upper Fieldbus Extension

Cable P0800DY or P0800DG
Lower Fieldbus Extension**

Cable P0800DZ or P0800DV *
Figure 6-9. Local Fieldbus Extension Cabling 1x8 Mounting Structure to

2x4 and 2x8 Mounting Structures
196
* *Fieldbus Terminator
P0901XT inserted at factory.
Primary Mounting
Structure Bus,
2x4 or 2x8
(End View)
*
*
Upper Fieldbus
Extension Cable Extended
P0800DY or P0800DG Mounting
Structure
Lower Fieldbus Bus, 1x8
Extension Cable (End View)
P0800DZ or P0800DV *
Figure 6-10. Local Fieldbus Extension Cabling, 2x4 or 2x8 Mounting Structure
to 1x8 Mounting Structure
Fieldbus Extension – An Alternate Cabling Method

For 1x8, 2x4, 2x8, and FBM-only mounting structures, the Fieldbus cabling can be configured as
shown in Figure 6-11 and Figure 6-12 for increased protection against certain types of cable fail-
ure (fail open). The scheme, however, reduces protection against a cable short. Figure 6-11 shows
a cabling arrangement for Fieldbus A and B on the upper Fieldbus. The lower Fieldbus cabling is
not shown. If the cable labeled A in Figure 6-11 develops a fault, then cable A supports the Field-
bus A and B communication between two mounting structures. Note that since there is no way to
insert Fieldbus terminators such as shown in Figure 6-10, then Fieldbus Isolators (FBIs) are
required (one for Fieldbus A, and one for Fieldbus B) as shown in Figure 6-11. Each FBI module
has an integrated terminator.
Figure 6-12 shows how the Fieldbus cabling can be arranged for a configuration with extensions
to multiple mounting structures. With this type of configuration, the Fieldbus A/B cables labeled
A and B (not to be confused with Fieldbus A and B) form one path to all mounting structures.
The cable labeled A forms the alternate Fieldbus A/B path. A Fieldbus Isolator module is required
as described in the previous paragraph.
197
Upper Fieldbus
Extension Cable
P0800DY or P0800DG
FBI 1x8 Structure

with FBMs and
FBI Y-adapters
A A’
1x8 Structure
with FBMs and
Y-adapters
Lower Fieldbus
Extension Cable
P0800DZ or P0800DV
not shown.
Figure 6-11. Alternate FBM Cabling Method to One Other 1x8 Mounting Structure
198
Upper Fieldbus
Extension Cable
P0800DY or P0800DG
FBI 1x8 Structure

with FBMs and
FBI Y-adapters
A Lower Fieldbus
Extension Cable
P0800DZ or P0800DV
not shown.
1x8 Structure
with FBMs and A’
Y-adapters
1x8 Structure
with FBMs and
Y-adapters
Figure 6-12. Alternate FBM Cabling Method to Multiple 1x8 Mounting Structures
199
Remote Fieldbus Extension, Cable Connections

Remote Fieldbus extension cable connections are implemented in one of three different configu-
rations, depending on whether the Control Processor is fault-tolerant or non-fault-tolerant, and
whether the Fieldbus is redundant or non-redundant. Refer to Figure 6-13, Figure 6-14 and
Figure 6-15, or Figure 6-16 and Figure 6-17, as appropriate for your configuration, and proceed
as follows:
NOTE
Notations referenced in the above figures are explained in Figure 6-18.
1. Referring to Figure 6-19, assemble the termination blocks associated with the Control
Processor and Fieldbus Isolator termination cable assemblies (TCAs), snap them onto
the mounting rails (DIN rails), and connect the ground wires. (For future reference,
Figure 6-20 illustrates how to remove the TCA termination blocks.)
2. Make the cable connection(s) to the Control Processor(s).
3. Plug the termination connector(s) onto the Fieldbus Isolator module(s), and secure by
tightening the screw.
NOTE
When mounted in a Field Enclosure 4 the Isolator(s) must be located in the right-
most slot. When mounted in a 1x8 FBM mounting structure, Fieldbus Isolators
may be used in positions 1 and 5 (see Figure 4-44). When mounted in a 1x12 FBM
mounting structure, Fieldbus Isolators may be used in slot 1 (see Figure 4-45).
When mounted in a 2x8 FBM mounting structure, Fieldbus Isolators may be used
in positions 1, 5, 9, and 13. Refer also to the description“Y-Adapter Installation” on
page 148.
4. Make the Fieldbus cable connections between termination cable assemblies.

5. Add the terminating resistors (supplied with the termination cable assemblies) accord-
ing to the following rules:
♦ Terminating resistors are used only at the ends of the bus.
♦ The Fieldbus can be extended in two directions from the Control Processor.
(Refer to Figure 6-21.)
6. Connect an insulated 14 AWG green wire between connection point 3 (shield) on the
last Fieldbus Isolator termination cable assembly (or assemblies) and the earth bus in
the enclosure.
NOTE
Notes to the following Figures 6-13 through 6-17 are located in Figure 6-18.
200
CP Term. Cable Fieldbus Isolator

Assembly P0800DB Term. Cable Assembly
P0800DC
ABCD
Note 2 Note 2
Note 3 Note 3
Termination
Note 4 Note 6
Connector
Blk
Wht Sh
Non Fault- Wht
Sh
Tolerant Blk
Control
F F- S F F- S
Processor 100 Ohm Twinaxial
(Note 1) F F- S Cable P0170GF, F F- S
P0170GG, or
Equivalent
Fieldbus Fieldbus
Note 5 Note 5
PO PO
Figure 6-13. Remote Fieldbus Cabling, Non-Fault-Tolerant Control Processor

with Non-Redundant Fieldbus

Cable Assemblies (2) 100 Ohm Twinaxial
P0800DB Cable P0170GF,
P0170GG, or
ABCD Equivalent
Note 2
Note 3
Note 4 Note 4
Blk Blk
Fieldbus A
Wht Wht To Fieldbus
Non Fault Isolator TCA
Tolerant Sh Sh Fieldbus B (Figure 6-15)
Control
Processor F F- S F F- S
(Note 1)
F F- S F F- S
Fieldbus Fieldbus
Note 5 Note 5
PO PO

with Redundant Fieldbus (Control Processor End)
201
Fieldbus Isolator Term. Cable

Assemblies (2) P0800DC Termination
Connector
Fieldbus A
Note 2 Note 2
Note 3 Note 3
Note 6
Termination
Connector
Sh Sh
Wht Wht
Blk Blk
F F- S F F- S
F F- S F F- S
Fieldbus B
Fieldbus Fieldbus
Note 5 Note 5
PO PO

with Redundant Fieldbus

Cable Assemblies (2)
P1 P2 100 Ohm Twinaxial
P0800DA
Cable P0170GF,
P0170GG, or
ABCD ABCD
Note 2 Equivalent
Note 3
Note 4 Note 4
Fault-Tolerant Blk
Blk Wht Fieldbus A
Control Processor
(Note 1) Wht Sh
Sh Fieldbus B
F F- S F F- S
F F- S F F- S
To Fieldbus
Fieldbus Note 5 Fieldbus Note 5 Isolator TCA
PO PO (Figure 6-17)
Figure 6-16. Remote Fieldbus Cabling, Fault-Tolerant Control Processor

with Redundant Fieldbus (Control Processor End)
202
Fieldbus Isolator Term. Cable

Assemblies (2) P0800DC Termination
Connector
Fieldbus A
Note 2 Note 2
Note 6 Note 3 Note 3
Termination
Connector
Sh Sh
Wht Wht
Blk Blk
F F- S F F- S
F F- S F F- S
Fieldbus B
Fieldbus Fieldbus
Note 5 Note 5
PO PO
Figure 6-17. Remote Fieldbus Cabling, Fault-Tolerant Control Processor

with Redundant Fieldbus
NOTE 1 - Control processor may differ slightly in appearance from that shown.
NOTE 2 - For cable strain relief, Foxboro recommends that the Fieldbus cable(s)
be routed over the strain relief bracket and secured using wires.
NOTE 3 - Terminating resistors (110 ohms) must be installed at the ends of the
Fieldbus.
NOTE 4 - Wire colors shown (Blk and Wht) are for reference purposes only.
Actual wire colors may differ.
NOTE 5 - A previous version of the termination cable assembly (TCA) was

grounded via mechanical contract with the DIN rail. For the current
version (shown), attach the green ground wire to a screw on the DIN rail.
This green ground wire is not connected to the cable shield, its function
is to provide transient protection for the module to which the TCA is
connected. The shield should also be grounded at the end opposite the CP.
NOTE 6 - Fieldbus shield must be grounded at one end only. (See text for grounding
instructions.)
Figure 6-18. Notes – Remote Fieldbus Cabling
203
Slide strain relief bracket onto TCA 2 Snap assembled termination block
1
termination block. onto DIN rail, and connect ground
wire to screw on DIN rail.
TCA
Termination
Block
Strain
Relief DIN Rail
Bracket Ground
Wire
NOTE:
The above instructions pertain only to the latest version of the TCA terminator block. The previous
version mounts on the DIN rail without required assembly or separate [ground wire] grounding.
Figure 6-19. TCA Termination Block Assembly Mounting
1 Insert a medium-size flat-head 2 Move the screw drive handle in the

screw driver as shown. direction shown, while lifting the
TCA termination block from the
DIN rail.
Lift
Insert Move
NOTE:
The above instructions pertain only to the latest version of the TCA terminator block. To remove the
previous version of the TCA, slide it off the end of the DIN rail.
Figure 6-20. TCA Termination Block Removal
204
To Next Fieldbus CP Term. Cable

Isolator Term. Assembly P0800DB
Cable Assembly*
ABCD
Note 2 (Terminating
Sh Resistor Removed)
Wht Note 4
Blk Blk
To Next Fieldbus
Wht Isolator Term.
Non Fault Note 4 Cable Assembly*
Sh
Tolerant
Control
Processor F F- S
(Note 1)
F F- S
* Ground Shield and

install terminating Fieldbus
resistor at last term. PO Note 5
cable assembly.
Figure 6-21. Example of Extending Fieldbus in Two Directions from Control Processor
Fieldbus Configuration and Local Extension (1x8, 1x12,

2x8 FBM)
1x8 FBM
The 1x8 FBM (only) mounting structure contains two 4-slot molded connector blocks that house
eight modules as a combination of Fieldbus modules and Fieldbus Isolators. Each connector block
can be configured with either four Fieldbus modules (FBMs) or Fieldbus Isolator(s) (up to two
half-slot isolators) and three FBMs. Table 6-1 summarizes these configurations.
The Fieldbus Isolators occupy a half slot and must be located in either Slot 1 and/or Slot 5 of the
mounting structure. Typically, Fieldbus isolators (FBI A and FBI B from a control processor Ter-
mination Control Assembly (TCA) are installed in Slot 1 and then 7 FBMs can be installed when
those FBMs are assigned to one control processor. Alternately, two sets of FBIs A and B can be
installed in Slots 1 and 5 to form two groups of FBMs (Slots 2-4, and Slots 6-8). This configura-
tion scheme allows assignment of one group of three FBMs to an upper control processor, and
one group of three FBMs to a lower control processor in the enclosure. The FBI B isolators are
used in redundant installations.
There are four 8-pin telephone style jacks (J1-J4) above the 4-slot FBM connector blocks. Two
jacks are provided above each of the 4-slot connector blocks for local Fieldbus interface. These
jacks do not have to be terminated. (A terminator is integrated in the Fieldbus Isolator.) A short
telephone plug jumper cable (P0950CQ-K), between connector blocks, provides a common
Fieldbus and allows all FBM modules to be assigned to either the upper- or lower- local Fieldbus.
A second mounting structure (Fieldbus extension) would not necessarily require an isolator
(24 FBMs per isolator) and could house 8 FBMs. Cables P0800DG and P0800DV extend the
Fieldbus locally. Cable P0800DV is for extending an upper bus, and P0800DG for the lower bus.
205
FBMs can be installed in the structure in the following configurations:

♦ Eight upper bus and none lower bus, or none upper- and eight- lower bus (see config-
uration 3 below)
♦ Four upper bus and four lower bus (see configuration 4 below)
♦ With Fieldbus isolator(s). This reduces the FBM capacity (see configurations 1 and 2
below).
Table 6-1 summarizes the configurations.
Table 6-1. Summary of 1x8 FBM Mounting Structure Configurations
No. 1x8 FBM Configurations Description

1. Configured with Fieldbus A and B
P0950CQ-K
isolators (FBIs) in Slot 1, and 7
FBMs in Slots 2-8. The FBIs could
J1 J4
Extend come from either an upper or
Local lower control-processor bus. This
F Fieldbus
Fieldbus A B F F F F F F F configuration requires a
I
B B B B B B B P0950CQ-K cable between J2 and
F
Fieldbus B B M M M M M M M J3.
I A 915 mm (3 ft) Fieldbus cable
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 P0800DV (lower bus) or
P0800DG (upper bus) in J4 can
extend the Fieldbus to another
mounting structure in the rack or
enclosure to extend the Fieldbus
locally (to a maximum of 24
FBMs).
If there is no Fieldbus extension,
J1 and J4 do not require
termination.
2. Accommodates up to four FBIs in
To Local Slots 1 and 5. This configuration
Fieldbus (no jumper between J2 and J3)
(Upper) provides two separate four-block
J1 J4 groups allowing up to three FBMs
Extend
Local to be installed in each group. This
Fieldbus A F Fieldbus grouping is useful if some FBMs
B F F F F F F F
(Upper) I (Lower) are to be associated with an upper-
B B B B B B B
Fieldbus B F
M M M M M M M
bus control processor, and some
B
(Upper) I FBMs in the same structure are to
be associated with a lower-bus
1 5 control processor.
Fieldbus A Fieldbus B
These groups can be extended
(Lower) (Lower)
locally using J2 and/or J4 as
described in the configuration
above. If they are unused, J1-J4 do
not need to be terminated.
206
Table 6-1. Summary of 1x8 FBM Mounting Structure Configurations
No. 1x8 FBM Configurations Description

3. This configuration is a local Field-
From Local bus extension accommodating up
Fieldbus to 8 FBMs. There are no FBIs in
P0950CQ-K this mounting structure. The
J1 J4 P0950CQ-K jumper is required to
Extend
Local associate all FBMs in this structure
Fieldbus to either an upper- or lower-bus
F F F F F F F F
control processor. The Fieldbus
B B B B B B B B
can be extended further (J4) as
M M M M M M M M
described above. If it is unused, J4
does not need to be terminated.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4. This configuration is similar to
From Local configuration 3 above except, it
From Local Extend
Fieldbus has no jumper between J2 and J3.
Fieldbus Local
Fieldbus There are two 4-block FBM
J1
groups and each can be extended.
Extend J1, J2 Slots 1-4
Local J3, J4 Slots 5-8
Fieldbus
F F F F F F F F
B B B B B B B B
M M M M M M M M
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1x12 FBM Configuration

The 1x12 FBM mounting structure configuration is similar to configuration 1 for the 1x8 FBM
(see Table 6-1), except that no jumper between J1 and J2 is required (see Figure 6-22).
FBMs can be configured on either the upper or lower bus in groups of 12 (11 if there is an FBI
isolator in Slot 1).
Up to two Fieldbus isolators (half-slot FBIs) can be installed in dedicated Slot 1.
Fieldbus cable P0800DV (3 ft) (not shown) can be connected to J1 or J2 to allow local Fieldbus
extension to other mounting structures in the rack or enclosure.
This mounting structure accommodates paired main and expansion FBMs in odd and even slots,
respectively.
207
Fieldbus Connector J1*

Fieldbus Connector J2*
Slot 1** Front
* Refer to 1x12 Fieldbus Module Mounting Structure Installation and Wiring (B0400PK)
for complete instructions for Fieldbus cabling with the 1x12 FBM mounting structures.
** Fieldbus Isolators may only be installed in this slot.
2x8 FBM
The 2x8 FBM mounting structure is the same as two 1x8 FBM mounting structures (see
Figure 6-23). The configuration of the 2x8 mounting structure is the same as two 1x8 FBM struc-
tures (refer to Table 6-1).
Slot 1 Slot 5
Slot 9 Slot 13
208
Nodebus Extension
NOTE
The following items, which do not concern Nodebus cabling or extension proper,
are covered in “Dual Nodebus Interface Cabling” on page 486, “Dual Nodebus
10BaseT Interface Cabling” on page 501, and “Dual Nodebus Extender Cabling”
on page 511:
- Nodebus Interface
- Dual Nodebus Interface
- Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface
- Dual Nodebus Interface Extender.
A Nodebus can be extended using either coaxial or fiber optic cable. The following description
and procedures are for coaxial cable extensions. To extend the Nodebus using fiber, refer to
Network Cable Systems Planning (B0193UX) for a description of the allowed configurations and
distances, and to Network Cable Systems Installation and Maintenance (B0193UW) to install the
modules and fiber cable.
For fault-tolerant operation, the I/A Series Nodebus consists of two channels (designated A and
B). Accordingly, all Nodebus cabling, couplers, and extenders are configured in pairs to provide
two separate channel connections.
The Nodebus can be extended in the following ways:
1. Local Nodebus Extension within an enclosure – This extension involves interconnect-
ing mounting structure buses within an enclosure, and is normally performed at the
factory prior to shipment. Figure 6-24 illustrates a configuration of the replacement of
an existing older style cell bus. Note that there is an adapter box (AK438AA-A)
installed between the older existing Nodebus and a new extended Nodebus. The
adapter accommodates differences in the bus connectors.
209
Module Module Module
Nodebus* * Redundant

Nodebus*
Nodebus A & B Adapter Box

Cables (Up to 12 Ft) AK438AA-A
Figure 6-24. Local Nodebus Extension within an Enclosure (Between the Previous Cell Bus
Configuration and the New Remote Cell Bus Configuration)
2. Local Nodebus Extension Between Enclosures – This extension involves connecting

extension cables between mounting structure buses housed within two or more enclo-
sures. Coaxial cabling distances up to 30 m (100 ft) are possible. Figure 6-25 illus-
trates a typical configuration.
NOTE
Bridged IE32 enclosures are considered separate from one another with regard to
Nodebus cabling. The bridged enclosures therefore use the cabling concepts and
procedures presented under “Local Nodebus Extension Between Enclosures” on
page 213.
3. Remote Nodebus Extension Between Enclosures – This extension involves the use of
Nodebus Extender modules, used in pairs, to provide signal amplification and ground
isolation between Nodebus segments. Coaxial cabling distances up to 300 m
(1000 ft), and fiber optic cabling distances up to 2 km (1.24 mi) between segments
are possible. Figure 6-26 illustrates a typical configuration.
NOTE
Up to three Nodebus segments can be interconnected, for a total Nodebus cabling
distance of up to 697 m (2300 ft) with coaxial cabling, or 2 km (1.24 mi), includ-
ing segment lengths.
210
* Redundant
Nodebus*
Nodebus A & B
Interface Cables
Nodebus A & B
Interface Cables Optional
Couplings
Nodebus*
Nodebus A & B
Extension Cables Module Module Module
(Up to 100 Ft)
Figure 6-25. Local Nodebus Extension Between Enclosures, Typical Configuration
Nodebus A & B
Module Module Module Extension Cables
(Coaxial Ethernet Quad
Shielded) Up to 1000 ft*
coaxial cable, or 1.24 mi
with fiber optic cable. Nodebus A & B
Nodebus Segment (Redundant)
Interface
Cables
Nodebus Nodebus
Module Extender Extender
Module A Module B Nodebus Nodebus
Extender Extender Module
Module A Module B
Nodebus A & B
Interface Cables Nodebus Segment (Redundant)
* See note in text regarding

multiple Nodebus segments.
Figure 6-26. Remote Nodebus Extension Between Enclosures, Typical Configuration
The following subsections describe how to make the cable connections for the different types of
Nodebus extensions.
211
Local Nodebus Extension within an Enclosure

NOTE
The following information also pertains to Nodebus cabling between 1x8 mounting
structures in the Modular Industrial Workstation.
To extend a Nodebus between mounting structures within an enclosure, make the cable connec-
tions as shown in Figure 6-27 or Figure 6-28, as appropriate for your mounting structure.
Terminator P0912CM
To Enclosure
Ground Strap
Nodebus A Extension Primary Mounting

Cable P0912CD or P0912CF Structure Bus,
2x4 or 2x8
(End View)
Nodebus B Extension
Cable P0912CG or P0912CE * Earlier system designs
use two separate
earthing terminators.
Extended
Mounting
Terminator P0912CM* Structure Bus,
2x4 or 2x8
(End View)
To Enclosure
Ground Strap
Figure 6-27. Local Nodebus within Enclosure, Cabling 2x4 or 2x8 Mounting Structures
212
Terminator P0912CM*
To Enclosure
Ground Strap
Nodebus A Extension Cable Primary Mounting

P0912CG or P0912CE Structure Bus, 1x8
(End View)
Terminator P0912CM*
To Enclosure
Ground Strap
Extended
Mounting
Structure
Bus, 1x8
Nodebus A (End View)
Extension Cable P0912CD
or P0912CF
Figure 6-28. Local Nodebus Cabling within Enclosure, 1x8 Mounting Structure
Local Nodebus Extension Between Enclosures

Local extension of the Nodebus between enclosures is accomplished with Nodebus extension
cables, which have the following part numbers:
♦ P0902JM – 6 m (20 ft), Nodebus A extension cable
♦ P0902JN – 6 m (20 ft), Nodebus B extension cable
♦ P0902KZ – 15 m (50 ft), Nodebus A extension cable
♦ P0902LN – 15 m (50 ft), Nodebus B extension cable
The maximum Nodebus A and B extension between two enclosures is 30 m (100 ft). When con-
necting three enclosures using these cables, the combined lengths of Nodebus A and B extension
cables must not exceed 30 m (100 ft).
In addition to the Nodebus extension cables, other items used to complete the connection
between enclosures include (in each enclosure):
♦ Nodebus A and B interface cables
♦ One or more mounting bracket kits, to support the connection between the interface
cables and extension cables
♦ Possible need for adapter box as described in “Nodebus Connectors Adapter Box
(AK438AA)” on page 217.
These items, plus couplings to join cable extensions when required, are provided in kits
P0902CN, CP, and CQ, which are described as follows:
P0912CN – Used when the mounting structure buses being connected are both housed in 1- or
2-cell enclosures (IE32, IE16, IE8, or FE8).
213
♦ Contents:
♦ 2 – P0912CH Nodebus A interface cable, 0.3 m (1 ft)
♦ 2 – P0912CJ Nodebus B interface cable, 0.3 m (1 ft)
♦ 2 – P0902JQ Mounting bracket kit
♦ 2 – P0176UC Cable coupler
♦ 2 – P0902LV Cable coupler insulator.
Cable couplers and their associated insulators are used only when joining extension cables to
make longer lengths.
P0912CP – Used when one mounting structure bus is housed in a 1- or 2-cell enclosure (IE32,
IE16, IE8, or FE8) and the other is housed in a workstation bay, 1x8 mounting structure, or 2x8
mounting structure.
♦ Contents:
♦ 1 – P0912CH Nodebus A interface cable, 0.3 m (1 ft)
♦ 1 – P0912CJ Nodebus B interface cable, 0.3 m (1 ft)
♦ 1 – P0912CK Nodebus A interface cable, 1 m (3 ft)
♦ 1 – P0912CL Nodebus B interface cable, 1 m (3 ft)
P0912CQ – Used when the mounting structure buses being connected are both housed in work-
station bays, 1x8 mounting structures, or 2x8 mounting structures.
♦ Contents:
♦ 2 – P0912CK Nodebus A interface cable, 1 m (3 ft)
♦ 2 – P09912CL Nodebus B interface cable, 1 m (3 ft)
If the cable coupler is used to join two Nodebus extension cables, the coupler insulator must be
used to ensure that the bare metal parts of the cable connectors are electrically insulated. The cou-
pler insulator, P0902LV, is a 100 mm (4 in) piece of heat-shrinkable tubing. To install the coupler
insulator, proceed as follows:
1. Slide the coupler insulator over the end of one of the extension cables to be joined.
2. Attach the extension cables to the cable coupler.
3. Slide the coupler insulator over the cable coupler so that no metal parts are exposed.
4. Fix the coupler insulator in place by heating so that the insulator shrinks. (A blow-
type commercial heater or household hair dryer may be used for this purpose.)
214
The mounting bracket kit (Figure 6-29) contains two types of screws, machine and self-tapping.
The machine screws attach the DIN rail clamps to the mounting bracket; the self-tapping screws
attach the bracket to a plastic partition in the enclosure (such as, in the Modular Industrial Work-
station) when necessary. Hardware for attaching the interface cables to the bracket is included
with the interface cables.
To extend a Nodebus locally between enclosures, make the cable connections as shown in
Figure 6-30.
NOTE
Local Nodebus extension cabling between enclosures that contain 1x8 mounting
structures (for example, the Modular Industrial Workstation) is similar in principle
to the local Nodebus extension cabling between 1- and 2-cell enclosures. [The main
differences are the types of Nodebus interface cables used and cable routing tech-
niques used within the enclosure. Refer to Modular Industrial Workstation Installa-
tion (B0193CE) for details.]
Machine
Screws
Bracket
Self-Tapping
Screws
DIN Rail
Clamps Mounting
Bracket Kit
P0902JQ
(Fully Assembled)
Figure 6-29. Mounting Bracket Kit
215
Either Terminators or
Cables to Next
Mounting Structure Bus
Mounting Bracket Kit

Nodebus A
Interface Cable
Mounting Structure P0912CH
Bus Local Nodebus B
Extension Cable
Red P0902JN (20 ft)
P0902LN (50 ft)
Nodebus B Interface Red Local Nodebus A

Cable P0912CJ Green Extension Cable
P0902JM (20 ft)
P0902KZ (50 ft)
Green
DIN Rail
To Mounting Structure
Bus in Next Enclosure
Figure 6-30. Local Nodebus Extension Cabling Between Enclosure,
1- and 2-Cell Enclosures
Nodebus Terminators Installation

A sufficient quantity of ground leads, referred to as SSB terminators, is shipped separately with
the system equipment for terminating the ends of the Nodebus. The terminators need to be fas-
tened to appropriate ground screws. The ground connection can be made either to the DIN rail,
or to the nearest chassis screw on the cell bus at the rear of the structure.
The leads have plugs at one end for inserting into the end of the structure cell bus. The other end
of each SSB terminator lead has a ring lug. Fasten the ring lug to either a chassis screw on the back
of the structure as shown, for example, in Figure 6-31, or to a convenient ground screw such as on
a DIN rail.
Terminator Leads
Figure 6-31. Nodebus Terminator Ground Connections

for a 1x8 Mounting Structure – Example
216
Nodebus Connectors Adapter Box (AK438AA)

The following mounting structures with cell busses require an adapter box (AK438AA-A) (see
Figure 6-32) to connect existing Nodebus cable connectors to a newer cell bus in a mounting
structure:
♦ 1x8 (P0912CA)
♦ 2x8 (P0912CB)
♦ 2x4 (P0912CC).
Adapter
Cell Bus Existing

Cables
Figure 6-32. Nodebus (Cell Bus) Adapter Box (AK438AA)
Figure 6-33 illustrates the mounting location of the adapter box (AK438AA) for a 1x8 mounting
structure. The installation for other mounting structures/cell busses is similar. Perform the follow-
ing steps:
1. Remove the release paper from the foam tape on the back of the adapter and affix the
adapter on the side of the cell, and in close proximity to the end of the cell bus as
shown.
2. Attach the ground wire to the nearest hardware on the module ground bus at the bot-
tom rear of the cell.
3. Attach the cables from the adapter to the cell bus as shown. Note that the connectors
are threaded and should be turned until they fully engage with the connectors.
4. Attach the existing Nodebus cables to the adapter box as shown.
217
Cell Bus
Existing
Ground Wire Nodebus
Cables
Figure 6-33. Making Nodebus Connections and Mounting the Adapter Box (AK438AA)
to a 1x8 Mounting Structure
Remote Nodebus Extension

NOTE
The following information also pertains to remote Nodebus extension from a Mod-
ular Industrial Workstation.
To extend a Nodebus to a remote mounting structure, refer to Figure 6-34 and perform the fol-
lowing steps:
1. Locate Nodebus interface cables (part number P0800KE) and route the cables
through the enclosures as described in “Peripheral Cable Routing within Enclosures”
on page 343.
2. Locate the two Nodebus termination assembly kits (P0902BL), packaged within the
enclosure.
3. If the Nodebus Termination Assembly is to be mounted on a DIN rail, refer to
Figure 6-35 and proceed as follows:
a. Attach the interface cables (P0800KE) to the Nodebus termination bracket using
the nuts, lockwashers, and ground clip provided with the interface cables.
b. Attach the DIN rail clips to the Nodebus termination bracket using the pan-head
screws, lockwashers, and plain washers provided.
c. Clip the Nodebus termination assembly (P0902BL) onto the DIN rail.
218
d. Repeat Steps 3a through 3c for the opposite end of the Nodebus.

e. At one end of the Nodebus only, attach one end of the ground strap to the
ground clip, and the other end to the enclosure earth bus.
4. If the Nodebus termination assembly is to be mounted on a plug connector mounting
plate, refer to Figure 6-36 and perform the following steps:
a. Attach the interface cables (P0800KE) to the Nodebus termination bracket using
the nuts, lockwashers, and ground clip provided with the interface cables.
b. Attach the Nodebus termination assembly to the plug connector mounting plate
using the 0.138 screws and washers provided.
c. Repeat Steps 4a and 4b for the opposite end of the Nodebus.
d. At one end of the Nodebus only, attach one end of the ground strap to the
ground clip, and the other end to the enclosure earth bus.
Nodebus Termination Assemblies
Interface
Interface
Cables
Cables
P0800KE Nodebus Extension P0800KE
ABCD ABCD Cables A and B ABCD ABCD
Nodebus Extender
Module - P0700WB
A A
The letterbug A
configures the B Module identifiers B
Nodebus Extender (letterbugs) must
module for Nodebus A. be A and B as shown.
Figure 6-34. Remote Nodebus Extension, Cable Connections
219
Ground Part of Interface

Strap Cables P0800KE
Cable A
(To Module A)
Nodebus
Termination
Bracket
Cable B
Ground (To Module B)
A Clip
DIN Rail
Clips
B
Bottom View
Figure 6-35. Nodebus Termination Assembly, DIN Rail Version
Part of Interface
Ground Strap Cables P0800KE
Nodebus Cable A
Termination (To Module A)
Bracket
A
Ground Cable B
Clip (To Module B)
Bottom View
Figure 6-36. Nodebus Termination Assembly, Plug Connector Mounting Plate Version
5. Using the parts listed in the following table, fabricate Nodebus extension cables A and
B [maximum length for coaxial cable is 300 m or 1000 ft, and for fiber optic cable is
2 km (1.24)].
220
Table 6-2. Nodebus Extension Cable Parts
Item Qty.1 Foxboro P/N Mfg. Mfg. P/N

Coaxial Cable, Ethernet Type A/R P0170LT Belden Corp. 89880
Coax Connector, Type N 4 P0176SA Amphenol 82-4426-1001
Tubing, Heat Shrinkable 203 mm R0120BE Remtec Corp. CRF-125
Boot, Connector 4 X0179AX Mueller Elec. No. 29
1.
Quantity required to make two (redundant) cables
NOTE
Refer to Network Cable Systems Planning (B0193UX) and Network Cable Systems
Installation and Maintenance (B0193UW) for information on using fiber optic cable
with the Nodebus Extenders.
6. At the Nodebus termination assemblies, connect the Nodebus extension cables to the
interface cables by mating the N-type connectors (Figure 6-28).
! CAUTION
When connecting the Nodebus extension cables, be careful not to cross connect the
cables. Connect point A on both Nodebus termination assemblies to each other,
and do the same for point B.
7. Slip the rubber boots on the Nodebus extension cables over the N-type connectors.
! WARNING
The rubber boots must be installed over the N-type connectors to prevent electrical
shock hazard.
8. Determine which of the Nodebus extender module pair is the A module and which is
the B module. This is done by observing the sixth (right-most) letterbug on each
module, which contains either the letter A or B.
9. Connect the peripheral connector jacks of Nodebus interface cables P0800KE to posi-
tion A on each of the Nodebus extender modules, as shown in Figure 6-34.
10. Connect the interface cable (P0800KE) from Nodebus extender module A to Node-
bus termination bracket position A, and connect the interface cable (P0800KE) from
Nodebus extender module B to Nodebus termination bracket position B.
! CAUTION
The Nodebus A and B interface cables must be connected exactly as described in
Steps 9 and 10. Failure to do so results in improper system operation.
221
11. Insert a power connector jack, Foxboro part number P0800FZ, at position D on each
of the Nodebus extender modules. (The power connector jacks are packaged in the
enclosure, along with other small parts.)
12. Engage the peripheral connector plugs (on the modules) by inserting the hex driver
tool into the peripheral connector engagement actuator slots (on the front of the
modules) and turning 1/2-turn clockwise.
222
7. Termination Cable Assembly
(TCA) Installation
This chapter contains procedures for installing the termination cable assemblies (TCAs) into
the I/A Series enclosures. The TCAs provide the means of connecting field signals to the
I/A Series equipment. (See “Field Connections” on page 239 for information on making the
actual field connections.)
NOTE
For installation information relating to the termination assemblies (TAs) use with
the DIN rail subsystem, refer to DIN Rail FBM Subsystem User’s Guide (B0400FA)
and FOUNDATION fieldbus H1 Interface Module (FBM220/221) User Guide
(B0400FD), Profibus-DP Communication Interface Module (FBM223) User’s Guide
(B0400FE), HART Communication Interface Module (FBM214/215/216/218) User’s
Guide (B0400FF) and Modbus Communication Interface Module (FBM224) User’s
Guide (B0400FK).
The following information assumes that all modules have been installed according to the informa-
tion developed during the planning phase (tag list/FoxCAE).
Figure 7-1 shows four types of TCAs:
♦ Direct Connect
♦ Plug (Bulk) Connector
♦ Discrete Wire Connector
♦ ECEP Ring Lug Connector (not shown).
The direct connect TCA is used only with Field Enclosure 4. The plug connector and discrete
wire connector TCAs are used with all other enclosures and mounting structures.
The ECEP ring lug connectors (not shown) are used with the power group of FBMs. These con-
nector blocks provide field termination for an FBM that accepts ring lugs, fork lugs, or properly
stripped, stranded field wiring (from 12 AWG through 22 AWG). Each terminal block contains
6-32 screws with a wire clamping plate.
223
B0193AC – Rev U 7. Termination Cable Assembly (TCA) Installation
Termination Termination
Connector Connectors
1 or 2 Cables
Direct
Connection
Block
Plug Connector Discrete Wire

Block Blocks (1 or 2)
For Use with

Field Enclosure 4 For Use with Any Other Enclosure
Figure 7-1. Termination Cable Assemblies (TCAs)
TCA Labels
The direct connect and discrete wire termination cable assemblies are equipped with labels that
show the individual field wire connections for each type of Fieldbus Module.
NOTE
The TCA labels, which correspond to the various types of FBMs, are shown along
with the field connection information for the FBMs under “Field Connections” on
page 239. The plug connector TCA does not have a label. Connections to this
block are shown for each type of FBM under “Field Connections” on page 239.
Due to the complexity of the 2- and 3-tiered discrete wire block connectors, the following subsec-
tions present a brief explanation of how to read the labels, and how to associate that information
with the actual connector.
2-Tiered Discrete Wire Block Connector

The cable terminator labelling and the associated input/output connectors for a 2-tiered
discrete wire block connector (with 8 terminals on each tier) are detailed in Figure 7-2 and
Figure 7-3. Illustrated above the actual label in Figure 7-2, is a representation of the 2 tiers of con-
nection on the discrete wire block connector. The label, illustrated in Figure 7-2, indicates that
the positive (+) connection of the number one field device is made in the number one (1) top row
connector and the negative (-) connection is made in the number one (1) bottom row connector.
The P+ connection is made in the top row connector, labelled number two (2). This general
sequence is repeated for the remaining field devices.
224
7. Termination Cable Assembly (TCA) Installation B0193AC – Rev U
NOTE
The numbering sequence for the field devices and actual block connector numbers
do not always coincide.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Bottom Row
Connections
Top Row Connections
- P2 - - P4 - - - Bottom Row Labeling

Top Row Labeling + P1 + + P3 + + +
1 2 3 4 5 6 Field Device
Number
FBM17
10 V / DIO
Figure 7-2. Typical 2-Tiered Discrete Wire Block Label Definition
Label appears on
Terminal
this top surface.
Numbers
87 65
Top Row 43 21
Positive (+)
Connections 87 65
43 21
Bottom Row
Negative (-)
Connections
Both the top and bottom rows have P connections as defined by the label.
Figure 7-3. Typical 2-Tiered Discrete Wire Block Connector
3-Tiered Discrete Wire Block Connector

The cable terminator labelling and the associated input/output connectors for a 3-Tiered Discrete
wire block connector (with 8 terminals on each tier) are detailed in Figure 7-4 and Figure 7-5.
Illustrated above the actual label in Figure 7-2, is a representation of the 3 tiers of connection on
the discrete wire block connector. The label, illustrated in Figure 7-4, indicates that the P+ con-
nection of the number one field device is made in the number one (1) top row connector, the pos-
itive (+) connection is made in the number one (1) middle row connector, and the negative (-)
connection is made in the number one (1) bottom row connector. This sequence is repeated for
all eight devices.
225
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Bottom Row
Connections
Middle Row
Connections
Top Row Connections
Bottom Row Polarity

- - - - - - - -
+ + + + + + + + Middle Row Polarity
Top Row Polarity +P +P +P +P +P +P +P +P
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Field Device
Number
FBM1: 4 to 20mA
FBM43: IT
Figure 7-4. Typical 3-Tiered Discrete Wire Block Label Definition
Top Row P(+P) Label appears on

Connections this top surface.
8765
Middle Row 4321
Positive (+)
Connections 8765
4321
Bottom Row 8765

Negative (-) 4 3 21 Terminal
Connections Numbers
Figure 7-5. Typical 3-Tiered Discrete Wire Block Connector
226
Field Enclosure 4, TCA Installation

To attach the termination cable assemblies (TCAs) to the FE4, proceed as follows:
1. Locate the appropriate TCA for the Fieldbus Module in question.
! CAUTION
The termination connectors are keyed to match the associated Fieldbus Modules,
thus ensuring that the proper termination connector is installed on each Fieldbus
Module. When attaching the termination connectors to the Fieldbus Modules, do
not use excessive force. Doing so could result in damaged keys and/or faulty opera-
tion of the equipment.
2. Shape the TCA cable as shown in Figure 7-6, and insert the cable into the cable
receptacle.
3. Snap the termination block onto the mounting plate by inserting the hooks at the rear
of the termination block into the square holes in the mounting plate.
4. Using the hex driver tool, screw the termination connector onto the Fieldbus Module.
5. Make up a module identifier from letterbugs (shown in Figure 7-7). The module
identifier consists of six interlocking letterbugs which produce a 6-character module
identification code that is visually and electrically readable. A packet containing tubes
of letterbugs is supplied with each Fieldbus Module.
NOTE
The module ID must be obtained from the information developed during the site
planning phase supplied with this enclosure.
6. Plug the module identifier into the termination connector (Figure 7-7).
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 6 to install all TCAs in this enclosure.
To make field connections to the Fieldbus Modules in a FE4, refer to the specific field connection
information in the next section (“Field Connections” on page 239) and proceed as follows:
1. Locate the appropriate connection block (directly beneath the FBM).
2. Route field cable(s) into the enclosure, to the connection block. (Labels on the con-
nection blocks indicate the FBM type, and provide connection information unique to
the individual FBMs.)
3. Using the individual screw-clamp terminals, make connections to the block as shown
in Figure 7-8.
227
Keyed (See CAUTION

Statement in Text)
Fieldbus
Termination Module
Connector
Termination Cable
Assembly (TCA)
Cable
Termination
Block
Mounting
Plate
Figure 7-6. Installation of TCA into FE4
Fieldbus
Module
Module Identifier Termination
(Letterbug Set) Connector
Figure 7-7. Insertion of Module Identifier into Fieldbus Module Termination Connector
228
TB1 TB2
Label TB1 TB2

(Typical)
Other Enclosures and Structures, TCA Installation

Enclosures and mounting structures other than the Field Enclosure 4 to which field wiring can be
connected, include the following:
♦ Industrial Enclosure 16
♦ Industrial Enclosure 32
♦ IEMFA/IEMFR (ME24/ME32) (Metal Enclosures)
♦ Metal Field Enclosure 8
♦ 1x8, 2x8, 1x8 FBM, and 2x8 FBM mounting structures (mounted in appropriate
rack)
♦ 1x12 FBM mounting structures mounted in an appropriate enclosure:
♦ in metal enclosure which fulfills requirements listed in 1x12 Fieldbus
Module Mounting Structure Installation and Wiring Instructions (B0400PK), or
♦ in a Fieldbus Module Metal Enclosure 60. Refer to 1x12 Fieldbus Module Mount-
ing Structure Installation and Wiring Instructions (B0400PK) for information on
this metal enclosure.
♦ Fieldbus Cluster I/O subsystem. Refer to Fieldbus Cluster I/O User’s Guide (B0193RB)
for further information.
♦ SPEC 200 Control Integrator subsystem. Refer to SPEC 200 Control Integrator
User’s Guide (B0193RD) for further information.
♦ SPECTRUM Control Integrator. Refer to SPECTRUM Migration Integrator
(B0193RC) for further information.
229
These enclosures use the discrete wire and plug connector TCAs (shown in Figure 7-1). Enclo-
sures which use the discrete wire TCAs are equipped with DIN mounting rails; enclosures which
utilize the plug connector TCAs are equipped with either DIN mounting rails or plug connector
mounting plates.
The following subsections present procedures for installing and connecting field wires to these
TCAs.
Installation of Discrete Wire TCA

NOTE
The cable length of the discrete wire TCA is 44 in (1117 mm). When planning the
placement of connector blocks in the field termination areas of the enclosures, this
cable length must be taken into consideration. This is critical for the Industrial
Enclosure 32, in which possible cable routes can easily exceed the 44 inch limit. To
avoid cable length limitation problems in the IE32, place the connector blocks in
the same half (upper or lower) of the enclosure as the associated Fieldbus Modules.
To install the discrete wire TCAs, proceed as follows:
! CAUTION
not use excessive force. To do so could result in damaged keys and/or faulty opera-
1. If the enclosure is an IE16, IE32, or FE8:

a. Snap the discrete wire block onto the DIN rail.
b. Referring to Figure 7-9, insert the termination connector through the large open-
ing in the enclosure side wall, near the center of mounting structure where the
Fieldbus Module is located.
c. Plug the termination connector onto the appropriate Fieldbus Module.
2. If the enclosure is a IEMFA/IEMFR (ME24/ME32) or Metal FE8:
a. Plug the termination connector onto the appropriate Fieldbus Module.
b. Route the discrete wire block and cable to the area of the DIN rails and snap the
block onto the DIN rail (in the desired location).
NOTE
If the discrete wire block is to be mounted on the lower DIN rail of a metal FE8
enclosure, route the block and cable from behind the DIN rail mounting assembly.
230
Keyed (See CAUTION

Statement in Text)
Plug
FBM
In
Termination
Connector
Discrete
Wire
Blocks
Figure 7-9. Installation of Discrete Wire TCA (Typical)
4. Dress cable neatly, leaving enough free cable so that the termination connector can be
moved away from the front of the Fieldbus Module to allow removal of the Fieldbus
Module.
5. Make up a module identifier from letterbugs (illustrated in Figure 7-7). The module
identifier consists of six interlocking letterbugs which produce a 6-character module
NOTE
6. Plug the module identifier into the termination connector. See Figure 7-7.
7. Write the module ID (module identifier code) in the space provided on the label
affixed to the discrete wire block(s). Refer to Figure 7-10.
8. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to install all TCAs in the enclosure.
231
- - - - - - - -
+ + + + + + + +
C C C C C C C C
FBM
A B C 1 2 3
Type
User-Inscribed
Module Identifier
Figure 7-10. Example of User-Inscribed Label
Field Connections to Discrete Wire Block

All wires should be routed into the enclosure. Identify the field device to which each wire is con-
nected and sort the wires by wire block. Each discrete wire block contains a label showing all con-
nections peculiar to this TCA type.
NOTE
For large input/output field cables, it is recommended that the outer jacket be
stripped from the field cable, from the TCA connection points to where the cables
enter the enclosure.
To make field connections to a discrete wire block, refer to the specific field connection informa-
tion in the next section (“Field Connections” on page 239) and proceed as follows:
1. Starting with the discrete wire connection blocks nearest to the bottom of the enclo-
sure, select and segregate all of the wires to be connected to the blocks.
2. Using the individual screw-clamp terminals, make connections to the appropriate ter-
minals as shown in Figure 7-11.
3. Provide strain relief for the I/O signal cables as follows:
a. If the enclosure is an IE16, IE32, or FE8, use the strain relief cable straps located
in the field termination area of the enclosure.
b. If the enclosure is an IEMFA (ME24) or IEMFR (ME32), using nylon cable ties,
fasten the cables to the cross members (depth bars) located in the sides of the
enclosure cable way area.
c. If the enclosure is a metal FE8, using nylon cable ties, fasten the cables to the wire
hooks at the front of the enclosure.
4. Repeat Steps 1, 2, and 3 for all discrete wire blocks in this enclosure.
232
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Figure 7-11. Discrete Wire Connection, Block Wiring
Installation of Plug Connector TCA

NOTE
The cable length of the discrete wire TCA is 44 in (1117 mm). When planning the
placement of connector blocks in the field termination areas of the enclosures, this
cable length must be taken into consideration. This is particularly crucial for the
Industrial Enclosure 32, in which possible cable routes can easily exceed the 44 inch
limit. To avoid cable length limitation problems in the Industrial Enclosure 32,
place the connector blocks in the same half (upper or lower) of the enclosure as the
associated Fieldbus Modules.
To install the plug connector TCAs, proceed as follows:
! CAUTION
not use excessive force. To do so could result in damaged keys and/or faulty opera-
1. If the enclosure is an IE16, IE32, or FE8:

a. Attach the plug connector block to the plug connector mounting plate, as shown
in Figure 7-12.
b. Insert the termination connector through the large opening in the enclosure side
wall, near the center of mounting structure where the Fieldbus Module is located.
c. Plug the termination connector onto the appropriate Fieldbus Module.
233
Retaining
Screws
Plug
Connector
Mounting
Plate
Lip at Rear of Plug Connector

Plug Connector Block Block Engages Mounting Plate
Figure 7-12. Installation of Plug Connector in IE16/32 or FE8 Enclosure
2. If the enclosure is an IEMFA (ME24) or IEMFR (ME32):

b. Route the plug connector block to the area of the DIN rails and install the block
on the DIN rail as illustrated in Figure 7-13.
3. If the enclosure is a metal FE8:
b. Route the plug connector block to the area of the plug connector mounting plate
and install the block as illustrated in Figure 7-14.
5. Dress cable neatly, leaving enough free cable so that the termination connector can be
moved away from the front of the Fieldbus Module to allow removal of the Fieldbus
Module.
6. Make up a module identifier from letterbugs (illustrated in Figure 7-7). The module
identifier consists of 6 interlocking letterbugs which produce a 6-character module
234
DIN Rail
To Install:
Snap plug connector Retaining
block onto DIN rail and Screw
tighten retaining screw.
Plug Connector Block
Figure 7-13. Installation of Plug Connector in IEMFA/IEMFR Enclosure
Retaining
Screws
Plug
Connector
Mounting
Plate
Lip at rear of plug connector

Plug Connector Block block engages mounting plate.
Figure 7-14. Installation of Plug Connector Block in Metal FE8 Enclosure
7. Plug the module identifier into the termination connector.
NOTE
8. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to install all TCAs in this enclosure.
235
Field Connections to Plug Connector Block

Field connections to the plug connector block are made via a user-fashioned cable, which will run
between the your field termination marshalling area and the male connector plug in the I/A Series
enclosure (Figure 7-15).
Table 7-1 through Table 7-6 provide a list of tools and materials required to fashion either an
AMP or Burndy™ plug which can connect to the plug connector block in the I/A Series
enclosure.
CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY (accommodates sockets):
Table 7-1. Connector Assembly for AMP Plug
AMP Jackscrews
AMP Housing AMP Hood Male Female
1-201357-1 201846-1 201413-1 201414-1
or 200517-1 201413-1 201414-1
201357-3
Table 7-2. Connector Assembly for Burndy Plug
Burndy Catalog No. Description

MSD34PM-118 Plug with Bar-Type Cable Clamp
MSD34PM-124 Plug with Clam Shell Hood
MSD34PM-824 Plug with Suitcase Hood
SOCKETS:
Table 7-3. Sockets for AMP Plug
AMP Catalog Number For Wire Size Quantity Per Plug

66360-4 14-18 Awg A/R, 34 max
66101-1 16-18 Awg A/R, 34 max
66105-4 20-24 Awg A/R, 34 max
66428-4 26-30 Awg A/R, 34 max
Table 7-4. Sockets for Burndy Plug
Burndy Catalog No. For Wire Sizes Qty. Per Plug

RC16M-23D28 16 to 20 AWGA/R, 34 max
CRIMPING TOOL: Burndy Catalog No. M10S-1

EXTRACTION TOOL: AMP No. 305183 or Burndy Catalog No. RX16D11
236
DIE SET AND STOP BUSHING:
Table 7-5. Die Set and Stop Bushing for Burndy Plug
Burndy Cat. No. Description Used With Sockets

S3D1 Die Set Burndy Cat. No.RC16M-23D28
SL-39 Stop Bushing Burndy Cat. No.RC16M-23D28
S-10 Die Set Burndy Cat. No.RC20M-12D28

SL-40 Stop Bushing Burndy Cat. No.RC20M-12D28
S-9 Die Set Burndy Cat. No. RC24M-9D28

SL-40 Stop Bushing Burndy Cat. No. RC24M-9D28
Table 7-6. AMP Crimper for AMP Plug
AMP Crimper
AMP Catalog Number Used With Sockets
90310-3 1-66358-0
90277-1 66100-9
90277-1 66104-9
90066-7 66422-8
AMP JACKSCREW TOOL: Part Number 91016-2
NOTE
The AMP and Burndy connector assemblies are compatible and mate with each
other. The connector assemblies cannot be constructed with a mix of AMP and
Burndy parts.
237
Sockets (user-supplied) (Wire Side)

Fieldbus
Module with Wire Size Burndy Part No. A B
Termination C D
1 9 Connector 24-26 RC24M - 9D28 E F
Attached 20-22 RC20M - 12D28 H J
2 1 (Typical) 16-20 RC16M - 23D28 K L
3 0 M N
P R
4 1 Foxboro Supplied Plug S T
Connector Block (Male) U V
AMP P\N 213624-1 W X
6 1 Y Z
(Pins Supplied by Foxboro) AA BB
4 Cable CC DD
8 1 (user-supplied) EE FF
HH JJ
KK LL
MM NN
To User’s
Marshalling Area
Female Connector (user-supplied)

Figure 7-15. Plug Connector Field Wiring Scheme, Typical Configuration
To make the field connections to the plug connector block, refer to Figure 7-15 and proceed as
follows:
1. Identify all wires to be connected to the plug connector block with regard to the field
devices from which they originate.
2. Connect the wires from the field devices to a user-supplied termination strip or other
connection facility in a marshalling area external to the enclosure housing the Fieldbus
Modules.
Using Figure 7-15 as a guide, fashion the necessary cable(s) to make connections between the
marshalling area and the Foxboro plug connector block in the enclosure housing the Fieldbus
Modules. Make the connections to the plug connector block as indicated for each specific FBM
type, as shown under “Field Connections” on page 239.
238
8. Field Connections
This chapter provides general information regarding field wiring (specifically, classes of field
wiring and earthing of I/O signal shields) and also includes specific field wiring connection
information for each FBM type.
NOTE
For field connection information relating to the DIN rail FBM subsystem, refer to
DIN Rail Mounted FBM Subsystem User’s Guide (B0400FA) and FOUNDATION
fieldbus H1 Interface Module (FBM220/221) User Guide (B0400FD), Profibus-DP
Communication Interface Module (FBM223) User’s Guide (B0400FE), HART
Communication Interface Module (FBM214/215/216/218) User’s Guide (B0400FF)
and Modbus Communication Interface Module (FBM224) User’s Guide (B0400FK).
Classes of Field Wiring

Field (I/O signal) wiring associated with the I/A Series enclosures is divided into three classes:
♦ High Voltage (HV) – wires carrying voltages above 30 V ac rms (42.4 V peak) or
60 V dc.
♦ Low Voltage (LV) – wires carrying voltages at or below 30 V ac rms (42.4 V peak) or
60 V dc. These are termed “Class 2” circuits in the U.S. and Canada. See Note.
♦ Nonincendive (NI) – wires which enter or leave the equipment enclosure and which
under normal operating conditions of the equipment when shorted, opened or
grounded are not capable, due to arcing or thermal effects, of igniting the specified
flammable gas/vapor-in-air mixture or combustible dust.
NOTE
The power sources in the FBM are voltage and power limited to Class 2 levels as
defined in the National Electrical Code (NFPA-70), Article 725 and the Canadian
Electrical Code, Section 16 (CSA C22.1). Field circuits that are connected to only
the FBM power sources are, by definition, Class 2 circuits. Field circuits that con-
nect to an external, non-FBM power source will only be Class 2 if the external
power source is listed/certified as Class 2. This is important to understand because
the U.S. National and the Canadian electrical codes have specific requirements that
apply to wiring methods used for Class 2 circuits.
For reasons of personnel safety, it is mandatory that these three classes of wiring be kept separate
from each other. The minimum allowable distance between wires or groups of wires of different
classes is 50 mm (2 in) at all points in the wire run. This requires the use of tie-downs to ensure
that the spacing is maintained.
239
B0193AC – Rev U 8. Field Connections
! CAUTION
Accidentally connecting a field input to an I/A Series output channel will seriously
damage the associated Fieldbus Module.
! WARNING
Do not mix any of the three aforementioned classes of wiring (for example, HV and
LV) on the same connection block. Failure to separate the three aforementioned
classes of wiring (as described herein) could result in injury to personnel.
The following subsection describes specific wire grouping and routing methods for each I/A Series
enclosure type.
! WARNING
With isolated inputs such as thermocouples, it is possible that the leads may have
been inadvertently connected to (or otherwise may have made contact with) hazard-
ous voltages. Therefore, hazardous extraneous voltage capable of causing severe
injury or death may exist between thermocouple leads and ground. Disconnecting
the instrument power may not remove this voltage. Measure for the presence of
voltage between each sensor lead and ground before servicing associated equipment.
Field Wire Grouping Within the Enclosures

NOTE
The following notes apply to field wire grouping:
1. The information presented herein describes routing of wires inside the I/A Series
enclosures. For information on wire routing outside the enclosures, refer to Site
Planning (B0193AB).
2. If a user-supplied I/O cable has a bend radius greater than 150 mm (6 in), the
rack may be reconfigured using a Foxboro part number P0901RA bracket.
! CAUTION
All signal wires (regardless of wire class) must be routed separately from enclosure
main power cables, whether inside or outside of the enclosure.
Field wire grouping consists of maintaining, within the I/A Series enclosures, separation of field
wires associated with the aforementioned classes (HV, LV, and NI). The methods of
separation used depend on the type of I/A Series enclosure:
♦ Industrial Enclosure 32 – Each Industrial Enclosure 32 contains two field termination
areas, one on each side (left and right) of the enclosure. The field wires must be
grouped such that only field wires of one class (HV, LV, or NI) are used per field ter-
mination area (that is, wires of two different classes may not be mixed in the same
field termination area).
240
8. Field Connections B0193AC – Rev U
NOTE
Bridged Industrial Enclosure 32s are viewed as separate and distinct enclosures with
regard to wire grouping. This is because the bridge assembly or assemblies provide
the necessary spacing between wire groups.
♦ Industrial Enclosure 16 – The same rules apply as for Industrial Enclosure 32.
♦ Field Enclosure 8, Floor-Mounted - The same rules apply as for Industrial
Enclosure 32.
♦ Field Enclosure 8, Wall-Mounted – Because this version of the enclosure has only one
field termination area, only one class of field wiring (one wire group) is allowed per
enclosure.
♦ Field Enclosure 4 – Field wires must be grouped and routed as shown in Figure 8-1.
Separate cable entry points must be provided in the conduit enclosure plate at the bot-
tom of the enclosure. These entry points must be separated from each other by at least
50 mm, and must be spaced at least 50 mm from the enclosure main power conduit.
♦ 1x8 mounting structures, 1x8 FBM mounting structures, 1x12 FBM mounting struc-
tures, 2x8 mounting structures, and 2x8 FBM mounting structures – you must
provide a minimum 50 mm (2 in) spacing between wires (and termination cable
assemblies) associated with different field wiring classes (HV, LV, and NI). Maintain
this separation through the use of cable ties, insulating barriers or conduit, as appro-
priate for the installation.
♦ IEMFA/IEMFR (ME24/ME32), Metal FE8, and Termination Enclosures – Wire sep-
aration considerations are the same as for the 1x8 mounting structure.
F * F F
B B B
M M I
C * C *
B B
Field Wire Field Wire

Group 1 Group 2
CB - Connector Block
FBM - Fieldbus Module
FBI - Fieldbus Isolator(s) Conduit
(user-supplied)
Figure 8-1. Field Enclosure 4 Field Wire Grouping
241
FBMs with Nonincendive Field Circuits

Some FBMs are equipped with field circuits that are nonincendive when installed in accordance
with specified limitations. This allows ordinary location wiring methods to be used on Division 2
hazardous locations.
Ordinary location wiring methods for nonincendive circuits are acceptable for use in Class I,
Division 2, Groups A-D hazardous locations by both the U.S. National (NFPA-70) and Canadian
(CSA C22.1) Electrical Codes. In the U.S. they are also acceptable for Class II, Division 2, Group
G and Groups E and F, with resistivities greater than 100,000 ohms/centimeter.
Factory Mutual (FM) approval and Canadian Standards Association (CSA) certification of FBMs
are used in defined systems that have been FM approved and CSA certified as evidenced by the
FM or CSA approval/certification markings on the overall system enclosures.
Earthing (Grounding) of I/O Signal Shields

The following rules should be observed with regard to earthing of field I/O signal shields.
1. If the field device is powered by a user power source (at the device end), earth the
shield at the field device end.
2. If the field device is powered at the I/A Series end, connect the shields to an isolated
(user-supplied) bus bar, and then to “quiet” ground.
3. If a marshalling cabinet is used, rules 1 and 2 apply, except that in rule 2, the shields
should be connected to earth within the marshalling cabinet.
Refer to Site Planning (B0193AB) for more detailed information on earthing of I/O signal shields.
FBM01 Field Connections

A functional connection diagram is shown in Figure 8-2.
Application of the in-line resistor assembly (used if an I/A Series Intelligent Transmitter is used
with FBM01) is shown in Figure 8-3.
Plug connection block field connections are shown in Figure 8-4.
TCA labels are shown in Figure 8-5.
For reference purposes, a schematic diagram of the FBM01 input circuitry is shown in Figure 8-6.
242
Module-Powered Transmitter Externally Powered Transmitter
+P +P
+
See Note
Transmitter
+ +
- -
See Note Transmitter
- -
+
External
Power
Supply
NOTE: Input compliance voltage
If an I/A Series Intelligent Transmitter is used 24 volts nominal at 20 mA
with FBM01, FBM04, and FBM05, an in-line resistor 390 W loop resistance (maximum)
assembly must be added (see Figure 8-3).
Input Resistance 50 W
Figure 8-2. FBM01 Functional Connection Diagram
243
From Plus (+)

Cut here, and Terminal on Discrete
strip wire ends Intelligent Wire or Direct
10 mm (0.375 in). Transmitter Connect
(if module Termination
Insulated Powered) Block +P
Insulated Splice (spare)
Splice
Splice Label
In-Line Resistor +
Assembly (P0902VY)
-
200 Ohm
Label Resistor
200 Ohm
Resistor From Minus (-) From Minus (-)
(covered) Terminal on Terminal on External
Intelligent Power Supply (if
Transmitter externally Powered)
If an I/A Series Intelligent Transmitter is used with FBM01, FBM04, FBM05, or FBM37, an in-line
resistor assembly (P0902VY) must be added in series with the transmitter. FBM01, FBM04,
or FBM05 can use any of the following termination assembly types:
FBM01 FBM04 FBM05

(Direct) P0700AB P0700AF
(Bulk) P0700DJ P0700DN
(Discrete) P0400HH P0500RY P0903SA
The above illustration shows the connection scheme using the in-line resistor assembly (P0902VY)
with a discrete wire or direct connect termination block.
NOTE: When the plug (bulk) connector is used, the connection scheme is electrically identical to
that used for the discrete wire or direct connection block (as depicted above). The connection differs
physically in that the in-line resistor assembly is installed in the user’s marshalling cabinet
rather than in the I/A Series enclosure.
To install the in-line resistor assembly, refer to the above drawing and perform the following steps:
1. Refer to the left half of the illustration above and cut the in-line resistor assembly (P0902VY) at
a point directly opposite the 200-ohm covered resistor.
2. Strip 10 mm (0.375 in) of insulation from the wire ends.
3. Refer to the right half of the illustration above and connect the wire end that is nearest the resistor
assembly label to the plus (+) terminal on the termination block.
4. Insert the other wire end into the insulated splice provided, together with the filed wire from the
minus terminal on the Intelligent Transmitter, and crimp the wires together using an electrician’s
pliers or crimping tool.
Figure 8-3. Use of In-Line Resistors Assembly with FBM01, FBM04, or FBM05
244
(Wire Side)
NC A B +1
NC C D -1
+P1 E F +2
NC H J -2
+P2 K L +3
NC M N -3
+P3 P R +4
NC S T -4
+P4 U V +5
NC W X -5
+P5 Y Z +6
NC AA BB -6
+P6 CC DD +7
NC EE FF -7
+P7 HH JJ +8
NC KK LL -8
+P8 MM NN NC
Figure 8-4. FBM01 Plug Connection Block Field Connections
Module with - - - - - - - -
Discrete Wire + + + + + + + +
Block
+P +P +P +P +P +P +P +P
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FBM01 4-20 mA
FBM43 IT
Module with - - - - - - - -
Direct Connection
Block + +P + +P + +P + +P + +P + +P + +P + +P
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FBM01 4-20 mA FBM43 IT
Figure 8-5. FBM01 TCA Labels
245
+24 V
+P Current
+V
Limiter
(30 mA)
36 V
To
50
Amplifier
-V
Figure 8-6. FBM01 0 to 20 mA Input Circuit

Two functional connection diagrams are provided:
♦ Connections for discrete wire or direct connection block – Figure 8-7
♦ Connections for plug connector block – Figure 8-8.
For reference purposes, schematic diagrams of the FBM02 input circuitry are shown in
Figure 8-11 through Figure 8-13.
+
Junction Compensation
+ Internal to Connector
Thermocouple/ Block (Foxboro supplied)
mV Source
- -

(Connections for Discrete Wire or Direct Connection Block)
246
User-Supplied User-Supplied
Termination FBM Bulk Termination FBM Bulk
Block and RTD Connector Block and RTD Connector
C C
CR9 CR9
** +SR9
+ + +R9
+R9
RTD* ** -SR9
- -
-R9 -R9
+ + +SR9
Thermocouple -S -SR9
-
- + +
3-Wire
Thermocouple
* 100 W Platinum RTD (DIN 43760, Class B). - -
** Connection made by user. 2-Wire or 4-Wire
Figure 8-8. FBM02 Functional Connection Diagram (Connections for Plug Connector Block)
(Wire Side)
+1 A B NC
-1 C D CE9
+2 E F NC
-2 H J +SR9
+3 K L NC
-3 M N +R9
+4 P R NC
-4 S T -R9
+5 U V NC
-5 W X -SR9
+6 Y Z NC
-6 AA BB NC
+7 CC DD NC
-7 EE FF NC
+8 HH JJ NC
-8 KK LL NC
NC MM NN NC
247
Module with - - - - - - - -
Block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FBM02
TC mV
Module with - - - - - - - -
Direct Connection
Block + + + + + + + +
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FBM02 TC mV
5 V Ref.
22.1 K
+V
10 M 1.2 K
1K
+
9K
1 UF To
Amplifier
-V
-
Figure 8-11. FBM02 Thermocouple/mV Input Circuit
248
+V
CR
*
+R
1K 9K To
RTD 1 UF Amplifier
(0 to 80 mV)
-R
1K 9K
*
-V
0.25 mA From
-SR Current
10.1 K 0.47 UF
Source
Common
* For 2-wire RTDs, the 2 pairs (CR and +R, and -R and -SR)
connections are made at the TCA connector.
Figure 8-12. FBM02 2- or 4-Wire RTD Input/Out Circuit
+V
0.5 mA
CR
0.25 MA
+R To Amplifier
1K 9K
-R (0 to 80 mV)
RTD
1K 9K
*
0.25 mA * 10 K -V 0.25 mA
-SR
From Current Source
0.47 UF Common
*Connection must be
0.47 UF made externally for
+SR FBM02 bulk connector.
10 K 0.25 mA
Figure 8-13. FBM02 3-Wire RTD Input/Output Circuit

Plug connection block field connections are shown in Figure 8-15 and Figure 8-16.
TCA labels are shown in Figure 8-17 and Figure 8-18.
Figure 8-19 and Figure 8-20.
249
3-Wire RTD 2-Wire RTD 4-Wire RTD

Connection Connection Connection
C C C
+ + * +
RTD - RTD - RTD -
-S * -S
* Connection made
by user. FBM03A FBM03B FBM03B
Figure 8-14. FBM03A, FBM03B Functional Connection Diagram
(Wire Side)
NC A B C1
NC +1
C D
-1 E F C2
NC H +2
J
-2 K L C3
NC +3
M N
-3 P R C4
NC S +4
T
-4 U V C5
NC W X +5
-5 Y Z C6
NC AA BB +6
-6 CC DD C7
NC EE FF +7
-7 HH JJ C8
NC KK LL +8
-8 MM NN NC
Figure 8-15. FBM03A 3-Wire RTD, Plug Connection Block Field Connections
250
(Wire Side)
NC A B C1
NC C D +1
-1 E F C2
-S1 H J +2
-2 K L C3
-S2 M N +3
-3 P R C4
-S3 S T +4
-4 U V C5
-S4 W X +5
-5 Y Z C6
-S5 AA BB +6
-6 CC DD C7
-S6 EE FF +7
-7 HH JJ C8
-S7 KK LL +8
-8 MM NN -S8
Figure 8-16. FBM03B 2- or 4-Wire RTD, Plug Connection Block Field Connections
Module with - - - - - - - -
Direct Connection
Block + + + + + + + +
C C C C C C C C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FBM03/FBM33
RTD
3 Wire
+ + + + + + + +
Module with
Discrete Wire C - C - C - C - C - C - C - C -
Block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FBM03/FBM33 RTD 3 Wire
Figure 8-17. FBM03, 3-Wire RTD, TCA Labels
251
Module with - -S - -S - -S - -S - -S - -S - -S - -S
Direct Connection + + + + + + + +
Block C C C C C C C C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FBM03/FBM33 FBM03/FBM33
RTD RTD
2, 4 Wire 2, 4 Wire
Module with + -S + -S + -S + -S + -S + -S + -S + -S
Discrete Wire
Block C - C - C - C - C - C - C - C -
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FBM03/FBM33 RTD
2, 4 Wire
Figure 8-18. FBM03, 2- or 4-Wire RTD, TCA Labels
+V
0.5 MA
C
0.25 mA
+ To Amplifier
1K 9K
- (0 to 80 MV)
RTD
1K 9K
*
0.25 mA * 10 K -V 0.25 mA
-S
From Current Source
0.47 UF Common
0.47 UF *Connection made

internally for FBM03.
+S
10 K 0.25 mA
Figure 8-19. FBM03, 3-Wire RTD Input/Output Circuit
252
+V
C
*
+
1K 9K To
RTD 1 UF Amplifier
(0 to 80 mV)
-
1K 9K
* * For 2-wire RTDs, the two
-V From
0.25 mA pairs C and +, and -5 and -
-S Current
connections are made at
10.1 K 0.47 UF Source
the TCA connector.
Common
Figure 8-20. FBM03, 2- or 4-Wire RTD Input/Out Circuit

NOTE
The following notes apply to the FBM04 field connections:
1. Refer to “Redundant FBM Operational Considerations” on page 333 for special
considerations required when installing and maintaining redundant FBMs.
2. To replace a non-redundant FBM04, refer to “FBM Replacement using the Out-
put Bypass Station” on page 336; to replace a redundant FBM04, refer to “Redun-
dant FBM Removal and Replacement” on page 336.
Functional connection diagrams are shown in Figure 8-21 through Figure 8-23.
For reference purposes, schematic diagrams of the FBM04 input and output circuitry are shown
in Figure 8-27 and Figure 8-28.
Also, refer to Figure 8-3 for a description on using in-line resistors assembly with the FBM04.
253
Module Powered Transmitter Externally Powered Transmitter

+P +P
+
See Note
Transmitter + +
- -
Transmitter
- -
See Note +
External
Power
Supply
NOTE: Input compliance voltage
If an I/A Series Intelligent Transmitter is used with 24 volts nominal at 20 mA
FBM01, FBM04, and FBM05, an in-line resistor 390 Ω loop resistance (maximum)
assembly must be added (see Figure 8-3).
Input Resistance 50 Ω
Figure 8-21. FBM04 and FBM05 Input Connections
+
+
Actuator
-
-
Figure 8-22. FBM04 Output Connections
254
Cable to FBM04A
+ PS 1 + PA Transmitter
2 + IA
+ IN
- IN (-PS) 3 - IA
7 +O
+ OUT
- OUT I/P
8
-O
Cable to FBM04B
4 + PB Transmitter
+ PS
5
+ IN + IB
- IN (-PS) 6 - IB
+ OUT
- OUT Termination Cable

Assembly P0903SB
Termination Block
Figure 8-23. FBM04 Connections for Redundant Transmitters and Single I/P Using Combined
Output Channel
(Wire Side)
NC A B +I1
NC C D -I1
+P1 E F +I2
NC H J -I2
+P2 K L +I3
NC N -I3
M
+P3 P R +I4
NC S T -I4
+P4 U V +O1
NC W X -O1
NC Y Z +O2
NC AA BB -O2
NC CC DD +O3
NC EE FF -O3
NC HH JJ +O4
NC KK LL -O4
NC MM NN NC
255
Module with
- - - - - - - -
Discrete Wire
Block + + + + + + + +
+P P P P
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FBM04/FBM44
AI AO / IT AO
Module with - - - - - - - -
Direct Connection
Block + +P + +P + +P + +P + +P + +P + +P + +P
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FBM04/FBM44 AI AO / IT AO
Figure 8-25. FBM04, Non-Redundant, TCA Labels
Module with +P + – +P + – + – +P + – +P + – + –
Discrete Wire
+P + – +P + – + – +P + – +P + – + –
Block
I2A I2B 02 I4A I4B 04
I1A I1B 01 I3A I3B 03
FBM04 FBM04
RED I/O RED I/O
Figure 8-26. FBM04, Redundant AO, TCA Labels
256
+24 V
Current
+P Limiter +V
(30 mA)
36 V
+
50
To
Amplifier
-V
Figure 8-27. 0 to 20 mA Input Circuit (FBM04)
+V
Common
+
36 V From
Current
Driver
-
196
-V
Common
Figure 8-28. 0 to 20 mA Output Circuit (FBM04)

NOTE
Refer to “Redundant FBM Operational Considerations” on page 333 for special

For reference purposes, schematic diagrams of the FBM05 input and output circuitry are shown
in Figure 8-32 and Figure 8-33.
257
2 PB
Cable to FBM05A 1 PA
3 +P Transmitter (See Note)
+ PS
4 +I
+ IN
50 W
5 -I
- IN (-PS)
+O
+ OUT
7
I/P
- OUT 8
-O
Cable to FBM05B
+ PS
+ IN
- IN (-PS)
+ OUT
Termination Cable
- OUT Assembly P0903SA
Termination Block
NOTE:
If the transmitter is an I/A Series Intelligent Transmitter, an in-line resistor assembly must be added.
See Figures 8-3 and 8-21 for details.
Figure 8-29. FBM05 Connections for Single Transmitter and Single I/P
(Wire Side)
+P1A A B +I1
+P1B C D -I1
+P1 E F +I2
NC H J -I2
+P2 K L +I3
NC N -I3
M
+P3 P R +I4
NC S T -I4
+P4 U V +O1
NC W X -O1
+P2A Y Z +O2
+P2B AA BB -O2
+P3A CC DD +O3
+P3B EE FF -O3
+P4A HH JJ +O4
+P4B KK LL -O4
NC MM NN NC
258
PA PB +P + – + – PA PB +P + – + –
Module with PA PB +P + – + – PA PB +P + – + –
Discrete Wire P2 I2 02 P4 I4 04
Block
P1 I1 01 P3 I3 03
FBM05 FBM05
RED I/O RED I/O
+24 V
+P Current
+V
Limiter
(30 mA)
36 V
+
50
To
Amplifier
-V
Figure 8-32. 0 to 20 mA Input Circuit (FBM05)
+V
Common
+
From
36 V Current
Driver
-
196
-V
Common
259

NOTE
1. Refer to “Redundant FBM Operational Considerations” on page 333 for
special considerations required when installing and maintaining redundant FBMs.

♦ Connections for externally powered and internally powered transmitters input
channels, and output channels to I/P – Figure 8-34
♦ Connections for redundant transmitters and single I/P using combined output
channel – Figure 8-35.
For reference purposes, a schematic diagram of the FBM06 pulse input circuitry is shown in
Figure 8-39.
FBM06 +P
+
24 V dc + Externally Powered
-
Meter such as
Vortex Meter
- Magnetic Flowmeter
Turbine Meter
Pulse Filter (Input Channel, 1 of 4)
and Amplifier
+ OUT
+O
Output Channel
+ I/P
to I/P (1 of 4)
24 V dc - OUT
- -O
+P
+
24 V dc + Externally Powered Meter
- such as
Vortex Meter or
- Magnetic Flowmeter
Turbine Meter
Pulse Filter (Input Channel, 1 of 4)
and Amplifier
Figure 8-34. FBM06 Externally Powered and Internally Powered Transmitters to

Input Channels, and Output Channels to I/P
260
Cable to FBM06A
1 + PA Transmitter
+ PS
2 + IA Externally Powered
+ IN
3 - IA Meter (such as
- IN (-PS) Vortex Meter,
7 +O
+ OUT Magnetic Flowmeter,
- OUT I/P or Turbine Meter)
8
-O
Cable to FBM06B
4 + PB Transmitter
+ PS
5 + IB Externally Powered
+ IN
6 - IB Meter (such as
- IN (-PS) Vortex Meter,
+ OUT Magnetic Flowmeter,
or Turbine Meter)
- OUT
Termination Block
Termination Cable Assembly P0903TW
Figure 8-35. FBM06 Connections for Redundant Transmitters and Single I/P Using Combined
Output Channel
(Wire Side)
NC A B +I1
NC D -I1
C
+P1 E F +I2
NC H J -I2
+P2 K L +I3
NC N -I3
M
+P3 P R +I4
NC S T -I4
+P4 U V +O1
NC W X -O1
NC Y Z +O2
NC AA BB -O2
NC CC DD +O3
NC EE FF -O3
NC HH JJ +O4
NC KK LL -O4
NC MM NN NC
261
Module with - - - - - - - -
Discrete Wire
Block + + + + + + + +
P P P P
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FBM06
PI AO
Module with - - - - - - - -
Direct Connection
Block + P + P + P + P + + + +
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FBM06 PI AO
Figure 8-37. FBM06 (Non-Redundant) TCA Labels
+P + – +P + – + – +P + – +P + – + –
Module with +P + – +P + – + – +P + – +P + – + –
Discrete Wire I2A I2B 02 I4A I4B 04
Block
I1A I1B 01 I3A I3B 03
FBM06 FBM06
RED I/O RED I/O
Figure 8-38. FBM06 (Redundant) TCA Labels
+P From
Voltage Regulator
5K To
+ Amplifier
and Filter
5K
15 V
- Common
Figure 8-39. FBM06 Pulse Input Circuit
262
FBM07/FBM12 Field Connections

NOTE
When you make contact input connections to FBM07 or FBM12, specific rules
must be observed regarding the isolated/nonisolated electrical characteristics of the
contacts. Refer to Figure 8-41 for details.
! WARNING
Regarding FBM07s and FBM12s: Inputs to these FBMs are isolated in pairs (for
example, channels 1 and 2 are isolated from channels 3 and 4). When inputs having
hazardous voltages (greater than 30 V ac rms or 60 V dc) are used, hazardous and
nonhazardous voltages must not be mixed within a channel pair.
Plug connection block field connections are shown in Figure 8-42 (for voltage monitoring) and
Figure 8-43 (for contact sensing).
TCA labels are shown in Figure 8-44 (FBM07A/12A) and Figure 8-45 (FBM07B/12B).
For reference purposes, a schematic diagram of the FBM07/12 input circuitry is shown in
Figure 8-46.
Contact Sensor * Voltage Monitor

+
CS **
V dc
+
C
Contact Voltage Source
* See NOTE in text for information regarding contact isolation rules.

** CS is positive with respect to +.
Figure 8-40. FBM07/12 Functional Connection Diagram
263
CS1
+1
CS2
24 V
+2
RTN 1
CSN
+N1
CS(N+1)
24 V
+(N+1)
RTN N
As shown above, the contact input channels for FBMs 7B/9C/9D/12B/14C/14D/17C

and 17D are isolated in pairs. The following rules apply:
1. Isolated (ungrounded) and nonisolated (grounded) contacts may be mixed in a

channel pair (for example, CH 1 and CH 2). Note, however, that both contact pairs
are grounded (in common) when this connection is implemented.
2. If a nonisolated (grounded) contact is used as an input to a particular channel

(for example, CH 1), the alternate channel in the pair (CH 2) may also be used with a
nonisolated contact, provided that the ground leads of both contact inputs connect
to the “CS” input terminals.
3. If a Status Tap input is used for a particular channel, the adjacent channel in the
pair must be left unused, or used with an isolated (ungrounded) contact.
Figure 8-41. Contact Input Circuit Rules, FBMs 7B/9C/9D/12B/14C/14D/17C/17D
(Wire Side)
+1 A B +2
C1 C D C2
+3 E F +4
C3 H J C4
+5 K L +6
C5 N C6
M
+7 P R +8
C7 S T C8
+9 U V +10
C9 W X C10
+11 Y Z +12
C11 AA BB C12
+13 CC DD +14
C13 EE FF C14
+15 HH JJ +16
C15 KK LL C16
NC MM NN NC
Figure 8-42. FBM07A/12A (Voltage Monitoring) Plug Connection Block Field Connections
264
(Wire Side)
CS1 A B CS2
+1 +2
C D
CS3 E F CS4
+3 H +4
J
CS5 K L CS6
+5 +6
M N
CS7 P R CS8
+7 S +8
T
CS9 U V CS10
+9 W X +10
CS11 Y Z CS12
+11 AA BB +12
CS13 CC DD CS14
+13 EE FF +14
CS15 HH JJ CS16
+15 KK LL +16
NC MM NN NC
Figure 8-43. FBM07B/12B (Contact Sensing) Plug Connection Block Field Connections
FBM07A/12A C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C
with Discrete
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Wire Block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FBM07A/12A FBM 07A/12A
dc DI dc DI
FBM07A/12A C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C
with Direct
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Connection Block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FBM07A/12A dc DI
Figure 8-44. FBM07A/12A TCA Labels
265
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
FBM07B/12B
with Discrete CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS
Wire Block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FBM07B/12B FBM07B/12B
dc DI dc DI
FBM07B/12B + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
with Direct CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS
Connection Block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FBM07B/12B dc DI
Figure 8-45. FBM07B/12B TCA Labels
+24 V
CS
2.4 K
+ To
Current Sink
400 K
To
Comparator
62 K
Common
C
Common
Figure 8-46. FBM07/12 dc Voltage or Contact Sense Input Circuit

Figure 8-50.
266
Line S1
ac
Voltage
Source
C
Neutral
(Wire Side)
S1 A B S2
C1 C D C2
S3 E F S4
C3 H J C4
S5 K L S6
C5 M N C6
S7 P R S8
C7 S T C8
S9 U V S10
C9 W X C10
S11 Y Z S12
C11 AA BB C12
S13 CC DD S14
C13 EE FF C14
S15 HH JJ S16
C15 KK LL C16
NC MM NN NC
Figure 8-48. FBM08/13 Plug Connection Block Field Connections
267
Either Module C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C
with Discrete
Wire Block S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FBM08/13 FBM08/13
120 V ac DI 120 V ac DI
with Direct
Connection Block S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FBM08/13 120 V ac DI
Figure 8-49. FBM08/13 TCA Labels
R1
S1
Input R1 R2
To Current Sink and Voltage Value Value
Comparator 120 V 6.6 K 3.3 K
240 V 10.2 K 5.1 K
R2
C
Figure 8-50. FBM08/13, 120/240 V ac Digital Input Circuit

Functional connection diagrams are shown in Figure 8-51 and Figure 8-52.
NOTE
When making contact input connections to FBM09 or FBM14, specific rules must
be observed regarding the isolated/nonisolated electrical characteristics of the con-
tacts. Refer to Figure 8-41 for details.
! WARNING
Regarding FBM09 and FBM14, inputs to these FBMs are isolated in pairs (for
example, channels 1 and 2 are isolated from channels 3 and 4). When inputs having
hazardous voltages (greater than 30 V ac rms or 60 V dc) are used, hazardous and
nonhazardous voltages must not be mixed within a channel pair.
268
Refer to Figure 8-41 on page 264 for contact isolation rules.

Plug connection block field connections are shown in Figure 8-53 through Figure 8-56.
For reference purposes, schematic diagrams of the FBM09/14 input/output circuitry are shown in
Voltage Monitor Output Switch (with external source)

+ C
-
+
FBM09A/14A V dc C V dc
K
+
- Load
Voltage Voltage
Source Source
See Note
Voltage Monitor Output Switch (with internal source)

+ S
+ -
FBM09B/14B V dc Load
C K
- +
Voltage
Source
NOTE:
Protective diode required for inductive load only. The diode used must be capable of conducting the
maximum expected load current, and have a voltage rating greater than 1.3 times the supply voltage.
Figure 8-51. FBMs 09A/09B/14A/14B Functional Connection Diagrams
269
Contact Sensor * Output Switch (with external source)

CS** C
-
FBM09C/14C V dc
+ K
+ Load
Contact or
Voltage
Solid State
Source
Switch
See Note
Contact Sensor * Output Switch (with internal source)

CS** S
-
FBM09D/14D Load
+ K
Contact or +
Solid State
Switch
*See NOTE in text for information regarding contact isolation rules.
**CS is positive with respect to +.
NOTE:
Protective diode required for inductive load only. The diode used must be capable of conducting the
maximum expected load current, and have a voltage rating greater than 1.3 times the supply voltage.
Figure 8-52. FBMs 09C/09D/14C/14D, Functional Connection Diagrams
(Wire Side)
I+1 A B I+2
IC1 C D IC2
I+3 E F I+4
IC3 H J IC4
I+5 K L I+6
IC5 M N IC6
I+7 P R I+8
IC7 S T IC8
OK1 U V OK2
OC1 W X OC2
OK3 Y Z OK4
OC3 AA BB OC4
OK5 CC DD OK6
OC5 EE FF OC6
OK7 HH JJ OK8
OC7 KK LL OC8
NC MM NN NC
Figure 8-53. FBM09A/14A (Voltage Monitoring/0.5 A) Plug Connection Block

Field Connections
270
(Wire Side)
I+1 A B I+2
IC1 C D IC2
I+3 E F I+4
IC3 H J IC4
I+5 K L I+6
IC5 M N IC6
I+7 P R I+8
IC7 S T IC8
OS1 U V OS2
OK1 W X OK2
OS3 Y Z OS4
OK3 AA BB OK4
OS5 CC DD OS6
OK5 EE FF OK6
OS7 HH JJ OS8
OK7 KK LL OK8
NC MM NN NC
Figure 8-54. FBM09B/14B (Voltage Monitoring/10 mA) Plug Connection Block

Field Connections
(Wire Side)
CS1 A B CS2
I+1 C D I+2
CS3 E F CS4
I+3 H J I+4
CS5 K L CS6
I+5 M N I+6
CS7 P R CS8
I+7 S T I+8
OK1 U V OK2
OC1 W X OC2
OK3 Y Z OK4
OC3 AA BB OC4
OK5 CC DD OK6
OC5 EE FF OC6
OK7 HH JJ OK8
OC7 KK LL OC8
NC MM NN NC
Figure 8-55. FBM09C/14C (Contact Sensing/0.5 A) Plug Connection Block Field Connections
271
(Wire Side)
CS1 A B CS2
I+1 C D I+2
CS3 E F CS4
I+3 H J I+4
CS5 K L CS6
I+5 M N I+6
CS7 P R CS8
I+7 S T I+8
OS1 U V OS2
OK1 W X OK2
OS3 Y Z OS4
OK3 AA BB OK4
OS5 CC DD OS6
OK5 EE FF OK6
OS7 HH JJ OS8
OK7 KK LL OK8
NC MM NN NC
Figure 8-56. FBM09D/14D (Contact Sensing/10 mA) Plug Connection Block

Field Connections
C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C
+ + + + + + + + K K K K K K K K
FBM09A/14A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FBM09/14 FBM09/14
dc DI dc DIO
C C C C C C C C K K K K K K K K
+ + + + + + + + S S S S S S S S
FBM09B/14B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FBM09/14 FBM09/14
dc DI dc DIO
Figure 8-57. FBM09A/09B/14A/14B TCA Labels
272
+ + + + + + + + C C C C C C C C
CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS K K K K K K K K
FBM09C/14C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FBMs 09/14 FBMs 09/14
dc DI dc DIO
+ + + + + + + + K K K K K K K K
CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS S S S S S S S S
FBM09D/14D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FBMs 09/14 FBMs 09/14
dc DI dc DIO
Figure 8-58. FBM09C/09D/14C/14D TCA Labels
+24 V
CS
2.4 K
+ To
Current Sink
400 K
To
Comparator
62 K
Common
C
Common
273
S +12 V
680
K Channel 1
From Gate Drive
0.11 To Current Sense

Logic
C
C
To Current Sense
0.11 Logic
From Gate Drive

K 680 Channel 2
S
Figure 8-60. FBM09/14 dc Digital Output Switching Circuit

Input Field Connections Output Field Connections
Optional
See Note 2
Line S1 Line L1
Load
ac ac
See Note 1
Voltage Voltage
Source Source
C C
Load
Neutral Neutral
NOTE 1: External fusing is required if a short circuit current greater than 50A peak is possible.
Fuse rating should be appropriate for inrush current characteristics specified in the FBM PSS.
NOTE 2: The preferred location of the load is in the neutral leg. Optionally the load can be
placed on the line side. Check the local code to determine which is acceptable.
274
(Wire Side)
S1 A B S2
IC1 C D IC2
S3 E F S4
IC3 H J IC4
S5 K L S6
IC5 M N IC6
S7 P R S8
IC7 S T IC8
L1 U V L2
OC1 W X OC2
L3 Y Z L4
OC3 AA BB OC4
L5 CC DD L6
OC5 EE FF OC6
L7 HH JJ L8
OC7 KK OC8
LL
NC MM NN NC
Either Module
with Discrete S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1
Wire Block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FBM10/15 FBM10/15
120 V ac DIO 120 V ac DIO
Either Module
S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 S1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1
with Direct
Connection Block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FBM10/15 120 V DIO
275
R1
S1
Input R1 R2
240 V 10.2 K 5.1 K
R2
C
L1
MOSFET 150 K*
Circuit From Gate
Drive Circuit
To Current
0.06 Sensing &
Overload +15
Circuit
MOSFET To Voltage
Circuit Zero Crossing
150 K*
Circuit
C
* 150 K for 120 V
300 K for 240 V
Figure 8-65. FBM10/15, 120/240 V ac Digital Output Circuit

276
Input Field Connections Output Field Connections
Optional
See Note 2
Line S2 Line L2
Load
ac ac See Note 1
Voltage Voltage
Source Source
C C
Load
Neutral Neutral
NOTES:
1. External fusing is required if a short circuit current greater than
25 A peak is possible. Fuse rating should be appropriate for in-rush
current characteristics specified in the FBM Product Specification Sheet.
2. The preferred location of the load is in the neutral leg. Optionally,
the load can be placed on the line side. Check the local code to determine
which is acceptable.
(Wire Side)
S1 A B S2
IC1 C D IC2
S3 E F S4
IC3 H J IC4
S5 K L S6
IC5 M N IC6
S7 P R S8
IC7 S T IC8
L1 U V L2
OC1 W X OC2
L3 Y Z L4
OC3 AA BB OC4
L5 CC DD L6
OC5 EE FF OC6
L7 HH JJ L8
OC7 KK LL OC8
NC MM NN NC
277
Either Module
S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 L2 L2 L2 L2 L2 L2 L2 L2
with Discrete
Wire Block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FBM11/16 FBM11/16
240 V ac DIO 240 V ac DIO
with Direct S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 L2 L2 L2 L2 L2 L2 L2 L2
Connection Block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FBM11/16 240 V DIO
R1
S1
Input R1 R2
240 V 10.2 K 5.1 K
R2
C
L1
MOSFET 150 K*
Circuit From Gate
Drive Circuit
To Current
0.06 Sensing &
Overload +15
Circuit
MOSFET
Circuit To Voltage
150 K* Zero Crossing
C Circuit
* 150 K for 120 V
300 K for 240 V
Figure 8-70. FBM11/16, 120/240 V ac Digital Output Circuit
278
FBM17A-D Field Connections

! CAUTION
As indicated in Figure 8-72 through Figure 8-77, FBM17A and FBM17B have two
types of connections – agency certified and non-agency certified. When making
connections to the FBM17A or FBM17B connector block, be sure to check the part
number printed on the TCA cable. Failure to do so (that is, making the wrong con-
nections to the block) could cause damage to the FBM.
TCA labels are shown in Figure 8-78 through Figure 8-81.

For reference purposes, schematic diagrams of the FBM17 input/output circuitry are shown in
NOTE
1. When making contact input connections to FBM17, specific rules must be
observed regarding the isolated/nonisolated electrical characteristics of the contacts.
Refer to Figure 8-41 for details.
2. When using digital outputs with inductive loads from FBM17, protective diodes
must be used across the loads (see Figure 8-71).
! WARNING
Regarding FBM17: Inputs to this FBM are isolated in pairs (for example, channels
1 and 2 are isolated from channels 3 and 4). When inputs having hazardous voltages
(greater than 30 V ac rms or 60 V dc) are used, hazardous and nonhazardous volt-
ages must not be mixed within a channel pair.
279
Voltage Monitor Output Switch

(With External Source)
Voltage Voltage
Source + Source C
+ -
Vdc C Vdc K
- + Load
FBM17A, B FBM17A, C
See Note
Voltage Measuring *** Position Sensing ***

P P Output Driver
Voltage +
+ +
Source +
+ Slidewire Load -
Vdc - -
-
FBM17A-D
FBM17A-D FBM17A-D
Output Switch
(With Internal
Source) Contact Sensor *
S Contact CS**
+
Load K +
FBM17B, C FBM17C, D
*See NOTE in text for information regarding contact isolation rules.

***If the 0 to 10 V input field writing is disconnected, the FBM input does not drop immediately to 0 V.
Instead, there is a slow decay to 0 V.
For voltage measuring inputs, a bleeder resistor can be placed across the “+” and “-” terminals to
quicken the response. Discharge time can be estimated by the formula: t = 9x10-6 R.
For slide wire inputs, placement of a bleeder resistor introduces an error in the input. This error is
zero at zero input, and at full scale, the error is at a maximum at mid scale. Calculate the error with
the formula:
100Rs
% error ( max ) = -------------------------
4Rb + Rs
where Rb = bleeder resistance, and Rs = total resistance of the slide wire. For example, with an
Rs = 100 k ohm and Rb = 1 M ohm, the midscale error is at 2.44%. The resulting error can be
compensated by extending the AIN block that reads the input with a CHAR block. The CHAR
block can be configured to virtually eliminate the error.
NOTE:
Diode required for inductive load only. The diode used must be capable of conducting the maximum
expected load current, and have a voltage rating greater than 1.3 times the supply voltage.
Figure 8-71. FBM17A-D Functional Connection Diagram
280
(Wire Side)
AO+1 A B AI+1
AO-1 D AI-1
C
A+P1 E F AI+2
AO+2 H J AI-2
NOTE:
A+P2 K L AI+3
AO-2 AI-3 This plug connector
M N block is not agency
A+P3 P R AI+4
A+P4 S T AI-4 certified. See part
I+1 U V I+2 number DM700KS plug
IC1 W X IC2 connector (Figure 8-72)
I+3 Y Z I+4 for agency certified
IC3 AA BB IC4 version.
OK1 CC DD OK2
OC1 EE FF OC2
OK3 HH JJ OK4
OC3 KK LL OC4
NC MM NN NC
Figure 8-72. FBM17A (P0700DZ, Voltage Monitoring/0.5 A)

Plug Connection Block Field Connections
(Wire Side)
AO+1 A B AI+1
AO-1 C D AI-1
AO+1 E F AI+2
AO+2 H J AI-2
A+P2 K L AI+3
AO-2 M N AI-3 NOTE:
A+P3 P R AI+4 This plug connector
A+P4 S T AI-4
V block is the agency
OK1 U OK2
OC1 X OC2 certified version (as
W
OK3 Y Z OK4 opposed to P0700DZ,
OC3 AA BB OC4 which is not agency
NC CC DD NC certified).
NC EE FF NC
I+1 HH JJ I+2
IC1,2 KK LL IC3,4
I+3 MM NN I+4
Figure 8-73. FBM17A (DM700DZ, Voltage Monitoring/0.5 A)

281
(Wire Side)
AO+1 A B AI+1
AO-1 C D AI-1
A+P1 E F AI+2
AO+2 H J AI-2
A+P2 K L AI+3 NOTE:
AO-2 M N AI-3 This plug connector
A+P3 P R AI+4 block is not agency
A+P4 S T AI-4
certified. See part
I+1 U V I+2
IC1 IC2 number DM700KS plug
W X connector (Figure 8-74)
I+3 Y Z I+4
IC3 AA BB IC4 for agency certified
OS1 CC DD OS2 version.
OK1 EE FF OK2
OS3 HH JJ OS4
OK3 KK LL OK4
NC MM NN NC
Figure 8-74. FBM17B (P0700KS, Voltage Monitoring/10 mA)

(Wire Side)
AO+1 A B AI+1
AO-1 C D AI-1
A+P1 E F AI+2
AO+2 H J AI-2
A+P2 K L AI+3
AO-2 AI-3 NOTE:
M N
A+P3 P R AI+4 This plug connector
A+P4 S T AI-4 block is the agency
OS1 U V OS2 certified version (as
OK1 W X OK2 opposed to P0700KS,
OS3 Y Z OS4 which is not agency
OK3 AA BB OK4
NC CC DD NC certified).
NC EE FF NC
I+1 HH JJ I+2
IC1,2 KK LL IC3, 4
I+3 MM NN I+4
Figure 8-75. FBM17B (DM700KS, Voltage Monitoring/10 mA)

282
(Wire Side)
AO+1 A B AI+1
AO-1 C D AI-1
A+P1 E F AI+2
AO+2 H J AI-2
A+P2 K L AI+3
AO-2 M N AI-3
A+P3 P R AI+4
A+P4 S T AI-4
ICS1 U V ICS2
I+1 W X I+2
ICS3 Y Z ICS4
I+3 AA BB I+4
OK1 CC DD OK2
OC1 EE FF OC2
OK3 HH JJ OK4
OC3 KK LL OC4
NC MM NN NC
Figure 8-76. FBM17C (Contact Sensing/0.5 A) Plug Connection Block Field Connections
(Wire Side)
AO+1 A B AI+1
AO-1 C D AI-1
A+P1 E F AI+2
AO+2 H J AI-2
A+P2 K L AI+3
AO-2 M N AI-2
A+P3 P R AI+4
A+P4 S T AI-4
ISC1 U V ICS2
I+1 W X I+2
ICS3 Y Z ISC4
I+3 AA BB I+4
OS1 CC DD OS2
OK1 EE FF OK2
OS3 HH JJ OS4
OK3 KK LL OK4
NC MM NN NC
Figure 8-77. FBM17D (Contact Sensing/10 mA) Plug Connection Block Field Connections
283
- P2 - - P4 - - - C C C C C C C C C K C K C K C K
+ P1 + + P3 + + + + + + + K K K K
C + C + C + C +
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 7 8 9 10
FBM17 FBM36 FBM17A
10 V DIO TC mV 10 V DIO
This label is used in FBM17A FBM17A

combination with the (P0500SG*) (DM500SG*)
other FBM17 labels
shown (FBMs 17A/B/C/D).
FBM17B C C C C K K K K FBM17B K S K S K S K S
(P0700KP*) (DM700KP*)
+ + + + S S S S
11 12 13 14
C + C + C + C +
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 7 8 9 10
FBM17B FBM17B
10 V DIO 10 V DIO
FBM17C + + + + FBM17D + + + + K K K K
C C C C
CS CS CS CS K K K K CS CS CS CS S S S S
* Part number
appears on
TCA cable. 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
FBM17C FBM17D
10 V DIO 10 V DIO
Figure 8-78. FBM17 Discrete Wire TCA Labels
284
- P2 - - P4 - - - C C C C C C C C
FBM17A
(P0700BC*) + P1 + + P3 + + + + + + + K K K K
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
FBM17A 10 V DIO
FBM17A
(DM700BC*) + C + + C + C K C K C K C K
7 8 9 14
- + P - + P - + P - + P - + - +
* Part number
appears on 1 2 6
TCA cable.
FBM17A 10 V DIO
Figure 8-79. FBM17A Direct Connection TCA Labels
- P2 - - P4 - - - C C C C K K K K
FBM17B
(P0700KL*) + P1 + + P3 + + + + + + + S S S S
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
FBM17B 10 V DIO
FBM17B + C + + C + K S K S K S K S
(DM700KL*)
7 8 9 14
* Part number - + P - + P - + P - + P - + - +
appears on
TCA cable.
1 2 6
FBM17B 10 V DIO
Figure 8-80. FBM17B Direct Connection TCA Labels
285
- P2 - - P4 - - - C C C C C C C C
FBM 17C
+ P1 + + P3 + + + CS CS CS CS K K K K
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
FBM17C 10 V DIO
- P2 - - P4 - - - + + + + K K K K
FBM17D
+ P1 + + P3 + + + CS CS CS CS S S S S
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
FBM17D 10 V DIO
Figure 8-81. FBM17C/D Direct Connection TCA Labels
+24 V
CS
2.4 K
To
+
Current Sink
400 K
To
Comparator
62 K
Common
C
Common
Figure 8-82. FBM17 dc Voltage or Contact Sense Input Circuit
286
S +12 V
680
K Channel 1
From Gate Drive
0.11 To Current Sense

Logic
C
C
To Current Sense
0.11 Logic
From Gate Drive

K Channel 2
680
S
Figure 8-83. FBM17 dc Digital Output Switching Circuit
1.65 K
- From
Op Frequency/
+ Amp Voltage
61.9 +
Converter
12 V
-
Common
Figure 8-84. FBM17 0 to 10 V dc Analog Output Circuit
+V
1K 9K
+ To Filter &
Amplifier
- +V
50 K
Common -V + +5 V
62
P Op
+10 V Amp
-
12 V 100 K -V
100 K
Common
Figure 8-85. FBM17 0 to 10 V dc Analog Input Circuit
287

For reference purposes, a schematic diagram of the FBM18 input circuitry is shown in
Figure 8-89.
+
+
Intelligent
Transmitter
-
-
(Wire Side)
+1 A B NC
-1 C D NC
+2 E F NC
-2 H J NC
+3 K L NC
-3 M N NC
+4 P R NC
-4 S T NC
+5 U V NC
-5 W X NC
+6 Y Z NC
-6 AA BB NC
+7 CC DD NC
-7 EE FF NC
+8 HH JJ NC
-8 KK LL NC
NC MM NN NC
288
Module with - - - - - - - -
Discrete Wire
Block + + + + + + + +
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FBM18
IT
Module with - - - - - - - -
Direct Connection
Block + + + + + + + +
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FBM18 IT
Figure 8-88. FBM18 IT TCA Labels
4.7 UF
+
To/From
26 V Fsk Modem
Circuit
-
- From
36 V
39 mH 24 V
Regulator
+
Figure 8-89. FBM18 Intelligent Transmitter Interface Circuit
FBM20/21 Field Connections

Figure 8-93.
289
S2
Line
ac
Voltage
Source
C
Neutral
(Wire Side)
S1 A B S2
C1 C D C2
S3 E F S4
C3 H J C4
S5 K L S6
C5 M N C6
S7 P R S8
C7 S T C8
S9 U V S10
C9 W X C10
S11 Y Z S12
C11 AA BB -C12
S13 CC DD S14
C13 EE FF C14
S15 HH JJ S16
C15 KK LL C16
NC MM NN NC
290
with Discrete S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2
Wire Block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FBMs 20/21 FBMs 20/21
240 V ac DI 240 V ac DI
Either Module
with Direct S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2 S2
Connection Block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FBMs 20,/21 240 V ac DI
R1
S1
Input R1 R2
240 V 10.2 K 5.1 K
R2
C
Figure 8-93. FBM20/21 120/240 V ac Digital Input Circuit

NOTE
To replace an FBM22, refer to “FBM Replacement using the Output Bypass Sta-
Functional connection diagrams are shown in the following diagrams:

♦ Meter Indicates Output Drive Signal – Figure 8-94
♦ Meter Indicates Input Feedback Signal – Figure 8-95.
291
Module Powered Feedback Externally Powered Feedback

Feedback Feedback
I+ I+
External
Power Supply
I- I-
O+ O+
Actuator Actuator
O- O-
L+ * L+ *
* The loop input (L+, L-) is

L- * fed to FBM22, from which L- *
Feedback it is used to drive the A/M
P+ station meter. P+
Figure 8-94. FBM22 Functional Connection Diagram (Meter Indicates Output Drive Signal)
Module Powered Feedback Externally Powered Feedback

Feedback Feedback
I+ I+
I- I-
O+ O+
Actuator Actuator
O- O-
L+ * L+ *
External
Power Supply
L- * L- *
Feedback * The loop input (L+, L-) is
P+ P+
fed to FBM22, from which
it is used to drive the A/M
station meter.
Figure 8-95. FBM22 Functional Connection Diagram (Meter Indicates Input Feedback Signal)
292
(Wire Side)
NC A B L+
NC C D L-
NC E F NC
NC H J NC
NC K L PS
NC M N NC
NC P R I+
NC S T I-
NC U V NC
NC W X NC
O+ Y Z NC
O- AA BB NC
NC CC DD NC
NC EE FF NC
NC HH JJ NC
NC KK LL NC
NC MM NN NC
Module with
L- O- I-
Discrete Wire
Block L+ O+ I+ P+
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FBM22
A/M Station
Module with
M+ M- L+ L- I+ I- P O+ O-
Direct Connection
Block C HM SM A AM F
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FBM22, A/M Station
293
+24 V
+P Current
+V
Limiter
(30 mA)
36 V
I+
50 To
Amplifier
I-
-V
Figure 8-98. FBM22 0 to 20 mA Input Circuit
+V
Common
O+
From
36 V
Current
Driver
O-
196
Common -V
Figure 8-99. FBM22 0 to 20 mA Output Circuit

NOTE
When you make contact input connections to FBMs 24 and 25, specific rules must
be observed regarding the isolated/nonisolated electrical characteristics of the con-
tacts. Refer to Figure 8-101 for details.
TCA labels are shown in Figure 8-105 on page 298 through Figure 8-107.
For reference purposes, schematic diagrams of the FBM24/25 input circuitry are shown in
294
Contact Sensor with

Voltage Monitor External Supply*
+ CS**
+
V dc
- C +
Voltage Contact
Source FBM24A/25A
Internal
Connection
Contact Sensor *
+
CS**
+
Monitor
V dc
Channel
+ - C
Contact Voltage
FBM24B/25B Source FBM24C/25C
*See Figure 8-100 for contact isolation rules.

Figure 8-100. FBM24/25 Functional Connection Diagrams
295
FBM 24B/25B/26B/27B FBM 24C/25C/26C/27C

CS1
CS1 Contact 48 to 150 V dc Voltage
Sense (user supplied) Monitor
+1
+1 Logic*
*** ***
*** *** CS2
CS2 Contact Contact
Sense Sense
+2 Logic*
+2 Logic*
CS3 Contact
Sense
+3 Logic*
CSN Contact
Sense
+N Logic*
CSN Contact
48 V Sense
Power Logic*
+ Supply** - +N
* Contact sense logic is isolated from ground. However, the common of each contact
sense logic circuit is tied to the minus side of the 48 V power supply. [This connection is made
within the termination cable assembly (TCA).]
** Power supply is isolated from ground.
***Connection made internal to TCA.
As shown in the diagrams above, the contact input channels for FBMs 24B/24C/25B/25C/26B/
26C/27B/27C are nonisolated. (All of the CS input terminals are tied together internally.)
Therefore, the following rules apply.
1. Isolated (ungrounded) and nonisolated (grounded) contacts may be combined for a
particular FBM. Note, however, that all contact inputs are grounded (in common)
when this connection is implemented.
2. If nonisolated (grounded) contact inputs are used, all ground leads from the contacts
must connect to the CS input terminals.
3. If a status tap input is used for a particular channel, all other channels must be left
unused, or used with isolated (ungrounded) contacts.
Figure 8-101. Contact Input Circuit Rules, FBM 24B/24C/25B/25C/26B/26C/27B/27C
296
(Wire Side)
I+1 A B I+2
IC1 C D +IC2
I+3 E F I+4
IC3 H J IC4
I+5 K L I+6
IC5 M N IC6
I+7 P R I+8
IC7 S T IC8
I+9 U V I+10
IC9 W X IC10
I+11 Y Z I+12
IC11 AA BB IC12
I+13 CC DD I+14
IC13 EE FF IC14
I+15 HH JJ I+16
IC15 KK LL IC16
NC MM NN NC
(Wire Side)
ISC1 A B ICS2
I+1 C D I+2
ICS3 E F ICS4
I+3 H J I+4
ICS5 K L ICS6
I+5 M N I+6
ICS7 P R ICS8
I+7 S T I+8
ICS9 U V ICS10
I+9 W X I+10
ICS11 Y Z ICS12
I+11 AA BB I+12
ICS13 CC DD ICS14
I+13 EE FF I+14
ICS15 HH JJ ICS16
I+15 KK LL I+16
NC MM NN NC
297
(Wire Side)
+ A B ICS2
C C D I+2
ICS3 E F ICS4
I+3 H J I+4
ICS5 K L ICS6
I+5 M N I+6
ICS7 P R ICS8
I+7 S T I+8
ICS9 U V ICS10
I+9 W X I+10
ICS11 Y Z ICS12
I+11 AA BB I+12
ICS13 CC DD ICS14
I+13 EE FF I+14
ICS15 HH JJ ICS16
I+15 KK LL I+16
NC MM NN NC
Figure 8-104. FBM24C/25C (Contact Sensing with External Power)

with Discrete
Wire Block + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FBM24A/ FBM24A/
25A dc DI 25A dc DI
with Direct
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Connection Block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FBM24A/25A dc DI
298
Either Module + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
with Discrete
CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS
Wire Block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FBM24B/25B FBM24B/25B
dc DI dc DI
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Either Module
CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS
with Direct
Connection Block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FBM24B/25B dc DI
Either Module C + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
with Discrete
+ CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS
Wire Block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FBM24C/ FBM24C/
25C dc DI 25C dc DI
Either Module C + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
with Direct
Connection Block + CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FBM24C/25C dc DI
Figure 8-107. FBM24C/25C TCA Labels
299
+ To Current
1.2 K Sink
452 K
30.1 K
0.12 UF
To
Comparator
42.2 K
C
1.2 K
Figure 8-108. FBM24/25 dc Digital Voltage Input Circuit
+
48 V
- Power
+ To
Current Supply
1.2 K
Sink
452 K Common
30.1 K
0.12 UF NOTE:
To The CS inputs are connected from
Comparator
input 2 to input 8 and then from
42.2 K input 9 to input 16.
To have all CS inputs connected
together in the termination assembly
1.2 K (TCA), you need to use an external
Common jumper between input 8 and input 9.
Figure 8-109. FBM24/25 Contact Sense Input Circuit

NOTE
The following notes apply to the FBM26/27 field connections:
1. When making contact input connections to FBM26 or FBM27, specific rules
must be observed regarding the isolated/nonisolated electrical characteristics of the
contacts. Refer to Figure 8-101 for details.
2. When using digital outputs with inductive loads from FBM26 or 27, protective
diodes must be used across the loads (see Figure 8-110).
300

Contact Sensor with

Voltage Monitor External Supply*
+ CS**
+
V dc
C +
-
Voltage Contact
Source FBM26A/27A
Internal
Connection
Contact Sensor *
CS** +
+
Monitor
V dc
Channel
+ C
-
Contact Voltage
FBM26B/27B Source FBM26C/27C
Output Switch
See Note
K
+ Load
V dc
C
-
Load
External
Voltage Optional FBM26A-C/
Source Location 27A-C
* See Figure 8-100 for contact isolation rules.

** CS is positive with respect to +.
NOTE:
Diode is required for inductive load only. The diode used must be capable of conducting the maximum
Figure 8-110. FBM26/27 Functional Connection Diagrams
301
(Wire Side)
I+1 A B I+1
IC1 C D IC2
I+3 E F I+4
IC3 H J IC4
I+5 K L I+6
IC5 M N IC6
I+7 P R I+8
IC7 S T IC8
OK1 U V OK2
OC1 W X OC2
OK3 Y Z OK4
OC3 AA BB OC4
OK5 CC DD OK6
OC5 EE FF OC6
OK7 HH JJ OK8
OC7 KK LL OC8
NC MM NN NC
(Wire Side)
ICS1 A B ICS2
I+1 C D I+2
ICS3 E F ICS4
I+3 H J I+4
ICS5 K L ICS6
I+5 M N I+6
ICS7 P R ICS8
I+7 S T I+8
OK1 U V OK2
OC1 W X OC2
OK3 Y Z OK4
OC3 AA BB OC4
OK5 CC DD OK6
OC5 EE FF OC6
OK7 HH JJ OK8
OC7 KK LL OC8
NC MM NN NC
302
(Wire Side)
+ A B ICS2
C C D I+2
ICS3 E F ICS4
I+3 H J I+4
ICS5 K L ICS6
I+5 M N I+6
ICS7 P R ICS8
I+7 S T I+8
OK1 U V OK2
OC1 W X OC2
OK3 Y Z OK4
OC3 AA BB OC4
OK5 CC DD OK6
OC5 EE FF OC6
OK7 HH JJ OK8
OC7 KK LL OC8
NC MM NN NC
Figure 8-113. FBM26C/27C (Contact Sensing with External Power)

with Discrete
+ + + + + + + + K K K K K K K K
Wire Block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FBM26A/ FBM26A/
27A dc DI 27A dc DIO
Either Module
with Direct
Connection Block + + + + + + + + K K K K K K K K
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FBM26A/27A V dc IN
303
Either Module + + + + + + + + C C C C C C C C
with Discrete CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS K K K K K K K K
Wire Block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FBM26B/ FBM26B/
27B dc DI 27B dc DIO
+ + + + + + + + C C C C C C C C
Either Module
with Direct CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS K K K K K K K K
Connection Block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FBM26B/27B dc Cont. IN
Either Module C + + + + + + + C C C C C C C C
with Discrete + CS CS CS CS CS CS CS K K K K K K K K
Wire Block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FBM26C/ FBM26C/
27C dc DI 27C dc DI
Either Module C + + + + + + + C C C C C C C C
with Direct
Connection Block + CS CS CS CS CS CS CS K K K K K K K K
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FBM26C/27C IN / EXT
Figure 8-116. FBM26C/27C TCA Labels
304
+ To Current
1.2 K Sink
452 K
30.1 K
0.12 UF To
Comparator
42.2 K
C
1.2 K
Figure 8-117. FBM26/27 dc Digital Voltage Input Circuit
+
48 V
To - Power
+ Current Supply
1.2 K Sink
452 K Common
30.1 K
0.12 UF
To
Comparator NOTE:
42.2 K All CS inputs and commons are
connected together in the
termination connector assembly
(TCA).
1.2 K
Common
Figure 8-118. FBM26/27 Contact Sense Input Circuit
K
From
MOSFET Gate Drive
Circuit Circuit
To Current
Sensing &
0.06 Overload
Circuit
C
305

Functional connection diagrams are shown in Figure 8-120.
3-Wire RTD 2-Wire RTD 4-Wire RTD

Connection Connection Connection
C C C
*
+ + +
RTD - RTD - RTD -
-S * -S
* Connection made
by user. FBM33A FBM33B FBM33B
Figure 8-120. FBM33A/FBM33B Functional Connection Diagrams
(Wire Side)
NC A B C1
NC C D +1
-1 E F C2
NC H J +2
-2 K L C3
NC M N +3
-3 P R C4
NC S T +4
-4 U V C5
NC W X +5
-5 Y Z C6
NC AA BB +6
-6 CC DD C7
NC EE FF +7
-7 HH JJ C8
NC KK LL +8
-8 MM NN NC
Figure 8-121. FBM33A 3-Wire RTD, Plug Connection Block Field Connections
306
(Wire Side)
NC A B C1
NC C D +1
-1 E F C2
-S1 H J +2
-2 K L C3
-S2 M N +3
-3 P R C4
-S3 S T +4
-4 U V C5
-S4 W X +5
-5 Y Z C6
-S5 AA BB +6
-6 CC DD C7
-S6 EE FF +7
-7 HH JJ C8
-S7 KK LL +8
-8 MM NN -S8
Figure 8-122. FBM33B 2- or 4-Wire RTD, Plug Connection Block Field Connections
Module with - - - - - - - -
Block
C C C C C C C C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FBM03/
FBM33 RTD
3 Wire
+ + + + + + + +
Module with
Direct Connection C - C - C - C - C - C - C - C -
Block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FBM03/FBM33
RTD 3 Wire
Figure 8-123. FBM03/FBM33, 3-Wire RTD, TCA Labels
307
Module with - -S - -S - -S - -S - -S - -S - -S - -S
Discrete Wire
Block C + C + C + C + C + C + C + C +
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FBM03/ FBM03/
FBM33 RTD FBM33 RTD
2, 4 Wire 2, 4 Wire
Module with + -S + -S + -S + -S + -S + -S + -S + -S
Direct Connection
Block C - C - C - C - C - C - C - C -
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FBM03/FBM33 RTD
2, 4 Wire
Figure 8-124. FBM03/FBM33, 2- or 4-Wire RTD, TCA Labels
+V
0.5 mA
C
0.25 mA
+
1K 9K To Amplifier
- (0 to 80 mV)
RTD
1K 9K
*
0.25 mA * 10 K -V 0.25 mA
-S
From Current Source
0.47 UF Common
0.47 UF *Connection made

+S internally for FBM03.
10 K 0.25 mA
Figure 8-125. FBM33, 3-Wire RTD Input/Output Circuit
308
+V
C
*
+
1K 9K To
RTD 1 UF Amplifier
(0 to 80 MV)
-
1K 9K
* * For 2-wire RTDs,
-V the paired connections
-S 0.25 mA From C and +, and -5 and -,
Current
10.1 K 0.47 UF are made at the
Source
Common TCA connector.
Figure 8-126. FBM33, 2- or 4-Wire RTD Input/Out Circuit

♦ Connections for discrete wire or direct connection block – Figure 8-7
♦ Connections for plug connector block – Figure 8-8.
+ Junction Compensation
Internal to Connector
+ Block (Foxboro supplied)
Thermocouple/
mV Source
- -

(Connections for Discrete Wire or Direct Connection Block)
309
User-Supplied User-Supplied
Termination FBM Bulk Termination FBM Bulk
Block and RTD Connector Block and RTD Connector
C C CR9
CR9
** +SR9
+ + +R9
+R9
RTD* ** -SR9
- -
-R9 -R9
+ + +SR9
Thermocouple -S
-SR9
-
- + +
3-Wire
Thermocouple
* 100 Ω Platinum RTD (DIN 43760, Class B). - -
** Connection made by User. 2-Wire or 4-Wire
Figure 8-128. FBM36 Functional Connection Diagram (Connections for Plug Connector Block)
(Wire Side)
+1 A B NC
-1 C D CR9
+2 E F NC
-2 H J +SR9
+3 K L NC
-3 N +R9
M
+4 P R NC
-4 S T -R9
+5 U V NC
-5 W X -SR9
+6 Y Z NC
-6 AA BB NC
+7 CC DD NC
-7 EE FF NC
+8 HH JJ NC
-8 KK LL NC
NC MM NN NC
310
Module with - - - - - - - -
Block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FBM02/36
TC mV
Module with - - - - - - - -
Direct Connection
Block + + + + + + + +
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FBM02/36 TC mV
Figure 8-130. FBM02/FBM36 TCA Labels
5 V Ref.
22.1 K
+V
10 M 1.2 K
1K
+
9K
1 UF To
Amplifier
-V
-
Figure 8-131. FBM36 Thermocouple/Millivolt Input Circuit
311
+V
CR
*
+R
1K 9K To
RTD 1 UF Amplifier
(0 to 80 mV)
-R
1K 9K
*
-V
0.25 mA From
-SR Current
10.1 K 0.47 UF
Source
Common
* For 2-wire RTDs, the 2 pairs (CR and +R, and -R and -SR)
connections are made at the TCA connector.
Figure 8-132. FBM36 2- or 4-Wire RTD Input/Out Circuit
+V
0.5 mA
CR
0.25 mA
+R To Amplifier
1K 9K
-R (0 to 80 mV)
RTD
1K 9
*
0.25 mA * 10 K -V 0.25 mA
-SR
From Current Source
0.47 UF Common
*Connection must be
0.47 UF made externally for
+SR FBM36 bulk connector.
10 K 0.25 mA
Figure 8-133. FBM36 3-Wire RTD Input/Output Circuit

NOTE
To replace an FBM37, refer to “FBM Replacement using the Output Bypass Sta-
Functional connection diagrams are shown in Figure 8-134.

For reference purposes, a schematic diagram of the FBM37 output circuitry is shown in
Figure 8-135.
312
+
+
Actuator
-
-
Figure 8-134. FBM37 Output Connections
+V
Common
+
36 V From
Current
Driver
-
196
-V
Common
8 6 4 2 Output
Bypass
7 5 3 1
Jacks
+ Field
Connections
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Figure 8-136. FBM37 Termination Assembly
313

NOTE
1. Refer to “Redundant FBM Operational Considerations” on page 333 for special

Input Connections Output Connections

Intelligent Actuator
Transmitter + +
+
+
- -
-
-
CAUTION: Use twisted-pair wiring inside a shielded cable

with the shield grounded at the I/A Series system end.
Input Compliance Voltage:
22.0 V minimum at 20.5 mA
314
(Wire Side)
NC A B +I1
NC C D -I1
NC E F +I2
NC H J -I2
NC K L +I3
NC M N -I3
NC P R +I4
NC S T -I4
NC U V +O1
NC W X -O1
NC Y Z +O2
NC AA BB -O2
NC CC DD +O3
NC EE FF -O3
NC HH JJ +O4
NC KK LL -O4
NC MM NN NC
+P + – +P + – + – +P + – +P + – + –
Module with +P + – +P + – + – +P + – +P + – + –
Discrete Wire I2A I2B 02 I4A I4B 04
Block
I1A I1B 01 I3A I3B 03
FBM39 FBM39
RED I/O RED I/O
Figure 8-139. FBM39 (Redundant AO) TCA Labels
+V
Common
+
From
36 V Current
Driver
-
196
Common -V
315
4.7 UF
+
To/From
26 V Fsk Modem
Circuit
-
-
36 V From
39 mH 24 V
Regulator
+

NOTE
The following notes apply to the FBM41/42 field connections:
1. All contact input channels for FBM41C and FBM42C are isolated. Therefore,
isolated (ungrounded) and nonisolated (grounded) contact inputs may be com-
bined. Also, the status tap input may be used for any contact input channel,
regardless of the isolated or nonisolated characteristics of the other contact inputs.
2. When using digital outputs with inductive loads from FBM26 or FBM27, protec-
tive diodes must be used across the loads (see Figure 8-142).
316
Output Switch
Voltage Monitor (with external source)
See Note
+ C
+ -
V dc C V dc K
- + Load
Voltage Voltage
Source FBM41A/42A Source FBM41A/42A/
41C/42C
Contact Sensor *
CS*
Contact
FBM41C/42C
* CS is positive with respect to +.
NOTE:
Diode is required for inductive load only. The diode used must be capable of conducting the maximum
(Wire Side)
I+1 A B I+2
IC1 C D IC2
I+3 E F I+4
IC3 H J IC4
I+5 K L I+6
IC5 M N IC6
I+7 P R I+8
IC7 S T IC8
OK1 U V OK2
OC1 W X OC2
OK3 Y Z OK4
OC3 AA BB OC4
OK5 CC DD OK6
OC5 EE FF OC6
OK7 HH JJ OK8
OC7 KK LL OC8
NC MM NN NC
Figure 8-143. FBM41A/42A Plug Connection Block Field Connections
317
(Wire Side)
ICS1 A B ICS2
I+1 C D I+2
ICS3 E F ICS4
I+3 H J I+4
ICS5 K L ICS6
I+5 M N I+6
ICS7 P R ICS8
I+7 S T I+8
OK1 U V OK2
OC1 W X OC2
OK3 Y Z OK4
OC3 AA BB OC4
OK5 CC DD OK6
OC5 EE FF OC6
OK7 HH JJ OK8
OC7 KK LL OC8
NC MM NN NC
Figure 8-144. FBM41C/42C Plug Connection Block Field Connections
+ + + + + + + + K K K K K K K K
FBMs 41A/42A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FBM41/42 FBM41/42
dc DIO dc DIO
+ + + + + + + + C C C C C C C C
CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS K K K K K K K K
FBMs 41C/42C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FBM41/42 FBM41/42
dc DIO dc DIO
Figure 8-145. FBM41/42 Discrete Wire TCA Labels
318
+ + + + + + + + K K K K K K K K
FBM41A/42A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FBM41/42 dc DIO
+ + + + + + + + C C C C C C C C
FBM41C/42C CS CS CS CS CS CS CS CS K K K K K K K K
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
FBM41/42 dc DIO
Figure 8-146. FBM41/42 Direct Connect TCA Labels
K
From
MOSFET Gate Drive
Circuit Circuit
To Current
Sensing &
0.06 Overload
Circuit
C
CS From
1K 24 V Power
Supply
+
1K
To Current Sink
and Comparator
C
1K
319

Functional connection diagrams are shown in Figure 8-149 and Figure 8-150.
NOTE
Cable baluns must be used in conjunction with FBM43 when multiple loops are
connected to a common external power supply (see Figure 8-150). For detailed
information on use and installation of cable baluns, refer to “Using the Cable Balun
Module with Intelligent Transmitters” on page 331.

Module Powered Transmitter Externally Powered Transmitter

Intelligent
Transmitter
+P +P
+
Intelligent
Transmitter
- + + +
- - -
External Power Supply

(see Figure 8-139)
Input Compliance Voltage: CAUTION: Use twisted-pair wiring inside a shielded cable, with
22.0 V minimum at 20.5 mA the shield grounded at the I/A Series system end.
320
Externally Powered Transmitter with Cable Balun (See Note 1)
N/C +P
+ Field Side to Balun Terminal 2
Field Side System Side
+ + +
Transmitter 1
2 1
3 Cable 2
3
4 4 -
Note 3 5
6 Balun 5
6
7
8 7
8 FBM
- Field Side to Balun Terminal 1 + Note 4
External 24 V dc
Note 2 + Power Supply
(see Note 5)
NOTES:
1. For detailed information on balun use and installation, refer to “Using the Cable Balun Module with
Intelligent Transmitters”.
2. Cable balun used only when multiple loops are connected to a common power supply. The FBM
negative terminals connect directly to the minus (-) terminal of the power supply. The balun system
side negative (-) terminals (2, 4, 6, and 8) connect to the power supply positive terminals when there
are 4 (maximum) power loops.
3. For hazardous environments, install an intrinsic safety barrier such as an MTL 787S+ between the
balun wiring to limit the amount of energy in the wiring.
CAUTION: Use twisted-pair wiring inside a shielded cable with the shield
grounded at the I/A Series system end.
4. A user-supplied capacitor can be installed across the external power supply(ies) to shunt ac power.
5. The external power supply can be redundant power supplies in parallel.
Figure 8-150. FBM43/44/46 Connections, Multiple Loops Connected to a Common

(Wire Side)
NC A B +1
NC C D -1
+P1 E F +2
NC H J -2
+P2 K L +3
NC M N -3
+P3 P R +4
NC S T -4
+P4 U V +5
NC W X -5
+P5 Y Z +6
NC AA BB -6
+P6 CC DD +7
NC EE FF -7
+P7 HH JJ +8
NC KK LL -8
+P8 MM NN NC
321
Module with - - - - - - - -
Block
+P +P +P +P +P +P +P +P
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FBM01
4-20 mA
FBM43 IT
Module with - - - - - - - -
Direct Connection
+ +P + +P + +P + +P + +P + +P + +P + +P
Block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FBM01 4-20 mA FBM43 IT
+V
Common
+
36 V From
Current
Driver
-
196
-V
Common
322
4.7 UF
+
To/From
26 V 39 mH Fsk Modem
Circuit
-
36 V -
From
24 Volt
+P Regulator
+

NOTE
1. Refer to “Redundant FBM Operational Considerations” on page 333 for
special considerations required when installing and maintaining redundant FBMs.
Figure 8-150 is a functional connection diagram showing field connections for multiple loops
connected to a common external power supply (baluns used).
NOTE
Cable baluns must be used in conjunction with FBM44 when multiple loops are
connected to a common external power supply. For detailed information on use and
installation of cable baluns, refer to Figure 8-150 and to “Using the Cable Balun

323
Module Powered Externally Powered

Intelligent
Transmitter
+ +P +P
Intelligent
Transmitter
- + + +
- - -

(See Figure 8-139)
Input Compliance Voltage:
CAUTION: Use twisted-pair wiring inside a shielded cable, with
22.0 V minimum at 20.5 mA
the shield grounded at the I/A Series system end.
Figure 8-155. FBM44 Functional Connection Diagram, Input Connections
Actuator +
+
-
-
Figure 8-156. FBM44 Functional Diagram, Output Connections
324
Cable to FBM44A
1 + PA
+ PS Intelligent
Transmitter
2 + IA
+ IN
- IN(-PS) 3 - IA
7 +O
+ OUT
I/P
- OUT 8
Cable to FBM44B -O
4 + PB
+ PS
Intelligent
Transmitter
5 + IB
+ IN
- IN(-PS) 6 - IB
+ OUT
- OUT
Termination Block
Termination Cable Assembly P0903SB
Figure 8-157. FBM44 Functional Connections for Redundant Transmitters and Single I/P Using
Combined Output Channel
(Wire Side)
NC A B +I1
NC C D -I1
+P1 E F +I2
NC H J -I2
+P2 K L +I3
NC M N -I3
+P3 P R +I4
NC S T -I4
+P4 U V +O1
NC W X -O1
NC Y Z +O2
NC AA BB -O2
NC CC DD +O3
NC EE FF -O3
NC HH JJ +O4
NC KK LL -O4
NC MM NN NC
325
+P + – +P + – + – +P + – +P + – + –
+P + – +P + – + – +P + – +P + – + –
I2A I2B 02 I4A I4B 04
I1A I1B 01 I3A I3B 03
FBM44 FBM44
RED I/O RED I/O
Figure 8-159. FBM44 (Redundant AO) TCA Labels
- - - - - - - -
Module with
Block P P P P
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FBM04/44
AI AO / IT AO
- - - - - - - -
Module with
Direct Connection + +P + +P + +P + +P + + + +
Block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FBM04/44 AI AO / IT AO
Figure 8-160. FBM04/44 (Non-Redundant AO) TCA Labels
326
+V
Common
+
36 V From
Current
Driver
-
196
-V
Common
4.7 UF
+
To/From
Circuit
-
-
36 V From
24 Volt
+P Regulator
+

NOTE
Refer to “Redundant FBM Operational Considerations” on page 333 for special
Figure 8-150 is a functional connection diagram showing field connections for multiple loops
connected to a common external power supply (baluns used).
327
NOTE
1. Each module of the FBM46 pair requires a letterbug identifier. One of the mod-
ules must have “01” in the right-most two positions; the other FBM must have
“02”.
2. Cable baluns must be used in conjunction with FBM46 when multiple loops are
connected to a common external power supply. For detailed information on use and
installation of cable baluns, refer to Figure 8-150 and to “Using the Cable Balun

Module-Powered Transmitter Externally Powered Transmitter
+ +P + +P
Intelligent Intelligent
Transmitter Transmitter
- + - +
Cable + -
- -
Balun
FBM Module* FBM
Input Compliance Voltage: External Power Supply

22.0 V minimum at 20.5 mA (see Figure 8-139)
CAUTION: Use twisted-pair wiring inside a shielded cable,
with the shield grounded at the I/A Series system end.
FBM46 General Interconnection Scheme
Redundant Fieldbus
FBM46A FBM46A
Intelligent Intelligent
Transmitter Transmitter
Interface Interface
FBM46 Input Lines

Connected Internally
to TCA
Intelligent Transmitters
IT#1 IT#4
*Cable balun module, required only when multiple loops are powered by a common external power
supply, adds loop resistance of 30 ohms maximum to the channel.
Figure 8-163. FBM46 Functional Connection Diagram, Input Connections
328
Actuator +
+
- -
Figure 8-164. FBM46 Functional Diagram, Output Connections
2
PB
Cable tto FBM46A 1 PA
3+P
+ PS
Intelligent
4 +I Transmitter
+ IN
L1 CAUTION: Use twisted-
5-I pair wiring inside a
- IN (- PS)
7 +O shielded cable with the
+ OUT
shield grounded at the
I/P I/A Series system end.
- OUT 8
-O
Cable to FBM46B
+ PS
+ IN
- IN (- PS)
NOTE: Each module of the pair
+ OUT requires a letterbug identifier. One
of the modules must have “01” in
the right-most 2 positions; the
other FBM must have “02.”
- OUT
Termination Block
Termination Cable Assembly P0950DF
Figure 8-165. FBM46 Redundant I/O Cable Connections (TCA P0950DF)
329
(Wire Side)
+P1A A B +I1
+P1B C D -I1
+P1 E F +I2
NC H J -I2
+P2 K L +I3
NC M N -I3
+P3 P R +I4
NC S T -I4
+P4 U V +O1
NC W X -O1
+P2A Y Z +O2
+2PB AA BB -O2
+P3A CC DD +O3
+P3B EE FF -O3
+P4A HH JJ +O4
+P4B KK LL -O4
NC MM NN NC
PA PB +P + – + – PA PB +P + – + –
PA PB +P + – + – PA PB +P + – + –
P2 I2 02 P4 I4 04
P1 I1 01 P3 I3 03
FBM46 FBM46
RED I/O RED I/O
Figure 8-167. FBM46 IT/AO TCA Labels
+V
Common
+
36 V From
Current
Driver
-
196
Common -V
330
4.7 UF
+
To/From
Circuit
-
-
36 V From
24 Volt
+P Regulator
+
Using the Cable Balun Module with Intelligent

Transmitters
The cable balun (P0903SV) module maintains digital communication line balance between up to
four Intelligent Transmitters (ITs) and FBM channels when there are FBM loops that are powered
by a common external power supply. Figure 8-170 illustrates the electrical connections to the
cable balun module from two IT channels, an external power supply, and two FBMs for Intelli-
gent Transmitters such as FBM43/44/46. The cable balun module contains four baluns and can
accept connections from four FBM channels, four transmitters, and an external power supply.
331
Cable Balun Module P0903SV

Field
+ System 1 1
FBM43/ -
44/46 2 2 + Transmitter
-
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
+ 7 7
FBM43/ -
44/46 8 8 Transmitter
+
-
Separate
Returns To Negative Terminal of
+ Bus
+ + +
- - External
- Bus -
24 V dc
Power
Supply
Figure 8-170. Cable Balun Module with Intelligent Transmitters Powered by a
Common Power Supply
Installing the Cable Balun Module

The cable balun module (P0903SV) is normally mounted on a DIN rail in the enclosure, nearest
the FBM(s) associated with it. The back of the module fits to the DIN rail. Two strain relief
brackets secure the module to the rail and also provide tie points for the cable wiring. To install
the module, refer to Figure 8-170 and Figure 8-171 and perform the following steps:
1. Orient the module as shown in the front view and slip the module against the DIN
rail (1).
2. Locate the 2 DIN rail mounting and cable strain relief brackets (2), and install them
on the DIN rail on the top and bottom of the module. The end of each bracket (with
the holes for the wire tie) should face toward the middle of the enclosure.
3. With the module in one hand, slide the strain relief brackets vertically with your other
hand, to the location on the rail where you want to mount and secure the module.
4. Press the other side of the module (3) in against the DIN rail until it snaps in place.
Slide the brackets securely against the module.
5. Insert the positive wires to an FBM and the associated IT in the holes associated with
(4) and (5) respectively, and secure each of these wires by tightening the associated
screw against the wire with a small flat-bladed screw driver. The positive module ter-
minals are: 1, 3, 5, and 7. Choose one of these terminals on each side of the balun
module.
332
6. The negative wires from the FBMs are dressed and secured to the common negative
node of the external power supply (see Figure 8-170). Wire the terminals 2, 4, 6, or 8
of the balun module on the FBM (system) side to the external power supply as shown.
7. Connect the negative polarity wire of the external power supply the one of the termi-
nals (6) shown in Figure 8-171.
8. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 for each FBM and IT associated with this module.
DIN Rail
2
1 3
DIN Rail Mounting and Cable

Strain Relief Bracket (Qty. 2)
Top View
FIELD
4 CABLE SYSTEM 5
SIDE SIDE
To Intelligent 1 1
2 CABLE 2 To FBM
Transmitter 3 BALUN 3
4 MODULE 4
5 CBM - 4 5
6 P0903SV 6
7 7
8 8
6 TO NEGATIVE TERMINAL
OF EXT. POWER SUPPLY
Front View
Figure 8-171. Installing the Cable Balun Module
Redundant FBM Operational Considerations

FBM04s, FBM05s, FBM06s, FBM39s, FBM44s, and FBM46s are offered in optional redundant
configurations. [For information on how the field input/output signals associated with these
FBMs are implemented, refer to Hardware Descriptions (B0193AE).] In order to properly utilize
the redundant configurations of these FBMs, the following issues must be considered:
♦ Fail-Safe Parameter Configuration
♦ Operational Status Checks
♦ Manual Control of FBM Outputs
♦ Module Removal and Replacement
♦ Letterbug Identifiers for FBM46.
These issues are addressed in the following subsections.
333
Fail-Safe Parameter Configuration

Proper operation of the redundant FBMs requires that the fail-safe parameters in the ECBs associ-
ated with both FBMs (main and backup) be correctly configured. In general, the FBM outputs
must be configured to fail to a zero value in order to allow the opposite (nonfailed) FBM to
assume (or continue) control without interference from the failed module. Table 8-1 outlines the
fail-safe parameter requirements.
Table 8-1. Required Fail-Safe Parameter Settings for Redundant FBM ECBs
Parameter Description Required Setting

FSENAB Enables/disables fail-safe settings for all FBM channels. Enabled
FSDLAY Delay time for communications to have ceased before Per process/system
the fail-safe values are asserted on the outputs. Affects security requirements
all FBM channels.
FSMMxx Specifies the fail-safe action to be taken on each of the Fail-safe value
outputs: use fail-safe value, or hold at last value.
FSDMxx Fail-safe values (one per channel). Zero
For information on how to set these parameters, refer to the following I/A Series documents:
♦ Integrated Control Software Concepts (B0193AW)
♦ Integrated Control Configurator (B0193AV).
Operational Status Checks

Use the following operational status checks (maintenance procedures) to determine the
operational status of the redundant FBMs.
FBM04, FBM06, FBM39, and FBM44 (Redundant Output),

and FBM05 and FBM46 (Redundant I/O) Maintenance Procedure
The following maintenance procedure pertains to two separate configurations:
♦ The FBM04, FBM06, FBM39, or FBM44 configuration using dual transmitters and
a single I/P with termination cable assembly P0903SB (FBM04, FBM44) or
P0903TW (FBM06), and
♦ The redundant input/output configuration using termination cable assembly
♦ P0903SA for FBM05
♦ P0950DF for FBM46.
These configurations require periodic maintenance (status checks) to detect any latent faults in
the individual output channels.
Since the redundant connection of two FBMs allows continuous operation even if one of the
modules fails, you must perform a maintenance procedure to assure the integrity of both modules.
The purpose of this procedure is to detect any latent fault in a module that might be masked by
the redundant module. It is recommended performing this maintenance procedure every three
months.
334
Check the following items periodically as described in the following paragraphs:

♦ Input channels
♦ Output channels
♦ Termination cable assembly components.
FBM05 Input Channels

A difference in the values measured by each input channel of a pair indicates a module fault.
A zero reading indicates the loss of an input connection or a shorted sense resistor. The power
supplies of each input channel of a redundant pair are diode OR’d on the termination block
assembly. The individual sources on the FBM side of the diodes can be checked at the PA and PB
terminals of the terminal block for each input channel. The sources may be measured with a volt-
meter relative to the minus (-) terminal for that input.
FBM04, 05, 06, 39, 44, and 46 Output Channels

If one module output fails to zero (output value reaches 0), or is at a lower value than the other
output, the higher value module output overrides the lower value module by forward biasing the
diode connected across the output of the failed output channel. This condition produces a latent
fault that you need to detect by performing a periodic maintenance procedure. Note also that if a
module output should fail to a high value, this higher value predominates and can only be
detected when the current reaches an alarm threshold value. If the higher value is below the alarm
threshold, you can detect this failing condition by trying to change it (periodic maintenance), or
detect it later if the value rises to trigger an alarm.
Output channels can be verified by using cable assembly P0912MP (Figure 8-172). This cable
assembly consists of a plug for the bypass jack and standard banana plugs to connect to a multim-
eter set to dc milliamps.
FOXBORO
Figure 8-172. Cable Assembly P0912MP
335
When the plug is inserted into the bypass jack, the multimeter is placed in the current loop. No
interruption of current flow occurs because the opposite module in the redundant pair takes over
and maintains the current flow during any transient while inserting the plug. Note the current
value, remove the plug, and perform the same measurement with the other corresponding mod-
ule. The current measurements should be the same.
Summary of Redundant FBM Failure Conditions

Table 8-2 summarizes the FBM04, FBM06, FBM39, FBM44, and FBM46 output, and FBM05
input/output conditions.
Table 8-2. Redundant FBM04/05/06/44/46 Failure Conditions
Failure Condition Description

The output of the good module The bad module drives the output high. The process high
is at a lower value than the alarm indicates this condition with the failing module
output of the failing module. identified by the subsequent maintenance procedure.
The output of the good module The good module drives the output to the desired output. This
is higher than the output of the is a latent fault until you perform the maintenance procedure.
bad module.
The output of the good module You cannot detect this condition until the module output
equals the output of the bad values differ. If the outputs are the same because of a “fail in
module (that is, “failed in place”). place,” the output is driven to the desired value. The good
module must drive the output to a new desired value before
you can detect a difference using the maintenance procedure.
Manual Control of Redundant FBM Outputs

Manual control of redundant FBM outputs can be effected using the output bypass station (just
as it can for non-redundant FBM outputs). However, while one or more outputs of a redundant
module are being manipulated, the corresponding outputs in the opposite module must be dis-
abled to prevent interference. This is accomplished by inserting “blank” plugs into the corre-
sponding output jacks on the opposite module. The blank plugs can be the P0912MP cable
assembly with one or both of the banana plugs removed from the multimeter (or use Switchcraft
Model TT-253 plugs).
Redundant FBM Removal and Replacement

To remove either FBM module in a redundant pair, simply disconnect its termination connector
and remove the module from the mounting structure. Use of the output bypass station is not nec-
essary because the opposite module takes over control immediately. Reverse the procedure for
module replacement.
FBM Replacement using the Output Bypass Station

During the process of replacing a non-redundant analog output FBM (FBM04/06/22/37/39/44
used in a non-redundant configuration), the output bypass station (OBS) is used to transfer the
outputs to standby (manual) control.
336
To remove a non-redundant analog output FBM, proceed as follows:
NOTE
The following procedure does not apply to redundant FBMs. To use the OBS to
effect control of redundant FBM outputs, refer to “Manual Control of Redundant
FBM Outputs” on page 336.
! CAUTION
Refer to the following cautions before proceeding:
1. The following procedure requires switching of FBM analog outputs to
“Manual.” Before performing this procedure, take any necessary measures to ensure
that the switch to manual will not adversely affect the process under control.
2. To minimize any bump in the process, each mode switch on the OBS must be in
the “N” (Normal) position before inserting the plugs into the FBM. There will be a
momentary bump when inserting and removing each plug, and when switching the
mode switch.
1. Connect the OBS to the FBM to be replaced, as shown in Figure 8-173, taking note
of the following:
a. Normally, the OBS output plugs are connected to all 4 output jacks of the FBM,
to allow removal of the FBM while maintaining manual control of the outputs to
the field devices.
b. The red output cable corresponds to Mode Switch 1, Output Adjustment 1, and
the associated meters. Likewise, the green output cable corresponds to Mode
Switch 2, Output Adjustment 2, and the associated meters.
Output Bypass Station* Analog Output FBM**
Deviation Meter 1 Red (#1) Red (#1)

Output Meter 1
Green (#2) Green (#2)
Output Adjust 1
N N
S S Mode Switch 1
Deviation Meter 2
Output Meter 2
Output Adjust 2
N N
S S Mode Switch 2
*The output bypass station contains two modules, as shown.

**FBM04/06/22/37/39/44 used in a non-redundant configuration.
Figure 8-173. Connection of Output Bypass Stations to FBM
337
2. For each of the four FBM outputs:

a. From the I/A Series process operations displays, switch the analog output block to
manual.
b. Vary the output adjustment on the OBS for a null (center-scale) reading on the
deviation meter.
c. Place the mode switch on the OBS in the “S” (Standby) position.
3. Having made the transfer to standby (manual) control for each output, from the
I/A Series system management displays, switch the FBM to “off-line.”
4. The TCA can now be detached from the FBM, and the FBM can be removed from
the mounting structure. (While in the standby mode, the OBS is acting as the FBM.)
To install a new FBM, proceed as follows:
1. Place the FBM in the mounting structure and attach the TCA.
2. From the I/A Series system management displays, place the FBM on-line.
3. For each of the four FBM outputs:
a. Using the I/A Series process operations displays, manually adjust the analog out-
put block’s output to obtain a null reading on the associated OBS deviation meter.
b. Place the mode switch on the OBS in the “N” (Normal) position.
4. With all four outputs nulled and switched to Normal, disconnect the output plugs
from the FBM.
5. The FBM outputs may now be switched to “Auto” (from the I/A Series process opera-
tions displays) to resume normal I/A Series control.
338
9. Peripheral Device Installation
This chapter describes how to connect the peripheral devices to the I/A Series processors, and
also provides specific processor configuration instructions.
The following tables contain a list of peripheral devices which are supported by 70 Series,
50 Series, and AP20/WP20 processors. Table 9-1 lists the latest AW/WP70, Style A-, and AW70,
Style B-based peripheral devices and Table 9-2 lists AP50/51-, WP50/51-, and AW50/51-based
peripheral devices. Note that some devices (such as the B/W dot-matrix printer 80) are used by
each type of processor, and are thus listed in more than one table.
Table 9-1. AW70 & WP70, Style A-, & AW70, Style B-Based Peripheral Devices
(Latest Version)
AW70 WP70 AW70 Part

Function Style A Style A Style B Number1
Alphanumeric Keyboard Yes Yes Yes P0915HF
70 Series Mouse Yes Yes Yes P0915HE
Trackball (optional) Yes Yes Yes P0915FV
6.4 GB EIDE Hard Drive2 Yes Yes No P0918BU
9.1 GB SCSI Hard Drive No No Yes P0915XC
15-Inch Monitor (other sizes are optionally available) Yes Yes Yes P0912WZ
20.1-Inch Workstation Flat LCD Monitor, without Yes Yes Yes P0971WH
Touchscreen (Tabletop)
21-Inch Monitor (gray), without Touchscreen Yes Yes Yes P0918VL
(Tabletop) - Northern Hemisphere
21-Inch Monitor (gray), without Touchscreen Yes Yes Yes P0918WC
(Tabletop) - Southern Hemisphere
21-Inch Monitor (light beige), without Touchscreen Yes Yes Yes P0918VJ
(Tabletop) - Northern Hemisphere
21-Inch Monitor (light beige), without Touchscreen Yes Yes Yes P0918WA
(Tabletop) - Southern Hemisphere
21-Inch Workstation Monitor (gray), with Yes Yes Yes P0918VM
Touchscreen (Tabletop) - Northern Hemisphere
21-Inch Workstation Monitor (gray), with Yes Yes Yes P0918WD
Touchscreen (Tabletop) - Southern Hemisphere
21-Inch Workstation Monitor (light beige), with Yes Yes Yes P0918VK
Touchscreen (Tabletop) - Northern Hemisphere
21-Inch Workstation Monitor (light beige), with Yes Yes Yes P0918WB
Touchscreen (Tabletop) - Southern Hemisphere
10/20 GB3 EIDE Tape Drive (optional) Yes Yes No P0918CY
10/2.0 GB3 SCSI Tape Drive (optional) No No Yes P0918DA
Internal 3.5-inch Disk Drive Yes Yes Yes P0915HM
339
B0193AC – Rev U 9. Peripheral Device Installation
Table 9-1. AW70 & WP70, Style A-, & AW70, Style B-Based Peripheral Devices
(Latest Version) (Continued)
AW70 WP70 AW70 Part

Function Style A Style A Style B Number1
Internal CD-ROM Drive (EIDE) Yes Yes No P0918DH
Internal CD-ROM Drive (SCSI) No No Yes P0918DJ
PC-FB Interface Card (optional) Yes No Yes P0960NB
Color Dot-Matrix Printer 132, 120 V ac Yes Yes Yes P0913AV
Color Dot-Matrix Printer 132, 220 V ac Yes Yes Yes P0913AW
B/W Dot-Matrix Printer 80, 120 V ac, Serial Interface Yes Yes Yes P0901EG4
B/W Dot-Matrix Printer 80, 220 V ac, Serial Interface Yes Yes Yes P0901EH4
B/W Dot-Matrix Printer 80, 240 V ac, Serial Interface Yes Yes Yes P0901EJ4
Color PostScript Printer,
110 V ac Yes Yes Yes P0918FG
220 V ac P0918FH
Color PCL3 Printer Yes Yes Yes P0917BD5
Lexmark Optra Color 45 Parallel Interface Yes Yes Yes P0918FG
Lexmark Optra Color 45 120/220/240 V ac, Serial Interface Yes Yes Yes P0918FH
GCIO Interface Module, without Touchscreen Yes Yes Yes P0904AK
GCIO Interface Module, with Touchscreen Yes Yes Yes P0922AG
Serial Interface for two Dot-Matrix Printers Yes Note 6 Yes Built-in
Parallel Interface Port for Color Printer Yes Note 6 Yes Built-in
Allen-Bradley KTX Interface ISA Card (optional)7 Yes No Yes P0912SE
Allen-Bradley PKTX Interface PCI Card (optional)8 Yes No Yes P0915YU
DigiBoard PC Interface Card and Cabling (optional) Yes No Yes P0912SF
Ethernet Adapter Card ISA (optional) - 3C509 Yes Yes Yes P0914PT
Ethernet Adapter Card PCI (optional) - 3C900B Yes Yes Yes P0915YV
ColorGraphics Predator LT2 Video Card8 Yes Yes Yes P0918XM
ColorGraphics Predator LT4 Video Card8 Yes Yes Yes P0918XN
Integrated Sound Function and On-board Video Function Yes Yes Yes Part of processor
1.
These part numbers are for the individual repair units only. Upgrade kit part numbers for each of the units (if
available) are provided below in the associated descriptions for each unit (see Table 9-4).
2.
All hard drives used in the GX1 Pentium II/III processor must derive from the same manufacturer. If multiple
hard drives from different manufacturers are installed in the GX1 Pentium II/III processor, the processor may
not recognize them and may crash.
3.
The tape drive can hold up to 10 GB of data uncompressed, and 20 GB of data compressed.
4.
These are the printer part numbers for P0901ED, P0901EE, P0901EF assembly kits, respectively.
5.
This is the printer part number for the serial 120 V ac (P0913TU), serial 220/240 V ac (P0913TW), and the
parallel (P0913TV) assembly kits.
6.
Available, but not used in standard I/A Series configurations.
7.
For use with all Zenith-based, PowerMate-based, and GXa-based 70 Series processors. Refer to “Determining
the Type of Processor You Have” on page 593 for illustrations of these processors.
8.
For use with GX1 Pentium III (500 Mhz) or later 70 Series processors.
340
9. Peripheral Device Installation B0193AC – Rev U
NOTE
For a list of peripheral devices which are supported by Server 70 processor, refer to
Hardware and Software Specific Instructions for Server 70 Processors included with your
Server 70 processor.
Table 9-2. AP50/51-, WP50/51-, and AW50/51-Based1 Peripheral Devices
Part
Description Number
B/W Dot-Matrix Printer 80, 120 V ac, Serial Interface P0901EG2
B/W Dot-Matrix Printer 80, 220 V ac, Serial Interface P0901EH2
B/W Dot-Matrix Printer 80, 240 V ac, Serial Interface P0901EJ2
Color Dot-Matrix Printer 132, 120 V ac P0913AV
Color Dot-Matrix Printer 132, 220 V ac P0913AW
Color PostScript Printer,
110 V ac P0918FG
220 V ac P0918FH
Color PCL3 Printer P0917BD3
Lexmark Optra Color 45 Parallel Interface P0918FG
Lexmark Optra Color 45 120/220/240 V ac, Serial Interface P0918FH
Serial-to-Parallel Converter (For some Color PostScript Printer applications) P0912KA
Cable Extension Kit for Color PostScript Printer:
For use with AP51A, WP51A, AW51A, AP51D, WP51D, or AW51D P0971LS
For use with AP51B, WP51B, or AW51B/C P0971GL
17-Inch Workstation Display, without Touchscreen (Tabletop)4 P0972FX
20.1-Inch Flat LCD Monitor, without Touchscreen (Tabletop). I/A Series 51D and P0971WH
51E only.
21-Inch Monitor (gray), without Touchscreen (Tabletop) - Northern Hemisphere P0918VL
21-Inch Monitor (gray), without Touchscreen (Tabletop) - Southern Hemisphere P0918WC
21-Inch Monitor (light beige), without Touchscreen (Tabletop) - Northern Hemisphere P0918VJ
21-Inch Monitor (light beige), without Touchscreen (Tabletop) - Southern Hemisphere P0918WA
21-Inch Monitor (gray), with Touchscreen (Tabletop) - Northern Hemisphere P0918VM
21-Inch Monitor (gray), with Touchscreen (Tabletop) - Southern Hemisphere P0918WD
21-Inch Monitor (light beige), with Touchscreen (Tabletop) - Northern Hemisphere P0918VK
21-Inch Monitor (light beige), with Touchscreen (Tabletop) - Southern Hemisphere P0918WB
21-Inch Monitor (gray), without Touchscreen (Embedded In MIW) - Northern P0918VQ
Hemisphere
21-Inch Monitor (gray), without Touchscreen (Embedded In MIW) - Southern P0918WG
Hemisphere
21-Inch Monitor (light beige), without Touchscreen (Embedded In MIW) - P0918VN
Northern Hemisphere
341
Table 9-2. AP50/51-, WP50/51-, and AW50/51-Based1 Peripheral Devices (Continued)
Part
Description Number
21-Inch Monitor (light beige), without Touchscreen (Embedded In MIW) - P0918WE
Southern Hemisphere
21-Inch Monitor (gray), with Touchscreen (Embedded In MIW) - Northern P0918VR
Hemisphere
21-Inch Monitor (gray), with Touchscreen (Embedded In MIW) - Southern P0918WH
Hemisphere
21-Inch Monitor (light beige), with Touchscreen (Embedded In MIW) - Northern P0918VP
Hemisphere
21-Inch Monitor (light beige), with Touchscreen (Embedded In MIW) - Southern P0918WF
Hemisphere
VT100 Compatible Terminal, 120 V ac P0914BA
VT100 Compatible Terminal, 220 V ac P0500YS
GCIO Interface Module, without Touchscreen P0904AK
GCIO Interface Module, with Touchscreen P0922AG
WP30 Mouse P0500ZF-A
WP20/30 Trackball (190 counts/rotation) P0915FX
WP50 Trackball (190 counts/rotation) P0915FU
AP50/51, AW50/51 Industrial Pointing Device (for use in hostile environments) P0912FF
Annunciator Keyboard P0903CV
Annunciator/Numeric Keyboard P0903CW
1.
Devices serviced directly or indirectly by a 50 Series AP, WP, or AW. These devices may be physically
connected to an 50 Series AP, WP, or AW, to another peripheral device, or to an existing X Terminal.
2.
These are the printer part numbers for P0901ED, P0901EE, P0901EF assembly kits, respectively.
3.
This is the printer part number for the serial 120 V ac (P0913TU), serial 220/240 V ac (P0913TW),
and the parallel (P0913TV) assembly kits.
4.
Used with Model 51, Style B/B1 and D processors only. Style B/B1 requires an adapter (P0971YB).
Table 9-3 provides the part numbers for the workstation monitors used with the 50 Series and
70 Series processors in both the northern and southern hemispheres.
Table 9-3. 50 Series and 70 Series Workstation Monitor Part Numbers
Northern Southern
Workstation Monitor Supports Color Hemisphere Hemisphere
17-Inch Workstation Monitor 50 Series processors N/A P0972FX
without Touchscreen 70 Series processors N/A P0912XA
20.1-Inch Flat LCD Monitor, 51D/E Series N/A P0971WH
without Touchscreen (Tabletop) processors
70 Series processors N/A P0971WH
(GX1)
342
Table 9-3. 50 Series and 70 Series Workstation Monitor Part Numbers (Continued)
Northern Southern
Workstation Monitor Supports Color Hemisphere Hemisphere
21-Inch Workstation Monitor 50 Series processors Light Beige P0918VN P0918WE
without Touchscreen Gray P0918VQ P0918WG
(Embedded In MIW)
21-Inch Workstation Monitor 50 Series processors Light Beige P0918VP P0918WF
with Touchscreen Gray P0918VR P0918WH
(Embedded In MIW)
21-Inch Workstation Monitor 50 Series and Light Beige P0918VJ P0918WA
without Touchscreen (Tabletop) 70 Series processors Gray P0918VL P0918WC
21-Inch Workstation Monitor 50 Series and Light Beige P0918VK P0918WB
with Touchscreen (Tabletop) 70 Series processors Gray P0918VM P0918WD
Installation of the peripheral devices involves two operations addressed in the following sections.
The section “Peripheral Cable Routing within Enclosures” describes how the cables are routed
within the various enclosures and how cable connections are made at the mounting structures
within the enclosures. The subsequent two sections describe installation information for each
peripheral device.
NOTE
The AW50/51 serial port B can be used for either a VT100, printer, or GCIO inter-
face. These uses are mutually exclusive and are controlled by the system configura-
tion and hence, software install. To convert from VT100, or printer operation to
GCIO, or vice versa, you must change the system configuration and reinstall the
AW50/51 software.
Refer to the information developed during the site planning phase associated with the following
processors/modules to determine the types of peripheral devices included in your system:
♦ Communications Processor Modules
♦ Application Processor Modules
♦ Workstation Processor Modules.
Peripheral Cable Routing within Enclosures

Figure 9-1 shows typical peripheral cable routing within an enclosure and illustrates how the
peripheral connector jacks are attached to the mounting structure in an enclosure for the periph-
eral modules. The following sections describe peripheral cable routing within the individual types
of enclosures.
Industrial Enclosures 16 and 32, Peripheral Cable Routing

In Industrial Enclosures 16 and 32, the peripheral cables from the processor modules are routed
from a point above or below the 2x8 mounting structure, through an opening in the left side
panel, and then down along the front of the left side panel to the bottom of the enclosure, where
they connect to corresponding cables from the peripheral devices. This is shown in Figure 9-1.
343
To route a peripheral cable through Industrial Enclosure 16 or 32, proceed as follows:

1. Open front and left-side doors.
2. Referring to the information developed during the site planning phase determine the
location, within the enclosure, of the module to which the peripheral cable is to be
connected.
3. Grasping the cable with peripheral connector jack on one end, guide the
peripheral connector jack through the appropriate opening in the left side panel.
(Connection of the peripheral connector jack to the appropriate position on the
mounting structure is covered in “AP20-Based Peripheral Device Installation Proce-
dures” on page 429.)
4. Position the cable so that it runs behind the cable guides along the front edge of the
side panel and let the end of the cable rest at the bottom of the enclosure.
5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for the remaining peripheral cable connections
associated with this enclosure.
NOTE
Normally there is little or no strain on the cables connected in the manner described
above. However, should any strain appear to exist, Foxboro recommends that the
cables be placed in a clamp and the clamp secured to one of the inserts at bottom of
the side panel.
Peripheral
Cable
Front
To Matching
Peripheral
Left Side Cable
Figure 9-1. Industrial Enclosure 16 and 32, Peripheral Cable Routing
Floor-Mounted Field Enclosure 8, Peripheral Cable Routing

In the floor-mounted Field Enclosure 8, the peripheral cables from the modules are routed from a
point above or below the mounting structure, through an opening in the left side panel, and then
down along the front of the left side panel to the bottom of the enclosure, where they connect to
corresponding cables from the peripheral devices. Figure 9-1 shows this cable routing.
344
To route a cable through the floor-mounted Field Enclosure 8, proceed as follows:

1. If the doors are closed, release the latches on both front and left side doors and open.
2. Referring to the information developed during the site planning phase, determine the
connected.
3. Grasping the cable with peripheral connector jack on one end, guide the
peripheral connector jack through the appropriate opening in the left side panel.
(Connection of the peripheral connector jack to the appropriate position on the
mounting structure is covered in “AP20-Based Peripheral Device Installation Proce-
dures” on page 429.)
4. Position the cable so that it runs behind the cable guides along the front edge of the
side panel and let the end of the cable rest at the bottom of the enclosure.
5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for the remaining peripheral cable connections to
printers and compatible terminals associated with this enclosure.
NOTE
above. However, should any strain appear to exist, Foxboro recommends that the
cables be placed in a clamp and the clamp secured to one of the inserts at bottom of
the side panel.
Wall-Mounted Field Enclosure 8, Peripheral Cable Routing

In the wall-mounted Field Enclosure 8 (see Figure 9-2), the peripheral cables from the processor
modules are routed from a point above or below the mounting structure through an opening in
the left side panel. The cables then feed down through the wall mounting unit and down through
a user-supplied conduit, where they connect to corresponding cables from the peripheral devices.
To route a peripheral cable through the wall-mounted Field Enclosure 8:
1. If the front door is closed, release the latches on the door and open.
2. Remove the wall mounting unit access plate by removing the 12 plate retaining
screws.
345
Enclosure
(front view)
Wall
Mounting
Unit
Access
Plate
Conduit
(user-supplied)
To Matching
Peripheral
Cables
Figure 9-2. Wall Mounted Field Enclosure 8, Peripheral Cable Routing
connected.
4. Grasping the cable with peripheral connector jack on one end, guide the peripheral
connector jack through the appropriate opening in the left side panel. (Connection of
the peripheral connector jack to the appropriate position on the mounting structure is
covered in the section on “AP20-Based Peripheral Device Installation Procedures” on
page 429.)
5. Guide the other end of the cable down through the conduit.
6. Repeat Steps 3 through 5 for the remaining peripheral cable connections to printers
and compatible terminals associated with this enclosure, and replace the wall mount-
ing unit access plate.
NOTE
above. However, should any strain appear to exist, it is recommended that the cables
be placed in a clamp and the clamp secured to one of the inserts at bottom of the
side panel.
1x8 Mounting Structure, Peripheral Cable Routing

The 1x8 mounting structure is normally installed in a metal enclosure. Therefore, cable routing
depends on the particular mounting configuration. For most applications, the peripheral cables
are routed toward the rear of the mounting structure, as shown in Figure 9-3.
346
Proceed as follows:
connected. (Connection of the peripheral connector jacks to the appropriate positions
on the mounting structure is covered in “AP20-Based Peripheral Device Installation
Procedures” on page 429.)
2. Route the peripheral cable according to the requirements of your mounting
configuration.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the remaining peripheral cable connections to printers and
compatible terminals associated with this mounting structure.
I/A Series Metal Enclosures, Peripheral Cable Routing

There are no special requirements for routing peripheral cables within the I/A Series metal enclo-
sures (IEMFA/IEMFR and metal Field Enclosure 8). If the enclosure contains one or more 1x8
mounting structures, follow the peripheral cable routing procedures for the 1x8 mounting struc-
ture, presented in the preceding subsection.
Peripheral
Connector
Jack Peripheral
Cable
To Matching
Peripheral Cable
Figure 9-3. Stand-Alone 1x8 Mounting Structure Peripheral Cable Routing
Server 70-Based Peripheral Device Installation

Procedures for Current Processors
Peripheral device installation procedures for the Server 70 processors are listed in the Hardware
and Software Specific Instructions for Server 70 Processors document included with the processor.
Refer to “Determining Server 70 Processor Type” on page 598 to identify the document which
holds the installation procedures for your Server 70.
347
AW/WP70, Style A- and AW70, Style B-Based

Peripheral Device Installation Procedures for Current
NOTE
The information contained in this section is specific to the GX1 Pentium III
(P99*T, P98*R, and P97*L) processors. If you have a Pre-GX1 processor and need
assistance, please contact the Customer Satisfaction Center at 866-PHON-IPS
(866-746-6477) or visit http://ips.csc.invensys.com.
AW/WP70, Style A- and AW70, Style B-based peripheral devices are those serviced directly or
indirectly by the following processors:
♦ 70 Series GX1 Pentium III (P99*T) Application Workstation, Style A (AW70,
Style A)
♦ 70 Series GX1 Pentium III (P98*R) Workstation Processor, Style A (WP70, Style A)
♦ 70 Series Pentium III (P97*L) Application Workstation, Style B (AW70, Style B).
NOTE
For peripheral device installation procedures on processors other than the ones
mentioned above (such as earlier models of the AW70 and WP70, Style A, and
AW70, Style B), or to determine the type of CPU in your 70 Series processor, refer
to “Installation Instructions for Noncurrent 70 Series or Server 70 Workstations”
on page 591.
This section focuses on the installation of interface cards and connections to their associated
peripherals, offering installation procedures and information for each of these cards.
NOTE
Software installation for these cards is detailed in the Hardware and Software Specific
Instructions for 70 Series Processors document included with the processor.
70 Series processors are shipped with all required software pre-installed and preconfigured. If you
need to re-install software on the current processor for any reason, refer to Hardware and Software
Specific Instructions for 70 Series Processors (GX1 Pentium III) AW70A (P99*T), WP70 (P98*R),
and AW70B (P97*L) (B0400RL) for software re-installation procedures.
NOTE
For processors earlier than the GXa-based processor, refer to Software Installation
(Windows NT Operating System) (B0400JG).
Figure 9-4 and Figure 9-5 serve as a general reference, showing the cable connection points on the
AW/WP70, Style A and AW70, Style B processors.
348
Label indicating whether

the processor is a GXa
or GX1 Pentium II/III.
GX1
Diskette Drive A
Diskette Release
Button
Headphone Jack CD-ROM Drive
Volume Control Knob
CD Drive Busy LED
Emergency CD-ROM Eject 5.25 Inch Slots
B
s
70
rie
AW
Se
XX
I/A
X
XX
CD-ROM Eject
JA
XX
7X
P9
:
ev
/R
le
Sty
Power Button with Power LED
Reset Button
P-Code Label
Hard Drive Activity LED
Cover Release Button
Figure 9-4. Front Panel Layout for GX-Based 70 Series Processors
! CAUTION
To find out whether your processor is a GXa or a GX1-based processor, observe the
label in the upper left-hand corner of the front panel. It has either GXa or GX1 writ-
ten on it. For information on the GXa Pentium II processor, refer to Appendix C
“Installation Instructions for Noncurrent 70 Series or Server 70 Workstations”.
NOTE
Figure 9-5 shows a generic rear view of the 70 Series processor. The rear of your sys-
tem may look different due to the mixture of cards in your processor.
349
ac Power Cord Plug
115/230 Voltage
Selector Switch*
115
Parallel (Printer) Port
COM1 Serial Port

Mouse Port
Keyboard Port
Universal Serial Bus Connector Shown in
(not used) 115 V ac
COM2 Serial Port position
Serial Number
VGA Monitor Connector *See “Setting the PC’s
Voltage Selector Switch”
Microphone In Jack (not used)
Line Out (to speakers or monitor)
Line In Jack (not used)
Cover Lock (must be removed
before cover can open)
Slot 7 (PCI)
Slot 6 (PCI)
Slot 5 (PCI)
Slot 4 (Combo ISA/PCI)
Slot 3 (Combo ISA/PCI)
Slot 2 (ISA)
Slot 1 (ISA)
Figure 9-5. 70 Series GX-Based Processor Rear Panel Layout
Setting the PC’s Voltage Selector Switch

Before applying power to the processor, verify that the processor’s voltage selector switch is in the
correct position. The latest versions of the 70 Series processor have a label over the voltage selector
switch which informs you that the switch is set for 115 V by default. If you require the switch set
to 230 V, you must adjust it before applying power to the processor. Refer to Figure 9-5 to locate
the voltage selector switch.
! CAUTION
In 230 V ac systems, confirm that the voltage selector switch is fully locked in the
230 V ac position. If the switch is not locked in place, the result can destroy the power
supply. Be sure the number 230 is clearly visible on the switch, and that the switch
cannot be moved any further.
350
Interface Card Installation Overview

You can install the interface cards listed in Table 9-4 into the 70 Series processor.
Table 9-4. 70 Series Processor Interface Cards
Spare Part Upgrade Kit

Card Purpose Number Part Number
PC-FB (ISA) to interface with a Fieldbus P0960NB P0914LP
DigiBoard™ (ISA) to add additional COM ports P0912SF P0914LM
Ethernet 3Com 3C509 (ISA) to connect to a Foxboro Nodebus or a P0914PT P0914MC
corporate Ethernet
Ethernet 3Com 3C900B to connect to a corporate Ethernet or P0915YV P0914MD
(PCI) Foxboro Control Ethernet
Allen-Bradley 1784-KTX to connect to an Allen-Bradley Data P0912SE P0914LN
(ISA)1 Highway +
Allen-Bradley PKTX (PCI)2 P0915YU P0915ZM
Adaptec™ SCSI (PCI)1 to maintain a SCSI bus system in the P0912RE N/A3
Dual SCSI Controller (PCI)2 processor P0915YS N/A3
Ultra 2 SCSI Controller P0918SA N/A3
(PCI)
ColorGraphics Predator LT2 to enable dual-head monitor P0918XK P0918XM
Video Card4 (PCI) configurations in GX1 Pentium III
(500 Mhz) or later 70 Series processors
ColorGraphics Predator LT4 to enable quad-head monitor P0918XL P0918XN
Video Card (PCI) configurations in GX1 Pentium III
(500 Mhz) or later 70 Series processors
1.
For use with all Zenith-based, PowerMate-based, and GXa-based 70 Series processors. Refer to “Deter-
mining the Type of Processor You Have” on page 593 for illustrations of these processors.
2.
For use with GX1-based or later 70 Series processors.
3.
Included as standard with AW70, Style B processors only.
4.
For dual- or quad-head cards for previous 70 Series processors, refer to Installation Instructions for Multi-
Head Video Cards (B0193SW).
In addition to physically installing a card into the 70 Series processor, you often must first set the
card’s DIP switches or jumpers to specify the I/O address and the interrupt request (IRQ). Some
cards, however, perform an automatic selection. Refer to “AW70, Style A Hardware Parameters”
on page 352, “WP70, Style A Hardware Parameters” on page 353, and “AW70, Style B Hardware
Parameters” on page 353 for each card’s IRQ, I/O address, buffer, and slot position.
NOTE
Shaded card or device entries in Table 9-5, Table 9-6, and Table 9-7 are not config-
urable. These values are set by the system and cannot be altered.
351
AW70, Style A Hardware Parameters

Table 9-5 shows card slot positions and other hardware information for the GX1 Pentium III
550 MHz IDE AW70 Style A processors.
Table 9-5. AW70A Interface Card Parameters
Card/Device1 IRQ I/O Address Buffer Slot

Interval Timer 0 N/A N/A N/A
Keyboard 1 N/A N/A N/A
System PIC 2 N/A N/A N/A
COM 2 3 COM2=2F8 N/A N/A
–or– –or– –or–
DigiBoard – Multi-Port Serial Card COM3=120 Slot 2 (ISA)
COM4=128
COM5=130
COM6=138
Status=140
COM 1 4 3F8 N/A N/A
Integrated Sound 5 0388-038B N/A N/A
0540-0547
Disk Drive 6 N/A N/A N/A
Parallel Port (LPT1) 7 378 N/A N/A
Real-Time Clock 8 N/A N/A N/A
Integrated VGA Controller, or 9 N/A N/A N/A, or
Colorgraphic Dual/Quad-Head Video Card Slot 6 (PCI)
–and– –and–
3Com 3C900B PCI Card Slot 5 (PCI)
PC-FB Card 10 340 D8000 Slot 1 (ISA)
Integrated NIC (3C905B) 11 N/A N/A N/A
–and– –and–
Allen-Bradley PKTX Slot 4 (ISA/PCI
Combo)
Mouse or Trackball 12 N/A N/A N/A
Math Coprocessor 13 N/A N/A N/A
Primary/Secondary EIDE for Hard Drive(s) 14 N/A N/A N/A
IDE for CD-ROM Drive and/or EIDE Tape 15 N/A N/A N/A
Drive
1.
Gray items are non-configurable.
352
WP70, Style A Hardware Parameters

550 MHz IDE WP70, Style A processors.
Table 9-6. WP70 Interface Card Parameters

COM 2 3 2F8 N/A N/A
COM 1 4 3F8 N/A N/A
0540-0547
–and– –and–
3Com 3C900B PCI Card Slot 5 (PCI)
Primary/Secondary EIDE for Hard Drive(s) 14 N/A N/A N/A
IDE for CD-ROM Drive and/or EIDE 15 N/A N/A N/A
Tape Drive
1.
AW70, Style B Hardware Parameters

600 MHz SCSI AW70, Style B processors.
353
Table 9-7. AW70B Interface Card Parameters

COM 2 3 COM2=2F8 N/A N/A
DigiBoard – Multi-Port Serial Card COM3=120 Slot 2 (ISA)
COM4=128
COM5=130
COM6=138
Status=140
COM 1 4 3F8 N/A N/A
0540-0547
Parallel Port (for LPT1) 7 378 N/A N/A
–and– –and–
Secondary Ethernet Slot 5 (PCI)
(3Com 3C900B PCI Card)
Ultra 2 SCSI Controller 11 N/A N/A Slot 7 (PCI)
–and/or– –and–
Allen-Bradley PKTX Slot 4
(ISA/PCI
Combo)
1.
354
Card Installation in GX-Based 70 Series Processors

To install a card in a GX1 Pentium III (P99*T, P98*R, or P97*L) 70 Series processor, proceed as
follows.
NOTE
The following notes apply to the card installation procedures:
1. Depending upon the system configuration and population, set up interface cards
for the current version of the 70 Series processor as defined in “AW70, Style A
Hardware Parameters” on page 352, “WP70 Interface Card Parameters” on
page 353, and “AW70, Style B Hardware Parameters” on page 353.
2. Windows NT 4.0 does not fully recognize the video function unless
ServicePack 3 (Foxboro part number K0200QN) has been installed. Refer to the in
the Hardware and Software Specific Instructions for 70 Series Processors document
included with your processor for instructions on installing ServicePack 3.
3. This procedure is most easily performed with the processor sitting in the upright
position.
1. Ensure the processor is shut down, and the power cord is removed from the rear of the
processor.
2. Record and remove all cables connecting to any cards installed in the processor.
! CAUTION
The power cord must be removed from the processor before performing any pro-
cedure. Parts of the processor are kept alive, even when the processor is switched off.
Therefore, possible damage can occur unless the power cord has been removed.
3. Determine which ISA, or PCI slot the card must occupy. Refer to Figure 9-6 on
page 357 and the following tables for the card slot locations for cards installed in the
current 70 Series processors.
Table 9-8. AW70, Style A [GX1 Pentium III (P99*T)] Card Slot Locations
Position Interface Card

Slot 1 (ISA) Fieldbus PIO Interface (PC-FB)
Slot 2 (ISA) DigiBoard
Slot 3 (ISA/PCI Combo) Not used
Slot 4 (ISA/PCI Combo) Allen-Bradley PKTX PCI card
Slot 5 (PCI) Secondary 3Com 3C900B Ethernet PCI card
Slot 6 (PCI) Predator LT2 or LT4 (optional for dual/quad-head video) video card
Slot 7 (PCI) Not used
355
Table 9-9. WP70, Style A [GX1 Pentium III (P98*R)] Card Slot Locations

Slot 1 (ISA) Not used
Slot 5 (PCI) Secondary 3Com™ 3C900B Ethernet PCI card
Table 9-10. AW70, Style B [GX1 Pentium III (P97*L)] Card Slot Locations

Slot 2 (ISA) DigiBoard
Slot 4 (ISA/PCI Combo) Allen-Bradley PKTX PCI card
Slot 5 (PCI) Secondary 3Com 3C900B Ethernet PCI card
Slot 7 (PCI) Ultra 2 SCSI Controller
NOTE
The Ethernet cards (3Com 3C509 and 3C900B) must be terminated or connected
to a properly terminated network. The I/A Series system is shipped with a 50 ohm
terminator plug attached to the coaxial connector on the Ethernet cards. When
connecting to a network or Nodebus, the 50 ohm terminator must be removed.
356
View from Rear of Processor

Slot 7 Slot 6 Slot 5 Slot 4 Slot 3 Slot 2 Slot 1
Combo Combo
ISA ISA
PCI -or- -or-
PCI PCI PCI ISA ISA
PCI
Riser Card
Expansion-Card Cage (top view)
Connectors to Motherboard
Slot 7 (PCI)
Slot 6 (PCI)
Rear of Processor
Slot 5 (PCI)
Slot 4 (ISA/PCI Combo)
Slot 2 (ISA)
Slot 1 (ISA)
Riser Card Pull this tab out to separate riser card from motherboard.
Figure 9-6. Card Slot Positions in the GX-Based 70 Series Processor’s Expansion-Card Cage
NOTE
Before you remove the processor’s cover, ensure that it is not locked onto the chassis.
The lock, if used, is on the lower right-hand corner at the rear of the processor.
4. Push the button on the lower left-hand corner of the front on the processor to unlock
the processor cover, as shown in Figure 9-7.
5. Lift the processor cover up, and off the processor. The left side of the processor should
be exposed, as shown in Figure 9-7.
This is performed easily with the processor sitting in the upright position.
357
Upper Tabs
GX-Based Pentium II/III Processor
Processor Cover
Power Button
Reset Button
Filler Plates
Motherboard
Push this button to

release the cover.
Pull this tab to release the Expansion-Card Cage

expansion-card cage.
Figure 9-7. Removing the Processor’s Cover and Expansion-Card Cage
6. Pull out the tab at the bottom of the expansion-card cage, as shown in Figure 9-6 and
Figure 9-7.
7. Pull the expansion-card cage out from the processor, as shown in Figure 9-7.
8. Identify the slot in which you are installing the card (slots are shown in Figure 9-6).
Remove the screw holding this slot’s filler plate to the expansion-card cage, and
remove the filler plate.
9. Push the card into its proper ISA or PCI slot. Attach the card to the expansion-card
cage with the screw you removed in the previous step.
10. Slide the expansion-card cage back into the processor. Push the tab inwards to secure
the riser card to the motherboard.
11. Slide the upper tabs on the processor’s cover into the top of the processor’s chassis, and
lower the cover until it rests on the side of the processor.
12. Push the bottom of the cover inwards until you hear a click, indicating the cover has
been secured to the chassis.
13. Attach the required cables to the card (see below).
14. Reattach all cables to the remaining cards in the processor.
The card is now installed in the processor. Reattach the power cord to the processor, and restart it
when desired.
358
Setting Up the CMOS BIOS in a 70 Series Processor

The CMOS BIOS settings in 70 Series processors changes each time you install a card. These set-
tings must be reset to their factory-configured values after the card is installed in the processor.
Refer to the Hardware and Software Specific Instructions for 70 Series Processors document
included with your processor for instructions on resetting the CMOS BIOS.
You may need to reinstall some of the card’s drivers as well (such as the 3COM 3C900B PCI
Ethernet card’s driver). Refer to the Hardware and Software Specific Instructions for 70 Series Proces-
sors document included with your processor, for driver installation instructions.
Installing a PC-FB Card and Connecting to a Fieldbus

This section describes the proper configuration for the PC-FB ISA card (P0960NB), available in
the upgrade kit P0914LP.
To install a PC-FB card and connect it to a Fieldbus:
♦ Configure the PC-FB card jumper settings (refer to Figure 9-8).
♦ Install the configured PC-FB card into the correct slot in the AW70, Style A or AW70,
Style B processor (refer to Table 9-5, and Table 9-7, respectively).
♦ Connect the PC-FB card to the Fieldbus (see page 360).
NOTE
If you install a PC-FB card after installing I/A Series software or you set the wrong
IRQ during the installation, you must install the PC-FB card’s software driver. Refer
to the documentation included with the card for instructions.
Setting Jumpers on the PC-FB Card

Refer to Figure 9-8 and configure jumpers J1-J5 on the PC-FB card to match the information in
“AW70, Style A Hardware Parameters” on page 352 and “AW70, Style B Hardware Parameters”
on page 353.
359
Jumper J4
I/O Address – 340
Jumper J1, J2, J3
Shared Memory Port A
Address Space
(D8000)
328
338
348
358
Jumper J5
IRQ – 10 (for current AW70, Style A and
AW70, Style B)
A14
A15
A16
Port B
320
330
340
350
IRQ
J1
J2
J3
11
10
9
8
15
12
Figure 9-8. PC-FB Card Jumper Settings
For detailed information about the jumper settings for the PC-FB card, refer to the
documentation supplied with the unit.
NOTE
Refer to “Setting Up the CMOS BIOS in a 70 Series Processor” on page 359 for the
locations of instructions on configuring BIOS settings.
Connecting Fieldbus Modules to the PC-FB Card

The PC-FB card must be connected directly to a local Fieldbus, or to a termination cable assem-
bly (TCA: Foxboro part number P0800DS), which links the card to a remote Fieldbus. The
70 Series processor can then communicate with the Fieldbus Modules or Fieldbus Isolator
modules.
Figure 9-9 shows the locations where the Fieldbus A and Fieldbus B cables for a local or remote
Fieldbus attach to the connectors on the PC-FB card for both the AW70, Style A and AW70,
Style B processors.
To connect the TCAs to the Fieldbus, refer to “Termination Cable Assembly (TCA) Installation”
on page 223. Follow the instructions for redundant Fieldbus cabling.
NOTE
This procedure describes a redundant Fieldbus (two Fieldbus cables). Your system
may include only one Fieldbus. In this case, follow the instructions for non-
redundant Fieldbus cabling in the chapter “Termination Cable Assembly (TCA)
360
Card Slots Local Connections to Fieldbus
Port B To Fieldbus B**

Port A To Fieldbus A**
Cables - P0903ZW
PC-FB Card
Connectors
70 Series
Processor*
First Second
Connector Connector
(Port B) (Port A)
Card Slots Remote Connections to Fieldbus
The connectors are

trapezoid shaped with Port B
their bases smaller Port A
than their tops. Remote Fieldbus
Termination Cable
Assembly (TCA)
P0800DS - includes
cables
TCA to
Fieldbus B**
70 Series
Processor* TCA to
Fieldbus A**
* Generic 70 Series processor shown. See above for a diagram of the current 70 Series processor.
**Redundant Fieldbus connection shown. Only one TCA (TCA for Fieldbus A) required if non-redundant.
Figure 9-9. Connecting an AW70, Style A and AW70, Style B to a Local or Remote Fieldbus
Installing a DigiBoard
This section describes the proper configuration for the DigiBoard ISA card (P0912SF),
available in the upgrade kit P0914LM.
The DigiBoard (Foxboro part number P0912SF) is a 4-port serial card that provides additional
COM lines for external hardware. Each device connected through the DigiBoard to the 70 Series
processor uses a different I/O port, as listed in Table 9-5, and Table 9-7.
Before the DigiBoard is installed, its jumper and port switch settings must be configured.
After the DigiBoard is installed, its 4-port serial cable (Foxboro part number P0912SG) must be
connected to it to provide the physical connections for the additional COM lines.
361
NOTE
The following description is intended to assist you if service or reinstallation is
required.
To install a DigiBoard:
♦ Configure the jumper and port switch settings of the DigiBoard. Refer to “DigiBoard
Jumper and Port Switch Settings” on page 362.
♦ Install the configured DigiBoard card into the AW70, Style A or AW70, Style B:
♦ For installation instructions, refer to “Card Installation in GX-Based 70 Series
Processors” on page 355.
♦ Refer also to Table 9-5 and Table 9-7 for card slot positions.
♦ Refer to “70 Series GX-Based Processor Rear Panel Layout” on page 350 and
“Card Slot Positions in the GX-Based 70 Series Processor’s Expansion-Card Cage”
on page 357 for card slot locations.
NOTE
If I/A Series 6.0 or later is configured for a DigiBoard (Multiserial port or Modicon
Gateway) on the Commit disk, the Registry is set up during the installation of
I/A Series 6.0 or later automatically for the DigiBoard.
For processors with earlier versions of I/A Series software, refer to “Configuring
Windows NT for the DigiBoard” in Software Installation (Windows NT Operating
System) (B0400JG) for instructions on changing the system’s Windows NT
Registry.
Systems Without a DigiBoard

If your system does not include a DigiBoard card, the number of serial devices that can attach to
your system is restricted to two ports. If you attach an alarm printer to the COM1 port and a
backup alarm printer to the COM2 port, there is no available port for modem use (for
FOXWATCH™ support by Foxboro field service).
To accommodate a modem when no DigiBoard is installed:
♦ Install an alarm printer on COM1, and attach the modem to COM2.
-or-
♦ On systems configured with a WP70, Style A, attach the modem to one of the WP70,
Style A’s COM ports.
All of the stations (the AW/WP70, Style A or AW70, Style B) are accessible over the network,
regardless of the station that houses the modem.
DigiBoard Jumper and Port Switch Settings

Set the DigiBoard’s DS1-DS5 port switches, and configure the DigiBoard jumpers. Refer
to Table 9-11 and Figure 9-10.
362
NOTE
If you are installing a DigiBoard, you must disable COM2 in your system’s BIOS
settings. You do this by interrupting system bootup. Disabling COM2 is necessary
because COM2 and the DigiBoard use the same interrupt request, IRQ=3.
Refer to the Hardware and Software Specific Instructions for 70 Series Processors
document included with your processor for instructions on resetting the CMOS
BIOS.
Table 9-11. DigiBoard DS1-DS5 Switch Settings
Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
DS1 On Off On Off On On On On On On
DS2 On Off On On Off On On On
DS3 On Off On On Off On Off On
DS4 On Off On On Off Off On On
DS5 On Off On On Off Off Off On
363
Port # J1 J10 Interrupts

1 Odd
2
Even
3
J10
P2 P3
J1
1
2
3
IRQ
3 5 7 6 4 2
85 86 87 88 89 90
1 10 1 8 1 8 1 8 1 8
O
F
F
Rocker
DS1 DS2 DS3 DS4 DS5
Down
(140 hex, status) (120 hex, port1) (128 hex, port2) (130 hex, port3) (138 hex, port4)
Settings for the DS1-DS5 switches are shown in Table 9-11.
OFF
Left side view
Rocker switch shown in
down (OFF) position.
Figure 9-10. Setting the DigiBoard Jumper Settings
Connecting the DigiBoard to a Modbus for AW70s

This section describes how to connect the DigiBoard to a Modbus unit. Figure 9-11 shows the
processor’s DigiBoard interface connected to the 4-port serial cable (Foxboro part number
P0912SG), and a 9-pin (Foxboro part number P0912VN) cable connector connected to the
Modbus unit. The 4-port serial cable is included with the DigiBoard. The 12-foot cable, with its
9-pin connectors, is available through Invensys Systems, Inc.
364
For sites requiring greater distances between the Modbus unit and the AW70, use modems
between the P2 connector on the 4-port serial cable (P0912SG) and the 9-pin-to-9-pin connector
(P0912VN) cable.
Figure 9-12 shows the pinout from the DigiBoard to the Modbus.
NOTE
Leave the DigiBoard’s memory protect switch and communications parameter
switch in the default position.
Card Slots
DigiBoard Card
See Figure 9-12 for cable

pinout. Modbus Plus
Address Switch
P4
(not used)
P3
P2
4-Port Memory Protect Switch

P1
Serial Cable Communications

P0912SG Parameter Switch
Cable
70 Series P0912VN Modbus
Processor*
Figure 9-11. Connecting the DigiBoard in an AW70, Style A or AW70, Style B Processor
to a Modbus
AT to Compact Cable
9-Pin Female 9-Pin Male
IBM AT 984
NC 1 1 SHIELD
RX 2 2 RX
TX 3 3 TX TX: transmitted data DTR: data terminal ready
RX: received data CD: carrier detect
DTR 4 4 DTR
RTS: request to send CTS: clear to send
GROUND 5 5 GROUND DSR: data set ready NC: no connection
DSR 6 6 DSR
RTS 7 7 RTS
CTS 8 8 CTS
9 NC
Figure 9-12. Modbus Port Pinouts (Controller to 9-Pin and 9-Pin Panel Connections)
365
Configuring Sound
The sound function is already installed in the 70 Series processors in their system boards. The
output from this circuit is a line output which is not capable of directly driving a speaker. There-
fore, if this on-board circuit is to be utilized, the associated speakers must contain their own
amplification.
The sound function should be already enabled in your AW/WP70, Style A or AW70, Style B pro-
cessor. If you find that your integrated sound function has not been enabled, refer to the docu-
mentation included with your 70 Series processor.
Refer to Figure 9-5 on page 350 for the location of the line out plug. Insert the sound cord from
the speakers into this plug. Speakers can be either embedded into a monitor, or stand-alone.
Depending on the model of the separate speaker, if used, one of the two speakers may have either
a pushbutton switch for turning on/off the speakers’ internal amplifier. Plug the speakers into an
electrical outlet (if necessary), and place this switch in the ON position.
Installing an Ethernet Card

This section describes the proper configuration for the 3Com 3C509 Nodebus/Ethernet ISA card
(P0914PT), available in the upgrade kit P0914MC, and for the 3Com 3C900B Ethernet PCI
card (P0915YV), available in the upgrade kit P0914MD.
The available models for the AW/WP70, Style A and AW70, Style B include an Ethernet card
already installed, preconfigured to your specifications at the factory. These instructions are pro-
vided if you must reinstall a card, or add an additional Ethernet card.
The AW/WP70, Style A and AW70, Style B can connect to a DNBI, DNBT, or DNBX through
either the 3Com 3C509 ISA Ethernet card or the 3Com 3C900B PCI Ethernet card.
To facilitate communications to a corporate Ethernet, a WP70, Style A must contain both a PCI
Ethernet card as well as an ISA Ethernet card. The ISA Ethernet card manages Nodebus commu-
nications, while the PCI Ethernet card connects to the corporate Ethernet, or to an AW70 in a
stand-alone system. Refer to “Connecting WP70 to AW70 in a Stand-Alone System” on page 368
for more information on the latter configuration.
Ethernet Card Jumpers

You do not need to set any jumpers on the Ethernet card (3C509 or 3C900B). For detailed infor-
mation about the card, refer to the 3COM Adapter Guide for Etherlink™ III Parallel Tasking doc-
ument supplied with the card, or 3COM’s web site (www.3COM.com).
Ethernet Card Installation

The following information is provided for informational purposes only, as your system has been
preconfigured at the factory and the software has been loaded.
You require this information only if you:
♦ Add a card (or two cards) to your system, or
♦ Reinstall Windows NT.
366
Proceed as follows:
♦ Install the configured Ethernet card into the AW/WP70, Style A or AW70, Style B
processor:
♦ For installation instructions, refer to “Card Installation in GX-Based 70 Series
Processors” on page 355.
♦ Refer also to Table 9-5 and Table 9-7 for card slot positions.
NOTE
The 3Com 3C509 ISA card must be configured with the K0200QP diskette before
loading the driver for this card. Refer to the documentation included with your pro-
cessor for instructions on using the K0200QP diskette, included in the media kit
P0915JA for the GXa Pentium II processor, or media kit P0915YR for the GX1
Pentium II/III processor.
♦Install the ISA or PCI Ethernet card’s driver. Refer to “Installing a 3Com 3C509
Nodebus/Ethernet ISA Card” or “Installing a 3Com 3C900 Ethernet PCI Card” in
the Hardware and Software Specific Instructions for 70 Series Processors document
included with your processor.
♦ Connect the 3Com 3C509 ISA Ethernet card to Nodebus (if applicable). Refer to
“Dual Nodebus Interface Cabling” on page 486, “Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface
Cabling” on page 501, or “Dual Nodebus Extender Cabling” on page 511 for instruc-
tions for these connections.
Figure 9-13 explains the function of the connectors on the rear of the Ethernet cards.
3Com 3C509
or 3C900 Card
Three connectors: BNC ThinNet, AUI, and RJ-45 Connector
Figure 9-13. 3Com 3C509 and 3Com 3C900 Card Connectors
Terminating the Ethernet Network

If you intend to attach your Ethernet card to a coaxial network (10Base2), before configuring the
card, connect the Ethernet card’s BNC connector1 to your network cable or to a 50 ohm
terminator.
1.
One exception: if the ISA Ethernet card (3COM 3C509) connects to a DNBI via an AUI cable, the
50 ohm terminator plug should not be installed.
367
Automatic Cable Sensing

When you power up the PC, the Ethernet card senses the type of cable attached to it. Three types
of cabling are permitted [10Base2, 10BaseT (twisted-pair), and AUI]. If there is no 10BaseT or
AUI connection, the system defaults to 10Base2. If you connect a cable to the 3C900B card or
change the existing cable, you must shut down the system and power up the system to sense the
new cable connection.
NOTE
For a Nodebus operation with a DNBI through the AUI port on the 3C509B card,
the automatic cable sensing function must be disabled, and changed to the AUI
port to ensure a reliable connection to the DNBI.
Connecting WP70 to AW70 in a Stand-Alone System

For a WP70 in a stand-alone system, install a 3Com 3C900B Ethernet PCI card in both the
WP70 and its associated AW70. Run an RG-58 (ThinNet) cable, up to 150 m (500 ft), between
the WP70 and the AW70, and connect it to the BNC ThinNet connectors on the PCI Ethernet
cards (see Figure 9-13).
If you have two WP70s in your stand-alone system, terminate the Ethernet cable at the last
WP70.
NOTE
If you use a DNBI/DNBT/DNBX connection to the I/A Series Nodebus, you can-
not use this direct Ethernet WP70 to AW70 connection.
Refer to Figure 9-14 for an illustration of a WP70 connected to an AW70 with PCI Ethernet
cards.
368
Card Slots Card Slots
3Com 3C900 3Com 3C900

Ethernet Ethernet
PCI Card PCI Card
Tee Connector
P0912ZV
50 Ohm 50 Ohm
Terminator Terminator
P0912SY P0912SY
Up to 150 m (500 ft)
RG-58 (ThinNet)
User-supplied
Cable
AW70* WP70*
NOTE: The PCI Ethernet card can be installed horizontally or vertically, depending on which
version or style of 70 Series processor you have, and thus your configuration can differ
from the diagram shown here.
* Generic 70 Series processors shown. See above for a diagram of the current 70 Series processor.
Figure 9-14. WP70 Connected to AW70 via 3Com 3C900B PCI Ethernet Cards
Installing an Allen-Bradley KTX Communication Interface Card

This section describes the proper configuration for the two versions of this card:
♦ Allen-Bradley 1784-KTX ISA card2 (P0912SE), available in the upgrade kit
P0914LN
♦ Allen-Bradley PKTX PCI card3 (P0915YU), available in the upgrade kit P0915ZM.
The Allen-Bradley 1784-KTX Communication Interface card (A-B KTX (ISA) or A-B PKTX
(PCI)) is required to connect a 70 Series processor to Allen-Bradley equipment, such as the
Allen-Bradley PLC5 unit.
To install an Allen-Bradley KTX Communication Interface card:
♦ If you have an Allen-Bradley 1784-KTX ISA card, configure the jumper settings as
described below.
NOTE
The Allen-Bradley PKTX (PCI) communication interface card does not require any
jumpers to be set.
2.
For use with all Zenith-based, PowerMate-based, and GXa-based 70 Series processors. Refer to
“Determining the Type of Processor You Have” on page 593 for illustrations of these processors.
3.
For use with GX1-based or later 70 Series processors.
369
♦ Install the configured Allen-Bradley 1784-KTX ISA or PCI card into the processor.
For installation instructions, refer to“Card Installation in GX-Based 70 Series Proces-
sors” on page 355.
♦ Install the Allen-Bradley RSLinx software (version 2.0 for the PCI card) in the
70 Series processor to enable the card. Refer to Application Workstation 70 with
Allen-Bradley PLCs (Windows NT Operating System) (B0400AL) for information on
installing this software. Refer to the following caution.
! CAUTION
The Allen-Bradley PKTX (PCI) communication interface card requires RSLinx ver-
sion 2.0 or later software to support the card.
NOTE
These instructions are provided if, after receiving your system from Invensys Sys-
tems, Inc., you install an Allen-Bradley card in your system, or you must reinstall
the I/A Series software.
Setting A-B KTX ISA Communication Interface Card Jumpers

Refer to Figure 9-15 and configure the jumpers on the Allen-Bradley 1784-KTX ISA card
to match the information in Table 9-5 and Table 9-7.
NOTE
The Allen-Bradley PKTX (PCI) communication interface card does not require any
jumpers to be set.
370
SW3 SW4
7 8 9A 789
3 45 6
3 45 6
A
BC D E
BC D
Set this jumper to the
E
correct interrupt number, 0
F 12
0
12 F
listed in the “Hardware D C

Parameters” Tables 9-5 Channel 1 address
through 9-7, above. shown in DC00 position
Channel 1
SW3 SW4
789 789
34 56
34 56
ABCD
ABCD
EF 12 EF 12
0 0
Interrupts
CH1
3 TP
Interrupts
4 CH1
5
7
9
10
11
12
15
NOTE: Only one jumper is present on the interrupt switches. Multiple jumpers are shown to
indicate the possible locations of this jumper.
Figure 9-15. Jumper Settings – Allen-Bradley 1784-KTX Communication Interface ISA Card
For detailed information about the jumper settings for the Allen-Bradley 1784-KTX ISA commu-
nication interface card, refer to the documentation supplied with the unit.
Connecting the AW70, Style A and AW70, Style B Processor to the

Allen-Bradley Data Highway
The AW70, Style A and AW70, Style B processors support connection to Allen-Bradley equip-
ment through either an Allen-Bradley KTX (ISA or PCI) card, or an ISA Ethernet card (refer to
“Installing an Ethernet Card” on page 366).
When you have completed installing the RSLinx software (version 2.0 for the PCI version of this
card), you can connect the Allen-Bradley communication interface card to Allen-Bradley equip-
ment, such as the Allen-Bradley PLC5 unit.
Figure 9-16 shows the Allen-Bradley card interface to a Allen-Bradley PLC5 unit.
Attach the cable described as “Cable B” in Figure 9-16 from the PCL5 unit to the 3-pin jack in
the Allen-Bradley card. You can obtain this cable from Allen-Bradley.
371
Card Slots PLC
Allen-Bradley
KTX ISA or
PCI Card
Cable B
1
Shield
2
DH+
70 Series
Processor* NOTE: The Allen-Bradley card can be installed horizontally or vertically,
depending on which version or style of 70 Series processor you have,
and thus your configuration can differ from the diagram shown here.
Figure 9-16. AW70, Style A and AW70, Style B Processor Connection to Data Highway + via
Allen-Bradley Card
Video Function
The AW70/WP70, Style A and AW70, Style B processors can operate with either a single- or
multi-head display. Instructions for configuring both are provided below.
Single Display Configuration (On-board Video Function)

The current versions of the 70 Series processors have their video function incorporated into the
motherboard. Simply insert the monitor’s video input connector into the VGA port, as shown in
Figure 9-5.
To complete setting up the single-head display function, install the video driver for this card.
Refer to the Hardware and Software Specific Instructions for 70 Series Processors document included
with your 70 Series processor for driver installation and configuration instructions.
Multi-Head Display Configuration

This section describes the proper configuration for the following multi-head video cards:
♦ For versions of 70 Series processors released before the GX1 Pentium II-based
processor:
♦ ColorGraphics Dual Pro Lightning™ V2 PCI video card (P0913WT), no longer
available
♦ ColorGraphics Quad Pro Lightning™ V2 PCI video card (P0913WU), no longer
available
372
♦ For the GX1 Pentium II through GX1 Pentium III (500-600 MHz) versions of the
70 Series processors:
♦ Colorgraphics Evolution 2 PCI video card (P0917AA), available in the upgrade
kit P0917AC
♦ Colorgraphics Evolution 4 PCI video card (P0917AB), available in the upgrade
kit P0917AD
♦ For the GX1 Pentium III (500 Mhz) or later 70 Series processors:
♦ Colorgraphics Predator LT2 PCI video card (P0918XK), available in the upgrade
kit P0918XM
♦ Colorgraphics Predator LT4 PCI video card (P0918XL), available in the upgrade
kit P0918XN.
For dual-head or quad-head displays, AW70/WP70, Style A and AW70, Style B processors require
the installation of a multi-head video card (listed above). These cards use a PCI card slot, and
allow the 70 Series processor to display with two or 4 monitors.
NOTE
If you are installing the Evolution or Predator PCI card in a processor containing a
3Com 3C900 Ethernet card, you must first remove the 3C900 card’s driver. Refer
to Installation Instructions for Multi-Head Video Cards (B0193SW) for instructions on
removing this driver.
If you are using a Quad Pro Lightning V2 video card, refer to the following section. Otherwise,
proceed to “Multi-Head Video Card Installation” on page 374.
Preinstallation Procedure (Quad Pro Lightning V2 Video Card Only)
NOTE
The following instructions are only to be used if a Quad Pro Lightning V2 video
card must be installed in a 70 Series processor. The Dual Pro Lightning V2 video
card is not affected.
There is a timing difference between the speeds at which the Quad Pro Lightning V2 video card
and the 70 Series processors operate. A switch must be set on the Quad Pro Lightning V2 video
card to properly adjust its speed to match that of the 70 Series processor.
On the row of switches on the upper-left hand corner of the Quad Pro Lightning V2 video card
(see Figure 9-17), push switch 8 up to set it in the ON position.
373
ON
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Switches
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Switch Block SWI

(enlarged) Push switch 8 up
to the ON position. Quad Pro Lightning V2 Video Card
Figure 9-17. Setting Switch 8 on the Quad Pro Lightning V2 Video Card
You have completed adjusting the Quad Pro Lightning V2 video card.
Multi-Head Video Card Installation

To install one of the multi-head video cards, you must perform the following procedures. Refer to
the specific user documentation included with the video card for additional installation
instructions.
! CAUTION
If used, the Dual or Quad Pro Lightning V2 video cards must be located in the
proper slot if they are used with a 3Com 3C900B PCI Ethernet card. If these cards
are used together, and either is located in an improper slot, communications failures
could bring down the Ethernet network. The proper slots for each of these cards are
listed in Appendix C “Installation Instructions for Noncurrent 70 Series or Server
70 Workstations”.
NOTE
If you are installing the Evolution or Predator PCI card in a processor containing a
3Com 3C900 Ethernet card, you must first remove the 3C900 card’s driver. Refer
to Installation Instructions for Multi-Head Video Cards (B0193SW) for instructions on
removing this driver.
♦ Install the video card into the 70 Series processor:

♦ For installation instructions and card slot positions, refer to “Card Installation in
GX-Based 70 Series Processors” on page 355.
♦ If the card is a multi-head video card, follow the instructions in “Connecting the
Monitors to the Multi-Head Video Cards” on page 375.
374
♦ Install the video card’s software driver.

♦ Configure the Alarm Manager for the multi-head video configurations.
♦ Optionally, install the Mover utility (or Mover99 utility for the Predator LT Series
cards).
♦ Ensure the software card driver is installed.
Refer to Installation Instructions for Multi-Head Video Cards (B0193SW) for configuration and
connection instructions for both single-head and multi-head functions.
Installation of single- or multi-head displays with the AW/WP70, Style A and AW70, Style B is
complete.
Connecting the Monitors to the Multi-Head Video Cards

Instructions for connecting the monitors to the video cards vary depending on whether a dual- or
quad-head video card is being installed.
First, you must choose how you want the monitors to be positioned in your final configuration.
Figure 9-18 provides an illustration of the available monitor configurations. Assign each monitor
a number as shown in Figure 9-18.
Part numbers for monitors are provided in Table 9-3.
For Dual-Head Displays
Configuration 1: Configuration 2:
Monitor 1
Monitor 1 Monitor 2
Monitor 2
For Quad-Head Displays
Configuration:
Monitor 1 Monitor 2
Monitor 3 Monitor 4
Figure 9-18. Possible Configurations for Multi-Head Displays
Dual Pro Lightning V2 Video Card Monitor Connection

The Dual Pro Lightning V2 video card attaches to the monitors through two 15-pin VGA con-
nectors, as shown in Figure 9-19.
375
Monitor 2 Video 2
Monitor 1 Video 1
PCI Slot
Motherboard/
Riser Card
Figure 9-19. Dual Pro Lightning V2 Video Card
Plug the connector for Monitor 1 into the socket marked Video 1 and plug the connector for
Monitor 2 into the socket marked Video 2, as shown in Figure 9-19. The connector located clos-
est to the video card’s PCI slot connector is the socket marked Video 1.
NOTE
All bootup information appears on Monitor 1 for the Dual Pro Lightning V2 video
card.
Quad Pro Lightning V2 Video Card Monitor Connection

Two Y cables are included with the Quad Pro Lightning V2 video card to enable it to connect
with four monitors. Each of these two Y cables is attached to one of the video card’s two 15-pin
VGA connectors, as shown in Figure 9-20. The four other ends of each Y cable connect to the
four monitors.
Connector
2
Connector Video 2/4
4
Y Cable 2/4
Connector
1
Connector Video 1/3
3
Y Cable 1/3
Motherboard/ PCI Slot

Riser Card
NOTE: Each monitor connects to the Quad Pro Lightning V2 video card via the connector which
has been assigned the same number as the monitor.
Figure 9-20. Quad Pro Lightning V2 Video Card
376
1. Securely fasten the end of the Y cable marked 1/3 into the socket marked Video 1/3 as
illustrated in Figure 9-20. It is the connector located closest to the video card’s PCI
edge connector.
2. Securely fasten the end of the Y cable marked 2/4 into the socket marked Video 2/4 as
illustrated in Figure 9-20. It is the connector furthest from the video card’s PCI edge
connector.
3. Perform the following connections, referring to Figure 9-20:
♦ Attach the end of the 1/3 Y cable marked Connector 1 to Monitor 1.
NOTE
All bootup information appears on Monitor 1 for the Quad Pro Lightning V2 video
card.
Evolution 2 Video Card Monitor Connection

The Evolution 2 video card attaches to the monitors through two VGA connectors, as shown in
Figure 9-21.
Monitor 2 Video 2
Monitor 1 Video 1

Riser Card
NOTE: Each monitor connects to the Evolution 2 video card via the connector which has
been assigned the same number as the monitor.
Figure 9-21. Evolution 2 (Dual-Head) Video Card
est to the video card’s PCI slot connector is the socket marked Video 1 in Figure 9-21.
NOTE
All bootup information appears on Monitor 2 for the Evolution 2 video card.
377
Evolution 4 Video Card Monitor Connection

One cable with four connectors is included with the Evolution 4 video card, to enable it to con-
nect with four monitors. The cable attaches to the video card’s VGA connector, as shown in
Figure 9-22. The four other ends of the cable connect to the four monitors.
Connector
1
Connector
2
VGA Connector
Connector
3
Cable
Connector included
4 with Card

Riser Card
NOTE: Each monitor connects to the Evolution 4 video card via the connector which has
Figure 9-22. Evolution 4 (Quad-Head) Video Card
1. Securely fasten the end of the cable into the Evolution 4 card’s connector as illustrated
in Figure 9-22.
♦ Attach the end of the cable marked 1 to Monitor 1.
NOTE
All bootup information appears on Monitor 4 for the Evolution 4 video card.
Predator LT2 Video Card Monitor Connection

The Predator LT2 video card attaches to the monitors through two VGA connectors, as shown in
Figure 9-23.
378
To Monitor 2 Video 2
To Monitor 1 Video 1

Riser Card
Note: Each monitor connects to the Predator LT2 video card via the connector which has
Figure 9-23. Predator LT2 (Dual-Head) Video Card
est to the video card’s PCI slot connector is the socket marked Video 1 in Figure 9-23.
NOTE
All boot up information appears on Monitor 2 for the Predator LT2 video card.
Predator LT4 Video Card Monitor Connection

One cable with four connectors is included with the Predator LT4 video card, to enable it to con-
nect with four monitors. The cable attaches to the video card’s VGA connector, as shown in
Figure 9-24. The four other ends of the cable connect to the four monitors.
Connector
1
Connector
2
VGA Connector
Connector
3
Cable
Connector Included
4 with card

Riser Card
Note: Each monitor connects to the Predator LT4 video card via the connector which has
Figure 9-24. Predator LT4 (Quad-Head) Video Card
379
1. Securely fasten the end of the cable into the Predator LT4 card’s connector as illus-
trated in Figure 9-24.
NOTE
All boot up information appears on Monitor 4 for the Predator LT4 video card.
Connection of multi-head displays to the multi-head video cards is complete. Return to “Multi-
Head Video Card Installation” on page 374 to finish software installation for the cards.
Printers – Connections to AW/WP70, Style A and AW70, Style B

The following printers can be connected to the AW/WP70, Style A and AW70 Style B
processors: 80-column dot-matrix printer, 132-column dot-matrix printer, color PostScript
printer and color PCL3 InkJet™ printer.
! WARNING
Before connecting the ac power line to a peripheral device, ensure that the voltage at
the ac receptacle matches the power requirements indicated on the device data label.
! WARNING
If you substitute an alternate type of plug (or other connection) in place of the one
supplied with the power cord, shock hazard protection requires that you follow
proper polarity and safety earthing (grounding) method.
Setting Up the Printer

To set up the printer for the AW70/WP70, Style A or AW70, Style B processor:
1. Connect the printer’s power cord to a power source.
2. Connect the printer’s communications cable to the processor as shown in Figure 9-25.
3. To check on (or set) the printer’s operating parameters, refer to “Peripheral Device
Operating Parameter Settings” on page 444.
4. If it is not already, set up the printer for Windows NT; refer to Software Installation
(Windows NT Operating System) (B0400JG) or Color Printer Installation for V4.3.x,
V6.1.x, and V6.2.x (B0400SF) for instructions.
380
NOTE
To install a DigiBoard for the dot-matrix printers, refer to “Installing a DigiBoard”
on page 361.
AW70/WP70 Style A and AW70, Style B
4-Port B/W Dot-Matrix Printer 80

See Note Serial Cable P0901ED/EE/EF
P0912SG*
Cable
P0912VK
7.5 m (25 ft) P4
OR OR P3 OR
P2 Color Dot-Matrix Printer 132
P1 P0913AV/AW
Cable
P0912VK
7.5 m (25 ft)
B/W Dot-Matrix Printer 80 DigiBoard

P0912SF Color PCL3 Printer
P0901ED/EE/EF
P0917BD
Cable OR
P0900ZR, OR
4.5 m (15 ft)
Color Dot-Matrix Printer 132 OR
P0913AV/AW P0971LS,
15 m (50 ft)**
Color PostScript Printer
P0912QJ

P0918FG – Optra 45
NOTE: Either or both serial printers may connect to either or both port connectors (COM1/COM2).
*Included with DigiBoard - P0912SF.
**P0971LS is a kit consisting of cabling, a transceiver module, and a receiver module.
Figure 9-25. Printer Cable Connections to AW70/WP70 Style A Processor
381
GCIO Interface Module Cabling for 70 Series Processors

The optional GCIO interface module (P0904AK) provides an electrical interface for the annunci-
ator and annunciator/numeric keyboards. P0922AG includes an interface for a touchscreen and
an annunciator keyboard.
To connect the GCIO interface module to the 70 Series processor, make the cable connections to
the port configured during the System Definition process for the GCIO, as shown in Figure 9-26.
COM2*
GCIO Interface Module
P0971SU - 3 m (10 ft) P0904AK/ P0904AL
P0971SV - 15 m (50 ft)
P0971WZ - 30 m (100 ft) or
P1
P2
P3
P4
AW70 or WP70
* The COM2 port is disabled if a DigiBoard is installed in the 4-Port
processor. Connect the GCIO Interface module into one of Serial Cable DigiBoard
the DigiBoard ports if the DigiBoard is present. P0912SG* P0912SF
* The communications port is selected when setting up System
Definitions.
Figure 9-26. GCIO Cabling to AW70 or WP70
You have completed connecting the GCIO to your 70 Series processor. Refer to “Annunciator and
Annunciator/Numeric Keyboard: WP30, WP50/51, or AW50/51 Application” on page 424 for
instructions on connecting keyboards to the GCIO.
Dual GCIO Interface Module Cabling

A second GCIO is required if the second workstation display in the dual-display configuration
described includes a touchscreen and/or annunciator/numeric keyboard. If there are dual GCIOs,
make the cable connections as described for the primary GCIO in a stand-alone or system-con-
nected processor configuration (as shown in the previous subsection “GCIO Interface Module
Cabling for 70 Series Processors” on page 382) and then perform the cabling for the secondary
GCIO as shown in Figure 9-27. The dashed lines in Figure 9-27 indicate the second workstation
cabling and peripherals in a typical dual GCIO configuration.
382
I/A Series (Video)

Monitor
AW/WP70
(Video) With
Workstation Monitor Touchscreen
With
Touchscreen Captive Touchscreen Cable
P0971SU/SV/WZ*
Secondary
Primary GCIO
GCIO Captive Touchscreen Cable Interface Box
Interface Box P0922AG/
P0922AG/ P0904AK**
P0904AK**
P0800MW P0800MV
P0800MW
P0800MV
Input Output Input Output
Annunciator Keyboard #1 Annunciator Keyboard #4
P0903CV/CW*** P0903CV/CW***
P0970HV
Input Output Input Output

Annunciator Keyboard #2 Annunciator Keyboard #3
P0903CV/CW*** P0903CV/CW***
*P0971SU = 10 ft; P0971SV = 50 ft; P0971WZ = 100 ft.
**P0904AK = without touchscreen, P0922AG = with touchscreen.
***P0903CV has 48 annunciator keys, P0903CW has a numeric keypad and 32 annunciator keys.
Figure 9-27. GCIO Devices for AW70/WP70
AP50/51-, WP50/51-, or AW50/51-Based Peripheral

Device Installation Procedures
AP50/51-, WP50/51-, or AW50/51-based peripheral devices are those serviced, directly or indi-
rectly, by the following processors:
♦ Application Processor 50 (AP50), Workstation Processor 50 (WP50), or
Application Workstation 50 (AW50)
♦ Application Processor 51A (AP51A), Workstation Processor 51A (WP51A), or Appli-
cation Workstation 51A (AW51A)
♦ Application Processor 51B (AP51B), Workstation Processor 51B (WP51B), or Appli-
cation Workstation 51B (AW51B)
♦ Application Processor 51B1 (AP51B1), Workstation Processor 51B1 (WP51B1), or
Application Workstation 51B1 (AW51B1)
♦ Application Workstation 51C (AW51C)
♦ Application Processor 51D (AP51D), Workstation Processor 51D (WP51D), or
Application Workstation 51D (AW51D)
♦ Application Processor 51E (AP51E), Workstation Processor 51E (WP51E), or Appli-
cation Workstation 51E (AW51E)
♦ X Terminal4.
383
Most of the I/A Series peripheral devices are physically connected to AP50/51, WP50/51, or
AW50/51 processors. An alphanumeric keyboard or 21-inch workstation display can be con-
nected to the X Terminal. The mouse, trackball, or industrial pointing device connects to the
alphanumeric keyboard.
Figure 9-28 through Figure 9-34 serve as a general reference, showing the cable connection points
on the AP51, WP51, and AW51 processors and the X Terminal.
NOTE
The following notes pertain to all 50 Series processors:
1. This subsection assumes that the installer has read the section on “Peripheral
Cable Routing within Enclosures” on page 343, and is thoroughly familiar with its
contents. It also assumes that the peripheral device has been prepared according to
the placement and mounting instructions in Chapter 2 “Equipment Mounting
Procedures”.
2. In the following procedures, a system-connected processor is one that connects to
the Nodebus via a DNBI, DNBT, or DNBX, and a stand-alone processor is one
that has no DNBI/DNBT/DNBX connection to the Nodebus.
1 2 3 4
5
Slot 0 Slot 1
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7
1 – Lock Block 8 – Parallel Port
2 – Courtesy ac Power Outlet 9 – SCSI Port
3 – ac Power Input Receptacle 10 – 13W3 Video Port (Monitor)
4 – ac Power Switch 11 – Serial Ports, A/B
5 – SBus Card Connector Openings 12 – Audio Output Jack
6 – Twisted-Pair Ethernet Port 13 – Audio Input Jack
7 – AUI/Audio Port 14 – Keyboard Port
Figure 9-28. AP51A, AW51A, or WP51A Processor Rear Panel
4.
The X Terminal is a user-supplied device. Information pertaining to this processor is provided for
your convenience.
384
1 2 3 4
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3
13 15
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 14 16
1 – ac On/Standby Switch 9 – Twisted-Pair Ethernet Port
2 – Courtesy ac Power Outlet 10 – Serial Port B
3 – Lock Block 11 – Serial Port A
4 – SBus Card Connector Openings 12 – Keyboard Connector
5 – ac Power Input Receptacle 13 – Audio, Headphone
6 – External SCSI Port 14 – Audio, Line-Out
7 – Parallel Port 15 – Audio, Line-In
8 – AUI Ethernet Port 16 – Audio, Microphone
Figure 9-29. AP51B, AW51B, or WP51B Processor Rear Panel
1 2 3 4 5
Slot 1 Slot 3
Slot 0 Slot 2
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1516 17
1 – ac On/Standby Switch 9 – Keyboard/Mouse Connector

2 – Courtesy ac Power Outlet 10 – Ethernet/AUI Port
3 – Lock Block 11 – Parallel Port
4 – SPARC module slots 12 – Twisted-Pair Ethernet Port
5 – SBus Card Connector Openings 13 – SCSI - 2 Port
6 – ac Power Input Receptacle 14 – Audio, Headphones
15 – Audio, Microphone
7 – Video Port
16 – Audio, Line Out
8 – Serial A/B Port 17 – Audio, Line In
Figure 9-30. AW51C Processor Rear Panel
385
1 2 3 13 14 15 16 4 7
SBus
Slot
5 12 11 10 9 8 6
1 – ac On/Standby Switch 9 – Twisted-Pair Ethernet Port
2 – Courtesy ac Power Outlet 10 – Monitor Connector
3 – Lock Block 11 – Serial Port A/B
4 – SBus Card Connector Opening 12 – Keyboard Connector
5 – ac Power Input Receptacle 13 – Audio, Headphone
6 – External SCSI Port 14 – Audio, Line-Out
7 – Parallel Port 15 – Audio, Line-In
8 – AUI Ethernet Port 16 – Audio, Microphone
Figure 9-31. AP51B1, AW51B1, or WP51B1 Rear Panel
1 2 3
4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 – ac On/Standby Switch 6 – Serial A/B Port

2 – Courtesy ac Power Outlet 7 – Video Port
3 – Lock Block 8 – Twisted-Pair Ethernet Port
4 – ac Power Input Receptacle 9 – AUI Ethernet Port
5 – Keyboard/Mouse Connector 10 – Parallel Port
Figure 9-32. X Terminal Rear Panel
386
1 2 10 13 9 11 14
3 4 5 6 7 8 12 15 16
1 – Power on Switch 9 – PCI Card Connector Opening (PCI Slot 1)
2 – 115 V/230 V Switch 10 – PCI Card Connector Opening (PCI Slot 2)
3 – ac Power Input Receptacle 11 – PCI Card Connector Opening (PCI Slot 3)
4 – Audio, Line-Out 12 – Serial Port A (25-pin)
5 – Audio, Headphone Not used for 13 – Serial Port B (9-pin)
6 – Audio, Line-In I/A Series 14 – Parallel Port
7 – Audio, Microphone 15 – VGA Port for Display
8 – Keyboard Connector 16 – Twisted-Pair Ethernet Port
Figure 9-33. AP51D, AW51D, or WP51D Processor Rear Panel
14
2
3
4 A B
5
6 TP
<...>
7 MII
<...>
1 15
8
9
10
PCI166 1
16 17 18 19
11 PCI 2
12 PCI 3
13 PCI 4
1 – ac On/Standby Switch 11 – PCI Card Connector Opening (PCI Slot 2)

2 – Parallel Port 12 – PCI Card Connector Opening (PCI Slot 3)
3 – Keyboard Connector 13 – PCI Card Connector Opening (PCI Slot 4)
4 – Serial Port A 14 – ac Power Input Receptacle
5 – Serial Port B 15 – Lock Block
6 – Twisted-Pair Ethernet Port 16 – Audio, Headphone
7 – MII Connector Port (for Nodebus) 17 – Audio, Line-Out Not used
8 – External 68-pin Ultra-Wide SCSI Port 18 – Audio, Line-In in I/A Series
9 – UPA Creator Graphics video card 19 – Audio, Microphone
10 – Slot for Additional UPA Creator Graphics video card
NOTE: AW51E (Style C and up) has a slightly different front panel than the one shown above.
Figure 9-34. AP51E, AW51E or WP51E Processor Rear Panel
387
SBus Card Slot Usage

For each type of Model 50/51 Style A, B, and C processor (AP50/51, WP50/51, or AW50/51),
certain SBus cards can only be used in designated SBus slots. For installation instructions for the
SBus cards, refer to SBus Card Kit Installation Procedures for 50 Series Processors (B0193SC).
The following subsections specify SBus card slot usage requirements for these I/A Series
processors.
AP50/WP50/AW50 SBus Card Slot Usage

The AP50, WP50, and AW50 processors support the following SBus card options:
♦ Second SCSI interface (used for disk mirroring)
♦ Second (optional) Ethernet interface (for connection to non I/A Series network).
The second SCSI interface SBus card must be located in SBus slot 1. If this card is not located in
slot 1, the mirrored disk system connected to this interface is not able to boot.
NOTE
In Model 50 stations, Slot 1 is closest to the center of the unit.
The second (optional) Ethernet interface SBus card operates correctly in either SBus slot.
AP51A/WP51A/AW51A SBus Card Slot Usage

The AP51A, WP51A, and AW51A processors support the following SBus card options:
♦ Fast SCSI/Buffered Ethernet interface (used for disk mirroring and/or for twisted-pair
Ethernet connection to a non I/A Series network)
♦ Second video port (second color frame buffer SBus card) used to support a second dis-
play (not supported on AP51A)
♦ Second (optional) Ethernet interface (for connection to non I/A Series network).
If the Fast SCSI/Buffered Ethernet SBus card or Fast SCSI Plus Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ether-
net card is used for disk mirroring, it must be located in SBus slot 1. (Refer to Figure 9-28 for
card slot location.) If this card is not located in slot 1, the mirrored disk system connected to this
interface is not able to boot. If this card is used for a function other than disk mirroring, it may be
located in any available SBus slot.
The second video port SBus card must be located in SBus slot 0. (Refer to Figure 9-28 for card
slot location.) If this card is not located in slot 0, it does not function properly.
The second (optional) Ethernet interface SBus card operates correctly in either SBus slot. Refer to
“Second Ethernet Port (for 50 Series Products)” on page 528 for card application information.
388
AP51B/WP51B/AW51B SBus Card Slot Usage

The AP51B, WP51B, and AW51B processors support the following SBus card options:
♦ Fast SCSI/Buffered Ethernet interface card, or Fast SCSI Plus twisted-pair
10/100 Mbps Ethernet interface card. These dual-ported cards are used for the fol-
lowing functions:
♦ The SCSI port is used for disk mirroring (not supported on WP51B).
♦ The twisted-pair Ethernet port is used for connection to a non I/A Series network,
or connection to the X Terminal.
play (not supported on AP51B).
♦ Second (optional) Ethernet interface (for connection to non I/A Series network, or to
X Terminal via adapter module).
♦ Token Ring interface.
♦ Windows® on I/A Series (not supported on AP51B or WP51B).
♦ Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) 155 Mbps with Fiber Optic Cable network
connections.
♦ Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) 155 Mbps with twisted-pair cable network
connections.
♦ AW51B only:
♦ Serial/Parallel Interface card (P0971SG) for communication with such RS-232-C
devices as Modicon devices, Foxboro Model 760 controllers, and serial Allen-Bra-
dley PLCs. Refer to “50 Series AW51 Direct Connection to RS-232-C Process
I/O Devices” on page 551.
♦ I/A Series Fieldbus interface card, for direct process I/O via I/A Series FBMs,
FBCs, and so forth. Refer to “AW51B/AW51C Direct Connection to Fieldbus”
on page 550.
NOTE
In addition to the possible optional SBus cards listed above, the WP51B and
AW51B processors include, as standard equipment, a primary video SBus card. This
card must be located in SBus slot 3.
If the Fast SCSI/Buffered Ethernet SBus card or Fast SCSI Plus Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ether-
net card is used for disk mirroring, it must be located in SBus slot 2. (Refer to Figure 9-29 for
card slot location.) If this card is not located in slot 2, the mirrored disk system connected to this
interface is not able to boot. If this card is used for a function other than disk mirroring, it may be
located in any available SBus slot.
It is recommended that the second video port SBus card be located in SBus slot 1. (Refer to
Figure 9-29 for card slot location.) If this card is not located in slot 1, it is difficult to add a Fast
SCSI/Buffered Ethernet SBus card later.
The ATM 155 Mbps SBus card can be used in slot 1 or 2 of AW51B or WP51B; or slot 1, 2, or 3
of AP51B.
All of the remaining SBus card options operate properly in any SBus slot.
389
For information on implementing the second (optional) Ethernet interface card, refer to “Second
Ethernet Port (for 50 Series Products)” on page 528. For information on implementing the Token
Ring interface card, refer to “Token Ring Interface” on page 542. For information on implement-
ing the ATM 155 Mbps SBus card, refer to “ATM 155 Mbps Fiber or Twisted-Pair Communica-
tions” on page 539.
AP51B1/WP51B1/AW51B1 SBus Card Slot Usage

The AP51B1, WP51B1, and AW51B1 processors support the following SBus card options:
♦ Fast SCSI/Buffered Ethernet interface card, or Fast SCSI Plus Twisted-Pair
10/100 Mbps Ethernet interface card. These dual-ported cards are used for the fol-
lowing functions:
♦ The SCSI port is used for disk mirroring (not supported on WP51B1).
♦ The twisted-pair Ethernet port is used for connection to a non I/A Series
network, or connection to the X Terminal.
play (not supported on AP51B1).
the X Terminal via adapter module).
♦ Windows on I/A Series (not supported on AP51B1 or WP51B1).
♦ Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) 155 Mbps with Fiber Optic cable network
connections.
♦ Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) 155 Mbps with twisted-pair cable network
connections.
ing the ATM 155 Mbps SBus card, refer to “ATM 155 Mbps Fiber or Twisted-Pair Communica-
AW51C SBus Card Slot Usage

The AW51C processor support the following SBus card options:
♦ Fast SCSI/Buffered Ethernet interface card, or Fast SCSI Plus Twisted-Pair 10/100
Mbps Ethernet interface card. These dual-ported cards are used for the following
functions:
♦ The SCSI port is used for disk mirroring.
♦ The twisted-pair Ethernet port is used for connection to a non I/A Series
network, or connection to the X Terminal.
♦ Second video port (second color frame buffer SBus card) used to support a second
workstation display.
the X Terminal via adapter module).
390
♦ Windows on I/A Series.

♦ Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) 155 Mbps with Fiber Optic cable network
connections.
♦ Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) 155 Mbps with Twisted-Pair cable network
connections.
♦ Serial/Parallel Interface card (P0971SG) for communication with such RS-232-C
devices as Modicon devices, Foxboro Model 760 controllers, and serial
Allen-Bradley PLCs. Refer to “50 Series AW51 Direct Connection to RS-232-C Pro-
cess I/O Devices” on page 551.
♦ I/A Series Fieldbus interface card, for direct process I/O via I/A Series FBMs, FBCs,
and so forth. Refer to “AW51B/AW51C Direct Connection to Fieldbus” on page 550.
NOTE
In addition to the possible optional SBus cards listed above, the AW51C processor
includes, as standard equipment, a primary video SBus card. This card must be
located in SBus slot 2.
The Fast SCSI/Buffered Ethernet SBus card or Fast SCSI Plus Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ether-
net card must be located in SBus slot 3. (Refer to Figure 9-30 for card slot location.) If this card is
not located in slot 3, the mirrored disk system connected to this interface is not able to boot. If
this card is used for a function other than disk mirroring, it may be located in any available SBus
slot.
It is recommended that the second video port SBus card be located in SBus slot 0. (Refer to
Figure 9-30 for card slot location.)
The ATM 155 Mbs SBus card can be used in slot 0, 1, or 3.
All of the remaining SBus card options operate properly in any SBus slot.
ing the ATM 155 Mbs SBus card, refer to “ATM 155 Mbps Fiber or Twisted-Pair Communica-
PCI Card and Video Card Slot Usage

The Model 51, Style D and E processors (AP51D, WP51D, AW51D, AP51E, WP51E or
AW51E) use certain PCI cards for network and/or data storage device connections. The Model
51, Style E processors use the non-PCI UPA Creator Graphics card for workstation display con-
nections, while the Model 51, Style D processor uses the PGX Video PCI card for this function.
PCI cards are similar in hardware design to the PCI cards used in the 70 Series processors (see
above), however, their software drivers are only compatible with 50 Series processors listed below.
PCI cards can only be used in designated PCI slots in each processor, described below. For instal-
lation instructions for the PCI and UPA Creator Graphics cards:
♦ for the Model 51, Style D processors, refer to Hardware Kit Installation Procedures for
50 Series Model 51, Style D Processors (B0400PT), or
♦ for the Model 51, Style E processors, refer to Hardware Kit Installation Procedures for
50 Series Model 51, Style E Processors (B0400PJ).
391
AP51D, WP51D, and AW51D PCI Card Slot Usage

The AP51D, WP51D, and AW51D processors support the following PCI card options:
♦ 8-Port Serial Controller PCI card (with 8-Port Control Assembly Box) - Included in
upgrade kit P0971UB
♦ Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface plus Ultra-Wide SCSI PCI card -
Included in upgrade kit P0971UC
♦ Token Ring Interface PCI card - Included in upgrade kit P0971UD
♦ Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface PCI card with MII5 Connector -
Included in upgrade kit P0971UE
♦ AUI Ethernet upgrade kit P0971UF (includes the Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ether-
net Interface with MII Connector PCI card, and the MII-to-AUI Converter)
♦ Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) 155 Mbps Fiber Optic Cable Interface PCI card
- conforms to the specifications of the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) forum,
and offers 155 Mbps network bandwidth over fiber optic cable - Included in upgrade
kit P0971VS
♦ Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) 155 Mbps Twisted-Pair Cable Interface PCI
card - offers 155 Mbps network bandwidth over category 5 unshielded twisted-pair
copper wire - Included in upgrade kit P0971VT
♦ PGX Video PCI card - second video port used to support a second display (not used
with AP51D) - Included in upgrade kit P0971XZ.
The Model 51, Style D processor has 3 available PCI card slots. You can install any of these cards
into any available slot in the processor. Certain cards fulfill similar functions, and only one card
per function is allowed in the processor. You can install:
Any of the following -
♦ One 8-Port Serial Controller PCI card
♦ One Token Ring Interface PCI card
♦ One PGX Video PCI card (WP51D and AW51D only)
♦ One Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface plus Ultra-Wide SCSI PCI
card to provide SCSI functions
One of the following to support Ethernet connections -
♦ Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface plus Ultra-Wide SCSI PCI card
♦ Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface with MII Connector PCI card
♦ AUI upgrade kit (includes the Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface with
MII Connector PCI card, and the MII-to-AUI Converter).
Link one of the following to the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) forum -
♦ ATM 155 Mbps Fiber Cable Interface PCI card
♦ ATM 155 Mbps Twisted-Pair Cable Interface PCI card.
For information on implementing the ATM 155 Mbs PCI cards, refer to “ATM 155 Mbps Fiber
or Twisted-Pair Communications” on page 539.
5.
Media Independent Interface. The MII-to-AUI converter (P0971TR) provides non-Nodebus
network connections to AUI cabling for the Model 51, Style D processor.
392
NOTE
At most, only one card per function is allowed for each Model 51, Style D processor
(see above). You must not install multiple cards performing the same function in the
processor.
AP51E, WP51E and AW51E PCI Card Slot Usage

The AP51E, WP51E and AW51E processors support the following PCI and UPA Creator Graph-
ics card options:
♦ 8-Port Serial Controller PCI card (with 8-Port Control Assembly Box) - Included in
upgrade kit P0971UB
♦ Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface plus Ultra-Wide SCSI PCI card -
Included in upgrade kit P0971UC
♦ Token Ring Interface PCI card - Included in upgrade kit P0971UD
♦ Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface PCI card with MII6 Connector -
Included in upgrade kit P0971UE
♦ AUI Ethernet upgrade kit P0971UF (includes the Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ether-
net Interface with MII Connector PCI card, and the MII-to-AUI Converter)
♦ Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) 155 Mbps Fiber Optic Cable Interface PCI card
- conforms to the specifications of the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) forum,
and offers 155 Mbps network bandwidth over fiber optic cable - Included in upgrade
kit P0971VS
♦ Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) 155 Mbps Twisted-Pair Cable Interface PCI
card - offers 155 Mbps network bandwidth over category 5 unshielded twisted-pair
copper wire - Included in upgrade kit P0971VT
♦ Additional UPA Creator Graphics card - second video port used to support a second
display (not used with AP51E) - Included in upgrade kit P0971UG
♦ Additional UPA Creator 3D Graphics card for the AW51E (Style C and up) -
Included in upgrade kit P0971ZZ.
NOTE
In addition to the possible optional PCI cards listed above, the AP51E, WP51E or
AW51E processors include, as standard equipment, a primary UPA Creator Graph-
ics video card. This card must be located in the first video card slot, as shown in
Figure 9-34.
6.
Media Independent Interface. The MII-to-AUI converter (P0971TR) provides network connections
to AUI cabling for the Model 51, Style E processor. See also “Converter Installation for DNBI
(Model 51, Style E Processors Only)” on page 487 and “Converter Installation for DNBX (Model
51, Style E Processors Only)” on page 511.
393
The Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface plus Ultra-Wide SCSI PCI card must be
installed in PCI slot 4 if it is to support the mirrored system disk function. (Refer to Figure 9-34
for card slot locations.) If this card is not located in PCI slot 4, the mirrored disk system con-
nected to this interface is not able to boot. If this card is used for a function other than disk mir-
roring, it can be located in PCI slots 2, 3, or 4.
Certain cards fulfill similar functions, and only one card per function is allowed in the
processor. You can install:
Any of the following -
♦ One 8-Port Serial Controller PCI card
♦ One Token Ring Interface PCI card
♦ One additional UPA Creator Graphics card (WP51E, AW51E only)
♦ One Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface plus Ultra-Wide SCSI PCI
card to provide SCSI functions
One of the following to support Ethernet connections -
♦ Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface plus Ultra-Wide SCSI PCI card
♦ Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface with MII Connector PCI card
♦ AUI upgrade kit (includes the Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface with
MII Connector PCI card, and the MII-to-AUI Converter).
One of the following to link to the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) forum -
♦ ATM 155 Mbps Fiber Cable Interface PCI card
♦ ATM 155 Mbps Twisted-Pair Cable Interface PCI card.
For information on implementing the ATM 155 Mbs PCI cards, refer to “ATM 155 Mbps Fiber
or Twisted-Pair Communications” on page 539.
NOTE
At most, only one optional network card is allowed for each Model 51, Style E
processor.
The additional UPA Creator Graphics card must be located in the second video card slot directly
beneath the first UPA Creator Graphics card. (Refer to Figure 9-34 for card slot locations.) All
other cards may be installed in PCI slots 2, 3, or 4, if they are available.
Printers – AP50/51, WP50/51, or AW50/51 Application

The following printers can be connected to the AP50/51, WP50/51, or AW50/51 processors:
B/W dot-matrix printer 80, color dot-matrix printer 132, color PostScript printer, and color
PCL3 printer. Refer to Color Printer Installation for V4.3.x, V6.1.x, and V6.2.x (B0400SF) for
color printer information and instructions.
394
To connect a printer to the AP50/51, WP50/51, or AW50/51 processor:

1. Refer to the appropriate figure and make the cable connections as shown:
♦ Printer Cabling to AP50, AW50 (see Figure 9-35)
♦ Printer Cabling to Stand-Alone AW51A (see Figure 9-36)
♦ Printer Cabling to DNBI System-Connected AP51A, WP51A, or AW51A (see
Figure 9-37)
♦ Printer Cabling to DNBX System-Connected AP51A, WP51A, or AW51A
(Figure 9-38)
♦ Printer Cabling to AP51B, WP51B, or AW51B (Figure 9-39)
♦ Printer Cabling to AP51B1, WP51B1, or WP51B1 (Figure 9-40)
♦ Printer Cabling to AW51C (Figure 9-41)
♦ Printer Cabling to AP51D, WP51D, or AW51D (see Figure 9-42)
♦ Printer Cabling to AP51E, WP51E or AW51E (Figure 9-43)
2. Refer to “Peripheral Device Operating Parameter Settings” on page 444, and set the
printer operating parameters.
B/W Dot-Matrix Cable

Printer 80 P0970BV - 3 m (10 ft)
P0901ED/EE/EF P0970BW - 15 m (50 ft)
(rear view)
Color Dot-Matrix
Printer 132
P0913AV/AW
(rear view)
(Port B)
Color PostScript
Printer
P0912QJ
(rear view) Serial-to-Parallel
Converter
P0912KA AP50/AW50
(rear view)
Color PostScript
Printer
P0918FG/FH
(rear view)
Color PCL3
Printer
P0917BD
(rear view)
Figure 9-35. Printer Cabling to AP50, AW50
395
B/W Dot-Matrix Null Modem P0970XG

Printer 80* Adapter B**
P0901ED/EE/EF P0912GU
(rear view)
Color Dot-Matrix A
Printer 132*
P0913AV/AW No
(rear view) Connection
P0970XM
3 m (10 ft)
Color PostScript
P0970XN
Printer*
15 m (50 ft)
P0912QJ
(rear view) AW51A
(rear view)
Color PostScript
Printer*
P0918FG/FH P0900ZR - 4.5 m (15 ft)
(rear view) P0971LS - 15 m (50 ft)***
Color PCL3
Printer*
P0917BD
(rear view)
* AW51A can support two printers, one serial and one parallel.
** “B” section of splitter cable is 0.4 m (1.3 ft) in length.
***P0971LS is a kit containing an extender kit plus a 15 m (50 ft) cable.
Figure 9-36. Printer Cabling to Stand-Alone AW51A
396
B/W Dot-Matrix Splitter Cable: A To DNBI

Printer 80* P0970XL/XH/XJ/XK
P0901ED/EE/EF
(rear view)
B**
Color Dot-Matrix
Printer 132* P0970XM
P0913AV/AW 3 m (10 ft)
(rear view) or
Color PostScript P0970XN

Printer* 15 m (50 ft)
P0912QJ
(rear view)
AP51A/WP51A/AW51A
(rear view)
Color PostScript P0900ZR - 4.5 m (15 ft)
Printer* P0971LS - 15 m (50 ft)***
P0918FG/FH
(rear view)
Color PCL3
Printer*
P0917BD
(rear view)
* AP51A/WP51A/AW51A can support two printers, one serial and one parallel.
Figure 9-37. Printer Cabling to DNBI System-Connected AP51A, WP51A, or AW51A
397
B/W Dot-Matrix Null Modem To DNBX

Printer 80* Adapter
P0901ED/EE/EF P0912GU A
(rear view)
Color Dot-Matrix
Printer 132* B**
P0913AV/AW P0970XG
(rear view) P0970XM -
3 m (10 ft)
Color PostScript P0970XN -
Printer* 15 m (50 ft)
P0912QJ
(rear view) AP51A/WP51A/
AW51A (rear view)
Color PostScript
Printer* P0900ZR - 4.5 m (15 ft)
P0918FG/FH P0971LS - 15 m (50 ft)***
(rear view)
Color PCL3
Printer*
P0917BD
(rear view)
* AP51A/ WP51/AW51 can support two printers, one serial and one parallel.
Figure 9-38. Printer Cabling to DNBX System-Connected AP51A, WP51A, or AW51A
398
B/W Dot-Matrix
Printer 80*
P0901ED/EE/EF
(rear view)
Color Dot-Matrix P0971PA - 3 m (10 ft)
Printer 132* P0971PB - 15 m (50 ft)
P0913AV/AW
(rear view)
Color PostScript
Printer* P0971GT - 4.5 m (15 ft)
P0912QJ P0971GL - 15 m (50 ft)**
(rear view)
Color PostScript
Printer*
P0918FG/FH Serial Port A
(rear view) To DNBI/DNBX AP51B, WP51B,
(Not used for or AW51B
stand-alone model) (rear view)
Color PCL3
Printer*
P0917BD
(rear view)
*The processor can support two printers, one serial and one parallel.
**P0971GL is a kit consisting of cabling, a transceiver module, and a receiver module.
Figure 9-39. Printer Cabling to AP51B, WP51B, or AW51B
399
B/W Dot-Matrix Splitter Cable A

Printer 80* P0912GX
P0901ED/EE/EF
(rear view)
Color Dot-Matrix B**
Printer 132*
Cable
P0913AV/AW
P0971PA - 3 m (10 ft)
(rear view)
P0971PB - 15 m (50 ft)
Color PostScript Cable
Printer* P0900ZR - 4.5 m (15 ft)
P0912QJ P0971LS - 15 m (50 ft)***
(rear view)
Color PostScript
Printer*
P0918FG/FH
(rear view)
AP51B1,WP51B1,
or AW51B1
(rear view)
Color PCL3
Printer*
P0917BD
(rear view)
* The processor can support two printers, one serial and one parallel.
***P0971LS is a kit consisting of cabling, a transceiver module, and a receiver module.
Figure 9-40. Printer Cabling to AP51B1, WP51B1, or AW51B1
400
B/W Dot-Matrix
Splitter Cable A
Printer 80*
P0901ED/EE/EF P0912GX
(rear view)
Color Dot-Matrix B**

Printer 132*
P0913AV/AW P0971PA - 3 m (10 ft)
(rear view) P0971PB - 15 m (50 ft)
Color PostScript
Printer* P0971GT - 4.5 m (15 ft)
P0912QJ P0971GL - 15 m (50 ft)***
(rear view)
Color PostScript
Printer*
P0918FG/FH
(rear view)
AW51C
(rear view)
Color PCL3
Printer*
P0917BD
(rear view)
* AW51C can support two printers, one serial and one parallel.
***P0971GL is a kit consisting of cabling, a transceiver module, and a receiver module.
Figure 9-41. Printer Cabling to AW51C
401
B/W Dot-Matrix
Printer 80*
P0901ED/EE/EF
(rear view)
P0971SU, 3 m (10 ft)
Color Dot-Matrix P0971SV, 15 m (50 ft)
Printer 132* Serial Port A
P0913AV/AW
(rear view) To DNBI/DNBT/DNBX
(Not used for
stand-alone model)
Color PostScript
Printer*
P0912QJ
(rear view) Serial Port B
Color PostScript
Printer*
P0918FG/FH
(rear view) P0900ZR, 4.5 m (15 ft)
P0971LS, 15 m (50 ft)** AP51D, WP51D, or
AW51D Processor
(rear view)
Color PCL3
Printer*
P0917BD
(rear view)
* AW51D can support two printers, one serial and one parallel.
** P0971LS is a kit consisting of cabling, a transceiver module, and a receiver module.
Figure 9-42. Printer Cabling to AP51D, WP51D, or AW51D
402
Serial
B/W Dot-Matrix Port B
Printer 80*
P0901ED/EE/EF
(rear view) P0971PA - 3 m (10 ft)
Color Dot-Matrix P0971PB - 15 m (50 ft) A B
Printer 132*
Serial Port A TP
P0913AV/AW
<...>
To DNBI/DNBT/DNBX
(rear view) MII
<...>
(Not used for

Color PostScript stand-alone model)
Printer*
P0912QJ P0900ZR - 4.5 m (15 ft)
(rear view) P0971LS - 15 m (50 ft)**
PCI166 1
PCI 2
PCI 3
PCI 4
Color PostScript
Printer* AP51E, WP51E
P0918FG/FH or AW51E
Color PCL3
Printer*
P0917BD
(rear view)
* AW51E can support two printers, one serial and one parallel.
**P0971LS is a kit consisting of cabling, a transceiver module, and a receiver module.
Figure 9-43. Printer Cabling to AP51E, WP51E and AW51E
VT100 Compatible Terminal – AP50/51 or AW50/51 Application

To connect the VT100 compatible terminal (P0914BA/P0500YS) to the AP50/51 or AW50/51
processor, proceed as follows:
1. Refer to the appropriate one of the following figures and make the cable connections
as shown:
♦ VT100 Compatible Terminal Cabling to AP50, AW50 (Figure 9-44)
♦ VT100 Compatible Terminal Cabling to Stand-Alone AW51A or DNBX System-
Connected AP51A/AW51A (Figure 9-45)
♦ VT100 Compatible Terminal Cabling to DNBI System-Connected
AP51A/AW51A (Figure 9-46)
♦ VT100 Compatible Terminal Cabling to AP51B/AW51B (Figure 9-47)
♦ VT100 Compatible Terminal Cabling to AW51C, AP51B1, or AW51B1, Stand-
Alone or System-Connected (Figure 9-48)
♦ VT100 Compatible Terminal Cabling to AW51D, or AP51D (Figure 9-49)
♦ VT100 Compatible Terminal Cabling to AW51E or AP51E (Figure 9-50)
403
2. Refer to the VT100 operating parameter settings (see page 447), and set the VT100
operating parameters.
VT100 Rear Connector Panel

Compatible
Terminal
P0914BA/
P0500YS
AP50/AW50
P0970GW 15 m (50 ft) (rear view)
Figure 9-44. VT100 Compatible Terminal Cabling to AP50, AW50
Rear Connector Panel

VT100
Null Modem Adapter
Compatible
P0912GU
Terminal
P0914BA/
P0500YS
P0970XG AP51A/AW51A
P0970XX - 15 m (50 ft) B* (rear view)
To DNBX (system-connected AP51A/AW51A only) * “B” section of splitter

A cable is 0.4 m (1.3 ft).
Figure 9-45. VT100 Compatible Terminal Cabling to Stand-Alone AW51A or DNBX

System-Connected AP51A/AW51A
VT100 Rear Connector Panel

Compatible
Terminal To DNBI
P0914BA/
P0500YS
A
AP51A/AW51A
P0970XX - 15 m (50 ft) (rear view)
B* Splitter Cable:
* “B” section of splitter cable is 0.4 m (1.3 ft) in length. P0970XL/XH/XJ/XK
Figure 9-46. VT100 Compatible Terminal Cabling to DNBI System-Connected

AP51A/AW51A
VT100 Rear Connector

Compatible Panel
Terminal
P0914BA/ AP51B or AW51B
P0500YS Serial Port B (rear view)
P0971GQ - 15 m (50 ft)

Figure 9-47. VT100 Compatible Terminal Cabling to AP51B/AW51B
404
Splitter Cable: To DNBI or DNBX* (for system-

P0912GX A connected processor only)
Rear Connector
Panel or
B**
VT100
Compatible
Terminal
P0914BA/
P0500YS
P0971GQ - 15 m (50 ft)
* Connection made only for DNBI/DNBX system-

connected AW51C, AP51B1, or AW51B1. AW51C AP51B1, AW51B1
** “B” section of splitter cable is 0.4 m (1.3 ft) in length. (rear view) (rear view)
Figure 9-48. VT100 Compatible Terminal Cabling to AW51C, AP51B1, or AW51B1,

Stand-Alone or System-Connected
Rear Connector
VT100 Panel
Compatible
Terminal
P0914BA/ P0971XQ - 15 m (50 ft)
P0500YS
Serial Port B
AW51D or AP51D (rear view)
Figure 9-49. VT100 Compatible Terminal Cabling to AW51D, or AP51D,

405
Serial Port B
Rear Connector
VT100
Panel
Compatible
Terminal A B
P0914BA/
TP
P0500YS <...>
MII
<...>
P0971GQ - 15 m (50 ft)
PCI166 1
AW51E and AP51E PCI 2
(rear view) PCI 3
PCI 4
Figure 9-50. VT100 Compatible Terminal Cabling to AW51E or AP51E

Display and Alphanumeric Keyboard Connections

Connect the 21-inch, 17-inch, or 20.1-inch display and the alphanumeric keyboard, as shown in
the following figures:
♦ Short, Direct Connection of 21-Inch Tabletop Display and Alphanumeric Keyboard
to WP51A/AW51A (Figure 9-51)
♦ Connection of 17-Inch Tabletop Display and Alphanumeric Keyboard to
WP51B/AW51B (requires adapter P0971YB) (Figure 9-52)
♦ Connection of 17-Inch Tabletop Display and Alphanumeric Keyboard to
WP51B1/AW51B1 (may require adapter P0971YB) (Figure 9-53)
to WP51B/ AW51B (Figure 9-54)
to WP51B1/AW51B1 (Figure 9-55)
to an AW51C (Figure 9-56)
to X Terminal (Figure 9-57)
♦ Short, Direct Connection of 17-Inch, 20.1-Inch and 21-Inch Tabletop Displays and
Alphanumeric Keyboard to WP51D/AW51D (Figure 9-58)
♦ Short, Direct Connection of 20.1-Inch and 21-Inch Tabletop Displays and Alphanu-
meric Keyboard to WP51E and AW51E (Figure 9-59)
♦ Remote Connection of 21-Inch Tabletop Display and Alphanumeric Keyboard to
WP50/AW50, WP51A/AW51A (Figure 9-60)
WP51B/AW51B and AW51C (Figure 9-61)
406

WP51B1, and AW51B1 (Figure 9-62)
X Terminal (Figure 9-63)
WP51D or AW51D (Figure 9-64)
WP51E and AW51E (Figure 9-65).
The short, direct connections (or variations thereof ) may be used to:
♦ Connect a processor located in a mounting structure within an enclosure to a worksta-
tion display with keyboard.
♦ Connect a local workstation display with keyboard.
♦ Connect a workstation display with keyboard to a stand-alone processor.
♦ Connect a workstation display with keyboard to a stand-alone processor within a
hardened enclosure (see “NEMA 4/4X Hardened Enclosures” on page 31).
Part numbers for the workstation displays are provided in Table 9-3.
Part of
Processor
Alphanumeric Keyboard
Accessories
Kit
WP51A/AW51A
(rear view)
21-Inch
Workstation Display
P0971FB Video Cable
2.43 m (8 ft)
Figure 9-51. Short, Direct Connection of 21-Inch Tabletop Display and Alphanumeric
Keyboard to WP51A/AW51A
17-Inch WP51B/AW51B
Workstation (rear view)
Display
P0972FX
Video Cable (attached to

Part of Processor workstation display)
Accessories Kit Adapter* - P0971YB
* Some versions of the 17-inch workstation display may not require this adapter.
Figure 9-52. Connection of 17-Inch Tabletop Display and Alphanumeric

Keyboard to WP51B/AW51B
407
17-Inch Video Cable (attached to

Workstation workstation display)
Display
P0972FX WP51B1/AW51B1
(rear view)
Part of Processor
Accessories Kit
Adapter* - P0971YB
* Some versions of the 17-inch workstation display may not require this adapter.
Figure 9-53. Connection of 17-Inch Tabletop Display and Alphanumeric

Keyboard to WP51B1/AW51B1
WP51B/AW51B
(rear view)
21-Inch
Workstation
Display
P0971FB
Video Cable, 2.43 m (8 ft)
Part of Processor
Accessories Kit
Keyboard to WP51B/AW51B
21-Inch
Workstation
Display WP51B1, AW51B1
(rear view)
P0971FB
Part of Processor Video Cable, 2.43 m (8 ft)
Accessories Kit
Keyboard to WP51B1/AW51B1
408
AW51C
(rear view)
21-Inch
Workstation
Display
P0971FB
Part of Processor Video Cable,
Accessories Kit 2.43 m (8 ft)
Keyboard to AW51C
21-Inch
Workstation X Terminal
Display (rear view)
P0971FB
Part of Processor Video Cable, 2.43 m (8 ft)
Accessories Kit
Keyboard to X Terminal
409
WP51D, AW51D
Part of Processor
(rear view)
Accessories Kit
Video Cable,
21-Inch - P0911YA
2.43 m (8 ft)
Workstation
Display
P0918ZK*
or
20.1-Inch
LCD Flat
Panel
Workstation
Display
or
17-Inch
Workstation
Captive Cable
Display
* For use with monitors with VGA(F) Input video connectors

Figure 9-58. Short, Direct Connection of 17-Inch, 20.1-Inch and
21-Inch Tabletop Displays and Alphanumeric Keyboard to WP51D/AW51D
WP51E or AW51E
21-Inch (rear view)
Workstation
Display A B
P0971FB
P0918ZK* TP
Video Cable,
<...>
2.43 m (8 ft) MII

<...>
20.1-Inch or
LCD Flat Panel
Workstation
Display
PCI166 1
PCI 2
PCI 3
Part of Processor
PCI 4
Accessories Kit

Figure 9-59. Short, Direct Connection of 20.1-Inch and 21-Inch Tabletop Displays and
Alphanumeric Keyboard to WP51E and AW51E
410
WP50/AW50
21-Inch
(rear view)
Workstation Display
P0918ZK*
Part of
Processor
Accessories Paired Cable:
Kit P0970MY - 15 m (50 ft)
P0970MZ - 30 m (100 ft)
Sun Cable
P.N. 530-1440-02
21-Inch
Workstation Display
P0918ZK*
Paired Cable:
P0971FC or FE - 15 m (50 ft)
(4) R, G, B, Sync
P0971FD or FF - 30 m (100 ft)
WP51A/AW51A
(rear view)
Part of
Processor
Alphanumeric Keyboard Accessories
(see note) Kit
NOTE: For mouse-only configuration (mouse, trackball, or industrial pointing device used with
WP51A or AW51A and no keyboard) use adapter cable P0971PF (not shown) for
required male/female connector mating.
Figure 9-60. Remote Connection of 21-Inch Tabletop Display and Alphanumeric Keyboard to
WP50/AW50, WP51A/AW51A
411
21-Inch
Workstation Display
P0918ZK*
Part of Adapter
Cable WP51B/AW51B
Processor Paired Cable:
Accessories P0971PF P0971FC or FE - 15 m (50 ft)
Kit (see note)
P0971FD or FF - 30 m (100 ft)
21-Inch
Workstation Display
P0918ZK*
Adapter AW51C
Cable Paired Cable:
P0971PF P0971FC or FE - 15 m (50 ft)
(see note) P0971FD or FF - 30 m (100 ft)
Part of Processor
Accessories Kit
NOTE: Adapter cable P0971PF is packaged under P0971FC/FD part
number. Shrink tubing and associated instructions, packaged with
cable P0971FC/FD, provide a means of securing the cable connections.
WP51B/AW51B and AW51C
412
21-Inch
Workstation Display
P0918ZK* WP51B1, AW51B1
Part of Adapter
Processor Cable Paired Cable:
Accessories P0971PF P0971FC or FF - 15 m (50 ft)
Kit (see note) P0971FD or FF - 30 m (100 ft)
NOTE: Adapter cable P0971PF is packaged

under P0971FC/FD part number. Shrink
tubing and associated instructions, packaged
with cable P0971FC/FD, provide a means of
Alphanumeric Keyboard securing the cable connections.
Figure 9-62. Remote Connection of 21-Inch Tabletop Display and Alphanumeric Keyboard
to WP51B1, and AW51B1
21-Inch
Workstation Display
P0918ZK*
Adapter X Terminal
Cable Paired Cable:
P0971PF P0971FC or FE - 15 m (50 ft)
Part of Processor
Accessories Kit
NOTE: Adapter cable P0971PF is packaged under P0971FC/FD part
number. Shrink tubing and associated instructions, packaged with
cable P0971FC/FD, provide a means of securing the cable connections.
to X Terminal
413
NOTE: Adapter cable P0971PF is packaged under

P0971FC/FD part number. Shrink tubing WP51D or AW51D
and associated instructions, packaged with Processor
cable P0971FC/FD, provide a means of (rear view)
securing the cable connections.
Part of P0918ZK*
Processor 21-Inch
Accessories Workstation
Kit Display
Adapter
Cable Paired Cable:
P0971PF P0971FC or FE - 15 m (50 ft)
Video Cable Adapter - P0971WG

NOTE: This configuration requires the video cable adapter - P0971WG.
to WP51D or AW51D
NOTE: Adapter cable P0971PF is packaged

under P0971FC/FD part number. Shrink
tubing and associated instructions, packaged
with cable P0971FC/FD, provide a means of
securing the cable connections. A B
TP
<...>
21-Inch MII
<...>
Workstation Display
Part of P0918ZK*
Processor
Accessories
Kit
Adapter
PCI166 1
PCI 2
Cable Paired Cable: PCI 3
P0971PF P0971FC or FE - 15 m (50 ft) PCI 4

WP51E or AW51E
* For use with monitors with VGA(F) Input

video connectors
WP51E and AW51E
414
Dual Workstation Display Cabling

The dual workstation display configuration adds a second display to a WP51 or AW51, as
described in “Dual Workstation Displays” on page 61. Cabling for the primary display (21-inch
workstation display) is shown in Figure 9-51 through Figure 9-65. Figure 9-66 and Figure 9-67
show the cable connection for the optional second 17-inch/21-inch workstation display.
NOTE
When a second color graphics SBus, UPA, or PCI card is added to an operational
AP51, WP51, or AW51 station, the station must be rebooted with the boot -r com-
mand. Refer to System Operations Guide (B0193CR) for information on rebooting.
If the second workstation display has a touchscreen and/or annunciator or annunciator/numeric

keyboard(s), a GCIO interface module must be added. Cabling for the optional GCIO interface
module and associated keyboards is described in “GCIO Interface Module Cabling for 50 Series
Processors” on page 419, and “Touchscreen Cabling, WP50/51, AW50/51, WP70, or AW70
Application” on page 423.
Part numbers for the workstation displays are provided in Table 9-3.
415
R, G, B, and Sync (HD) 21-Inch

Workstation Display
WP51A/AW51A P0918ZK*
P0971FB - 2.5 m (8 ft)

P0971FH - 15 m (50 ft)
P0971FJ - 30 m (100 ft)
21-Inch
R, G, B, and Sync (HD) Workstation Display
P0918ZK*
WP51B/AW51B
P0971FB - 2.5 m (8 ft)
P0971FH - 15 m (50 ft)
P0971FJ - 30 m (100 ft)
21-Inch
P0918ZK*
WP51B1/AW51B1
P0971FB - 2.5 m (8 ft)
P0971FH - 15 m (50 ft)
P0971FJ - 30 m (100 ft)
21-Inch
P0918ZK*
AW51C
P0971FB - 2.5 m (8 ft)
P0971FH - 15 m (50 ft)
P0971FJ - 30 m (100 ft)
Figure 9-66. Connection of Optional Second Display to WP51A/B/B1/C and AW51A/B/B1/C
416
21-Inch
WP51D/AW51D Workstation Display
Processor R, G, B, and Sync (HD)
(rear view) P0918ZK*
PGX PCI Video Card P0971FB - 2.5 m (8 ft)

W/13W3 Connector P0971FH - 15.25 m (50 ft)
P0971FJ - 30.5 m (100 ft)
17-inch Workstation
Display - P0972FX
or
Captive Cable (15-pin male)
Video Adapter (P0971YB)
WP51D/AW51D
Processor 21-Inch
(rear view) Workstation Display
R, G, B, and Sync (HD)
P0918ZK*
P0971WG
13W3/VGA Adapter
P0971FB - 2.5 m (8 ft)

P0971DZ Composite P0971FH - 15.25 m (50 ft)
Video Adapter P0971FJ - 30.5 m (100 ft) 17-inch Workstation
Display - P0972FX
or
Captive Cable (15-pin male)
PGX PCI Video Card

W/VGA Connector
Figure 9-67. Connection of Optional Second Display to WP51D/AW51D
417
A B
TP
<...>
MII
<...>
Second UPA Creator

Graphics Video Card 20-Inch/21-Inch
OR Workstation Display
R, G, B,
and Sync (HD)
PCI166 1
PCI 2
PCI 3
P0971FB - 2.5 m (8 ft)
PCI 4
P0971FH - 15 m (50 ft) P0918ZK*
P0971FJ - 30 m (100 ft)
WP51E or AW51E
Figure 9-68. Connection of Optional Second Display to WP51E/AW51E
Wiring for Second Video Card (AW51D/WP51D

Processors) (P0971WF and P0972JR)
The video card (P0971WF) for the second head in a AW51D (P-code P75, styles A through D)
and WP51D (P-code P76, styles A through D) provides both composite sync and separate hori-
zontal and vertical sync signals. This card interfaces with all Foxboro monitors and can be wired
as per the upper drawing of Figure 9-69.
The video card (P0972JR) for the second head in a AW51D (P-code P75, style E) and WP51D
(P-code P76, style E) generates only separate horizontal and vertical sync signals. To properly
interface to monitors which use composite sync (that is, monitors with four conductor cables), a
composite sync video adapter (P0971DZ) needs to be connected between the P0972JR video
card and the P0971WG adapter as shown in the lower section of Figure 9-69.
Monitors and monitor cables which use 15-pin VGA connectors (that is, use separate syncs) can
connect directly to either the P0971WF or P0972JR video card.
418
4-Wire Video Cable

Graphics Card to Monitor
13W3 Connector
for 2nd Video Head (P0971FB/C/D/E/F/H/J)
W/13W3 Connector
(P0971WF)
P0971YB Monitor VGA Video Cable

or Adapter or
P0930FX/FW, P0971DX/DY,
P0911YA
51D Processor
AW51D (P75, Style A-D)

or 15-Pin
WP51D (P76, Style A-D) 13W3 VGA
Connector
Monitor VGA Video Cable

Graphics Card 15-Pin or
for 2nd Video Head VGA P0930FX/FW, P0971DX/DY, P0911YA
W/VGA Connector
(P0972JR)
Video Cable 4-Wire Video Cable

15-Pin
Adapter to Monitor
or VGA
(P0971WG) (P0971FB/C/D/E/F/H/J)
51D Processor
AW51D (P75, Style E) 15-Pin

or VGA
Composite SYNC
WP51D (P76, Style E) Video Adapter 13W3 Connector
(P0971DZ)
Figure 9-69. Wiring for Second Video Card (AW51D and WP51D Processors)
GCIO Interface Module Cabling for 50 Series Processors

The optional GCIO interface module provides an electrical interface for the touchscreen and the
annunciator and annunciator/numeric keyboards.
To connect the GCIO interface module to the Workstation Processor 50/51 or Application
Workstation 50/51, make the cable connections as shown in the following figures:
♦ GCIO Cabling to WP50/AW50 (Figure 9-70)
♦ GCIO Cabling to Stand-Alone AW51A or DNBX System-Connected AW51A or
WP51A (Figure 9-71)
♦ GCIO Cabling to a DNBI System-Connected WP51A/AW51A (Figure 9-72)
♦ GCIO Cabling to WP51B or AW51B (Figure 9-73)
♦ GCIO Cabling to AW51C, WP51B1, or AW51B1 (Figure 9-74)
♦ GCIO Cabling to AW51D, or WP51D (Figure 9-75)
♦ GCIO Cabling to AW51E or WP51E (Figure 9-76).
419
NOTE
The dual GCIO configuration can have zero to four keyboards. It is not necessary
to have two keyboards per GCIO.
WP50/AW50
P0970BV - 3 m (10 ft)
P0970BW - 15 m (50 ft) GCIO Interface Module
P0970HS - 30 m (100 ft) P0904AK/P0922AG
Figure 9-70. GCIO Cabling to WP50/AW50
Null Modem Adapter

P0912GU
P0904AK/P0922AG B*
P0970XM - 3 m (10 ft)

P0970XN - 15 m (50 ft) A
P0970XP - 30 m (100 ft)
P0970XG
AW51A or WP51A
* “B” section of splitter cable is To DNBX (System-Connected
0.4 m (1.3 ft) in length. AW51A Only)
Figure 9-71. GCIO Cabling to Stand-Alone AW51A or DNBX System-Connected

AW51A or WP51A
B*
A
P0904AK/P0922AG
P0970XM - 3 m (10 ft) Splitter Cable: To DNBI
P0970XN - 15 m (50 ft) P0970XL/XH/
P0970XP - 30 m (100 ft) XJ/XK
* “B” section of splitter cable is 0.4 m (1.3 ft) in length. WP51A/AW51A

Figure 9-72. GCIO Cabling to DNBI System-Connected WP51A/AW51A
420
GCIO Interface Module WP51B/AW51B

P0971PA - 3 m (10 ft) P0904AK/P0922AG
P0971PB - 15 m (50 ft) Serial
P0971PC - 30 m (100 ft) Port B
Figure 9-73. GCIO Cabling to WP51B or AW51B

P0904AK/P0922AG
B* or
P0971PA - 3 m (10 ft)
P0971PB - 15 m (50 ft)
P0971PC - 30 m (100 ft)
Splitter Cable A
P0912GX
* “B” section of splitter cable is To DNBI or DNBX (System-

0.4 m (1.3 ft) in length. Connected Processor Only) AW51C WP51B1 or AW51B1
Figure 9-74. GCIO Cabling to AW51C, WP51B1, or AW51B1
P0971SU - 3 m (10 ft)

P0971SV - 15 m (50 ft)
GCIO Interface Module P0971WZ - 30 m (100 ft)
P0904AK/P0922AG
Serial Port B
AW51D or WP51D (rear view)
Figure 9-75. GCIO Cabling to AW51D or WP51D
421
Serial Port B
A B
TP
<...>
MII
<...>

P0971PA - 3 m (10 ft) - P0904AK/P0922AG
P0971PB - 15 m (50 ft)
P0971PC - 30 m (100 ft)
PCI166 1
PCI 2
PCI 3
PCI 4
AW51E or WP51E
Figure 9-76. GCIO Cabling to AW51E or WP51E
Dual GCIO Interface Module Cabling

A second GCIO is required if the second workstation display in the dual-display configuration
described under “Dual Workstation Display Cabling” on page 415 includes a touchscreen and/or
annunciator or annunciator/numeric keyboard. If there are dual GCIOs, make the cable connec-
tions as described for the primary GCIO in a stand-alone or system-connected processor configu-
ration (as shown in the previous subsection “GCIO Interface Module Cabling for 50 Series
Processors” on page 419), and then perform the cabling for the secondary GCIO as shown in
Figure 9-77. The grey-outed lines in Figure 9-77 indicate the second workstation cabling and
peripherals in a typical dual GCIO configuration.
Part numbers for the workstation displays with touchscreens are provided in Table 9-3.
422
Touchscreen Touchscreen
Captive Touchscreen Cable Captive Touchscreen Cable

M GCIO GCIO (unused)
RS-423 M
P0800MW Secondary Secondary
Station Station
LB* RS-423 LB* P0800MW
M
P0800MW P0970HV
F M F M F M F M
Annunciator LB* Annunciator LB* Annunciator LB* Annunciator LB*
or Annunciator/ or Annunciator/ or Annunciator/ or Annunciator/
Numeric Keyboard** Numeric Keyboard** Numeric Keyboard** Numeric Keyboard**
P0970XM/XN/XP P0971PA/PB/PC
P0971SU/SV/WZ
To AW51A To AW70, or To WP51B, AW51B,

or WP51A WP70, WP51D, AW51B1, WP51B1,
or AW51D AW51C, AW51E,
or WP51E
The above cable connections are simplified. Refer to “GCIO Interface Module
Cabling for 50 Series Processors” on page 419 (Figure 9-70 through Figure 9-76) for
detailed descriptions and illustrations of GCIO-to-processor cabling.
* LB = Letterbug
** Zero to four annunciator and/or annunciator keyboards (total) can be implemented in a single or dual
GCIO workstation configuration. It is not necessary to have two keyboards per GCIO.
Figure 9-77. Typical Dual GCIO Workstation Cabling
Touchscreen Cabling, WP50/51, AW50/51, WP70, or AW70

Application
The optional touchscreen is available with the 21-inch workstation display. Part numbers for the
workstation displays with touchscreens are provided in Table 9-3.
Proceed as follows:
1. Make the cable connections as shown in Figure 9-78.
2. Locate the letterbug address selector switches at the rear of the GCIO interface
module (Figure 9-78).
3. Determine, from the human interface software configuration information for your
system, the letterbug address associated with the touchscreen:
♦ Primary Touchscreen = Letterbug 2
♦ Secondary Touchscreen = Letterbug 6.
4. Using the chart printed on the underside of the GCIO interface module as a guide (or
see Figure 9-81), set the letterbug address switches for the required letterbug address.
423

P0922AG
21-Inch
Workstation Display
(rear view)
Letterbug Address Selector

Switches (See “Keyboard Letterbug
Captive Touchscreen Cable
Address Setting” below)
Figure 9-78. Touchscreen Cabling, WP50/51, AW50/51, WP70, or AW70 Applications
Mouse, Trackball, or Pointing Device, WP50/51 or AW50/51

Application
If a keyboard is used in the hardware configuration, connect the mouse, trackball, or industrial
pointing device as shown in Figure 9-79.
(see note)
NOTE: When using the older style keyboard, which has no cable attached, adapter cable P0912HN
must be used to connect pointing device.
Figure 9-79. Mouse, Trackball, or Pointing Device Cabling, WP50/51 or

AW50/51 Keyboard Application
If no keyboard is used, simply connect the mouse, trackball, or industrial pointing device in place
of the keyboard (refer to Figure 9-51 through Figure 9-63). Note that in some cases, adapter cable
P0971PF is required for proper cable connector (male/female) matching.
Annunciator and Annunciator/Numeric Keyboard: WP30,

WP50/51, or AW50/51 Application
The annunciator keyboard (P0903CV) is an array of 48 LED/switch pairs arranged in a 12-
column by 4-row matrix. The annunciator/numeric keyboard (P0903CW) is a combination of
32 LED/switch pairs, a 16-section numeric keypad, and one num lock LED.
To make cabling connections to the annunciator or annunciator/numeric keyboard, proceed as
described in the following subsections.
424
Keyboard Letterbug Address Setting

A keyboard letterbug address must be set at the rear of each annunciator or annunciator/numeric
keyboard. Proceed as follows:
1. Locate the selector switches at the rear of the keyboard (Figure 9-80).
system, the letterbug address associated with the keyboard. The possible addresses are:
Primary GCIO/Display
♦ First keyboard letterbug address = 1
♦ Second keyboard letterbug address = 3
Secondary GCIO/Display
♦ First keyboard letterbug address = 4
♦ Second keyboard letterbug address = 5.
3. Using the chart printed on the underside of the keyboard as a guide (or see
Figure 9-81), set the selector switches for the required letterbug address.
AUX. HORN OUTPUT INPUT

IEC950
“SELV”
Selector Alarm Horn Cable Connection

Switches Audio Output Jack Jacks
IEC950
! “SELV”
! CAUTION
This audio output jack is intended for connection only to equipment with input
circuits complying with IEC Publication 950 requirements for Safety Extra Low
Voltage (SELV) that are power limited to 240 VA or less. Connection to other
circuits may impair the safety of this keyboard and other interconnected equipment.
Figure 9-80. Annunciator or Annunciator/Numeric Keyboard, Rear View
425
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Position 1 used for
HI Press for 1
horn volume
high/low selection
LO Press for 0
0= 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
1= 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
2= 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
3= 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
4= 0 0 1 1 1 0 0
5= 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
6= 0 0 1 1 0 1 0
7= 0 0 1 0 1 1 0
8= 0 0 0 1 1 1 0
9= 0 1 1 1 0 0 0
A= 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
B= 0 1 0 1 1 0 0
C= 0 1 1 0 0 1 0
D= 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
E= 0 1 0 0 1 1 0
F= 0 1 1 1 1 1 0
G= 0 0 0 1 1 0 1
H= 0 1 1 1 1 0 1
I= 0 1 0 0 0 1 1
J= 0 0 1 0 0 1 1
K= 0 0 0 1 0 1 1
L= 0 1 1 1 0 1 1
M= 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
N= 0 1 1 0 1 1 1
O= 0 1 0 1 1 1 1
P= 0 0 1 1 1 1 1
Q= 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
R= 1 1 0 1 0 0 0
S= 1 0 1 1 0 0 0
T= 1 1 0 0 1 0 0
U= 1 0 1 0 1 0 0
V= 1 1 1 1 1 0 0
W= 1 1 0 0 0 1 0
X= 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
Y= 1 1 1 0 1 1 0
Z= 1 1 0 1 1 1 0
Figure 9-81. Letterbug and Horn Volume Select Switch Codes
426
Keyboard Horn Volume Setting

To set the horn volume on the annunciator or annunciator/numeric keyboard, proceed as follows:
1. Locate the selector switches at the rear of the keyboard (Figure 9-83).
2. Using the diagram printed on the underside of the keyboard as a guide, set the HI/LO
horn volume select switch for the desired horn volume (Figure 9-81).
Keyboard Auxiliary Horn Connection

An auxiliary horn output jack located at the rear of the annunciator or annunciator/numeric key-
board (Figure 9-80) provides for connection to an audio amplifier with speakers (Figure 9-82).
This optional connection provides a means of hearing the horn in noisy environments, or at a
remote location.
The alarm audio output signal delivers the following voltages to the external amplifier (680 ohm
load):
Low 0.10 V p-p
Medium 0.25 V p-p
Low and Medium 0.40 V p-p
The user-supplied cable is standard audit cable using an RCA audio plug.
External Audio
Amplifier
(user-
supplied)
Annunciator or
Annunciator/Numeric External
Speaker
Keyboard
(user-supplied)
Figure 9-82. Annunciator or Annunciator/Numeric Keyboard with Amplifier and Speaker
Keyboard Label Preparation

The label strips for the annunciator or annunciator/numeric keyboard are on a sheet of 6 labels.
The labels need to be separated from the sheet to be used.
NOTE
Foxboro can supply a package of labels. Order Foxboro part number P0903QZ.
Perform the following steps to prepare and install the labels:

1. Print the desired labeling information in the label boxes.
2. Adjacent to each label box are two hole cutouts (Figure 9-83). Remove one of the cut-
outs to provide an LED alarm indication associated with the label box; remove the
upper cutout to allow the red LED to show through or the lower cutout for a yellow
LED indication.
3. Positioning the label at an angle, as shown in Figure 9-83, slide the label into the unit
through the slot on the rear which is associated with the switch/LED column to be
labelled.
427
4. Repeat Steps 1, 2, and 3 for the remaining labels.
Labels (Bag of) = P0903QZ Label at Approximately 30°

Angle from Horizontal
Label
Boxes
Cutouts:
Upper Exposes Red LED Label Side View
Lower Exposes Yellow LED
Label Details Proper Positioning of Label for Insertion into Keyboard
Figure 9-83. Annunciator or Annunciator/Numeric Keyboard Label
Keyboard Cable Connections

Up to two annunciator or annunciator/numeric keyboards can be connected to a GCIO interface
module in any combination. Refer to Figure 9-84 and make the cable connections as shown. If
there is another (secondary) GCIO with one or more annunciator or annunciator/numeric key-
boards, then a connecting cable (P0970HV) is required as shown. (Refer also to Figure 9-77.)

P0904AK/P0922AG To Annunciator or
Annunciator/Numeric
P0800MW P0970HV*
P0800MW Keyboard of Secondary
GCIO. Refer to the
Typical Dual GCIO
Workstation Cabling
Diagram.
Annunciator Keyboard
Annunciator/Numeric Keyboard
* The P0970HV cable is applicable only if there is a secondary GCIO (dual workstation).
Figure 9-84. Annunciator and Annunciator/Numeric Keyboard Cabling, WP50/51, AW50/51
428
AP20-Based Peripheral Device Installation

Procedures
AP20-based peripheral devices are those serviced directly or indirectly by an AP20 processor.
These devices may be physically connected to an AP20, WP30, CMP10, or to another peripheral
device.
NOTE
This subsection assumes that the installer has read “Peripheral Cable Routing
within Enclosures” on page 343 and is thoroughly familiar with its contents. This
section also assumes that you have prepared the peripheral device according to the
placement and mounting instructions in Chapter 2 “Equipment Mounting
Procedures”.
B/W Dot-Matrix Printer 80, CMP10/AP20 Application

To connect the B/W dot-matrix 80 printer to the Communication Processor 10 (CMP10), pro-
ceed as follows:
1. Refer to the information developed during the site planning phase for the CMP10
module to which the printer is to be connected and determine the channel to which
the printer is to be connected.
2. Refer to Figure 9-85 and make the cable connections as shown and described in the
following steps.
3. Connect the P0970WK cable to the printer and feed the other end through the bot-
tom of the enclosure.
4. Locate the P0970VB configuration selector and set the 32 switches as described in
“P0970VB Configuration Selector Switch Settings and Cable Conversion Tables” on
page 467.
5. Mount the P0970VB connector on the DIN rail in the enclosure, and connect the
P0970WK cable to the D connector. (One end of the P0970VB configuration selec-
tor has a single cable D connector; the other end has two 26-pin connectors. The cor-
rect connector for the P0970WX cable is the end with the single D connector.) To
install the switch, refer to the procedure “Installing the P0970VB Configuration
Selector Switch” on page 472.
6. Connect the P0970WK cable to the P0970VB switch.
7. Connect one end of the P0500JX cable to either of the two 26-pin connectors on the
P0970VB switch.
8. Route the P0500JX cable in the enclosure to the appropriate port (A-D) on the
CMP10 as specified in the information developed during the site planning phase.
9. Engage the peripheral connector plug on the CMP10 by inserting the hex driver tool
into the peripheral connector engagement actuator slot (on the front of the module)
and turning 1/2-turn clockwise.
10. Refer to page 445, and set the printer operating parameters.
429
P0500JX P0970VB P0970WX

Switch
ABCD
Position Peripheral Connection B/W Dot-Matrix

A RS-232-C, Channel 1 Printer 80
B RS-232-C, Channel 2 P0901ED/EE/EF
C RS-232-C, Channel 3 (rear view)
D RS-232-C, Channel 4
Communication
Processor 10
Figure 9-85. B/W Dot-Matrix Printer 80 Cabling to CMP10
Color Dot-Matrix Printer Installation

Proceed as follows:
1. If the printer is to be connected to a Communications Processor 10, refer to the infor-
mation developed during the site planning phase for that station (module) and deter-
mine the channel to which the peripheral cable is to be connected.
following steps.
3. Locate the P0970VB configuration selector and set the 32 switches as described in the
page 467.
P0970WX cable to the D connector. (One end of the P0970VB configuration selec-
5. Connect the P0970WX cable to the P0970VB switch.
P0970VB switch.
7. Route the P0500JX cable to the port (A-D) on the CMP10 as specified by the infor-
9. Refer to page 445, and set the printer operating parameters.
10. Refer to the manufacturer’s printer manual, and prepare the printer for operation.
430
P0500JX P0970VB P0970WX

Switch
ABCD

A RS-232-C, Channel 1
B RS-232-C, Channel 2
C RS-232-C, Channel 3
Color Dot-Matrix
Printer - P0913AV/AW
Communication
Processor 10
Figure 9-86. Color Dot-Matrix Printer Cabling to CMP10
Color PostScript Printer, CMP10 Application

Proceed as follows:
1. Refer to the information developed during the site planning phase for the Communi-
cations Processor to which the color PostScript printer is to be connected, and deter-
mine the channel which is to be used.
2. Refer to Figure 9-87 or Figure 9-88 and make the cable connections as illustrated, and
as described in the following steps.
page 467.
P0970VB switch.
431
P0500JX P0970VB P0970WX

Switch
ABCD
Position Peripheral Connection P0912QJ
A RS-232-C, Channel 1 (rear view)
Communication
Processor 10 Serial to Parallel Converter
(P0912KA)
Figure 9-87. Color PostScript Printer (P0912QJ) Cabling to CMP10
P0500JX P0970VB P0970WX

Switch
ABCD Color PostScript Printer

P0918FH
Position Peripheral Connection (rear view)
Communication Serial to Parallel Converter

Processor 10 (P0912KA)
Figure 9-88. Color PostScript Printer (P0918FH) Cabling to CMP10
Color PCL3 Printer, CMP10 Application

Proceed as follows:
1. Refer to the information developed during the site planning phase for the
communications processor to which the printer is to be connected, and determine the
channel that is to be used.
2. Refer to Figure 9-89 and make the cable connections as illustrated, and as described in
the following steps.
page 467.
432
P0970VB switch.
P0500JX P0970VB P0970WX

Switch
ABCD
Serial to Parallel Converter

(P0912KA)
B RS-232-C, Channel 2 Color PCL3 Printer
C RS-232-C, Channel 3 P0917BD
D RS-232-C, Channel 4 (rear view)
Communication
Processor 10
Figure 9-89. Color PCL3 Printer Cabling to CMP10
VT100 Compatible Terminal, CMP10 Application

NOTE
The following information pertains to VT100 compatible terminal.
To connect the VT100 compatible terminal to the Communication Processor 10, perform the
following steps:
1. If the display is to be connected to a Communications Processor 10, refer to the infor-
mation developed during the site planning phase for that station (module) and deter-
mine the channel (port) to which the peripheral cable is to be connected.
following steps.
433
page 467.
4. Connect the P0970WY cable to the display and feed the other end through the bot-
tom of the enclosure.
“Installing the P0970VB Configuration Selector Switch” on page 472.
P0970WK cable to the D connector. (One end of the P0970VB configuration selec-
rect connector for the P0970WY cable is the end with the single D connector.) To
7. Connect the P0970WY cable to the P0970VB switch.
P0970VB switch.
9. Route the P0500JX cable in the enclosure to the appropriate port (A-D) on the
CMP10 as specified in the information developed during the site planning phase.
11. Refer to the VT100 operating parameter settings (see page 447), and set the operating
parameters.
P0500JX
ABCD P0970VB
Switch
B RS-232-C, Channel 2 VT100
C RS-232-C, Channel 3 Compatible
D RS-232-C, Channel 4 P0970WY Terminal
P0914BA/
P0500YS
Rear Connector
Communication Panel
Processor 10
Figure 9-90. VT100 Compatible Terminal Cabling to CMP10
434
Graphic Controller Input Output (GCIO) Interface for WP30

There are two main variations of the GCIO interface used in WP30 applications: the desktop,
and Modular Industrial Workstation (MIW) internally mounted versions. The display mounts on
top of the desktop version. Figure 9-91 illustrates the desktop version. The desktop GCIO can
also be mounted in a different shroud to mount on top of a bay. The MIW internally mounted
version (not shown) has the same connectors and switches, except for the ac power socket and
power on/off switch.
A GCIO is configured with or without the 9-pin touchscreen connector, depending on whether
or not the display has a touchscreen.
To Touchscreen
Connector on
Monitor
Alphanumeric
_O Keyboard ID
(See Figure 9-72)
ID Switches Mouse, Alphanumeric

Annunciator or
(for touchscreen) Trackball, Keyboard
Annunciator/ GCIO
(See Figure 9-72) Pointing Device Connector
Numeric Connector
Keyboard
Figure 9-91. Graphic Controller Input/Output Interface (GCIO) for WP30 (Rear View)
Table 9-12 lists and describes the GCIO connectors and switches. Refer to Figure 9-91 and the
table as necessary when you perform any associated cabling or configure the letterbug switches as
described in the following display and peripheral procedures.
Table 9-12. GCIO Connectors and Switches
Item Description
Power On/Off Switch Turns power to desktop-, or top-of-bay-mounted display
on/off. (Not used for internally mounted GCIO.)
ID Switches (8 switches) Identifies the letterbug address for the touchscreen. Note
that a label describing the switch settings is located on the
bottom panel of the keyboard for a desktop or top
mounted GCIO, and on the top panel of the GCIO for an
internally mounted GCIO.
Mouse, Trackball, or Pointing Device Socket for connecting either the mouse, trackball, or
pointing device cable.
Annunciator or Socket for connecting either the annunciator keyboard, or
Annunciator/Numeric Keyboard annunciator/numeric keyboard cable.
GCIO Connector Socket (recessed) for connecting the peripheral cable from
the WP20/WP30.
Alphanumeric Keyboard Connector Socket for connecting the alphanumeric keyboard cable.
435
Table 9-12. GCIO Connectors and Switches (Continued)
Item Description
Alphanumeric Keyboard ID Identifies the letterbug address for the alphanumeric
(8 switches) keyboard. Note that a label describing the switch settings is
located on the bottom panel of the keyboard for a desktop
or top-of-bay-mounted GCIO, and on the top panel of
GCIO for an internally mounted GCIO.
Touchscreen Connector 9-pin socket for connecting the touchscreen cable to the
touchscreen connector located on the display if the display
has a touchscreen.
Video Cables:* P0911BP - 15 m (50 ft)

P0800FB - 30 m (100 ft)
Video Cable P0911BQ - 60 m (200 ft)
(One Multiconnector Cable) P0911BR - 90 m (300 ft)
6 m (20 ft) P0911BS - 120 m (400 ft)
P0911CF P0960GX P0800HY - 150 m (500 ft)
P0918ZK***
Video
Workstation Video Isolator**
Processor 30 Peripheral GCIO
Peripheral Cable Peripheral Cables: 21-Inch

3 m (10 ft) P0911BT - 15 m (50 ft) Workstation
P0800CE P0911CK - 30 m (100 ft) Display
* 4 video cables (Red, Green, Blue, Sync) P0911BU - 60 m (200 ft)
per part number. P0911BV - 90 m (300 ft) Touchscreen Cable
** Required only when WP30 and display P0911BW - 120 m (400 ft) (optional)
do not share same power earth (ground) P0911CL - 150 m (500 ft)
*** For use with monitors with VGA(F) Input video connectors
Figure 9-92. 21-Inch Workstation Display/WP30 Cabling Overview
21-Inch Workstation Display Cabling to WP30

NOTE
In the following display cabling descriptions, the GCIO is considered part of the
workstation. The video cabling (R, G, B, and Sync) from the WP module connects
directly to the R, G, and HD jacks on the display. The peripheral cabling goes to
the GCIO, and then from the GCIO to the display peripheral.
Refer to Figure 9-93 and perform the following procedure:

1. Place the GCIO at the selected location and install the display on top of it. Slide the
display onto the top of the GCIO until the display touches the retaining backstop.
Secure the retaining latch clip at either side of the base of the display.
2. If your display has an optional touchscreen, determine from the configuration report
information for your system the letterbug number that is to be associated with the
touchscreen.
436
3. Refer to the GCIO description (see page 435) to identify and set the ID switches to
establish the touchscreen letterbug number. The table in that subsection describes the
location of the equipment label for setting the switches for a specific number.
4. Connect the touchscreen cable to its connector at the rear of the display, and to the
touchscreen connector at the rear of the GCIO.
5. From the information developed during the site planning phase, determine the Work-
station Processor 30 to which the workstation display connects. Then, refer to
Figure 9-93, and make the cable connections as illustrated. The peripheral bus goes to
the GCIO connector on the rear panel of the GCIO (see also page 435), and the
video cables go to the R,G,B, and H Sync (Horizontal Sync) connectors at the rear of
the display.) Note: if there are two H Sync connectors on the rear of the display, you
can use either connector.
NOTE
If the WP30 is mounted upside down, Position A becomes the (bottom) right posi-
tion and not the (top) left position.
6. Engage the peripheral connector plug (on the WP30 module) by inserting the hex
driver tool into the peripheral connector engagement actuator slot (on the front of the
module) and turning clockwise.
7. Mount the video isolator (if required7) and connect the cabling as shown in
8. Set the switches on the front of the Workstation Processor 30 according to the cabling
distance, as shown in Figure 9-96.
7.
The video isolator (Foxboro part number P0960GX) is required when the WP30 and workstation
display do not share the same power earth.
437
Terminator GCIO
P0700TJ (rear view)
Touchscreen
Cable
(optional)
P0918ZK*** (see rear panel below)
Peripheral Cable**
Sync
Blue
Red
Green
Video Cable (qty. 4)
P0911CQ
Video Cables*
Video Isolator
P0911BP- 15 m (50 ft)
P0960GX 21-Inch
P0800FB- 30 m (100 ft)
(see separate Workstation Display
P0911BQ- 60 m (200 ft)
figure for detail)
P0911BR- 90 m (300 ft)
J2 P0911BS- 120 m (400 ft)
J1 P0800HY- 150 m (500 ft)
ABCD Video Cable Position Signal
Peripheral Cable P0500WX A Peripheral Bus (EIA RS-485)
3 m (10 ft) B Not Used
P0800CE Workstation C J2 - Blue and Sync
Processor 30 D J1 - Red and Green
* 4 Video Cables (Red,
Green, Blue, and Sync)
per Part Number.
** Peripheral Cables:
P0911BT - 15 m (50 ft)
P0911CK - 30 m (100 ft)
P0911BU - 60 m (200 ft)
P0911BV - 90 m (300 ft)
P0911BW - 120 m (400 ft)
P0911CL - 150 m (500 ft)
*** For use with monitors with VGA(F) Input video connectors
Figure 9-93. 21-Inch Workstation Display Cabling to WP30
438
Optional (see note)

P0911BP/BQ
BR/BS or Red Red
P0800FB/HY Red
Green O Green
Green
I U
From N T
Workstation P P
Display Blue U Blue U Blue
T T
S S Sync
Sync P0500WX
Sync
Connects to: Peripheral

Video Isolator - P0960CX Bus
P0911BT/CK/
BU/BV/BW/CL P0800CE
To Workstation
NOTE: The video isolator is required only
Processor 30
when the WP30 and workstation display do Terminator
not share the same power earth (ground). P0700TJ
Figure 9-94. 21-Inch Workstation Display Cabling to WP30 (Connection to Video Isolator)
DIN Rail
Mounting (part of enclosure)
Screw
(1 of 4)
Mounting
Plates
Video Isolator
Figure 9-95. Mounting of Video Isolator on DIN Rail
439
A
B Video Image
C Correction
D
Switch
HI
LO High/Low Intensity
Switch
Video Image High/Low

Cover Correction Intensity
Cabling Distance Switch Switch
Open
Meters Feet Setting Setting
0-60 0-200 A LO
Workstation 90 300 B HI
Processor 30 120 400 C HI
Module 150 500 D HI
Figure 9-96. Workstation Processor 30 Switch Settings
Mouse, Trackball, or Pointing Device, WP30 Application

To connect the mouse, trackball, or industrial pointing device to the workstation display, connect
the pointing device cable to the mouse/trackball connector on the rear panel of the GCIO. Refer
to the GCIO description (see page 435) to identify this connector.
Alphanumeric Keyboard Installation (to 21-Inch Display GCIO)

1. To connect the alphanumeric keyboard to the GCIO, make the cable connections as
shown in Figure 9-97 on the rear panel of the GCIO.
system, the letterbug number (ID alphanumeric keyboard) that is to be associated
with this keyboard.
3. Refer to the GCIO description (see page 435) to identify the alphanumeric keyboard
switches and to locate the label identifying the switch settings for a given letterbug ID.
Then, set the switches for the alphanumeric keyboard ID.
4. Connect the alphanumeric keyboard to the GCIO as shown in Figure 9-97.
5. If the keyboard has a mode switch for the PC XT mode, set the switch to the PC XT
mode.
440
GCIO Interface Module Alphanumeric

P0904AH/P0922AF Keyboard ID Switches
Alphanumeric
Keyboard
Figure 9-97. Alphanumeric Keyboard Cabling
Annunciator and Annunciator/Numeric Keyboard, WP30

Application
The annunciator keyboard (P0903CV) is an array of 48 LED/switch pairs arranged in a 12-
column by 4-row matrix. The annunciator/numeric keyboard (P0903CW) is a combination of
32 LED/switch pairs, a 16-section numeric keypad, and one num lock LED.
To make cabling and setup connections to the annunciator or annunciator/ numeric keyboard,
refer to the following sections:
♦ “Keyboard Letterbug Address Setting” on page 425
♦ “Keyboard Horn Volume Setting” on page 427
♦ “Keyboard Label Preparation” on page 427
♦ “Keyboard Auxiliary Horn Connection” on page 427.
Keyboard Cable
In a WP30-based system, up to two annunciator and annunciator/numeric keyboards in any
combination as shown in Figure 9-98 and Figure 9-99. Refer to the appropriate figure and make
the cable connections as shown:
Annunciator or Annunciator/Numeric Keyboard

P0904AH/P0922AF
Figure 9-98. Connecting a Single Annunciator Keyboard to a GCIO (WP30)
441

P0904AH/P0922AF
P0800MW
P0800MX Annunciator or
Annunciator/Numeric
Keyboards in Any
Combination
Figure 9-99. Connecting Multiple Annunciator Keyboards to a GCIO (WP30)
WP30 Multiscreen Common Link Configuration

The multiscreen common link configuration shown in Figure 9-100 uses a common peripheral
bus which links input components together. This configuration allows input components, for
example, annunciator keyboards and touchscreens, to be logically dedicated to WP30/video dis-
play pairs where required. It also allows other components, such as mouse/trackball/pointing
device or alphanumeric keyboards, to be shared among the workstation displays which are logi-
cally software switchable.
Table 9-13 shows the maximum number of components per WP30 display.
Table 9-13. Maximum Number of Devices per WP30 Display
Device Maximum
Alphanumeric keyboard 1
Mouse, trackball, or pointing device 1
Touchscreen 1
Annunciator or annunciator/numeric keyboards 2
Refer to Figure 9-100 and perform the following procedure:

1. Install the display cabling to the WP30 as described in the “21-Inch Workstation Dis-
play Cabling to WP30” on page 436.
2. Interconnect the WP30s through their peripheral ports A as shown in Figure 9-100.
3. Interconnect the GCIOs through their annunciator keyboard ports as shown in
Figure 9-100.
4. Connect the annunciator or annunciator/numeric keyboards to the GCIO annuncia-
tor ports as shown in Figure 9-100. For more information, refer to “Annunciator and
Annunciator/Numeric Keyboard, WP30 Application” on page 441.
5. Connect the alphanumeric keyboards to the GCIOs. Refer to “Alphanumeric Key-
board Installation (to 21-Inch Display GCIO)” on page 440.
442
21-in Workstation 21-in Workstation 21-in Workstation

Video Cables Display 1 Display 2 Video Cables Display n
Video Cables
GCIO 1 GCIO 2 GCIO n
(rear view) (rear view) (rear view)
P0800MW PO800MW P0970HT

2 m (6 ft) P0911YT - 2 m (6 ft)
P0970HT P0911YT - 2 m (6 ft)

P0970HT
**Peripheral
Cable Annunciator Annunciator
Keyboard Keyboard
Annunciator
Keyboard P0800MW 2 m (6 ft) P0800MW
Annunciator/Numeric Annunciator/Numeric Terminator

Keyboard Keyboard P0700TJ
Annunciator/Numeric P0800CB - 3 m (10 ft)
Keyboard P0800CB
Peripheral
J2 J1 J2 J1 J2 Cable
P0800CE
Video Cable J1
P0500WX ABCD
Peripheral Cable ABCD Peripheral Cable ABCD
3 m (10 ft) P0800CE
P0800CE
Video Cable
Video Cable P0500WX
P0500WX
Workstation Workstation Workstation

Processor 30 (1) Processor 30 (2) Processor 30 (n)
* 4 Conductor Video Cable (Red, Green, Blue, and Sync)

per Part Number
** Peripheral Cables: Video Cables:
P0911BT - 15 m (50 ft) P0911BP - 15 m (50 ft)
P0911CK - 30 m (100 ft) P0800FB - 30 m (100 ft) Use with adapter
P0911BU - 60 m (200 ft) P0911BQ - 60 m (200 ft) P0918ZK for monitors
P0911BV - 90 m (300 ft) P0911BR - 90 m (300 ft) with VGA(F) input video
P0911BW - 120 m (400 ft) P0911BS - 120 m (400 ft) connectors.
P0911CL - 150 m (500 ft) P0800HY - 150 m (500 ft)
Figure 9-100. Multiscreen Common Link Configuration Using Remote WP30
443
Peripheral Device Operating Parameter Settings

This subsection describes the operating parameters for the following peripheral devices:
♦ Color dot-matrix printer 132, P0913AV
♦ B/W dot-matrix printer 80
♦ Color PostScript/PCL5 printer, P0918FH
♦ Color PostScript printer, P0971GD
♦ VT100 compatible terminal
♦ Modem.
These settings are necessary to ensure communication compatibility between the devices and
I/A Series stations.
For information on operating parameter settings for other I/A Series peripheral devices, refer to
the documentation packaged with the individual devices.
Color Dot-Matrix Printer 132 Operating Parameters

Operating parameters for the Okidata MicroLine color dot-matrix alarm printer (P0913AV) with
serial and parallel interfaces are preset. For information on changing parameter settings, refer to
Okidata Microline Printer Handbook (P/N 59266303) packed with the module.
Table 9-14. Okidata Color Dot-Matrix Printer 132, Interface Module Switch Set-up
Group Function Condition

Printer Control Emulation Mode Epson LQ
Setup Graphics Uni-directional
Receive Buffer Size 32K
Paper Out Override No
Print Registration 0
Operator Panel Function Full Operation
Reset Inhibit No
Print Suppress Effective Yes
Auto LF No
Timeout Print Valid
Auto Select No
Ribbon Selection Black
Printhead Gap Adjustment +1
Graphics Speed Low
444
Table 9-14. Okidata Color Dot-Matrix Printer 132, Interface Module Switch Set-up (Continued)
Group Function Condition

Serial I/F Parity Even (see note 1)
Serial Data 7/8 Bits 8 Bits
Protocol X-ON/X-OFF
Diagnostic Test No
Busy Line DTR
Baud Rate 9600 BPS
DSR Signal Invalid
DTR Signal Ready on Power Up
Busy Time 200 ms
1.
In AP50/AW50 direct connect applications, set the parity item to “NONE”.
B/W Dot-Matrix Printer 80 Operating Parameters

To set the operating parameters on the B/W dot-matrix printer 80, proceed as follows:
1. Install the “super speed” serial interface module in the printer by following the instal-
lation instructions packed with the module.
2. Set the switches on the module as shown in Table 9-15 (refer to Figure 9-101):
Table 9-15. B/W Dot-Matrix Printer 80, Serial Interface Module Switch Settings
SWITCH 1 - OFF SWITCH 9 - OFF

SWITCH 2 - OFF (see Note) SWITCH 10 - ON
SWITCH 3 - ON SWITCH 11 - ON
SWITCH 7 - ON SWITCH 15 - OFF
SWITCH 8 - ON SWITCH 16 - OFF
NOTE
In AP50/AW50 direct connect applications, set this switch to the ON position to
disable parity.
445
3. Verify that the control board switches on the printer’s motherboard are set as shown in
Table 9-16 (refer to Figure 9-101):
Table 9-16. B/W Dot-Matrix Printer 80, Control Board Switch Settings
SWITCH 3 - OFF SWITCH 7 - ON
SW1 SW2
Off On Off On
1 9 8
2 10
7
3 11
Printer
6
4 12 5
Control Board
Super Speed Serial 5 13 4
Interface Module P0901DW 6 14 3
7 15 2
8 16 1
On Off
Figure 9-101. B/W Dot-Matrix Printer 80, Operating Parameter Switch Settings
Color PostScript/PCL5 Printer (P0918FG/FH) Operating

Parameters
The default operating parameters are used for the Lexmark Optra Color 45 printer (either
P0918FG or P0918FH). Changes from the defaults, however, are necessary when the printer’s
serial interface is used for connections to a COMM Server.
For the necessary changes of the factory defaults, make the following selections on the printer’s
front panel:
1. Select SERIAL MENU in the printer display, then select SERIAL OPTION 1, then
select SERIAL PROTOCOL, and select XON/XOFF/DTR.
2. If print screens originate from a WP30, change the COLOR MENU, Color Correc-
tion parameter to CMYK and the COLOR MENU, Print Quality parameter to
Quick Print.
For more information on changing parameter settings, refer to Lexmark Optra Color 45 User’s
Guide delivered with the printer.
Color PostScript Printer (P0971GD) Operating Parameters

Operating parameters for the color PostScript printer (P0971GD) are set with a row of switches
located at the bottom-rear section of the printer. Set all of the switches (white) to the down posi-
tion, as shown in Figure 9-102.
446
Context Off
Centronics
12 cpi
PC-8
Off
A4
For details on other switch settings,
refer to the HP DeskJet 1200C
and 1200C/PS Printers
User’s Guide.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Context On
Fast Cent
Roman8
Energy
10 cpi
Letter
All switches (1-8) are all set low ( )
for both PCL5 and PostScript files.
Figure 9-102. Color PostScript Printer (P0971GD), Operating Parameter Switch Settings
VT100 Compatible Terminal Operating Parameters

NOTE
The following information applies to the terminals.
Before the VT100 compatible terminal can be used, its operating parameters must be set as
follows:
1. Turn on power to the unit.
2. Strike the F3 key on the keyboard. The words setup directory appear at the center of
the screen, and the first word of the menu line is exit at the bottom of the screen.
(This is the main menu.)
3. Press F6 on the keyboard to display the display parameters. (Use arrow keys to select a
field, and use Enter (Return) or the space bar to select a different value within a field.)
Set up the display parameters as follows:
columns: 80 status line: local

controls: interpret status pos: top
autowrap: on width change: off
scroll: jump page format: 1x24
reverse screen: off cursor coupling: on
cursor: blinking block page coupling: on
447
4. Press F7 to display the general parameters, and change as follows:
personality: VT100 char set: multinational

terminal ID: VT100 recognize del: off
resolution: 15x12 screen saver: on
online/local: online new line: off
user feature lock: off
5. Press F8 to display the communications parameters, and change as follows:
transmit baud: 9600 parity check: on

receive baud: 9600 transmit limit: 150 cps
data/parity bits: host port: RS-232
8/even (for P0914BA/P0500YS connected
via a CMP10) and
8/none (for P0914BA/P0500YS terminal
connected to 50 Series)
stop bits: 1 modem control: off
local echo: off disconnect delay: 2 sec
handshake: x off-64 auto answerback: off
6. Press F10 to display the keyboard 1 parameters, and change as follows:
lock: caps compose: compose charshift,

and.key:,and.<X] key: del/can <and>
key: <and> “and” key: “and”
key repeat: on warning bell: off
keyclick: off break key: on
margin bell: off bell volume: high
7. Press F11 to display the keyboard 2 parameters, and change as follows:
keypad: numeric keyboard: north american

cursor keys: normal keys: typewriter
F key definition lock: off national mode: on
8. Press F4 to save these parameters. This completes the setup of the terminal operating
parameters.
448
Modem Operating Parameters

To set the parameters, refer to the instruction manual packed with the modem. Typical operating
parameters for modems (which may be used with I/A Series RS-232-C peripheral devices) are
listed below. Use the system configuration parameters: port type = 6, printer type = MODEM1.
DTE: Fast transmit mode

RS-232 DTR signal
RS-232 DSR and DCD signals
Ignore BREAK signal (use CTRL+b for BREAK signal)
Ignore data sent while answering call
Failsafe xon/xoff
Lock interface speed and use flow control (xon/xoff by default)
DCE: RS-232 DSR and DCD signals

Ignore BREAK signal (use CTRL+b for BREAK signal)
Failsafe xon/xoff
Lock interface speed and use flow control (xon/xoff by default)
Defaults: Answer on 1 ring

Auto modem speed determination (determined by DTE)
9600 baud interface speed (both DTE and DCE)
8 bits data, no parity, 1 stop bit
449
450
10. System Communication
Devices Cabling
This chapter presents cabling and installation information for specific communication devices
in the I/A Series system.
The following I/A Series system devices are described in this chapter:
♦ INTERSPEC™ Integrator 30 and Translator
♦ Integrator 30 for Modicon Programmable Controllers
♦ Modbus and Modbus Plus Devices
♦ Integrator 30 for Allen-Bradley Programmable Logic Controllers
♦ SPECTRUM Slave Gateway
♦ SPECTRUM Master Gateway
♦ Information Network Interface
♦ Nodebus Interface
♦ Dual Nodebus Interface
♦ Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface
♦ Dual Nodebus Extender
♦ Second Ethernet Port (for 50 Series products)
♦ X Terminal
♦ Token Ring Interface
♦ Carrierband LAN Interface
♦ Panel Display and Auto/Manual Station Interface
♦ Instrument Gateway
♦ Hydrostatic Tank Gauge Interface
♦ Mass Flowmeter Interface
♦ Modicon Gateway 15
♦ Allen-Bradley Data Highway Gateway 15
♦ Allen-Bradley Station
451
B0193AC – Rev U 10. System Communication Devices Cabling
INTERSPEC Integrator 30 and Translator

The INTERSPEC Integrator and Translator modules serve as a communication interface between
an I/A Series system and the following types of INTERSPEC devices:
♦ Analog Input Module (AIM)
♦ Controller Communication Module (CCM)
♦ Universal Input/Output Module (UIO)
♦ Universal Field Multiplexer (UFM™)
Installation of the INTERSPEC Integrator and Translator consists of making jumper settings,
cable connections, and installing the module.
The INTERSPEC Integrator 30 (P0960HA) is a single-width module installed inside an
I/A Series mounting structure. The module electrically connects to the Nodebus.
The INTERSPEC Integrator Translator (P0970UT) occupies two slots in an I/A Series mounting
structure, receiving power and signal cable connections from the mounting structure, but with no
connection to the Nodebus.
NOTE
The INTERSPEC Integrator 30 is labeled Communication Processor 30,
P/N P0960HA, on its data label. The module assumes its intended function as
INTERSPEC Integrator 30 when the appropriate module identifier (letterbug set)
is inserted and the system initializes the module.
INTERSPEC Integrator Translator Flunk Jumper

The INTERSPEC Integrator and Translator contains a jumper on the inside of its front cover.
This jumper is the flunk jumper, and it can be set to either flunk or unflunk if there is a watchdog
timeout (WDT) condition. (A flunk activates the computer fail signal to all devices on the
INTERSPEC link.) The translator is shipped with the jumper set to unflunk.
To access, inspect, or change the flunk jumper, remove the INTERSPEC Integrator and Transla-
tor front cover. The cover is retained by four tabs located as shown in Figure 10-1.
Arrows indicate tab locations.

Press tabs and pull cover
forward and off the module.
Figure 10-1. INTERSPEC Integrator 30 Translator – Front Cover Removal
452
10. System Communication Devices Cabling B0193AC – Rev U
To set the flunk jumper:

1. Refer to Figure 10-2 to locate the jumper, and move the jumper to the horizontal pins
to select unflunk, or jumper the vertical pins to select the flunk position in the event
of a WDT timeout.
2. Replace the translator front cover by aligning the four tabs with the associated holes
and pressing the cover back in place.
Jumper in Horizontal Position:

WDT timeout does not cause flunk
Translator Module
with Cover Removed
Jumper in Vertical Position:
WDT timeout causes flunk
Module Cover
(Inside)
Figure 10-2. INTERSPEC Integrator 30 Translator Flunk Jumper Settings
INTERSPEC Interface Cabling Connections

The INTERSPEC Interface cabling and connections vary depending on the following
configurations:
♦ INTERSPEC Integrator 30 with Single INTERSPEC Integrator Translator
(Figure 10-3)
♦ INTERSPEC Integrator 30 with Dual INTERSPEC Integrator Translators
(Figure 10-4).
Refer to either the single or dual INTERSPEC Integrator figure as appropriate, and perform the
following steps to make the cabling connections. Refer also to the appropriate document(s) for
information on INTERSPEC equipment cable connections.
453
Table 10-1. INTERSPEC Documents
Part Number Document Title

MI 200-304 Controller Communication Subsystem Installation
MI 200-305 Analog Input Subsystem Installation
MI 200-357 Universal Input/Output Subsystem Installation
MI 200-312 Universal Field Multiplexer Subsystem Installation
Engage the peripheral connector plugs (on the INTERSPEC Integrator 30 and INTERSPEC
Translator) by inserting the hex driver tool into the peripheral connector engagement actuator
slots (on the front of the modules) and turning 1/2-turn clockwise.
P0500JX P0970UY 2DK-----
* To INTERSPEC
A B Communication
AB
Port on AIM, CCM,
UIO, or UFM **
INTERSPEC
INTERSPEC
Integrator
Integrator 30
Translator
* Mount P0970UY cable connector on DIN rail
to provide cable strain relief.
** Refer to sales order drawings for applicable
INTERSPEC system configuration.
*** The INTERSPEC Integrator Translator
contains both the transmit and receive ter-
minator resistors required for a station on
the end of the INTERSPEC link. Refer to **
above.
Figure 10-3. INTERSPEC Integrator 30 With Single Integrator and Translator
454
*
P0970UY 2DK-----
P0500JX
P0500JX P0970UY 2DK-----
* To INTERSPEC
AB A B A B Communication
Port on AIM, CCM,
UIO, or UFM **
INTERSPEC INTERSPEC
Integrator 30 Integrator
Translator (2)
* Mount P0970UY cable connector on DIN rail to provide cable strain relief.
** Refer to sales order drawings for applicable INTERSPEC system configuration.
***The INTERSPEC Integrator Translator contains both the transmit and receive terminator resistors
required for a station on the end of the INTERSPEC link. Refer to ** above.
Figure 10-4. INTERSPEC Integrator 30 With Dual Translators
INTERSPEC Integrator 30 Translator Controls and Indicators

Figure 10-5 illustrates the INTERSPEC Integrator 30 controls and indicators. Table 10-2 below
describes these controls and indicators. The descriptions are supplied as references.
Reset
Receive (Recessed
Pushbutton)
Transmit
Flunk
Flunk Switch
Pwr OK
Watch Dog
Time Out
Figure 10-5. INTERSPEC Integrator 30 Translator Controls and Indicators
455
Table 10-2. INTERSPEC Integrator 30 Translator Controls and Indicators
Item Description
RECEIVE Indicator On for 35 ms each time the translator receives a data byte from the
INTERSPEC Integrator 30.
TRANSMIT On for 35 ms each time the translator sends a data byte to the
Indicator INTERSPEC Integrator 30.
FLUNK Indicator On to indicate that the computer fail signal to the INTERSPEC
devices is active.
FLUNK Switch In the FLUNK position, this switch manually activates the
computer fail signal to all INTERSPEC link devices. Normally, this
switch is left in the unflunk position to disable manual generation of
the computer fail signal.
PWR OK Indicator On to indicate that power to the INTERSPEC Integrator and
Translator modules is active.
WATCH DOG On when the watchdog timer in the translator has timed out,
TIME OUT indicating a communication failure with the INTERSPEC
Indicator Integrator 30 or a failure within the translator.
Reset pushbutton Reinitiates a translator power-on cycle. This switch is recessed in the
Switch cover.
Cabling for the I/A Series Integrator 30 for Modicon

Programmable Controllers
The Integrator 30 for Modicon Programmable Controllers (programmable controllers) is a station
on an I/A Series network that connects Modicon programmable controllers to the I/A Series net-
work via a standard RS-232-C data link. (Refer to the enclosure information developed during
the site planning phase to determine whether your installation uses this type of integrator.)
NOTE
On its data label, the integrator is labeled Communication Processor 30,
P/N P0960HA. The module assumes its intended function (as Integrator 30 for
Modicon programmable controllers) when you insert the appropriate module iden-
tifier (letterbug set), and the system software initializes the module.
There are two configurations of the Integrator 30; non-fault-tolerant (Figure 10-6), and fault-
tolerant (Figure 10-7). Each of these configurations can have either a redundant or non-
redundant cabling scheme.
Depending on the configuration, there is a single P0500JX cable from the integrator to a
P0970VB communication cable signal configuration selector, and then one of several types of
cable that connects the P0970VB configuration selector to a communications option such as a
modem or programmable controller. The type of cable used depends on the communication
option to which the cable connects. The configurations with redundant cabling have two sets of
this cabling and connectors.
456
The P0970VB configuration selector contains 32 switches. The switch settings depend on the
type of cable connected which depends on the communication option to be connected. Refer to
the description “P0970VB Configuration Selector Switch Settings and Cable Conversion Tables”
on page 467 for detailed information.
Configuration
Selector
P0970VB
Integrator 30 P0500JX To Modem or Programmable
(for Modicon) Controller
Non-Redundant Programmable Controller Cabling
Configuration
Selectors
P0970VB (2)
P0500JX
Integrator 30 To Modems or Programmable
(for Modicon) Controller
P0500JX
Redundant Programmable Controller Cabling

Figure 10-6. Integrator 30 for Modicon Programmable Controllers –
(Non-Fault-Tolerant) Cabling
457
Configuration
Selector
P0970VB
Integrator 30
(for Modicon) P0500JX
To Modem or Programmable
Controller
Integrator 30 P0500JX
(for Modicon)
Non-Redundant Programmable Controller Cabling
Configuration
Selectors
P0970VB (2)
P0500JX*
Integrator 30
(for Modicon) To Modems or Programmable
P0500JX Controller
P0500JX
Integrator 30
(for Modicon) P0500JX
Redundant Programmable Controller Cabling
*For redundant, fault-tolerant, 3-wire configuration, replace P0500JX with cable P0912GV.
Figure 10-7. Integrator 30 for Modicon Programmable Controllers – (Fault-Tolerant) Cabling
The following figures show the programmable controller Modbus and direct cabling for both the
non-redundant (Figure 10-8), and redundant (Figure 10-9 and Figure 10-10) configurations. The
Modbus network configuration provides connection for up to eight programmable controllers,
while the direct configuration provides connection to a single programmable controller.
458
Connects to Configuration P0970WX Modbus

J478 or J878
Selector - P0970VB Modem
J478 or J878 J478 or J878
Modem Modem
PC* 584, 884, PC* 584, 884,

Modbus Network Configuration or 984 or 984
(Up to 8 Modem/
Programmable Controller Links)
P0970WY W192**
PC* 584
Any one of these cables P0970XA*** PC* 984-380 or

connects to configuration 984-680
selector P0970VB.
P0970WY PC* 884, 984A,
or 984B
P0913ET
BM85
* Programmable Controller
Direct Configuration ** Modicon W192 Cable (Supplied by user)
***NOTE: P0970XA replaced with P0913ET. See table 10-4 for switch setting differences.
Figure 10-8. Integrator 30 for Modicon Programmable Controllers – Non-Redundant
Programmable Controller Modbus and Direct Cabling Configuration
P0970WX J478 or J878 Modbus

Modem
J478 or J878 J478 or J878
Modem Modem
PC* 584, 884, PC* 584, 884,

Connects to Configuration
or 984 or 984
Selector - P0970VB
J478 or J878 J478 or J878

Modem Modem
P0970WX J478 or J878 Modbus

Modem
(Up to 8 Modem/
Programmable Controller Links)
*PC = Programmable Controller
Modbus Network Configuration
Redundant Programmable Controller Modbus Cabling Configuration
459
P0913ET
BM85
P0970WY W192**
P0970WY W192** PC* 584
Any one pair of these P0970XA***

cables connects to PC* 984-380 or
P0970XA*** 984-680
P0970VB.
P0970WY
PC* 884, 984A, or
P0970WY 984B
Direct Configuration
* Both ports of the programmable controller (PC) must have the same address.
** Modicon W192 cable (supplied by the user).
***NOTE: P0970XA replaced with P0913ET. See table for switch
differences.
Redundant Programmable Controller Direct Cabling Configuration
Connecting the Cabling for Integrator 30 for Modicon

Programmable Controllers
To connect communication devices and cabling to the Integrator 30 for Modicon programmable
controllers:
1. Turn off program controller equipment power.
2. Determine which communication option is to be connected and connect the appro-
priate cable. (Figure 10-7 through Figure 10-10 show the appropriate cable for each
communication option.)
3. Connect the signal cable shield ground lug at the end of the cable associated with the
communication option (mode, programmable controller, and so forth) to a suitable
earthing point.
4. Route the other end of the cable to the bottom of the I/A Series enclosure.
page 467.
cable to the D connector. (One end of the P0970VB configuration selector has a sin-
gle cable D connector; the other end has two 26-pin connectors. The correct connec-
tor for the cable is the end with the single D connector.) To install the switch, refer to
the procedure “Installing the P0970VB Configuration Selector Switch” on page 472.
7. Connect one end of the P0500JX cable to either of the two 26-pin connectors. (One
end of the P0970VB configuration selector has a single D connector; the other end
has two 26-pin connectors. Both 26-pin connectors are needed for a fault-tolerant
configuration.)
460
NOTE
For redundant fault-tolerant configuration with PLC™ that does not supply a
DTR signal, replace P0500JX with cable P0912GV (see Figure 10-12). Addition-
ally, you need a cable between the P0970VB switch and the device. The type of
cable used depends on the module to which the cable connects. The configurations
with redundant cabling have two sets of this cabling and connectors.
8. Route the P0500JX cable to the correct Modicon port position as shown in the appro-
priate cabling diagram, for either the non-fault-tolerant (Figure 10-11) or fault-toler-
ant (Figure 10-12) configurations.
9. Engage the peripheral connector plug (on the Modicon Integrator module) by insert-
ing the hex driver tool into the peripheral connector engagement actuator slot (on the
front of the module) and turning 1/2-turn clockwise. The cabling installation is
complete.
P0500JX
To Modems or
P0500JX To Modem or Programmable
Programmable P0500JX Controller
Controller
Configuration Configuration
Selector Selectors (2)
P0970VB ** P0970VB **
A B CD A B CD
Non-Fault-Tolerant Non-Fault-Tolerant
Integrator 30 * Integrator 30 *
* Communication Processor 30
** Mount cable connector(s) on DIN rail
For Non-Redundant Programmable For Redundant Programmable
Controller Cabling Controller Cabling
Figure 10-11. Integrator 30 for Modicon Programmable Controllers – (Non-Fault-Tolerant)

Cabling and Positions
461
P0500JX
P0500JX To modem or
programmable P0500JX To Modems or
P0500JX
controller P0500JX Programmable
Configuration Controller
P0500JX
Selector
P0970VB ** Configuration
Selectors (2)
A B CDA BCD A B CDA BCD P0970VB **
Fault-Tolerant Fault-Tolerant
* Fault-tolerant Communication Processor 30

***For redundant, fault-tolerant 3-wire
. configuration use cable P0912GV.
For Non-Redundant Programmable For Redundant Programmable
Controller Cabling Controller Cabling
Figure 10-12. Integrator 30 for Modicon Programmable Controllers – (Fault-Tolerant)

Cabling for the Modbus and Modbus Plus Devices

Refer to Integrators for Modbus and Modbus Plus Devices (B0193RL).
Cabling for the I/A Series Integrator 30 for

Allen-Bradley Programmable Logic Controllers
The I/A Series Integrator 30 for Allen-Bradley Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs) is a sta-
tion on the I/A Series network which provides for connection of the Allen-Bradley Data Highway
(and its associated Programmable Logic Controllers) via a standard RS-432-C data link. (Refer to
the enclosure information developed during the site planning phase to determine whether your
installation uses an Integrator 30 for Allen-Bradley PLCs.)
NOTE
The I/A Series Integrator 30 for Allen-Bradley Programmable Logic Controllers is
labeled Communication Processor 30, P/N P0960HA on its data label. The module
assumes its intended function (as Integrator 30 for Allen-Bradley PLCs) when you
insert the appropriate module identifier (letterbug set), and the system software ini-
tializes the module.
There are two configurations of the Integrator 30; non-fault-tolerant, and fault-tolerant. Each of
these configurations can have either a redundant or non-redundant cabling scheme.
462
The following figures are overview illustrations of the Integrator 30 for Allen-Bradley PLCs for
both non-fault-tolerant cabling configurations with redundant and non-redundant cabling
(Figure 10-13 and Figure 10-14), and then similar figures for a fault-tolerant configuration
(Figure 10-15 and Figure 10-16).
For all cable configurations except the redundant, fault-tolerant 3-wire configuration, cable
replacements require a type P0500JX cable connected between the integrators for Modbus devices
and a type P0970VB communication cable signal configuration selector (switch). For redundant
fault-tolerant configuration with PLC that does not supply a DTR signal, replace P0500JX with
cable P0912GV. Additionally, you need a cable between the P0970VB switch and the device. The
type of cable used depends on the module to which the cable connects. The configurations with
redundant cabling have two sets of this cabling and connectors.
The P0970VB configuration selector contains 32 switches. The switch settings depend on the
type of cable connected which depends on the communication option to be connected. Refer to
the description “P0970VB Configuration Selector Switch Settings and Cable Conversion Tables”
on page 467 for detailed information.
Configuration
Selector
P0970VB P0970XC * or
Integrator 30 P0500JX P0970WX **
for AB PLC-5/40, 5/60
Allen-Bradley
P0970XE * or
P0970WZ ** AB 1771-KE, KF To
Any one cable
connects to Communication Module ABDH
P0970XD * or
P0970VB. or
P0970WY ** AB 1770-KF2 or 1779-KFL
ABDH +
Communication Module
* 6 m (20 ft) cable
** 12 m (40 ft) cable
Figure 10-13. Integrator 30 for Allen-Bradley PLCs – (Non-Fault-Tolerant)
Non-Redundant Cabling
463
Either cable connects

to P0970VB. P0970XD * or
P0970WY**
AB 1770-KF2 or 1779-KFL
P0970XE * or
P0970WZ **
AB 1771-KE, KF
Configuration Communication Module
P0500JX Selector
Integrator 30 P0970VB
for
Allen-Bradley P0500JX P0970XE * or
Configuration
Selector P0970WZ **
P0970VB AB 1771-KE, KF To
Communication Module ABDH
P0970XD * or
P0970WY** or
Either cable connects AB 1770-KF2 or 1779-KFL ABDH +
to P0970VB Communication Module
* 6 m (20 ft) cable

** 12 m (40 ft) cable

with Redundant Cabling
Configuration
Integrator 30 Selector
for P0970VB
Allen-Bradley P0500JX P0970XE * or
P0500JX P0970WZ ** AB 1771-KE, KF
To
Integrator 30 P0970XD * or
for P0970WY ** AB 1770-KF2 or 1779-KFL or
Allen-Bradley Either cable ABDH +
connects to Communication Module
P0970VB.
* 6 m (20 ft) cable
** 12 m (40 ft) cable
Figure 10-15. Integrator 30 for Allen-Bradley PLCs – (Fault-Tolerant)
with Non-Redundant Cabling
464
Either cable connects

to cable connector P0970VB. P0970XD * or
P0970WY**
AB 1770-KF2 or 1779-KFL
P0970XE * or
P0500JX P0970WZ **
Integrator 30 AB 1771-KE, KF
for P0500JX Cable Communication Module
Allen-Bradley Connector
P0970VB
Cable P0970XE * or
Integrator 30 P0500JX Connector P0970WZ **
for AB 1771-KE, KF
Allen-Bradley P0500JX P0970VB To
P0970XD * or
P0970WY** or
Either cable connects AB 1770-KF2 or 1779-KFL ABDH +
to cable connector P0970VB. Communication Module
* 6 m (20 ft) cable

** 12 m (40 ft) cable
Figure 10-16. Integrator 30 for Allen-Bradley PLCs – (Fault-Tolerant) with Redundant Cabling
Connecting the Cabling for Integrator 30 for Allen-Bradley PLCs

NOTE
When installing Allen-Bradley Data Highways, it is imperative to adhere to the
Allen-Bradley installation guidelines. Failure to do so may cause errors when com-
municating to a PLC from an integrator. In particular, Allen-Bradley Data Highway
2 with multiple 1779-KFL communication modules requires adherence to specific
Data Highway cabling practices for error-free operation.
To connect a communication module and cabling to the Integrator 30 for Allen-Bradley PLCs,
refer to the appropriate figure for non-fault-tolerant configurations, with or without redundant
cabling (Figure 10-17), or fault-tolerant configurations, with or without redundant cabling
(Figure 10-18), and perform the following steps:
1. Turn off Allen-Bradley equipment power.
2. Determine which communication module is to be connected (see Table 10-3 and
Table 10-4) and connect the appropriate cable to the module. (Note that the commu-
nication cables are available in two lengths, 20 ft and 40 ft. For reliable communica-
tion, however, the shorter (20 ft) cable should be used in configurations using a
19.2 kbaud transmission rate.)
3. Connect the signal cable shield ground lug at the end of the cable associated with the
communication module to a suitable earthing point.
4. Route the other end of the cable to the bottom of the I/A Series enclosure.
“P0970VB Configuration Selector Switch Settings” on page 468.
465
cable to the D connector. (One end of the P0970VB configuration selector has a
single cable D connector; the other end has two 26-pin connectors. The correct con-
nector for the cable is the end with the single D connector.) To install the switch, refer
to the procedure “Installing the P0970VB Configuration Selector Switch” on
page 472.
configuration.)
8. Route the P0500JX cable(s) through the bottom of the enclosure as described in
“Peripheral Cable Routing within Enclosures” on page 343 to the correct integrator
position as shown in the Figure 10-17 (non-fault-tolerant) or Figure 10-18 (fault-
tolerant) cabling diagram.
9. Engage the peripheral connector plug on the integrator by inserting the hex driver
tool into the peripheral connector engagement actuator slot (on the front of the mod-
ule) and turning 1/2-turn clockwise. The cabling installation is complete.
P0500JX
To
P0500JX To PLC or Communication
Communication P0500JX Modules
Module
Cable Cable
Connector Connectors (2)
P0970VB ** P0970VB **
A B CD A B CD
Non-Fault-Tolerant Non-Fault-Tolerant
* Communication Processor 30
For Non-Redundant ABDH For Redundant ABDH Cabling
(or PLC) Cabling

466
P0500JX
P0500JX
P0500JX
P0500JX To Communication
To Communication
Module P0500JX
Cable Modules
Connector P0500JX
P0970VB ** Cable
Connectors (2)
A B CDA BCD A BCDABCD P0970VB **
Fault-Tolerant Fault-Tolerant
* Fault-Tolerant Communication Processor 30

For Non-Redundant ABDH Cabling For Redundant ABDH Cabling
Figure 10-18. Integrator 30 for Allen-Bradley PLCs – (Fault-Tolerant) Cabling and Positions
P0970VB Configuration Selector Switch Settings and

Cable Conversion Tables
Introduction
Initial and replacement cabling between an I/A Series communication processor or gateway, and
an associated communication option requires the cabling components shown in Figure 10-19:
♦ A P0500JX cable
♦ A P0970VB configuration selector switch
♦ One of the cables listed in Figure 10-19.
Communication
Processor P0500JX
or To Communication Option
Gateway P0970XA P0970WX
Configuration
Selector P0970XC P0970WY
P0970VB P0970XD P0970WZ
P0970XE P0913ET
NOTE: A second P0500JX cable to the switch is used for a fault-tolerant configuration.
Figure 10-19. P0970VB Cable Configuration Overview
The P0970VB switch consists of 32 switches (4 banks of 8 SPST switches) that you must config-
ure before communication between the communication processor and its option can begin. The
switch settings depend on the communication option and the cable between the switch and the
option.
467
The P0970VB switch mounts on an enclosure DIN rail with the cables secured to strain relief
brackets that also secure the switch to the DIN rail.
The following paragraphs describe how to configure and install the P0970VB switch.
P0970VB Configuration Selector Switch Settings

Figure 10-20 shows the 32 switches in four groups of 8 switches (S1 - S4). The designator C indi-
cates that the switch is closed, or in the down position (see the C position for a rocker switch in
the right side view in Figure 10-20).
D Cable Connector Cable to

Communication Option
1 8 1 8
C C
Switches (S1) 1-8 Switches (S2) 9-16
O O
Switches (S3) 17-24 1 8 1 8
C C
Switches (S4) 25-32
O O
P0500JX cable(s) from
Communication
Processor or 26-Pin Cable Connector
Gateway O C
Right Side View
26-Pin Cable Connector Rocker switch shown in
One of 4 Cable Cover down (C) position
Tab Holes
NOTES: 1. Use either 26-pin cable connector for non-fault-tolerant configuration.
2. Use both 26-pin cable connectors for fault-tolerant configurations.
3. Align arrow on P0500JX cables(s) with the black arrow
on socket for 26-pin cable connector(s).
Figure 10-20. P0970VB Configuration Selector Switch
Communication Processor or Gateway Cabling

The P0970VB configuration selector has 32 switches that are set open or closed depending on the
communication processor, the communication option, and the type of cable. The last column in
Table 10-3 through Table 10-7 lists the corresponding P0970VB switches that are closed (C) to
configure the switch for a particular communication option (see Figure 10-20). Any switch not
listed for a given configuration is to be set open (O). Each table provides the switch configuration
for a particular option as follows:
♦ Table 10-3 - RS-232 Printers or Terminals Communication Cables
♦ Table 10-4 - Allen Bradley Communication Cables
♦ Table 10-5 - Modicon Communications Cables
♦ Table 10-6 - Instrument Gateway Communication Cables
♦ Table 10-7 - INI 15 Communication Cables.
468
Table 10-3. RS-232 Printers or Terminals Communication Cables
Cable Part Number

P0970VB Configuration Selector
Switches (1-32 in the Closed (C)
Option Length Old Cable New Cable Position)
RS-232 40 ft P0800FK P0970WY 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16
VT100 Compatible
P136CS 40 ft P0800AC P0970WX 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16
Dot-Matrix Printer
P80BCS 40 ft P0800AC P0970WX 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16
Dot-Matrix Printer 80 B/W
P80BFS 40 ft P0800AC P0970WX 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16
Dot-Matrix Printer 80 B/W
P0900Z 40 ft P0800AC P0970WX 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16
P136FS 40 ft P0911BJ P0970WX 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 16
Dot-Matrix Printer 132
.
Table 10-4. Allen Bradley Communication Cables
Cable Part Number P0970VB Configuration Selector

Cable Switches (1-32 in the Closed (C)
1771-KF 20 ft P0800KR P0970XE 1, 2, 3, 7, 8, 11, 14, 16, 22, 28, 32
1771-KF 40 ft P0901PE P0970WZ 1, 2, 3, 7, 8, 11, 14, 16, 22, 28, 32
1770-KF2 20 ft P0800KS P0970XD 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 9, 11, 12, 14, 16
1770-KF2 40 ft P0901SD P0970WY 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 9, 11, 12, 14, 16
1779-KFL 20 ft P0800KT P0970XD 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 9, 11, 12, 14, 16
1779-KFL 40 ft P0800KU P0970WY 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 9, 11, 12, 14, 16
PLC-5/40 20 ft P0911KM P0970XC 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 9, 11, 12, 14, 16
PLC-5/40 40 ft P0911KN P0970WX 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 9, 11, 12, 14, 16
Table 10-5. Modicon Communications Cables

J478 Modem 40 ft P0901PF P0970WX 3, 11, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 27
584 PC 40 ft P0901SE P0970WY 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 16
984-X80PC 40 ft P0911AJ P0970XA 3, 7, 11, 14, 17, 27, 29, 30, 31
984-X80PC 40 ft P0911AJ P0913ET 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 11, 14, 16
469
Table 10-5. Modicon Communications Cables (Continued)

984A, B PC 40 ft P0911AK P0970WX 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 9, 10, 11, 16
TIWAY PLC 40 ft P0911MB P0970WX 1, 2, 3, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 16, 21
*
For non-fault-tolerant configura- 1, 2, 3, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 16, 21

tions, use P0500JX cable from
P0970VB switch.
For fault-tolerant configuration with 1, 2, 3, 7, 8, 9, 10, 16
PLC that does not supply a DTR sig-
nal, use P0912GV cable from
P0970VB switch.
BM85 Multiplexer 40 ft None P0913ET 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 11,14, 30
.
Table 10-6. Instrument Gateway Communication Cables

Dual Port 40 ft P0800KV P0970WX 3, 4, 11, 16, 17, 18, 19, 27
Converter 120 V ac,
Dual Port
Converter 220 V ac,
Dual Port
Converter 240 V ac
.
Table 10-7. INI 15 Communication Cables

RS-232 40 ft P0800FK P0970WY 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16
VT100
RS-232 40 ft P0800AV P0970WX 12, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 22, 23, 24,
Modem 25, 26, 27
470
Replacement Cabling
For each specific cable option available to link a communication processor or gateway to the
devices listed in the first column (Option) of Table 10-3 through Table 10-7, you require the
cable number listed in the fourth column (New Cable). The cables listed in the third column of
Table 10-3 through Table 10-7 (Old Cable), are no longer available. For all cable configurations
except the redundant, fault-tolerant 3-wire configuration, cable replacements require a type
P0500JX cable connected between the integrators for Modbus device and a type P0970VB com-
munication cable signal configuration selector (switch). For redundant fault-tolerant configura-
tion with PLC that does not supply a DTR signal, replace P0500JX with cable P0912GV.
Additionally, you need a cable between the P0970VB switch and the device.
P0970VB Configuration Selector Switch Pinout

Figure 10-21 shows the relationship between the P0970VB configuration selector switches and
the P1 and P2 pin connections and signals from the communication processor or gateway, and
the pin connections and signals for the cable to the communication option.
SW4-3 20
TXD [9] ** 2 *
SW2-2
SW1-4
RXD [7] SW1-2
SW3-6
DCD [15] 8
SW1-1
3 SW4-8
11
SW3-1 SW1-3
SW4-1 SW2-1
SW4-7
SW3-8
RSET [11] 17
7
SW2-7 DTR [5] SW2-8
TSET SW2-6
OUTPUT SW4-4
[19] SW2-5 SW3-5 SIG GND 13
24 SW3-4
6
SW4-2
SW4-5
DSR [17]
SW2-4 SW3-2
RI [21] 22 RTS [13] 4
SW2-3 SW1-6
SW1-8
SW4-3 SW1-5
SW4-6
SW3-7
TSET 15 SIG GND
INPUT CTS [3] 5
[23] SW3-3
NOTES:
* Numbers in circles are DB-25 connector pin numbers.
** Numbers in brackets are P1-P2 connector numbers. Connections
go to both the P1 & P2 but only sig name is shown for clarity.
Figure 10-21. Gateway 30 Y Connector (P0970VB Configuration Selector Switch)
471
P0970VB Configuration Selector Assembly Kit

Figure 10-22 identifies the P0970VB configuration selector assembly kit parts.
D Cable Socket
1 8 1 8
C C
O O
1 8 1 8 DIN Rail Mounting and Cable
C C Strain Relief Bracket (Qty. 2)
O O
26-Pin Socket
26-Pin Socket
P0970VB Configuration Cable Cover

Selector Switch for 26-Pin connector(s)
Figure 10-22. P0970VB Configuration Selector Assembly Kit
Installing the P0970VB Configuration Selector Switch

The P0970VB switch is normally mounted on a DIN rail in the enclosure. The back of the switch
fits to the DIN rail. Two strain relief brackets secure the assembly to the rail and also provide tie
points for the cables.
1. Connect the P0500JX cable(s) to the communication processor or gateway. If this is a
fault-tolerant configuration, connect two cables to the communication processor
(processor module positions A and B).
2. Route the P0500JX cable(s) to the DIN rail where you want to install the P0970VB
switch.
3. Refer to Table 10-3 on page 469 to identify the cable designed for your communica-
tion option; connect this cable to the option.
4. Route the other end of the communication cable from the option, to and through the
bottom of the enclosure to where you want to locate the P0970VB switch.
5. Locate the P0970VB switch assembly, and using tweezers, gently remove the plastic
covers on the switches and set them aside.
6. Set the switches for your communication option/cable as described previously (see
Figure 10-20 and Table 10-4).
7. Place the plastic covers back on the switches. Use care not to disturb the switch set-
tings during the rest of this procedure.
8. Locate the two DIN rail mounting and cable strain relief brackets, and install them on
the DIN rail. The end of each bracket (with the holes for the wire tie) should face
toward the middle of the enclosure.
9. Locate the P0970VB switch and orient it with the 26-pin sockets at the top if you are
installing the P0970VB switch on a DIN rail in the left side of the enclosure, or with
the D connector socket at the top if you are installing the switch in the right side of
the enclosure.
472
10. With the switch in one hand, slide the strain relief brackets vertically with your other
hand, to the location on the rail where you want to mount the switch.
11. Fit the side of the switch with the arrows indicating pin 1 on the 26-pin sockets in
against the DIN rail. The strain relief brackets must be located at the top and bottom
of the switch. Next, press the other side of the switch in against the DIN rail until it
snaps into place. (Figure 10-24 shows the position of the switch assembly and one
bracket.)
12. Refer to Figure 10-24 and install the cable from the communication option with a ser-
vice loop as shown.
13. Secure the cable to the strain relief bracket with a wire tie.
Brackets Oriented This

DIN Rail Direction, Toward Center
(Cross Section) of Enclosure
Interface Use wire tie to

Cable secure cable
to bracket.
Figure 10-23. Installing the P0970VB Switch (Top View) and D Cable
14. Refer to Figure 10-24 and locate the P0500JX cable. Connect the cable to either
26-pin cable socket. (Make sure the arrow marked on the cable connector is at the
same end as a similar arrow at the socket.) For a fault-tolerant configuration, install
the second P0500JX cable to the available 26-pin socket in the same way.
15. Locate the cable cover and using your thumb and forefinger, squeeze the cover slightly
and engage the four cover tabs in the associated holes on the switch.
16. Secure the cable(s) to the strain relief bracket with a wire tie.
Cable
Cover
Tab
P0500JX Use wire tie to
Cable secure cable(s)
to bracket.
Figure 10-24. Installing the P0500JX Cable(s)
473
Integrator 30 for Modicon Programmable Controllers – Cable

Replacement
Figure 10-25 shows the cables that were previously used for specific Modicon communication
options. Currently, the P0800AZ cable and the associated P0901--/P0911-- cable are replaced by
a type P0500JX cable and a P0970VB configuration selector followed by a cable to the communi-
cation option. The right-most column in the figure identifies the cable for each option.
You can set the switches in the P0970VB configuration selector once you identify the cable type
for a particular communication option (see also “Replacement Cabling” on page 471).
The cable types do not change for the redundant cable or fault-tolerant configurations.
Corresponding
Integrator To communication option new P0970 cable
P0800AZ None W PERI Cable None

P0800AZ P0901PF (40 ft) To J478 Modem P0970WX
P0800AZ P0901SE (40 ft) To 584 PC P0970WY
P0800AZ P0911AJ (40 ft) To 984-X80 PC P0970XA
P0800AZ P0911AK (40 ft) To 984A, B PC P0970WX /ET
P0800AZ P0911AK (40 ft) To BM85 P0970ET
Figure 10-25. Integrator 30 for Modicon Programmable Controllers Replacement Cables
Integrator 30 for Allen-Bradley PLCs – Cable Replacement

Figure 10-26 shows the cables that were previously used for specific ABDH communication mod-
ules. The P0800AZ cable and the associated P0800--/P0901--/P0911-- cable are replaced by a
type P0500JX cable and a P0970VB configuration selector followed by a cable to the communi-
cation option. The right-most column in the figure identifies the cable for each option.
You can set the switches in the P0970VB configuration selector once you identify the cable type
for a particular communication option (see also “Replacement Cabling” on page 471).
The cable types do not change for the redundant cable or fault-tolerant configurations.
Corresponding
Integrator PLC new P0970 cable
P0800AZ P0800KR (20 ft) 1771-KF P0970XE (20 ft)

P0800AZ P0901PE (40 ft) 1771-KF P0970WZ (40 ft)
P0800AZ P0800KS (20 ft) 1770-KF2 P0970XD (20 ft)
P0800AZ P0901SD (40 ft) 1770-KF2 P0970WY (40 ft)
P0800AZ P0800KT (20 ft) 1779-KFL P0970XD (20 ft)
P0800AZ P0800KU (40 ft) 1779-KFL P0970WY (40 ft)
P0800AZ P0911KM (20 ft) PCL-5140 P0970XC (20 ft)
P0800AZ P0911KN (40 ft) PCL-5140 P0970WX (40 ft)
Figure 10-26. Integrator 30 for Allen-Bradley PLCs Replacement Cables
Instrument Gateway Cable Replacement

Refer to the description “Replacement Cabling” on page 471.
474
INI 15 Gateway Cable Replacement

Refer to the description “Replacement Cabling” on page 471.
Device Integrator 30 Cabling

The Device Integrator 30 is a station on the I/A Series network that allows you to connect
I/A Series equipment with various non I/A Series devices for collecting and storing data from
those devices.
NOTE
The Device Integrator 30 is labeled Communication Processor 30, P/N P0902DZ
or P0911AC on its data label. The module assumes its intended function when you
Up to four asynchronous RS-232-C compatible devices can be interfaced via the Device Integra-
tor 30. Typical devices fall into three categories: receive-only devices (gas turbines, data collectors,
sequence of events monitors), scanned devices (gas analyzers), and read/write devices (paper
machine gauges, programmable logic controllers).
Associated with the Device Integrator 30 are a P0500JX cable and P0970VB cable configuration
selector switch (Figure 10-20) for connecting to a compatible RS-232-C cable associated with the
foreign device. Figure 10-27 and Figure 10-28 show the cabling for the non-fault-tolerant and
fault-tolerant configurations, respectively.
Configuration
Selector
P0970VB
Device A P0500JX Foreign
Integrator 30 Device
RS-232 Cable
(user-supplied)
Configuration
Selector
P0970VB
A P0500JX Foreign
Device
Device RS-232 Cable
Integrator 30 (user-supplied)
B P0500JX
Foreign
Device
RS-232 Cable
(user-supplied)
Redundant Cabling
Figure 10-27. Device Integrator 30 (Non-Fault-Tolerant) Cabling
475
Configuration Selector
Device P0970VB
Integrator 30 A P0500JX
Foreign
A P0500JX Device
RS-232 Cable
Device (user-supplied)
Integrator 30
Configuration Selector
P0970VB
A P0500JX
Device
Foreign
Integrator 30 B P0500JX RS-232 Cable Device
P0500JX (user-supplied)
A
Foreign
Device B P0500JX Device
Integrator 30 RS-232 Cable
(user-supplied)
Redundant Cabling
Figure 10-28. Device Integrator 30 (Fault-Tolerant) Cabling
By setting a specific configuration of P0970VB DIP switches (Figure 10-20), you can configure
one of a variety of foreign devices with little or no jumpering within the 25-pin connector hoods.
In Table 10-8, the first column lists which switches to set closed to obtain the RS-232 cable pin
assignments shown in the rest of the table. Note that all other P0970VB switches are to remain
open.
Table 10-8. Device Integrator P0970VB Switch Settings and RS-232-C Pinout
Closed Switch Pin Signal To

SW4-3 2 Transmit Data (TXD) Device
SW3-1 3 Receive Data (RXD) Integrator
SW3-2 4 Request to Send (RTS) Device
SW3-3 5 Clear to Send (CTS) Integrator
SW2-8 7 Common Ground ------
SW3-6 8 Data Carrier Detect (DCD) Integrator
SW4-1 20 Data Terminal Ready (DTR) Device
The RS-232 cable is user supplied and must have a 25-pin, 90° female connector to attach to the
P0970VB configuration selector.
If the foreign device does not provide Clear to Send (CTS), the P0970VB can be configured to
jumper CTS with Request to Send (RTS). To accomplish this, set SW1-7 to closed, and switches
SW3-2 and SW3-3 to open.
476
If the foreign device does not provide Carrier Detect (DCD), then DTR and DCD can be jum-
pered together. To monitor the health of the cable, the jumper should be at the device end of the
RS-232 cable. If this can not be easily done, then alternately, configure the P0970VB configura-
tion selector switch to jumper DTR to DCD by setting switches SW1-4 and SW4-1 to closed.
NOTE
Refer to Chapter 8 of Protocol Reference Guide (application-specific document)
for the proper device-specific signal assignments and switch settings.
To perform the Device Integrator 30 cabling, refer to either Figure 10-27 (non-fault-tolerant
cabling), or Figure 10-28 (fault-tolerant cabling), and perform the following steps:
1. Turn off Device Integrator 30 and power to associated foreign devices.
2. Determine the foreign device to be connected and connect the user-supplied RS-232
cable to the foreign device.
3. Route the other end of the RS-232 cable to the bottom of the I/A Series enclosure.
above table.
user-supplied RS-232 cable to the D connector. (One end of the P0970VB configura-
tion selector has a single cable D connector; the other end has two 26-pin connectors.
The correct connector for the cable is the end with the single D connector.) To install
the P0970VB connector, refer to the procedure “Installing the P0970VB Configura-
tion Selector Switch” on page 472.
configuration.)
7. Route the P0500JX cable(s) through the bottom of the enclosure, as described in the
section on “Peripheral Cable Routing within Enclosures” on page 343. Route the
cable to the correct integrator position as shown in Figure 10-27 (for a non-fault-
tolerant configuration) or Figure 10-28 (for a fault-tolerant configuration).
8. Engage the peripheral connector plug on the integrator by inserting the hex driver
tool into the peripheral connector engagement actuator slot (on the front of the mod-
ule) and turning 1/2-turn clockwise. The cabling installation is complete.
SPECTRUM Slave Gateway Cabling

The SPECTRUM Slave Gateway (SSG), Foxboro part number P0400VS, is a double-width pro-
cessor module that occupies two adjacent slots in a mounting structure. (A fault-tolerant version
of the SSG consists of four processor modules and occupies four adjacent slots.) Functionally, the
SSG is an intelligent interface that allows communication between I/A Series system control pro-
cessors and a SPECTRUM system host. This section provides a procedure for making connec-
tions between the SSG and a SPECTRUM system. Refer to the enclosure information developed
during the site planning phase to determine whether your installation uses an SSG.
477
Two signal cable assemblies connect the SSG to a Linkport in the SPECTRUM system. One of
the cable assemblies, part number P0800EA, contains two peripheral connector jacks (joined
together) at one end, and a single connector at the other end. The other cable assembly, part num-
ber 3LK2------, is a standard FOXNET™ station cable with a single connector at each end. These
cables join together to form a continuous cable run from the SSG to the Linkport in the
SPECTRUM system.
NOTE
The module identifier (letterbug set) is configured differently for the SSG than for
other modules. Refer to “Module Identifier (Letterbug) Installation” on page 145
for specific instructions.
To install the signal cables between the SSG and a SPECTRUM Linkport, perform the following
steps as shown in Figure 10-29.
1. Turn off equipment power.
2. Locate cable assembly P0800EA and route the cable through the enclosure as
described in the section on “Peripheral Cable Routing within Enclosures” on
page 343.
3. Locate cable 3LK2---- and connect one end (male) to the designated receptacle on the
Linkport selected for use. (Refer to the sales order information for the SPECTRUM
system to determine which Linkport receptacle is to be used.)
4. Route the other end of cable 3LK2---- to the bottom of the I/A Series enclosure, and
connect it to the connector on cable assembly P0800EA.
5. If you are installing a fault-tolerant SSG, repeat Steps 1 through 4 for the second SSG,
making sure the connection to the associated Linkport goes to the same connector
position that was used for the first Linkport. For example, if the first SSG connects to
J5 of the associated Linkport, then the other SSG must connect to J5 of its associated
Linkport.
6. Engage the peripheral connector plugs (on the SSG module) by inserting the hex
driver tool into the peripheral connector engagement actuator slots (on the front of
the module) and turning 1/2-turn clockwise.
478
To SPECTRUM Linkport
J1 J2
Cable Cable
P0800EA 3LK2----
ABCD ABCD
SPECTRUM Slave Gateway
Figure 10-29. SPECTRUM Slave Gateway Cabling
SPECTRUM Master Gateway Cabling

This subsection describes the cable connections between the SPECTRUM Interface Processor
and the SPECTRUM Database Processor. (For cable connections between other elements of the
SDP, refer to MI 826-015, SPECTRUM Database Processor Installation.)
The SIP is a single-width processor that occupies a slot in an I/A Series mounting structure. Func-
tionally, the SPECTRUM Interface Processor is an intelligent interface that allows communica-
tion between I/A Series system control processors and SPECTRUM equipment via the
SPECTRUM Database Processor. (Refer to the enclosure information developed during the site
planning phase to determine whether your installation uses an SPECTRUM Interface Processor.)
Figure 10-30 shows the SPECTRUM Master Gateway (SMG).
NOTE
The SPECTRUM Interface Processor module is labeled Communication Processor
15, P/N P0902DZ or P0911AC on its data label. The module assumes its intended
function (as SIP) when you insert the appropriate module identifier (letterbug set),
and the system software initializes the module.
479
I/A Series Enclosure
Workstation Control Applications

Processor Processor Processor
I/A Series Nodebus
SPECTRUM
Interface (up to four may be used)
Processor
P0912HA
3LK2-C FOXNET
F6401A Linkport(s)
SPECTRUM
Database
FKWLB Workstation
Processor
(Optional)
Figure 10-30. SPECTRUM Master Gateway Cable Connections
Cabling between the SPECTRUM Interface Processor(s) and the SPECTRUM Database Proces-
sor involves the following equipment:
♦ SPECTRUM Interface Processor modules (up to four) mounted in an I/A Series
enclosure or 1x8 mounting structure
♦ SPECTRUM Interface Processor interface cable P0912HA (one for each SIP).
NOTE
A single cable P0912HA replaces the existing two cables P0800AZ and P0800LW.
♦ Jacks J206, J209, J212, and J215 on the SPECTRUM Database Processor I/O con-
nector panel. (Refer to SPECTRUM Database Processor Installation (MI 826-015) for
the location of the I/O connector panel.)
When making the cable connections between the SPECTRUM Interface Processors and the I/O
connector panel, the left-most jack(s) must be used in all cases. For example, if one SPECTRUM
Interface Processor is used, it must be connected to jack J206; if two SPECTRUM Interface Pro-
cessors are used, they must be connected to jacks J206 and J209, and so forth. (When multiple
SPECTRUM Interface Processors are used, which SPECTRUM Interface Processor connects to
which jack is unimportant, provided that the left-most jacks are used in all cases.)
To make the cable connections, refer to Figure 10-31 and perform the following steps:
2. Locate the SPECTRUM Interface Processor interface cable P0912HA, and route the
cable through the enclosure as described in the section on “Peripheral Cable Routing
within Enclosures” on page 343.
480
3. Connect the peripheral connector jack of cable P0912HA to the location on the
mounting structure corresponding to plug position “A” on the SPECTRUM Interface
Processor.
4. Connect the opposite end of cable P0912HA to the appropriate jack (J206 for the
first SPECTRUM Interface Processor) on the SPECTRUM Database Processor I/O
connector panel.
5. Engage the peripheral connector plug on the SPECTRUM Interface Processor by
inserting the hex driver tool into the peripheral connector engagement actuator slot
(on the front of the SIP) and turning 1/2-turn clockwise.
6. Repeat Steps 2 though 6 for any additional SPECTRUM Interface Processors.
Cable
P0912HA
A BC D
J206 J209 J212 J215

SPECTRUM
Interface
Processor Part of I/O Connector Panel in
SPECTRUM Database Processor
Figure 10-31. SPECTRUM Interface Processor Cabling
Information Network Interface Cabling

The Information Network Interface (INI) is an I/A Series station that provides for connection of
non I/A Series computers (hosts), or other INIs, to the base I/A Series system. It uses an
RS-232-C data link, with the X.25 communication protocol.
NOTE
The INI is labeled Communication Processor 15, P/N P011AC (or P/N P0902DZ)
on its data label. The module assumes its intended function (as INI) when you
481
Figure 10-32 shows the two basic INI cabling configurations:

♦ To a non I/A Series host computer with its port configured as DTE, or to another INI
♦ To a modem, or to a non I/A Series host computer with its port configured as DCE.
Configuration
Selector Adapter P0911AT
P0970VB (NOTE 3)
A P0500JX
INI RS-232 VT100 (See NOTE 1)
P0970WY
Either option/cable
connects to P0970VB
RS-232 Modem (See NOTE 2)

P0970WX
NOTES:
1 VT100 or other non I/A Series host Adapter
computer with port configured as P0911AT
DTE or other INI. (NOTE 3)
2 Modem or other non I/A Series host
computer with port configured as
DCE.
3 Adapter P0911AT is not used when
INI P/N P0902DZ is implemented.
Figure 10-32. Information Network Interface (INI) Cabling Configuration
Associated with the INI are a P0500JX cable and P0970VB cable configuration selector switch
(see Figure 10-20) for connecting to a compatible RS-232-C cable associated with the communi-
cations device. Note that the P0970WY cable to a DTE option has cable adapters (P0911AT) at
both ends of the cable except as indicated in Figure 10-32, and the P0970WX cable to a DCE
option has one P0911AT adapter as shown.
To connect the Information Network Interface cabling, perform the following steps.
NOTE
For reference purposes, refer to Table 10-9 for the P0970WY/WX cable, male con-
nector signal pin-outs.
1. Turn off equipment power and power to the associated RS-232 device.
2. Route the P0970WY or P0970WX cable from the RS-232 device to the bottom of
the I/A Series enclosure.
3. Locate the P0970VB configuration selector switch and set the 32 switches as
described in Table 10-9.
4. Mount the P0970VB switch on the enclosure DIN rail.
has two 26-pin connectors.)
482
6. Route the P0500JX cable(s) through the bottom of the enclosure, as described in the
section on “Peripheral Cable Routing within Enclosures” on page 343. Route the
cable to the correct INI gateway position as shown in Figure 10-32.
7. Engage the peripheral connector plug on the gateway module by inserting the hex
module) and turning 1/2-turn clockwise.
NOTE
Cable adapter(s) P0911AT is used only in conjunction with INI module part num-
ber P0911AC (not with P0902DZ). If the INI module is part numbered P0902DZ,
skip Steps 8 through 11.
8. If this installation is for a DTE device, install a P0911AT adapter between the
P0970VB switch and the P0970WY cable.
9. Locate cable adapter kit(s) P0911AT (used with INI module part number P0911AC
only). The cable adapter kits are packaged with other loose parts in the enclosure.
Referring to Figure 10-35 and Figure 10-36, set the adapter jumper for the desired
configuration, as follows:
a. If two INIs (one local and one remote) are communicating directly with each
other, the recommended jumper settings for both adapters is INT. (Other settings
may be used per specific communication requirements.)
b. For all other configurations, in either adapter (on the INI end or on the host com-
puter end):
Set the jumper to INT if the configuration requires that the associated INI or host
computer generate its own transmit clock signal.
Set the jumper to RCV if the configuration requires that the transmit clock signal
for the associated INI or host computer be derived from the incoming receive
clock signal.
Set the jumper to MOD if the configuration requires that the transmit clock sig-
nal for the associated INI or host computer be derived from the incoming modem
transmit clock signal.
10. Referring to Figure 10-35, assemble the adapter(s) by aligning the top and bottom
covers over the connector assembly, pressing firmly together, and attaching the retain-
ing screws and brackets.
11. Attach an adapter(s) to each end of cable P0970WY, or one adapter to cable
P0970WX at the device end of the cable, whichever is used in the configuration.
12. Connect one end of cable P0970WY or P0970WX (with adapter if applicable) to the
modem, non I/A Series (host) computer.
13. Connect the other end of the P0970WY or P0970WX cable (with adapter if applica-
ble) to the D connector on the P0970VB switch. (One end of the P0970VB configu-
ration selector has a single cable D connector; the other end has two 26-pin
connectors. The correct connector for the cable is the end with the single
D connector.)
483
Configuration Selector Adapter P0911AT

P0970VB (NOTE 3)
A P0500JX
INI RS-232 VT100 (See NOTE 1)
A P0500JX P0970WY
Either option/cable
connects to P0970VB.
A P0500JX
INI A P0500JX RS-232 Modem (See NOTE 2)
P0970WX
NOTES: Adapter
1 VT100 or other non I/A Series host P0911AT
computer with port configured as (NOTE 3)
DTE or other INI.
DCE.
Figure 10-33. Redundant INI Gateways, Non-Fault-Tolerant Configuration
Adapter
P0911AT
(NOTE 3)
Adapter
RS-232 VT100 (See NOTE 1)
P0911AT P0970WY
(NOTE 3) Either option/cable
connects to P0970VB.
A P0500JX RS-232 Modem (See NOTE 2)
INI P0970WX
B P0500JX
Adapter
A P0500JX P0911AT
(NOTE 3)
INI B P0500JX
RS-232 VT100 (See NOTE 1)
Configuration P0970WY
Selector Either option/cable
P0970VB connects to P0970VB.
NOTES:
1 VT100 or other non I/A Series host RS-232 Modem (See NOTE 2)
P0970WX
DTE or other INI.
DCE.
Figure 10-34. Redundant INI Gateways, Fault-Tolerant Configuration
484
Retaining Bracket
Screw (1 of 2)
(1 of 2)
Bottom Cover
(In Place)
Jumper
Connector
Assembly
(circuit Mod
board)
Rcv
Top Cover
Int
Female
Male
Figure 10-35. Information Network Interface Cabling – P0911AT Adapter

Location and Assembly
2 2 TXD
3 3 RXD
Configuration 4 4 RTS
Selector
Switch 5 5 CTS
P0970VB
6 6 DSR
P0800WY
7 7 GND or
Or
P0800WX
8 A 8 DCD Cable
C Connector
15 D 15 TSET IN
Non I/A Series B
17 17 RSET
Host (DTE) Cable
Connector 20 20 DTR
22 22 RI
24 24 TSET OUT
C-A = Modem Clock (MOD)

C-B = Internal Clock (Int)
C-D = Receive Clock (RCV)
Figure 10-36. Information Network Interface Cabling – P0911AT Adapter Jumper Settings
485
Table 10-9. INI Cabling RS-232-C Pinout
Pin
No. Signal Description
2 TXD Contains data transmitted by the INI to the modem or host computer.1
3 RXD Contains data received by the INI from the modem or host computer.1
4 RTS Contains Request To Send signal sent from the INI to the modem or host
computer.1
5 CTS Contains Clear To Send signal sent from the INI to the modem or host
computer.1
6 DSR Contains Data Set Ready signal received by the INI from the modem or host
computer.1
7 GND Signal ground line. Must connect to GND (pin 7) at the modem or host
computer.1
8 DCD Data Carrier Detect signal received by the INI from the modem or host
computer.1
15 TSET IN Transmit clock signal used by the host computer1 to transmit data on the
TXD line to the INI. This signal is used when the INI does not generate its
own internal transmit clock.
17 RSET Received clock signal from the host computer1 used by the INI to clock the
data received from the modem or host computer.1
20 DTR Data Terminal Ready signal sent to the modem or host computer1 by the INI.
22 RI Ring Indicator signal received from a modem.
24 TSET OUT Transmit clock signal sent by the INI to transmit data on the TXD line to the
host computer1. This signal is either generated internally or derived from the
TSET IN signal.
1.
Or INI module in a remote I/A Series node.
Dual Nodebus Interface Cabling

The Dual Nodebus Interface (DNBI), Foxboro part number P0970BC, is a station on the
I/A Series network providing for point-to-point connection of the following processors to the
Nodebus:
♦ 50 Series Application Processor
♦ 50 Series and 70 Series Workstation Processor
♦ 50 Series and 70 Series Application Workstation.
486
NOTE
The following notes apply to the DNBI connections:
1. For a 50 Series or 70 Series processor to boot, all DNBIs/DNBTs/DNBXs must
have been already installed and powered. The processor cannot come on-line if it
was powered up before the DNBI/DNBT/DNBX cables were installed and the
nodebus interface was powered up.
2. If the letterbug in a DNBI is changed after the associated 50 Series or 70 Series
processor is booted, both the DNBI and processor must be rebooted for the new let-
terbug to take effect.
3. The letterbug associated with the DNBI module must be the same as the letter-
bug for the host processor.
4. A Model 51, Style E processor must have an MII-to-AUI Converter and SQE
Eliminator to connect to the DNBI. Refer to “Converter Installation for DNBI
(Model 51, Style E Processors Only)” below. It does not require these converters
when connecting to a DNBT (see “Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface Cabling” on
page 501).
5. The Model 51, Style D processor can only be connected to a DNBT or DNBX
module. See below.
The Dual Nodebus Interface can be cabled in either of two configurations:

♦ Local – where the DNBI and the processor share the same enclosure
♦ Medium-Distance – where the DNBI and the processor are separated by a distance of
greater than 2 m (6 ft).
The following subsections describe these cabling configurations.
Converter Installation for DNBI (Model 51, Style E Processors

Only)
The Model 51, Style E processors do not have a connector for directly interfacing with network
AUI cables. If you are connecting the Model 51, Style E processor to a DNBI, you must attach
the following equipment to its MII (Media Independent Interface) connector:
♦ An MII-to-AUI Converter (Foxboro part number P0971TR) to the processor’s MII
Connector, and
♦ An SQE Eliminator (Foxboro part number P0940KS) to the MII-to-AUI Converter’s
AUI connector.
The MII-to-AUI Converter enables AUI communications to interface through the MII connec-
tor. The SQE Eliminator must be connected to the other end of this converter to screen out AUI
line noise for the DNBI.
487
NOTE
The following notes apply to the converter installation:
1. The Model 51, Style E processors connect to a DNBI through the MII
connector on the motherboard, not from the MII connector on the twisted-pair
10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface card with MII Connector. Refer to Figure 10-37
for a diagram of the MII connector on the motherboard.
2. The latches on the MII-to-AUI converter and SQE Eliminator are not fully
secure. Two cable ties in excess of 27 inches (690 mm) are required to secure this
cable.
3. The SQE Eliminator should only be connected to the MII-to-AUI Converter’s
AUI port.
4. The Model 51, Style E processors do not require these converters when connect-
ing to a DNBT (see “Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface Cabling” on page 501).
To connect the MII-to-AUI Converter, SQE Eliminator, and network AUI cable to the Model 51,
Style E processor, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the MII-to-AUI Converter from its package.
2. Insert the converter’s 40-pin connector into the MII connector on the processor’s
motherboard, as shown in Figure 10-37.
Model 51, Style E Processor (Rear) 40-Pin

Connector
40-Pin Connector
(enlarged)
attaches to the
Ethernet Interface card with
MII Connector. A B
40-Pin
TP
<...>
Connector MII Turn these

<...>
screws
clockwise
to secure
the connector.
To MII-to-AUI
Converter(s)
PCI166 1
PCI 2
PCI 3
PCI 4
Figure 10-37. Attaching the MII-to-AUI Converter to the MII Connector On

the Model 51, Style E Processor’s Motherboard
3. Rotate the screws on the 40-pin connector clockwise, until they securely fasten the
40-pin connector to the MII connector.
488
4. Push the latch (over the AUI connector) on the MII-to-AUI Converter to the right,
and insert the SQE Eliminator rear connector into the AUI connector, as shown in
Figure 10-38.
Cord to MII Connector Slide this latch to the

right to allow the SQE
we
r Eliminator to attach to
Po n the AUI connector.
2V io
+1 ollis eive it Then, slide the latch
C ec sm Latch
R ran left to secure the
T SQE Eliminator.
Slide this latch to the
LEDs right to allow the network
AUI cable to attach to
AUI Connector the AUI connector.
Then, slide the latch
left to secure the
network AUI cable.
External Power Plug
SQE Eliminator
(P0940KS)
MII-to-AUI
Converter
P0971TR
AUI Connector
Latch
Network AUI Cable
Figure 10-38. Connecting the MII-to-AUI Converter, SQE Eliminator, and AUI Network Cable
5. Slide the latch back, to lock the SQE Eliminator to the MII-to-AUI Converter.
6. Push the latch (over the AUI connector) on the SQE Eliminator to the right, and
insert the network AUI cable into the AUI connector, as shown in Figure 10-38.
7. Slide the latch back, to lock the network AUI cable to the SQE Eliminator.
8. Secure the network AUI cable, SQE Eliminator, and MII-to-AUI Converter together.
Wrap the two cable ties over the MII-to-AUI Converter as shown in Figure 10-39, in
an X-formation, and tighten them firmly by inserting their flat ends through their
“anchor ends” and pulling until snug.
489
Cord to MII we
r
connector P o
2V ion
+1 ollis eive it
C ec sm
R ran
T
Cable Tie
Network AUI
Cable
External Power Plug
MII-to-AUI
Converter SQE Eliminator
P0971TR P0940KS
Flat End Cable Tie Anchor End

Figure 10-39. Securing the Cable Tie Around the AUI Network Cable,
SQE Eliminator, and MII-to-AUI Converter
Connection of the MII-to-AUI Converter, SQE Eliminator, and AUI network cable to the Model
51, Style E processor is complete. You may now continue with the DNBI connections for the
Model 51, Style E processor.
Local Dual Nodebus Interface Cabling

Local Dual Nodebus Interface cabling involves making connections between processors and
DNBIs within 1.9 m (6 ft) of each other. Separate instructions are provided for 50 Series and
70 Series cabling.
50 Series Local DNBI Cabling

Refer to the following figures and perform the procedure below to make local Dual Nodebus
Interface cabling connections for the 50 Series processors:
♦ Local Dual Nodebus Interface Cabling for AP50/WP50/AW50 (Figure 10-40)
♦ Local Dual Nodebus Interface Cabling for AP51A/WP51A/AW51A or
AP51B/WP51B/AW51B (Figure 10-41)
♦ Local Dual Nodebus Interface Cabling for AP51B1/AW51B1/WP51B1 or AW51C
(Figure 10-42)
♦ Local Dual Nodebus Interface Cabling for AP51E, AW51E or WP51E
(Figure 10-43).
Proceed as follows:
2. Referring to the figures listed above, perform the equipment cabling in accordance
with the type of processor used.
490
NOTE
For the location of the processor port connectors, refer to:
Figure 9-28 (for AP51A, AW51A, or WP51A processor),
Figure 9-29 (for AP51B, AW51B, or WP51B processor),
Figure 9-30 (for AW51C processor),
Figure 9-31 (for AP51B1, AW51B1, or WP51B1 processor), or
Figure 9-34 (for AP51E, AW51E or WP51E processor).
For the AP51E, AW51E or WP51E processor, ensure you installed the MII-to-AUI
Converter (P0971TR) and SQE Eliminator (P0940KS) as described in “Converter
Installation for DNBI (Model 51, Style E Processors Only)” on page 487.
3. Engage the top connector plugs on the Dual Nodebus Interface module by inserting
the hex driver tool into the connector engagement actuator opening (on the front of
! CAUTION
For Model 51, Style A, B/B1 and C processors, the AUI port connector and the
twisted-pair telephone type connector are connected to the same internal port; only
one can be used at a time. For Model 51, Style E processors, the Ethernet output
port and twisted-pair telephone type connector are internally connected to the same
Ethernet port. Foxboro uses only the AUI connector in DNBI/DNBX configura-
tions. For a DNBI or DNBX configuration, do not use the telephone jack (in other
words, twisted-pair Ethernet connection) adjacent to the AUI or MII connector. If
you must have a twisted-pair telephone type connector available, refer to “Second
Ethernet Port (for 50 Series Products)” on page 528 to install an Ethernet card.
ABCD P0970BM - 2 m (6 ft)
P0970KE - 2 m (6 ft)
Connector
Actuator
Opening
Dual Nodebus
Interface
P0970BC AP50, WP50, or
AW50 (rear view)
Figure 10-40. Local Dual Nodebus Interface Cabling for AP50/WP50/AW50
491
P0970XL RS-423 Cable - 2 m (6 ft)
To GCIO,
Printer, or
VT100 B
ABCD
Connector P0970BM
Actuator AUI Cable Adapter
Opening 2 m (6 ft) Cable
P0970XF
AP51A, WP51A, or
Dual Nodebus AW51A (rear view)
Interface
P0970BC
A BCD
P0970BM - 2 m (6 ft)
Connector
Adapter Cable
Actuator (P0970XF)
Opening
P0971PE - 2 m (6 ft)
Dual Nodebus Serial

Interface Port A
P0970BC
AP51B/WP51B/AW51B
(rear view)
Figure 10-41. Local Dual Nodebus Interface Cabling

for AP51A/WP51A/AW51A or AP51B/WP51B/AW51B
492
Splitter Cable
P0912GX
P0971PE
2 m (6 ft)
A BCD
A
To GCIO,
Printer, or B
VT100
Connector
Actuator
Opening P0970BM
2 m (6 ft)
Dual Nodebus
Interface
P0970BC
AP51B1/AW51B1/WP51B1
(rear view)
Splitter Cable
P0912GX
P0971PE
2 m (6 ft)
A BCD
A
To GCIO,
Printer, or B
VT100
Connector
Actuator P0970BM
Opening 2 m (6 ft) Adapter
Cable
P0970XF
Dual Nodebus
Interface
P0970BC AW51C
(rear view)
Figure 10-42. Local Dual Nodebus Interface Cabling

for AP51B1/AW51B1/WP51B1 or AW51C
493
Serial Port A
A BCD
P0971PE - 2 m (6 ft)
A B
TP
<...>
MII
<...>
Connector
Actuator SQE MII-to-AUI
Opening P0970BM - 2 m (6 ft) Eliminator Converter*
P0940KS P0971TR
Dual Nodebus PCI166 1
Interface PCI 2
P0970BC
PCI 3
PCI 4
(Rear View)
AP51E/AW51E/
WP51E
*Refer to “Converter Installation to DNBI (Model 51, Style E Processors Only)” above for the
installation procedure for this device.
Figure 10-43. Local Dual Nodebus Interface Cabling for AP51E/AW51E or WP51E
70 Series Local DNBI Cabling

Perform the following procedure below to make local Dual Nodebus Interface cabling connec-
tions for the 70 Series processors.
NOTE
The 70 Series processor must contain a 3Com combination Ethernet card to make
AUI connections to the nodebus. Refer to “Installing an Ethernet Card” on
page 366 for information on installing this card.

2. Referring to the Figure 10-44, connect the equipment cabling as shown.
3. Engage the top peripheral connector plug (on the Dual Nodebus Interface module) by
inserting the hex driver tool into the peripheral connector engagement actuator open-
ing (on the front of the module, see Figure 10-44) and turning 1/2-turn clockwise.
494
P0970BP - 2 m (6 ft) P0971SU - 3 m (10 ft)

P0971SV - 15 m (50 ft)
A BCD P0971SW - 45 m (150 ft)
COM1 Serial Port
Connector
Actuator
Opening
P0970BM - 2 m (6 ft)
Dual Nodebus
Interface 3Com Ethernet Card*
P0970BC AW70 or WP70
(Rear View)
* Location may differ depending on version of 70 Series processor.
Figure 10-44. Local Dual Nodebus Interface Cabling, AW70, or WP70
! CAUTION
When configuring a Commit diskette for the 70 Series processor, you must assign
the serial port COM1 to the DNBI/DNBX.
You have completed making local Dual Nodebus Interface cabling connections for the 70 Series
processors.
Medium-Distance Dual Nodebus Interface Cabling

Medium-distance Dual Nodebus Interface cabling involves making connections between proces-
sors and DNBIs greater than 2 m (6 ft) of each other. Separate instructions are provided for
50 Series and 70 Series cabling.
50 Series Medium Distance DNBI Cabling

Refer to the following figures and perform the procedure below to make medium-distance Dual
Nodebus Interface cabling connections for the 50 Series processors:
♦ Medium-Distance Dual Nodebus Interface Cabling, AP50/WP50/AW50 or
AP51A/WP51A/AW51A (Figure 10-45)
♦ Medium-Distance Dual Nodebus Interface Cabling, AP51B/WP51B/AW51B or
AW51C (Figure 10-46)
495
♦ Medium-Distance Dual Nodebus Interface Cabling, AP51B1, AW51B1, or WP51B1

(Figure 10-47)
♦ Medium-Distance Dual Nodebus Interface Cabling, AP51E, AW51E, or WP51E
(Figure 10-48).
Proceed as follows:
1. Referring to the figures listed above, perform the equipment cabling in accordance
with the type of processor used.
NOTE
Figure 9-31 (for AP51B1, AW51B1, or WP51B1 processor), or Figure 9-34 (for
AP51E, AW51E or WP51E processor).
For the AP51E, AW51E or WP51E processor, ensure you installed the MII-to-AUI
Converter (P0971TR) and SQE Eliminator (P0940KS) as described in “Converter
Installation for DNBI (Model 51, Style E Processors Only)” on page 487.
2. Engage the top peripheral connector plugs on the Dual Nodebus Interface module by
ing (on the front of the module) and turning 1/2-turn clockwise.
! CAUTION
one can be used at a time. For Model 51, Style E processors, the MII Ethernet out-
put port and twisted-pair telephone type connector are internally connected to the
same Ethernet port. Foxboro uses only the AUI connector in DNBI/DNBX config-
urations. For a DNBI or DNBX configuration, do not use the telephone jack (in
other words, twisted-pair Ethernet connection) adjacent to the AUI or MII connec-
tor. If you must have a twisted-pair telephone type connector available, refer to
“Second Ethernet Port (for 50 Series Products)” on page 528 to install an Ethernet
card.
496
P0970BM - 2 m (6 ft)
P0970BP - 2 m (6 ft)
AUI Cable:
A B CD P0900ZU - 3 m (10 ft)
P0900ZV - 15 m (50 ft)
P0900ZW - 45 m (150 ft)
Connector
Actuator RS-423 Cable:
Opening P0970BV - 3 m (10 ft)
P0970BW - 15 m (50 ft)
P0970BX - 45 m (150 ft)
Dual Nodebus AP50, WP50, or

Interface AW50 (rear view)
P0970BC
To GCIO, Printer,
or VT100
P0970BP P0970BM
2 m (6 ft) B
A BC D
A
RS-423 Cable:
P0970XH - 3 m (10 ft)
P0970XJ - 15 m (50 ft)
Connector P0970XK - 45 m (150 ft)
Actuator
Opening
AUI Cable:
P0900ZU - 3 m (10 ft)
P0900ZV - 15 m (50 ft) Adapter
P0900ZW - 45 m (150 ft) AP51A, WP51A, or
Cable
AW51A (rear view)
P0970XF
Dual Nodebus
Interface
P0970BC
Figure 10-45. Medium-Distance Dual Nodebus Interface Cabling, AP50/WP50/AW50 or

AP51A/WP51A/AW51A
497
P0970BM - 2 m (6 ft)
P0970BP - 2 m (6 ft)
A BC D
AUI Cable:
P0900ZU - 3 m (10 ft)
P0900ZV - 15 m (50 ft)
P0900ZW - 45 m (150 ft)
Connector
Actuator RS-423 Cable: P0970XF
Opening P0971PA - 3 m (10 ft)
P0971PB - 15 m (50 ft)
P0971PD - 45 m (150 ft)
Dual Nodebus
Interface
P0970BC
AP51B/WP51B/AW51B
(rear view)
P0970BP - 2 m (6 ft)
P0970BM - 2 m (6 ft)
Splitter Cable
P0912GX
A B CD RS-423 Cable:
P0971PA - 3 m (10 ft)
P0971PB- 15 m (50 ft)
P0971PD - 45 m (150 ft)
A
To GCIO,
Connector Printer, or B
Actuator VT100
Opening
AUI Cable:
P0900ZU - 3 m (10 ft) Adapter
P0900ZV - 15 m (50 ft) Cable
P0970XF
P0900ZW - 45 m (150 ft)
Dual Nodebus
Interface
P0970BC AW51C
(rear view)
Figure 10-46. Medium-Distance Dual Nodebus Interface Cabling,

AP51B/WP51B/AW51B or AW51C
498
P0970BP - 2 m (6 ft)
P0970BM - 2 m (6 ft)
Splitter Cable
P0912GX
A BC D RS-423 Cable:
P0971PA - 3 m (10 ft)
P0971PB - 15 m (50 ft)
P0971PD - 45 m (150 ft)
A
To GCIO,
Connector Printer, or B
Actuator VT100
Opening
AUI Cable:
Dual Nodebus P0900ZU - 3 m (10 ft)
Interface P0900ZV - 15 m (50 ft)
P0970BC AP51B1/AW51B1/WP51B1
P0900ZW - 45 m (150 ft) (rear view)
AP51B1, AW51B1, or WP51B1
P0970BP - 2 m (6 ft)
P0970BM - 2 m (6 ft) Serial Port A
A BC D RS-423 Cable:
P0971PA - 3 m (10 ft)
P0971PB - 15 m (50 ft)
P0971PD - 45 m (150 ft)
A B
TP
<...>
Connector MII
<...>
Actuator
Opening AUI Cable: SQE MII-to-AUI
P0900ZU - 3 m (10 ft) Eliminator Converter*
P0900ZV - 15 m (50 ft) P0940KS P0971TR
P0900ZW - 45 m (150 ft)
PCI166 1
Dual Nodebus PCI 2
Interface PCI 3
P0970BC PCI 4
AP51E/AW51E/
WP51E
(rear view)
*Refer to “Converter Installation to DNBI (Model 51, Style E Processors Only)” above for
installation procedures.
AP51E, AW51E or WP51E
499
70 Series Medium-Distance DNBI Cabling

Perform the procedure below to make medium-distance Dual Nodebus Interface cabling
connections for the 70 Series processors.
NOTE
AUI connections to the Nodebus. Refer to “Installing an Ethernet Card” on

2. Referring to Figure 10-49, perform the equipment cabling connections as shown.
3. Engage the top peripheral connector plugs (on the Dual Nodebus Interface modules)
by inserting the hex driver tool into the peripheral connector engagement actuator
opening (on the front of the module, see Figure 10-49) and turning 1/2-turn
clockwise.
P0970BP - 2 m (6 ft)
P0970BM - P0971SU - 3 m (10 ft)

A B CD 2 m (6 ft) P0971SV - 15 m (50 ft)
P0971SW - 45 m (150 ft)
COM1 Serial Port
Connector
AUI Cable:
Actuator
P0900ZU - 3 m (10 ft)
Opening
P0900ZV - 15 m (50 ft)
P0900ZW - 45 m (150 ft)
Dual Nodebus
Interface 3Com Ethernet Card* AW70 or WP70
P0970BC (rear view)
* Location may differ depending on version of 70 Series processor.

Figure 10-49. Medium-Distance Dual Nodebus Interface Cabling, AW70, or WP70
! CAUTION
500
You have completed making medium-distance Dual Nodebus Interface cabling connections for
the 70 Series processors.
Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface Cabling

The Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface (DNBT), Foxboro part number P0971WV, is a station on
the I/A Series network providing for point-to-point 10BaseT connection of the following proces-
sors to the Nodebus:
♦ 50 Series Model 51, Style D and E Application Processors
♦ 50 Series Model 51, Style D and E, and 70 Series Workstation Processors
♦ 50 Series Model 51, Style D and E, and 70 Series Application Workstations
♦ Server 70 Processors.
NOTE
The following notes apply to the DNBT connections:
1. For a 50 Series or 70 Series processor to boot, all DNBTs must have been already
installed and powered. The processor cannot come on-line if it was powered up
before the DNBT cables were installed and the DBNT was powered up.
2. If the letterbug in a DNBT is changed after the associated 50 Series or 70 Series
processor is booted, both the DNBT and processor must be rebooted for the new
letterbug to take effect.
3. The letterbug associated with the DNBT module must be the same as the letter-
bug for the host processor.
4. Due to the lack of a dedicated AUI-compatible port, the Model 51, Style D
processor must connect to the nodebus via the 10BaseT Interface port.
The Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface can be cabled in either of two configurations:
♦ Local – where the DNBT and the processor share the same enclosure
♦ Medium-Distance – where the DNBT and the processor are separated by a distance of
greater than 2 m (6 ft).
The following subsections describe these cabling configurations.
Local Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface Cabling

Local Dual Nodebus 10BaseT interface cabling involves making connections between processors
and DNBTs within 1.9 m (6 ft) of each other. Separate instructions are provided for 50 Series and
70 Series cabling.
50 Series Local DNBT Cabling

Refer to the following figures and perform the procedure below to make local Dual Nodebus
10BaseT interface cabling connections for the following 50 Series processors:
♦ Local Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface Cabling, AP51D, WP51D, AW51D
(Figure 10-50).
♦ Local Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface Cabling, AP51E, AW51E, WP51E, AW51E
(Figure 10-51).
501
Proceed as follows to connect a Model 51, Style D or E processor to a local DNBT:

1. Connect the 10BaseT cable (P0971YE) to plug D on the top of the DNBT, as shown
in the applicable figure.
2. Connect the P0971ZW adapter1 to serial port A and the twisted-pair Ethernet port
on the Model 51, Style D or E processor, as shown in the applicable figure.
3. Connect the 10BaseT cable (P0971YE) to the P0971ZW adapter, as shown in the
applicable figure.
4. Engage the top connector plug on the DNBT to activate the module by inserting the
hex driver tool into the connector engagement actuator opening on the front of the
module, and turning 1/2-turn clockwise.
! CAUTION
For Model 51, Style E processors, the MII Ethernet output port and twisted-pair
RJ-45 connector are internally connected to the same Ethernet port. You must
ensure that you do not use the MII Ethernet output port when connecting the pro-
cessor to the DNBT. If you must have a second Ethernet port available, refer to
“Second Ethernet Port (for 50 Series Products)” on page 528 to install a Twisted-
Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface PCI card with MII Connector (Kit P0971UF).
A BCD
P0971YE - 2 m (6 ft)
NODE BUS
ACTIVITY
Connector
Actuator
Opening
Serial Port A
TP ACTIVITY
LINK
Dual Nodebus
10BaseT Interface
P0971WV
P0971ZW
Adapter AP51D, WP51D, or
AW51D
(rear view)
Figure 10-50. Local Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface Cabling, AP51D, AW51D, or WP51D
1.
The P0971ZW cable adapter is universal to all Model 51, Style E processors. The P0971YL cable
adapter is suitable only with Model 51, Style D processors, and Model 51, Style E processors with
manufacturing styles of A or B.
502
Serial Port A
A BCD
P0971ZW
Adapter
A B
TP
<...>
NODE BUS
ACTIVITY
Connector P0971YE - 2 m (6 ft) MII
<...>
Actuator
Opening Twisted-Pair
Ethernet Connector
TP ACTIVITY
LINK Dual Nodebus PCI166 1
10BaseT Interface PCI 2
P0971WV
PCI 3
PCI 4
AP51E/AW51E/
WP51E
(rear view)
NOTE: The P0971ZW cable adapter is universal to all Model 51, Style E processors.
The P0971YL cable adapter is suitable only with Model 51, Style D processors, and Model 51,
Style E processors with manufacturing styles of A or B.
Figure 10-51. Local Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface Cabling, AP51E, AW51E, WP51E
70 Series Local DNBT Cabling

Perform the following procedure below to make local Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface cabling
connections for the 70 Series processors.
NOTE
The 70 Series processor must contain a 3Com combination Ethernet card or an
integrated 10BaseT port to make twisted-pair connections to the nodebus. Refer to
“Installing an Ethernet Card” on page 366 for information on installing this card.
in Figure 10-52.
2. Connect the P0971YQ adapter to the COM1 serial port and the twisted-pair Ether-
net port on the processor as shown in Figure 10-52.
3. Connect the 10BaseT cable (P0971YE) to the P0971YQ adapter, as shown in
Figure 10-52.
503
A BCD
P0971YE - 2 m (6 ft)
COM1 Serial Port
P0971YQ
NODE BUS
ACTIVITY
Connector Adapter
Actuator
Opening
TP ACTIVITY
Alternative Connection
(On-board NIC)
LINK
Dual Nodebus Twisted-Pair
10BaseT Interface Ethernet Connector
P0971WV 3Com Ethernet Card*
AW70 or WP70**
(Rear View)
* Card location may differ depending on the version of 70 Series processor.

** Your 70 Series processor may appear different than the one shown here. Refer to Appendix C or
Chapter 9 for the COM1 serial port and card locations.
Figure 10-52. Local Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface Cabling, AW70, or WP70
4. Engage the top connector plug on the DNBT by inserting the hex driver tool into the
connector engagement actuator opening on the front of the module (see
Figure 10-52) and turning 1/2-turn clockwise.
! CAUTION
the serial port COM1 to the DNBI/DNBT/DNBX.
You have now completed making local Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface cabling connections for
the 70 Series processors.
Server 70 Local DNBT Cabling

Perform the following procedure below to make local Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface cabling
connections for the Server 70 processors.
in Figure 10-53.
net port on the Server 70, as shown in Figure 10-53.
3. Connect the 10BaseT cable (P0971YE) to the P0971YQ adapter, as shown in
Figure 10-53.
504
P0971YE = 2 m (6 ft)
COM1 Serial Port
P0971YQ
Adapter A B CD
NODEBUS
Connector
ACTIVITY
Actuator
Opening
TP
ACTIVITY
LINK
3Com 3C900B
Ethernet Card
Dual Nodebus
10BaseT
Interface
(P0971WV)
Figure 10-53. Local Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface Cabling, Server 70
You have now completed making local Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface cabling connections for
the Server 70.
Medium-Distance Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface Cabling

Medium-distance Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface cabling involves making connections
between processors and DNBTs less than 91 m (300 ft) of each other. Separate instructions are
provided for 50 Series and 70 Series cabling.
50 Series Medium-Distance DNBT Cabling

Refer to the following figures and perform the procedure below to make medium-distance Dual
Nodebus 10BaseT Interface cabling connections for the following 50 Series processors:
♦ Medium-Distance Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface Cabling to AP51D, WP51D, or
AW51D (Figure 10-54)
♦ Medium-Distance Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface Cabling, AP51E, WP51E, or
AW51E (Figure 10-55).
505
Proceed as follows to connect a Model 51, Style D or E processor to a remote DNBT:

1. Install the bracket included with the DNBT cable assembly P0971XU within 2 m
(6 ft) of the DNBT. The bracket must be mounted on a grounded DIN rail for proper
system grounding.
2. Connect the P0971XU cable to plug D on the top of the DNBT, as shown in the
applicable figure.
3. Connect the required 10BaseT cable to the bracket included with the DNBT cable
assembly P0971XU.
4. Connect the P0971ZW adapter2 to serial port A and the twisted-pair Ethernet port
on the Model 51, Style D or E processor, as shown in the applicable figure.
5. Connect the required 10BaseT cable to the P0971ZW adapter.
connector engagement actuator opening on the front of the module, and turning
1/2-turn clockwise.
! CAUTION
For Model 51, Style E processors, the MII Ethernet output port and twisted-pair
RJ-45 connector are internally connected to the same Ethernet port. You must
ensure that you do not use the MII Ethernet output port when connecting the pro-
cessor to the DNBT. If you must have a second Ethernet port available, refer to
“Second Ethernet Port (for 50 Series Products)” on page 528 to install a Twisted-
Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface PCI card with MII Connector (Kit P0971UF).
2.
The P0971ZW cable adapter is universal to all Model 51, Style E processors.The P0971YL adapter
can be used with Model 51, Style D processors, and Model 51, Style E processors with manufactur-
ing styles of A or B.
506
P0971XU* - 2 m (6 ft)
A BC D
10BaseT Cable:
NODE BUS
Connector P0971XK - 3 m (10 ft)
ACTIVITY
Actuator P0971XL - 15 m (50 ft) Serial Port A
Opening P0971XM - 45 m (150 ft)
P0971XN - 91 m (300 ft)
TP ACTIVITY
LINK
Dual Nodebus
10BaseT Interface
P0971WV P0971ZW
Adapter
Model 51, Style D

* Includes cable and mounting bracket (rear view)
Figure 10-54. Medium-Distance Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface Cabling to
AP51D, AW51D, or WP51D
P0971XU* - 2 m (6 ft) Serial Port A
A BC D
P0971ZW
Adapter
A B
TP
<...>
MII
<...>
NODE BUS
ACTIVITY
Connector 10BaseT Cable:
Actuator P0971XK - 3 m (10 ft) Twisted-Pair
Opening P0971XL - 15 m (50 ft) Ethernet
P0971XM - 45 m (150 ft) Connector
TP ACTIVITY P0971XN - 91 m (300 ft)
PCI166 1
LINK
Dual Nodebus PCI 2
10BaseT Interface PCI 3
P0971WV PCI 4
AP51E/AW51E/
WP51E
* Includes cable and mounting bracket (rear view)
Figure 10-55. Medium-Distance Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface Cabling,
AP51E, AW51E or WP51E
507
You have now completed the medium-distance DNBT cabling for the 50 Series processor.
70 Series Medium-Distance DNBT Cabling

Perform the procedure below to make medium-distance Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface cabling
connections for the 70 Series processor.
NOTE
The 70 Series processor must contain a 3Com combination Ethernet card or an
integrated 10BaseT port to make twisted-pair connections to the nodebus. Refer to
“Installing an Ethernet Card” on page 366 for information on installing this card.
system grounding.
2. Connect the P0971XU cable to plug D on the top of the DNBT, as shown in
Figure 10-56.
3. Connect the required 10BaseT cable (see Figure 10-56) to the bracket included with
the DNBT cable assembly P0971XU.
net port on the processor as shown in Figure 10-56.
5. Connect the required 10BaseT cable (see Figure 10-56) to the P0971YQ adapter.
P0971XU** - 2 m (6 ft)
A B CD
COM1 Serial Port
NODE BUS
Connector
ACTIVITY
Actuator
Opening
10BaseT Cable: P0971YQ
TP ACTIVITY
P0971XK - 3 m (10 ft) Adapter
P0971XL - 15 m (50 ft)
LINK
P0971XM - 45 m (150 ft)
P0971XN - 91 m (300 ft)
Dual Nodebus Twisted-Pair
Ethernet Connector
10BaseT Interface
P0971WV
3Com Ethernet Card* AW70 or WP70***
* Card location may differ depending on the version of 70 Series processor. (rear view)
** Includes cable and mounting bracket
*** Your 70 Series processor may appear different than the one shown here. Refer to Appendix C or
Chapter 9 for the COM1 serial port and card locations.
Figure 10-56. Medium-Distance Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface Cabling, AW70, or WP70
508
! CAUTION
the serial port COM1 to the DNBI/DNBT/DNBX.
You have completed making medium-distance Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface cabling connec-
tions for the 70 Series processors.
Server 70 Medium-Distance DNBT Cabling

Perform the procedure below to make medium-distance Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface cabling
connections for the Server 70 processor.
system grounding.
2. Connect the P0971XU cable to plug D on the top of the DNBT, as shown in
Figure 10-57.
3. Connect the required 10BaseT cable (see Figure 10-57) to the bracket included with
the DNBT cable assembly P0971XU.
net port on the Server 70, as shown in Figure 10-57.
5. Connect the required length of 10BaseT cable (see Figure 10-57) to the P0971YQ
adapter.
509
10BaseT Cable:
P0971XK – 3 m (10 ft)
P0971XL – 15 m (50 ft)
P0971XM – 45 m (150 ft)
COM1 Serial Port P0971XN – 91 m (300 ft)
Earthed
P0971YQ Bracket
Adapter
P0971XU*
= 2 m (6 ft)
A B CD
NODEBUS
Connector
ACTIVITY
Actuator
3Com 3C900B Opening
Ethernet Card
TP
ACTIVITY
LINK
Dual Nodebus
*Includes cable and mounting bracket 10BaseT
Interface
(P0971WV)
Figure 10-57. Medium-Distance Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface Cabling, Server 70
You have completed making medium-distance Dual Nodebus 10BaseT Interface cabling connec-
tions for the Server 70.
510
Dual Nodebus Extender Cabling

NOTE
The following notes apply to the DNBX connections:
1. The DNBX extender is used instead of a DNBI in installations where the Node-
bus must be longer than 91 m (300 ft). For DNBX installations, an RS-423 cable is
made on-site as described in the procedure in “50 Series DNBX Cabling” on
page 513.
2. If the letterbug in a DNBX is changed after the associated 50 Series or 70 Series
processor is booted, both the DNBX and processor must be rebooted for the new
letterbug to take effect.
3. The letterbug associated with the DNBX module should be the same as the let-
terbug for the host processor.
4. A Model 51, Style E processor must have an MII-to-AUI Converter to connect to
the DNBX. Refer to “Converter Installation for DNBX (Model 51, Style E Proces-
sors Only)” below.
The Dual Nodebus Extender (DNBX), Foxboro part number P0970EJ, is a station on the
I/A Series network providing for remote connection of the following processors to the Nodebus:
♦ 50 Series Application Processor 50/51
♦ 50 Series, or 70 Series Workstation Processor
♦ 50 Series, or 70 Series Application Workstation
♦ Server 70 Processor.
In a separate application, this interface extender is also used to interface the Allen-Bradley station
(see “DNBX to Allen-Bradley Station Cabling” on page 575). Separate instructions are provided
for 50 Series and 70 Series cabling.
Converter Installation for DNBX (Model 51, Style E Processors

Only)
The Model 51, Style E processors do not have a connector for directly interfacing with network
AUI cables. If you are connecting a Model 51, Style E processor to a DNBX, you must attach the
MII-to-AUI converter (Foxboro part number P0971TR) to the MII (Media Independent Inter-
face) connector on the processor.
NOTE
The following notes apply to the converter installation:
1. The Model 51, Style E processors connect to a DNBX through the MII Connec-
tor on the motherboard, not from the MII Connector on the Twisted-Pair 10/100
Mbps Ethernet Interface PCI card with MII Connector. Refer to Figure 10-37 for a
diagram of the MII Connector on the motherboard.
2. The latch on the MII-to-AUI converter is not fully secure. Two cable ties in
excess of 12 inches (300 mm) are required to secure this cable. They are included
with the Model 51, Style E processor.
511
To connect the MII-to-AUI converter and network AUI cable to the Model 51, Style E
processor, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the MII-to-AUI converter from its package.
2. Insert the converter’s 40-pin connector into the MII connector on the processor’s
motherboard, as shown in Figure 10-37.
3. Rotate the screws on the 40-pin connector clockwise, until they securely fasten the
40-pin connector to the MII connector.
4. Push the latch (located over the AUI connector) to the right, and insert the
network AUI cable into the AUI connector on the MII-to-AUI converter, as shown in
Figure 10-38.
Cord to MII Connector
r LEDs
we Slide this latch to the
Po n
2V io right to allow the network
+1 ollis eive it
C ec sm Latch AUI cable to attach to
R ran
T the AUI connector.
Then, slide the latch
left to secure the
network AUI cable.
MII-to-AUI
Converter
Network AUI Cable

External Power Plug
AUI Connector
Figure 10-58. Attaching the AUI Network Cable to the MII-to-AUI Converter
5. Holding the MII-to-AUI converter with its indicator LEDs facing directly up, slide
the latch on the AUI connector over to the left, to lock the network AUI cable to the
MII-to-AUI converter.
6. Secure the network AUI cable to the AUI connector. Wrap the two cable ties over the
MII-to-AUI converter as shown in Figure 10-39, in an X-formation, and tighten
them firmly by inserting their flat ends through their “anchor ends” and pulling until
snug.
512
Cord to MII Connector
r LEDs
we
Po n
2V io
+1 ollis eive it
C ec sm Latch
R ran
T
Cable Tie
MII-to-AUI Converter Network AUI Cable
External Power Plug

Cable Tie
Flat End Cable Tie Anchor End

Figure 10-59. Securing the AUI Network Cable to the MII-to-AUI Converter
Connection of the MII-to-AUI converter and network AUI cable to the Model 51, Style E pro-
cessor is complete. You may now continue with the DNBX connections for the Model 51, Style E
processor.
50 Series DNBX Cabling

To install the Dual Nodebus Extender cables, refer to the following figures and perform the proce-
dure below to make cabling connections for the 50 Series processors:
♦ Dual Nodebus Extender Cabling, AP50/WP50/AW50 (Figure 10-60)
♦ Dual Nodebus Extender Cabling, AP51A/WP51A/AW51A (Figure 10-61)
♦ Dual Nodebus Extender Cabling, AP51B/WP51B/AW51B or AW51C
(Figure 10-62)
♦ Dual Nodebus Extender Cabling, AP51B1, AW51B1, or WP51B1
(Figure 10-63)
♦ Dual Nodebus Extender Cabling, AP51D, AW51D, or WP51D (Figure 10-65)
♦ Dual Nodebus Extender Cabling, AP51E, AW51E or WP51E (Figure 10-66).
Proceed as follows:
2. During normal usage, the Signal Quality Error (SQE) switch in the Ethernet trans-
ceiver (P0971LJ) must be set to the off/disabled position, if applicable. Refer to the
user’s guide packaged with the unit for specific instructions regarding this switch
setting.
3. Mount the Ethernet transceiver (P0970LJ) on a DIN rail in the enclosure wiring area
using the hardware provided.
513
NOTE
Figure 9-31 (for AP51B1, AW51B1, or WP51B1 processor), or
Figure 9-33 (for AP51D, AW51D, or WP51D processor)
Figure 9-34 (for AP51E, AW51E or WP51E processor).
4. If the processor is an AW51B1 or WP51B1, connect one end of cable

P0900ZU/ZV/ZW to the Ethernet port on the processor, and connect the other end
to the Ethernet transceiver (see Figure 10-63).
If this processor is an AW51D or WP51D, connect one end of cable
P0971XK/XL/XM/XN to the twisted-pair Ethernet port on the processor, and con-
nect the other end to the Ethernet transceiver (see Figure 10-65).
If this processor is an AW51E or WP51E, install the MII-to-AUI converter to the MII
Ethernet output port of the processor, ensure you performed the procedure in “Con-
verter Installation for DNBX (Model 51, Style E Processors Only)” on page 511.
For an AW50/WP50, AW51A/WP51A, AW51B/WP51B, or AW51C, connect one
end of AUI cable P0970LK or P0970XF to the Ethernet port on the processor, and
connect the other end to the Ethernet transceiver.
! CAUTION
one can be used at a time. For Model 51, Style E processors, the MII Ethernet out-
put port and twisted-pair telephone type connector are internally connected to the
same internal port. Foxboro uses only the AUI connector in DNBI/DNBX configu-
rations. For a DNBI or DNBX configuration, do not use the telephone jack (in
other words, twisted-pair Ethernet connection) adjacent to the AUI or MII connec-
tor. If you must have a twisted-pair telephone type connector available, refer to
“Second Ethernet Port (for 50 Series Products)” on page 528 to install the Ethernet
card.
5. Place the 50 ohm terminator (P0151RC), packaged with the Ethernet transceiver, on
one of the Ethernet transceiver cable connectors.
6. Fashion an Ethernet coaxial cable of appropriate length using the cable manufacturer’s
instructions, and referring to the following for guidance: Table 10-10 and
Figure 10-61, Figure 10-62, or Figure 10-63, as appropriate for your system.
7. Install the bracket kit (P0902BL).
8. Connect one end of the Ethernet coaxial cable to the Ethernet transceiver and the
other end to the bracket kit.
9. Secure the cable (Foxboro part number P0800KE) to the bracket kit.
10. Connect the peripheral connector jack of the cable (P0800KE) to the Channel D
position in the mounting structure containing the Dual Nodebus Extender.
514
11. Fashion an RS-423 cable of appropriate length using the cable manufacturer’s instruc-
tions, and using Figure 10-67 and Figure 10-68 as a general guide.
12. Connect the RS-423 cable as shown in Figure 10-61, Figure 10-62, or Figure 10-63.
13. Connect the peripheral connector jack of the cable (P0970BP) to the Channel A posi-
tion in the mounting structure containing the Dual Nodebus Extender.
14. Engage the top peripheral connector plug (on the Dual Nodebus Extender module)
opening (on the front of the module) and turning 1/2-turn clockwise.
Table 10-10. Ethernet Cable Components
Foxboro Recommended Manufacturer

Item Qty Part Number Manufacturer Part Number
Coaxial Cable (10Base5) A/R P0170LT Belden Corp. 89880
Coax Connector (Type N) 2 P0176SA Amphenol 82-4426-1001
Coaxial Cable (RG-58) A/R P0170MB Brand Rex CS50116
Coax Connector (Type BNC) 2 N/A Amphenol 31-320
Adapter (Type BNC-to-N) 2 P0176ZZ Amphenol 31-216
Ethernet Coaxial Cable: AUI Cable

Up to 150 m (500 ft) RG-58 (ThinNet)* P0970LK
Up to 450 m (1477 ft) 10Base 5 (Ethernet) Ethernet
P0800KE Transceiver **
P0970LJ
Bracket Kit
ABCD
P0902BL
Connector
Actuator
P0970BP
Opening
RS-423 Cable Adapter
50 ohm Terminator
Up to 350 m (1200 ft) P0151RC Cable, P.N.
530-1662-01
Dual Nodebus
Interface Extender AP50, WP50 or
P0970EJ AW50 (Rear View)
* When RG-58 cable is used, adapters (P0176ZZ) must be used to match the RG58 BNC to the
N type connectors on the Ethernet transceiver and P0800KE cable.
**The internal SQE switch, if present, is normally set to off/disabled.
Figure 10-60. Dual Nodebus Extender Cabling, AP50/WP50/AW50
515
Null Modem Adapter

To GCIO, Printer,
Ethernet Coaxial Cable: P0912GU
or VT100
Up to 150 m (500 ft) RG-58 (ThinNet)* P0970XG**
Up to 450 m (1477 ft) 10Base5 (Ethernet) B
Ethernet
P0800KE Transceiver *** A
P0970LJ
Bracket Kit or
ABCD
P0902BL
Connector
Adapter
Actuator
Cable
Opening P0970BP
50 ohm Terminator P0970XF
RS-423 Cable P0151RC
Up to 350 m (1200 ft)
Dual Nodebus Interface AP51A, WP51A or
Extender - P0970EJ AW51A (Rear View)
* When RG-58 cable is used, adapters (P0176ZZ) must be used to match the RG58 BNC
connectors to the N type connectors on the Ethernet transceiver and P0800KE cable.
**P0970XG is used only when GCIO, printer, or VT100 is connected.
***The internal SQE switch, if present, is normally set to off/disabled.
Figure 10-61. Dual Nodebus Extender Cabling, AP51A/WP51A/AW51A
516
Ethernet Coaxial Cable:

Up to 150 m (500 ft) RG-58 (ThinNet)* Ethernet
Up to 450 m (1477 ft) 10Base5 (Ethernet) Transceiver ** Adapter
P0970LJ Cable
P0800KE
P0970XF
ABCD
Connector Serial
Bracket Kit 50 ohm Terminator
Actuator Port A
Opening P0902BL P0151RC
P0970BP
RS-423 Cable
Dual Nodebus Up to 350 m (1200 ft)
Interface
Extender
P0970EJ AP51B/WP51B/AW51B
(rear view)

Up to 150 m (500 ft) RG-58 (ThinNet)* Splitter Cable P0912GX
Up to 450 m (1477 ft) 10Base5 (Ethernet) To GCIO,
Ethernet Printer, or
P0800KE VT100
Transceiver **
P0970LJ B
ABCD Bracket Kit

P0902BL A
Connector
Actuator
Opening P0970BP
50 ohm Terminator Adapter
RS-423 Cable
Up to 350 m (1200 ft) P0151RC Cable
Dual Nodebus P0970XF
Interface Extender
P0970EJ
AW51C
* When RG-58 cable is used, adapters (P0176ZZ) must be used to match (rear view)
the RG58 BNC connectors to the N type connectors on the Ethernet
transceiver and P0800KE cable.
** The internal SQE switch, if present, is normally set to off/disabled.
Figure 10-62. Dual Nodebus Extender Cabling, AP51B/WP51B/AW51B or AW51C
517

Up to 150 m (500 ft) RG-58 (ThinNet)* Splitter Cable P0912GX
Up to 450 m (1477 ft) 10Base5 (Ethernet) To GCIO,
Ethernet Printer, or
P0800KE VT100
Transceiver **
P0970LJ B
Bracket Kit
ABCD
P0902BL
A
Connector
Actuator
Opening
P0970BP
50 ohm Terminator
RS-423 Cable (P0151RC)
Up to 350 m (1200 ft)
AUI Cable:
Dual Nodebus P0900ZU - 3 m (10 ft)
Interface Extender P0900ZV - 15 m (50 ft)
P0970EJ P0900ZW - 45 m (150 ft)
* When RG-58 cable is used, adapters (P0176ZZ) must be used to match AP51B1/AW51B1/
the RG58 BNC connectors to the N type connectors on the Ethernet WP51B1
transceiver and P0800KE cable. (rear view)
Figure 10-63. Dual Nodebus Extender Cabling, AP51B1, AW51B1, or WP51B1
518
P0970BP RS-423 Cable

2 m (6 ft) Up to 450 m (1500 ft)
P0800KE
Connector 10Base T Cable:
ABCD Actuator P0971XK - 3 m (10 ft)
Opening
Ethernet
Up to 450 m (1500 ft) N-to-BNC Transceiver **
10Base5 with N-type Adapter P0971YF-A
connectors (Ethernet P0971YG Serial
Coaxial Cable) Port A
or or
Dual Nodebus
Interface
Extender Bracket Kit Up to 150 m (500 ft) 10Base2
Terminator
P0970EJ P0902BL RG-58 (ThinNet) with BNC
connectors (Ethernet Coaxial P0912SY
BNC-to-N Adapter Cable)* P0912ZV
P0176ZZ AP51D, AW51D,
Null-Hub Adapter - P0971PK WP51D (Rear View)
* When RG-58 cable is used, adapters (P0176ZZ) must be used to match
the RG58 BNC connectors to the N-type connectors on the Ethernet transceiver and P0800KE cable.
** The internal SQE switch, if present, is set to OFF/DISABLED.
Figure 10-64. Dual Nodebus Extender Cabling with Ethernet Transceiver P0971YF Rev A,
519
Interface Cable
P0970BP
Connector Position A RS-423 Cable

Up to 450 m (1500 ft max.)
Connector Position D
Cable Assembly
P0800KE
Ethernet
Transceiver
P0971YF-B*
N-to BNC adapter

P0971YG
Bracket Kit Serial
P0902BL Port A
Up to to 450 m (1500 ft)
10Base5 cable
with N-Type Connectors
OR OR
10Base T Cable
DNBX N-Type Connector 3 m (10 ft) P0971XK AP51D, AW51D,
P0970EJ BNC-to-N Adapter WP51D
10Base T port
P0176ZZ (rear view)
Up to 150 m (500 ft)
* = Set terminator active. Set UTP crossover switch 10Base2 (ThinNet) Cable w/BNC Connectors
for crossover. Set SQE off.
Figure 10-65. Dual Nodebus Extender Cabling with Ethernet Transceiver P0971YF Rev B,
520
P0970BP
Serial Port A
P0800KE RS-423 Cable

Cable
Up to 450 m (1500 ft) P0900ZU/
ABCD
Ethernet P0900ZV/
Transceiver ** P0900ZW A B
P0970LJ TP
<...>
Connector MII
<...>
Actuator P0902BL
Opening Bracket Kit
MII-to-AUI
Converter***
Dual Nodebus P0971TR PCI166 1
50 ohm Terminator
Interface PCI 2
P0151RC
Extender
PCI 3
P0970EJ Ethernet Coaxial Cable: PCI 4
Up to 150 m (500 ft) 10Base2 RG-58 (ThinNet) with adapters*

AP51E, AW51E
Up to 450 m (1477 ft) 10Base5 (Ethernet)
or WP51E
* When RG-58 cable is used, adapters (P0176ZZ) must be used to match the RG58
BNC connectors to the N type connectors on the Ethernet transceiver and P0800KE cable.
***Refer to “Converter Installation for DNBX (Model 51, Style E Processor Only)” to install converter.
Figure 10-66. Dual Nodebus Extender Cabling, AP51E, AW51E or WP51E
Amp Part Number 745496-1 6 Twisted-Pair 28 AWG

25-Pin D Connector w/Overall Shield
(both ends) Non-Plenum Grade*
(Brand-Rex part number
Pin 25 J1 (see following table) T-12465 or equivalent) J2 (see following table)
Pin 13
RS-423 Cable
Pin 14 0 to 450 m (1477 ft)
Pin 1 Amp Part Number
748678-3 Hood
w/Hardware * Plenum grade cable may be required
(both ends) in certain user environments.
This cable is illustrated in Foxboro Drawing Number 10121TN, RS423 Cable Assembly.
Figure 10-67. RS-423 Cable Connections for 50 Series Workstation
521
J1 and J2 are shown in the above figure, RS-423 Cable Connections for
50 Series Workstation.
Wire Wire AWG
Pair No. Size From To Notes*
1 1 28 J1-2 J2-3 RXD
2 J1-7 J2-7 GND
2 3 J1-3 J2-2 TXD
4 J1-7 J2-7 GND
3 5 J1-5 J2-4 RTS
6 J1-7 J2-7 GND
4 7 J1-4 J2-5 CTS
8 J1-7 J2-7 GND
5 9 J1-20 J2-6 DCD
10 J1-7 J2-7 GND
6 11 J1-6 J2-20 DTR
12 28 J1-7 J2-7 GND
Shield 13 -- J1-1 J2-1 Protective GND
-- 14 28 J1-6 J1-8 DSR/DCD
-- 15 28 J2-6 J2-8 DSR/DCD
Figure 10-68. RS-423 Wiring Data for 50 Series Workstation
70 Series DNBX Cabling

Perform the procedure below to make Dual Nodebus Extender cabling connections for the
70 Series processor.
NOTE
AUI connections to the nodebus. Refer to “Installing an Ethernet Card” on

3. Connect the peripheral connector jack of the cable (Foxboro part number P0800KE)
to the Channel D position in the mounting structure containing the Dual
Nodebus Extender.
4. Connect the P0800KE cable to:
♦ an RG-58 (ThinNet) Ethernet coaxial cable using an adapter (Foxboro part num-
ber P0176ZZ) held up by the bracket kit, or
♦ a 10Base5 Ethernet cable with one end held up by the bracket kit.
Both these configurations are shown in Figure 10-70.
522
5. Connect the tee connector (P0912ZV) with 50 ohm terminator (P0912SY) to the
BNC port on the 3Com Ethernet card, as shown in Figure 10-70. The BNC port is
3Com 3C509
Ethernet card
Three connectors: BNC ThinNet, AUI, and RJ-45 Connector

Figure 10-69. 3Com 3C509 Ethernet Card Connectors
6. Connect the other end of the following cables to the tee connector as shown in
Figure 10-70:
♦ RG-58 (ThinNet) Ethernet coaxial cable directly to the tee connector, or
♦ 10Base5 Ethernet cable to the P0971YG adapter, which connects to the tee con-
nector.
7. Fashion an RS-423 cable of appropriate length using Figure 10-71 and Figure 10-72
as a general guide.
8. Connect the RS-423 cable to the 70 Series processor’s COM1 port as shown in
Figure 10-70.
9. Connect the peripheral connector jack of the cable (P0970BP) to the Channel A posi-
tion in the mounting structure containing the Dual Nodebus Extender.
10. Connect the other end of the RS-432 cable to the other end of the DNBX cable
(P0970BP).
523
RS-423 Cable
P0970BP - 2 m (6 ft) Up to 350 m (1200 ft)**
(P0902BL) Up to 450 m (1477 ft)

Bracket Kit 10Base5 (Ethernet)
Coaxial Cable
P0800KE - 2 m (6 ft)
ABCD
OR COM1
Serial Port
Adapter
Connector (P0176ZZ)
Actuator
Opening Adapter
(P0971YG)
Up to 150 m (500 ft) RG-58 OR

Dual Nodebus (ThinNet)* Ethernet Coaxial
Interface Cable Tee Connector
Extender (P0912ZV)
(P0970EJ) 50 ohm Terminator
(P0912SY)
AW70 or WP70
3Com Ethernet Card***
(rear view)
* When RG-58 cable is used, adapter (P0176ZZ) must be used to match the
RG-58 BNC connectors to the N type connector on the P0800KE cable.
** Refer to the following figure for wiring instructions.
*** Location may differ depending on version of 70 Series processor.
Figure 10-70. Dual Nodebus Extender Cabling, AW70, or WP70 (Typical)
6 Twisted-Pair 28 AWG
Amp P/N 745496-1 w/Overall Shield Amp P/N 745491-1
25-Pin D Male Connector Non-Plenum Grade* 9-Pin D Female Connector
(Brand-Rex P/N T-12465
Pin 14 P1 (see following table) Or Equivalent) Socket 6
Pin 1 J2 (see following table) Socket 1
RS-423 Cable
0 to 350 m (1200 ft)
Pin 25 Socket 9
Pin 13 Socket 5
Amp P/N 748678-3 Amp P/N 748678-1
Hood w/Hardware Hood w/Hardware
* Plenum grade cable may be required in certain user environments.

This cable is diagramed in Foxboro Drawing Number 10122TP, RS423 Cable Assembly.
Figure 10-71. RS-423 Cable Connections for 70 Series Processor
524
P1 and J2 are shown in the above figure, “RS-423 Cable Connections for 70 Series
Workstation” .
Wire Wire AWG
Pair No. Size Wire Color From To
1 1 28 White/Black P1-2 J2-2
2 White/Brown P1-7 J2-5
2 3 White/Red P1-3 J2-3
4 White/Orange P1-7 J2-5
3 5 White/Yellow P1-4 J2-8
6 White/Green N/C ---
4 7 White/Blue P1-5 J2-7
8 White/Violet N/C ---
5 9 White/Gray P1-6 J2-4
10 White/Black/Black N/C ---
6 11 White/Black/Brown P1-20 J2-6
12 28 White/Black/Red N/C ---
Shield 13 --- --- P1 Shell J2 Shell
--- 14 28 --- P1-6 P1-8
--- 15 28 --- J2-6 J2-1
N/C = No connection
Figure 10-72. RS-423 Wiring Data for 70 Series Processor
! CAUTION
clockwise.
You have completed making Dual Nodebus Extender cabling connections for the 70 Series
processors.
525
Server 70 DNBX Cabling

Perform the procedure below to make Dual Nodebus Extender cabling connections for the
Server 70.
! CAUTION
When configuring a commit diskette for the Server 70, you must assign the serial
port COM1 to the DNBT/DNBX.

3. Connect the peripheral connector jack of the cable (part number P0800KE) to the
Channel D position in the mounting structure containing the Dual Nodebus
Extender.
4. Connect the P0800KE cable to:
♦ An RG-58 (ThinNet) Ethernet coaxial cable using a BNC-to-N adapter (part
number P0176ZZ) held up by the bracket kit, or
♦ A 10Base5 Ethernet cable with one end held up by the bracket kit.
Both these configurations are shown in Figure 10-74.
5. Connect the T-Connector (P0912ZV) with 50 ohm terminator (P0912SY) to the
BNC port on the 3Com Ethernet card, as shown in Figure 10-70. The BNC port is
3Com 3C900B
Ethernet card
RJ-45 Connector AUI BNC ThinNet

Figure 10-73. 3Com 3C900B Ethernet Card Connectors
6. Connect the other end of the following cables to the T-Connector as shown in
Figure 10-74:
♦ RG-58 (ThinNet) Ethernet coaxial cable directly to the T-Connector, or
♦ 10Base5 Ethernet cable to the P0971YG N-to-BNC adapter, which connects to
the T-Connector.
7. Fashion an RS-423 cable of appropriate length using Figure 10-75 and Table 10-11 as
a general guide.
8. Connect the RS-423 cable to the Server 70 Server 70’s COM1 port as shown in
Figure 10-74.
9. Connect the peripheral connector jack of the RS-423 cable (P0970BP) to the
Channel A position in the mounting structure containing the Dual Nodebus
Extender.
10. Connect the other end of the RS-423 cable to the other end of the DNBX cable
(P0970BP).
526
RS-423 Cable
Up to 350 m (1500 ft)**
COM1 P0970BP – 2 m (6 ft)
Serial Port
Up to 340 m (1477 ft) (P0902BL)
10Base5 (Ethernet) Bracket Kit
Coaxial Cable
OR
Adapter P0800KE – ABCD
(P0971YG) 2 m (6 ft)
Adapter
(P0176ZZ)
OR Connector
T-Connector Actuator
(P0912ZV) Up to 150 m (500 ft) Opening
RG-58 (ThinNet)*
50 Ohm Terminator
Ethernet Coaxial
(P0912SY) Cable
3Com 3C900B Dual Nodebus
Ethernet Card Interface
Extender
* When RG-58 cable is used, an adapter (P0176ZZ) must be used to match the (P0970EJ)
RG-58 BNC connectors to the N type connector on the P0800KE cable.
** Refer to the following figure for wiring instructions.
Figure 10-74. Dual Nodebus Extender Cabling, Server 70 (Typical)
6 Twisted-Pair 28 AWG
w/Overall Shield
Amp P/N 745496-1 Non-Plenum Grade* Amp P/N 745491-1
25-Pin D Male Connector (Brand-Rex P/N T-12465 9-Pin D Female Connector
or Equivalent)
Pin 14 P1 (see following table) J2 (see following table) Socket 6

Pin 1 Socket 1
RS-423 Cable
0 to 350 m (1500 ft)
Pin 25 Pin 13 Socket 9
Socket 5
Amp P/N 748678-3 Amp P/N 748678-1
Hood w/Hardware Hood w/Hardware
* Plenum grade cable may be required in certain customer environments.
Figure 10-75. RS-423 Cable Connections for Server 70
P1 and J2 are shown in the above figure, “RS-423 Cable Connections for Server 70”.
527
Table 10-11. RS-423 Wiring Data for Server 70
Wire Pair Wire Number AWG Size Wire Color From To

1 1 28 White/Black P1-2 J2-2
2 28 White/Brown P1-7 J2-5
2 3 28 White/Red P1-3 J2-3
4 28 White/Orange P1-7 J2-5
3 5 28 White/Yellow P1-4 J2-8
6 28 White/Green N/C1 ---
4 7 28 White/Blue P1-5 J2-7
8 28 White/Violet N/C ---
5 9 28 White/Gray P1-6 J2-4
10 28 White/Black/Black N/C1 ---
6 11 28 White/Black/Brown P1-20 J2-6
12 28 White/Black/Red N/C1 ---
Shield 13 --- --- P1 Shell J2 Shell
--- 14 28 --- P1-6 P1-8
--- 15 28 --- J2-6 J2-1
1.
N/C = No connection
clockwise.
You have completed making Dual Nodebus Extender cabling connections for the Server 70.
Second Ethernet Port (for 50 Series Products)

The optional second Ethernet port provides for connection between an AP50/51, WP50/51, or
AW50/51-based I/A Series system and an Ethernet network hosted by a separate (remote) com-
puter. It can be implemented for all 50 Series processors in either of two configurations:
♦ ThinNet (BNC) or AUI Cable Connection – Uses Ethernet SBus card
[Model 51, Style D or E processors use Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface
PCI card with MII Connector (Kit P0971UF)].
♦ Twisted-Pair Cable Connection – Uses Fast SCSI/Buffered Ethernet SBus card or the
Fast SCSI Plus Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet card
[Model 51, Style D or E processors use either Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet
Interface PCI card with MII Connector (Kit P0971UE) or Twisted-Pair
10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface plus Ultra-Wide SCSI PCI card (Kit P0971UC)].
528
The Ethernet card may be installed in any of the Model 51, Style A, B/B1, or C processor’s
unused SBus slots (AW51B1 and WP51B1 have only one SBus slot). However, the fast
SCSI/Buffered Ethernet SBus card is position sensitive, requiring that it be installed in a particu-
lar SBus slot. Refer to “SBus Card Slot Usage” on page 388 for specific information on how the
SBus card slots are used.
The second Ethernet port can be implemented in the Model 51, Style D and E processor, with the
following PCI Ethernet cards and their associated peripherals:
♦ MII-to-AUI Converter (and SQE Eliminator) to AUI Cable Connection – Uses
Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface PCI card with MII Connector (upgrade
kit P0971UF)
♦ Twisted-Pair Cable Connection – Uses Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface
plus Ultra-Wide SCSI PCI card (upgrade kit P0971UC) or Twisted-Pair 10/100
Mbps Ethernet Interface PCI card with MII Connector (upgrade kit P0971UE).
These cards can be installed in any of the Model 51, Style D processor’s PCI card slots.
The Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface PCI card may be installed in any of the Model
51, Style E processor’s unused regular PCI slots (PCI slots 2, 3, or 4). However, the Twisted-Pair
10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface plus Ultra-Wide SCSI PCI card must be installed in PCI slot 4 if
this card is used for disk mirroring. Refer to “AP51E, WP51E and AW51E PCI Card Slot Usage”
on page 393 for specific information on how the PCI card slots are used.
Figure 10-76 illustrates the Ethernet cable connections at the processor end for SBus cards.
Figure 10-80 and Figure 10-81 show the equivalent Ethernet cable connections for the PCI cards.
(Connections at the opposite end depend on the particular Ethernet configuration in question.)
To make the cable connections to the optional second Ethernet port:
1. Set the connector selection switches on the Ethernet card (not applicable to fast
SCSI/Buffered Ethernet card, the fast SCSI Plus Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet
card, or either of the PCI cards) as indicated in Figure 10-76.
2. Connect the cable to the appropriate SBus or PCI card connector.
529
NOTE
The following notes apply to the second Ethernet port installation:
1. When a second Ethernet SBus or PCI card or second SCSI + Ethernet SBus or
PCI card is added to an operational AP51, WP51, or AW51 station, the station
must be rebooted with the boot -r command. Refer to System Operations Guide
(B0193CR) for information on rebooting.
2. When the Ethernet SBus or PCI card is employed, certain files must be devel-
oped. If the operating system is already installed, the /etc/hostname.le<n> file must
be created for the SBus card, and the /etc/hostname.hme<n> file must be created for
the PCI cards.
Refer to System Administration Guide for 50 Series (Solaris 2.X) (B0193ND) for a
complete description of this file for processors utilizing SBus cards. Refer to Hard-
ware Kit Installation Procedures for 50 Series Model 51, Style D Processors (B0400PT)
for a complete description of hardware and software installation for this processor’s
PCI cards.
Refer to Hardware Kit Installation Procedures for 50 Series Model 51, Style E
Processors (B0400PJ) for a complete description of hardware and software installa-
tion for this processor’s PCI cards.
Figure 10-77 shows typical cabling for a combined AUI/ThinNet Ethernet configuration.
Figure 10-78 and Figure 10-79 show the end connectors for the fast SCSI/Buffered Ethernet card
and the Fast SCSI Plus Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet card, respectively.
Figure 10-80 and Figure 10-81 show the end connectors for the Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps
Ethernet Interface plus Ultra-Wide SCSI PCI card and Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet
Interface PCI card with MII Connector, respectively.
530
Either cable (but not ThinNet Cable*

both) may be used to
provide connection AUI Interface Cable*
with a remote Ethernet
network.
Ethernet (AUI) To
Connector Remote
ThinNet (BNC)
Ethernet
Connector Connector Selection
Network
Switches
Switches 7-8 = Switches 7-8 =
+12 V dc on/off +12 V dc on/off
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Ethernet Card**
Ethernet AUI ThinNet
To use Ethernet connector, To use ThinNet connector,

set last two switches on (towards set all switches on (towards
connectors on card). connectors on card).
Twisted-Pair Ethernet Cable* To

Remote
Ethernet
SCSI Connector Network
Twisted-Pair
Ethernet Connector J0302 (see note)
NOTE:
J0302 on the Fast SCSI/Buffered Ethernet
card provides enabling/disabling of the Link
Fast SCSI/Buffered Ethernet Card Integrity Test feature. (The card is shipped
or Fast SCSI Plus Twisted-Pair with this feature enabled.) Refer to document
10/100 Mbps Ethernet Card** B0193SC, SBus Card Installation Procedures,
for further details.
*User-supplied cable whose length depends on the particular application.

**Refer to “SBus Card Slot Usage” in Chapter 9 for information on allowable SBus card slot locations.
Figure 10-76. Optional Ethernet Port Cable Connections (SBus Card)
531
AUI Cables:
P0900ZU - 3 m (10 ft)
P0900ZV - 15 m (50 ft)
P0900ZW - 45 m (150 ft)
Ethernet
Transceivers
To AUI P0940MC
Connector on
Ethernet SBus Ethernet
Adapters
Card -or- Device with
P0176ZZ
To MII-AUI AUI
Connector
Converter
(Model 51,
50 ohm
Style E only) 50 ohm
Terminator
Terminator
RG-58 (ThinNet) P0151RC
P0151RC
Cabling*
*Ordered separately. (Up to 150 m (500 ft))
Figure 10-77. Typical Combined AUI/ThinNet Cabling
SCSI ETHERNET
Figure 10-78. Fast SCSI/Buffered Ethernet SBus Card Back Panel
ETHERNET SCSI
Figure 10-79. Fast SCSI Plus Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet SBus Card Back Panel
68-Pin SCSI-3 Connector RJ-45 Connector

Figure 10-80. Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface plus Ultra-Wide SCSI PCI
Card Back Panel
532
100 BaseTX
40-Pin MII Connector RJ-45 Connector
Figure 10-81. Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface PCI Card with
MII Connector Back Panel
X Terminal Cabling
The X Terminal is a user-supplied device. This section is provided to describe how to link a
50 Series processor to this terminal if you currently have an X Terminal.
AW51B, WP51B, or AW51C Processor Connections

The X Terminal connects to the AW51B, WP51B, or AW51C processor via twisted-pair Ethernet
cable. Cable connections to the processor may be made either of two ways:
♦ Via the twisted-pair connector on the fast SCSI/Buffered Ethernet SBus card or the
fast SCSI Plus Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet SBus card (Figure 10-82), or
♦ Via the AUI connector on the Ethernet (SBus) card (Figure 10-83).
Specific information on these cards is presented in Figure 10-76.
NOTE
The non-SBus AUI port on the WP51B, AW51B, or AW51C is dedicated for use
with the DNBI/DNBX and is not software supported for use with the X Terminal.
To perform the X Terminal cabling, refer to the figure mentioned above appropriate for your
requirements and make the cable connections as shown.
NOTE
The following notes apply to the X Terminal connections:
1. Figure 10-82 and Figure 10-83 show basic, processor-to-X Terminal twisted-pair
cabling. To obtain information on more extensive Ethernet network cabling incor-
porating the X Terminal, contact your local Foxboro sales representative.
2. Software initialization procedures must be performed in order to make the
X Terminal operational. Refer to X Terminal System Administration Guide
(Solaris 2.x) (B0193ND).
533
OR
See 10BaseT Twisted-Pair

Notes Ethernet Cable:
1, 2, 4.5 m (15 ft) - Packaged with
and 3 X Terminal’s Accessory Kit
See (see Note 4)
Notes
1, 2,
and 3
Null Hub
Adapter
AW51B or P0971PK
AW51C X Terminal
WP51B (See Note 5)
NOTES:
1. Either fast SCSI/Buffered Ethernet SBus card or fast SCSI Plus Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps
Ethernet SBus card may be used. Signal connections are similar for both.
2. For more information on the fast SCSI/Buffered Ethernet SBus card or the fast SCSI Plus
Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet SBus card, refer to Second Ethernet Port (for 50 Series
Products) above.
3. The SBus card slot used may differ from that shown. If the fast SCSI/Buffered Ethernet SBus
card is used for disk mirroring, refer to second ethernet port (for 50 Series Products) above
for required SBus card slot usage information.
4. Cabling of any other required length may be fashioned by the user in accordance with Ethernet
10BaseT specifications.
5. The Null-Hub adapter is intended for use only with the configuration shown. Do not include this
component if the X Terminal is used in a standard twisted-pair Ethernet network employing a hub.
Figure 10-82. X Terminal Cabling, AW51B, WP51B, AW51C, Using Fast SCSI/Buffered
Ethernet SBus Card
534
OR
See
Notes See 10BaseT Twisted-Pair
1 and 2 Notes Ethernet Cable:
1 and 2 4.5 m (15 ft) - Packaged with
X Terminal’s Accessory Kit
(see Note 3)
See Note 4
AUI to
Null-Hub
Twisted-Pair
Adapter
Ethernet
P0971PK X Terminal
AW51B or AW51C Transceiver
(See Note 5)
WP51B P0971PN
NOTES:
1. For more information on the Ethernet SBus card, refer to “Second Ethernet Port (for 50 Series
Products)” above.
2. The SBus card slot used may differ from that shown.
4. During normal usage, the Signal Quality Error (SQE) switch on the AUI to Twisted-Pair Ethernet
Transceiver must be set to the disabled position. Refer to the user’s guide packaged with the
unit for specific instructions regarding this switch setting.
Figure 10-83. X Terminal Cabling, AW51B, WP51B, AW51C, Using Ethernet SBus Card
AW51B1 or WP51B1 Processor Connections

The X Terminal connects to the AW51B1 or WP51B1 processor via twisted-pair Ethernet cable.
Cable connections to the processor may be made either of two ways:
♦ Via the twisted-pair connector on the Fast SCSI/Buffered Ethernet SBus card or the
Fast SCSI Plus Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet SBus card (Figure 10-84), or
♦ Via the AUI connector on the Ethernet (SBus) card (Figure 10-85).
Specific information on these cards is presented in Figure 10-76.
NOTE
The non-SBus AUI port on the WP51B, AW51B, or AW51C is dedicated for use
with the DNBI/DNBX and is not software supported for use with the X Terminal.
To perform the X Terminal cabling, refer to Figure 10-76 for your requirements and make the
cable connections as shown.
535
NOTE
1. Figure 10-84 and Figure 10-85 show basic, processor-to-X Terminal twisted-pair
cabling. To obtain information on more extensive Ethernet network cabling incor-
porating the X Terminal, contact your local Foxboro sales representative.
Fast SCSI/Buffered Ethernet SBus card

or Fast SCSI Plus Twisted-Pair
10/100 Mbps Ethernet SBus card.
See Notes 1, and 2.
10BaseT Twisted-Pair
Ethernet Cable:
4.5 m (15 ft) - Packaged with
(see Note 3)
Null-Hub
Adapter
(P0971PK)
AW51B1/WP51B1 X Terminal
(See Note 4)
NOTES:
1. Signal connections for the fast SCSI/Buffered Ethernet SBus card and fast SCSI Plus
Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet SBus card are similar.
2. For more information on the fast SCSI/Buffered Ethernet SBus card or the fast SCSI Plus
Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet SBus card, refer to Second Ethernet Port (for 50 Series
Products) above.
Figure 10-84. X Terminal Cabling, AW51B1, WP51B1, Using Fast SCSI/Buffered
Ethernet SBus Card
536
See
Note 1
Ethernet Cable:
(see Note 2)
See Note 3
AUI to Null-Hub
Twisted-Pair Adapter
AW51B1/WP51B1 Ethernet (P0971PK)
Transceiver (See Note 4) X Terminal
(P0971PN)
NOTES:
1. For more information on the Ethernet SBus card, refer to “Second Ethernet Port (for 50 Series
Products)” above.
3. During normal usage, the Signal Quality Error (SQE) switch on the AUI to Twisted-Pair Ethernet
Transceiver must be set to the disabled position. Refer to the user’s guide packaged with the
unit for specific instructions regarding this switch setting.
Figure 10-85. X Terminal Cabling, AW51B1, WP51B1, Using Ethernet SBus Card
AW51D or WP51D Processor Connections

The X Terminal connects to the AW51D or WP51D processor via twisted-pair Ethernet cable.
Cable connections to the processor can be made via the twisted-pair connector on either the
Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface Plus Ultra-Wide SCSI PCI card or the Twisted-Pair
10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface with MII Connector PCI card (Figure 10-86).
Specific information on these cards is presented in Hardware Kit Installation Procedures for
50 Series Model 51, Style D Processors (B0400PT).
To perform the X Terminal cabling, refer to Figure 10-86, and make the applicable cable connec-
tions as shown.
NOTE
1. Figure 10-86 shows basic, processor to X Terminal twisted-pair cabling. To obtain
information on more extensive Ethernet network cabling incorporating the
X Terminal, contact your local Foxboro sales representative.
537
Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface

with MII Connector PCI Card
(Card alone: P0971TQ, upgrade kit: P0971UE)
OR
Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet
Interface plus Ultra-Wide SCSI PCI Card
(Card alone: P0971TL, upgrade kit: P0971UC)
(See Note 1).
Ethernet Cable:
Null-Hub
Adapter
AW51D/WP51D P0971PK X Terminal
(See Note 2).
(See Note 3)
NOTES:
1. Signal connections for the Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface with MII Connector
PCI Card and Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface plus Ultra-Wide SCSI PCI Card
are similar.
2. Cabling of any other required length can be fashioned by you in accordance with Ethernet
Figure 10-86. X Terminal Cabling, AW51D, WP51D (Twisted-Pair Connection)
AW51E or WP51E Processor Connections

The X Terminal connects to the AW51E or WP51E processor via twisted-pair Ethernet cable.
Cable connections to the processor can be made via the twisted-pair connector on either the
Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface Plus Ultra-Wide SCSI PCI card or the Twisted-Pair
10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface with MII Connector PCI card (Figure 10-87).
Specific information on these cards is presented in Hardware Kit Installation Procedures for
50 Series Model 51, Style E Processors (B0400PJ).
To perform the X Terminal cabling, refer to Figure 10-87, and make the applicable cable connec-
tions as shown.
NOTE
1. Figure 10-87 shows basic, processor-to-X Terminal twisted-pair cabling. To
obtain information on more extensive Ethernet network cabling incorporating the
X Terminal, contact your local Foxboro sales representative.
538
Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface

with MII Connector PCI Card
A B
(Card alone: P0971TQ, upgrade kit: P0971UE)
OR
TP
<...>
Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet
MII
<...>
Interface plus Ultra-Wide SCSI PCI Card
(Card alone: P0971TL, upgrade kit: P0971UC)
See Notes 1, 2, and 3.
PCI166 1
PCI 2
PCI 3
Ethernet Cable:
Null-Hub
PCI 4

Adapter
P0971PK
AW51E/WP51E (see Note 4) X Terminal
(See Note 5)
NOTES:
1. Signal connections for the Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface with MII Connector PCI
card and Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface Plus Ultra-Wide SCSI PCI card are similar.
2. The Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface Plus Ultra-Wide SCSI PCI card can use
both its SCSI port for disk mirroring and its twisted-pair port for network connections
simultaneously.
3. For more information on the Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface with MII Connector
PCI Card or Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface Plus Ultra-Wide SCSI PCI Card,
refer to Second Ethernet Port (for 50 Series Products) above.
Figure 10-87. X Terminal Cabling, AW51E or WP51E
Using Ethernet PCI Card (Twisted-Pair Connection)
ATM 155 Mbps Fiber or Twisted-Pair

Communications
50 Series processors support communications over a network compliant with the specifications of
the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) forum when used with the SBus and PCI cards listed
below:
♦ The following single width SBus adapters conform to the specifications of the Asyn-
chronous Transfer Mode (ATM) forum, and can be used with the
AP51B/AW51B/WP51B processors, AP51B1/AW51B1/WP51B1 processors, or
AW51C processor:
♦ Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) 155 Mbps Fiber Cable SBus Adapter
(Figure 10-88) - supports 155 Mbps operation over 62.5/125µ multimode fiber
cable
539
♦ ATM 155 Mbps Twisted-Pair Cable SBus Adapter (Figure 10-89) - supports 155
Mbps operation over unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) Category 5 (copper) wire.
♦ For the Model 51, Style D and E processors, the following single width PCI adapters
conform to the specifications of the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) forum:
♦ ATM 155 Mbps Fiber Cable Interface PCI card - supports 155 Mbps operation
over 62.5/125µ multimode fiber cable
♦ ATM 155 Mbps Twisted-Pair Interface PCI card - supports 155 Mbps operation
over unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) Category 5 (copper) wire
An ATM switch must be included as part of an ATM network. To connect the ATM 155 Mbps
SBus and PCI adapter cards to the ATM switch, you need the following cables:
♦ ATM 155 Mbps Fiber Cable Adapter – multimode fiber cable with an SC connector
♦ ATM 155 Mbps Twisted-Pair Cable Adapter – Category 5 UTP with an RJ-45
connector.
SC Fiber Receptacle
ATM 155 Mbps Fiber Cable SBus Adapter Card -

Part Number P0971RW
ATM 155 Mbps Fiber Cable Interface PCI Card -

Part Number P0971VQ (part of upgrade kit P0971VS)
SUN
ATM-155 TX RX
Fiber
Figure 10-88. ATM 155 Mbps Fiber Cable SBus and PCI Adapter Card
540
RJ45
ATM 155 Mbps Twisted-Pair Cable SBus Adapter -

Part Number P0971RX
ATM 155 Mbps Twisted-Pair Interface PCI card -

Part Number P0971VR (part of upgrade kit P0971VT)
SUN UTP
ATM-155
Figure 10-89. ATM 155 Mbps Twisted-Pair Cable SBus and PCI Adapter Card
To make the cable connections to the ATM 155 Mbps fiber cable adapter cards:
1. Remove the rubber plug that keeps the fiber optic connector free of dust from the
ATM 155 Mbps adapter card.
2. Connect one end of the multimode fiber cable into the fiber receptacle on the adapter
card and connect the other end to the ATM switch. (As you hold the adapter card
with the connector pointed toward you, “transmit” is on the left and “receive” is on
the right, as shown Figure 10-88.)
3. Run the SunATM self-test diagnostics. (Refer to the SunATM SBus Adapters Manual.)
To make the cable connections to the ATM 155 Mbps Twisted-Pair Cable Adapter cards:
1. Plug one end of the Category 5 UTP cable into the RJ-45 receptacle on the adapter
card and connect the other end to the ATM switch. The RJ-45 connector is already
keyed for transmit (Pair 2, Pins 1 and 2) and “receive” (Pair 4, Pins 7 and 8) in accor-
dance with the EIA/TIA (T568B) wiring scheme. Refer to the SunATM SBus Adapters
Manual for a description of each pin.
2. Run the SunATM self-test diagnostics. (Refer to the SunATM SBus Adapters
Manual.)
NOTE
When an ATM 155 Mbps Adapter SBus or PCI card is added to an operational
AP51, WP51, or AW51 station, the station must be rebooted with the boot-r
command. Refer to System Operations Guide (B0193CR) for information on
rebooting.
541
Token Ring Interface

A token ring network is a star-wired Local Area Network (LAN) that interconnects various
devices such as processors into a logical ring configuration. The Token Ring Interface card, con-
forming to the IEEE 802.5-1988 standard, provides an interface between the token ring network
and the I/A Series system. The Token Ring Interface card may be configured to run at speeds of
either 4 Mbps or 16 Mbps.
Two versions of the Token Ring Interface card are available:
♦ an SBus card for installation in a Model 51, Style A, B/B1, or C processor,
♦ a PCI card for installation in a Model 51, Style D or E processor.
As illustrated in Figure 10-90, a jumper is used to select between the 4 Mbps and the 16 Mbps
data rate in the SBus Token Ring Interface card. The jumper, when installed, selects the 16 Mbps
rate. The Token Ring Interface card is shipped from the factory with the jumper installed
(16 Mbps rate selected).
The PCI Token Ring Interface does not have this jumper, as shown in Figure 10-91. This card is
pre-set for all configurations and does not require additional modifications.
To install the Token Ring Interface, proceed as follows:
1. For SBus Token Ring Interface cards, determine the speed at which the token ring
network is operating. If the network is operating at 16 Mbps, leave jumper installed; if
it is operating at 4 Mbps, remove the jumper.
For PCI Token Ring Interface cards, skip to Step 2.
Interface
Connector
4/16 Mbps
Jumper
Figure 10-90. Token Ring Interface Card (SBus)
542
Interface
Connector
TCP/IP
Connector
Figure 10-91. Token Ring Interface Card (PCI)
2. Install the Token Ring Interface card into its respective SBus or PCI slot. (Refer to
“SBus Card Slot Usage” on page 388 for specific information on how the SBus card
slots are used, or “PCI Card and Video Card Slot Usage” on page 391 for
specific information on how the PCI card slots are used.)
3. Connect the token ring cable (part of the token ring network) to the interface
connector on the Token Ring Interface card.
NOTE
In conjunction with the installation of the Token Ring Interface card, there is a cor-
responding software package that must be installed. For software installation
instructions, refer to:
SBus Card Kit Installation Procedures for 50 Series Processors (B0193SC) for Model 51,
Style A, B, and C processors,
Hardware Kit Installation Procedures for 50 Series Model 51, Style D Processors
(B0400PT) for Model 51, Style D processors, and
Hardware Kit Installation Procedures for 50 Series Model 51, Style E Processors
(B0400PJ) for Model 51, Style E processors.
543
Carrierband LAN Interface Cabling

NOTE
The following notes apply to the Carrierband LAN Interface cabling.
1. This subsection describes how to make cable connections between the coaxial
Carrierband LAN Interface module and the coaxial drop cables. For information on
how to install the Carrierband LAN network (trunk cable, passive taps, and so
forth), refer to Network Cable Systems Installation (B0193UW) and Maintenance
(B0193UX). Refer also to Network Cable Systems Installation and Maintenance for
information on installing coaxial-to-fiber converters.
2. This subsection does not describe how to set up a fiber optic Carrierband LAN
Interface module and fiber optic cabling. Refer to Network Cable Systems Installation
and Maintenance (B0193UW and B0193UX) for information on setting up a fiber
optic LAN.
The Carrierband LAN Interface module (CLI), Foxboro part number P0900NT, connects to the
coaxial Local Area Network (LAN) cable(s) in one of the configurations as shown in Figure 10-92
and Figure 10-93 (non-fault-tolerant cabling), and Figure 10-94 (fault-tolerant cabling).
Carrierband LAN A
Cable (Trunk Cable)*
Drop Cable*
Passive
Tap*
Coax Term. Assembly, P0901XW
Interface Cable
Carrierband
LAN
Nodebus
Interface
(CLI)
* See Network Cable Systems Installation (B0193UW) and
Maintenance (B0193UX).
Figure 10-92. Non-Fault-Tolerant CLI Cabling Configuration – Single LAN
544
Carrierband LAN A
Drop Cable*
Passive
Tap* Coax Term. Assembly, P0901XW
Interface Cable
Carrierband
LAN
Nodebus
Interface
(CLI)
* See Network Cable
Systems Installation
(B0193UW) and Interface Cable
Maintenance
(B0193UX). Coax Term. Assembly, P0901XW
Passive Drop Cable*
Tap*
Carrierband LAN B
Figure 10-93. Non-Fault-Tolerant CLI Cabling Configuration – Dual LAN
Passive Carrierband LAN A

Tap* Cable (Trunk Cable)*
Drop Cable*
Fault- Coax Term. Assembly, P0901XW

Tolerant
Module Interface Cable
Connector
Carrierband Carrierband
LAN LAN
Interface Interface Nodebus
(CLI) (CLI)
* See Network Cable Interface Cable

Systems Installation
Coax Term. Assembly, P0901XW
and Maintenance
documents Drop Cable*
(B0193UW and
B0193UX).
Passive Carrierband LAN B
Tap* Cable (Trunk Cable)*
Figure 10-94. Fault-Tolerant CLI Cabling Configuration
545
Components used in the coaxial LAN cabling schemes include the following:
NOTE
For the fiber optic LAN, refer to Network Cable Systems Planning (B0193UX).
♦ Carrierband LAN cable (coaxial) – interconnects nodes comprising the LAN. Can
consist of two, independent cables (designated A and B) for redundancy.
♦ Passive tap – provides a connection between the Carrierband LAN cable and the drop
cabling.
♦ Drop cable – provides topological isolation of the CLI and associated I/A Series
equipment from the Carrierband LAN cable.
♦ Coax termination assembly – a passive (nonactive) cable interconnecting device.
♦ Interface cable – provides a connection between the drop cable and the CLI.
♦ Coaxial Carrierband LAN interface – provides signal interfacing between the various
nodes in a LAN. The non-fault-tolerant version of the CLI occupies two slots in an
I/A Series mounting structure. The fault-tolerant version occupies four slots.
To make the cable connections, refer to one or more of the following figures as appropriate, and
perform the following steps:
♦ Figure 10-95 on page 547, Non-Fault-Tolerant Carrierband LAN Interface Cabling –
Single LAN (Using DIN Rail)
Single LAN (Using Mounting Plate)
Dual LANs (DIN Rail)
Dual LANs (Using Mounting Plate)
♦ Figure 10-99 on page 549, Fault-Tolerant Carrierband LAN IF Cabling – Dual LANs
(Using DIN Rail)
♦ Figure 10-100 on page 550, Fault-Tolerant Carrierband LAN IF Cabling – Dual
LANs (Using Mounting Plate).
Proceed as follows:
1. Locate the coax termination assembly (or assemblies), Foxboro part number
P0901XW.
2. Mount the coax termination assembly (or assemblies) on a DIN rail or plug connector
mounting plate that you have in your enclosure:
a. If the enclosure uses DIN rails, snap the coax termination assembly (or assem-
blies) onto the DIN rail in close proximity to the CLI.
b. If the enclosure uses plug connector mounting plates, remove the spring clips
from the coax termination assembly (or assemblies) and, using the 6-32 machine
screws provided with the coax termination assembly, mount the assembly (or
assemblies) on the plug connector mounting plate in close proximity to the CLI.
c. Connect a 14 AWG insulated copper wire between the coax termination assembly
(a screw is provided on the assembly for this purpose) and the enclosure earth bus.
546
3. Connect the interface cable(s) between the CLI and the coax termination assembly (or
assemblies).
4. Connect the corresponding drop cable(s) to the other side of the coax termination
assembly (or assemblies).
5. Engage the peripheral connector plugs (on the CLI modules) by inserting the hex
driver tool into the peripheral connector engagement actuator slots and turning
1/2-turn clockwise.
Interface
Cable Type F Connector
P0800KD
A BC D To Trunk Cable Via Passive Tap
*
Drop Cable
P0900JG - 15 m (50 ft)
P0900JH - 30 m (100 ft)
Coax Termination Assembly P0901XW,

Mounted on DIN Rail
Carrierband LAN Interface (CLI),

Non-Fault-Tolerant Version
* See Text for Coax Termination

Assembly Grounding Instructions.
Figure 10-95. Non-Fault-Tolerant Carrierband LAN Interface Cabling – Single LAN

(Using DIN Rail)
547
To Position A
on CLI
Type F Connector
To Trunk Cable
Via Passive Tap
Coax Termination Assembly

* See text for coax termination P0901XW, Mounted on Drop Cable
assembly grounding instructions. Plug Connector P0900JG - 15 m (50 ft)
Mounting Plate P0900JH - 30 m (100 ft)
Figure 10-96. Non-Fault-Tolerant Carrierband LAN Interface Cabling – Single LAN

(Using Mounting Plate)
Interface Cables Type F Connector

P0800KD
To LAN A Trunk
A BC D Cable Via
Passive Tap
*
To LAN B Trunk
Cable Via
Passive Tap
Drop Cables
P0900JG - 15 m (50 ft)
Coax Termination Assembly P0901XW, P0900JH - 30 m (100 ft)
Mounted on DIN Rail
Carrierband LAN Interface (CLI),

Non-Fault-Tolerant Version
* See text for coax termination

assembly grounding
instructions.
Figure 10-97. Non-Fault-Tolerant Carrierband LAN Interface Cabling – Dual LANs (DIN Rail)
548

assembly grounding
instructions.
To Position A
on CLI
To Position D
on CLI
Interface Cables
P0800KD Type F Connector
*
To LAN A Trunk
Cable Via
Coax Termination Assembly P0901XW, Mounted Passive Tap
on Plug Connector Mounting Plate To LAN B Trunk
Cable Via
Drop Cable Passive Tap
P0900JG - 15m (50 ft)
P0900JH - 30m (100 ft)
Figure 10-98. Non-Fault-Tolerant Carrierband LAN Interface Cabling – Dual LANs

(Using Mounting Plate)
Interface Cables Drop Cables

P0800KD P0900JG - 15 m (50 ft)
P0900JH - 30 m (100 ft)
ABCD ABCD
To LAN A Trunk
* Cable Via
Passive Tap
Type F Connectors
CLI CLI
Module Module
A B To LAN B Trunk
* Cable Via
Fault-Tolerant Passive Tap
Carrierband
LAN Interface
(CLI)
Coax Termination Assemblies (2)

* See text for coax
P0901XW, Mounted on DIN Rail
termination assembly
grounding instructions.
Figure 10-99. Fault-Tolerant Carrierband LAN IF Cabling – Dual LANs (Using DIN Rail)
549
To Left Module
Position A Coax Termination Assemblies
on CLIs P0901XW, Mounted on
Right Module Plug Connector
Mounting Plate
Left Module
To
Position D *
on CLIs
Right Module
* Drop Cable
P0900JG, 15 m (50 ft)
P0900JH, 30 m (100 ft)
Interface
Cables To LAN A Trunk
P0800KD Cable Via
Passive Tap
assembly grounding instructions. To LAN B Trunk
Cable Via
Passive Tap
Type F Connector
Figure 10-100. Fault-Tolerant Carrierband LAN IF Cabling – Dual LANs (Using Mounting Plate)
AW51B/AW51C Direct Connection to Fieldbus

If you are connecting an AW51B or AW51C processor to the I/A Series fieldbus, connect the ter-
mination cable assemblies (TCAs) as shown Figure 10-101. To connect brackets and resistors
associated with the TCAs, refer to “Fieldbus and Nodebus Cabling” on page 191. Also refer to
that section for information on connecting Fieldbus Modules.
To connect the AW/WP70, Style A and AW70, Style B processors to the I/A Series fieldbus, refer
to “Installing a PC-FB Card and Connecting to a Fieldbus” on page 359.
550
I/A Series Fieldbus

Interface Card*
P0800DS
AW51B TCA for

OR
Fieldbus B**
OR OR
P0800DS
TCA for
Fieldbus A**
AW51C
*See “SBus Card Slot Usage” in Chapter 9 for information on SBus card slot usage.
**Redundant fieldbus connection shown. Only one TCA

(TCA for Fieldbus A) required if non-redundant.
Figure 10-101. Direct Connection of AW51B or AW51C to Fieldbus
50 Series AW51 Direct Connection to RS-232-C

Process I/O Devices
If you are connecting an AW51B, AW51C, AW51D or AW51E processor to one or more process
I/O devices using the RS-232-C communication protocol, make the connections as shown in
Figure 10-102.
NOTE
For information on selecting protocol (RS-232/RS-423) using jumpers on the
Serial/Parallel Interface SBus card for the AW51B and AW51C, refer to SBus Card
Kit Installation Procedures for 50 Series Processors (B0193SC).
For information on selecting protocol (RS-232/RS-423) using jumpers on the
AW51D or AW51E motherboard, refer to Hardware Kit Installation Procedures for
50 Series Model 51, Style D Processors (B0400PT) or Hardware Kit Installation Proce-
dures for 50 Series Model 51, Style E Processors (B0400PJ), respectively.
551
Serial/Parallel Interface SBus Card** Serial/Parallel

Controller
P7 (P0912SG**)
P0912VN
P2 Cable pinout
AW51B shown below.
P1
or or RS-232-C
P0 Compatible
Device
P0971VA
AW51C Cable Adapter
Typical RS-232-C devices include:
or - Modicon devices
Serial Controller Card - Foxboro Model 760 Controllers
- Serial Allen-Bradley PLC.
0
1
2
3
4 8-Port Control Box Assembly*
AW51D 5
or 6
7
OR
A B P0912VN Cable Pin-Out

TP
<...> 9-Pin Female 9-Pin Male
MII
<...>
NC 1 1 SHIELD
Serial RX 2 2 RX
Controller TX 3 3 TX
Card
PCI166 1
DTR 4 4 DTR
PCI 2
PCI 3
GROUND 5 5 GROUND
PCI 4
DSR 6 6 DSR
AW51E RTS 7 7 RTS
*Refer to the following documents for installation
instructions for the 8-Port Control Box Assembly: CTS 8 8 CTS
- Hardware Kit Installation Procedures 9 NC
for 50 Series Model 51, Style D
Processors (B0400PT) TX: transmitted data DTR: data terminal ready
- Hardware Kit Installation Procedures RX: received data CD: carrier detect
for 50 Series Model 51, Style E RTS: request to send CTS: clear to send
Processors (B0400PJ) DSR: data set ready NC: no connection
**See “SBus Card Slot Usage” in Chapter 9 for information on SBus card slot usage, and “AP51E,
WP51E and AW51E PCI Card Slot Usage” in Chapter 9 for information on PCI card slot
usage.
***Part number P0971SG includes cable and SBus card.
Figure 10-102. Direct Connection of AW51B/AW51C/AW51D/AW51E to
RS-232-C Process I/O Devices
552
Panel Display and Auto/Manual Station Interface

Cabling
The Panel Display and Auto/Manual Station consist of a panel-mounted Panel Display Station
and an optional, hard-wired Auto/Manual Station. The Panel Display Station connects to a Panel
Display Processor (see Note), located in an I/A Series mounting structure, via an extended field-
bus. The Auto/Manual Station connects to the same Panel Display Processor as the Panel Display
Station, but the connection is made via a fieldbus module (FBM22).
NOTE
The Panel Display Processor is actually a Control Processor 30 (P0960AW) and is
labeled as such on its data label. The module assumes its intended function (as
Panel Display Processor) when you insert the appropriate module identifier (letter-
bug set), and the system software initializes the module.
If fiber optic communication is to be used in the cabling configuration, refer to Network Cable
Systems Installation and Maintenance (B0193UW) and Network Systems Cable Planning
(B0193UX) for cable installation instructions.
Associated Foxboro part numbers are:
Panel Display Processor (Control Processor 30) P0960AW
Auto/Manual Interface Module (FBM22) P0900HS
Panel Display Station, 100 V ac P0901AA
Panel Display Station, 120 V ac P0901AB
Panel Display Station, 220 V ac P0901AC
Panel Display Station, 240 V ac P0901AD
Auto/Manual Station P0901AK
Panel Display w/Auto/Manual Station, 100 V ac P0901FA
Panel Display w/Auto/Manual Station, 120 V ac P0901FB
Panel Display w/Auto/Manual Station, 220 V ac P0901FC
Panel Display w/Auto/Manual Station, 240 V ac P0901FD
Three different cabling configurations are possible, depending on whether the Panel Display Pro-
cessor is fault-tolerant (FT) or non-fault-tolerant (NFT), and whether the fieldbus is redundant
(RD) or non-redundant (NRD). The following figures show the Panel Display and Auto/Manual
Station Interface cabling with these configurations:
♦ Figure 10-103 and Figure 10-104 – Panel Display and A/M Station Cabling,
NFT Processor, NRD Fieldbus
NFT Processor, RD Fieldbus
FT Processor, RD Fieldbus.
553
Terminating Fieldbus
TCA TCA
Resistor
Control Fieldbus
Processor Isolator
30/40 Terminating
Resistor
CB
FBMxx FBM22 Panel Panel

(1) (N) Display Display
Station Station
(N+1) (24)
DW or
Plug Plug
Abbreviations:
TCA - Termination Cable Assembly
A/M
Station A/M - Auto/Manual
To/From DW - Discrete Wire Connector
Process To/From
CB - Coupling Block
Device(s) Actuator
Figure 10-103. Panel Display and A/M Station Cabling, NFT Processor, NRD Fieldbus
TCA Terminating
Resistor
Fieldbus
Isolator
FBM22 FBM22
(1) (24)
DW or DW or
Plug Plug Plug Plug
Abbreviations:
A/M A/M TCA - Termination Cable Assembly
Station Station
A/M - Auto/Manual
DW - Discrete-Wire Connector
To/From Actuators CB - Coupling Block
Associated with Panel
Display and A/M Stations
Figure 10-104. Panel Display and A/M Station Cabling, NFT Processor,
NRD Fieldbus (Continued)
554
Fieldbus A
TCA TCA
Fieldbus B
Terminating TCA TCA
Resistors
A B Fieldbus Fieldbus
Isolator Isolator
Control
Processor
30/40
FBM22 Terminating
FBMxx CB CB
(N) Resistors
(1)
Abbreviations:
TCA - Termination Cable DW or Panel Panel
Plug
Assembly Plug Display Display
A/M - Auto/Manual Station Station
(N+1) (24)
DW - Discrete-Wire A/M
Connector To/From Station
Process To/From
CB - Coupling Block
Device(s) Actuator
Figure 10-105. Panel Display and A/M Station Cabling, NFT Processor, RD Fieldbus
TCA Terminating
TCA Resistors
Fieldbus Fieldbus
Isolator Isolator
FBM22 FBM22
(1) (24)
DW or DW or
Plug Plug
Plug Plug
Abbreviations:
TCA - Termination Cable
A/M A/M Assembly
Station Station A/M - Auto/Manual
DW - Discrete-Wire
Connector
To/From Actuators CB - Coupling Block
Figure 10-106. Panel Display and A/M Station Cabling, NFT Processor, RD Fieldbus (Continued)
555
Fieldbus A
TCA TCA
Terminating Fieldbus B
Resistors TCA TCA
Fieldbus Fieldbus
A B A B Isolator Isolator
Control Control
Processor Processor
30/40 30/40
Terminating
FBMxx FBM22 CB CB
Resistors
(1) (N)
Abbreviations:
TCA - Termination Cable Plug DW or Panel Panel
Assembly Plug Display Display
A/M - Auto/Manual Station Station
DW - Discrete-Wire (N+1) (24)
Connector A/M
To/From
CB - Coupling Block Station
Process To/From
Device(s) Actuator
Figure 10-107. Panel Display and A/M Station Cabling, FT Processor, RD Fieldbus
TCA Terminating
TCA Resistors
Fieldbus Fieldbus
Isolator Isolator
FBM22 FBM22
(1) (24)
DW or DW or Abbreviations:
Plug Plug Plug
Plug TCA - Termination Cable
Assembly
A/M - Auto/Manual
A/M A/M
Station Station DW - Discrete-Wire
Connector
CB - Coupling Block
To/From Actuators
Figure 10-108. Panel Display and A/M Station Cabling, FT Processor, RD Fieldbus (Continued)
556
Panel Display and A/M Station Fieldbus Cabling

Figure 10-109 shows a typical fieldbus cabling configuration (between enclosures). The fieldbus
cables, termination assemblies, isolators, and cabling connections are identical to those used for
the remote fieldbus extension.
! CAUTION
In order for the Panel Display Stations to operate properly, the proper fieldbus con-
nections must be made at the isolators (Fieldbus A to isolator A, and Fieldbus B to
isolator B.) If the isolators are installed in the lower section of the mounting struc-
ture, the isolator A/B order is reversed (isolator B is on top and isolator A is on the
bottom), and the fieldbus connections must be made accordingly.
(Fieldbus A) Wht/Blk (TB1-1) DIN Blk

Rail
Panel Display Station Wht/Brn (TB1-2) Wht
Interface Cable
Wht/Red (TB1-3) Sh
P0901FT
Fieldbus A
Coupling 3 2 1 1 2 3 TB1
Blocks
X0175FZ 3 2 1 1 2 3 TB2
(Fieldbus B) Wht/Orn (TB2-3) Sh Fieldbus B
Wht/Grn (TB2-2) Wht
Wht/Yel (TB2-1) Blk
Fieldbus Terminators
110 ohm Twinaxial
P0901XT (Inserted
Cable P0170GF,
at Factory)
P0170GG, or To Panel Display
To use lower M.S. bus, Equivalent Station(s)
Mounting Structure Bus use cable P0902RV in
(typical end view) place of P0901FT.
Figure 10-109. Interenclosure Cabling For Panel Display Stations
Panel Display Station Cabling

Figure 10-110 shows part of a redundant cable connection of display stations. The coupling block
connections are from TB1 and TB2 shown in Figure 10-109. [The non-redundant version is sim-
ilar, except that Fieldbus B is not used, and only one coupling block (TB1) is needed.] The Panel
Display Station interface cable, the coupling blocks, and a wiring instruction sheet are included as
a kit, Foxboro part number P0902NX.
To perform the Panel Display Station cabling, snap the coupling block(s) (part number
X0175FC) in place on the DIN rail, and make the wire connections.
557
Terminating
Resistors*(120W)
L1 L2/N Gnd L1 L2/N Gnd
Blk Blk
Fieldbus A Wht Wht
FB A FB A FB A FB A
Sh F+ F+ Sh
F+ F+
F- F- F- F-
From S S S S
Coupling
Blocks F+ F+ F+ F+
F- F- F- F-
S S S S
Sh Sh
Fieldbus B FB B FB B FB B FB B
Wht Wht
Blk Blk
Panel Display Panel Display
Station 1 Station 2
* Or connection to another panel display station.
Figure 10-110. Panel Display Station Cable Connections
Auto/Manual Station Cabling

Auto/Manual Station cabling (and associated field wiring) occurs using either of two types of
cable termination: combination plug/discrete wire termination, or plug termination. Refer to
Figure 10-111, Figure 10-112, or Figure 10-113 as appropriate for your system configuration and
perform the following steps:
1. Attach the discrete wire block and/or plug connector to a DIN rail or plug connector
mounting plate in the field termination area of the enclosure. (The discrete wire block
snaps onto the DIN rail and is secured by a mounting screw, while the plug connector
block fastens to the mounting plate by means of two screws provided.)
NOTE
If the plug/discrete wire termination assembly is to be used in an enclosure designed
to accommodate only plug connectors, a DIN rail must be added in the field termi-
nation area to mount the discrete wire block. If the plug/discrete-wire termination
assembly is to be used in an enclosure designed to accommodate only discrete wire
connectors, the plug connector may be allowed to hang free in the field termination
area (or it may be secured, by means of cable ties, to any available tie point).
2. Plug the termination connector onto the Fieldbus Module, and secure by tightening
screw.
3. Plug the Auto/Manual Station interface cable into the Auto/Manual Station.
4. Make the connections between the two cable assemblies.
558
5. Make the field wiring connections (to the FBM22 connection block or plug connec-
tor) in accordance with the tabular information.
6. Make up a module identifier from letterbugs and plug it into the Fieldbus Module
termination connector.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 6 for each Auto/Manual Station installed.
FBM22 Termination Assembly, OUT +

Plug/Discrete Wire Type P0900JB Field Cable
OUT - (user-supplied)
IN +
IN - To/From
PS Actuator
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 L+
Auto/Manual Station
L- (rear view)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
P1
A/M Station,
Interface Cable,
P0901
Figure 10-111. A/M Station Cabling Using Plug/Discrete Wire Termination
A/M Station
Interface Cable
Part Numbers
Cable Length Length

Part No. (Meters) (Feet)
P0901AX 15 50
P0901AY 30 100
P0901AJ 45 150
P0901BU 60 200
P0901BX 150 500
P0901BY 300 1000
Figure 10-112. A/M Station Cables/Length
559
FBM22 Termination Assembly, Auto/Manual Station

Plug Connector Type P0900JL (Rear View)
Burndy Connector
MSD34PM118 or
Equivalent
P1 To/From Actuator
Cable
(user-supplied)
Cable Length Length

Part No. (Meters) (Feet)
P2 P0901AX 15 50
P0901AY 30 100
P0901AJ 45 150
P0901BU 60 200
A/M Station P0901BX 150 500
Interface Cable, P0901BY 300 1000
P0901 (See table)
Figure 10-113. A/M Station Cabling Using Plug Connector Termination
Auto/Manual Station Grounding

It is sometimes necessary to separate the earth ground associated with the panel in which the Dis-
play Station is installed from the safety ground associated with the isolated ac mains power input.
This has been accomplished in the past with a custom modification of the Display Station (ECEP
13406). It is now convenient to make the modification at the time of installation if it is necessary.
Instructions are provided below.
! WARNING
Presently produced display units and housings are backward compatible with stan-
dard units produced in the past but display units and housings which were modi-
fied per ECEP-13406 must not be intermixed with these units or housings nor
with older unmodified units or housings. In addition, once units and housings are
modified as described below, they must not be mixed with unmodified units and
housings. Failure to heed this warning may interrupt the case grounding and thus
present a safety hazard.
To separate the case ground from the isolated electrical earth ground, two green wires must be
removed, and an external ground wire (supplied by the you, the user) must be added.
! WARNING
Do not remove any green/yellow wires!
560
1. Extract the Display Unit from its housing. Separate the housing’s back panel from its
sleeve (by removing the four screws) to access the wiring more easily. Locate and clip
out the green wire which connects the ground connection of the ac terminal block to
the screw connection on the back panel’s sheet metal. Reinstall the back panel to the
housing sleeve with the four screws removed above.
2. Looking at the rear of the Display Unit, locate and clip out the green wire which con-
nects the right-most station of the power terminal block to the screw connection on
the transformer bracket’s sheet metal.
3. Once the housing is installed in the panel, install a suitable grounding wire from the
ground stud on the rear lip at the bottom of the housing to the panel’s earth ground
connection point.
Instrument Gateway Cabling

The Instrument Gateway is a station on the I/A Series network which provides for connection of
Foxboro Model 760 and/or 761 Series SINGLE STATION MICRO™ Controllers.
NOTE
The Instrument Gateway is labeled Communication Processor 15, P/N P0902DZ
or P0911AC on its data label. The module assumes its intended function when you
The Instrument Gateway communicates with the controllers via an RS-232 data link, which is
converted to an RS-485 data link by a Foxboro Model F6501A, RS-232/RS-485 converter. A sin-
gle Instrument Gateway station supports up to 60 controllers. (The gateway has two RS-232
ports. Each port supports 30 controllers via an RS-232/RS-485 converter.)
2. Locate cable assembly P0800AZ and route the cable through the enclosure as
described in “Peripheral Cable Routing within Enclosures” on page 343.
3. Connect peripheral connector jack of cable P0800AZ to the appropriate position in
the mounting structure containing the Instrument Gateway.
4. Locate cable P0800KV and connect one end to the RS-232/RS-485 converter.
5. Route the other end of the cable to the bottom of the I/A Series enclosure, and con-
nect it to cable P0800AZ.
6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for the second RS-232/RS-485 converter, if implemented.
7. Connect the 760/761 controllers to the RS-232/RS-485 converter(s) as described in
MI 018-835, 760 and 761 Series SINGLE STATION MICRO Controllers, Installation.
8. Engage the peripheral connector plug (on the Instrument Gateway) by inserting the
hex driver tool into the peripheral connector engagement actuator slot (on the front of
561
Cable
Cable
A B C D P0800AZ P0800KV
(2)
*
RS-232/RS-485 Up to 30 Model 760/761
Converters Controllers (Refer to
(Foxboro Model MI 018-835 for connections.)
F6501A)
Instrument Gateway
(Communications Cable
Processor 15) P0800KV
*
* See MI 018-835 for Up to 30 Model 760/761
cable types used. Controllers (refer to
MI 018-835 for connections.)
Figure 10-114. Instrument Gateway Cabling
Hydrostatic Tank Gauge Interface Cabling

The Hydrostatic Tank Gauge (HTG) interface consists of a Tank Processor 10 (TP10) (see note);
one or more Hydrostatic Interface Units (HIUs), Model No. 880PFC; and may include one or
more Fieldbus Modules. The HIUs and FBMs connect to the TP10, located in the I/A Series
mounting structure, via an extended fieldbus.
NOTE
The Tank Processor 10 is labeled “Control Processor 10, P/N P0400VR” on its data
label. The module assumes its intended function (as TP10) when you insert the
appropriate module identifier (letterbug set), and the system software initializes the
module.
If fiber optic communication is to be used in the cabling configuration, refer to Network Cable
Systems Installation and Maintenance (B0193UW) and Network Cable Systems Planning
(B0193UX) for cable installation instructions.
Fieldbus Modules that can be used with the TP10 are: FBM09A to FBM09D, FBM10, FBM14A
to FBM14D, and FBM15.
Two cabling configurations are possible, depending on whether the fieldbus is redundant or non-
redundant. Figure 10-115 and Figure 10-116 show the HTG interface cabling with both of these
fieldbus configurations.
562
NOTE
The information herein pertains only to signal cabling between the TP10 and the
HIU(s). For installation information on the HIU and its associated pressure and
temperature sensors, refer to MI 020-064, TankExpert Hydrostatic Gauging and
Inventory Management System.
Terminating Terminating
Resistor Fieldbus Resistor
TCA TCA
HIU HIU Fieldbus

Tank (1) (12) Isolator
Processor
10
(TP10)
FBMxx FBMxx
(1) (12)
From Tank
Abbreviations: Pressure and
TCA - Termination Cable Assembly Temperature
Sensors
HIU - Hydrostatic Interface Unit
Contact/dc I/O
(Tank Processor)
Signal (Used
FBM - Fieldbus Module for Alarm Functions
HTG - Hydrostatic Tank Gauging Associated with HTG)
Figure 10-115. HTG IF Cabling with Non-Redundant Fieldbus
Terminating
Fieldbus A Resistors
TCA TCA
Fieldbus B
TCA TCA
Terminating
Resistors A B Fieldbus Fieldbus
HIU HIU
(1) (12) Isolator Isolator
Tank
Processor
10
(TP10)
FBMxx FBMxx
(1) (12)
Abbreviations:
TCA - Termination Cable Assembly
HIU - Hydrostatic Interface Unit
(Tank Processor) From Tank Contact/dc I/O
Pressure and Signal (used
FBM - Fieldbus Module Temperature for Alarm Functions
HTG - Hydrostatic Tank Gauging Sensors Associated with HTG)
Figure 10-116. HTG IF Cabling with Redundant Fieldbus
563
Tank Processor 10 Fieldbus Cable Connections

Fieldbus cable connections to the TP10 are identical to those made to the non-fault-tolerant Con-
trol Processor, as described in the section on “Remote Fieldbus Extension, Cable Connections” on
page 200.
Hydrostatic Interface Unit Fieldbus Cable Connections

Fieldbus cable connections are made within the HIU fieldbus termination box, as shown in
Figure 10-117, Figure 10-118, and Figure 10-119. Make the connections for the applicable field-
bus configuration (redundant or non-redundant).
HIU Main
Enclosure
(typical)
HIU Fieldbus
Termination Box
Fieldbus to
Fieldbus from Next HIU or FBI
TP10, HIU, or FBI (if applicable)
Figure 10-117. HIU Fieldbus Cabling Connections
Bus B Bus A
Out In Out * In
S F- F+ S F- F+ S F- F+ S F- F+
Black
White
Shield
Fieldbus from TP10,

Fieldbus
HIU, or FBI
to Next HIU
or FBI
Figure 10-118. HIU Fieldbus Termination Box Wiring – Non-Redundant Fieldbus Configuration
564
Bus B Bus A
Out * In Out * In
S F- F+ S F- F+ S F- F+ S F- F+
Black Black
White White
Shield Shield
Fieldbus A
Fieldbus B Fieldbus A Fieldbus B

Fieldbus from TP10,
HIU, or FBI Fieldbus
to Next HIU
or FBI
* If this HIU is the last device on the Fieldbus, a terminating resistor (110 ohm,
1/4 W) must be placed between out terminals F+ and F-.
Figure 10-119. HIU Fieldbus Termination Box Wiring – Redundant Fieldbus Configuration
Mass Flowmeter Interface Cabling

The I/A Series Mass Flowmeter consists of a Model CFT10 Mass Flow Transmitter and a Model
CFS10 Mass Flowtube. The Mass Flow Transmitter connects to an I/A Series system via an
extended (remote) fieldbus and a control processor module. Two cabling configurations are possi-
ble, depending on whether the Fieldbus is non-redundant or redundant. Figure 10-120 and
Figure 10-121 show these configurations, respectively.
Connections between the fieldbus and the control processor are described in the section “Remote
Fieldbus Extension, Cable Connections” on page 200. Connections between the Mass Flow
Transmitter and the fieldbus are described in MI 019-121, Mass Flowmeter, Model CFT10 Mass
Flow Transmitter, Installation and Maintenance.
NOTE
If fiber optic communication is to be used in the cabling configuration, refer to Net-
work Cable Systems Installation and Maintenance (B0193UW) for cable installation
instructions.
565
Terminating Terminating
Fieldbus
Resistor TCA TCA Resistor
CFT10 CFT10 Fieldbus

Control Mass Flow Mass Flow Isolator
Processor Transmitter Transmitter
(1) (12)
FBMxx FBMxx
(1) (12)
Abbreviations:
TCA - Termination Cable To/From
Assembly Mass Flowtubes To/From
FBM - Fieldbus Module Process Devices
Figure 10-120. Mass Flowmeter Interface Cabling with Non-Redundant Fieldbus
Fieldbus A Terminating
TCA TCA Resistors
Fieldbus B
TCA TCA
Terminating
Resistors A B Fieldbus Fieldbus
CFT10 CFT10 Isolator Isolator
Control Mass Flow Mass Flow
Processor* Transmitter Transmitter
(1) (12)
FBMxx FBMxx
(1) (12)
Abbreviations:
TCA - Termination Cable To/From
Assembly Mass Flowtubes
To/From
FBM - Fieldbus Module Process Devices
* May be configured fault-tolerant.
Figure 10-121. Mass Flowmeter Interface Cabling with Redundant Fieldbus
566
Modicon Gateway 15 Cabling

The Modicon Gateway 15 is a station on an I/A Series network that connects Modicon program-
mable controllers to the I/A Series network via a standard RS-232-C data link. (Refer to the
enclosure information developed during the site planning phase to determine whether your instal-
lation uses a Modicon Gateway.)
NOTE
The Modicon Gateway is labeled Communication Processor 15, P/N P0902DZ or
P0911AC on its data label. The module assumes its intended function (as Modicon
Gateway) when you insert the appropriate identifier (letterbug set), and the system
software initializes the module.
Figure 10-122 and Figure 10-123 illustrate the Modicon Gateway cable connections. This cabling
is implemented in either of two configurations: Modbus network, or direct. The Modbus network
configuration provides connection to up to eight programmable controllers (programmable con-
trollers), while the direct configuration provides connection to a single programmable controller.
NOTE
Any of the cabling configurations shown in the next two figures can be made redun-
dant by using symmetrical cabling and by assigning two symmetrical (identical)
device addresses within each programmable processor. Figure 10-123 shows a typi-
cal redundant configuration.
P0800AZ P0901PF J478 or 878

Modicon Modem
Gateway
For Optional Redundancy J478/878 J478/878
(See Text) Modem Modem
(Up to 8)
Modbus Network Configuration PC* 584, 884, PC* 584, 884,

or 984 or 984
P0800AZ P0901SE W192**

PC* 584
Modicon
Gateway
P0911AJ
PC* 984-380 or 984-680
For Optional
Redundancy P0911AK
PC* 884, 984A, or 984B
(see text)
Any one cable
connects to P0800AZ. Direct Configuration
* Programmable Controller
** Modicon W192 Cable (Supplied by User)
Figure 10-122. Modicon Gateway 15 Cabling (Modbus and Direct Configurations)
567
P0800AZ P0901PF Modbus

Modem
Modem Modem
Modicon Programmable Programmable

Gateway Controller* Controller*
Modem Modem
P0800AZ P0901PF
Modem
Modbus
* Both ports of the programmable controller must have the same address.
Figure 10-123. Modicon Gateway 15 Cabling (Typical Redundant Configuration)
3. Connect the peripheral connector jack of cable P0800AZ to the appropriate position
in the mounting structure containing the Modicon gateway.
4. If the Modbus network cabling configuration is to be employed:
a. Locate cable P0901PF and connect one end to the modem.
b. Route the other end of the cable to the bottom of the I/A Series enclosure, and
connect it to the connector on cable P0800AZ.
NOTE
Cable assembly P0901PF must be at revision D (or later) in order for the Gateway
to communicate with the Modbus J478 modem.
5. If the direct cabling configuration is to be employed:

a. Locate cable P0901SE and connect one end to the programmable controller or
slave interface.
b. Route the other end of the cable to the bottom of the I/A Series enclosure, and
connect it to the connector on cable P0800AZ.
6. Engage the peripheral connector plug (on the Modicon Gateway) by inserting the hex
module) and turning 1/2-turn clockwise.
568
To J478 or J878 Modem

P0800AZ P0901PF
For Optional Redundancy (See Text)
P0800AZ
ABCD NOTE: Any one cable may
connect to P0800AZ.
To Modicon Cable W192

P0901SE (associated with PC 584)
To Programmable
P0911AJ Controller 984-380 or
984-680
To Programmable
P0911AK Controller 884, 984A,
Modicon Gateway
or 984B
(Communications
Processor 15)
Figure 10-124. Modicon Gateway Cabling Connections
Allen-Bradley Data Highway Gateway 15 Cabling

The Allen-Bradley Data Highway Gateway 15 (ABDH Gateway), Foxboro part number
P0400VP, is a station on the I/A Series network which provides for connection of the
Allen-Bradley Data Highway (and its associated programmable logic controllers) to the I/A Series
network via a standard RS-232-C data link. (Refer to the enclosure information developed during
the site planning phase to determine whether your installation uses an ABDH Gateway.)
NOTE
The Allen-Bradley Data Highway Gateway is labeled Communication Processor 15,
P/N P0902DZ or P0911AC on its data label. The module assumes its intended
function (as ABDH Gateway) when you insert the appropriate module identifier
(letterbug set), and the system software initializes the module.
Figure 10-125 and Figure 10-126 show the ABDH Gateway cable connections; in a non-
redundant or redundant configuration, respectively.
569
P0800KR* or
Allen-Bradley AB 1771-KE, KF
P0800AZ P0901PE**
Data Highway Communications
Gateway Module
Any one cable P0800KS* or

AB 1770-KF2
connects to P0901SD** To
Communications
P0800AZ. ABDH
Module
or
ABDH +
* 6 m (20 ft) Cable
P0800KT* or
** 12 m (40 ft) Cable AB 1779-KFL
P0800KU**
Communications
Module
Figure 10-125. AB Gateway 15 Cabling (Non-Redundant) Functional Diagram
Any one cable P0800KT* or P0800KU**

connects to
P0800AZ. P0800KS* or P0901SD**
Allen-
Bradley P0800AZ P0800KR* or P0901PE**
Data
Highway P0800KR* or
Gateway P0800AZ P0901PE** AB 1771-KE, KF AB 1771-KE, KF
Communications Communications
Module Module
Any one cable P0800KS* or

AB 1770-KF2 AB 1770-KF2
connects to P0901SD**
Communications Communications
P0800AZ. Module Module
P0800KT* or AB 1779-KFL AB 1779-KFL

P0800KU** Communications Communications
Module Module
* 6 m (20 ft) Cable
** 12 m (40 ft) Cable ABDH or
ABDH +
Figure 10-126. AB Gateway 15 Cabling (Redundant) Functional Diagram
Figure 10-127 and Figure 10-128 show the cable connections for the non-redundant and redun-
dant configurations. To make the cable connections, refer to the appropriate figure and perform
the following steps.
570
NOTE
When installing Allen-Bradley Data Highways, it is imperative to adhere to the
Allen-Bradley installation guidelines. Failure to do so may cause errors when com-
municating to PLCs from a gateway. In particular, Allen-Bradley Data Highway 2
with multiple 1779-KFL communication adapters requires specific data highway
cabling practices for error-free operation.

ceiver (P0971LJ) must be set to the off/disabled position. Refer to the user’s guide
packaged with the unit for specific instructions regarding this switch setting.
3. Locate cable(s) P0800AZ and route the cable(s) through the enclosure as described in
the section on “Peripheral Cable Routing within Enclosures” on page 343.
4. Connect peripheral connector jack of cable P0800AZ to the appropriate position in
the mounting structure containing the ABDH Gateway.
5. Locate the appropriate communication cable(s) and connect one end to the appropri-
ate Allen-Bradley communication module. (Note that the communication cables are
available in two lengths, 20 ft and 40 ft.)
6. Route other end of the cable(s) to the bottom of the I/A Series enclosure, and connect
to cable(s) P0800AZ.
7. Engage the peripheral connector plug(s) (on the ABDH Gateway) by inserting the
hex driver tool into the peripheral connector engagement actuator slot (on the front of
P0800AZ P0800KR* or P0901PE** To AB 1771-KE, KF

P0800KS* or P0901SD**
To AB 1770-KF2
ABCD P0800KT* or P0800KU**
To AB 1779- KFL
Any one cable connects to P0800AZ.
Allen-Bradley Data
Highway Gateway
(Communications
Processor 15)
* 6 m (20 ft) Cable

** 12 m (40 ft) Cable
Figure 10-127. AB Gateway 15 Non-Redundant Cabling Configuration
571
P0800AZ P0800KR* or P0901PE**

To AB 1771-KE, KF
P0800KS* or P0901SD**
To AB 1770-KF2
P0800KT* or P0800KU**
A BC D To AB 1779- KFL
P0800KR* or P0901PE**
To AB 1771-KE, KF
P0800AZ
P0800KS* or P0901SD**
To AB 1770-KF2
P0800KT* or P0800KU**
To AB 1779- KFL
Allen-Bradley
Data Highway Gateway
(Communications Processor 15)
* 6 m (20 ft) Cable
** 12 m (40 ft) Cable
Figure 10-128. AB Gateway 15 Redundant Cabling Configuration
Device Integrator Cabling

The Device Integrator is a station on the I/A Series network that allows you to connect I/A Series
equipment with various non I/A Series devices for collecting and storing data from those devices.
NOTE
The Device Integrator is labeled Communication Processor 15, P/N P0902DZ or
P0911AC on its data label. The module assumes its intended function when you
Up to four asynchronous RS-232-C compatible devices can be interfaced via the Device Integra-
tor. Typical devices fall into three categories: receive-only devices (gas turbines, data collectors,
sequence of events monitors), scanned devices (gas analyzers), and read/write devices (paper
machine gauges, programmable logic controllers).
An RS-232-C XPE-DTE cable, Foxboro Part Number P0800AZ, is associated with the Device
Integrator for connection to a compatible RS-232-C cable associated with the device. The
P0800AZ cable includes a 25-pin D-type male connector for mating with a compatible female
connector on the user-supplied device cable. Pin assignments for the P0800AZ cable connector
are shown in Table 10-12.
572
Table 10-12. Pin Assignments for P0800AZ Cable Connector
Pin Signal To
2 Transmit Data (TXD) Device
3 Receive Data (RDX) Gateway
4 Request to Send (RTS) Device
5 Clear to Send (CTS) Gateway
7 Common Ground ------
8 Data Carrier Detect (DCD) Gateway
20 Data Terminal Ready (DTR) Device
To perform the Device Integrator cabling, refer to Figure 10-129 and perform the following steps:
3. Connect the peripheral connector jack of cable P0800AZ to the appropriate position
in the mounting structure containing the Device Integrator.
4. Locate the user-supplied cable associated with the device and connect one end to the
device.
5. Route the other end of the cable to the bottom of the I/A Series enclosure, and con-
nect it to the connector on cable P0800AZ.
6. Engage the peripheral connector plug (on the Device Integrator module) by inserting
the hex driver tool into the peripheral connector engagement actuator slot (on the
front of the module) and turning 1/2-turn clockwise.
573
Cable
P0800AZ To
Non I/A Series
A BC D RS-232-C Compatible
Device
User-Supplied
Cable

Device Integrator
(Communications Processor 15)
Figure 10-129. Device Integrator Cabling
Allen-Bradley Station Cabling

The Allen-Bradley Station connects to the I/A Series nodebus through either an I/A Series Dual
Nodebus Interface (DNBI) or Dual Nodebus Extender (DNBX) module.
DNBI to Allen-Bradley Station Cabling

Figure 10-130 shows the DNBI module connected to internal 183 cm (6 ft) RS-423 and AUI
cables within the enclosure. These internal cables then connect to their respective external cables
to the A-B™ Station. The external cables can be configured with three different lengths as shown
in Figure 10-130.
To install the cables, refer to Figure 10-130 and perform the following steps:
2. Connect one end of AUI P0900ZU/ZV/ZW cable to the Ethernet port on the A-B
Station.
3. Connect the opposite end of AUI cable P0900ZU/ZV/ZW to cable P0970BM.
4. Connect peripheral connector jack of cable P0970BM to the Channel D position in
the mounting structure containing the Dual Nodebus Interface.
5. Connect one end of the RS-423 cable P0912 DJ/DK/DL into the A-B Station
RS-423 25-pin port.
6. Connect the ground wire on the RS-423 cable to the A-B Station chassis.
7. Connect the opposite end of RS-423 cable to cable P0970BP.
574
8. Connect peripheral connector jack of cable P0970BP to the Channel A position in

the mounting structure containing the Dual Nodebus Interface.
9. Engage the top peripheral connector plug (on the Dual Nodebus Interface module) by
ing (on the front of the module, see Figure 10-130) and turning 1/2-turn clockwise.
Internal RS-423
P0970BP 183 cm (6 ft) Ground Wire
F M M F
J2 RS-423 Port
External RS-423 (25 Pin)
Internal AUI P0912DJ - 3.05 m (10 ft)
A B CD P0970BM P0912DK - 15.24 m (50 ft)
183 cm (6 ft) P0912DL - 47.72 m (150 ft)
Allen-Bradley
Station
Connector
Actuator M F M F
Opening Ethernet Port
(15 Pin)
External AUI
P0900ZU - 3.05 m (10 ft)
P0900ZV - 15.24 m (50 ft)
Dual Nodebus P0900ZW - 47.72 m (150 ft)
Interface
P0970BC
Figure 10-130. Allen-Bradley Station to DNBI Cabling
DNBX to Allen-Bradley Station Cabling

Figure 10-131 shows the DNBX module, the RS-423, Ethernet transceiver and AUI cabling con-
nected to the A-B Station.
NOTE
The DNBX extender is used instead of a DNBI in installations where the nodebus
must be longer than 45 m (150 ft). For DNBX installations, an RS-423 cable is
made on-site as described in the drawing 10122CS supplied with the cable.
Refer to Figure 10-131 and perform the following steps.

ceiver (P0971LJ) must be set to the off/disabled position. Refer to the user’s guide
packaged with the unit for specific instructions regarding this switch setting.
3. Mount the Ethernet transceiver (P0970LJ) on a DIN rail in the enclosure wiring area
using the hardware provided.
575
4. Connect one end of AUI cable P0970LK or P0970XF to the Ethernet port on the
processor, and connect the other end to the Ethernet transceiver.
5. Place the 50 ohm terminator (P0151RC), packaged with the Ethernet transceiver, on
one of the Ethernet transceiver cable connectors.
6. Using the cable manufacturer’s instructions, fashion an Ethernet coaxial cable of
appropriate length.
7. Mount the bracket kit (P0902BL) that is part of the P0800KE coaxial cable assembly.
8. Connect one end of the Ethernet coaxial cable to the Ethernet transceiver and the
other end to the bracket kit (P0902BL).
9. Connect the peripheral connector jack of cable P0800KE to the appropriate position
(channel A-D) in the mounting structure containing the DNBX module. The correct
position is shown in the information developed during the site planning phase.
10. Using the cable manufacturer’s instructions, and referring to Foxboro drawing num-
ber 10122CS supplied with the cable, fashion an RS-423 cable of appropriate length.
11. Connect one end of the RS-423 cable to the A-B Station RS-423 port connector, and
connect the other end to cable P0970BP.
12. Connect the opposite end of the RS-423 cable to cable P0970BP.
13. Connect the peripheral connector jack of cable P0970BP to the Channel A position
in the mounting structure containing the DNBX module.
clockwise.
576
External RS-423
Up to 121.9 m (400 ft)
Refer to drawing 10122CS,
supplied with cable, for
wiring data.
P0970BP
F M M F
183 cm (6 ft)
J2 RS-423 Port
Internal Coaxial Ground (25 Pin)
A B CD P0800KE Wire
45.75 cm (1.5 ft)
Terminator within DNBX
Bracket Kit Allen-Bradley
P0902BL Station
Ethernet Transceiver *
Connector
P0970LJ
Actuator FM M F
Opening Ethernet Port
(15 Pin)
N-Type
Connector
Cabletron AUI Cable

Dual Nodebus P0970LK
ST-500 M F
Interface Extender 1 m (39.37 in)
P0970EJ
Coaxial Cable Options M F FM
Up to 121.9 m (400 ft)
Terminator
10Base5 (Ethernet)
P0151RC
or
Coaxial Cable RG-58 (ThinNet)
Up to 150 m (492.12 ft)
MF M M MF
Coaxial Adapter P0176ZZ (BNC Jack to N-Type Plug)
* The internal SQE switch is normally set to off/disabled to prevent collisions.
Figure 10-131. Allen-Bradley Station to DNBX Cabling
577
578
11. Initial Power-Up Procedures
This chapter describes the final checks which must be approved before the I/A Series equipment
can be powered up.
The initial power-up procedures consist of the following operations:
♦ Pre-power switchon checks
♦ Connecting the batteries in the memory backup power modules (if applicable)
♦ System power switchon
♦ System operational checks.
These procedures are presented in the following sections.
NOTE
Before performing the following procedures, review “Installation Checklist” on
page 587.
Pre-Power Switchon Checks

Before applying main power, perform the following:
1. Check that main power at the power distribution panel is set to off.
2. Set the power on/off switch(es) (circuit breakers) in each enclosure to the off (0)
position.
3. Check that all peripheral devices (printers, and so forth) are plugged into the appro-
priate power outlets and that all equipment switches are set to off (or to the position
specified in the applicable manufacturer’s manual).
4. Check that the power switch on the Application Processor 50/51, Workstation Proces-
sor 50/51/70, and/or Application Workstation 50/51/70 and all associated data stor-
age devices are set to the off (0) position.
5. Load paper into printer(s) and/or color copier(s) according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
6. For applicable enclosures (see “Over-Temperature Sensor Wiring” on page 29) ensure
that an over-temperature sensor is properly installed.
579
B0193AC – Rev U 11. Initial Power-Up Procedures
System Power Switchon

! CAUTION
For non-redundant IE16 and IE32 enclosure power configurations, when powering
the enclosure on, turn on the primary circuit breaker(s) before turning on the
backup breaker(s). (Refer to “Industrial Enclosure 16, Power Connections” on
page 66 and “Industrial Enclosure 32, Power Connections” on page 69.) Similarly,
when powering the enclosure down, turn off the backup breaker first. These
sequences eliminate the condition of overstressing the IPM03(A or D) as it attempts
to power a whole cell of modules. Failure to follow these power up/down sequences
could result in damage to the IPM03(A or D).
To power up the system:

1. Perform the pre-power switchon checks listed above.
2. Switch on the main power at the power distribution panel.
3. Observing the CAUTION statement at the beginning of this section, set the power
on/off switch(es) (circuit breakers) in each enclosure to the on (1) position.
4. Set the power on/off switch on the AP50/51, WP50/51/70, and/or AW50/51/70 and
all associated data storage devices to the on (1) position.
5. Perform the battery connection procedure and system operational checks on each
enclosure (see below).
6. Switch on power to each peripheral device (printer, display, color copier, and so forth).
7. Close all equipment doors and replace all panels.
NOTE
After a power cycle of a 50 Series station (not including the GCIO) the keyboard
may remain off-line. Cycling power to the GCIO and selecting a key corrects this.
580
11. Initial Power-Up Procedures B0193AC – Rev U
Battery Connection in Memory Backup Power

Module IPM06(A or D)
Perform the following steps if your installation contains memory backup power modules.
Pb
ATTENTION:
The product you have purchased contains a rechargeable battery.
The battery is recyclable. At the end of its useful life, under various state
and local laws, it may be illegal to dispose of this battery into the municipal
waste stream. Check with your local solid waste officials for details in
your area for recycling options or proper disposal methods.
To prevent power drain, your power module is shipped with its internal battery disconnected.
The battery must be connected before the memory battery backup feature can be utilized.
NOTE
Complete battery replacement procedures are provided in Chapter 3 of System
Maintenance (B0193AD).
! CAUTION
After battery is connected, any removal of power from the enclosure – intentional or
otherwise – will allow the battery to drain. Also, failure to keep a battery in a
charged condition will degrade battery life. If a battery [or IPM06(A or D) module
containing the battery] is not to be placed into service immediately, the battery
must be recharged every four months. Refer to System Maintenance (B0193AD) for
instructions on how to charge/recharge and replace the batteries.
To connect the battery, proceed as follows:

1. Determine if your installation contains any IPM06(A or D) or memory backup power
modules. The memory backup power modules are resident in the following enclosures
when the enclosures are powered by non-redundant main power (that is, backup and
battery backup power configurations):
♦ Field Enclosures 4 and 8
♦ 1x8 Mounting Structure.
581
a. An alternate method to determine if your installation contains memory battery

backup power modules is to refer to the information developed during the site
planning phase.
b. The modules are not present in enclosures having redundant (that is, nonstop)
main power configurations.
c. An enclosure may contain several memory backup power modules.
2. Locate the memory backup power module(s) in the mounting structure or enclosure
as follows:
a. Starting with the right-most power module in the lower half of the mounting
structure, loosen the power module’s retaining screws and slide the power module
part way out (Figure 11-1).
b. Read the label attached to the side of the power module to determine the power
module type. If it is not a Memory Backup Power Module IPM06(A or D), repo-
sition the module back into its slot.
c. Repeat Steps a and b for the remaining power modules in the lower half of the
mounting structure.
3. Locate the access door at the right side of the memory backup power module.
4. Referring to Figure 11-2, insert the tip of a small flathead screwdriver into the space at
the top center of the door. Twist the blade until the door is released from the module.
5. Locate the battery lead and the battery terminal at the battery. The terminal may be
covered by a small piece of tape.
6. Referring to Figure 11-3, connect the lead to the terminal.
7. Replace the door, snapping it into position so that it is securely attached to the
module.
8. Reposition the power module back into its original slot.
9. Use the hex driver tool to secure the module into its slot.
10. Repeat Steps 2 through 9 for each mounting structure in your system.
NOTE
When the memory backup power module is repositioned into its slot, the red and
green indicators on the front of the module will illuminate, indicating that the bat-
tery is being charged. Charge the battery for 12-18 hours before you use it.
582
Memory Backup
Power Module
Part Numbers:
CM902WX (IPM06A)
CM902WY (IPM06D) Retaining
CAUTION:
Screws AGE SENSITIVE:
Refer to System Maintenance
document (B0193AD) for
charging instructions.
DISPOSAL:
Contains sealed lead battery.
Must be recycled or disposed
of properly.
Figure 11-1. Retaining Screws, Memory Backup Power Module [IPM06(A or D)]
Memory Backup
Power Module
Flat Blade Flat Blade

Screw Driver Screw Driver
Battery
Access Door Battery
Access Door
Part Numbers:
CM902WX (IPM06A)
CM902WY (IPM06D)
Figure 11-2. Access Door Removal, Memory Backup Power Module [IPM06(A or D)]
583
Memory Backup
Power Module
Battery
Positive (+) Positive (+) Lead
Battery
Battery Battery
Lead Part Numbers:
Terminal Terminal
CM902WX (IPM06A)
CM902WY (IPM06D)
Figure 11-3. Battery Lead Connections, Memory Backup Power Module [IPM06(A or D)]
Over-Temperature Sensor Wiring

Refer to “Over-Temperature Sensor Wiring” on page 29.
System Operational Checks

Following are system operational checks presented for 70 Series, 50 Series and 20/30 Series equip-
ment. Perform these checks as applicable to your system equipment.
Server 70 and 70 Series System

The following Server 70 and 70 Series devices have a green power on indicator, located on their
front panels:
♦ Workstation Processor 70
♦ Application Workstation 70 processor
♦ External tape drives.
After applying power to each of these devices, check that the power indicator is on.
50 Series System Operational Checks

Each of the following 50 Series devices has a green power on indicator, located on its front panel:
♦ Application Processor 50/51
♦ Workstation Processor 50/51
♦ Application Workstation 50/51
584
♦ 1.3 GB hard disk drive

♦ 644 MB CD-ROM.
After applying power to each of these devices, check that the power indicator is on.
NOTE
The green LED at the front of the 50 Series and 70 Series tape drives (150 MB,
5 GB, and 12 GB) indicate data transfer activity, not power on/off status. To deter-
mine the power on status of these devices, check that the cooling fan (at the rear of
the device) is turning.
Series 20 and 30 System Operational Checks

X-Modules, Z-Modules, Fieldbus Modules, Fieldbus Isolators, and Industrial Power Modules
contain red and green status indicators (LEDs) that provide an indication of the condition of the
modules. These indicators are a primary means of fault detection in the I/A Series system.
After applying power the system, check the operational status of these modules as follows:
♦ X-Modules, Z-Modules, and Fieldbus Modules – During the first eight seconds after
application of power, automatic self-checks are performed in each of these modules.
During this time, the red and green operational status LEDs on the modules are illu-
minated. If the self-checks are successful, the red and green LEDs remain illuminated
after the 8-second period. If the self-checks are unsuccessful, the green LED becomes
extinguished, and the red LED remains illuminated.
♦ Fieldbus Isolators – When system power is switched on, all LEDs on the Fieldbus Iso-
lator illuminate momentarily (less than one second). Then, the green LED should
then be illuminated, with all other LEDs in the module extinguished. (A red LED
illuminated indicates a malfunction in the Fieldbus Isolator clock circuitry or power
supply.)
♦ Industrial Power Modules – When system power is switched on, the green LED on
each Industrial Power Module (IPM) should be illuminated, and the red LED extin-
guished. (A red LED illuminated indicates a fault within the IPM.)
Replace any module that is defective (any module with green LED off and red LED on).
Once all of the modules are determined to be operational (per LED status described above), run
the off-line system diagnostics [refer to System Maintenance (B0193AD)] and then load the system
software:
♦ for a 50 Series processor, refer to Software Installation (Solaris Platform) (B0193JG)
♦ for a 70 Series processor, refer to Hardware and Software Specific Instructions for 70
Series Processors document included with your processor (see “Determining the Type
of Processor You Have” on page 593)
♦ for a Server 70 processor, refer to Hardware and Software Specific Instructions for
Server 70 Processors document included with your processor (see “Determining
Server 70 Processor Type” on page 598).
585
586
Appendix A. Installation Checklist
This appendix provides an overall check list for mounting I/A Series equipment before power is
applied.
Prior to performing the initial power-up procedures, check to ensure that the following
conditions are satisfied:
1. All I/A Series enclosures are mounted and secured according to the “Equipment
Mounting Procedures” on page 3.
2. For all sealed type enclosures, sealing gaskets are in place and sealing plate mounting
screws are tightened.
3. Appropriate power sources (voltage, frequency, and current rating) are connected to
all system units.
4. All system enclosures are earthed in accordance with information in Site Planning
(B0193AB).
5. Memory battery backup cabling, if applicable, is completed and batteries are fully
charged.
6. All high voltage power and signal cables (equal to or greater than 30 V rms or
60 V dc) are separated from low voltage power and signal cables (less than 30 V rms
or 60 V dc) by a minimum distance of 50 mm (2 in).
7. Fault-tolerant module connectors are in place for all fault-tolerant module pairs.
8. All Y-adapters are in place in accordance with the information developed during the
site planning phase, and the mechanical indicators on the Y-adapters are properly
positioned.
9. Fieldbus and Nodebus terminators (at the left end of the mounting structure buses)
are inserted in accordance with the Fieldbus and/or Nodebus cabling configurations.
10. Processor module installation:
a. All processor module cable interconnections are completed.
b. Top and bottom screws on all X- and Z-Modules are securely tightened.
c. If the module is a Control Processor used in the local Fieldbus configuration, a
Fieldbus jumper, (P0800ES) is inserted at the position corresponding to the “A”
connector on the Control Processor.
d. If a Nodebus Extender module pair is implemented, each module in the pair has a
power connector jack (P0800FZ) inserted at the position corresponding to the
“D” connector on each Nodebus Extender module.
e. The peripheral connector plug in each processor module is in the raised position.
11. Proper letterbugs are fully inserted in each module.
587
B0193AC – Rev U Appendix A. Installation Checklist
12. Data storage device installation:

a. All data storage device cable interconnections are completed.
b. All data storage device addresses are set.
c. All 2-slot data storage devices have a power connector (P0800FZ) installed in
position E.
d. All 4-slot data storage devices have power connectors (P0800FZ) installed in posi-
tions E and F.
e. Termination resistor packs are removed from all devices except the last device on
an interconnecting chain. (One exception is the TEAC Model FD-55GFR-141
floppy disk drive, which contains nonremovable termination resistor packs.)
f. The peripheral connector plug in each modular data storage device is in the raised
position.
13. The three classes of field wiring – high voltage, low voltage, and nonincendive – are
separated from each other.
14. Field I/O signal shields are grounded.
15. Strain relief is provided for all power and signal cabling.
16. All peripheral device operating parameter settings have been made.
17. A letterbug is inserted at the rear of the VT100 compatible terminal.
18. The battery in each IPM06(A or D) Memory Backup Power Module is connected.
19. To ensure proper grounding of all X-Module bulk storage devices (hard disk drives,
floppy disk drives, or streaming tape drives), a low resistance path (less than 1 ohm)
must exist between the chassis of each device and the DIN rail in the IE16, IE32, or
FE8 enclosure.
588
Appendix B. SCSI Bus
Configuration Guide
This appendix provides specific information pertaining to I/A Series processors and modules
with internal and/or external SCSI-2 and SCSI-3 buses.
When choosing components for connection on a SCSI bus for any processor, you must be aware
of the limits within which a SCSI bus operates properly. The Model 50/51, Style A, B, and C pro-
cessors have a SCSI-2 bus, which must be equal to or less than six meters.
The Model 51, Style E processors have a high speed, ultra-wide SCSI-3 bus, which must be equal
to or less than three meters.
The Model 51, Style D processor requires a Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface plus
Ultra-Wide SCSI-3 PCI card to support external SCSI functionality. This card provides an exter-
nal high speed, ultra-wide SCSI-3 bus for this processor, which must be equal to or less than three
meters.
It should be noted that the sum of the physical lengths of the interconnecting cables is only one
factor in the total equivalent SCSI bus length. Each device on the SCSI bus, including the proces-
sor, adds a portion to the overall length.
! CAUTION
Due to these limitations, the Model 51, Style D and E processors cannot have more
than two SCSI devices on their SCSI-3 bus. If you plan to include an external tape
drive on the SCSI-3 bus to back up the processor’s hard drive(s), this tape drive
must be included as one of the two SCSI devices.
Table B-1 gives the equivalent SCSI length for each device and cable. The sum of the equivalent
SCSI lengths of all of the components that reside on the SCSI bus must be less than six meters for
the SCSI-2 bus, and three meters for the SCSI-3 bus. In practice, the system does not cease to
function at lengths just beyond the total equivalent SCSI length, but reliability of the bus begins
to erode beyond that point.
Table B-1. Equivalent SCSI Cable Lengths
Equivalent SCSI
Device Length (Meters)
Model 50 Processor 0.5
Model 51A Processor 0.71
Model 51B Processor 1.6
Model 51B1 Processor 1.6
Model 51C Processor 1.6
589
B0193AC – Rev U Appendix B. SCSI Bus Configuration Guide
Table B-1. Equivalent SCSI Cable Lengths (Continued)
Equivalent SCSI
Device Length (Meters)
Model 51D Processor with Twisted- 0.0
Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface
plus Ultra-Wide SCSI PCI card
Model 51E Processor 0.91
A-Size Peripheral 0.16
A-Size Peripheral Cable 0.8
B-Size Peripheral 0.16
B-Size Peripheral Cable 0.8
D-Size Peripheral 0.40
D-Size Peripheral 50/68 Pin Cable 1.2
D-Size Peripheral 68/68 Pin Cable 0.8
P0170NX SCSI Cable 1.5
P0970JR SCSI Cable 0.56
P0970KF SCSI Cable 1.3
P0970KG SCSI Cable 0.6
P0970KJ SCSI Cable 0.6
P0970QS SCSI Cable 0.8
P0971FZ SCSI Cable 1.3
P0971MK SCSI Cable 1.2
P0971ML SCSI Cable 0.8
P0971MX SCSI Cable 1.5
P0971MY SCSI Cable 1.5
P0971RH SCSI Cable 0.8
P0970KH SCSI Cable 1.7
1.
This information is provided for reference only.
590
Appendix C. Installation
Instructions for Noncurrent
70 Series or Server 70 Workstations
This appendix directs you to the latest information on 70 Series and Server 70 processors, and
retains configuration information pertaining to versions of the 70 Series processors which are
no longer offered by Invensys Systems Inc.
The I/A Series system incorporates Windows based processors as either Application Workstations
(AWs) or Workstation Processors (WPs). Workstation Processors provide a link between the user
and all system functions, together with their connected peripheral devices. Application Worksta-
tions perform the functions of a WP and contain control software.
Two types of Windows based processors are available:
♦ 70 Series processors
♦ Server 70 processors.
NOTE
At this time, there is one version of the Server 70 processors, and thus there are no
noncurrent versions of these processors.
For the 70 Series processors, two versions of the 70 Series Application Workstation, and one ver-
sion of the 70 Series Workstation Processor are available. The processors used in each of these ver-
sions are consistently replaced with higher performance machines, when these machines become
available. The processors which have previously been offered and are currently being offered are
provided below:
♦ 70 Series Application Workstation, Style A (AW70, Style A)
♦ PowerMate™ Pentium 166 (P166) Application Workstation 70 Series, Style A
(previous)
♦ PowerMate Professional Pentium II 233 Application Workstation 70 Series, Style
A (previous)
♦ PowerMate Enterprise Pentium II 233 Application Workstation 70 Series, Style A
(previous)
♦ GXa Pentium II 233 Application Workstation 70 Series, Style A (previous)
♦ GX1 Pentium II (P99*P) Application Workstation 70 Series, Style A (previous)
♦ GX1 Pentium III (P99*Q) Application Workstation 70 Series, Style A (previous)
♦ GX1 Pentium III (P99*R) Application Workstation 70 Series, Style A (previous)
♦ GX1 Pentium III (P99*S) Application Workstation 70 Series, Style A (current)
591
B0193AC – Rev U Appendix C. Installation Instructions for Noncurrent
♦ 70 Series Workstation Processor, Style A (WP70, Style A)

♦ PowerMate Pentium 166 (P166) Workstation Processor 70 Series, Style A
(previous)
♦ PowerMate Professional Pentium II 233 Workstation Processor 70 Series, Style A
(previous)
♦ PowerMate Enterprise Pentium II 233 Workstation Processor 70 Series, Style A
(previous)
♦ GXa Pentium II 233 Workstation Processor 70 Series, Style A (previous)
♦ GX1 Pentium II (P98*M) Workstation Processor 70 Series, Style A (previous)
♦ GX1 Pentium III (P98*N) Workstation Processor 70 Series, Style A (previous)
♦ GX1 Pentium III (P98*P) Workstation Processor 70 Series, Style A (previous)
♦ GX1 Pentium III (P98*Q) Workstation Processor 70 Series, Style A (current)
♦ 70 Series Application Workstation, Style B (AW70, Style B)
♦ PowerMate PentiumPro 200 Application Workstation 70 Series, Style B
(previous)
♦ PowerMate Professional Pentium II 266 Application Workstation 70 Series, Style
B (previous)
♦ PowerMate Enterprise Pentium II 300 Application Workstation 70 Series, Style B
(previous)
♦ GXa Pentium II 300 Application Workstation 70 Series, Style B (previous)
♦ GX1 Pentium II (P97*H) Application Workstation 70 Series, Style B (previous)
♦ GX1 Pentium III (P97*J) Application Workstation 70 Series, Style B (previous)
♦ GX1 Pentium III (P97*K) Application Workstation 70 Series, Style B (previous)
♦ GX1 Pentium III (P97*L) Application Workstation 70 Series, Style B (current).
All configuration instructions for the current versions of the AW70, Style A, WP70, Style A, and
AW70, Style B are located in a specific Hardware and Software Specific Instructions For 70 Series
Processors book included with each processor.
This appendix covers configuration instructions for the previous versions of the AW70, Style A,
WP70, Style A, and AW70, Style B.
NOTE
If your 70 Series processor is a Zenith-based workstation, refer to Equipment Site
Planning, Installation, and Maintenance (Windows NT Operating System) (B0400AJ)
for all relevant installation information. Zenith-based workstations have a clock speed
of 133 MHz (see the procedure below).
592
Appendix C. Installation Instructions for Noncurrent 70 Series or Server 70 Workstations B0193AC – Rev U
Server 70 Processor
For the Server 70 processors, a Server 70 Application Workstation, and a Server 70
Workstation Processor are available.
The processors which are currently being offered are provided below:
♦ Server 70 Application Workstation
♦ PowerEdge 2400 Pentium III (P951*A) Application Workstation Server 70
(current)
♦ Server 70 Workstation Processor
♦ PowerEdge 2400 Pentium III (P952*A) Workstation Processor Server 70
(current)
All configuration instructions for the current versions of the Server 70 (AW and WP versions) are
located in a specific Hardware and Software Specific Instructions For Server 70 Processors document
included with each server.
Determining the Type of Processor You Have

If you are unsure which processor version is contained in your workstation, you must first deter-
mine its exact type.
There are three different hardware types of 70 Series processor, shown in Figure C-1:
♦ the PowerMate Pentium 166, PowerMate PentiumPro 200, PowerMate Professional
Pentium II 233, and PowerMate Professional Pentium II 266 processor, and
♦ the PowerMate Enterprise Pentium II 233 and PowerMate Enterprise Pentium II 300
processor, and
♦ the GXa Pentium II 233, GXa Pentium II 300, or GX1 Pentium II/III processors.
593
Label indicating whether the processor

is a GXa or GX1 Pentium II/III.
GX 1
PowerMate Pentium, PowerMate PowerMate Enterprise

PentiumPro, and PowerMate Pentium II Processor GXa and GX1 Pentium II/III
Professional Pentium II Processor Processor
Figure C-1. 70 Series Processors
NOTE
The GX-based Pentium II/III processors have a label on the upper left-hand corner
of the front panel, which identifies the exact model of the processor (GXa or GX1).
There is one hardware type of Server 70 processor, shown in Figure C-2:
Figure C-2. Server 70 Processor
Identify which processor you have based on its exterior case.
594
Proceed to:
♦ the next section, if you have a non GX-based 70 Series processor.
♦ “Determining GX-Based 70 Series Processor Type” on page 597, if you have a GX-
based 70 Series processor.
♦ “Determining Server 70 Processor Type” on page 598, if you have a Server 70.
Determining Non GX-Based 70 Series Processor Type

If you have a processor with an exterior similar to the figure shown on the middle in Figure C-1,
your processor is a PowerMate Enterprise Pentium II 233 or 300. Simply determine whether this
processor is an AW70, Style A or B, or WP70 from a label on the casing.
If you have a processor with an exterior similar to the figure shown on the left in Figure C-1, you
can identify which specific type it is with the following procedure. Perform the following while
this workstation is running:
1. Click the Start button, then point to Programs, then Administrative Tools
(Common), and then click Windows NT Diagnostics, as shown in Figure C-3.
Second,
point to
this
Finally,
Third,
click this
point to
this
First,
click
this
Figure C-3. Selecting Windows NT Diagnostics
2. The Windows NT Diagnostics dialog box appears. Click on the System tab as shown
in Figure C-4.
3. Look in the Processor(s) field at the bottom of the Windows NT Diagnostics dialog
box. Record the family number, model number, stepping number, and clock speed
(MHz). Compare these with the list shown in Table C-1 to determine which version
of processor you have.
595
Compare the
numbers shown
here with Table C-1
to determine
which processor
you have.
Figure C-4. Determining Your Non GX-Based 70 Series Workstation’s Processor
Table C-1. Determining Your Non GX-Based 70 Series Workstation’s Processor
Type of Clock
Version Processor System Properties Listing Speed
Previous AW/WP70, Style A P166 Family 5 Model 2 Stepping 12 166 MHz
Previous AW/WP70, Style A Pro PII 233 Family 6 Model 3 Stepping 3 232 MHz
Previous AW70, Style B Pentium Pro 200 Family 6 Model 1 Stepping 7 199 MHz
Previous AW70, Style B Pro PII 266 Family 6 Model 3 Stepping 3 266 MHz
You should now know the type of processor in your workstation. For specifications for your pro-
cessor, first refer to “Interface Card Overview” on page 599 and then, depending on your proces-
sor, refer to:
♦ “AW/WP70, Style A Overview (Pentium 166)” on page 600
♦ “AW/WP70, Style A Overview (Professional PII 233)” on page 605
♦ “AW/WP70, Style A Overview (Enterprise 233)” on page 610
♦ “AW70, Style B Overview (PentiumPro 200)” on page 620
♦ “AW70, Style B Overview (Professional PII 266)” on page 622
♦ “AW70, Style B Overview (Enterprise 300)” on page 625.
596
Determining GX-Based 70 Series Processor Type

If you have a GX-based processor, you can determine the processor type from the P-Code label on
the bottom right-hand corner of the right side of your processor.
A P-Code is a production code used to identify a machine and its hardware configuration. The
label is illustrated in Figure C-5. The information found on this label lets you identify the model
type of your processor (AW70A, WP70 or AW70B), and the Style type. The Style type is a letter
which allows you to determine which GX-based processor you have. It is followed by a letter rep-
resenting hardware revision level, which you should ignore.
NOTE
If you are unable to locate your P-Code, or you have made modifications to your
machine without updating the P-Code, contact the Customer Satisfaction Center at
1-866-PHON-IPS (1-866-746-6477), or visit http://ips.csc.invensys.com.
Figure C-5. Identifying the Parts of a P-Code Label
Depending on the P-Code number and Style type on your P-Code label, you may have any of the
following processors in Table C-2. The current processors are shaded.
Table C-2. Identifying Type of GX-Based Processor
P-Code Style
Number Type Processor
P99 N GXa Pentium II 233 Application Workstation 70 Series, Style A
P98 L GXa Pentium II 233 Workstation Processor 70 Series, Style A
P97 G GXa Pentium II 300 Application Workstation 70 Series, Style B
P99 P GX1 Pentium II (P99*P) Application Workstation 70 Series, Style A
P98 M GX1 Pentium II (P98*M) Workstation Processor 70 Series, Style A
P97 H GX1 Pentium II (P97*H) Application Workstation 70 Series, Style B
P99 Q GX1 Pentium II (P99*Q) Application Workstation 70 Series, Style A
P98 N GX1 Pentium II (P98*N) Workstation Processor 70 Series, Style A
P97 J GX1 Pentium II (P97*J) Application Workstation 70 Series, Style B
P99 R GX1 Pentium III (P99*R) Application Workstation 70 Series, Style A
P98 P GX1 Pentium III (P98*P) Workstation Processor 70 Series, Style A
P97 K GX1 Pentium III (P97*K) Application Workstation 70 Series, Style B
597
Table C-2. Identifying Type of GX-Based Processor (Continued)
P-Code Style
Number Type Processor
P99 R GX1 Pentium III (P99*S) Application Workstation 70 Series, Style A
P98 P GX1 Pentium III (P98*Q) Workstation Processor 70 Series, Style A
P99 R GX1 Pentium III (P99*T) Application Workstation 70 Series, Style A
P98 P GX1 Pentium III (P98*R) Workstation Processor 70 Series, Style A
P97 K GX1 Pentium III (P97*L) Application Workstation 70 Series, Style B
If you have the current AW/WP70, Style A or AW70, Style B workstation (shaded above), refer to
“AW/WP70, Style A- and AW70, Style B-Based Peripheral Device Installation
Procedures for Current 70 Series Processors” on page 348.
For complete hardware and software installation procedures for your GX-based processor, refer to
the appropriate document:
♦ Hardware and Software Specific Instructions for 70 Series Processors (GXA Pentium II)
AW70A (P99*N), WP70 (P98*L), and AW70B (P97*G) (B0400PV)
♦ Hardware and Software Specific Instructions for 70 Series Processors (GX1 Pentium II)
AW70A (P99*P), WP70 (P98*M), and AW70B (P97*H) (B0400SA)
AW70A (P99*Q), WP70 (P98*N) and AW70B (P97*J) (B0400RC)
AW70A (P99*R), WP70 (P98*P), and AW70B (P97*K) (B0400SK)
AW70A (P99*S), WP70 (P98*Q), and AW70B (P97*L) (B0400RH)
AW70A (P99*T), WP70 (P98*R), and AW70B (P97*L) (B0400RL).
These documents are available via your local Foxboro sales representative, via the I/A Series Elec-
tronic Documentation CD-ROM (K0173TQ), or through the Customer Satisfaction Center’s web
page http://ips.csc.invensys.com.
Determining Server 70 Processor Type

Currently, only one type of Server 70 processor is available. To read about the installation proce-
dures for the Server 70 processor, refer to the following manual:
♦ Hardware and Software Specific Instructions for Server 70 Processors (PE2400) AW70C
and WP70C (P95*A) (B0400SP)
This document is available via your local Foxboro sales representative, via the I/A Series Electronic
Documentation CD-ROM (K0173TQ), or through the Customer Satisfaction Center’s web page
http://ips.csc.invensys.com.
598
Interface Card Overview

You can install the following interface cards into the AW/WP70, Style A and AW70, Style B
workstation:
♦ PC-FB card (Setup instructions are on page 631)
♦ DigiBoard card (Setup instructions are in “Installing a DigiBoard” on page 361)
♦ An additional Ethernet card: 3Com 3C900 (PCI) card, or 3Com 3C509 card (ISA)
(Setup instructions are in “Installing an Ethernet Card” on page 366)
♦ Allen-Bradley 1784-KTX communications interface ISA card (setup instructions are
on page 633) or an Allen-Bradley PKTX PCI card (setup instructions are on
page 369)
♦ Video card [Setup instructions are in Installation Instructions for Multi-Head Video
Cards (B0193SW), on page 372, or included in documentation with your 70 Series
processor].
In addition to physically installing a card into the workstation, often you may have to first set the
card’s DIP switches or jumpers to specify the I/O address and the interrupt request (IRQ). Some
cards, however, perform an automatic selection. Card-specific installation instructions are
described later in this appendix.
The following sections provide the specific card slot locations, interrupt requests (IRQ), and I/O
addresses for the previous versions of the processors described above. Refer to “Setting the PC’s
Voltage Selector Switch” on page 350 for additional information on 70 Series workstations.
Refer to “Configuring Sound” on page 366 to activate the sound function in your workstation.
Refer to “Printer Connections in AW/WP70, Style A and AW70, Style B Workstations (All
Types)” on page 629 to connect printers to your workstation.
Setting the CMOS BIOS in an 70 Series Processor

The CMOS BIOS for the 70 Series processor supports Plug and Play. On rare occasions, such as
after changing the 70 Series processor’s CMOS battery, you must override the IRQ setting deter-
mined by Plug and Play. The Plug and Play feature causes the interface cards (such as the 3COM
3C900 PCI Ethernet card) to take unpredictable interrupt requests. This can cause a conflict
between interface cards which are recognized by the Plug and Play feature, and cards that are not.
Should this IRQ conflict occur, the BIOS settings must be reset to their original settings.
For all PowerMate-based processors, refer to CMOS Parameter Sheet for Application Workstation,
70A and Workstation Processor 70A (B0400PC) and CMOS Parameter Sheet for SCSI Application
Workstation 70B (B0400PD) for instructions on resetting the CMOS BIOS.
For all other processors, refer to the Hardware and Software Specific Instructions for 70 Series Proces-
sors document included with your processors for instructions on resetting the CMOS BIOS.
You may need to reinstall some of the card’s drivers as well (such as the 3COM 3C900 PCI Ether-
net card’s driver). Refer to the Hardware and Software Specific Instructions for 70 Series Processors
document included with your processor (if available) or Software Installation (Windows NT Oper-
ating System) (B0400JG) for driver installation instructions.
599
AW/WP70, Style A Overview (Pentium 166)

Figure C-6 and Figure C-7 below serve as a general reference, showing the cable connection
points on the AW/WP70, Style A and AW70, Style B workstations. The specific card configura-
tions for each of these workstations are provided in Table C-5 and Table C-6.
Power Button
Power LED
Disk LED
Reset Button
Suspend Button
Diskette Drive A
Diskette Drive Busy LED Diskette Release Button
Emergency CD-ROM Eject CD-ROM Reader
Headphone Jack
Volume Control Knob
CD Busy LED
5 1/4-Inch Slots
Open/Close Button
Infrared (IR) Window
Figure C-6. Front Panel Layout for AW/WP70, Style A Workstations

(P166, Professional PII 233, PentiumPro 266, and Professional PII 266)
600
VGA Connector/Monitor
Slot 3 Slot 1 (ISA)
115/230 Voltage (ISA/PCI Combo)
Slot 2 (ISA)
Selector Switch*
Slot 4 (PCI)
Slot 5 (PCI) Printer Port
230
Mouse Port
Keyboard Port
Microphone In Jack
Line Out
Enlarged in
230 V ac COM2 Serial Port
position
COM1 Serial Port

*See “Setting the PCs
Refer to the P166 Hardware Parameters table provided below to determine which cards are
located in the ISA and PCI slots shown above.
Figure C-7. AW/WP70, Style A Rear Panel Layout (P166)
NOTE
Shaded card or device entries in Table C-3 and Table C-4 are not configurable.
These values are set by the system and cannot be altered.
AW70, Style A Hardware Parameters (P166)

Table C-3 describes card slot positions and other hardware information for this version of the
AW70, Style A workstation. Card slot positions are shown in Figure C-8.
Table C-3. AW70, Style A (P166) Interface Card Parameters
Card/Device IRQ I/O Address Buffer Slot

Interval timer 0 N/A N/A N/A
Cascade (INT output from slave) 2 N/A N/A N/A
601
Table C-3. AW70, Style A (P166) Interface Card Parameters (Continued)

COM 2 3 2F8 N/A N/A
DigiBoard Slot 3, ISA/PCI
Alarm printer (port 1) COM3=120 Combo1
Modbus (port 2) COM4=128
Modem (port 3) COM5=130
(port 4) COM6=138
Status=140
COM 1 4 3F8 N/A N/A
Integrated Sound2 5 220, 224 N/A N/A
Floppy / 1.6 GB tape drive 6 N/A N/A N/A
Parallel port (LPT1) 7 378 N/A N/A
Real-time clock 8 N/A N/A N/A
Primary Ethernet (PCI – optional) 9 N/A N/A Slot 4, PCI (1)
Ethernet 10 300, 110 N/A Slot 2, ISA (2)
A-B KTX N/A DC00
PC-FB card 11 340 D8000 Slot 1, ISA (1)
Math coprocessor 13 N/A N/A N/A
Primary IDE (for hard drive) 14 N/A N/A N/A
Secondary IDE (for CD-ROM drive) 15 N/A N/A N/A
1.
Suggested slots. Install cards only if these slots are available.
2.
The integrated sound function must be activated to be used. See “Configuring Sound” on
page 366.
WP70, Style A Hardware Parameters (P166)

WP70, Style A workstations. Card slots are shown in Figure C-8.
Table C-4. WP70, Style A (P166) Interface Card Parameters

COM 2 3 2F8 N/A N/A
COM 1 4 3F8 N/A N/A
602
Table C-4. WP70, Style A (P166) Interface Card Parameters (Continued)

Secondary Ethernet (ISA – 3C509) 9 N/A N/A Slot 3, ISA/PCI Combo
Primary Ethernet (ISA – 3C509) 10 300, 110 N/A Slot 1, ISA (1)
Open 11 N/A N/A N/A
1.
The integrated sound function must be activated to be used. See “Configuring Sound” on page 366.
Card Installation in AW/WP70, Style A Workstations (P166)

Refer to Figure C-8 for internal card slot positions.
To install a card in the AW70, Style A or WP70, Style A workstations, proceed as follows:
1. Ensure the workstation is shut down, and not plugged into a power socket.
2. Find out which ISA or PCI slot the card must occupy. Refer to the following tables for
card slot locations.
Table C-5. AW70, Style A (P166) Card Slot Locations
Position Card Driver

Slot 1 Isa (1) Fieldbus PIO Interface (PC-FB)
Slot 2 ISA (2) A-B 1784-KTX
Slot 3 ISA/PCI Combo DigiBoard
Slot 4 PCI (1) Primary 3Com 3C900 PCI Ethernet
Slot 5 PCI (2) Dual or Quad Pro Lightning V2 Video Card
Table C-6. WP70, Style A (P166) Card Slot Locations

Slot 1 ISA (1) Primary 3Com 3C509 ISA Ethernet
Slot 2 ISA (2) Not used
Slot 3 ISA/PCI Combo Secondary 3Com 3C509 ISA Ethernet
Slot 4 PCI (1) Dual or Quad Pro Lightning V2 Video Card
(optional for dual/quad-head video)
Slot 5 PCI (2) Not used
603
NOTE
The PCI Ethernet card (3COM 3C590 or 3C900) must be terminated1. The
I/A Series system is shipped with a 50 ohm terminator plug attached to the PCI
Ethernet card.
3. Remove the system cover. There are three captive thumb screws at the rear of the com-
puter. Remove these screws, and carefully slide the cover toward the rear of the com-
puter while lifting it away from the unit.
4. Remove the screw and filler plate over the card slot in which you wish to install the
card.
5. Slide the card into the proper ISA or PCI slot. Attach it to the support bracket with
the captive screw located on the bracket. If available, refer to “Expansion Board Instal-
lation” in Chapter 3 of PowerMate V&P Series User’s Guide.
6. Attach the required cables to the card (described in their respective chapters in this
document).
7. Insert the metal tabs on the top and bottom of the workstation cover into their slots
on the chassis, and slide the cover toward the front panel. Tighten the three captive
thumb screws.
The card is now installed in the workstation.
To confirm that an interface card’s associated driver has been successfully installed, refer to Soft-
ware Installation (Windows NT Operating System) (B0400JG) for instructions.
1.
604
Riser Card Slot 4 Slot 2

Slot 3- ISA
Slot 4 PCI Combo Slot 2
PCI (1) ISA (2) Combo
Slot 5 Slot 1 PCI
ISA (1) PCI (1)
PCI (2) -or- ISA (2)
PCI (2) ISA ISA (1)
Front of
AW/WP70,
Style A
Back of
AW/WP70,
Riser Card
Style A
View from Rear of
AW/WP70, Style A
Top View Motherboard

Motherboard
Figure C-8. Card Slot Positions in the AW/WP70, Style A (P166)
AW/WP70, Style A Overview (Professional PII 233)

Figure C-9 serves as a general reference, showing the cable connection points on the AW/WP70,
Style A (Professional PII 233) workstation. The specific card configurations for each of these
workstations are provided in Table C-9 and Table C-10.
The front panel layout for AW/WP70, Style A workstations (Professional PII 233) is similar to the
front panel layout in Figure C-6.
605
Slot 1 (ISA)
Slot 2 (ISA)
Slot 3 (ISA)
115/230 Voltage Slot 5 (PCI)
Selector Switch* Slot 6 (PCI)
Midi Port Slot 7 (PCI)
(not used)
230
Microphone In Jack
Line In Jack
Line Out (to included
speakers or monitor)
COM1 Serial Port
Printer Port
COM2 Serial Port
Enlarged in
230 V ac
position Keyboard Port
Mouse Port
*See “Setting the PCs
Refer to the Professional PII 233 Hardware Parameters table provided below to
determine which cards are located in the ISA and PCI slots shown above.
Figure C-9. AW/WP70, Style A (Professional PII 233) and AW70, Style B
(PentiumPro 200 and Professional PII 266) Rear Panel Layout
NOTE
Shaded card or device entries in Table C-7 and Table C-8 are not configurable.
AW70, Style A Hardware Parameters (Professional PII 233)

AW70, Style A workstation. Card slot positions are shown in Figure C-10.
Table C-7. AW70, Style A (Professional PII 233) Interface Card Parameters

606
Table C-7. AW70, Style A (Professional PII 233) Interface Card Parameters (Continued)

COM 2 3 2F8 N/A N/A
–or– or –or–
DigiBoard Slot 3, ISA
Alarm printer (port 1) COM3=120
(port 4) COM6=138
Status=140
COM 1 4 3F8 N/A N/A
1
Integrated Sound 5 220, 224 N/A N/A
PC-FB (Fieldbus) card 9 340 D8000 Slot 1, ISA (1)
A-B KTX 10 N/A N/A Slot 2, ISA (2)
–or–
Secondary Ethernet (ISA – 3C509)
Video card 11 N/A N/A Slot 4, ISA/PCI Combo
–and/or– –or–
Primary Ethernet (PCI – 3C900) 300 Slot 6, PCI (2)
1.
WP70, Style A Hardware Parameters (Professional PII 233)

WP70, Style A workstations. Card slots are shown in Figure C-8.
Table C-8. WP70, Style A (Professional PII 233) Interface Card Parameters

COM 2 3 2F8 N/A N/A
COM 1 4 3F8 N/A N/A
607
Table C-8. WP70, Style A (Professional PII 233) Interface Card Parameters (Continued)

Secondary Ethernet (ISA – 3C509) 9 N/A N/A Slot 1, ISA (1)
Primary Ethernet (ISA – 3C509) 10 N/A N/A Slot 2, ISA (2)
Video card 11 N/A N/A Slot 4, ISA/PCI Combo
–and/or– –or–
Primary Ethernet (PCI – 3C900) 300 Slot 6, PCI (2)
1
Card Installation in AW/WP70, Style A Workstations

(Professional PII 233)
Refer to Figure C-10 on page 610 for internal card slot positions.
To install a card in the AW70, Style A or WP70, Style A (Professional PII 233) workstations, pro-
ceed as follows:
2. Find out which ISA or PCI slot the card must occupy. Refer to the following tables for
Table C-9. AW70, Style A (Professional II 233) Card Slot Locations

Slot 1 ISA (1) Fieldbus PIO Interface (PC-FB) –or– A-B 1784-KTX
Slot 2 ISA (2) 3Com 3C509 ISA Ethernet/Nodebus –or– A-B 1784-KTX
Slot 3 ISA (3) DigiBoard –or– A-B 1784-KTX
Slot 4 ISA/PCI Combo Dual or Quad Pro Lightning V2 Video Card
608
Table C-10. WP70, Style A (Professional II 233) Card Slot Locations

Slot 1 ISA (1) Primary 3Com 3C509 ISA Ethernet
Slot 2 ISA (2) Secondary 3Com 3C509 ISA Ethernet
Slot 4 ISA/PCI Combo Dual or Quad Pro Lightning V2 Video Card
NOTE
Ethernet card.
card.
the captive screw located on the bracket. If available, refer to PowerMate Professional
Series User’s Guide, in the section “Installing an Expansion Board”.
document).
thumb screws.
2.
609
Motherboard
Slot 1 - ISA (1)

Slot 2 - ISA (2)
Slot 3 - ISA (3)
Slot 4 - ISA/PCI Combo

Slot 5 - PCI (1)
Slot 6 - PCI (2)
Motherboard*
Slot 7 - PCI (3)
*Note: This diagram only shows the upper

right-hand corner of the system board.
Side View Rear View
Figure C-10. Card Slot Positions in the AW/WP70, Style A and B Workstation
(PentiumPro 200, Professional PII 233, and Professional PII 266)
AW/WP70, Style A Overview (Enterprise 233)

Figure C-11 and Figure C-12 serve as a general reference, showing the cable connection points on
the AW/WP70, Style A (Enterprise Pentium II 233) workstation. The specific card configurations
for each of these workstations are provided in Table C-9 and Table C-10.
610
Diskette Drive A Diskette Release Button

Diskette Drive Busy LED
CD-ROM Reader
CD-ROM Eject
Emergency CD-ROM
Eject
5 1/4-Inch Slots CD Busy LED
Volume Control Knob
Headphone Jack
Reset Button
Power LED
Power Button
Disk LED
Suspend Button
Infrared (IR) Window

- covered by a Foxboro
letterbug label.
Figure C-11. Front Panel Layout for AW/WP70, Style A and AW70, Style B Processors
611
115/230 Voltage
Selector Switch*
230
Power Cord Plug
Enlarged in
Line In Jack 230 V ac
Microphone In Jack position
Line Out (to speakers
or monitor) *See “Setting the PCs
LAN Connector Voltage Selector Switch”
Universal Serial Bus Connector
(not used) Slot 5 (PCI) Unused
COM2 Serial Port Slot 4 (PCI)
Keyboard Port Slot 3 (ISA/PCI Combo)
Mouse Port Slot 2 (ISA)
Slot 1 (ISA)
COM1 Serial Port

Printer Port VGA Monitor Connector
(AGP port with video card)
Figure C-12. AW/WP70, Style A (Enterprise 233) and AW70, Style B (Enterprise 300)
Rear Panel Layout
NOTE
Shaded card or device entries in Table C-11, and Table C-12, are not
configurable. These values are set by the system and cannot be altered.
AW70, Style A Hardware Parameters (Enterprise 233)

Table C-11 shows card slot positions and other hardware information for AW70, Style A
processors.
Table C-11. AW70, Style A (Enterprise 233) Interface Card Parameters

612
Table C-11. AW70, Style A (Enterprise 233) Interface Card Parameters (Continued)

COM 2 3 2F8 N/A N/A
DigiBoard - Multi Port Serial card COM3=120 Slot 2 (ISA/PCI
Combo)1
(port 4) Status=140
COM 1 4 3F8 N/A N/A
Universal Serial Bus (USB - not seen in 9 N/A N/A Slot 4 (PCI)
Windows NT resources) and
Primary Ethernet (3Com 3C900 PCI N/A N/A
Ethernet)
Nodebus or Secondary Ethernet 10 310 N/A Slot 2 (ISA/PCI
(3Com 3C509 ISA Ethernet – optional) Combo)1
A-B KTX N/A Slot 1 (ISA) if used
with DigiBoard
PC-FB card 11 340 D8000 Slot 1 (ISA)
A-B KTX N/A N/A
1.
Suggested slots. Install cards only if these slots are available.
2.
613
WP70, Style A Hardware Parameters (Enterprise 233)

Table C-12 shows card slot positions and other hardware information for WP70, Style A
processors.
Table C-12. WP70, Style A (Enterprise 233) Interface Card Parameters

COM 2 3 2F8 N/A N/A
COM 1 4 3F8 N/A N/A
Universal Serial Bus (USB - not seen in 9 N/A N/A N/A
Windows NT resources) –and–
3Com 3C900 PCI Ethernet2 – optional Slot 4 (PCI)
Ethernet or Nodebus 10 310 N/A Slot 1 (ISA)
(3Com 3C509 ISA Ethernet)
Secondary Ethernet3 (3Com 3C509 11 360 N/A Slot 2 (ISA/PCI
ISA Ethernet – optional) Combo)
1.
page 366.
2.
If the WP contains a 3Com 3C509 ISA Ethernet card and a 3Com 3C900 Ethernet card, either
card can be the primary Ethernet card. The second becomes the secondary Ethernet card.
3.
If the WP contains two 3Com 3C509 ISA Ethernet cards, the card with IRQ10 becomes the pri-
mary Ethernet card, and the Ethernet card with IRQ11 becomes the secondary card.
614
Card Installation in AW/WP70, Style A Workstations

(Enterprise 233)
To install a card in the AW70, Style A or WP70, Style A (Enterprise 233) workstations, proceed as
follows.
NOTE
The following notes apply to this installation procedure:
1. Depending upon the system configuration and population of that system, set up
interface cards as defined in Table C-13, and Table C-14.
2. Windows NT 4.0 does not recognize the AGP slot unless ServicePack 3
(Foxboro part number K0200QN) has been installed. Refer to Software Installation
(Windows NT Operating System) (B0400JG) for instructions on installing
ServicePack 3.
1. Ensure the processor is shut down, and not plugged into a power socket.
2. Determine which ISA, PCI, or AGP slot the card must occupy. Refer to Figure C-13
and the following tables for card slot locations.
Table C-13. AW70, Style A (Enterprise 233) Card Slot Locations

Slot 1 (ISA) Fieldbus PIO Interface (PC-FB) –or– Allen-Bradley 1784-KTX –or– 3Com
3C509 Ethernet ISA card (for Ethernet or Nodebus) used with DigiBoard
Slot 2 (ISA/PCI DigiBoard –or– Allen-Bradley 1784-KTX –or– 3Com 3C509 Ethernet ISA
Combo) card (for Ethernet or Nodebus) if DigiBoard is not present
Slot 3 (PCI) Dual or Quad Pro Lightning V2 (optional for dual/quad-head video) video card
Slot 4 (PCI) Primary 3Com 3C900 Ethernet PCI card
Slot 5 (PCI) Unused
Slot 6 (AGP) ATI Xpert@Work 3D AGP video card
Table C-14. WP70, Style A (Enterprise 233) Card Slot Locations

Slot 1 (ISA) 3Com 3C509 Ethernet ISA card (for Ethernet or Nodebus)
Slot 2 (ISA/PCI 3Com 3C509 Ethernet ISA card (for Ethernet or Nodebus)
Combo)
Slot 4 (PCI) 3Com 3C900 Ethernet PCI card
Slot 5 (PCI) Unused
615
NOTE
1. The PCI Ethernet card (3Com 3C900) must be terminated or connected to a
properly terminated network. The I/A Series system is shipped with a 50 ohm ter-
minator plug attached to the coaxial connector on the PCI Ethernet card.
2. If the ISA Ethernet/Nodebus card (3Com 3C509) card connects to a DNBI, the
50 ohm terminator plug should not be installed to its coaxial connector.
Riser Card
PCI Back of
AW/WP70
PCI PCI
ISA
-or-
PCI
ISA
Combo ISA PCI PCI
PCI
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Front of
ISA/PCI Combo Slot 4
AW/WP70 Slot 2
Riser Card
AGP Slot 6 Bottom View

Motherboard
Motherboard
View from Rear of Workstation
Figure C-13. Card Slot Positions in the AW/WP70, Style A and B Workstations
(Enterprise 233 and Enterprise 300)
3. Remove the processor cover. There are three captive screws at the rear of the processor.
Remove these screws, and carefully slide the cover toward the rear of the processor
while lifting it away from the unit.
card.
5. Slide the card into the proper ISA, PCI, or AGP slot. Attach it to the support bracket
with the captive screw located on the bracket. If available, refer to PowerMate Enter-
prise User’s Guide, in the section “Installing an Expansion Board”.
6. Attach the required cables to the card (if necessary - refer to the card’s section below).
616
7. Insert the metal tabs on the top and bottom of the processor cover into their slots on
the chassis, and slide the cover toward the front panel. Tighten the three captive
screws.
The card is now installed in the 70 Series processor.
Refer to Hardware and Software Specific Instructions for 70 Series Processors (Enterprise Pentium II)
(B0400PU) for software installation instructions.
AW/WP70, Style A Overview (GXa 233)

AW/WP70, Style A (GXa Pentium II 233) workstation. The specific card configurations for each
of these workstations are provided in Table C-15 and Table C-16.
NOTE
Shaded card or device entries in Table C-15, and Table C-16, are not configurable.
AW70, Style A Hardware Parameters (GXa 233)

Table C-15 shows card slot positions and other hardware information for AW70, Style A
processors.
Table C-15. AW70, Style A (GXa 233) Interface Card Parameters

Keyboard1 1 N/A N/A N/A
COM 2 3 2F8 N/A N/A
DigiBoard - Multi-Port Serial card for COM3=120 Slot 3 (ISA/PCI Combo)
Alarm printer COM4=128
Modbus COM5=130
Modem COM6=138
Status=140
COM 1 4 3F8 N/A N/A
Floppy / 1.6 GB Tape Drive 6 N/A N/A N/A
617
Table C-15. AW70, Style A (GXa 233) Interface Card Parameters (Continued)

Primary Ethernet (3Com 3C900 PCI 9 N/A N/A Slot 6 (PCI)
Ethernet)
Nodebus or Secondary Ethernet 10 300 N/A Slot 4 (ISA/PCI Combo)
(3Com 3C509 ISA Ethernet – optional) –or–
Allen-Bradley 1784-KTX N/A DC000 Slot 2 (ISA)
–or– –or– –or– –or–
Allen-Bradley 1784-KTX N/A DC000 Slot 2 (ISA)
ColorGraphics Dual/Quad-head Video N/A Automatic N/A Slot 7 (PCI)
Card Selection
1.
Requires driver on diskette K0200LY.
2.
The integrated sound function must have the driver loaded to be used. Refer to the
documentation included with your 70 Series processor.
WP70, Style A Hardware Parameters (GXa 233)

Table C-16 shows card slot positions and other hardware information for WP70, Style A
processors.
Table C-16. WP70, Style A (GXa 233) Interface Card Parameters

COM 2 3 2F8 N/A N/A
COM 1 4 3F8 N/A N/A
Floppy / 1.6 GB Tape Drive 6 N/A N/A N/A
Primary Ethernet 9 N/A N/A Slot 6 (PCI)
(3Com 3C900 PCI Ethernet)
Nodebus or Secondary Ethernet 10 300 N/A Slot 4 (ISA/PCI
(3Com 3C509 ISA Ethernet – optional) Combo)
Not used 11 N/A N/A N/A
618
Table C-16. WP70, Style A (GXa 233) Interface Card Parameters (Continued)

Card Selection
1.
2.
Card Installation in AW/WP70, Style A Workstations (GXa 233)

Refer to Figure 9-6 for internal card slot positions for the GXa-based processor.
To install a card in the AW70, Style A or WP70, Style A (GXa 233) processor, refer to the proce-
dure described in “Card Installation in GX-Based 70 Series Processors” on page 355, and the fol-
lowing tables, which list the proper card locations for this processor:
Table C-17. AW70, Style A (GXa 233) Card Slot Locations

Slot 2 (ISA) Allen-Bradley 1784-KTX ISA card
Slot 3 (ISA/PCI Combo) DigiBoard
Slot 4 (ISA/PCI Combo) 3Com 3C509 Ethernet ISA card (for Ethernet or Nodebus)
Slot 7 (PCI) Dual or Quad Pro Lightning V2 (optional for dual/quad-head video)
video card
Table C-18. WP70, Style A (GXa 233) Card Slot Locations

Slot 7 (PCI) Dual or Quad Pro Lightning V2 (optional for dual/quad-head video)
video card
619
The card is now installed in the GXa-based 70 Series processor.

To install any drivers for the cards, if necessary, refer to Hardware and Software Specific Instructions
for 70 Series Processors (GXA Pentium II) AW70A (P99*N), WP70 (P98*L) and AW70B (P97*G)
(B0400PV) for instructions.
AW70, Style B Overview (PentiumPro 200)

Figure C-9 serves as a general reference, showing the cable connection points and rear panel lay-
out of the AW70, Style B workstation. The specific card configurations for each of these worksta-
tions are provided in Table C-20.
The front panel layout for the AW70, Style B workstation (PentiumPro 200) is similar to the
NOTE
Shaded card or device entries in Table C-19 are not configurable. These values are
set by the system and cannot be altered.
AW70, Style B Hardware Parameters (PentiumPro 200)

Table C-19 shows the card slot position naming conventions for this version of the AW70, Style B
workstation. Slot positions are shown in Figure C-10.
Table C-19. AW70, Style B (PentiumPro 200) Interface Card Parameters

COM2 3 COM2=2F8 N/A N/A
DigiBoard Slot 3, ISA (3)
(port 4) COM6=138
Status=140
COM 1 4 3F8 N/A N/A
Floppy drive / 1.6 GB tape drive 6 N/A N/A N/A
Parallel port (for LPT1) 7 378 N/A N/A
Integrated Sound (MIDI) 9 N/A N/A N/A
620
Table C-19. AW70, Style B (PentiumPro 200) Interface Card Parameters (Continued)

2
Primary Ethernet (for I/A Series) 10 N/A N/A Slot 5, PCI (1)
(PCI Ethernet card)
Adaptec SCSI Adapter 102 N/A N/A Slot 7, PCI (3)
Primary IDE for CD-ROM drive and 14 N/A N/A N/A
hard drive
ISA Ethernet Card for Allen-Bradley 15 110, 300 N/A Slot 4, ISA/PCI
-or- –or– Combo
Allen-Bradley 1784-KTX N/A N/A
1.
page 366.
2.
Shared interrupt.
Card Installation in AW70, Style B Workstations

(PentiumPro 200)
To install a card in the AW70, Style B workstation, proceed as follows:
2. Find out which ISA or PCI slot the card must occupy. Refer to the following table for
Table C-20. AW70, Style B (PentiumPro 200) Card Slot Locations

Slot 1 ISA (1) Fieldbus PIO Interface (PC-FB)
Slot 3 ISA (3) DigiBoard
Slot 4 ISA/PCI Combo A-B 1784-KTX
Slot 5 PCI (1) Primary 3Com 3C5901 or 3C900 PCI Ethernet
Slot 6 PCI (2) Matrox Millennium or Dual or Quad Pro Lightning V2
(optional for dual/quad-head video) Video Card2
Slot 7 PCI (3) Adaptec SCSI Adapter
1.
The 3Com 3C590 PCI Ethernet card is an earlier model than the 3Com 3C900 PCI
Ethernet card.
2.
If the PCI Ethernet card and video card are both used, they must occupy these slots. If
they do not, the workstation will crash the Ethernet network, due to communications
failures.
621
NOTE
Ethernet card.
card.
the captive screw located on the bracket. If available, refer to PowerMate
Pro2200/2180 Series User’s Guide, in the section “Installing an Expansion Board”.
document).
thumb screws.
AW70, Style B Overview (Professional PII 266)

Figure C-9 on page 606 serves as a general reference, showing the cable connection points and
rear panel layout of the AW70, Style B workstation (Professional PII 266). The specific card
configurations for each of these workstations are provided in Table C-22.
The front panel layout for AW70, Style B workstations (Professional PII 266) is similar to the
NOTE
Shaded card or device entries in Table C-21 on page 623 are not configurable.
AW70, Style B Hardware Parameters (Professional PII 266)

Table C-21 shows the card slot position naming conventions for this version of the AW70, Style B
workstation. Slot positions are shown in Figure C-10.
3.
622
Table C-21. AW70, Style B (Professional PII 266) Interface Card Parameters

DigiBoard COM3=120 Slot 3, ISA (3)
(port 4) Status=140
-or- –or– –or–
Allen-Bradley 1784-KTX N/A DC00
COM 1 4 3F8 N/A N/A
-or- –or– –or–
Primary 3C900 Ethernet PCI card 102 N/A N/A Slot 5, PCI (1)
–or–
Adaptec SCSI Adapter Slot 6, PCI (2)
Integrated Video 11 N/A N/A N/A
Primary IDE for CD-ROM drive 14 N/A N/A N/A
ISA Ethernet Card for Allen-Bradley 15 110, 300 N/A Slot 2, ISA (2)
1.
page 366.
2.
Shared interrupt.
623
Card Installation in AW70, Style B Workstations (Professional

PII 266)
To install a card in the AW70, Style B (Professional PII 266) workstation, proceed as follows:
2. Find out which ISA or PCI slot the card must occupy. Refer to the following table for
Table C-22. AW70, Style B (Professional II 266) Card Slot Locations

Slot 1 ISA (1) Fieldbus PIO Interface (PC-FB) –or– A-B 1784-KTX
Slot 2 ISA (2) A-B 1784-KTX
Slot 3 ISA (3) DigiBoard –or– A-B 1784-KTX
Slot 4 ISA/PCI Number 9 Visual Technologies Imagine 128 II video card or Dual or
Combo Quad Pro Lightning V2 (optional for dual/quad-head video) Video Card1
Slot 6 PCI (2) Adaptec SCSI Adapter
1.
If the PCI Ethernet card and video card are both used, they must occupy these slots. If they do
not, the workstation crashes the Ethernet network, due to communication failures.
NOTE
Ethernet card.
card.
the captive screw located on the bracket. If available, refer to PowerMate Professional
Series User’s Guide, in the section “Installing an Expansion Board”.
document).
4.
624
thumb screws.
AW70, Style B Overview (Enterprise 300)

Figure C-12 serves as a general reference, showing the cable connection points and rear panel lay-
out of the AW70, Style B workstation. The specific card configurations for each of these worksta-
tions are provided in Table C-23 below.
The front panel layout for the AW70, Style B workstation (Enterprise 300) is similar to the front
panel layout in Figure C-11.
AW70, Style B Hardware Parameters (Enterprise 300)

Table C-23 shows card slot positions and other hardware information for AW70, Style B
processors.
Table C-23. AW70, Style B (Enterprise 300) Interface Card Parameters

DigiBoard - Multi-Port Serial Card COM3=120 Slot 1(ISA)
(port 4) Status=140
COM 1 4 3F8 N/A N/A
Universal Serial Bus (USB - not seen in 92 N/A N/A N/A
Windows NT resources) –and/or–
Primary Ethernet (3Com 3C900 PCI Slot 4 (PCI)
Ethernet) –and/or– –or–
Adaptec SCSI Adapter Slot 5 (PCI)
625
Table C-23. AW70, Style B (Enterprise 300) Interface Card Parameters (Continued)

Secondary Ethernet or Nodebus 10 310 N/A Slot 2 (ISA/PCI
PC-FB card 11 340 D8000 Slot 1 (ISA)
Primary Ethernet (3Com 3C900 PCI 143 N/A N/A Slot 4 (PCI)
Ethernet) –and/or– –or–
Adaptec SCSI Adapter Slot 5 (PCI)
Primary IDE for CD-ROM drive 14 N/A N/A N/A
1.
2.
Shared interrupt with IRQ14.
3.
Shared interrupt with IRQ9.
Card Installation in AW/WP70, Style A Workstations (Enterprise

300)
To install a card in the AW70, Style A or WP70, Style A (Enterprise 300) workstations, proceed as
follows:
NOTE
1. Depending upon the system configuration and population of that system, set up
interface cards as defined in Table C-23.
2. Windows NT 4.0 does not recognize the AGP slot unless ServicePack 3
(Foxboro part number K0200QN) has been installed. Refer to Software Installation
(Windows NT Operating System) (B0400JG) for instructions on installing
ServicePack 3.
1. Ensure the processor is shut down, and not plugged into a power socket.
2. Determine which ISA, PCI, or AGP slot the card must occupy. Refer to Figure C-13
and to Table C-24 for card slot locations.
626
Table C-24. AW70, Style B (Enterprise 300) Card Slot Locations

Slot 1 (ISA) Fieldbus PIO Interface (PC-FB) –or– DigiBoard –or– Allen-Bradley 1784-KTX
ISA card
Slot 2 (ISA/PCI 3Com 3C509 Ethernet ISA card (for Ethernet or Nodebus) –or– Allen-Bradley
Combo) 1784-KTX
Slot 4 (PCI) 3Com 3C900 Ethernet PCI card
Slot 5 (PCI) Adaptec SCSI Adapter
3. Remove the processor cover. There are three captive screws at the rear of the processor.
Remove these screws, and carefully slide the cover toward the rear of the processor
while lifting it away from the unit.
card.
5. Slide the card into the proper ISA, PCI, or AGP slot. Attach it to the support bracket
with the captive screw located on the bracket. If available, refer to NEC PowerMate
Enterprise User’s Guide, in the section “Installing an Expansion Board”.
6. Attach the required cables to the card (if necessary - refer to the card’s section below).
7. Insert the metal tabs on the top and bottom of the processor cover into their slots on
the chassis, and slide the cover toward the front panel. Tighten the three captive
screws.
The card is now installed in the 70 Series processor.
Refer to Hardware and Software Specific Instructions for 70 Series Processors (Enterprise Pentium II)
(B0400PU) for software installation instructions.
AW70, Style B Overview (GXa 300)

AW/WP70, Style A (GXa Pentium II 300) workstation. The specific card configurations for each
of these workstations are provided in Table C-25.
NOTE
Shaded card or device entries in Table C-25 are not configurable. These values are
set by the system and cannot be altered.
627
AW70, Style B Hardware Parameters (GXa 300)

Table C-25 shows card slot positions and other hardware information for AW70, Style B
processors.
Table C-25. AW70, Style B (GXa 300) Interface Card Parameters

DigiBoard - Multi-Port Serial card for COM3=120 Slot 3 (ISA/PCI
Combo)
Alarm printer COM4=128
Modbus COM5=130
Modem COM6=138
Status=140
COM 1 4 3F8 N/A N/A
Floppy drive / 1.6 GB Tape Drive 6 N/A N/A N/A
Adaptec SCSI Adapter 9 N/A N/A Slot 7 (PCI)
Allen-Bradley 1784-KTX 10 N/A DC000 Slot 2 (ISA)
Primary Ethernet 14 N/A N/A Slot 5 (PCI)
(3Com 3C900 PCI Ethernet)
Secondary Ethernet or Nodebus 15 300 N/A Slot 4 (ISA/PCI
Card Selection
1.
2.
628
Card Installation in AW70, Style B Workstations (GXa 300)

Refer to Figure 9-6 for internal card slot positions for the GXa-based processor.
To install a card in the AW70, Style B (GXa 300) processor, refer to the procedure described in
“Card Installation in GX-Based 70 Series Processors” on page 355, and Table C-26 below, which
lists the proper card locations for this processor.
Table C-26. AW70, Style B (GXa 300) Card Slot Locations

Slot 2 (ISA) Allen-Bradley 1784-KTX ISA card
Slot 3 (ISA/PCI Combo) DigiBoard
Slot 6 (PCI) Dual or Quad Pro Lightning V2
(optional for dual/quad-head video) video card
Slot 7 (PCI) Adaptec SCSI Adapter
The card is now installed in the GXa-based 70 Series processor.

To install any drivers for the cards, if necessary, refer to Hardware and Software Specific Instructions
for 70 Series Processors (GXA Pentium II) AW70A (P99*N), WP70 (P98*L) and AW70B (P97*G)
(B0400PV) for instructions.
Printer Connections in AW/WP70, Style A and AW70,

Style B Workstations (All Types)
The following printers can be connected to the AW70/WP70, Style A and AW70, Style B work-
stations: 80-column dot-matrix printer, 132-column dot-matrix printer, and color PCL3
InkJet printer.
! WARNING
Before connecting the ac power line to a peripheral device, ensure that the voltage at
the ac receptacle matches the power requirements indicated on the device data label.
! WARNING
If you substitute an alternate type of plug (or other connection) in place of the one
supplied with the power cord, shock hazard protection requires that you follow
proper polarity and safety earthing (grounding) method.
629
Setting Up the Printer

To set up the printer for the AW70/WP70, Style A or AW70, Style B workstation:
1. Connect the printer’s power cord to a power source.
2. Connect the printer’s communications cable:
to the P166 version of the AW70/WP70, Style A as shown in Figure C-14, or
to the PentiumPro and Professional PII versions of the AW70, Style B as shown in
Figure C-15, or
to the GX-based versions of the 70 Series processor, as shown in Figure 9-25.
3. To check on (or set) the printer’s operating parameters, refer to “Peripheral Device
Operating Parameter Settings” on page 444.
4. Set up the printer for Windows NT; refer to the Hardware and Software Specific
Instructions for 70 Series Processors document included with your processor, or Soft-
NOTE
To install a DigiBoard for the dot-matrix printers to connect, refer to “Installing a
DigiBoard” on page 361.
Color PCL3 Printer

B/W Dot-Matrix Printer 80 DigiBoard P0913TV
P0901ED/EE/EF P0912SG P0912SF
P4
OR P3
P2
P1 P0900ZR
3.8 m (15 ft)
See Note
Color Dot-Matrix Printer 132 P0912VK or or
7.5 m (25 ft) P0912VK
P0913AV/AW
7.5 m (25 ft)
AW70/WP70 Style A
(P166) B/W Dot-Matrix Printer 80
P0901ED/EE/EF
NOTE:
Either or both serial printers may connect to either or
both port connectors (COM1/COM2). Color Dot-Matrix Printer 132
P0913AV/AW
Figure C-14. Printer Cable Connections to AW70/WP70, Style A (P166)
630
P4
B/W Dot-Matrix Printer 80 P0912SG
P3
P0901ED/EE/EF P0912VK
7.5 m (25 ft) P2
P1 DigiBoard
P0912SF
OR
See Note
or or
P0912VK
7.5 m (25 ft)
Color Dot-Matrix Printer 132
P0913AV/AW
AW/WP70 Style A*
Color PCL3 Printer
AW70 Style B** B/W Dot-Matrix Printer 80
P0913TV
P0901ED/EE/EF
P0900ZR
3.8 m (15 ft)
NOTE:
Color Dot-Matrix Printer 132
Either or both serial printers may connect to either or
P0913AV/AW
both port connectors (COM1/COM2).
*Represents the following AW/WP70, Style A workstation: Professional PII 233
**Represents the following AW70, Style B workstations: PentiumPro 266 and Professional PII 266
Figure C-15. Printer Cable Connections to AW70/WP70, Style A (Professional PII 233)
and AW70 Style B (PentiumPro 266 and Professional PII 266)
You have completed connecting the printers to the AW70/WP70, Style A or AW70, Style B
workstation.
PC-FB Card Installation for AW70, Style A and AW70,

Style B
To install a PC-FB card and connect it to a Fieldbus (refer to Table 9-4 for part numbers):
♦ Configure the PC-FB card jumper settings (refer to Figure C-16).
♦ Install the configured PC-FB card into the correct slot in the AW70, Style A or AW70,
Style B processors. Refer to one of the following overviews for card slot locations and
installation instructions:
♦ “AW/WP70, Style A Overview (GXa 233)” on page 617
631

♦ “AW70, Style B Overview (Enterprise 300)” on page 625
♦ “AW70, Style B Overview (GXa 300)” on page 627
♦ Hardware and Software Specific Instructions for 70 Series Processors (GX1
Pentium II) AW70A (P99*P), WP70 (P98*M) and AW70B (P97*H) (B0400SA)
♦ Hardware and Software Specific Instructions For 70 Series Processors (GX1
Pentium III) AW70A (P99*Q), WP70 (P98*N) and AW70B (P97*J) (B0400RC)
♦ Hardware and Software Specific Instructions For 70 Series Processors
(GX1 Pentium III) AW70A (P99*R), WP70 (P98*P), and AW70B (P97*K)
(B0400SK).
♦ Connect the PC-FB card to the Fieldbus (refer to “Connecting Fieldbus Modules to
the PC-FB Card” on page 360).
♦ Install the PC-FB driver. Refer to the Hardware and Software Specific Instructions for
70 Series Processors document included with your processor, or for older processors,
refer to Software Installation (Windows NT Operating System) (B0400JG) for
instructions.
NOTE
If you install a PC-FB card after installing I/A Series software, you must install the
PC-FB card’s software driver.
♦ Ensure that the card’s software driver is installed. Refer to the Hardware and Software
Specific Instructions for 70 Series Processors document included with your processor,
or for older processors, refer to Software Installation (Windows NT Operating System)
(B0400JG) for instructions.
Setting Jumpers on the PC-FB Card

Refer to Figure C-16 and configure jumpers J1-J5 on the PC-FB card to match the interrupt
request (Jumper J5) listed above for each processor.
632
Jumper J4
I/O Address – 340 Jumper J1, J2, J3
Shared Memory
Address Space
(D8000) Port A
328
338
348
358
Jumper J5
IRQ – 11 (For all other 70 Series processors)
IRQ – 9 (For Professional PII 233 or 266) Port B
A14
320
330
340
350
A15
A16
For GX-based processors, refer to the
IRQ
Hardware and Software Specific Instructions
J1
J2
J3
for 70 Series Processors document included

11
10
9
8
15
12
with your processor.
Figure C-16. PC-FB Card Jumper Settings
This PC-FB card driver must be installed into the Fieldbus. Refer to the Hardware and Software
Specific Instructions for 70 Series Processors document included with your processor, or for older
processors, refer to Software Installation (Windows NT Operating System) (B0400JG) for installa-
tion instructions.
Installing an Allen-Bradley KTX Communication

Interface ISA Card
To install an Allen-Bradley KTX Communication Interface ISA card (refer to Table 9-4 for part
numbers):
♦ Configure the jumper settings for the Allen-Bradley 1784-KTX card (see
Figure C-17).
♦ Install the configured Allen-Bradley 1784-KTX card into the workstation. Refer to
one of the following overviews for card slot locations and installation instructions.
♦ “AW/WP70, Style A Overview (GXa 233)” on page 617
♦ “AW70, Style B Overview (Enterprise 300)” on page 625
♦ “AW70, Style B Overview (GXa 300)” on page 627
633
♦ Hardware and Software Specific Instructions for 70 Series Processors (GX1

Pentium II) AW70A (P99*P), WP70 (P98*M) and AW70B (P97*H) (B0400SA)
♦ Hardware and Software Specific Instructions For 70 Series Processors (GX1 Pentium
III) AW70A (P99*Q), WP70 (P98*N) and AW70B (P97*J) (B0400RC)
♦ Hardware and Software Specific Instructions For 70 Series Processors
(GX1 Pentium III) AW70A (P99*R), WP70 (P98*P), and AW70B (P97*K)
(B0400SK).
♦ Ensure the card’s software driver is installed. Refer to Hardware and Software Specific
Instructions for 70 Series Processors included with your processor, or for older proces-
sors, refer to Software Installation (Windows NT Operating System) (B0400JG) for
instructions.
NOTE
These instructions are provided if, after receiving your system, you install an
Allen-Bradley 1784-KTX card in your system, or you must reinstall the I/A Series
software.
634
Setting A-B KTX Communication Interface ISA Card Jumpers

Refer to Figure C-17 and configure the jumpers on the KTX card to match the information in the
AW70, Style A and AW70, Style B overview sections above.
For GX1-based processors, refer to the Hardware and Software Specific Instructions for 70 Series
Processors document included with your processor.
For the GXa 233 processor, set to either 10 or 11 (see above), and
for the GXa 300 processor, set to 10;
see the appropriate Hardware Parameter tables above. SW3 SW4
7 8 9A 789
For the Enterprise 233 and 300 processor, set to either 10 or 11;
3 45 6
3 45 6
A
BC D E
BC D
see the appropriate Hardware Parameter tables above. E
F 12 F 12
0 0
For the P166 and Professional PII 233 processor, set to 10. D C
Channel 1 address
For the Professional PII 266, set to 9. shown in D700: position
For the Pentium Channel 1

Pro 200 SW3 SW4
789 789
processor,
34 56
34 56
ABCD
ABCD
EF 12
set to 15.
EF 12
0 0
Interrupts
CH1
3 Interrupts TP
4
5 CH1
7
9
10
11
12
15
NOTE: Only one jumper is used to set the interrupt on this card. Multiple jumpers are shown to
illustrate the possible positions for this jumper.
Figure C-17. Jumper Settings – 1784-KTX Communication Interface Card
For detailed information about the jumper settings for the Allen-Bradley 1784-KTX
communication interface card, refer to the documentation supplied with the unit.
Refer to “Connecting the AW70, Style A and AW70, Style B Processor to the Allen-Bradley Data
Highway” on page 371 to connect the Allen-Bradley KTX communication interface ISA card to
the Allen-Bradley Data HighwayPlus™.
635
636
Index
120 MB disk drive 103, 180

indicators 180
installation 180
precautions 156
SCSI device addresses 181
terminators 181
150 MB streaming tape drive
150 MB switches and termination 172
17-inch display
local
to WP51B/AW51B 407
to WP51B1/AW51B1 408
to WP51D/AW51D 406, 410
1x12 FBM 207
configuration 207
main and expanded FBMs 151
1x12 FBM Configurable Mounting Structure Kit 55
1x12 FBM mounting structure 55
power connections 86
1x8
1x8 and 1x8 FBM mounting structure
1x8 FBM 55, 205
1x8 mounting structure 54, 196
peripheral cable routing 346
1x8, 2x8, and FBM mounting structures
field connections 229
20-inch/21-inch display
hardened 59
21-inch display 406
cabling to WP30 436
local
to AW51C 409
to WP51A/AW51A 407
to WP51B/AW51B 408
to WP51B1/AW51B1 408
to WP51D/AW51D 406, 410
to WP51E and AW51E 406, 410
to X Terminal 409
remote
to WP50/AW50 and WP51A/AW51A 406, 411
to WP51B/AW51B and AW51C 406, 412
637
B0193AC – Rev U Index
to WP51B1/AW51B1 407, 413

to WP51D/AW51D 407, 414
to WP51E/AW51E 407, 414
to X Terminal 407, 413
2x8 54
2x8 FBM 55, 208
configuration 208
50 Series
A and B modules 86
A-, B-, C-, D-, E- and F-size modules 101
A-, B-, C-, D-, E-, and F-size modules and processors
installation 108
A-size and B-size modules 104
cabling of mirrored disk 160, 161, 162, 163, 164
cabling of non-mirrored disk 160, 161, 162, 163, 165
C-size and D-size modules 104
data storage 86
data storage devices 155, 157
display placement and mounting 59
dual workstation displays 61
E-size, and F-size processors 105
module installation 108
mounting structures 56
stacking devices 60
storage devices cabling 159
70 Series
Allen-Bradley KTX card installation 369
AW70, Style A
card slot positions 352, 355
current version
GX1 (P99*S) 598
GX1 (P99*T) 598
previous version
Enterprise 233 612, 615
GX1 (P99*P) 598
GX1 (P99*Q) 598
GX1 (P99*R) 598
GXa 233 617
P166 601, 603
Professional PII 233 606, 608
peripherals 339
AW70, Style B
current version
GX1 (P97*L) 598
previous version
GX1 (P97*H) 598
638
Index B0193AC – Rev U
GX1 (P97*J) 598

GX1 (P97*K) 598
GXa 300 628
PentiumPro 200 620, 621
DigiBoard 628
DigiBoard(PentiumPro 200) 620
DigiBoard(Professional PII 266) 623
peripherals 339
card installation 355
current version
GX1 (P99*S, P98*Q, P97*L) 598
GX1 (P99*T, P98*R, P97*L) 598
previous version
Enterprise 233 615
Enterprise 300 626
GX1 (P99*P, P98*M, P97*H) 598
GX1 (P99*Q, P98*N, P97*J) 598
GX1 (P99*R, P98*P, P97*K) 598
GXa 233 619
GXa 300 629
P166 603
PentiumPro 200 621
Professional PII 233 608
determining the type of processor 593
DigiBoard 361
systems without 362
Ethernet card 356, 366, 616
on-board video function 372
PC-FB card 359
previous versions 631
printer installation
previous versions (all) 629
printers
installation 362, 380
resetting the CMOS BIOS 359, 599
sound 366
video card
multiple displays 372
single display 372
voltage selector switch 350
workstation peripheral installation procedures 348
WP70, Style A
current version
GX1 (P98*Q) 598
639
GX1 (P98*R) 598

previous version
GX1 (P98*M) 598
GX1 (P98*N) 598
GX1 (P98*P) 598
GXa 233 618
P166 602, 603
peripherals 339
Zenith-based workstations 592
A
A-B KTX card
installation procedures (70 Series) 369
A-B Station 574
ac power transfer switch 91
Adapter box (AK438AA) 217
Addresses, SCSI
120 MB disk drive 181
50 Series 157
AP20 storage devices 170
last one in chain 187
WP50/51 storage devices 166
Air conditioning
hardened enclosure 31, 34, 53
Alarm
FBM output channel 335
Alarm Manager
configuring for multi-head video configurations 375
Allen-Bradley Data Highway
cabling 465
connecting to (70 Series) 371
Allen-Bradley Data Highway Gateway 15
cabling 569
Allen-Bradley KTX card
installation (70 Series) 369
Allen-Bradley Station 574
Alphanumeric keyboard
connecting to GCIO 440
Annunciator and annunciator/numeric keyboard
installation (WP30) 441
Annunciator keyboard
how to connect 424
AP20
configured inside SCSI bus ends 186
data storage devices 155
dot-matrix printer 429
install peripheral devices 429
640
installation rules 188

P-adapter 169
recommended SCSI address assignments 170
storage devices
general information 169
jumpers 173
packaging 169
AP50
application 403
Application Workstation Series 70
Style A, see AW70, Style A 348, 591
Style B, see AW70, Style B 348, 592
Application Workstation Server 70 593
A-size module 101
A-size module installation
in MIC 109
in MIW 109
in MMS or 2xMMS 110
in NEMA 4/4X 46, 110
ATM Communications 389, 390, 391, 539
AP51D, WP51D, and AW51D 392
AP51E, WP51E and AW51E 393
Auto/Manual station
cabling 558
grounding 560
installation 63
interface 451, 553, 558
interface cabling 553
mounting 62
Auxiliary horn connection 427
AW70, Style A
current version
GX1 (P99*S) 598
GX1 (P99*T) 598
previous version
Enterprise 233 615
Enterprise 300 626
GX1 (P99*P) 598
GX1 (P99*R) 598
GXa 233 619
GXa 300 629
P166 603
current version
641
GX1 (P99*S) 598

GX1 (P99*T) 598
previous version
GX1 (P99*P) 598
GX1 (P99*Q) 598
GX1 (P99*R) 598
GXa 233 617
P166 601, 603
DigiBoard 361
systems without 362
Ethernet card 356, 616
installation 366
PC-FB card 359
peripherals 339
sound 366
video card for multiple displays 372
AW70, Style B
previous version
PentiumPro 200 621
current version
GX1 (P97*L) 598
previous version
GX1 (P97*H) 598
GX1 (P97*J) 598
GX1 (P97*K) 598
GXa 300 628
DigiBoard 361, 628
systems without 362
DigiBoard(PentiumPro 200) 620
DigiBoard(Professional PII 266) 623
installation 366
PC-FB card 359
previous version 631
peripherals 339
642

sound 366
B
B/W dot-matrix 80 printer
connecting to CP10 or AP20 429
Balun 331
installation 332
Battery backup 92, 93, 96, 97
power 66
Bezel
removing P-adapter 170
Bill of lading 1
BIOS
settings for 70 Series processors 599
settings for 70 Series workstations 359
Bridge structure
mounting details 7
Bridged unit 5, 69, 210, 241
B-size module 101
B-size module installation
in MIC 109
in MIW 109
in MMS or 2xMMS 110
in NEMA 4/4X 46, 110
C
Cable
remote extension 221
Cable balun 331
installation 332
Cable balun module with Intelligent Transmitters 331
Cable connections
keyboard 428
Cable replacement
Integrator 30 for Allen-Bradley PLCs 474
Cable separation requirements
power cable 77
Cable ties
for MII-to-AUI converter and SQE eliminator 488
for MII-to-AUI converter only 511
Cabling
120 MB hard disk drive 182
A/M station 558
Allen-Bradley Data Highway Gateway 15 569
AP20 183
643
Auto/Manual station 558

Carrierband LAN Interface 544
communication devices 451
communication processor 468
Device Gateway 572
Device Integrator 30 475
drop 546
dual floppy disk drive 179
dual Nodebus 10BaseT interface 501
to 50 Series 501, 505
to 70 Series 503, 508
to Server 70 504, 509
dual Nodebus extender 511
to 50 Series processor 513
to Server 70 processor 526
dual Nodebus interface 486
to 50 Series 490, 495
to 70 Series 494, 500
Fieldbus and Nodebus 191
Fieldbus extension 191
hydrostatic tank gauge 564
hydrostatic tank gauge interface 562
Information Network Interface 481
Instrument Gateway 561
Integrator 30 for Allen-Bradley PLCs 462
Integrator 30 for Modicon 456, 460
INTERSPEC Integrator 30 452
local dual Nodebus 10BaseT interface 501
to 50 Series 501
to 70 Series 503
to Server 70 504
local dual Nodebus interface 490
to 50 Series 490
to 70 Series 494
local Fieldbus extension 192
Mass Flowmeter Interface 565
medium-distance dual Nodebus 10BaseT interface 505
medium-distance dual Nodebus interface 495
Modicon gateway 15 567
Panel Display and A/M Station 553
panel display and A/M station 557
remote extension 209, 210, 211, 213, 214, 218, 219, 220, 221
644
remote Fieldbus extension 200

routing 215, 240, 343, 344
SPECTRUM master gateway 479
SPECTRUM slave gateway 477
streaming tape drive 183
Tank Processor 10 to Fieldbus 564
touchscreen 423, 424
Card installation
50 Series processors
PCI cards and UPA Graphics card 391
SBus cards 388
70 Series workstations 355
current version
GX1 (P99*S, P98*Q, P97*L) 598
GX1 (P99*T, P98*R, P97*L) 598
previous version
Enterprise 233 615
Enterprise 300 626
GX1 (P99*P, P98*M, P97*H) 598
GX1 (P99*Q, P98*N, P97*J) 598
GX1 (P99*R, P98*P, P97*K) 598
GXa 233 619
GXa 300 629
P166 603
PentiumPro 200 621
Card slot locations (GX-based Pentium II) 357
Card slot positions
50 Series processors
AP50, WP50, and AW50 388
AP51A, WP51A, and AW51A 388
AP51B, WP51B, and AW51B 389
AP51B1, WP51B1, and AW51B1 390
AW51C 390
AW70, Style A 352, 353
AW70, Style A workstations 352, 355
current version
GX1 (P99*S) 598
GX1 (P99*T) 598
previous version
GX1 (P99*P) 598
GX1 (P99*Q) 598
GX1 (P99*R) 598
GXa 233 617, 619
P166 601, 603
645

AW70, Style B 354
AW70, Style B workstations 353, 356, 598, 628
current version
GX1 (P97*L) 598
previous version
Enterprise 300 627
GX1 (P97*H) 598
GX1 (P97*J) 598
GX1 (P97*K) 598
GXa 300 629
WP70, Style A workstations 353, 356
current version
GX1 (P98*Q) 598
GX1 (P98*R) 598
previous version
GX1 (P98*M) 598
GX1 (P98*N) 598
GX1 (P98*P) 598
GX1 (P98*Q) 598
GX1 (P98*R) 598
GXa 233 618, 619
P166 602, 603
Carrierband LAN Interface
cabling 544
Checks
pre-power switch-on 579
Close-coupled panel display station installation 63
CMP10
application 431, 432, 433
dot-matrix printer 429
Color PostScript printer operating parameters 444, 446
Color printer
mounting 59
Colorgraphic
dual-/quad-head video card 352, 353, 354
Communication devices cabling 451
Communication processor
cabling 468
types of 107
Configuration selector (P0970VB) 429, 430, 431, 432, 434, 457, 460, 465
assembly kit 472
switch pinout 471
Converter
646
fiber optic 544

MII-to-AUI (for Model 51, Style E processor) 392, 393
serial-to-parallel 341
C-size module 101
C-size processor installation
in MIC 109
in MIW 109
in MMS or 2xMMS 110
in NEMA 4/4X 46, 110
D
Data storage devices 155
50 Series 86, 157
P-adapter jumpers 170
rules for AP20 devices 188
WP50/51 SCSI addresses 166
Device Gateway
cabling 572
Device Integrator 30 107, 451, 475, 476, 477
cabling 475
DigiBoard
70 Series workstation installation 361
connections to a Modbus (70 Series) 364
systems without 362
DigiBoard card 352, 354
Direct connect wires 223, 224
Discrete wire TCA
installation 230
labels 224
DNBI 487
local 490
medium distance 495
to 70 Series processor 366, 486
local 494
medium distance 500
to A-B Station 574
DNBT 501
local 501
medium distance 505
local 503
medium distance 508
to Server 70 processor
local 504
medium distance 509
DNBX
647

to 70 Series processor 366, 522
to A-B Station 575
Dot-matrix printer
mounting 59
Drop cable 546
D-size module 102
D-size module installation
in MIC 109
in MIW 109
in MMS or 2xMMS 110
in NEMA 4/4X 46, 110
Dual Nodebus extender
cabling 511
Dual Nodebus interface 487, 501
Dual workstation display 61
cabling 415
rebooting 415
E
Earth configurations 88
Earth connections
Field Enclosure 4 88
Metal Enclosures 89
Earthing
field wire 210, 221, 222
green wire 90
I/O signal shields 242
Electrical power requirements
fan power 92
Enclosures
bridged 5, 69, 210, 241
cable routing 466
hardened, NEMA 4/4X 31
site planning 31
Metal ME24/32 20
other 89, 149, 151, 229
pipe mounting 17, 18
wall mounting 18
Equipment
earth connections 88
mounting 3
E-size processor 102
E-size processor installation
648
in metal enclosure 22
in MIC 109
in MIW 109
in MMS or 2xMMS 110
in NEMA 4/4X 46, 110
Ethernet card 604, 609, 622, 624
sensing the cable 368
Extender modules 210, 221, 222
External memory battery backup 93, 94, 95
installation 95
External status tap 93, 94, 95
installation 97
F
Factory power
power cable 77
Fan power 92
Fast SCSI/Ethernet Card 388, 389, 390, 528, 533, 535
Fault-tolerant module connector
FBI 151
FBM loops with external power 331
FBM01 connections 243
FBM01/04/05 in-line resistor 244
FBM02 connections 246, 309
FBM04/05 connections 254
FBMs with nonincendive field circuits 242
649
Fiber optic converter 544

Fiber optic Fieldbus extension 192
Field connections 229, 239, 263
to discrete wire block 232
to plug connector block 236
Field Enclosure 4
mounting 16
wall mounting 18
cable entry information 12
floor mounting 25
for metal enclosure 25
mounting 11
for floor-mounted 74
for wall-mounted 76
wall mounting 14, 27, 28
Field enclosures
wall-mounting 76
Field input/output wiring
marshalling cabinet 242
nonincendive circuits 242
Field wire
extender module 210, 221, 222
grouping within enclosures 240
Fieldbus
cabling 191
connections with PC-FB card (70 Series) 359
extension 191
modems 192
Y-adapter 148, 149, 151
Fieldbus Cluster I/O (and FBMs) 191
Fieldbus isolator 1x12 FBM 207
Fieldbus Isolator module
connection to PC-FB (Fieldbus) ISA card 360
installation 151
Fieldbus isolators installation 151
Fieldbus jumper
installation 144
Fieldbus Module Metal Enclosure 60 (ME60) 56
Fieldbus Modules
installation 149
nonincendive circuits 242
650
status connections 98
Floor mounting procedure
FE8 12, 25
Floppy disk 531
addressing (AP20) 174
high/low density selection 174
recommended types 157
TEAC 13332137-00F jumpers 176
TEAC FD-55GFR-141/701-U jumpers 174
FOXNET 146, 478
Front-mounted fault-tolerant module connector
installation 142
F-size processor 102
F-size processor installation
in MIC 109
in MIW 109
in MMS or 2xMMS 110
in NEMA 4/4X 46
G
GCIO 435
connecting alphanumeric keyboard 440
connectors and switches 435
installation
50 Series 419
70 Series 382
interface for WP30 435
Grounding
Auto/Manual Station 560
H
Hardened enclosure 31
air conditioning 31, 34, 53
site planning 31
Vortex cooler 31, 34, 53
Heat, over-temperature 29, 584
High voltage wires 239
Horn volume setting 427
Hydrostatic interface unit
Fieldbus cable connections 564
Hydrostatic tank gauge interface 451
cabling 562
I
I/A Series data storage devices
types and description 155
651
I/A Series metal Industrial Enclosures

power connection 81
I/O port addresses
AW70, Style A 352, 353
AW70, Style B 354, 598, 628
IE16 fan power 92
IE32 fan power 92
IEMFA and IEMFR
IEMFA mounting structure areas 20
IEMFR mounting structure areas 20
IETERM 21
Industrial Enclosure
IE16 or IE32 mounting 8
IE16 or IE32 vented type 9
IE16/32 earth connections 89
Industrial Enclosure 16
Industrial Enclosure 16 or 32
Industrial Enclosure 32
industrial pointing device 342, 424
Information Network Interface
cabling 481
INI 10 and INI 15 gateway cable replacement 475
Initial power-up procedures 579
Installation
120 MB disk drive 180
50 Series modules 108
50 Series storage devices 159
70 Series workstation-based peripheral devices 351
AP20
at end of SCSI bus 184
modular storage devices 178, 188
AW70, Style A-based peripheral devices 351
AW70, Style B-based peripheral devices 351
cable balun 332
close-coupled panel display station 63
Fieldbus Isolator Module 151
Fieldbus Module 149
GCIO
50 Series 419
70 Series 382
industrial pointing device 342, 424
652
keyboards 424
mouse or trackball 424
P0970VB configuration selector 472
peripheral devices 339
printers
50 Series 394
70 Series 380
rules for AP20 storage devices 188
separately mounted panel display station 64
VT100 compatible terminal 403
WP70, Style A-based peripheral devices 351
X- and Z-Modules 144
Y-adapter 148
Instrument Gateway
cable replacement 474
cabling 561
Integrated sound function
GX-based 70 Series processor 618, 619, 628
Integrator 30
INTERSPEC 451, 452, 453, 454, 455, 456
Integrator 30 for Allen-Bradley PLCs
cabling 462, 465
Integrator 30 for Modicon 474
cabling 456
connecting the cabling 460
Intelligent Transmitter 331
Interface cards
slot locations 357
INTERSPEC 451, 452, 453, 454, 455, 456
cabling 452
cabling connections 453
INTERSPEC Integrator 30 translator
controls and indicators 455
flunk jumper 452
Battery connection in memory backup power module 581
IRQs
AW70, Style A 352, 353
AW70, Style B 354, 598, 628
IT 331
J
Jumper settings
AP20-based data storage devices 173
TEAC 13332137-00F floppy controller 176
TEAC FD-55GFR-141-U/701-U floppy disk 174
Jumpers
653
in AP20-based storage devices 170

in modular type data storage devices 170
PC-FB card 359
previous 70 Series versions 632
K
Keyboard
auxiliary horn connection 427
cable connections 428
cable to WP30 441
horn volume setting 427
how to connect 424
label preparation 427
letterbug address setting 425
L
Letterbugs 425
assembly 147
definition 107
installation 145
Local dual Nodebus 10BaseT interface
cabling 501
to 50 Series 501
to 70 Series 503
to Server 70 504
Local dual Nodebus interface
cabling 490
to 50 Series 490
to 70 Series 494
Local Fieldbus configuration 144
Local Fieldbus extension 191
Local Nodebus 210, 211, 212, 213, 215, 216
Local Nodebus extension 209, 212, 213
Low voltage wires 239
M
Main and expansion FBM installation 150
Main power connections 65
Marshalling cabinet 242
Mass Flow Transmitter 565
Mass Flowmeter Interface
cabling 565
Mass flowmeter interface 451, 566
Medium-distance dual Nodebus 10BaseT interface
cabling 505
654

Medium-distance dual Nodebus interface
cabling 495
Memory backup power module
memory connection 581
Memory battery backup 92, 93, 96, 97
Metal Enclosures
fully vented conversion 22
Metal Field Enclosure 8 229
Metal Field Enclosures
floor mounting procedure (FE8) 12, 25
wall mounting procedure (FE8) 14, 27
Metal Termination Enclosure (IETERM) 21
MII connector (Model 51, Style E processor) 487, 511
MII-to-AUI converter 392, 393
installation
for DNBI 487
for DNBX 511
Mirrored hard disk drive
SCSI address 159
MMS 56
Modbus
connections to a DigiBoard (70 Series) 364
pinouts (70 Series) 365
Model CFS10 mass flowtube 565
Modem
Fieldbus 192
operating parameters 449
Modicon gateway 102, 107, 451, 567, 568, 569
Modular mounting structure 56
Module
balun 331
Module identifier (letterbug)
assembly 147
definition 107
installation 145
Module labeling 107
Module, A-size 101
Module, A-size, installation
in MIC 109
in MIW 109
in MMS or 2xMMS 110
in NEMA 4/4X 46, 110
Module, B-size 101
655
Module, B-size installation

in MIC 109
in MIW 109
in MMS or 2xMMS 110
in NEMA 4/4X 46, 110
Module, C-size 101
Module, D-size 102
Module, D-size, installation
in MIC 109
in MIW 109
in MMS or 2xMMS 110
in NEMA 4/4X 46, 110
Module, E-size 102
Module, F-size 102
Module, F-size, installation
in NEMA 4/4X 46
Modules
installation 101
X- 140
Y- 148, 149, 151
Z- 140
Monitors
single and multi-head displays (70 Series) 372
Mounting
1x8 mounting structure 149, 213, 214, 346, 347
FE 4 16
FE 8 11
floor mounting procedure (FE8) 12, 25
IE16 or IE32 8
pipe 17, 18
wall mounting procedure (FE8) 14, 27
workstation displays 59
workstation input devices 60
Mounting structure bus 92
Mounting structures 54
Mouse
how to connect 424
WP30 440
Mover utility for multi-head video cards 375
Multi-head displays (70 Series) 372
Multiple Industrial Enclosures 5, 69, 210, 241
Multi-screen common link (WP30) 442
N
Nodebus
10BaseT interface module 501, 505, 508
10BaseT interface module (DNBT) 505, 507
adapter box 217
cabling 191
656
dual 10BaseT interface 505, 507

dual 10BaseT interface module 103, 451, 503, 504
dual interface extender module 103, 451
dual interface module 103, 451
interface module 486, 490, 491, 492, 493, 494, 495, 497, 498, 499, 500, 574
local 209, 210, 211, 212, 213, 215, 216
terminator installation 216
Nodebus extension
cabling 209
Nonincendive
circuits 242
wires 239
O
On-board video function (70 Series) 372
Operating parameters
B/W dot-matrix 80 445
Color PostScript printer 444, 446
Operational checks
50 Series system 584
Series 20 and 30 system 585
Server 70 and 70 Series system 584
Over-temperature sensor 29, 584
wiring 584
P
P0900DB terminator 187
P0970VB configuration selector 429, 430, 431, 432, 434, 457, 460, 465
assembly kit 472
installation 472
switch pinout 471
switch settings 468
switch settings and cable conversion tables 467
P-adapter 169
removing bezel 170
storage device, accessing jumpers 170
Panel Display and A/M Station Fieldbus
cabling 557
Panel Display Station 62, 63, 64, 87, 553, 557, 558
mounting 62
PC-FB card
jumper settings 359
previous 70 Series versions 632
PCI card
70 Series 351
657
for Model 51, Style D and E 391

Peripheral cable routing 347
within 1x8 mounting structure 346
within enclosures 343
within floor-mounted Field Enclosure 8 344
within IE16 and IE32 343
within wall-mounted Field Enclosure 8 345
Peripheral devices
installation 339
installation procedures
AP20 429
AP50/51, WP50/51, AW50/51 383
AW70, Style A and B, WP70, Style A 348
Server 70 347
operating parameter settings 444
Pipe mounting 17, 18
Plug connector block
field connections to 236
Plug Connector TCA
installation 233
Pointing device
WP30 440
Pointing device, DuraPoint
AP50/51/AW5051 342
Power checks, system 2
Power connections 65
125 V dc 85
1x12 FBM mounting structure 86
1x8, 1x8 FBM 82
24 V dc 85
ac to 1x8, 1x8 FBM 84
and earth connections 65
floor-mounted 74
wall-mounted 76
IEMFA and IEMFR 81
Industrial Enclosure 16 66
Industrial Enclosure 32 69
Metal FE8 Enclosures 81
metal industrial enclosures 81
Panel Display Station 87
peripheral devices 86
Power distribution requirements for enclosures 65
Power transfer switch 91
Power-up procedures 579
Preinstallation 1
658
Pre-power switch-on checks 579

Previous version
PentiumPro 200 620
Printer installation
50 Series 59, 394
70 Series 362, 380
previous versions (all) 629
Processor, C-size, installation
in MIC 109
in MIW 109
in MMS or 2xMMS 110
in NEMA 4/4X 46, 110
Processor, E-size, installation
in metal enclosure 22
in MIC 109
in MIW 109
in MMS or 2xMMS 110
in NEMA 4/4X 46, 110
Processor, F-size, installation
in MIC 109
in MIW 109
in MMS or 2xMMS 110
R
Rear-mounted fault-tolerant module connector
installation 141
Redundant I/O (FBM05) 258
Redundant INI gateways 484
Remote extension 209, 211, 213, 214, 218, 220, 221
Remote Fieldbus configuration 144
Remote Fieldbus extension 191
Remote Nodebus
extender module 210, 221, 222
Remote Nodebus extension 210, 218
Resistors, in-line with FBM01/04/05 244
Ring lug connector 223
Routing 77
RS-232 cabling pinout 486
S
SBus card (50 Series) 388
SBus card slot usage 388
SCSI addresses 166
50 Series 157
SCSI bus termination (AP20-based) 187
SCSI terminator module (P0900DB) 187
SCSI-II terminator 187
659
Second video card

wiring 418
Sensor, over-temperature 29, 584
Separately mounted panel display installation 64
Serial-to-parallel converter 341
Server 70
workstation peripheral installation procedures 347
ServicePack 3 355, 615, 626
Setting keyboard address 425
Shipping
unloading 1
unpacking 1
Side door handle (FE 8) 16
Signal and power cabling
routing 77, 215, 240, 343, 344, 345
Single head displays (70 Series) 372
Single Station Micro Controller, connection to 561
Sound function for 70 Series workstations 366
Speakers for 70 Series workstations 366
SPEC200 191
SPECTRUM
database processor 480
interface processor 479
master gateway cabling 479
slave gateway 102, 451, 477, 479
slave gateway cabling 477
SPECTRUM Control Integrator 191
SQE Eliminator installation (for DNBI) 487
SSB terminator 216
Status
connections to external monitoring 97
connections to Fieldbus Module 98
tap cabling 93
Storage devices
accessing jumpers 170
address setting 157, 166
AP20 169, 178, 182, 188
AP50/51 and AW50/51 157, 159
cabling 182
installation and cabling 155, 159, 167
types and description 155
WP50/51 166, 167
Switch, 50 series ac power transfer 91
Switches and termination resistor packs (in modular 150 MB streaming tape drive) 171
System elements
drop 546
trunk cable 544
System module installation 101
System operational checks 584
System power checks 2
660
System power configurations

Battery backup 66
System power switch-on 580
T
Terminating SCSI Bus 187
Termination Cable Assembly (TCA)
installation into FE4 228
terminator for Nodebus 216
Token ring interface 389, 390, 542
Touchscreen cabling 423, 424
Trackball
how to connect 424
WP30 440
Transmitter, intelligent 331
Trunk cable 544
Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface Plus Ultra Wide SCSI PCI card 537, 538
Twisted-Pair 10/100 Mbps Ethernet Interface with MII Connector PCI card 537, 538
U
Unloading 1
Unpacking procedure 1
UPA Graphics card
for Model 51, Style E 391
V
Video card
70 Series dual/quad-head display 372
Colorgraphic dual-/quad-head 352, 353, 354
installation procedures (Model 51, Style E processor) 391
Voltage requirements for enclosures 66
Voltage selector switch
70 Series workstations 350
Vortex cooler
hardened enclosure 31, 34, 53
VT100 compatible terminal
connecting to AP50/51 403
connecting to CP10 or AP20 433
exit button 447
placement and mounting 59
W
Wall mounting procedure
FE4 18
661
FE8 14
Windows on I/A Series 389, 390, 391
Wiring
marshalling cabinet 242
over-temperature sensor 584
Workstation display
part numbers (for northern and southern hemispheres) 342
placement and mounting 59
Workstation Processor Series 70
Style A, see WP70, Style A 348, 592
Workstation Processor Server 70 593
Workstations
card slot positions 387
AP51A, AW51A, or WP51A 384
AP51B, AW51B, or WP51B 385
AP51B1, AW51B1, or WP51B1 386
AP51D, AW51D, or WP51D 387
AP51E, AW51E, or WP51E 387
AW51C 385
AW70, Style A 352, 355
current version
GX1 (P99*S) 598
GX1 (P99*T) 598
previous version
GX1 (P99*P) 598
GX1 (P99*Q) 598
GX1 (P99*R) 598
GXa 233 617, 619
P166 601, 603
AW70, Style B 353, 356, 620
current version
GX1 (P97*L) 598
previous version
Enterprise 300 627
GX1 (P97*H) 598
GX1 (P97*J) 598
GX1 (P97*K) 598
GXa 300 629
PentiumPro 200 621
WP70, Style A 353, 356
current version
GX1 (P98*Q) 598
GX1 (P98*R) 598
previous version
662
GX1 (P98*M) 598

GX1 (P98*N) 598
GX1 (P98*P) 598
GXa 233 618, 619
P166 602, 603
X Terminal 386
peripheral installation procedures, 70 Series 348
peripheral installation procedures, Server 70 347
voltage selector switch, 70 Series 350
WP30
connecting keyboards 441
connecting mouse, trackball, pointing device 440
keyboard cable 441
multi-screen common link 442
WP70, Style A
current version
GX1 (P99*S) 598
GX1 (P99*T) 598
previous version
Enterprise 233 615
Enterprise 300 626
GX1 (P99*P) 598
GX1 (P99*R) 598
GXa 233 619
GXa 300 629
P166 603
current version
GX1 (P98*Q) 598
GX1 (P98*R) 598
previous version
GX1 (P98*M) 598
GX1 (P98*N) 598
GX1 (P98*P) 598
GXa 233 618
P166 602, 603
DigiBoard 361
systems without 362
installation 366
PC-FB card 359
663

peripherals 339
sound 366
X
X- and Z-Modules
X Terminal 383
connection to processor 533
Y
Y-adapter 148, 149, 151
installation 148
33 Commercial Street
Foxboro, Massachusetts 02035-2099
United States of America
www.foxboro.com
Inside U.S.: 1-866-PHON-IPS (1-866-746-6477)
Outside U.S.: 1-508-549-2424 or contact your local Foxboro representative.
Facsimile: 1-508-549-4999
Printed in U.S.A. 1002

B0193ac U

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

B0193ac U

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

B0193AC

Fan Assembly (vented enclosures)

Filter DIN Rail

Copyright 1990-2002 Invensys Systems, Inc.

2. Equipment Mounting Procedures ..................................................................................... 3

Obtaining Tools and Parts ................................................................................................. 32

Workstation Input Devices, Placement and Mounting ............................................................ 60

3. Power and Earth (Ground) Connections ......................................................................... 65

4. System Module/Processor Installation........................................................................... 101

50 Series and 70 Series Modules/Processors in a Modular Industrial Console ................... 109

5. Data Storage Device Installation and Cabling ............................................................... 155

6. Fieldbus and Nodebus Cabling...................................................................................... 191

7. Termination Cable Assembly (TCA) Installation .......................................................... 223

8. Field Connections ......................................................................................................... 239

FBM08/FBM13 Field Connections ...................................................................................... 266

9. Peripheral Device Installation........................................................................................ 339

Interface Card Installation Overview ................................................................................ 351

Mouse, Trackball, or Pointing Device, WP50/51 or AW50/51 Application ..................... 424

10. System Communication Devices Cabling .................................................................... 451

P0970VB Configuration Selector Assembly Kit ................................................................ 472

Panel Display and Auto/Manual Station Interface Cabling ................................................... 553

11. Initial Power-Up Procedures ....................................................................................... 579

Appendix A. Installation Checklist .................................................................................... 587

Appendix B. SCSI Bus Configuration Guide..................................................................... 589

Appendix C. Installation Instructions for Noncurrent 70 Series or Server 70 Workstations 591

WP70, Style A Hardware Parameters (P166) .................................................................... 602

Index .................................................................................................................................. 637

2-44. Placing 50 Series Model 51, Style E Processor or 70 Series Processor

5-36. Data Storage Device Overview, AP20 ....................................................................... 189

8-27. 0 to 20 mA Input Circuit (FBM04) .......................................................................... 257

8-71. FBM17A-D Functional Connection Diagram .......................................................... 280

8-113. FBM26C/27C (Contact Sensing with External Power)

8-158. FBM44 Plug Connection Block Field Connections .................................................. 325

9-30. AW51C Processor Rear Panel ................................................................................... 385

9-62. Remote Connection of 21-Inch Tabletop Display and Alphanumeric Keyboard

10-77. Typical Combined AUI/ThinNet Cabling ................................................................ 532

10-115.HTG IF Cabling with Non-Redundant Fieldbus ...................................................... 563

10-5. Modicon Communications Cables ............................................................................ 469

Hazardous Location Precautions (CSA Requirements)

Where replacement of a component could ignite the explosive atmosphere:

I/A Series AW51E Processor Model

Style/Rev.: BC Manufacturing Style

Unpacking Hard Disk Drive

1. Protect the drive from harsh shocks at any time.

System Power Checks

Industrial Enclosures 16 and 32

Figure 2-1. Industrial Enclosure 16, Mounting Structure Area

Figure 2-2. Industrial Enclosure 32, Mounting Structure Areas

Industrial Enclosures 16 and 32, Cable Entry Information

Conduit Entry (on either or both sides)

Figure 2-3. Industrial Enclosure 16 or 32 Vented Type, Conduit Entry Points

Figure 2-4. Industrial Enclosure 16 or 32 Sealed Type, Conduit Entry Points

Industrial Enclosure 32, Optional Bridge Structure Assembly

Figure 2-5. Optional Bridge Structure, Mounting Details

Top Horizontal Ridge

Figure 2-6. Optional Bridge Structure, Cover Panel Mounting

Industrial Enclosure 16 or 32, Mounting Procedure

12-32 Screw with

Threaded studs attach to

Enclosure Base * Or conduit enclosure plate.

Gasket Enclosure Plate*

Field Enclosure 8, Mounting